JP6598935B1 - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a gaming machine in which a rear surface side is brought into a new mode which is not present. In a gaming machine that displays a variation of a symbol based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition and gives a player a profit based on the result of the variation display of the symbol, a predetermined gaming area is formed. A game board, a light-emitting unit that is provided on the game board and illuminates a predetermined decorative part that is visible from the front side of the gaming machine, a state detection unit that detects the state of the gaming machine, and a detection result of the state detection unit Based on the light emission control means for changing the light emission mode of the light emitting unit, and a translucent part provided on the rear bulge part bulging rearward of the gaming machine, the translucent part emits light from the light emitting part. Is provided so as to transmit light emitted from the light emitting unit, and the aspect of the light emitting unit corresponding to the detection result of the state detecting unit can be recognized from the rear side of the gaming machine through the light transmitting unit. I made it. [Selection] FIG. 263

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  Conventional gaming machines are generally installed in island facilities provided in game halls. Specifically, a plurality of gaming machines are arranged in a row on one side of the island facilities. It is known that a plurality of gaming machines are installed in a row on both sides of the island facility (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-147545 A

  However, the conventional gaming machine is not devised on the back side, and the circumstances of the gaming machine installed on the island facility are not taken into consideration.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a situation, The place made into the objective is to provide the game machine which made the back side the new aspect which is not in the past.

In order to achieve the above object, in the invention according to claim 1,
In a gaming machine that performs a variation display of a symbol based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and gives a profit to a player based on a result of the variation display of the symbol.
A game board on which a predetermined game area is formed;
A light-emitting unit that is provided on the game board and illuminates and decorates a predetermined decorative unit that is visible from the front side of the gaming machine;
A separate light emitting unit different from the light emitting unit;
A state detector for detecting the state of the gaming machine;
A light emission controller for controlling light emission mode and light emission mode of the another light emitting portion of the front Symbol emitting portion,
A light amount adjusting means capable of adjusting the light amount based on a predetermined light amount adjusting operation;
A translucent portion provided in a rear bulge portion that bulges behind the gaming machine,
The translucent part is provided so as to transmit light emitted from the light emitting part when the light emitting part emits light,
The light emitting unit is capable of changing the amount of light based on the light amount adjustment operation in a normal state, and in a period in which the state of the gaming machine is determined to be abnormal by the detection result of the state detecting unit, It is impossible to change the amount of light based on the light amount adjustment operation.
The separate light emitting unit cannot change the light amount based on the light amount adjustment operation regardless of whether or not the state of the gaming machine is determined to be an abnormal state based on the detection result of the state detecting unit,
The light emission control means changes the light emission mode of the light emitting unit when the state of the gaming machine is determined to be an abnormal state based on the detection result of the state detecting unit,
By transmitting light emitted from the light emitting unit of the light emitting unit and the separate light emitting unit from the light transmitting unit, it is determined whether the gaming machine is in a normal state or an abnormal state. It can be recognized from the rear side .

  As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the rear surface is in a new mode that is not present in the past.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right when the press operation part of a production | presentation operation unit is a raise position. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled each of the outer-frame left assembly and outer-frame right assembly of an outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame, and was seen from the front. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the hinge assembly on the outer frame of an outer frame, and was seen from front upper, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at (a) from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit from the back. (A) is a disassembled perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back. It is a front view of a foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the handle unit in a door frame and was seen from the front, (b) was the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle unit and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish base unit in a dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in a plate unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in a dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the top view which looked at the production | presentation operation unit in a plate unit from the advancing / retreating direction of the production | production operation part button unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled for each main member. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring of the production operation unit from the upper front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring from the lower front. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation ring and was seen from the upper front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation ring and was seen from the lower front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rotational drive unit of the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rotational drive unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotational drive unit and was seen from the front right. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotational drive unit and was seen from the left front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation button unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit as seen from the front and bottom. (A) is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a press operation part is a lowered position, (b) It is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a push operation part is a raise position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between an effect operation ring and a rotation drive unit in the left view of an effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between an effect operation ring and an effect operation ring decoration board in the top view which looked at the effect operation unit from the pressing direction of the press operation part. (A) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation part is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation part of the pressing operation part. It is a front view of a tray unit when pressing is performed. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back, (c) is the state which removed the top lower cover It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame shown with each decoration board. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is an expansion perspective view which shows the front lower left corner in a main body frame, (b) is an expansion perspective view which shows the front lower left corner of a main body frame when a door frame is opened with respect to a main body frame. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball launcher in a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball launcher from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit of a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit in a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from the front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from the back. FIG. 6 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade. (A) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a sectional view taken along line AA in (a). . It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full sphere path | route unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from back lower. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from the back. It is expanded side surface sectional drawing which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine cut | disconnected in the left-right direction center. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit from back. (A) is a top view of a main body frame, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows an upper part in the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from back. (A) is the perspective view seen from the front upper direction in the state which assembled the tank rail etc. to the ball tank, (b) is the perspective view which looked at (a) from the lower front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled FIG. 101 (a) and was seen from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area | region where the game ball overflowed from the ball tank in a main body frame upper part distribute | circulates. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in a main body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the detour path in the main body frame upper part. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of a tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the back on the hinge side. It is a front view of the game board which made the front structural member, the game panel, the front unit, etc. opaque in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 107 from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 107 from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from back. It is a front view of the game board in a state where the front structural member, the game panel, the front unit and the like are made transparent. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main member and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by CC line in FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of a game board showing a game area in which a game ball circulates by cutting a front unit parallel to the surface of the game panel and an obstacle nail. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front structural member and game panel in a game board from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the front structural member and the game panel from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the starting port unit and side unit in a front unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the starting port unit and side unit in a front unit from the back, (c) is It is a left view of a starting port unit, (d) is a left view of a side unit. It is explanatory drawing which compared the inclination of the front surface of a general winning opening, and the inclination of the door member of the variable winning opening in the open state. It is an enlarged front view which shows the part of the start port unit and side unit in a game board. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 1st attacker unit in a front unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the 1st attacker unit in a front unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 1st attacker unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 1st attacker unit and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the 1st big winning opening door in a 1st attacker unit from the left side. It is explanatory drawing which shows the channel | path of the game ball in a 1st attacker unit in a cross section. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the center role of a front unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the center role of a front unit from the back. It is a front view of a center character. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd attacker unit, side right middle unit, and gate member in a front unit from the front, (b) is the 2nd attacker unit, side right middle unit, and gate member in a front unit. It is the perspective view which looked at from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the channel | path of the game ball in a 2nd attacker unit and a side right middle unit in a cross section. FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram in which a right portion in the game area is enlarged in FIG. 115. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in a game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in a game board from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structure, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine which expands and shows the upper left corner of a game board in the state where the door frame was made transparent. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back guidance unit in a back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back guidance unit in a back unit from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back back direction production unit in a back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back back direction production unit in a back unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back production unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back production unit and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable structure of a back direction production | presentation unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a back back effect unit. It is a front view which shows a back back movable decoration body with a back back decoration board | substrate. (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the DD line in FIG. 142, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the EE line in FIG. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back back movable decoration body from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back back movable decoration body from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back movable decoration body and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back movable decoration body and was seen from back. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of back back movable decoration body. It is explanatory drawing which shows a light guide radiation plate and a back back decoration board with a broken line in the front view of FIG. (A) is a front view which shows a part of decorative body in a back movable movable decorative body, (b) is a front view which shows a part of decorative sheet in the same site | part as the decorative body of (a), (c ) Is a front view showing a part of the light guide radiation plate and the back decorative substrate at the same site as the decorative body of FIG. It is an expanded sectional view which expands and shows the upper part of Fig.143 (a). It is an exploded view which decomposes | disassembles and shows sectional drawing of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which expands a part of front of a back movable movable body, and shows the relationship between the decoration by a decoration body and a decoration sheet, a light guide radiation plate, and a back back decoration board. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the light guide radiation plate and back back decoration board in the site | part of 1st LED in a cross section, (b) has 2nd LED located on the optical axis of 1st LED. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the light guide radiation plate in the site | part which is located from the front, (c) is LED housing part of the light guide radiation plate with respect to the 2nd decoration part in a decoration body and a decoration sheet, and 1st LED of a back back decoration board | substrate It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of arrangement | positioning from the front. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of back back decoration board | substrate with the copper foil of a circuit pattern. (A) is a front view of a back back decoration board | substrate, (b) is a rear view of a back back decoration board | substrate. (A) is an expanded sectional view which shows a part of decorative body in a back back movable decorative body, (b) is an expanded cross section which shows a part of decorative body with the metal decoration part of a form different from (a). It is a figure, (c) is an expanded sectional view which shows a part of decoration body which has the metal decoration part of a form further different from (a) and (b). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the back back movable decorative body of 2nd embodiment different from the back back movable decorative body of FIG. 142, (b) is a back back movable decorative body of 3rd embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows this structure in a cross section, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a back back movable decoration body of 4th embodiment in a cross section. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit in a back unit from the front, (b) looked at the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit in a back unit from back. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back bottom left production unit and the back bottom right production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower left production | presentation unit and the back lower right production | presentation unit, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable structure of a back lower left production | presentation unit and a back lower right production | presentation unit from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production unit under back in the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production unit under back in the back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back under middle raising / lowering mechanism of the back under middle production | generation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back under middle raising / lowering mechanism of the back under middle production | generation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower middle decoration body unit of the back lower middle production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower middle decoration body unit of the back lower middle production | generation unit, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows raising / lowering of the back lower middle decoration body unit by the back lower middle raising / lowering mechanism in a back lower middle production | presentation unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows from the front the structure concerning rotation of a back lower middle rotation decoration body of a back lower middle decoration body unit in a back lower middle effect production unit, (b) is a stop position of a back lower middle rotation decoration body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between each detection sensor with a table | surface. It is explanatory drawing which shows arrangement | positioning of LED of the back lower inside decoration body unit in a back lower inside production | presentation unit from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back upper production unit in the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back upper production unit in the back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back production | presentation unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper production unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back raising / lowering decoration body unit in a back top effect unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back raising / lowering decoration body unit in a back unit, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows from the front the rotation mechanism of the back upper rotation decoration body in a back upper production unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the raising / lowering mechanism of the back raising / lowering decoration body unit in a back production | presentation unit from the front, (b) is the back raising / lowering decoration in the state which moved the back raising / lowering decoration body unit to the appearance position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the raising / lowering mechanism of a body unit, and the rotation mechanism of a back upper back rotation decoration body from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows a decoration board | substrate from the front in the state which moved the back raising / lowering decoration body unit to the appearance position in a back upper effect unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back back left production unit in a back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back back left production unit in a back unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back left effect unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back left production | presentation unit for every main member, and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back left decoration body unit of the back back left production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back left decoration body unit of the back back left production | presentation unit, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable mechanism of a back back left production | presentation unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the back back left decoration body unit in a back back left production | presentation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back back right performance unit in a back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back back right performance unit in a back unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back right performance unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back right performance unit for every main member, and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back right decoration body unit of the back back right production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back right decoration body unit of the back back right production | presentation unit, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable mechanism of a back back right effect unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the back back right decoration body unit in a back back right effect unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back front left production unit in a back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back front left production unit in a back unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled one back front left decoration body unit in the back front left production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled one back front left decoration body unit in the back front left production | presentation unit, and was seen from back. (A) is a front view which shows a shutter group in a closed state in a back front left production unit, (b) is a front view which shows a shutter group in an open state in a back front left production unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back front right production unit in the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back front right production unit in the back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled one back front right decoration body unit in the back front right production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled one back front right decoration body unit in the back front right production unit, and was seen from back. (A) is a front view which shows a shutter group in a closed state in a back front right production unit, (b) is a front view which shows a shutter group in an open state in a back front right production unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back and back movable decorative body of the back back effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the lower back middle rotating decorative body of the lower back middle production unit is moved from the lowered position to the raised position. The back and rear rotating decorative body of the back rear direction rendering unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back rear left rotating decorative body of the back rear left rendering unit is moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and the back of the back rear right rendering unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows a back right rotation decoration object in the state where it moved from the retreat position to the 1st appearance position, respectively. The back rear left rotating decorative body of the back rear left rendering unit has been moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position, and the back rear right rotating decorative body of the back rear right rendering unit has been moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown by. It is a front view of the game board showing the shutter unit of the back front left effect unit and the shutter unit of the back front right effect unit from the closed state to the open state, respectively. The back and rear movable decorative body of the back rear stage production unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back rear rear rotation decoration body of the back rear stage production unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, and the back rear left rotation decoration body of the back rear left production unit. From the retraction position to the first appearance position, the back rear right rotation decoration body of the back rear right production unit from the retraction position to the first appearance position, and the lower back middle rotation decoration body of the back lower middle production unit from the lowering position. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state moved to each position. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a right view of the pachinko machine shown with a self-supporting auxiliary member. It is the front perspective view (a) of the drawer connector mounted in the relay substrate provided in a main body frame, and is a rear perspective view (b). DIP type small connector which is a figure (a)-(c) which prevents solder bridge of each terminal of a body frame side drawer connector (concave type), and is electrically connected with a body frame side drawer connector (concave type) It is a figure (d)-(f) which prevents solder bridge of each terminal of these. It is a figure (a) which shows the modification of Drawing 209 (c), and the figure (b) which shows the modification of Drawing 209 (f). It is a figure which shows the modification which forms the terminal and solder escape pattern of the last stage spaced apart only predetermined distance. It is the schematic (a) of the over resist given to each terminal of a main body frame side drawer connector (concave type), and is the schematic (b) of the cross section of the XX line in (a). It is the schematic (a) of the copper foil surface at the surface (mounting surface) side of the board | substrate with which a surface mounting type connector is mounted, and is the schematic (b) of the surface (mounting surface) of a board | substrate. FIG. 213 is a continuation view of FIG. 213, and is an enlarged view of part A of FIG. 213 (b), and is a schematic diagram (c) of an over resist applied to a housing fixing land of a surface mount type connector; It is the schematic (d) of the cross section of a YY line. It is the schematic (a) of the copper foil surface at the surface (mounting surface) side of the board | substrate with which the surface mounting type connector in a modification is mounted, and is the schematic diagram (b) of the surface (mounting surface) of a board | substrate. FIG. 215 is a continuation of FIG. 215, and is an enlarged view of part B of FIG. 215 (b), and is a schematic diagram (c) of the over resist applied to the housing fixing land of the surface mount type connector. It is the schematic (d) of the cross section of a ZZ line. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit. It is a rear exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit. It is a front view of a peripheral control unit. It is a figure which shows the shape of the solid ground in the part which the front of the disconnection prevention rib part formed in a base body contact | abutted with the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board, and the copper foil of the back surface (solder surface) of a peripheral control board It is the schematic (a) of a surface, and is the schematic (b) of the back surface (solder surface) of a periphery control board. It is a figure which shows the shape of the resist with respect to the land in flowing a periphery control board | substrate to a solder tank. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a back surface exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a front view of the periphery control unit concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the XX line of FIG. 224 which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is A arrow line view of FIG. 224 which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a back exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is A arrow line view of FIG. 224 which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. Taking out the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control substrate that makes good contact between the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control substrate and the conductive elastic member according to the third embodiment It is a figure which shows a method, the schematic of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) of a peripheral control board (exposed example (a)), the schematic diagram of the back surface (solder side) of a peripheral control board (exposed example (b)) Schematic of the copper foil surface on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board (example in which a plurality of through holes having lands are arranged (c)), Schematic diagram of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board (through having lands) This is an example (d)) in which a plurality of holes are arranged. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit concerning a 4th embodiment. It is a back surface exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit concerning a 4th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the attachment procedure of the periphery control board etc. which concern on 4th Embodiment. It is the figure (a) which shows the land formed around the through-hole by the side (mounting surface) side, such as a periphery control board concerning a 4th embodiment, and a figure (b) showing a foil extraction field. The figure which shows the land formed in the circumference | surroundings of the through-hole on the back surface (solder surface) side of the periphery control board etc. which concern on 4th Embodiment, The figure which shows a land and a screwing designation | designated symbol (b), Foil removal area | region FIG. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit concerning a 5th embodiment. It is a back surface exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit concerning a 5th embodiment. The figure (a) which shows a part of back perspective view of the periphery control unit which concerns on 5th Embodiment, The part of base body which comprises a periphery control unit so that the state by which the electroconductive elastic member was inserted can be understood It is a figure (b) which shows a part of back perspective view of the periphery control unit cut off by the CL line in (a). 238 is a rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit, partly cut away from the peripheral control unit so that the state where the conductive elastic member is pressed and deformed by being pressed against the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 can be continued from FIG. It is a figure (c) which shows a part. It is the front partial enlarged view of the cover body which comprises the peripheral control unit which has an opening part which can insert and contact the front-end | tip part of the contact probe which concerns on 5th Embodiment. Taking out the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) side of the specific substrate that makes good contact between the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) side of the specific substrate and the conductive elastic member according to the fifth embodiment It is a figure which shows a method, the schematic of the copper foil surface (exposed example (a)) of the back surface (solder side) of a specific board | substrate, the schematic diagram (exposed example (b)) of the back surface (solder side) of a specific board | substrate Schematic of the copper foil surface on the back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate (example in which a plurality of through holes having lands are arranged (c)), Schematic diagram of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate (through having lands) This is an example (d)) in which a plurality of holes are arranged. It is a front perspective view of a flexible flat cable. It is a figure (a) which shows the state where the flexible flat cable was electrically connected with the connector on the back side of an effect display device, and the figure which shows the state where the flexible flat cable was electrically connected with the connector of a liquid crystal output board ( b) is a partially enlarged view of the B part shown in (a) and the C part shown in (b), and shows a state in which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to each connector through the notch part. It is a figure (c). It is a figure (a) which shows the state where the flexible flat cable is not electrically connected normally with the connector on the back side of a production display device, and the flexible flat cable is electrically connected normally with the connector of the liquid crystal output board It is a figure (b) which shows no state. It is a figure (a) which shows arrangement of a connector of a relay board, and is a figure (b) which shows a state where a connector of wiring or a harness is normally connected to a connector of a relay board, It is a figure (c) which shows the state where the connector of wiring and harness is not connected normally. 245 is a modified example of FIG. 245, and is a diagram (a) showing the arrangement of the connectors on the relay board and the part arrangement lines, and shows a state in which the wiring and harness connectors are normally connected to the connectors on the relay board. It is a figure (b) and is a figure (c) which shows the state where the connector of wiring or a harness is not connected normally to the connector of a relay substrate. It is the fragmentary perspective view which looked at the game board explaining the area | region which attaches a wiring groove from back (a), and the figure (b) which shows the state with which the wiring groove which concerns on 1st Embodiment was mounted | worn on the back side of the game board. FIG. 247 is a continuation of FIG. 247 and shows a state where the wiring groove according to the second embodiment is mounted on the back side of the game board (c). It is a perspective view showing the state of various wirings when the wiring groove according to the first embodiment is mounted on the back side of the game board and the game board is viewed from behind. It is a perspective view showing the state of various wirings when the wiring groove according to the first embodiment is mounted on the back side of the game board and the game board is viewed from the front. It is a perspective view showing the state of various wirings when the wiring groove according to the second embodiment is mounted on the back side of the game board and the game board is viewed from behind. It is a perspective view showing the state of various wirings when the wiring groove according to the second embodiment is mounted on the back side of the game board and the game board is viewed from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the light emission production unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the light emission production unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the light emission effect unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the light emission effect unit and was seen from back. It is a front view which shows the arrangement | positioning relationship between a LED bare chip and a light-guide plate. It is a front view which shows the diffusion sheet arrange | positioned on the surface of a light-guide plate. It is figure (a) which shows the state in which the flexible flat cable was electrically connected with the connector of LED board, and is the enlarged view of the Z section shown in (a), Comprising: The difference to the connector of LED board of a flexible flat cable It is a figure (b) which shows the state where insertion is normal, and is an enlarged view of Z section shown in (a), and is a figure showing an abnormal state where the insertion of the flexible flat cable to the connector of the LED board is insufficient (C). It is a side view which shows typically the light from the light emission decoration body in a standby position seeing a pachinko machine from the side. It is a side view which shows typically the light from the light emission decoration body in an appearance position seeing a pachinko machine from the side. It is a figure which shows the back back decoration board | substrate provided with the several hole. It is a front view which shows the light emission area | region in the back surface side of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the light emission area | region in the side surface which looked at the game board from the left front. It is a perspective view which shows the light emission area | region in the side surface side which looked at the game board from the left back. It is a figure which shows the opening provided in the back surface side of the effect display apparatus. It is an enlarged schematic diagram which shows a part of cross section cut | disconnected by CC line of Fig.99 (a). It is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the rear. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position as viewed from the right front. is there. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG. 12 shows the pachinko machine as a door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG.

  A pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be opened and closed, and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side, and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 90) is driven.

  The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame whose shape in front view extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, and a lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The lower frame hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as viewed from the front.

  Further, the door frame 3 is configured such that when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is inverted in phase and radiated forward, so that the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

  The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is to be visibly viewed from the front side, stores the game balls B to be shot into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 182 operated by the player for driving the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and when the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates the effect operation unit 301. Thus, the player can participate in the production, and in addition to the game by the game ball B, the player can also be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for attaching the door frame 3 so that the door frame 3 can be opened and closed, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500, and the game A ball launcher 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550 A payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 having a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633, and a game board attached to the main body frame base 501 A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of, and includes an outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, a.

  The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or uses the game ball B used in the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. In addition, the main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end so as to be opened and closed, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be opened and closed.

  The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a front component member 1000 A plate-like gaming panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side and divides the rear end of the gaming area 5a, a board holder 1200 that is attached to the lower rear side of the gaming panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a periphery disposed on the rear side of the game panel 1100 Control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12) and an effect display device that is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and can display a predetermined effect image 600, and a table unit 2000 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, the. The back unit 3000 includes various effect units capable of performing a movable effect and a light emission effect according to the gaming state.

  In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails N that are in contact with the game balls B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege for the player by accepting or passing the game balls B (For example, a payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) for giving a general winning port 2001, a first starting port 2002, a gate unit 2003, a second starting port 2004, a first major winning port 2005, and a second major winning port 2006 And. The obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. A general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first major winning opening 2005, and a second large winning opening 2006 are provided in the front unit 2000.

  A player can drive a game ball B into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B enters the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting port 2004, the first major winning port 2005, the second major winning port 2006, etc. in the gaming area 5a. It is possible to entertain the player to drive the handle 182 so as to be accepted or passed.

  Further, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 in accordance with the game state that is changed by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, Left production unit 3200, back lower right production unit 3250, back lower middle production unit 3300, back upper production unit 3400, back rear left production unit 3500, back rear right production unit 3600, back front left production unit 3700, back front right production It is possible to entertain the player by performing a light emission effect, a movable effect, or the like by the unit 3800 or the like.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view in which the outer frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) where the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a square frame whose shape in front view extends vertically.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 that connects the upper ends, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, a lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

  In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward by phase inversion.

  In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 so as to be coaxially rotatable by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view in which the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame are disassembled and viewed from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other on the left and right. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 support the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4 so as to be rotatable coaxially with respect to the outer frame 2. It is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that opening and closing is possible.

  First, the outer frame left assembly 10 includes an outer frame left member 11 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 that is attached to the upper right side of the outer frame left member 11. And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

  The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded material of aluminum alloy. The outer frame left member 11 has a concave portion 11a that is flattened to the right in the rear portion of the left and right sides of the front and rear direction, and a right portion from a portion on the right side opposite to the concave portion 11a. A bulging portion 11b that bulges in the direction and a hollow portion 11c that penetrates the bulging portion 11b vertically. The outer frame left member 11 is enhanced in strength and rigidity by the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and weight is reduced by the hollow portion 11c.

  The outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with an outer frame right member 21 of an outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

  The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat upper plate fixing portion 12b extending from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat horizontal lower fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper left connecting member 12 has the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c inserted into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, the horizontal fixing portion 12a brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and the front side Further, by screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in a state where the rear lower fixing portion 12c is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. It is attached to the outer frame left member 11. In addition, the upper left connecting member 12 causes the horizontal fixing portion 12a to abut the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the left notch 30a of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, so that the outer frame upper member 30 is attached.

  The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat plate-like upper and horizontal portion extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixing portion 13b, a flat plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from the rear side portion of the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b, and the right side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b And a flat plate-like contact portion 13d extending short. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower left connecting member 13 abuts the rear surface of the abutting portion 13d on the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and abuts the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. The screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in a state where the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a is aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, It is attached to the frame left member 11. The lower left connecting member 13 causes the horizontal fixing portion 13a to abut on the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41 and allows the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c to be inserted into the notch portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c, thereby being attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

  Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member that is attached to the upper left end of the outer frame right member 21. 22, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower left side lower end of the outer frame right member 21, an upper hook member 24 attached to the upper left side of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. And a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

  The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an aluminum alloy extrusion mold. The outer frame right member 21 has a concave portion 21a that is recessed leftward in a flat shape in a rear portion of the right and left sides of the front and rear direction, and a left portion from a portion on the left side opposite to the concave portion 21a. A bulging portion 21b that bulges in the direction, and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The outer frame right member 21 is increased in strength and rigidity by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

  The outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

  The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat upper plate fixing portion 22b extending from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat horizontal lower fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper right connecting member 22 has the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 22c inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21, the horizontal fixing portion 22a abutted against the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and the front side Further, by screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in a state where the rear lower fixing portion 22c is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The outer frame right member 21 is attached. Further, the upper right connecting member 22 makes the horizontal fixing portion 22a abut on the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch portion 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, thereby being attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

  The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a, and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending backward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, a flat plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion behind the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, and a left side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b A flat plate-like abutting portion 23d extending short in the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower right connecting member 23 abuts the rear surface of the abutting portion 23d on the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right side surface of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The screw is screwed into the upper lateral fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a being in contact with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the lower right connecting member 23 causes the horizontal fixing portion 23a to abut on the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c, thereby being attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

  The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are for hooking an outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 24a. And a flat plate-like hooking piece 24b on which the outer upper frame flange 653 is hooked.

  The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a certain width in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 25a. A flat plate-like latching piece 25b to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted through the hooking piece 25b in the front-rear direction And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other in the left-right direction. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame upper member 30 is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

  The outer frame upper member 30 includes notches 30a that are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically in the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper horizontal fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are respectively attached to the cutout portions 30a at both left and right ends.

  Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes an attachment step portion 30b whose upper surface and front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end. The outer frame hinge assembly 50 described later is attached to the attachment step 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1. It is for decoration.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and an outer frame lower member 41 extending left and right. A box-shaped curtain plate front member 42 that is disposed in front of the member 41, extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41, and is open to the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate front member 42. A box-shaped curtain plate rear member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and that extends to the left and right, and a ball engagement prevention formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. And a mechanism 44.

  The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

  The outer frame lower member 41 includes notches 41a that are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically in the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The left and right cutouts 41a are attached with the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 inserted respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

  Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and includes a recess 41b into which the lower part of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends to the left and right, and extends from the position closer to the rear of the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. By this recess 41b, the volume of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 is made as large as possible.

  The curtain plate front member 42 has a lateral length that is the same as the length of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally-long rectangular parallelepiped box shape whose depth in the front-rear direction is short with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. The curtain plate front member 42 closes the opened rear side by the curtain plate rear member 43, thereby cooperating with the curtain plate rear member 43 to be a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 is provided with a long hole-like opening 42a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends to the left and right in the front surface near the right end.

  The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with the front open. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a curtain plate front member 42 attached to the front surface to form a curtain plate internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the curtain plate front member 42. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a cylindrical connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends in the left and right direction and protrudes upward at the center portion in the horizontal direction on the upper surface and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined so that the upper end is positioned upward as it goes rearward from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

  The connecting cylinder portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is larger than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connection cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a. The enclosure 624 is formed in communication with the internal space of 620a.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is configured such that the game ball B stays at a portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B is placed between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. This is to prevent pinching.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that an outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later is confronted, and a mounting portion A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a, An upright wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placement portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion that protrudes forward from the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d and is inclined so that the upper surface is located upward as it goes rearward. Part 44e.

  The 1st discharge port 44b is formed in the position which corresponds with the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 mentioned later. The 1st discharge port 44b and the 2nd discharge port 44c are formed in the magnitude | size which the game ball B can pass. The first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40 a and are opened on the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  This ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is a case where an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. Intrusion of an unauthorized tool can be prevented by the standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the placement portion 44a. Even if the tip of an unauthorized tool contacts the standing wall 44d and bends upward, it contacts the upper end protruding part 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall 44d and further intrudes. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placement portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped on the placement portion 44a for some reason is Since the rearward movement of the outer frame 2 is prevented by 44d, the game ball B is likely to stay on the placement portion 44a. If the game ball B stays on the mounting portion 44 a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. Therefore, there arises a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

  On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B dropped on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placement portion 44a is transferred to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (rear of the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes the pair of guide members 45 disposed on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides, and the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat grill member 46, and a port member 47 having two cylinders attached to the front of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a across the grill member 46 and extending in the front-rear direction. And a frame-shaped seal member 48 disposed at the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The pair of guide members 45 are configured such that the lower end of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed. The guide member 45 is made of a low friction material having a low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 easy to slide to facilitate opening and closing.

  The grill member 46 is formed of a punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 communicates the curtain plate inner space 40 a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 through the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders that are formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length. The port member 47 resonates and amplifies a bass sound emitted backward (inside the enclosure 624) from the main body frame speaker 622 based on the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Thus, a rich bass can be radiated to the front (player side) of the outer frame 2. That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass-reflex type, and a player can hear a heavy bass.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43 a and the lower end of the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4. Thus, the sound in the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is prevented from leaking between the connection tube portion 43a and the connection portion 621c.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The outer frame hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21A is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front top, and FIG. 21B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be rotatable. It is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. And a mounting screw 53 that attaches the locking member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame.

  The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is a flat plate extending horizontally, and is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30 and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixed portion 51a. A flat front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending vertically from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the front and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion A flat plate-like lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and extending downward from an edge from the left side of the front extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is opened around the front side. And a flat end edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage lateral fixing portion 51d. The outer frame hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame hinge member 51 can rotatably support a body frame hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the body frame hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

  The lock member 52 includes a band-shaped lock body 52a extending in the front-rear direction, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 52c extending obliquely left front and an attachment hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is pivotally attached to the rear side of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by the mounting screw 53.

  When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame hinge member 51, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the end of the outer frame hinge member 51. The edge wall portion 51e extends forward so as to be able to come into contact with a portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52 c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 52 a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall portion 51 e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in the direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the attachment hole 52d. Accordingly, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

  The lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operation piece 52b. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in a direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, whereby the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c Can pass through. Thereby, the hinge pin 512 on the body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the hinge pin 512 on the body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-like upright portion 60b rising upward from a rear side portion of the left side of the horizontal portion 60a from the center in the front-rear direction. An outer frame lower hinge pin 60c projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d that penetrates the horizontal portion 60a vertically and allows only one game ball B to pass therethrough. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a cylindrical shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrower than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to the left position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. In the horizontal portion 60a, the discharge hole 60d is in contact with the central portion in the front-rear direction of the upright portion 60b, and is formed to extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. The discharge hole 60d has substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball engagement prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60 a is mounted on the mounting portion 44 a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Is fixed to the curtain plate rear member 43. Further, the upright portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in front of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60 c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Thus, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be opened and closed.

  Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60 d coincides with the first discharge port 44 b of the ball engagement prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls B that have fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 is gradually narrowed, so that the gap is rolled to the rear side with a wide interval, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 by being discharged from the discharge hole 60d. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay on the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  The door frame 3 is formed in a quadrangle that is substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and extends vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached to the inside of the outer frame 2 via the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed from the front side. It has been. The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is to be visibly viewed from the front side, stores the game balls B to be shot into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 182 operated by the player for driving the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

  The door frame 3 is a quadrangular and frame-like door frame base unit 100 whose front view extends vertically, and is detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and includes a game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that closes the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100 Is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200. Attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit. A frame right side unit 410, and a door frame top unit 450 which is attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100 at the upper side of the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a that is formed in a quadrangular (rectangular) shape whose front view extends vertically, and penetrates forward and backward, and the front right side of the door frame base 101. The handle attachment member 102 attached below, the speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner in the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and the vicinity of the right end in the rear view on the lower part on the rear side of the door frame base 101 The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105. Rear handle relay board 106, door frame main relay board 104 and door frame sub relay board 105 that cover a part of door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side. A handle after the relay board cover 108 for covering a cable cover 109 for covering the distribution cable, and a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle relay board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view of the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and give rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4.

  The ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 one by one. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202, and is delivered from the payout device 580. The game ball B is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

  The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. This is for playing games.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so that the left side of the front view is hinge-rotatable, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is closed so as to be openable and closable. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 has a rectangular and flat door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, a handle mounting member 102 for mounting the handle unit 180 attached to the lower right front surface of the door frame base 101, And a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in rear view in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame main relay in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. A door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in the rear view, and a handle rear relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the lower part on the rear side of the door frame base 101. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A rear handle relay board cover 108 that is attached to the rear side and covers the rear handle relay board 106 from the rear side, and a case that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable. And Burukaba 109, and a.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle relay board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view of the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a handle unit 180 at the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 at the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 at the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

  In addition, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. .

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangular shape) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and is formed in a substantially quadrilateral shape whose inner peripheral shape in the front view extends vertically. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery are respectively close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Thus, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door window 101a penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame base 101 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 101 is formed in the lower right corner of the front view on the front surface, and has a handle mounting seat surface 101b inclined such that the left end side protrudes slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. Between the right side and the right side of the front, and is recessed from the rear to the front. The insertion recess 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 is inserted, and the insertion recess 101c penetrates back and forth. A cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder body 131 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b pass through front and rear on the left side when viewed from the front, and pass forward through the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. And a ball feeding opening 101e to face the surface.

  Also, the door frame base 101 is located on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the ball for the lower dish facing the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 to the front. A passage opening 101f, a bowl passage opening 101g for an upper dish that penetrates forward and backward so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in front view, and faces the through-ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, A glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

  Further, the door frame base 101 includes a plurality of vertically long slits 101i that are formed in the lower left corner of the front view (below the upper plate ball passage opening 101g) and penetrate forward and backward. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. In addition, the plurality of slits 101i are located in the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in front, and the body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the body frame 4 in the rear. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

  Further, the door frame base 101 includes a through-hole 101j penetrating in the front-rear direction below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. The through-hole 101j is inserted through a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side, and passes through the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The handle attachment member 102 is for attaching the handle unit to the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

  The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tube portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward from the rear end of the tube portion 102a in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 102a, A plurality of (three in this embodiment) ridges 102c that protrude into the portion 102a and extend over the entire axial length of the cylindrical portion 102a and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a. And a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a.

  The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 101b in the door frame base 101.

  The cylindrical portion 102 a is formed so that its inner diameter is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 in the handle unit 180. One of the three protrusions 102c is provided on the upper portion of the cylindrical portion 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower portion of the cylindrical portion 102a. These three protrusions 102 c are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 181 c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the cylindrical portion 102a only when the three protrusions 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) can be restricted with respect to the door frame base 101.

  The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the inclined handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 because the axis of the cylinder portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b. The cylinder part 102a is inclined so that the axis of the cylinder part 102a extends to the right front, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a similarly inclined state.

[3-1c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101 i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear end of the cylindrical part of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. Thereby, the sound (sound) radiated (output) from the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101 i of the door frame base 101 and the dish unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211, it is possible to satisfactorily guide to the front (player side) of the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a that holds the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the cylindrical portion. The cable holder 103 a is arranged on the left side of the front view of the door frame relay board cover 107, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 is connected to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board / door frame sub relay board / handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the post-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the post-handle relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and a connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 83). And a part of (see FIG. 84) are connected.

  The door frame sub-relay substrate 105 is formed in an inverted L shape in which a quadrangle extending left and right is combined on the right side of the front of the upper part of the quadrangle extending up and down. The frame main relay board 104 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left in the rear view. The door frame sub relay board 105 includes a handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is for relaying the connection between the window interior decoration part decoration board 413, the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

  The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are configured so that the door frame base relay board 104 and a portion extending vertically from the door frame sub relay board 105 in the state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled are doors. The rear side is covered with the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered with the foul cover unit 150.

  The post-handle relay substrate 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle attachment seat surface 101 b below the ball feed opening 101 e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The post-handle relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear handle relay board 106 is in a state where the rear side is covered by the rear handle relay board cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover, rear relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the post-handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so that the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub-relay board (a part extending in the inverted L shape vertically) It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front and the left in front view opened. When assembled in the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and opened. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the terminal from the left side and connected to these terminals.

  The post-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the post-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and is a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and an opening for passing a wiring cable is formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101 and give the door frame base unit 100 rigidity. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 has left and right left and right reinforcing frames 111 and 112 that are spaced apart from each other and are connected to the left and right reinforcing frames 111 and 112. An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 attached to the upper end position from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and a right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 A cylinder mounting frame 115 that connects the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of the cylinder mounting frame 115 that are mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 so as to be spaced apart from each other vertically. The door frame collar 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 is hooked. The hook member 116 is provided.

  The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically with substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, these insertion holes are inserted through the ends of the door frame collars 652 of the locking unit 650. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction and extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right widths of the door frame base 101.

  The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends from side to side with a width that is wider in the vertical direction than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a cutout portion 114a that is squarely cut downward from the upper end near the left end, and a through portion 114b that penetrates forward and backward near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position where the upper frame ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101 and the through portion 114b coincide with the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

  The cylinder mounting frame 115 is spaced apart from the left and right, and a pair of rear piece portions formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending vertically in a front view and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. A pair of side piece portions extending in a flat plate shape from the side to the front side and a flat plate-like front piece portion for connecting the sides of the front ends of the pair of front extension portions are provided. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape whose shape in plan view protrudes forward. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

  The hook member 116 is attached to a portion of the insertion hole penetrating forward and backward on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112. These hook members 116 are hooked with door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650.

  The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hook member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are formed by stamping a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

  In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is provided. The door frame base 101 is assembled so as to be positioned below the door window 101a.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the upper plate ball passing port 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. In addition, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1 g. Hinge assembly on door frame]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be capable of hinge rotation in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is attached to the hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, the door frame hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and the door frame hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward are provided.

  The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-like mounting piece 121a having a rectangular shape in front view, and a flat plate-like protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 has an attachment piece 121 a attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is obtained by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the hinge pin 122 on the door frame is assembled to the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below in the vicinity of the front ends of the pair of protruding pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is on the upper side. The part that extends upward from the protruding piece 121b and that extends horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame is rotatably inserted into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the upper hinge main body 511 in the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

  The eaves member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion between the pair of protruding pieces 121b in the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and covers a portion extending vertically between the upper hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 biases the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward through the flange member 123.

  The door frame hinge assembly 120 is such that the door frame hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion at the lower end of the door frame hinge pin 122 is the lower protruding piece. By contacting the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b.

  When the part of the door frame hinge pin 120 that extends horizontally at the lower end of the door frame hinge assembly 120 is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved as a whole. The upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame hinge assembly 120 can insert the upper end of the door frame hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame hinge member 510 from below or pull it downward. it can. As a result, the upper left end of the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the upper end of the upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the main body frame hinge member 510. It can be supported as possible.

  Further, in the door frame hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame hinge pin 122 is positioned coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. Thereby, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated in a favorable state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1h. Hinge member under door frame]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be capable of hinge rotation in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a rectangular flat plate-like mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-like protruding piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a protruding piece. And a door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b.

  The attachment piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and the outer periphery of the lower end is tapered chamfered. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is coaxial with the portion of the protruding piece 125b that extends vertically above the door frame hinge pin 122 of the door frame hinge assembly 120 in the assembled state in the door frame base unit 100. Installed.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so as to be able to rotate by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. Can do.

[3-1i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and cooperates with a locking unit 650 to be described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing locking. The cylinder lock 130 includes a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending in the front-rear direction, a key hole 132 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a rear side of the cylinder body 131. And a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

  The cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 has a rear end attached to the front piece through the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115 from behind. The rotation transmitting member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear side (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear side), and moves from the rear end to the front side at a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of notches cut out. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 are inserted into the pair of notches to rotate. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

  When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder main body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion port 252 h of the dish unit main body 252 in the dish unit 200 (see FIG. 22 and the like).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 34 and FIG. FIG. 34A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the front of the ball feeding unit, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from behind. FIG. 35A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 35B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and games stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be extracted to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball extraction button 222.

  The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the tray unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with the door opened, and a game ball that has entered the front entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction in a box shape with the front end closed and the rear end of the front cover 141 closed. A rear cover 142 having a hitting ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, and a front cover that is pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141. The ball removal member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b on the rear side of the 141, and the game balls B on the partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 one by one in the rear cover 14 , The ball feeding member 144 supported so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. A ball feeding solenoid 145.

  As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in front view, and a ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144.

  The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 includes an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball pulling port 141b in a front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball pulling member 143 described later extends from 141c to the front. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl ball is assembled. And it is formed so that the site | part opened to the back of the upstream end side of the ball extraction guide path 241c may be closed from the rear side.

  The ball pulling member 143 has a partition portion 143a that divides the entrance 141a and the ball discharge port 141b below the entrance 141a and has an upper surface that becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144, and a partition 143a Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144, bends in the shape of a letter from the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction A pivot rod 143b that is pivotally supported by the pivot rod 143b, a rod-shaped actuation rod 143c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the pivot rod 143b, and a pivot rod 143b below the actuation rod 143c. A weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the opposite side of the partition portion 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34A). The operating rod 143c is connected to the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper dish ball removal slider 242 that moves downward by pressing the upper dish ball removal button 222 of the dish unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. Abut the top surface.

  The ball feeding member 144 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 144a and a rear portion of the blocking portion 144a in plan view with the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction facing the entrance 141a and the partitioning portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143. A sphere holding portion 144b that is recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the rotating shaft core side, and a rod-shaped flange portion 144c that extends downward from the rear end of the sphere holding portion 144b are provided. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° with the rotation axis as the center. In addition, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size that can hold one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotation axis when the collar 144c arranged at a position eccentric from the rotation axis is moved in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145.

  The ball feeding member 144 includes a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and at the same time the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding portion 144b of the partition portion 143a. It rotates between the holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 and enters the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (hit ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a and stays on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the side of the flange 144c closes the hitting ball supply port 142a. Thus, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

  The ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip is swung in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145 and a tip which is swung in the vertical direction in the ball feeding operation rod 146. And a ball feeding crank 147 that rotates around the axis extending in the front-rear direction and rotates the ball feeding member 144 around the axis extending in the vertical direction.

  The ball feeding operation rod 146 includes an iron plate 146 a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends to the left and right, and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around an axis extending forward and backward. It has been. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 146 draws the iron plate 146a toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and feeds the ball around the right end. It rotates so that the left end side close to the crank 147 moves upward. Thereafter, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, so that the left end side near the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward with the right end portion as the center. And return to the initial state. As a result, the ball feeding operation rod 146 is swung vertically by the ball feeding solenoid 145 at the left end (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147.

  The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 that moves up and down and engages with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b that is disposed on the opposite side to the side and is pivotally supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. The ball feeding member 144 includes a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped flange portion 144c (see FIG. 35B) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the rotation center.

  The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operation rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 through the ball feeding operation rod 146. It can be rotated around an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding unit 140 is in a state where the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 so that the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is held. To turn. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state). The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launcher 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 542 by the firing control unit 633b (see FIG. 206) of the payout control board 633.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is applied with a moment that rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by a ball pulling member 143 that is pivotally supported or a weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball removal member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 that is operated by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the dish unit 200. Therefore, in the normal state, the partitioning part 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned and partitioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and the ball extraction port 141b side. The game ball B does not enter.

  Then, when the player presses the upper dish ball removal button 222 downward, the upper dish ball removal slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmission unit 242b, and the operation transmission unit 242b moves downward. Along with this, the operating rod 143c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 242b, the ball removing member 143 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball exit 141b. The partition is released. Thereby, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball outlet 141b side, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball outlet guide path 241c of the unit 240 after removing the upper dish ball in the dish unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower dish 202 through the lower dish ball supply port 211c.

  The upper dish ball removal slider 242 formed with the action transmitting portion 242b with which the action rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 contacts is biased upward by the spring 243, so that the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, the ball pulling member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B can be It is possible to prevent the 143a from bouncing back.

  In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 has a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 35 (b) and the like) that is recessed to the upper right in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142. A tamper-proof member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment concave portion 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

  The fraud prevention member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape with a front view extending left and right, and an upper piece 148a that is vertically separated at a substantially vertical center in a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. A lower piece portion 148b, and inclined portions 148c formed in a C-chamfered shape on the leading end side (right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b facing each other. . The upper piece 148a of the fraud prevention member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148 so that the right end in front view protrudes backward. The lower piece 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the tamper-proof member 148. Thus, in plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that expands toward the right.

  The fraud prevention member 148 is attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b communicates with the inside of the hit ball supply port 142a. Become.

  According to the fraud prevention member 148, the illegal game ball B with the string attached is driven into the game area 5a from the upper plate via the ball feeding unit 140 into the game area 5a and attached to the illegal game ball B. When a fraudulent act is performed by operating the laced string to cause an illegal game ball B to be taken in and out of the first starting port 2002, etc., the illegal game ball B launched (hit) by the ball launcher 540 A string attached to the illegal game ball B by momentum is inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then formed into a V-shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. It can be cut by the narrowed portion, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act using an illegal game ball B to which a string is attached.

[3-1k. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 36 (a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side in the rear view in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202, and is delivered from the payout device 580. This is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and opened on the front side, and a flat lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. 152.

  The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner when viewed from the front and penetrates the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 211a of the dish unit 200. A full sphere receiver that opens to the rear on the lower right side of the front passage of the through ball passage 150a and the through ball passage 150a and that can communicate with the lower full tank discharge passage 610b of the lower full ball passage unit 610 of the main body frame 4. And a mouth 150b.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is opened upward on the right side of the full ball receiving port 150b when viewed from the front, and does not reach the game area 5a despite being fired by the ball launcher 540 of the main body frame 4. A game ball B that receives the game ball B (foul ball) and a game ball B that opens forward near the lower right corner of the front view and is received in the full ball reception port 150b and the foul ball reception port 150c. And a ball discharge port 150d communicating with the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit 200.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed between the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharge port 150d by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passage 150e having a possible size is provided.

  The penetrating sphere passage 150 a is formed across both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full tank receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-like movable piece 153 attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152 so that the lower end thereof is rotatable, and the movable piece 153. A full tank detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

  When the inside of the lower plate 202 of the dish unit 200 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is not released from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is somewhat in the storage passage 150e. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155 by the weight of the game balls B. Thus, the movable piece 153 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. Accordingly, since it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is full of the game balls B, when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects the full tank, the payout of the game balls B beyond this is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player, a staff member of the game hall, and the like so as to prompt the player to cancel the full tank 202.

  The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the through ball passage 150a, and the payout passage opening / closing door of the lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 (to be described later) of the main body frame 4. A door opening / closing contact portion 150f with which the operation protrusion 613a of 613 can contact is provided (see FIG. 91). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the discharge passage opening / closing door 613 contacts the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated so that the downstream end of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b ( The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear side and is detachably mounted so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front) and The front of the region 5a is closed.

  The glass unit 160 has a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the outer periphery of the glass unit 161 is closed. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101 rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. An attachment member 163.

  The glass frame 161 has a pair of attachment pieces 161a extending outwardly from a position below the upper left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. A plate-like locking piece 161b. The attachment piece 161 a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163 b of the glass unit attachment member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into a space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are respectively attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 97).

  The glass unit mounting member 163 is a disc-shaped base portion 163a that is rotatably attached to an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and protrudes in a bar shape from the base portion 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a protruding portion 163b. The glass unit attachment member 163 is rotatably attached to the outside of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

  To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is positioned above the base portion 163a. To do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101 h of the door frame base 101. Thereafter, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is positioned below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

  When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, the glass unit 160 can be removed by a procedure reverse to the above. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

  In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position positioned below the base portion 163a, the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is restricted by the protruding portion 163b. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to a position so as to be above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction | limiting of the movement to the back of the glass frame 161 is not cancelled | released naturally, and the glass unit 160 does not remove | deviate from the door frame base 101 naturally.

[3-3. Security cover]
The crime prevention cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear portion of the glass unit 160, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is arranged with a flat plate-like main body portion 171 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-like rear protruding piece 172 that protrudes rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171, and a left-right separated space. And a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the main body 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that the lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160 in a state of being attached to the door frame base unit 100. The main body 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5 a in the game board 5 with the upper end assembled in the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002 of the front constituent member 1000 to be described later, a part of the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The pachinko machine 1 is assembled so as not to protrude into the game area 5a.

  The rear protrusion 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear protrusion 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear protrusion 172 protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. The rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed so as to be along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

  Note that the rear protrusion 172 is not formed in a portion located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Thereby, the game ball B (the game ball B launched by the ball launcher 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not contact the rear protrusion 172 of the crime prevention cover 170, and the game area The game ball B is not hindered into the 5a.

  The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

  When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body portion 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161) and protrudes backward from the lower side of the main body portion 171. The removed rear protrusion 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component member 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front structural member 1000. . Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess portion 1009 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 38A is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 38B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the back. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and the player can drive the game ball B in the upper plate 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 when operated. Is.

  The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the cylinder portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and the front end side of the handle 182. A disc-shaped cover base 183 attached to the handle base 181; a handle decoration board 184 attached to the front side of the cover base 183 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face; and a front side of the handle decoration board 184 so as to cover And a handle cover 185 attached to the cover base 183.

  The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182 and a handle 182 attached to the front end, and is rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, a detection shaft 189a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 188, and a handle base 181 and an inner And a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so that the handle 182 is returned to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). One end side is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 biasing in the direction.

  The handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 at the rear of the inner base 186, and a distal end projecting outward from the left side of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 as viewed from the front. A single button 193 which is attached to the handle base 181 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending rearward and forward on the handle base 181 at the end side behind the inner base 186, and a single button attached to the handle base 181 by detecting the pressing operation of the single button 193 And an operation sensor 194.

  The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, a disk-shaped front end 181b projecting radially from the front end of the base 181a, and a recess from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. And three groove portions 181c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle mounting member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 102c of the cylindrical portion 102a in the handle mounting member 102. Accordingly, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 with the three groove portions 181c aligned with the three protrusions 102c, and the protrusions 102c are respectively inserted into the three groove portions 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 cannot be rotated relative to the handle mounting member 102.

  The handle 182 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d that protrude outward in the circumferential direction from the outer peripheral surface, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in a circular arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the center of rotation, and the other end side of the handle return spring 190 is locked A locking projection 182f.

  The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusion 182b, the third protrusion 182c, and the fourth protrusion 182d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a bulges so that the side surface in the clockwise direction of the front view of the portion that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 bulges outward, and the counter-rotation around the opposite side The side surface in the direction of is recessed (curled) so as to curve inward. The portion of the second protrusion 182b that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the first protrusion 182a that protrudes most in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and from the first protrusion 182a. Slightly low. The second protrusion 182b bulges so that the side face in the clockwise direction of the front projection of the second protrusion 182b bulges outward, and the side face in the counterclockwise direction that is the opposite side is curved inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

  The portion of the third protrusion 182c that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is away from the most protruded portion of the second protrusion 182b in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and the first protrusion 182a It protrudes at about half the height. The third protrusion 182c is inclined substantially linearly on the side surfaces on both sides, and more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction where the side surface in the clockwise direction is the opposite side. The fourth protrusion 182d has a portion that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 away from the most protruded portion of the third protrusion 182c in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 182d is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle with side surfaces on both sides inclined substantially linearly.

  The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape and includes three mounting bosses 183a that protrude rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 through the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 passes through the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In the present embodiment, the handle 182 can be rotated within a range of a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

  The handle cover 185 has a front surface that bulges forward and has translucency. The handle cover 185 includes a lens member that is three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member. The handle cover 185 is decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting LEDs on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184.

  The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. The handle mounting seating surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located rearward of the left end side in plan view, and faces the outside (open side). The handle unit 180 that is attached to the pachinko machine 1 is also inclined to the outside in a plan view (in other words, the front end of the pachinko machine 1 is inclined to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). Are attached and fixed to the door frame 3. Thereby, it is easy for a player to grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and it is possible to perform a turning operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor. When the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189 a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launching device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

  The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When the player touches the handle 182 or the like, the handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting from the player, and the player touches the handle 182 or the like. Detect contact. When the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 detects a player's contact, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled and the game ball B can be driven. That is, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 by some method without touching the handle 182. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be driven. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game by rotating the handle 182 in a different way from the original, and to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  Further, when the player presses the single button 193 while the player rotates the handle 182, the single button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single button 193, and the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 detects the handle unit 180. The driving of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. Thereby, even if it does not return rotation operation of the handle | steering-wheel 182, while launching of the game ball B can be stopped temporarily, by releasing the press operation of the single button 193, before operating the single button 193, The game ball B can be driven again into the game area 5a with the driving strength.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 180 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 rotates most in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Thus, when the game ball B is most strongly struck into the game area 5a (so-called “right-handed”), the fourth protrusion 182d is formed on the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, by changing the handle 182 with the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a, the player can maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position in an easy state, It is possible to reduce a player's feeling of fatigue and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of pan unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the tray unit, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the tray unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the back after being disassembled for each of the main members. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion below the door window 101 a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The tray unit 200 has an upper plate 201 for storing a game ball B to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball that is disposed below the upper plate 201 and is supplied from the upper plate 201 or the foul cover unit 150. And a lower tray 202 capable of storing B.

  The dish unit 200 includes an upper dish 201, a dish base unit 210 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower dish 202 attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210. And a stage operation unit 300 that is attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and can be operated by the player.

  The dish base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped dish unit base 211 extending in the left and right direction, an upper dish body 212 having an upper dish 201 attached to the upper front of the dish unit base 211, and a right side of the upper dish body 212. A mounting base 213 that is attached to the front of the mounting base 213, a dish unit relay board 214 that is mounted to the right of the mounting base 213, and a ball lending operation unit 220 that is mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213. A unit 230 before removing the upper bowl ball attached to the lower side of the mounting base 213 and a unit 240 after removing the upper bowl ball attached to the rear of the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl ball are provided.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the front lower portion of the dish unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower dish body 251 having the lower dish 202 and the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. A dish unit main body 252, a lower dish ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, a dish upper left decoration unit 270 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit body 252, and left and right respectively. The dish upper right decoration unit 275, and the dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 are provided below the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes, as the effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a press operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 accommodated in the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. A ring-shaped production operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302. A transmission gear 350 and a gear attachment member 351 for rotatably attaching the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation ring decoration board 352 for decorating the effect operation ring 330 with light, the decoration board cover 353 covering the upper side of the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. The vibration speaker 354, the effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. And.

  The entire plate unit 200 bulges forward, and the rendering operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the rendering operation unit 301 faces obliquely upward and forward in the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the rendering operation unit 300 on the upper surface. In addition, a ball lending operation unit 220 is disposed on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and a lower plate 202 is disposed on the left side of the effect operation unit 300 below the upper plate 201.

[3-5a. Top plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side is larger than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front and is bulged forward and opened upward. The upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212) has a portion of about 1/3 bulging forward from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction. As the upper plate 201 moves from the most bulged part to the right in front view, the front end is retracted rearward, and the guide passage portion 201a whose depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (FIG. 46). For example). The upper plate 201 is inclined so that the entire bottom surface including the guide passage portion 201a is lowered on the right end side, and the right end side in front view of the guide passage portion 201a is under the ball lending operation unit 220.

  When the upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 is a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port 211e. It is inclined so as to become slightly lower toward the position below the outer diameter of B. Thereby, the game ball B released forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be stored from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper tray ball feeding port 211e.

  The guide passage 201a is provided with a metal grounding metal 201b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact with (rolls) the game ball. Static electricity charged on B can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower plate 202 is disposed below the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed by the lower plate body 251 and the plate unit base 211. The lower tray 202 is formed in a container shape that can store the game balls B, and includes a lower tray ball hole 202a that penetrates the bottom wall in the vertical direction so that the game balls B can be discharged. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is closed by the lower dish ball removal unit 260 so as to be opened and closed.

  The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrilateral shape in plan view extending left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. In the lower plate 202, a lower plate ball hole 202a penetrating vertically is arranged near the front end near the right end. The lower dish 202 is inclined such that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower dish ball hole 202a. The lower dish ball extraction hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is positioned in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c and below the rendering operation unit 300 in a state assembled to the dish unit 200.

  The lower dish 202 can store the game ball B released forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c in a state in which the lower dish ball hole 202a is closed, and open the lower dish ball hole 202a. Can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in the state where the lower dish ball hole 202a is opened, the lower dish ball hole 202a is disposed in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c, and therefore forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower dish ball hole 202a by movement of the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. 43 is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as viewed from the rear. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. is there. The dish base unit 210 is mounted below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the dish decoration unit 250 and the rendering operation unit 300 are mounted on the front surface.

  The dish base unit 210 is a flat dish unit base 211 attached to the lower front part of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right, and an upper dish attached to the upper front part of the dish unit base 211 and having an upper dish 201. A main body 212, a mounting base 213 that is attached to the right of the upper dish main body 212 at the upper front of the dish unit base 211 and protrudes forward, and is attached to the right of the mounting base 213 on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. The dish unit relay board 214 is provided.

  The dish base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the attachment base 213, and a unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the attachment base 213. , A unit 240 after removing the upper dish ball attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 211 behind the unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The dish unit base 211 is attached to the lower side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 101 (shallow with the rear open). It is formed in a box shape.

  The dish unit base 211 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and penetrates back and forth below the upper dish ball supply port 211a extending in a cylindrical shape to the rear and the upper dish ball supply port 211a. A speaker opening 211b having a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower dish ball supply opening 211c penetrating forward and backward in a lower left portion with respect to the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front, and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape; A notch 211d that is cut out in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through the right side wall of a portion that extends in a cylindrical shape to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and front and rear in the upper right side of the lower dish ball supply port 211c And an upper tray ball feeding port 211e that extends vertically and has an upper portion positioned at the right end of the upper tray main body 212.

  The dish unit base 211 protrudes forward to the right of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e and is placed on the left side of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e. Under the dish main body, it penetrates back and forth and passes through the slider insertion port 211g through which the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper dish ball removal slider 242 in the unit 240 after the upper dish ball removal is inserted, and the front right and left at the lower right corner in front view. The handle insertion port 211h through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion through which the cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 passes through the front and rear in the vicinity of the right corner when viewed from the front. And a mouth 211i.

  The upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end opens on the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the cylindrical rear end passes through the upper tray ball of the door frame base 101. The opening 101g penetrates from the front side and is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

  The lower tray ball supply port 211c is assembled to the door frame 3 and has a front end that opens to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a cylindrical rear end that opens the lower tray ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game balls B flowing in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball removal guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball is connected to the notch 211d formed in the cylindrical portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 is moved to the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, After the dish ball removal, the ball 240 is discharged from the lower dish ball supply port 211c into the lower dish 202 through the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removal guide path 241c of the unit 240 and the notch 211d.

  The upper tray ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper tray ball in a state assembled to the tray base unit 210. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b after removing the upper plate ball.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper plate body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211. The upper plate body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side is larger than the center of the left and right when viewed from the front, and bulges forward. The upper plate body 212 has a front end that is retracted rearward from the most bulged portion toward the right in front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is lowest. The upper plate body 212 is closed at the upper part near the right end.

  The upper plate body 212 is attached so that a portion where the upper portion near the right end is closed in a state where the upper plate main body 212 is assembled to the plate unit 200 lies under the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, the upper plate body 212 has an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a formed at an intermediate portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the tray unit base 211 in a state of being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the tray unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape with the top opened. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion port 213a penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the left end, and a through port 213b penetrating vertically in the right corner of the rear end.

  The insertion opening 213a of the mounting base 213 is used to insert the front slider 232 of the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl. Further, the through-hole 213b is for inserting a wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104.

[3-5c-4. Plate unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 includes the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorated board 278, the dish lower left decorated board 283, and the dish lower right decorated board 288. And for relaying the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the right side of the mounting protrusion 211 f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, the rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, or ball lending machines (for example, CR units) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 (not shown). (Omitted) After inserting cash or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B are lent out into the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200, or the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is displayed. Or deducting and returning the game balls B that have been rented out the cash and prepaid cards that have been thrown into the ball lending machine.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base part 221 attached to the upper side of the attachment base 213, an upper dish ball removal button 222 disposed near the left end of the upper surface of the base part 221, and an upper dish ball on the upper surface of the base part 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223 disposed on the right side of the unplug button 222, a translucent disk lending operation base 223, a ball lending button 224 disposed on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation A return button 225 disposed on the front right side of the base 223 and a ball lending display unit (not shown) disposed below the rear of the ball lending operation base 223 are provided.

  The upper dish ball removal button 222 protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward by a player pressing. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 in a light-emitting state.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. Further, when a prepaid card with cash or balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the game balls B that have been rented are deducted and returned to the cash or prepaid card that has been put into the ball lending machine. In the ball lending display section, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card that has been put into the ball lending machine is displayed. The ball lending display section displays an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5c-6. Unit before removing the bowl and unit after removing the bowl]
The pre-top bowl removal unit 230 and the post-top bowl removal unit 240 in the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 45 and 46. When the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to operate the upper plate 201. This is for discharging the game ball B stored therein to the lower tray 202.

  The unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball is attached to the lower side of the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. The unit 240 after the top dish ball removal is attached to the rear side of the unit 230 before the top dish ball removal on the rear surface of the dish unit base 211.

  The unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 and has a cylindrical front base 231 that extends vertically, and a front part that is inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231 so as to be movable in the vertical direction. And a slider 232. The front base 231 is attached near the front of the upper tray ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g on the front surface of the tray unit base 211. The front slider 232 extends vertically and has an upper end that is in contact with a lower end of the upper dish ball removal button 222 and a lower end of the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper dish ball removal slider 242 after the upper dish ball removal unit 240. It is in contact with the top surface.

  The post-top ball removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. An upper plate ball removal slider 242 that is slidably attached to the upper plate, a spring 243 that urges the upper plate ball removal slider 242 upward, a rear cover 244 that is attached to the rear side of the rear base 241; It has.

  The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and opens forward, and is connected to the ball receiving port 241a through which the game ball B can pass and the ball receiving port 241a. A ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward, and a game on the rear surface of the rear base 241 from a position below the ball feeding guide path 241b. A ball extraction guide path 241c that guides the sphere B downward and then guides it to the right in the rear view.

  The ball receiving port 241a is assembled to the plate base unit 210, and moves forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at an opening position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state assembled to the door frame 3. Accordingly, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

  The part extending to the left and right of the ball extraction guide path 241c protrudes to the right in the rear view, and inclines so that the right end side in the rear view is lower than the part where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached. It opens on the right side when viewed from the back. The rear side of the portion extending to the left and right of the ball extraction guide path 241 c is closed by the rear cover 244. The ball extraction guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, and the upper portion of the portion extending vertically below the ball supply guide path 241b is located in front of the ball extraction opening 141b of the ball supply unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending in the left-right direction as viewed from the back is connected to the notch 211 d of the lower dish ball supply port 211 c in the dish unit base 211. Thereby, the game ball B discharged from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged into the lower plate 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c through the ball outlet guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

  The upper dish ball removal slider 242 is formed in a quadrangular shape in front view, and protrudes rearward from the operation receiving portion 242a protruding forward from the upper left corner and the rear surface on the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a. An operation transmission unit 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

  The upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the operation receiving portion 242a protrudes forward through the slider insertion port 211g of the tray unit base 211 from the rear side, and the operation receiving portion 242a. Is in contact with the lower end of the front slider 232 of the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl. Further, in the state where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242 b protrudes rearward of the rear base 241, and the operation at the ball removal member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 is on the upper surface. The collar 143c is in contact.

  The spring 243 has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper dish ball removal slider 242, and urges the upper dish ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the urging force of the spring 243 and can move downward by resisting the urging force of the spring 243.

  In the pre-top ball removal unit 230 and the post-top ball removal unit 240, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the moving end upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 The upper pan ball removal button 222 is positioned upward at the moving end via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a. Further, since the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the biasing force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. The partition portion 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b to partition the two.

  Accordingly, when the upper tray ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 separates the entrance 141a and the ball withdrawal port 141b from the upper plate 201 and sends them to the ball reception port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

  On the other hand, when the upper dish ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper dish ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper dish ball removal slider 242 operates. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 that is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b can move downward, and the ball pulling member 143 is rotated by the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball pulling member 143 to rotate the partition portion 143a. Retreats from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. Thereby, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. Will be. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b is guided from the notch 211d into the lower dish ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lowered from the lower dish ball supply port 211c. It is discharged into the tray 202, and the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is discharged into the lower tray 202.

  When the downward pressing of the upper dish ball removal button 222 is released, the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is moved upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper dish is moved via the front slider 232 in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. While the ball removal button 222 is raised, the ball removal member 143 is rotated by the operation rod 143c that is in contact with the operation transmission portion 242b, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b. It will return to the original state.

  In this manner, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is fed to the ball launcher 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140 by the unit 230 before removing the upper plate ball and the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball, It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5d. Dish decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. 47 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit as seen from the back. FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the main body of the dish decoration unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the main body of the dish decoration unit as viewed from the rear. is there. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower front portion of the dish unit base 211 and cooperates with the dish unit base 211 to form the lower dish 202. The dish unit base covers the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. 211, a tray unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of the lower plate body 211, a lower dish ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate body 251 The upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 of the dish, and the lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit of the dish unit main body 252 that are attached below the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 of the dish. 285.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower dish body 251 forms the lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210. The lower dish main body 251 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) that extends to the left and right and is open at the top and rear. The lower plate body 251 is attached to a portion on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the lower front portion of the plate unit base 211 so that the opened rear side is closed.

  The lower dish main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape whose plan view extends to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. The lower dish main body 251 is formed with a lower dish ball hole 202a penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in plan view. The lower plate body 251 is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball hole 202a. The lower dish ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball extraction unit 260 so that it can be opened and closed.

  The lower dish body 251 is in a state where the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the dish unit body 252 in a state where the lower dish body 251 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250. The bottom plate body 251 is assembled to the plate unit 200, and the bottom surface is positioned below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball discharge hole 202a is supplied to the lower plate ball. It is located in front of the mouth 211c. Thereby, the game ball | bowl B discharge | released ahead from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Plate unit body]
The dish unit main body 252 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and bulges so that the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape opened rearward.

  The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulging portion 252a that bulges forward and extends downward from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction at the upper part, and a left side from the center in the left and right direction at the lower part. Includes a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251 and a bottom plate portion 252c that extends rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b. .

  The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with the rear opened, and the dish upper left decorative unit 270, the dish lower left decorative unit 280, the dish upper right decorative unit 275, and the dish lower right decorative unit are provided on the respective front surfaces. 285 is attached. The left upper side bulging portion 252a has a lower right end connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. Moreover, the lower end of the right upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

  The dish unit main body 252 is formed with a lower dish opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side bulging part 252a and the lower front decoration part 252b. The lower dish opening 252d has such a size that the player's fingers can be inserted, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower dish opening 252d is formed in a cylindrical shape extending in the front-rear direction by the lower dish body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging part 252a.

  In addition, the dish unit main body 252 includes a front notch 252e that is notched upward from the front lower end of the portion covering the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251 in the lower front decoration part 252b, and a lower dish main body 251 in the bottom plate part 252c. , And a bottom notch 252f that is notched at a portion below the bottom. The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is inserted into the front cutout part 252e and the bottom cutout part 252f.

  Further, the dish unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth in the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b and is inserted into the handle insertion port 252g through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and the lower front surface above the handle insertion port 252g. An effect operating unit formed between a cylinder insertion opening 252h that passes through the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are the center in the left-right direction. And an effect operation unit attachment portion 252i to which 300 is attached. The effect operation unit attachment portion 252i is formed to have a width that is about 1/3 of the horizontal width of the dish unit main body 252.

  The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to cover the entire front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled in the dish unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. . When assembled in the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball removal button 263 faces the front from the front notch 252 e and the lower dish ball removal unit 260 has a lower dish ball removal base 261. The bottom surface notch 252f is closed and the bottom surfaces are in the same plane.

[3-5d-3. Lower dish ball removal unit]
The lower dish ball removal unit 260 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and opens and closes the lower dish ball removal hole 202 a to store the game ball B in the lower dish 202 or discharge the game ball B from the lower dish 202. It is for letting you do.

  The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251 and has a flat plate-like lower dish ball removal base 261 having a through-hole penetrating up and down at the right front corner in plan view, and a lower dish ball removal unit 260. A slider 262 slidably attached back and forth on the upper surface side of the base 261, a lower dish ball removal button 263 attached to the front end of the slider 262, a spring 264 urging the slider 262 forward, A lower dish ball removing lid 265 that opens and closes the through hole by the movement of the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower dish ball removing lid 265 through the slider 262 are provided.

  The lower dish ball removal base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom notch 252f of the dish unit main body 252, and is vertically moved to a position that coincides with the lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 (lower dish body 251). A penetrating through-hole is formed. The through hole of the lower dish ball removal base 261 is formed in the same size as the lower dish ball removal hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to a portion of the lower dish ball removal base 261 leftward from the center in the left-right direction so as to be slidable back and forth. The slider 262 includes a projecting pin that projects upward in a cylindrical shape.

  The lower dish ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower dish ball removal base 261 at the left end side of the left side of the slider 262 so as to be rotatable about the vertically extending axis, and the right end side is attached to the slider 262. The right end side is formed so that the through hole can be closed. The lower dish ball removal lid 265 is formed with a slit extending left and right into which a protruding pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

  When the lower dish ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball removal base 261 closes the bottom surface notch portion 252 f of the dish unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower dish ball removal base 261 is It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower dish ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the dish unit main body 252. In the normal dish ball removal unit 260, the slider 262 is positioned at the moving end on the front side by the urging force of the spring 264, and the right edge side of the lower dish ball removal cover 265 is located immediately above the through hole. The through-hole (lower dish ball hole 202a) is closed.

  In this normal state, the lower dish ball extraction hole 202 a is closed by the lower dish ball extraction cover 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower dish 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower dish ball removal button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front cutout portion 252e on the front surface of the lower front decoration portion 252b.

  In a normal state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 is pressed rearward and moved backward against the biasing force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower dish ball removal button 263. It becomes. As the slider 262 moves rearward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 presses the lower dish ball removal cover 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower dish ball removal cover 265 is centered on the left end side and the right end side is rearward. It will turn in the direction of movement. Then, the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 located immediately above the through hole moves backward from the position of the through hole, so that the through hole is opened and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is opened. The game ball B in the lower tray 202 can be discharged to the lower side of the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a.

  When the slider 262 is moved rearward by pressing the lower dish ball removal button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower dish ball removal button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward by the biasing force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 is rotated rearward, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is kept open, and the game balls B in the lower dish 202 are continuously placed. It can be discharged downward.

  To close the lower dish ball removal hole 202a from this state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 retracted from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b is pressed backward, the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. The When the lower dish ball removal button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower dish ball removal button 263 returns to the state where it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower dish ball removal lid 265 rotates and the right end side is positioned immediately above the through hole, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball removal cover 265. Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower dish 202.

[3-5d-4. Dish upper left decorative unit and Dish upper right decorative unit]
The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the dish upper right decorative unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 decorate the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 at the upper part of the dish unit 200.

  The dish upper left decorative unit 270 is a semi-cylindrical shape that extends left and right and has translucency. The dish upper left decorative body 271, and the dish upper left reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the dish upper left decorative body 271, And a dish upper left decorative board 273 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

  The dish upper left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and move downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper portion of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper left decorative body 271 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, with the center axis extending obliquely to the upper left at the left end and the center axis extending left and right at the right end, so that the half cylinder is twisted. Is formed. This dish upper left decorative body 271 is formed milky white.

  The dish upper left reflector 272 is inserted into the dish upper left decorative body 271 from the rear, and a through hole is formed at a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 are full color LEDs, and the dish upper left decorative body 271 can be decorated with light emission by emitting light.

  In the state where the dish upper left decorative unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper left decorative unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle in the longitudinal direction of the dish upper left decorative body 271, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish upper left decorative board 273 are caused to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper left decorative body 271 is exposed. The light emission can be decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish upper right decorative unit 275 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends left and right and has translucency. The dish upper right decorative body 276, and a dish upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the dish upper right decorative body 276, A dish upper right decorative board 278 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper right reflector 277 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

  The dish upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and move downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper right decorative body 276 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, with the central axis extending diagonally to the upper right at the right end and the central axis extending left and right at the left end, so that the semicylinder is twisted. Is formed. This dish upper right decorative body 276 is formed milky white.

  The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted into the dish upper right decorative body 276 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper right decorative board 278. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper right decorative board 278 are full color LEDs, and the dish upper right decorative body 276 can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light.

  In the state where the dish upper right decorative unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the dish center upper decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction in the dish upper right decorative body 276, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish upper right decorative board 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper right decorative body 276 is exposed. The light emission can be decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the dish upper right decorative unit 275 are partly projected upward from the front end of the upper side bulging portion 252a in the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decorative unit 250 in a state assembled to the door frame 3. In addition, a step with the dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the dish upper right decorative unit 275 being higher can be formed between the upper side bulging portion 252a. Accordingly, the player can hook his / her finger using the step between the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is leveled. Can be used as a finger hook when operating the production operation unit 301 described later. Moreover, the game balls B on the upper side bulging portion 252a can be prevented from flowing forward due to the steps between the upper left bulging portion 252a and the upper right flaring portion 252a.

[3-5d-5. Dish lower left decorative unit and Dish lower right decorative unit]
The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252 so as to extend along the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively. It is done. The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 cooperate with the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the dish unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. .

  The dish lower left decorative unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends left and right and has translucency. The dish lower left decorative body 281, and a dish lower left reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the dish lower left decorative body 281, And a dish lower left decorative board 283 mounted on the rear side of the dish lower left reflector 282 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  The dish lower left decorative body 281 extends in a curved line so as to move forward and move downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulging part 252a. The dish lower left decorative body 281 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the dish upper left decorative body 271 and the dish upper right decorative body 276. The shaft extends left and right, and is formed in a shape such that the half cylinder is bent. The dish lower left decorative body 281 has a left end formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc is changed so that the dish lower left decorative body 281 becomes thinner toward the left end side. The dish lower left decorative body 281 is milky white.

  The dish lower left reflector 282 is inserted into the dish lower left decorative body 281 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish lower left decorative substrate 283. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower left decorative board 283 are full color LEDs, and the dish lower left decorative body 281 can be decorated by emitting light.

  The dish lower left decoration unit 280 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is positioned below the left end of the dish upper left decoration unit 270, and the right end of the dish center lower decoration body 312 b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left end. In the dish lower left decorative unit 280, the left end of the dish lower left decorative body 281 is formed in a spherical shape, so that the left end appears to be embedded in the door frame 3. Since the dish lower left decorative unit 280 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction of the dish lower left decorative body 281, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish lower left decorative board 283 are caused to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish lower left decorative body 281 is exposed. The light emission can be decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish lower right decoration unit 285 has a semi-cylindrical shape extending right and left and has a translucent dish right lower decoration body 286, and a dish lower right decoration body 286 attached to the rear side of the dish lower right decoration body 286. A reflector 287 and a dish lower right decorative board 288 mounted on the rear side of the dish lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof are provided.

  The dish lower right decorative body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulging part 252a on the right side. The dish lower right decorative body 286 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the dish upper left decorative body 271 and the dish upper right decorative body 276, with the central axis extending slightly diagonally to the upper right rear at the right end, The central axis extends to the left and right, and the semi-cylinder is bent. The dish lower right decorative body 286 has a spherical right end. The curvature of the semicircular arc changes so that the dish lower right decorative body 286 becomes thinner toward the right end side. The dish lower right decorative body 286 is formed in milky white.

  The dish lower right reflector 287 is inserted into the dish lower right decorative body 286 from the rear, and a through hole is formed at a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish lower right decorative substrate 288. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower right decorative board 288 are full color LEDs, and the dish lower right decorative body 286 can be decorated by emitting light.

  In the state where the dish lower right decoration unit 285 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is located below the right end of the dish upper right decoration unit 275, and the left end is the dish center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. Continuation with the right end of. In the dish lower right decorative unit 285, the right end of the dish lower right decorative body 286 is formed in a spherical shape, so that the right end appears to be embedded in the door frame 3. Since the dish lower right decorative unit 285 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction in the dish lower right decorative body 286, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish lower right decorative board 288 are caused to emit light, the dish lower right decorative body 286 is provided. It is possible to decorate the entire front surface of the lamp substantially uniformly and to make it appear that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall structure of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the rendering operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the dish unit as viewed from the advance / retreat direction of the effect operation buttons. FIG. 52A is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 52B is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit viewed from the back. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled as the main members. The production operation unit 300 is provided at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and participates in the production by the player operating when the player participation type production is executed. Is something that can be done. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the dish base unit 210 and the dish decoration unit 250.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player. The effect operation unit 301 includes a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 with respect to the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is disposed in the ring. . The pressing operation unit 303 is arranged at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a central pressing operation unit 303 a having a diameter slightly larger than half of the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, an outer periphery of the central pressing operation unit 303 a, and the rotation operation unit 302. It is comprised with the annular | circular shaped outer periphery press operation part 303b arrange | positioned between inner periphery.

  The production operation unit 300 is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 accommodated in the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. A ring-shaped production operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the production operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the production operation ring 330. An operation ring transmission gear 350 that transmits rotation to and from the unit 302, and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation unit base 320 are provided.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330, and an effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and an effect operation ring decoration substrate 352. The decorative board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330 An effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation part relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 320 are provided.

[3-5e-1. Production operation unit cover unit]
The production operation unit cover unit 310 of the production operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 252i of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 200. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape whose upper and rear sides are opened.

  The production operation unit cover unit 310 includes a semispherical unit lower cover 311 that is recessed downward, a semicircular unit front cover 312 that is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward, A dish center upper reflector 313 mounted from behind in the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish center upper reflector 313 and capable of emitting light forward are mounted. The dish center upper decorative board 314, the dish center lower reflector 315 attached from behind in the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and the dish center lower reflector 315 are attached to the dish center lower reflector 315 and light forward. The dish center lower decoration board 316 with which a plurality of LEDs which can irradiate is mounted.

  The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the front side of the unit lower cover 311 bulges downward from the back in the center in the front-rear direction, and the rear side is the rendering operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit main body 252. It is attached to 252i so as to be placed from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state so that an axis perpendicular to an imaginary plane formed at the upper edge extending in a semicircular arc shape at the front part is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 has a plurality of drain holes 311a at the lowest part when assembled in the dish unit 200.

  The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward so that the shape in plan view is along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and the unit front cover 312 is formed at the upper end of the front portion of the unit lower cover 311. Installed. The unit front cover 312 includes a dish center upper decorative body 312a that extends in a semicircular arc shape so that a semicircular arc that bulges forward is along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and a front lower portion of the dish center upper decorative body 312a. A dish center lower decorative body 312b extending in a semicircular arc shape so that the bulged semicircular arc extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312 b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

  The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 divide a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius) into half and extend in a semicircular shape with the split surface toward the center. It is formed in a bent shape. The dish center lower decorative body 312b extends in a semicircular arc shape with a large curvature with respect to the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b is slightly thinner than the dish center upper decorative body 312a. It is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. In the state where the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a projects forward from the front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. When assembled in the dish unit 200, the left and right ends of the dish center upper decorative body 312a are continuous with the right end of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the left end of the dish upper right decorative unit 275, respectively. The left and right ends of 312b are connected to the right end of the dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the left edge of the dish lower right decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 has translucency and is milky white.

  The unit front cover 312 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end thereof is the front end of the door frame 3. The distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame. The distance is about ½ of the full width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

  The dish center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 from the rear and attached. The dish center upper reflector 313 blocks light from the LED mounted on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 from leaking backward (inside). The dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is formed in a semicircular arc shape along the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center upper decorative body 312a can be decorated by emitting light.

  The dish center lower reflector 315 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into the dish center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 from the rear and attached. The dish center lower reflector 315 blocks light from the LED mounted on the dish center lower decorative board 316 from leaking backward (inside). The dish center lower decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular arc shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center lower decoration board 316 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b can be decorated by emitting light.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a reinforcing rib in the middle of the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 while extending in a semicircular shape. When the LED on the center upper decorative board 314 and the LED on the dish lower central decorative board 316 are made to emit light, each of them can be made to emit light almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  In the state in which the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end protrudes more forward than the upper dish 201 and the lower dish 202. In addition, the production operation unit cover unit 310 includes a plate center upper decorative body 312a that is continuous with a plate left upper decorative body 271 and a plate upper right decorative body 276, and a plate center lower decorative body 312b is a plate left lower decorative body 281 and a dish right The lower decorative body 286 is continuous. Thereby, the production operation unit 300 is made conspicuous, and the appearance is improved by the integral decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation unit base 320 is inserted into the production operation unit cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the production operation unit of the upper plate body 212 in the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the part 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in a container shape with the top opened.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed in a box shape having an outer shape of a substantially cubic shape, and has a main body 321 that is open at the top, and extends outward from the upper end of the main body 321 and has a circular outer periphery. Flange portion 322, a plurality (four in this case) of leg portions 323 projecting downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and an upper attachment formed on the rear end of the flange portion 322 and attached to the dish base unit 210 And a gear bearing portion 325 that opens upward through the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and rotatably supports the operation ring transmission gear 350.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed such that the main body unit 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 therein. In the main body 321, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the bottom wall from the lower side, and the portion where the vibration speaker 354 is attached on the lower surface is formed on a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354. The vibration can be amplified, and the vibration can be converted into sound such as voice or music and output. it can.

  A leg portion 361 b of the button unit base 361 in the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321. In addition, the main body 321 is formed with a through-hole for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body 321 at the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall. The main body 321 has a rotation drive unit 340 attached to the outside of the left side wall and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

  The flange portion 322 has a diameter that substantially matches the inner periphery of the upper central decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312. On the upper surface of the flange portion 322, the effect operation ring decoration board 352 and the decoration board cover 353 are attached, and the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of leg portions 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

  The gear bearing portion 325 can cooperate with the gear attachment member to attach the operation ring transmission gear so as to be rotatable around a shaft extending in the left-right direction. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 has a flange portion. Under the 322, it is exposed to the outside.

  In the state where the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is positioned slightly below the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Further, when assembled in the rendering operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached in contact with the lower surface of the main body 321.

[3-5e-3. Production control ring]
The production operation ring 330 of the production operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 55A is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as viewed from above, and FIG. 55B is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as viewed from below. FIG. 56 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from above, and FIG. 56 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from below. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation portion base 320 and has a rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by the player. The production operation ring 330 (the rotation operation unit 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) that is about twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and an inner diameter that is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In the present embodiment, the production operation ring 330 has an outer diameter of about 13 cm.

  The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation part base 320, an annular rotation base 332 that is rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 that are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of 332 and are rotatably attached to the ring mounting base 331 about an axis extending vertically, and the upward movement of the rotating base 332 is attached to the ring mounting base 331. And a ring retaining member 334 that regulates.

  Further, the production operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335 constituting a part of the rotation operation unit 302 and the lower ring outer cover 335. A ring outer lower cover 336 constituting a part of the rotation operation unit 302 and an inner peripheral side of the ring outer upper cover 335 are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and constitute a part of the rotation operation unit 302. A ring inner cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in an annular shape having translucency.

  The ring mounting base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320 and has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 has a mounting portion 331a on which the rotation base 332 is slidably mounted on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge, and is spaced apart in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. Boss portion 331b for projecting in a cylindrical shape upward from a plurality of (four in this case) portions and rotatably mounting bush 333, and spaced apart in the circumferential direction on the outer side of mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. A plurality of through holes 331c penetrating vertically. The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

  The rotation base 332 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring mounting base 331 and the inner diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotation base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332 a is formed as a bevel gear so as to protrude downward as it goes toward the center of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. When assembled in the effect operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state assembled to the rendering operation unit 300.

  The ring outer upper cover 335 is formed three-dimensionally on the outer upper surface part 335a in which the circular arc that forms the outer and upper part in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of rings are arranged in the circumferential direction. A decorative portion 335b, and an outer upper cover mounting portion 335c that extends downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extends toward the center and is arranged in the circumferential direction. Yes. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of ¼ of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover attaching portion 335 c extends slightly below the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335 a and is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The outer ring lower cover 336 includes an outer lower surface part 336a in which a circular arc constituting the outer part and the lower part in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of protrusions projecting from the inner side of the outer lower surface part 336a upward and to the center side And an outer lower cover mounting portion 336b. An outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attaching portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

  The ring inner cover 337 includes an inner surface portion 337a in which a circular arc that forms an inner portion and an upper portion in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and a cylinder that extends downward from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a in parallel to the central axis A cylindrical surface portion 337b and a plurality of inner cover attachment portions 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. The inner surface 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical surface portion 337 b has a cylindrical inner diameter that is the same as the inner diameter of the rotation base 332. The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, and the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface part 335a, the outer lower surface part 336a, and the inner surface part 337a constitute a part of a range of 1/2 or more of a circle, and the whole becomes a donut shape. The effect operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 57A is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 57B is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the back. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the right front side, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the left front side. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 that is attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 that is attached to the rear side of the right side surface of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation shaft projects leftward. , A drive gear 343 attached to the rotation shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350 345, a transmission gear 344, and a transmission detection gear member 345 are rotatably mounted in cooperation with the rotational drive base, and cover the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left side. 346.

  The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the gear cover 346 and detects the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 348 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

  The rotation drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction and extends in the front-rear direction, and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 includes a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates integrally with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. Yes. The second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

  The transmission detection gear member 345 has a gear portion 345a having a larger diameter than the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b), and protrudes leftward from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a. And a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at regular intervals. The gear portion 345 a meshes with the second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 and meshes with the drive side gear portion 350 b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the interval apart in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction at intervals different from an integral multiple of the interval between the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. Thereby, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one of them detects the detection piece 345b first. It is like that. Thereby, the rotation direction and rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345.

  When the rotary drive unit 340 is assembled, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. Mesh with. Further, the rotation drive unit 340 is located in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 as a whole in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The rotation drive unit 340 arbitrarily drives the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 through the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. Can be rotated in the direction of. In addition, the rotation drive unit 340 causes the rotation operation unit 302 to reciprocate and vibrate by causing the operation ring drive motor 342 to rotate the drive gear 343 forward and backward within a predetermined rotation angle range. it can.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated by the player, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. Therefore, the operation ring drive is performed in the same direction as the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, the player's rotation operation can be assisted. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be applied to the player's rotation operation. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operation feeling corresponding to the content of the player participation type effect or a click feeling.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operation ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits the rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330. The bearing portion 325 is rotatably attached.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is a bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a in the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the rotation detection unit 340 detects transmission by rotating integrally with the ring-side gear portion 350a. A spur gear-like drive side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345. The ring-side gear portion 350a and the drive-side gear portion 350b have pitch circles with the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350 a is constricted in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so that the rotation shaft extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation shaft of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation unit base 320 from above, and the gear attachment member 351 is attached to the operation unit base 320, so that the operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation unit base 320. It is done.

  When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled in the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a is engaged with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b is engaged. The rotation detection unit 340 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and can rotate the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Stage control ring decoration board]
The effect operation ring decoration board 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation unit base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is formed in a form in which an annulus is divided into front and rear, and includes a front decorative substrate 352a on the front side and a rear decorative substrate 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged along the outer periphery on each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b. The plurality of LEDs on the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 are full-color LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is located below the ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a decorative substrate cover 353 whose upper side is transparent. The decorative board cover 353 is formed in a front and rear divided form, similar to the production operation ring decorative board 352, and covers the front decorative board 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from the upper side and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

  The stage operation ring decoration board 352 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface thereof, thereby allowing the decoration board cover 353 and the through hole 331c of the ring attachment base 331 to pass through the through-hole 331c. The cover 335, the outer ring lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337 can be decorated with light emission from the inside. Accordingly, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration such that the LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and can output vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sound such as voice and music. It is.

  The vibration speaker 354 can output sound such as voice or music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. The vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire presentation operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can present more various effects to the player.

[3-5e-8. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front and above, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit as seen from the front and bottom. 62A is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the lowered position, and FIG. 62B is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 includes a columnar central pressing operation unit 303a and a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the central pressing operation unit 303a. ing.

  The production operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer periphery, and is arranged on the object with the button unit base 361 attached in the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the central axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward in a columnar shape, and the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 are connected to each other and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 and a pair of guide shafts 362 are attached between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. The disc-shaped lifting base 364 and the pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted respectively. It includes a pair of lift springs 365, the a and elevating base 364 is being biased upward.

  In addition, the production operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 that extends upward from the center of the button unit base 361 and has an upper end attached to the upper base 363, and a rotating shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 mounted so as to protrude upward, the spur gear-shaped lifting / lowering driving gear 368 mounted on the rotation shaft of the operation button lifting / lowering driving motor 367, and the lifting / lowering driving gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-like driven gear 369 that is rotatably attached to the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and a lift cam drive gear member that is rotated by the driven gear 369 and is rotatably attached with the central shaft 366 inserted therethrough. 370, elevating cam drive gear member 370 and the lower end are coupled and the central shaft 66 is inserted so as to be rotatable and is rotated so as to cover the elevating cam member 371 for elevating the elevating base 364, the elevating drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam drive gear member 370 from above. A disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361.

  Further, the production operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted on the upper side of the elevating base 364 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362. A central button main body 373, a pair of button springs 374 disposed between the central button main body 373 and the lifting base 364 and biasing the central button main body 373 upward, and substantially the same as the central button main body 373 A central button cover 375 is formed on the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper part of the upper base 363, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363. And a central button decoration board 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the central button body 373 and the central button cover 375 constitute a central pressing operation portion 303a.

  In addition, the production operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion outside the central button body 373 on the upper surface of the lifting base 364 and has an annular outer peripheral button decoration board 377 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. An outer peripheral board cover 378 that is attached to the lifting base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration board 377 and cover the outer periphery of the central button main body 373, and a portion of the outer peripheral board cover 378 that covers the outer periphery of the central button main body 373 A cylindrical outer periphery decorative lens 379 that is arranged on the outer periphery side above the outer periphery button decoration substrate 377 and has a three-dimensional decoration, and the outer periphery and the upper surface of the outer periphery decoration lens 379 are moved up and down. A transparent outer peripheral button attached to the base 364 and having a central button cover 375 facing upward at the center. Is provided with a bar 380, a. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral board cover 378, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 constitute an outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b.

  The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and the button operation base unit 361 is attached to the button unit base 361 and the lift cam drive gear member 370. And a lift detection sensor 382 that detects the lift of the lift base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

  The button unit base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disk shape and a plurality of legs 361b projecting downward from the base body 361a. The base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361 has an outer diameter that is slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320. The base body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, a lift cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 attached to the upper surface, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and a lift detection sensor 382 on the lower surface. Is installed. In the button unit base 361, the lower end of the leg 361 b is attached to the bottom wall of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320.

  The pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 from the center to the front and the rear at a distance that is half the diameter of the base body 361a. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of metal bars. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

  The upper base 363 has an outer diameter that is about ½ of the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and the lower ends are in contact with the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 and the upper ends are in contact with the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger urging force than the button spring 374.

  The lifting base 364 has an outer diameter that is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 includes a pair of guide holes 364a into which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b penetrating vertically with a size that allows the elevating cam member 371 to pass through at the center. And a pair of guide pins 364d projecting so as to face each other into the center hole 364b in the vicinity of the lower end of the standing wall 364c. Yes. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are attached to be rotatable around the axis.

  The elevating base 364 is guided to be movable up and down by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 through the pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 is restricted from moving upward by the upper end of the standing wall 364c coming into contact with the upper base 363, and has a space in which the bottom 373b of the central button body 373 can move between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364. Forming. The elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371.

  The raising / lowering cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-like gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and to which the lower end of the raising / lowering cam member 371 is connected, and a gear portion 370a. And a lift detection piece 370c that is notched at two locations facing each other and is notched and is detected by the lift detection sensor 382. The raising / lowering cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

  The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably mounted by inserting the central shaft 366 through the center. The elevating cam member 371 includes a pair of cam portions 371a that are 180 degrees apart in the circumferential direction on the columnar outer peripheral surface and project outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pins 364d of the elevating base 364.

  The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the shaft center in the vicinity of the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward in parallel with the axis from the end, and a third cam 371e extending spirally upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d, (See FIG. 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

  The elevating cam member 371 includes a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

  The raising / lowering cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d rotates the raising / lowering cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view in the cam portion 371a. It is formed as follows. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates, the elevating base 364 can be moved up and down by guiding the guide pins 364d of the elevating base 364 by the cam portion 371a.

  The central button body 373 includes a cylindrical tube portion 373a extending vertically, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the tube portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts passing through the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which 362 is slidably inserted, a central port 373d penetrating with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the standing wall 364c of the elevating base 364 at the center of the bottom 373b, and downward from the bottom 373b A pressing detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom 373b in a cylindrical shape and are inserted into the button spring 374 are provided.

  The central button body 373 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a cylindrical portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The center button body 373 is formed such that a bottom portion 373b is disposed between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and an upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a projects upward from the upper base 363. The central port 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends short downward, and the lower end of the central port 373d abuts on the upper surface of the lifting base 364, thereby restricting the downward movement of the central button body 373. The upper end of the standing wall portion 364 c of the elevating base 364 contacts the upper base 363 through the central port 373 d of the central button body 373.

  The central button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed such that their lower ends pass through the lifting base 364 and extend downward, and screws with washers inserted into the lower ends are attached. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f comes into contact with the lower surface of the elevating base 364, so that the upward movement of the central button body 373 is restricted.

  The pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is moved up and down when the bottom 373b of the central button body 373 (the lower end of the central port 373d) abuts the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the urging force of the pair of button springs 374. It is formed so as to penetrate through 364 and protrude downward. The central button body 373 is formed opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a lower urging force than the elevating spring 365.

  The central button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having a diameter substantially the same as the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button body 373, and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided and is formed to have translucency. The center button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a top plate portion 375a and a peripheral wall portion 375b. In the central button cover 375, the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375 b is attached to the upper end of the cylinder portion 373 a in the central button main body 373.

  In the central button decoration board 376, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The central button decoration substrate 376 can decorate the central button cover 375 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 are full-color LEDs. The outer periphery button decoration board 377 can make the outer periphery decoration lens 379 and the outer periphery button cover 380 emit light decoration by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The outer peripheral board cover 378 covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 and is attached to the elevating base 364. The outer peripheral board cover 378 extends in a cylindrical shape upward from the inner periphery of the base board portion 378a. A cylindrical portion 378b covering the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed to be transparent.

  In the outer periphery decorative lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction as it goes upward are arranged in a row at a constant interval in the circumferential direction. The outer periphery decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378 a in the outer periphery substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical cylindrical portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 380a toward the center. As for the outer periphery button cover 380, the lower end of the cylindrical part 380a is attached to the raising / lowering base 364. As shown in FIG. The annular portion 380 b has an inner diameter that is substantially the same size as the cylindrical portion 378 b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  When the production operation button unit 360 is assembled, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is in a state where the lift base 364 is biased upward by a pair of lift springs 365. It is inserted from below into the engaging portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371. In this state, the lift base 364 is in the lowered position where it has moved downward, and the pair of lift springs 365 is compressed. Further, in this state, the central button body 373 is positioned at the upward movement end by the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

  Accordingly, when assembled in the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63 and the like).

  In this state (the state shown in FIG. 62A), when the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward and moved downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button body 373 is moved. The pressure detection piece 373e is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is detected. In a state in which the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the center button cover 375 is substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65C).

  In this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is pressed. It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

  When the lift drive gear 368 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button lift drive motor 367 in the lowered position, the lift cam is driven via the driven gear 369 engaged with the lift drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, and the elevating cam member 371 connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 62 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is moved from the locking portion 371c to the first position. The cam 371b rolls to the left portion of the locking portion 371c, and the lifting base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  When the guide pin 364d that rolls relatively to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, Since the two cams 371d extend vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the urging force of the elevating spring 365 moves the guide pin 364d along the second cam 371d, and the guide pin 364d At the same time, the lifting base 364 is raised to a raised position.

  In the raised position, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the driving of the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

  In the raised position, the upper end of the upright wall portion 364c of the lifting base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the lifting base 364 is restricted. In the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) at the lowering position is maintained, and the central button cover 375 is maintained. In addition, the entire pressing operation unit 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 is moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

  When assembled in the production operation unit 300 and moved to the raised position, the center button cover 375 and the outer button cover 380 are in a state of projecting larger than the upper surface of the production operation ring 330 (see FIG. 65B, etc.). reference).

  When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303 a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the button spring 374 in the raised position, the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 are attached to the button spring 374. The center button body 373 comes into contact with the lifting base 364 by moving downward against the force. In a state where the central button body 373 is in contact with the lifting base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protrudes downward from the lifting base 364, but the lifting base 364 is the button unit base 361. Therefore, the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

  When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 resist the urging force of the button spring 374, After the central button body 373 contacts the lifting base 364, the lifting base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the lifting spring 365, and the lower end of the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 contacts the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the outer button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is also in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364.

  As described above, when the elevating base 364 contacts the button unit base 361 in a state where the central button main body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 protruding downward from the elevating base 364. Is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and the pressing of the center button cover 375 (the center pressing operation portion 303a) is detected.

  On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward with a force higher than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the raised position, the elevating base 364 is moved up and down via the outer peripheral button cover 380. The lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 by moving downward against the urging force of 365. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364. However, since the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) protrudes upward by the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button body The pressure detection piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the lift base 364, and the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

  In order to return the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the raising / lowering cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise by the operation button raising / lowering drive motor 367. 62B, the third cam 371e that is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by 371e, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  When the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b along with the rotation of the lift cam member 371, the downward movement of the lift base 364 stops, and the guide pin 364d moves to the first cam. Roll along 371b. Thereafter, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation By stopping the rotation of the lift cam member 371 by the button lift drive motor 367, the original lowered position is obtained.

[3-5e-9. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation unit relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped substrate box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit relay board 392 attached in the substrate box 391.

  The board box 391 has a motor cover part 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when the board box 391 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a dish center upper decoration board 314, a dish center lower decoration board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, a production operation ring decoration board 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367, the central button decorative board 376, the outer peripheral button decorative board 377, the press detection sensor 381, the lift detection sensor 382, and the tray unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 are relayed. Yes.

[3-5e-10. Effect of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the rendering operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative board in a plan view of the effect operation unit as seen from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 65 (a) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation part is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing of the pressing operation part. It is a front view of a dish unit when an operation part is pressed.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player on the upper surface. The effect operation unit 301 includes a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 includes a columnar central pressing operation unit 303 a located at the center of the rotation operating unit 302, and an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit disposed between the central pressing operation unit 303 a and the rotation operating unit 302. 303b.

  The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The central pressing operation portion 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  The production operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in an inclined state so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operation unit 302 (production operation ring 330) is lowered. Accordingly, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, move forward as it goes upward). .

  In the normal operation state, the production operation unit 300 has a state in which the pressing operation unit 303 slightly protrudes from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See FIG. 63 and the like).

  In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the left side by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340, the effect operation ring 330 is transmitted via the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 rotates in the clockwise direction in plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated counterclockwise in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view. .

  The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and can rotate and reciprocate the rotation operation unit 302 by repeating normal rotation and reverse rotation within a range of a predetermined rotation angle. Unlike the vibration by the vibration speaker 354, only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

  The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated in the clockwise direction in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350 and rotated. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the interval between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 that are separated in the circumferential direction is smaller than the interval between the plurality of detection pieces 345b that are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. The interval is not an integer multiple. Thereby, the 1st rotation detection sensor 347 and the 2nd rotation detection sensor 348 are constituted so that detection piece 345b may not be detected at the same timing.

  In this embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the clockwise direction in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. To do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 can detect the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (the rotation operation unit 302) according to the order in which the detection pieces 345b are detected. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be detected based on the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  Thus, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the rotation operation unit 302 is driven to rotate in the same direction as the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, so that the rotation operation can be lightly assisted. . Alternatively, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be made heavy or a click feeling can be given.

  The rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the figure, the rotation operation unit 302 is attached in a state in which the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, and thus is formed in a shape that can be easily grasped by the player's hand. .

  Thereby, since the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, the rotation operation unit 302 can be operated to rotate in a manner that is easy for the player to perform. Sexuality is enhanced. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. In addition, since the lower surface side of the rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be gripped like a car handle.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decoration board 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape below the effect operation ring 330. As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 to emit light. In addition, since the plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape along the rotation operation unit 302 in the production operation ring decorative substrate 352, the plurality of LEDs arranged in sequence are sequentially arranged in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, it is possible to decorate only a specific part of the rotating operation unit 302 that is rotating. Thereby, it is possible to make the player have an illusion that an LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating operation unit 302 that rotates.

  As shown in FIG. 65A, the production operation unit 300 has a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 with an upper surface higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 in a normal state. It is in a state of a lowered position slightly protruding upward. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the center pressing operation unit 303a in the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the center pressing operation portion 303a (central button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b (outer periphery button cover 380). The pressure is detected by the sensor 381.

  In this normal (downward position) state, even if the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b (outer periphery button cover 380) does not move downward, and pressure detection is performed. The pressure is not detected by the sensor 381.

  When the lifting cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button lifting drive motor 367 in a normal state, the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 is detached from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Due to the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365, the pressing operation portion 303 together with the elevating base 364 vigorously protrudes upward to be in the raised position (see FIG. 65 (b)). In this raised position state, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is positioned higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. In other words, the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude upwardly from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

  When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the central pressing operation unit 303a first moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the central pressing operation unit 303a The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation part 303b are in a state of substantially the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect pressure. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303 a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303 b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation portion 303 a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303 b are the rotation operating portion 302. The height is substantially the same as the top surface (see FIG. 65C). In this state, the press detection sensor 381 detects the press.

  Further, when the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is pressed downward in a state where the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a remains protruding above the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b. The outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b and the center pressing operation portion 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is substantially in the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operation portion 302 (see FIG. 65 (a)). . In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect pressure.

  As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the lower moving end regardless of the lowered position or the raised position. ing. Accordingly, it is possible to prompt the player to firmly press the center pressing operation portion 303a, and thus attention can be drawn to the operation of the effect operation portion 301 in the player participation type effect. , The player participation type production can be more enjoyed.

  Even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the rotation operation becomes easier with the pressing operation unit 303 as a clue, or the rotation operation is difficult due to the pressing operation unit 303 being in the way. Therefore, the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and more various operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. FIG. 66A is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the back. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front side of the door frame left side base 401 and the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. A door frame left side decorative substrate 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402; A door frame left side decoration body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403.

  The door frame left side base 401 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and opens forward. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and includes a left side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. The door frame left side decorative board 402 can light up and decorate the door frame left side decorative body 404 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The left side reflector 403 has a through-hole 403a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left-side decorative board 402. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in milky white having translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically. Thereby, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a semi-tube shape opened rearward.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is formed so that the lower end is continuous with the left end of the dish upper left decorative unit 271 of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top unit 450 door frame top decorative body 453. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower left end.

  In the door frame left side unit 400, the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are formed at substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 in the state assembled to the door frame 3 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and it looks as if a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. 69A is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 69B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame right side unit 410 extends in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and penetrates in the left-right direction. And a plurality of side window decorations 410b capable of emitting light disposed in the side window 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in the game hall or the like where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or is playing with the right pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to make the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 difficult to see, and to form a personal space for the player that protects the privacy of the game.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 that is attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extends vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window decoration parts 410b attached to the front surface and extending in a cylindrical shape forward and arranged vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window decoration member 412 on the front surface A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the part corresponding to the interior decoration part 410b, and the side window interior decoration part decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411, and the plurality of side window interior decoration members 412 And an internal reflector 414 inserted into the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is disposed on the front side of the front end of the side window decorative member 412 and is attached to the right side reflector 415 extending vertically and the door frame right side base 411. A door that extends in a flat plate shape in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction so as to cover the right side surfaces of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 and that has a through-hole 416a that penetrates in the left-right direction and constitutes the side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411, and the right side reflector 415, and is flat in the vertical direction and the front / rear direction so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. The door frame is formed with a through-hole 417a that extends in a shape and penetrates in the left-right direction and forms the side window 410a. A side panel 417, and a.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 so as to cover the door frame right side decorative board 418 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and the front side of the right side reflector 415. And a door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

  The door frame right side base 411 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is opened rearward. The side window decorative member 412 has a flat connection base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality (three here) of side window decorative portions 410b arranged in the vertical direction. The side window decorative member 410b of the side window decorative member 412 is formed in a truncated cone shape having a slightly smaller outer diameter on the front end side than the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window decorative member 412, the front end of the side window decorative portion 410 b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The side window decorative member 412 is attached to the upper portion of the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 from the lower position with respect to the vertical center. The side window decorative member 412 is formed in a milky white color having translucency.

  The side window interior decoration part decoration board 413 is attached to a portion of the front side of the door frame right side base 411 that is behind the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412. The plurality of LEDs provided on the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 are full-color LEDs. In the side window decoration part decoration board 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape in the vertical and horizontal directions around the axis of the side window decoration part 410b in the rear part of each of the side window decoration parts 410b. Has been.

  The internal reflector 414 is formed in an X shape when viewed from the front, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decoration portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 partitions the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, top, bottom, left, and right.

  The right side reflector 415 is vertically extended at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and the shape in the front-rear direction is formed in a wave shape that moves forward and then moves backward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. Has been. The right side reflector 415 penetrates back and forth, and a plurality of through holes 415a are formed through which the LEDs on the door frame right side decorative board 418 face forward.

  The door frame right side outer panel 416 is flat and extends up and down and front and rear, the rear side extends vertically linearly, and the front side extends in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through-hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction and formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the door frame and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 The rear side of the right side decorative board 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be covered. The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side inner panel 417 is flat and extends vertically and front and rear. The rear side extends vertically linearly, and the front side extends in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a through-hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction and formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. The rear side of the right side decorative board 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be covered. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and includes a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. In the door frame right side decorative board 418, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face are full color LEDs. The door frame right side decorative board 418 can light up and decorate the door frame right side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in milky white having translucency. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc that bulges forward extends in a wave shape up and down along the right side reflector 415. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a semi-tube shape opened rearward.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is formed so that the lower end is continuous with the right end of the dish upper right decorative body 276 of the dish upper right decorative unit 275 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed to be continuous with the lower right end of the body 453.

  The door frame right side unit 410 decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and a portion of the door frame right side decorative body 419 is a columnar fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded. The door frame right side unit 410 has a front end (front side) that extends forward in a wave shape so that a quarter portion from the top projects forward, and is formed in a partition shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is provided with a cylindrical (columnar) side window decorative portion 410b extending in the front-rear direction in the side window 410a, and causes the LED of the side window decorative portion decorative substrate 413 to emit light. Thus, the side window decoration part 410b can be decorated with light emission. Then, by decorating the side window decoration part 410b with light emission, the inside of the side window 410a can be made dazzling, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

  According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LEDs of the side window decoration part decoration board 413 that emits and decorates the plurality of side window decoration parts 410b are turned off. The inside of the game area 5a can be viewed from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility) through the three side window decoration portions 410b in 410a. Therefore, even if a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game does not move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facility, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily used. It can be found in the above, and a sense of expectation for a game in the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, other parts including the side window interior decoration portion 410b can block the line of sight of the player located nearby, It is possible to make it difficult for a player to see the entire game area 5a, and to make it difficult for other players to feel like being seen by other players, so that other players can play games without hesitation. .

  Further, when the three side window decoration portions 410b are caused to emit light by the LED of the side window decoration portion decoration board 413, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled by the light, and the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. Let At this time, since the three side window decorative portions 410b are formed in a columnar shape, light is emitted in a band shape and a radial shape. It can be made difficult to see, and it can be made difficult to look into the game area 5a from other players such as the neighbors. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult to look inside the game area 5a, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1, so that other players are interested in being noticed. It is possible to prevent feelings of discomfort from being unable to devote themselves to the game and to feel uncomfortable due to mistakes being induced, making the game more enjoyable by dedicating the player to the game. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. 72A is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, FIG. 72B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in the state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front top, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front bottom. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

  The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 attached to the upper side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451, and the upper front surface. The top upper cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the door frame top base 451. A door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the door frame.

  The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top central decorative substrate 455 that is attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face; A door frame top right decorative board 457 that is attached to the right of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face. I have.

  The door frame top unit 450 includes a top center reflector 458 disposed between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452; The top left reflector 459 disposed between the body 453 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457 And a top right reflector 460 attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452.

  Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached to the central speaker box 461 downward, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near the front left and right ends of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 respectively attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 are covered from below. A top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454, a lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below, and a door frame top Door frame top relay board mounted near the upper right end of the base 451 67, includes a door frame top top plate 468 is attached to the top on the cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451, a.

  The door frame top base 451 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 451a that extends to the left and right at the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and from both the left and right ends of the front surface of the main body portion 451a. A forward projecting portion 451b projecting forward. The main body 451a is formed in a curved shape such that the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward so that the lower side is along the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101. The left and right front projecting portions 451b are inclined so that the front end moves rearward as it goes downward, and are formed in a box shape opened rearward. The front protrusion 451b on the right side when viewed from the front is also open upward.

  The top upper cover 452 is formed in substantially the same shape as the door frame top base 451 in a front view. The top upper cover 452 is formed in a shape that covers the outer sides of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and connects the upper front ends of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top upper cover 452 protrudes most forward in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the left-right direction center toward both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top upper cover 452 has an opening 452a that is largely cut from the rear end toward the front on the upper surface. The opening 452a is closed by a door frame top top plate 468.

  The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a shape in which the semicircular arc that bulges forward decreases in curvature from the left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction, and extends in the left-right direction along the front end of the top upper cover 452. Is formed. Thereby, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tubular shape opened rearward. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and are formed to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

  The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body 451a of the door frame top base 451, and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. As shown in FIG. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is vertically spaced between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a that are spaced apart in the left-right direction and connect the front and rear ends and extend upward in a flat plate shape. A pair of central speaker ports 454b facing the top center speaker 462, and a pair of side speaker ports 454c penetrating vertically on the outer sides of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and facing the top side speaker 464. ing. A central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

  The door frame top center decorative board 455 is formed in a strip shape extending in the left-right direction. In the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top center decorative board 455 can light-decorate the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can light-decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in a band plate shape extending left and right. In the door frame top right decorative board 457, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can light-decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, and are provided on the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, respectively. A through-hole penetrating back and forth is formed at a position corresponding to each mounted LED.

  The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a pair of top central speakers 462 are attached so as to face downward and forward. The central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full range speaker and outputs sound such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

  The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs a high frequency range of sounds such as voice and music.

  The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having countless through holes. Sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

  The door frame top relay substrate 467 includes a door frame top center decorative substrate 455, a door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a door frame top right decorative substrate 457, a top central speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and the door frame base unit 100. This relays the connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105.

  The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top upper cover 452, the front end is locked to the top upper cover 452, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are respectively continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, thereby forming an integral decoration. Yes. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sound such as voice and music to the player side through the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a front view of a door frame shown together with each decorative board. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending in the vertical direction and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes a dish upper left decorative body 271 of the dish unit 200, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a of the rendering operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire periphery.

  Dish left upper decorative body 271, dish upper right decorative body 276, dish center upper decorative body 312 a, door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side decorative body 419, and door frame top decorative body surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101 a Since 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration such that the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

  In the door frame 3, a dish upper left decorative body 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and Behind the door frame top decorative body 453, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish center upper decorative board 314, the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, and the door frame top central decoration. Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged, by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the decorative substrate, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be decorated with light emission, It is possible to show the player the light emission effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

  In the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, an annular and donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is coaxially disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 on the upper surface. A pressing operation unit 303 including a cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation unit 303 b and a columnar central pressing operation unit 303 a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 is provided below the rotation operation unit 302. A doughnut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tube-shaped) two large dish central upper decorative body 312a and dish central lower decorative body 312b are attached two apart vertically and The door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side unit 41 of the door frame left side unit 400 having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decorative body 312a and the dish lower central decorative body 312b. Door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the outside of Tobiramado 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming region 5a.

  As a result, in the dish unit 200, three donut-shaped members are lined up and down in the rotation operation section 302, the two dish center upper decoration bodies 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be increased, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made conspicuous.

  Further, the upper left decorative body 271, the upper right decorative body 276 of the dish, the lower left decorative body 281, the lower right decorative body 286 of the dish, and the lower central decorative body 312 b of the dish are arranged in half. The thickness of the tube-like tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Thereby, in the production operation unit 300, since it becomes larger from the lower end toward the upper side, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302 that can be operated by the player arranged on the upper side, The pressing operation unit 303 can be shown large, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, a donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward as it goes upward. Since it is inclined so as to be lowered, the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 faces the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the player rotates from the player. The entire contents of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily seen, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be shown larger. Further, as described above, since the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are easily understood, the player can easily recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is rotating, so that when the player participation type effect is executed, the player rotates immediately. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the player's participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the plate center upper decoration body 312 a and the plate center lower decoration body 312 b are made larger than those of the rotation operation unit 302. In the dish unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end side of the rotation operation unit 302, the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b protrudes more forward than the upper dish 201, and Since the decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotation operation section 302, the rotation operation section 302, the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are made conspicuous. At the same time, it is possible to improve the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302 by the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, attract the player's interest strongly, and appeal to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. 81 is an exploded perspective view in which the main body frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view in which the main body frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or uses the game ball B used in the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (island equipment side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end so that it can be opened and closed, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed Mounted as possible.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 in front view. A main body frame upper hinge member 510, which is rotatably attached to the outer frame hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and is rotatably mounted to the door frame hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3, and the main body frame. A body frame lower hinge assembly that is attached to the lower end of the base unit 500 on the left side when viewed from the front and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. A solid body 520.

  The main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500. A ball launcher 540 for driving a ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a payout base unit 550 A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower rear portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main body frame base unit 500 A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame base unit 5 0 viewed from the front right side with an installed and the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, and a.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member for guiding a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically, and a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502 and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 are provided.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and extending upward in the shape of a box extending left and right. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in a groove shape opened upward, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, A second rail cover 555 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 so as to be separated from the one rail cover 554 to the left in a front view, and between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, A ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end, and a ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553; It is equipped with a.

  The payout unit 560 is based on instructions from the payout control board 633 for the ball guide unit 570 for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570. The payout device 580 for paying out one by one, the upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full ball path unit 600 on the door frame 3 side Alternatively, a lower full sphere path unit 610 for guiding to the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame flanges 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and protrude rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame collars 653 that can be locked with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the door frame collar 652 or the outer frame collar 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame collar 652 attached downward. A lock spring 655 that is energized and urges the outer frame collar 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame collar 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 83A is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 83B is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. 84A to 84C are explanatory views showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has a rear portion inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and the main body frame base 501 is formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically, and guides the connection cable 503. A connecting cable guide member 502, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and holds the game board 5 in a detachable manner. ing.

  The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a formed in a rectangle whose front view extends vertically, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board insertion slot 501b through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and a lower side of the game board insertion slot 501b and the game board 5 is placed. A placement unit 501c and a game board restricting part 501d that protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placement part 501c and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rear are provided.

  Moreover, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward at the lower right side of the front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and a launching device mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launching device 540, and a launching device mounting Cylinder insertion port 501f that penetrates forward and backward on the right side of the front view of the portion 501e and through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the game board mounting portion 501c in front view. A circular speaker opening 501g facing the front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in 620, and a main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward and below the speaker opening 501g. The cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted and the cable mounting recess 501h And a, a cable insertion hole 501i extending through the front and rear at the right end upper viewing.

  Further, the main body frame base 501 extends in a plate shape rearward from the right side of the game board insertion slot 501b in the base main body 501a, and a locking unit 650 is attached to the right side, and a back cover 640 is provided at the rear end. It is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends of the rear end of the base body 501a and the left end in front view on the rear surface of the base body 501a, and is used to attach the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. The upper hinge attaching part 501k and the lower hinge attaching part 501l are provided.

  A game board lock member 505 is attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position below the game board mounting part 501c on the front side and to the right of the speaker opening 501g so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The game board lock member 505 allows the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b to be detachable by enabling the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion slot 501b to be restricted.

  The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right side of the speaker opening 501g to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable attachment recess 501h is formed in a size that can accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and can be attached to the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a flat plate-like guide main body 502a extending to the left and right, and protrudes forward on both the upper and lower sides of the guide main body 502a and extends to the right from the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b, a columnar mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and through the front and rear at both upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a and left and right A plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a direction.

  The connecting cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. Is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached so that the attachment shaft 502c can rotate around an axis extending vertically near the right end in the cable attachment recess 501h. Thereby, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinged) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

  The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-board of the door frame 3. Connected to the relay board 105.

  Then, the effect by the connection cable guide member 502 is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be able to rotate the hinge. ) Is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in parallel with the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

  The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 is connected to the interface board 635 on the side connected to the connection cable guide member. The left and right directions of the plurality of through-holes 502d formed on the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right to the left of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the rear side of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 with the door frame 3 closed with respect to the main body frame 4. (See FIG. 84 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l and passes through the cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 to open the door frame relay board cover. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 is disposed on the left side of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

  In this state, if the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated so as to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side attached to the door frame 3 in the connection cable 503, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the right end mounting shaft 502c. At this time, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 84B).

  The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases. However, the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes as follows. In this embodiment, the maximum angle of the open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

  Thus, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

  When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed rearward by the connection cable 503. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side moves rearward about the attachment shaft 502c. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an open angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the door frame 3 from moving in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed. It is possible to prevent a malfunction from occurring.

  Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back by 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can attach a heel. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 that is folded back 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 due to folding is applied. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to its folding, and to connect the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502). The door frame 3 can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

  Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is positioned closer to the center axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable guide member 502 holds the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 with the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame 3. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 can be pulled toward the central axis (axial core) side.

  In the present embodiment, the door passes more than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103 around the center axis (axial axis) of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame and the hinge pin 126 on the door frame through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502. The angle at which the tangent line that touches the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axial center) side of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower door hinge pin 126 intersects the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. The configuration is as follows. Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby closing the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 opened via the connection cable 503. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) when the door frame 3 is opened and closed can be set to 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 is closed when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on main body frame]
The body frame upper hinge member 510 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The door frame hinge assembly 120 is rotatably mounted.

  The main body frame upper hinge member 510 has an upper hinge main body 511 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent downward in an L shape, and protrudes in a cylindrical shape upward from the front end of the upper hinge main body 511. And a hinge pin 512 on the body frame that is pivotally supported by the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extending portion, and has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for pivotally supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. I have.

  The body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion that is bent downward and extends vertically in the upper hinge main body 511. The body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the body frame upper hinge pin 512 being inserted into the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame hinge member 51 in the outer frame hinge assembly 50. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 from below.

  The body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to the body frame 4 as a door frame. 3 can be hingedly mounted.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably attached.

  The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and a lower hinge first main body 521 in which a rear portion of a flat plate member extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. And a lower hinge second main body 522 in which a rear portion of a flat plate member extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is provided with a portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 extending horizontally from a portion of the lower hinge first main body 521 extending horizontally and spaced downward. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge main body 521.

  The lower hinge first main body 521 vertically penetrates in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c in the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. A hinge hole 521a is provided. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the body frame upper hinge member 510.

  The lower hinge second main body 522 vertically penetrates near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a and a restriction piece 522b for extending upward from a position behind the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion and for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3. It is equipped with. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a in the upper hinge body 511 of the body frame upper hinge member 510.

  In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. It is done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to the main body frame 4, the door frame 3. Can be hingedly mounted.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in plan view with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extrusion mold material.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and downward on the rear side of the portion extending rightward from the front end. Two left position restricting members 531 are attached so as to be separated from each other in the vertical direction.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove portion 530a that is open to the right and extends vertically on the front side that is formed in a U shape with the right side open in plan view. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the groove 530 a is inserted into the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove portion 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 is meandered in a plan view, and an illegal tool is seen from the left side of the pachinko machine 1. Can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( The unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5) is prevented.

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 85 (a) is a perspective view of the ball launcher in the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 85 (b) is a perspective view of the ball launcher as seen from behind. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. This is for driving into the five game areas 5a. The ball launcher 540 can drive the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right front corner of the door frame 3.

  The ball launcher 540 is attached to the flat launch base 541 attached to the launcher attachment portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500, and attached to the rear surface of the right portion of the launch base 541 when viewed from the front. A firing solenoid 542 composed of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the firing base 541, a hitting ball 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation shaft of the firing solenoid 542, and from the vicinity of the tip of the hitting ball 543 A launch rail 544 that is attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

  In the ball launcher 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated in a state where the ball is in the state, the launch solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting ball 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hit ball 543 is guided to the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and is driven into the game area 5a.

  When the game ball B that has been hit does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball B, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) Is dropped to the foul ball receiving port 150c of the lower foul cover unit 150 and is discharged to the lower plate 202 through the foul cover unit 150.

[4-6. Dispensing base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 (a) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 86 (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as seen from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the left-right direction with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction substantially the same width as the top plate portion. Left side plate portion 551b, right side plate portion 551c having a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as top plate portion 551a and extending downward from the right side of top plate portion 551a, and the rear side of top plate portion 551a The back plate upper portion 551d extending downward from the right side plate portion 551c to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and extending from the position closer to the front side to the right side from the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the vicinity of the lower end with a substantially constant width. Back plate left portion 551e, inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of left plate portion 551b, and from the front of the lower side of left plate portion 551b to the right Extends to approximately the same position as the right side of the back plate left part 551e It includes a bottom plate portion 551g and a connecting plate portion 551h, which connects the lower side of the right inner plate portion 551f of the bottom plate portion 551g, a. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape opened forward and inward of the L shape.

  The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending to the left and right with a width substantially the same as the width of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends vertically with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. The payout base 551 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 at the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c.

  The payout base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion that is opened rearward by the left side plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner side plate portion 551f, and extends upward and downward. A unit 560 is attached. Further, the payout base 551 protrudes to the right at the upper part of the right side surface in front view of the inner plate portion 551f, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

  The payout base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and has a ball tank 552 that is open upward in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a portion that extends to the left and right of the payout base 551. A tank rail 553 which is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in a groove shape opened upward.

  Also, the payout base unit 550 has a first rail cover 554 attached in the middle of the left and right directions at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and is spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view and on the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 that is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stopper member 557 attached near the left end in front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

  The ball tank 552 is formed so that the left-right direction is about half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. Is formed. The ball tank 552 is attached to the right side in the left-right direction on the top surface of the top plate portion 551a. The bottom surface of the sphere tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553 on the left end side.

  The tank rail 553 is attached to the vicinity of the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the top surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551. The tank rail 553 has a shape in plan view that is slanted to the left and rear from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one depth from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to become the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape extending straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered, and the left end of the bottom surface is opened downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570 a in the ball guide unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

  In addition, the tank rail 553 has an upper end of a portion extending straight to the left so that the height on the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B so that it is more steep with respect to the horizontal than the bottom surface. It is inclined so that the left end side is lowered at a certain angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. Further, the tank rail 553 has a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball rectifying member 556, and a ball stopper member 557 attached to the upper end of a portion extending straight to the left.

  The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper ends of the portions of the tank rail 553 that extend straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth in the front-rear direction of the upper end of the tank rail 553 from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. Is.

  The ball straightening member 556 is located at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553 with respect to an axis around which the end on the first rail cover 554 side extends in the front-rear direction. It is mounted rotatably. The ball straightening member 556 includes a straightening piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). By delaying the flow of the game ball B on the upper side of the game ball B circulating in two upper and lower stages by the rectifying piece 556a and rectifying the flow so that it flows in a single stage on the downstream side, the flow in the tank rail 553 The ball is not clogged even if the height is lowered.

  The ball stop member 557 is attached to be slidable in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553. By sliding leftward, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed, It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side.

  Further, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 in front view on the upper surface of the portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. The external terminal board 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facilities of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion slot 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the dispensing unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 87 and 88. 87A is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87B is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. 88 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 88 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

  The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is disposed below the ball guiding unit 570 and is guided by the ball guiding unit 570. In accordance with an instruction from the payout control board 633, a payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full ball path unit And a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

  The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. Based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600, and the ball full path 580b is operated by the ball pull lever 593. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

  The upper full ball path unit 600 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B released from the ball removal passage 580b separately. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full ball path unit 600, and is released from the ball extraction path 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the back base left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B toward the payout device 580. Is to do.

  The ball guide unit 570 has a guide passage 570a extending in a serpentine shape through which the game ball B can flow and has a box-shaped guide unit base 571 that is open forward and a front side of the guide unit base 571 is closed. The front guide passage front cover 572, the movable piece member 573 movable by the game ball B flowing in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. And a ball-cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of (see FIG. 92).

  The spherical guide unit 570 is formed such that the shape of the front view of the guide unit base 571 and the guide passage front cover 572 is a quadrangle extending vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center of the guide unit base 571 in the height direction, and then bends to the right to guide the guide unit base 571. The unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly turning back and forth between the widths in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guidance unit base 571.

  The guide passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B flows. Can be guided in a single row.

  In the vicinity of the upper part of the ball guiding unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached so as to be able to advance and retreat into the guiding passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached to an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at a portion on the right outside of the front view of the guide passage 570a, and a part of the lower end projects into the guide passage 570a by its own weight. It is formed to do. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the projecting portion is pushed by the game ball B and is not retracted and protrudes from the inside of the guide passage 570a when the game ball B comes into contact with the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a. It becomes.

  When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the ball-cut detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and a part of the movable piece member 573 moves backward from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When not projecting, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Accordingly, the ball-cut detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide passage 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide passage 570a.

  In the state where the ball guide unit 570 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guide passage 570 a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guide passage 570 a is the discharge passage of the discharge device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guiding passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games are placed in the guiding passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. In addition, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cut detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear cross-sectional view of the payout unit of the payout unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade. 90A is a rear cross-sectional view of the payout device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 90B is a cross-sectional view cut along the line AA in FIG. It is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the left back portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 from the rear.

  The payout device 580 has a payout device main body 581 having a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can flow and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. A flat-type dispensing device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and is opened rearward. ing.

  The payout device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the payout device main body 581, and has a payout motor 584 whose rotation shaft projects between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and a rotation shaft of the payout motor 584. A spur gear-like drive gear 585 attached, and a spur gear-like first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device front lid 583. The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 and the second transmission gear 587 are meshed with the first transmission gear 586 and rotatably mounted by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583. A spur gear-like payout gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the payout gear 588a and between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. A payout gear member 588 that is rotatably attached, and a plurality of blade pieces 589a that integrally rotate with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 and project into the payout passage 580a. And a blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the payout device main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

  Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear cover 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, the payout device main body 581 and the back of the payout device. The ball removal movable piece 592 attached to the lid 582 so as to open and close the ball removal passage 580b at a portion branched from the payout passage 580a, and the ball removal movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball removal passage 580b is closed. And a ball ejecting lever 593 that is slidable in the vertical direction by a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device rear lid 582.

  The payout device 580 is formed in a quadrangular shape whose plan view extends vertically. The payout device 580 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opened upward at a position leftward from the center in the left-right direction and a downstream end at a position near the right end in the left-right direction. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from about 1/3 of the total height so as to move gradually to the left as it goes downward from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It bends at about ３ of the left and right width and extends downward substantially vertically so as to go to the center (rotary axis) of the delivery vane 589. Then, on the upper side of the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the outer periphery of the payout blade 589 Is extended downward in a concentric circular arc shape with the discharge vane 589, and vertically extends to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the rear view from the center of the discharge vane 589.

  In the payout passage 580a, a payout detection sensor 591 is disposed below the payout blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end.

  The ball extraction passage 580b is branched at a portion that extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the payout passage 580a and bends to the right, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side when viewed from the back. It opens downward near the left end.

  The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b are branched. The main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to protrude rearward and frontward from each other so as to form a narrower gap, and to be continuous with the left side wall in the rear view of the payout passage 580a and the ball extraction passage 580b. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a branch from the ball extraction passage 580b in the payout passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a position about 1/3 from above. It is formed at the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed obliquely upward to the left in the rear view, and are mainly formed to constitute the side wall of the ball extraction passage 580b. The ball extraction movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  The payout motor 584 is attached to the right in the rear view of the part where the payout passage 580a in the payout device main body 581 extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are disposed in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 includes three plate-like detection pieces 588b extending outward at an angular interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

  The payout blade 589 is disposed between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a extends in the payout passage 580a from the upper side toward the rotation axis and then extends to the right in the rear view so that the space between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage B is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. And protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout vane 589 includes a ball accommodating portion 589b that is recessed with an arc having a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between the three blade pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. Thereby, the payout blade 589 can restrict the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a and rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear. Thereby, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

  The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are attached coaxially by a payout device rear lid 582 and a payout device front lid 583 so as to be integrally rotatable. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotation shaft of the payout gear member 588 in the rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the dispensing blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the dispensing blade 589.

  The upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatably attached around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is bent in a square shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The ball-moving movable piece 592 has a depth in the front-rear direction that is smaller than a gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is possible to project into the ball extraction passage 580b or retreat out of the ball extraction passage 580b through the gap between the two.

  The ball release lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction in the rear left view near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592. A part of the ball pulling lever 593 passes through the dispensing device rear lid 582 and protrudes backward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the lower end, the lower portion can come into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball removal movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball removal passage 580b can be closed by the ball removal movable piece 592. Further, by positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the rising end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened (FIG. 90).

  When the ball removal lever 593 is lifted to turn the ball removal movable piece 592 so that the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated, the game ball B that has been in a state of being connected in a daisy chain on the upstream side of the ball removal movable piece 592 Will flow down to the ball passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball extraction passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flows down straight to the ball discharge passage 580b. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will flow down as soon as possible.

  In this way, in a state where the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball removal passage 580b, so that the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the ball, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear cover side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear cover 582. Since it can move outward from the inner surface of the ball extraction passage 580b, the ball extraction movable piece 592 is moved to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b by the abutment force. The game ball B is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, so that a strong force can be prevented from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592. Piece 59 Deterioration and breakage of the durability can be suppressed.

  For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult to damage the ball removal movable piece 592, so that more game balls B can be discharged earlier to the island facility side downstream of the ball removal passage 580 b. An increase in time required for replacement or maintenance of the machine 1 can be suppressed, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

  Further, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a which are closer than the game ball B, and the ball removal passage 580b. Since the game ball B comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 is moved between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even when the game ball B moves together with the ball removal movable piece 592 to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a when moving outward through the gap, the distance from the game ball B is larger. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outwardly between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is prevented by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movable movable piece 592 is moved by an inertial force, a strong force is not applied to the movable ball movable piece 592, and the movable ball movable piece 592 can be made difficult to be damaged, and the body side guide The game ball B does not jump out of the ball extraction passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably circulated to the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full sphere path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The upper full ball path unit 600 is attached from the rear to the lower side of the payout device 580 at the lower rear portion of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550. The upper full sphere path unit 600 is used to guide the game ball B released downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full sphere path unit 610. The upper full sphere path unit 600 is formed in a quadrilateral shape whose front view extends vertically.

  The upper full sphere path unit 600 is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has a box-shaped upper full base 601 that is open on the rear side, and a box-like shape that is attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and is open on the front side. The upper full tank cover 602 and a discharge device pressing member 603 that is rotatably mounted near the upper end of the upper full cover 602 and can press the discharge device 580 upward. The upper full base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side when viewed from the front, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the back cover.

  The upper full ball path unit 600 is opened upward near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and extends upward along the left side from the bottom to a position of about 2/3 of the total height. The ball receiving passage 600a and the upper paying ball receiving passage 600a communicate with each other, extend about 3/4 of the full width to the right in front view, and extend downward from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. An upper sphere storage passage 600b, an upper normal payout passage 600c that extends downward from the left side of the front view from the left-right center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b and opens downward on the lower surface, and an upper upper portion that is adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c. An upper full tank discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side in front view from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opening downward on the lower surface, and in the vicinity of the right end in front view on the upper surface. And a, and upper ball 抜通 passage 600e that opens downward in the lower surface near the right end after extending substantially vertically downwards and opens upwardly (see Figure 92).

  The upper full tank path unit 600 has an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper full tank payout path 600d, and an upper full ball discharge path 600e that are open in a line from the left side when viewed from the front. In the state where the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled in the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is opened directly below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and The upstream end of the passage 600e opens just below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. As a result, the game ball B released (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank discharge passage 600d. From any of the above. The game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 is released downward through the upper ball extraction passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The lower full tank path unit 610 is mounted on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550 and attached to the lower part of the upper full ball path unit 600. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the board unit 620 side. The lower full sphere path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lowered, and the rear end extends upward.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal full passage 610a, a lower full tank discharge path 610b, and a lower full ball discharge path 610c. The lower full tank base extends in the front-rear direction and is opened upward. 611, a lower full cover 612 that is attached to the upper side of the lower full base 611, a lower normal discharge passage 610a that is attached to the front end of the lower full base 611 so as to be rotatable around a front and rear axis. A discharge passage opening / closing door 613 capable of opening and closing the downstream end opening of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a discharge passage opening / closing door 613 in a direction to close the downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b are attached. A closing spring 614.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal payout path 610a, a lower full tank payout path 610b, and a lower full ball discharge path 610c arranged in order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward from the rear end. In the state, the respective upstream ends are open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610 a and the lower full tank payout passage 610 b extend forward in a state where they are aligned side by side, and are opened forward at the front end of the lower full ball path unit 610. The lower full tank discharge passage 610b extends forward in a slightly lower state than the lower normal discharge passage 610a. The lower ball extraction passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b as viewed from the front, and opens to the right in the middle of the front-rear direction.

  The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. The discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is urged clockwise by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end opening (downstream end) of each of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. The opening is closed. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 includes an operation protrusion 613a protruding forward. The operating projection 613a is formed in a short arc shape centered on the turning center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613, and the front end surface approaches the end in the counterclockwise direction. It is inclined to protrude forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the payout unit 560, and a lower normal payout path 610a, a lower full tank payout path 610b, and a lower ball discharge path 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear part, respectively, It is located directly below the downstream end of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full tank discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball discharge passage 600e of the sphere path unit 600. Thereby, the game ball B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d is lower lower full payout passage 610b. And the game ball B released downward from the upper ball extraction passage 600e flows through the lower ball extraction passage 610c.

  In addition, the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, and the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal discharge passage 610 a and the lower full discharge passage 610 b pass through the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b. In addition, the downstream end of the lower ball extraction passage 610c is opened to face the ball extraction guide portion 627 that opens to the left in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

  In a normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the lower full tank path unit 610 has the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 to be in contact with the door opening / closing of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the respective downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b are opened, and communicated with the through ball passage 150a and the full tank reception port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613 a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613. Is rotated clockwise by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the respective downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls in payout unit]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled in the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is positioned at the lower end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. In the lower full tank path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in an open state.

  In the ball tank 552 opened upward, from the game hall island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, a predetermined number of balls are detected based on the detection of the ball breakage by the ball breakage detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. A game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied / stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 while being aligned in a line by the tank rail 553. In a state in which the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) downstream from the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stays upstream from the payout blade 589. It becomes.

  Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball-cut detecting sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. Thereby, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in at least the passage between the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

  In this state, when the payout vane 589 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the rear view by the payout motor 584, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and the payout vane in the payout passage 580a. It is discharged downstream of 589. Then, the game ball B released from the payout vane 589 (the ball housing portion 589b) is detected by the payout detection sensor 591 and then sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

  In a normal state, the game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 is disposed directly below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the dish unit 200. Is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211.

  When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a. The game ball B paid out from 580 becomes accumulated in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is further paid out, the lower side of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side. It also stays in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full sphere path unit 600 in communication. Then, when the game ball B is paid out while the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B, the upper normal payout passage 600c enters the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B starts to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

  Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d side passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full ball pass unit 610, and fills up the full ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. Can be received. Thereafter, the game ball B received by the full ball receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. Thereby, when the game ball B is further paid out in a state where the upper plate 201 is full of the game balls B, the game ball B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

  If the game ball B is further paid out in a state where the lower plate 202 is filled with the game balls B and the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate The game ball B stays and is stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 is moved and detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is informed that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 enters a non-detection state.

  When the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descending end. Slide to the raised end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball removal movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the back, and the ball removal movable piece 592 is connected to the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It will be in the state pushed out to the outside of ball extraction passage 580b. Thus, the game ball B can enter the ball extraction passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the upstream game ball B is released downward through the ball extraction passage 580b.

  At this time, since the game ball B flowing down comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball removal movable piece 592 at the part of the ball removal movable piece 592, the ball removal movable piece 592 Is hard to break.

  The game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the upper full ball passage unit 600 and the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball passage unit 610. And then discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball extraction passage 610c to the ball extraction guide portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, and then through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside (game hall). To the island facility side).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 93A is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 93B is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the lower back. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the rear. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The substrate unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500, and a body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d And an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover from behind.

  The speaker unit 620a has a speaker cover 621 attached below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500, and a front side in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. A main body frame speaker 622 and a container-like speaker box 623 which is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is opened forward. .

  The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates forward and backward in the vicinity of the left end when viewed from the front, and includes a circular speaker mounting portion 621a configured by a plurality of slits extending vertically, and the front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The front concave portion 621b that is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and protrudes downward from the lower surface of the spatial front concave portion 621b and extends in the left-right direction toward obliquely downward and rearward A connecting portion 621c that is open.

  A body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43 a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs bass sounds.

  The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open forward, and the rear part of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most backward, and as it goes to the right in the front view, it goes backward in a staircase shape. The protrusion is formed so as to be small. As a result, a sufficient space behind the right side of the front center of the speaker box 623 can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connection portion 621c.

  The speaker unit 620 a forms a part of an enclosure 624 that encloses sound output from the main body speaker 622 with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623. The enclosure 624 is formed with a space front recess 621b that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621, so that the speaker box 623 protrudes rearward as it goes to the right. Even if it is formed in a staircase shape so as to reduce the amount, a space on the right side of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently wide.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620 a is connected to the connection cylinder portion 43 a so that the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the rear of the main body frame speaker 622. And the curtain plate interior space 40a of the outer frame 2 communicate with each other. Accordingly, a wide space enclosure 624 can be formed on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the front panel member 42, and the rear panel member 43. Can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain front member 42.

  More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right in the front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection portion 621c and Since the communication is made to the outer frame lower assembly 40 side through the connection cylinder portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 is not particularly attenuated in the sound output backward from the main body frame speaker 622 without attenuating the bass range. In addition to being transmitted to the side, the transmitted low sound range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the curtain plate front member 42.

  At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a state in which the phase is reversed. The sound radiated from the 200 speaker openings 211b resonates so as to be amplified, so that a large sound with a heavy bass sound can be output even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small.

  That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass-reflex type, and a player can hear a heavy bass. Thereby, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit 200, and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 By this, the player can listen to a sound having a rich bass.

  In the speaker unit 620a, a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the speaker cover 621 at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recessed portion 621b, and the speaker box 623. In addition, a through cylinder 623a is formed which communicates with the through hole 621d and extends in a cylindrical shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction. In the state assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through-hole 621d and the through-tube 623a communicate with each other and are independent of the enclosure 624. A connection cable 503 is inserted through the through hole 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

  The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 that is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a rear power supply unit that is attached to the rear side of the front base 625. And a rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

  The base unit 620b is formed by cooperation of the front base 625 and the rear base 626. The base unit 620b receives the game ball B released from the lower ball passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 and receives a front view. A ball extraction guiding portion 627 that guides to the right, and a discharge ball receiving portion that opens upward on the right side of the front view on the downstream side of the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 for discharging the game ball B that has passed through the ball removal guiding portion 627 and the discharge ball receiving portion 628 downward.

  The ball extraction guiding portion 627 has an upstream end opened leftward at an upper portion of the left side surface in a front view, and a downstream end opened to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. The ball extraction guide portion 627 faces the downstream end opening of the lower full ball path unit 610 so that the upstream end opening coincides with the downstream end opening of the lower full ball path unit 610 in the assembled state of the main body frame 4. The game ball B released from the ball extraction passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving unit 628.

  The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is opened upward and extends long to the left and right. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is continuous so that the left end in front view is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guide portion 627 and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

  The base unit 620b guides the game ball B extracted from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in the front view by the ball extraction guide unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628, and then Since it discharges | emits below from the discharge port 629, it can make it easy to ensure the space of the left side rather than the center of the left-right direction in front view. Thereby, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a richer sound than the conventional pachinko machine.

  The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631.

  The payout control unit 620d includes a box-like payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 (see FIG. 97). The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the tray unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5. It is for controlling and paying out the designated number of game balls B to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so as to leave a trace of opening and closing. As a result, an unauthorized modification to the payout control board 633 can be detected, and the deterrent against fraud is increased.

  The interface unit 620e covers the board base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 attached to the rear surface of the board base 634, and the rear side of the interface board 635. And an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

  The substrate base 634 is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the speaker box 623 that protrudes most backward, which is behind the main body frame speaker 622. The interface board 635 is connected to one end (the main body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503. The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board 1310, a peripheral control board 1510, and the like, and is connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is inserted from the front into the game board insertion slot 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and attached. The back cover 640 is attached to the rear end of the main body frame base 501 with the right side extending in the vertical direction of the rear extension 501j of the main body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable about the vertical axis, and the left side is the payout base 551. Are attached to the back cover attaching portion 551i and the back cover attaching portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

  The back cover 640 is formed in a shape such that the right side of a flat plate extending in the up, down, left, and right directions is bent forward. It is formed so as to be located on substantially the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating back and forth and extending vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be viewed from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 98A is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 98B is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side surface of the rear extension 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of lockable units 650 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of being locked to the door frame 3. A door frame flange 652, a plurality of outer frame flanges 653 projecting rearward from the unit base 651 and engageable with the outer frame 2, and projecting forward from a lower front end of the unit base 651, depending on the rotation direction. And a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the flange 652 or the outer frame flange 653 in the vertical direction.

  The locking unit 650 has a lock spring 655 that biases the door frame collar 652 downward and an outer frame collar 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 that protrudes forward from the upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame collar 653 downward.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame flanges 652, a transmission cylinder 654, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 are forward of the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It protrudes. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501 and closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the front end rotates the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. The rotation of the key engaged with the transmission member 133 and inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

  In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame cages 652 are engaged with the hook members 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of outer frames. The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and a key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of the locking units 650 are connected via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame cage 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 are moved downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. In a state in which the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 are moved downward, and the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2 is moved. 4 is unlocked. In this way, locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

  When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the door frame ridge 652 and the outer frame ridge 653 are inclined so that the distal end sides thereof become thinner. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 become the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward and upward so as to get over 24 and the lower hook member 25, the locked state is brought about by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration at the top of the body frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99A is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 99B is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. FIG. 100 is an enlarged view showing an upper part in an enlarged perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 101 (a) is a perspective view seen from the front top with the tank rail and the like assembled to the ball tank, and FIG. 101 (b) is a perspective view seen from the front bottom. FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 101 (a) as seen from the front. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing an area where game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame circulate. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 106 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the back on the hinge side.

  As described above, the main body frame 4 can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and can be attached to and detached from the outer frame 2 by the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped main body frame base 501 that is rotatably mounted and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-letter shape that is mounted along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base 501. A payout base 551, a ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551 and extending upward in a box shape (container shape) extending left and right, and attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward A tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tab spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view. A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the clair 553, a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, a tank rail A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of 553, a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the payout base 551, and for paying out the game ball B to the player side; It is equipped with.

  The spherical tank 552 is formed in a quadrangular shape whose plan view extends in the left-right direction, and has a bottom wall 552a that is inclined so that the left side is lowered in front view, and a front wall and a rear wall of the bottom wall 552a, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c that extend upward, and a left wall 552d and a right wall 552e that extend upward from the left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed in a container shape that is open on the upper side. Has been. In the ball tank 552, a game ball B supplied from an island facility such as a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is stored.

  Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f that is notched from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper end edge. The overflow portion 552f is approximately 3/4 of the length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the end of the left wall 552d in the front wall 552b toward the end on the opposite side (right wall 552e side). It is formed throughout.

  The tank rail 553 has a right end side (upstream side) communicating with the inside of the ball tank 552 in a front view and a downstream side extending to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to be away from the ball tank 552. . The tank rail 553 has a bowl-shaped main guide portion 553a that extends from the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed so that only one game ball B can flow in the width direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the game ball B. Have. The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so as to become lower toward the left in front view. The main guiding portion 553a extends to the left after extending from the right end to the position of about 1/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end to the left in plan view. It is formed in a crank shape extending obliquely from the right end to the position of about 4/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes, and extending to the left end parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction from there. . In the main rail 553a, a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction from the left end extends to the upper end with the same width. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556. Further, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows is lowered toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed. Is formed at a height that allows only one to be distributed (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

  The tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and a plurality of game balls B are arranged in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and that changes in width from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to coincide with the width of the main guiding portion 553a. Yes. By this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as it goes downstream. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side toward the lower main guiding portion 553a. For this reason, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b so that the width direction is in a line as it goes downstream and downward.

  The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature disposed on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b is disposed above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 has a slight gap between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature that is curved on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B that circulates in the three-dimensionally curved bulge portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulge portion 553b side acts depends on the position of the bulge portion 553b that abuts. It will change to various directions, and generation | occurrence | production of a spherical bite can be suppressed in the bulging part 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed in a shape that extends uniformly, a reaction force always acts in a certain direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B that circulates in the bulging portion 553b. As a result, the reaction force is less likely to disperse, so that the internal game ball B is always pushed in a certain direction, making it difficult for the game ball B to escape and causing ball clogging (ball clumps) to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. Since the direction in which the plurality of game balls B to be pushed is dispersed is dispersed, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball balls) can be made difficult to occur.

  The tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material, and is configured so that the inside can be seen from the outside. As a result, even if a ball clog (ball clog) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so that the place where the ball is clogged can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game by the interruption of the game can be enhanced. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (the back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 through the tank rail 553 can be visually recognized from the rear. When a malfunction occurs in the movable effect unit or the like, the state of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, the gear, the belt, etc. can be confirmed with the game board 5 still attached to the main body frame 4. The effect of this can be achieved.

  The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and has the same side as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction (left side in front view) outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return the game ball B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined so that the front end side becomes the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side becomes higher. Extending from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side being low And is inclined so that the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction becomes lower, and the overflow surface from the ball tank 552 A bypass passage 552g to induce some of the game balls B full of 501m, and a.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the opposite side to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in the left and right outer sides of the bypass passage 552g, and the space in the left and right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball, A discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is open, and a side opposite the bypass passage 552g with the discharge portion 551j in between, are provided at a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501m. The external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a that can be connected to the electrical wiring from the rear, and the upper side of the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558), the upper surface being the overflow surface portion And a terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than 501 m.

  The overflow surface portion 501 m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed in a flat plate shape from the position lower than the distance of 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B from the upper side of the rear surface of the base body 501a formed in a rectangular shape whose front view extends vertically. It extends to. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the height from the front end to the rear end is about ½ of the outer diameter of the game ball B. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed with a gap of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B between the outer frame upper member 30 and the main body frame 4 closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

  The main body frame base 501 is disposed on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and has a flat plate-like left step portion 501n and right step portion 501o that extend substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m. The upper ends of the left step 501n and the right step 501o are both higher in the left and right direction than the left step 501n and the right step 501o, and extend in the form of a strip in the front-rear direction. And a plurality of ribs 501p arranged at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left step portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear end right corner is slightly lower in front view. The right step portion 501o is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is longer than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the left corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front.

  The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. Is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

  When the main body frame base 501 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501 m coincides with the right end of the overflow portion 552 f in the ball tank 552 in the front view, and the overflow surface portion 501 m The left end of the bypass passage 552g and the left end of the bypass passage 552g coincide with each other in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step 501o coincides with the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552.

  The bypass passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. Hereinafter, a container-like region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as a spherical tank 552. The bypass passage 552g extends in a flat plate shape from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left, and the passage surface 552h is inclined so that the front end is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end is lowered. And a weir portion extending upward from the end opposite to the left side wall 552d on the passage surface 552h to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g has a left end side (weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side extending rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 in the front view. It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes to the right end side. The passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may have a horizontal inclination in the horizontal direction.

  The detour passage 552g is assembled to the main body frame 4 so that the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends along the front end side of the portion extending obliquely with respect to the left-right direction in the tank rail 553 that extends in a crank shape in the left-right direction. It extends. That is, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the bypass passage 552g changes from the rear end being slanted so that the distribution direction thereof is perpendicular to the slant rear end. The rear end of the bypass passage 552g that extends obliquely extends substantially parallel to the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends obliquely (the direction in which the game balls B flow in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the bypass passage 552g is wide in the tank rail 553. Can receive a game ball B from Further, since the game ball B is supplied from the bypass passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular direction) to the distribution direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the bypass passage 552g. It is possible to make it difficult for ball clogging in 553 to occur.

  The bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction so that the rear end moves rearward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, so that the game ball B moves from the bypass passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the rear end that extends obliquely allows the game ball B to be discharged to the upstream side, which is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrow. , It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball scum in the tank rail 553.

  Further, the part for guiding the game ball B through the bypass passage 552g corresponds to the outside of the left part of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the left part of the rear wall 552c in front view in the tank rail 553. A game ball B that lies under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening portion 552k) flows from the inside of the ball tank 552 to this portion. For this reason, in the portion of the tank rail 553 that is behind the bypass passage 552g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the wall of the tank rail 553). (Height) is not exceeded. Accordingly, a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured on the tank rail 553 on the downstream side of the ball tank 552, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g. Thus, the game ball B guided rearward can be reliably received by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B is not spilled rearward from the tank rail 553.

  The ball tank 552 is a flat plate that extends to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f in the left side wall 552d on the inner side surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. Guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end in front view that is approximately 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the left end of the front wall 552b and from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left-right direction of the front wall 552b. After extending obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b to a position near about 1/2 of the total length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d at about 1/9 of the total length, it extends to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c in parallel with the left side wall 552d, From there, it is formed in a shape extending in parallel with the rear wall 552c from the left end of the rear wall 552c to about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c with a constant width.

  The spherical tank 552 has a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the shape as described above and the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side in plan view. The region surrounded by and has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction. Further, the spherical tank 552 has a flat flange extending in the left and right direction outward and in the vertical direction on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the dam portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. Part 552l. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper end edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper end edges of the two flange portions 552l are the upper end edges (the main body frame base 501) of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c. The upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o is higher than the upper step).

  When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled with each other, the upstream end (the right end in the front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. In addition, a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in a crank shape in the left-right direction in a plan view and a portion that extends straight in the left-right direction on the left side of the tank rail 553 are located behind the ball tank 552 (projecting). )is doing. The rear end side of the detour passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of a portion extending obliquely of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

  The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The discharge part 551j is assembled in the main body frame 4 so that it is lowered stepwise from the height lower than the bypass passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552. After extending rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side when viewed from the front to the tank rail 553, the position is higher along the tank rail 553 to the left than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center in the left-right direction of the second rail cover 555). It extends to the rear and then extends backward.

  The external terminal plate 558 is attached in a state where a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are arranged in the left-right direction on the rear surface. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal that can hold the tip of the electric wiring by opening the holding portion by operating a lever. The external terminal plate 558 is disposed in front of a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 in a state assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l in the ball tank 552.

  Next, the effect of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are arranged such that the rear end side of the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g is lowered as shown by the white arrows in FIG. The left step portion 501n is inclined so that the rear end right corner is lower, and the right step portion 501o is inclined so that the rear end left corner is lower. Further, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) are inclined so that the left end side is lowered in front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined such that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lowered.

  Then, when the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 is increased by being supplied from the island facility, first, over the upper overflow edge 552f having the lowest height among the outer peripheral upper end edges. The game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be discharged to the overflow surface portion 501m and discharged from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501m. The game ball B can be returned to the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 104). Accordingly, since it is possible to prevent further increase in the game balls B in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pressing each other (increase in ball pressure) in the ball tank 552. In the ball tank 552, it is possible to prevent clogging due to the engagement of the game balls B (so-called ball balls).

  Since the bypass passage 552g is provided, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g as shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to prevent the backward pushing force from acting strongly on the game ball B in the ball tank 552 due to the game ball B accumulated on the overflow surface portion 501m, and the game ball B is blocked in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented. Further, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m is spilled on the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem that the game ball B spilled outside the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 so that the main body frame 4 cannot be opened and closed.

  Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position, the flow (pressure) of the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. It is possible to prevent the game balls B from being clogged by preventing the game balls B from pressing strongly in the tank rail 553.

  Further, since the height of the remaining upper edge other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than that of the overflow portion 552f at the outer peripheral upper edge of the ball tank 552, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g. The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction in the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. Thereby, the game ball B flowing from the overflow surface portion 501m to the bypass passage 552g after overflowing the overflow portion 552f from the ball tank 552 and flowing into the overflow surface portion 501m is left on one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the detour path 552g from returning to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour path 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 to It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being clogged in the tank 552.

  Further, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the bypass passage 552g). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. Thereby, since the inflow of the game ball B from the side (the ball tank 552) to the bypass passage 552g can be prevented, the flow of the game ball B in the bypass passage 552g is made to flow backward from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side. The flow can be in a constant direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the bypass passage 552g to the tank rail 553 can be in a constant direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pressed and bitten by the direction of the pressure applied to the game balls B being varied, and the game balls B can be prevented from being clogged. Can be prevented.

  In addition, since the main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end is provided at the bottom of the tank rail 553, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a, so that they are aligned in the left-right direction. Since they are in an aligned state, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, in the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged is provided, so that the game released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g The sphere B can be reliably received, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side, and the width of the main guiding portion 553a is increased. Since they are changed so as to match, the plurality of game balls B can be aligned in a row in the width direction as they go downstream in the bulging portion 553b. In addition, since the portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows is lowered toward the downstream end, the upstream side (the ball tank 552 side) The plurality of game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction in FIG. 1 are circulated downstream through the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, thereby reducing the number of stages in the height direction. Can be aligned. Accordingly, the plurality of game balls B can be guided to the downstream side (the payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row by the tank rail 553.

  Furthermore, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g are provided, a certain number of game balls B can be stored in the overflow surface portion 501g and the bulging portion 553b is provided in the tank rail 553. Therefore, since the volume in the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

  In addition, an external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring is connected and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (on the opposite side of the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j in between. Since the terminal cover 551k covering the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be moved away from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be difficult to reach (contact) the wire connection terminal 558a. The game ball B does not cause a problem such as short-circuiting or disconnection of the electrical wiring due to the contact of the game ball B.

  Further, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is stored in the ball tank 552. As described above, it is possible to make it difficult to get on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k even if it bounces at the overflow surface portion 501m, and even if the game ball B gets on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

  Further, the game ball B returned to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 from the overflow surface portion 501m is sent to the upstream side (rightward in FIG. 104) of the ball tank 552 due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from being pressed in the downstream direction against the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B is clogged in the ball tank 552. This can be prevented.

  Also, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 jumps at the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m and rides on the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m. However, as shown in FIG. 104, the game ball B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g due to the inclination thereof, and the game ball B spills outside the main body frame 4 to cause a problem. Can be prevented.

  In addition, when the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B passes through the lower side of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, the game ball is stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 553 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Accordingly, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured. The game ball B guided by the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received.

  Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a malfunction.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 107 is a front view of a game board in which a front component, a game panel, a front unit and the like are made opaque in a pachinko machine. 108 is a perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. 107 as viewed from the right front, FIG. 109 is a perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. 107 as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the gaming board as viewed from the rear. . FIG. 111 is a front view of the game board in a state where the front structural member, the game panel, the front unit and the like are made transparent. FIG. 112 is an exploded perspective view of the game board that is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the game board that is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. 114 is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. FIG. 115 is a front view of the game board showing a game area in which game balls circulate by cutting the front unit parallel to the surface of the game panel and the obstacle nail.

  In the following description, when the LED mounted on the decorative substrate is square when viewed from the direction perpendicular to the surface of the decorative substrate, the LED irradiates light in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the decorative substrate. When the shape of the LED mounted on the decorative substrate is rectangular, it indicates that the LED emits light in a direction parallel to the surface of the decorative substrate (side view LED). Detailed description is omitted.

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which the game ball B is hit when the player operates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning port 2001, a first start port 2002, and a gate unit that give a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player by accepting or passing the game ball B 2003, a second start opening 2004, a first big prize opening 2005, and a second big prize opening 2006 are provided. In this gaming board 5, the game ball B has a general winning port 2001, a first starting port 2002, a gate unit 2003, a second starting port 2004, a first grand winning port 2005, and a second large winning port in the gaming area 5a. For example, in 2006, the player can enter or pass the handle 182 and play the game ball B in the game area 5a.

  The game board 5 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and the outer shape of the front component member 1000 is substantially square when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-like game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 115 and the like) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at a portion in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100. In addition, the game board 5 is a game that is performed by driving a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear part of the game panel 1100 and a game ball B attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 into the game area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 114 and 206, etc.) for controlling the contents.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and has a function display unit 1400 which is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100 The driving board unit 1700, the front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the gaming panel 1100, and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100 are further provided.

  An effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. In addition, a drive board unit 1700 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600.

  The front component member 1000 is entirely transparent. The front component member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has an inner shape penetrating in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape.

  The gaming panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel panel 1110 and the panel plate 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 (see FIG. 116 and the like) to which the rear unit 3000 is attached on the rear side.

  The drive board unit 1700 is provided in the panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 according to commands from the peripheral control board 1510. An effect drive board 1720 for driving a decorative board, a drive motor and a drive solenoid, and a drive board box 1730 for housing the panel relay board 1710 and the effect drive board 1720. The drive board box 1730 is attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 so that the left side of the back view can be rotated by a hinge, and the right side of the drive board box 1730 is detachably attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600.

  The front unit 2000 has a plurality of (four here) general winning ports 2001 that are always open so as to be able to receive the game balls B that have been driven into the gaming region 5a, and the plurality of general winning ports 2001 are a gaming region. A first start port 2002 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in 5a; a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B; According to the normal lottery result that is drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003, the game ball B can be received, and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 The first grand prize opening 2005 and the first start port 2002 or the second start port that allow the game ball B to be received according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game ball B 2004 Includes the second special winning opening 2006 which is possible to accept the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is the lottery by accepting game balls B, and.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is provided at the lower end of the game area 5a, and is provided in the up-and-down direction in the game area 5a and the out-port 2010 for discharging the game ball B from the game area 5a. Are provided with a first sub-out port 2011 and a second sub-out port 2012 for discharging the game area 5a from the game area 5a.

  In addition, the front unit 2000 is mounted at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and immediately above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a front face of the start port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has three general winning ports 2001, and a side upper left unit that is provided slightly on the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. 2300, provided in the front right of the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner when viewed from the front in the game area 5a, and has a second start port 2004, a first grand prize port 2005, and a first sub-out port 2011. The first attacker unit 2400, the front side in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided slightly above the center and a right side of the center accessory 2500 is provided above the first attacker unit 2400 and has a second grand prize opening 2006. The second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700 provided above the second attacker unit 2600 and having one general winning port 2001 and the second sub-out port 2012, and above the side right middle unit 2700 And a gate member 2800 having a gate portion 2003.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 having a rectangular opening 3010a on the rear wall and a box shape with the front open. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600.

  Also, the back unit 3000 is provided at the front left end decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 provided near the left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010, and at the lower part of the front end in the back box 3010. The rear guidance unit 3050 is provided, the rear rear production unit 3100 provided at the rear end of the back box 3010, and the rear guidance unit 3050 in the lower part of the back box 3010. The back bottom left production unit 3200 and the back bottom right production unit 3250, and the back bottom middle production unit 3300 provided behind the back bottom left production unit 3200 and the back bottom right production unit 3250 in the back box 3010. I have.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is provided behind the back front effect unit 3400 provided in front of the back back effect unit 3100 in the upper part of the back box 3010 and the back front left decorative body 3030 in the back box 3010. The rear back left rendering unit 3500, the back rear right rendering unit 3600 provided behind the back front right decorative body 3040 in the back box 3010, and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back rear left in the back box 3010. The front right effect unit 3700 provided between the effect unit 3500 and the front right effect unit 3700 provided between the front right decorative body 3040 and the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back box 3010. 3800.

[5-1. Previous component]
The front component member 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 (a) is a perspective view of the front component member and the game panel in the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 116 (b) is a perspective view of the front component member and the game panel as viewed from the rear.

  The front component member 1000 is entirely transparent. The front component member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has an inner shape penetrating in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front component member 1000 has an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left side to the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged substantially along the outer rail 1001 inside the front component member 1000 and extends in an arc shape from the central lower part in the left-right direction when viewed from the front to the diagonally upper left part when viewed from the front, And an out guiding portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear (out port 2010).

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side thereof is slightly higher from the right end in front view of the out guiding portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front component member 1000. The right rail 1005 that extends from the right end of the front component member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component member 1000 and the upper portion is curved inward of the front component member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 is connected to the upper end of 1001 and has a stop portion 1006 with which the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closed position and a front-view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front rail and the outer rail 1001. A backflow prevention member that is rotated by a spring (not shown) so as to be able to rotate only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the rotating direction and to return to the closed position side. 1007.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes an out-port 2010 that penetrates forward and backward at the rear end of the out-guiding portion 1003 at the center lower portion in the left-right direction when viewed from the front in the frame. The out port 2010 penetrates with two game balls B having a width sufficiently aligned in the left-right direction. The game ball B guided backward by the out guide part 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component member 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 2010 and an out ball detection member 3080 of the back unit 3000 described later.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes an outer portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that are substantially perpendicular to the lower end, a lower portion of the outer guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and an outer portion of the right rail 1005. Each part includes a security recess 1009 that is recessed backward from the front end. When the gaming board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear protrusion 172 that protrudes rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess portion 1009 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a notch 1010 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1010 and the notch are passed through the lower full ball path. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is formed in the upper left corner in a front view, and includes a function display unit attachment portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a certificate sticking portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. Yes.

  In addition, the front component member 1000 is substantially entirely formed transparently, so that the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000 arranged on the rear side can be viewed from the front. Since the front component member 1000 is transparently formed together with the game panel 1100 attached to the rear side, it is possible to reduce the fact that the boundary of the game area 5a can be clearly seen when assembled to the game board 5. In addition to giving the player a sense of openness, the game area 5a can be shown larger (wider) to the player, although the actual size of the game area 5a does not change.

  Further, since the front component member 1000 is made transparent together with the game panel 1100, the light from the production display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (player side). It is possible to make it appear as if it is emitting light, and the overall decoration of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached thereto. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 having an outer periphery formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and attached to the rear unit 3000 on the rear surface. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 115 and the like).

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even when the obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In the present embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel board 1110 is the lowest position in the game area 5a, and the position corresponding to the out port 2010 of the front component member 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the front unit 2000.

  Although illustration is omitted, the panel plate 1110 is separated in the left-right direction at a plurality of positioning holes formed in a round hole penetrating front and rear and a short long hole, and at an upper edge and a lower edge, respectively. A plurality of engaging step portions having a thin plate thickness. The positioning hole is for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting a protruding pin (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engagement step portion is detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engagement claw (not shown) or an engagement piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 116, the panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for attaching the center accessory 2500 offset from the center to the upper right in front view. Thereby, the panel board 1110 has a frame shape, and in a front view, the width orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game ball B (the frame-shaped circumferential direction) has a plurality of games on the left side and the lower side from the center. The ball B has a wide width where the balls B can be arranged, and the upper side has a narrow width where a plurality of game balls B cannot be arranged.

  The panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this embodiment). Panel holder 1120 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 is substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110 and has a holding step (not shown) that is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the holding step is about the same size as the game area 5a. A through hole 1121 penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided.

  The panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1122 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1122 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates through the notch 1010 and the notch and is lower. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the full tank path unit 610 face forward.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 that extends upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 2010 and is recessed forward from the rear surface. The upper part of the out recess 1123 communicates with the out port 2010. A cylindrical portion 3081 of the out ball detecting member 3080 in the back guiding unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 described later is inserted into the out concave portion 1123.

  Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 protrudes forward from the holding step portion and is disposed outside the holding step portion and a plurality of protruding pins that are inserted into the plurality of positioning holes of the panel plate 1110, respectively. Three engaging claws that are elastically engaged with the engaging step portions of the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110, and projecting upward from the lower outer side of the holding step portion. A pair of engagement pieces that respectively engage with the two engagement step portions on the lower side of the. The panel holder 1120 tilts the upper side and the lower left side by moving the upper part of the panel plate 1110 rearward after engaging the engaging step portion of the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging piece from diagonally upper front. The panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached in a state in which the panel plate 1110 is accommodated in the holding step portion by elastically engaging the engaging step portion of the portion that is in place with the engaging claw. At this time, the projecting pin of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

  Since this game panel 1100 is formed transparently together with the front component member 1000 attached to the front side, it can be reduced that the boundary of the game area 5a is clearly visible when assembled to the game board 5, While it is possible to give a feeling of opening to the player, the game area 5a can be shown large (wide) to the player, although the actual size of the game area 5a does not change.

  Further, since the game panel 1100 is made transparent together with the front component member 1000, the light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (player side). It is possible to make it appear as if it is emitting light, and the overall decoration of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The board holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front, and is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is notched from the front end to the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the assembled state on the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 on the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

  In the state where the substrate holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is positioned immediately above the discharge ball receiving unit 628 of the base unit 620 b in the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the back unit 3000 is out of the back unit 3000. It is located directly below the ball detection member 3080. The board holder 1200 can receive all of the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and discharges them from the discharge unit 1201 formed on the bottom surface to the discharge ball receiving unit 628 below. Can do.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 206) that controls game contents, payout of the game ball B, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And.

  The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is then destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. Therefore, it is possible to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by observing the trace of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent against unauthorized actions on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. The main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a first start port sensor 3052, a gate sensor 2801, a second start port sensor 2401, a general winning port sensor 3051, a first big winning port sensor 2402, and a second large winning port. A sensor 2601, an out port sensor 3053, a first sub out port sensor 2403, a second sub out port sensor 3054, magnetic sensors 2404, 2602, 3055, and the like are connected.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 displays a gaming state (game situation), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  The function display unit 1400 displays a normal lottery result that is drawn by passing the game ball B in the gate unit 2003 and a status indicator composed of three LEDs for displaying the game status. A normal symbol display composed of two LEDs, and a normal retention indicator composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of suspensions relating to the passage of the game ball B at the gate 2003.

  Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display composed of eight LEDs for displaying a first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2002, and a first start port 2002. The first special hold number indicator composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds relating to the acceptance of the game ball B to the game, and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start port 2004 A second special symbol display composed of eight LEDs for display, and a second special reservation number display composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of suspensions related to the reception of the game ball B in the second start port 2004. ing.

  Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 repeats the number of opening / closing patterns of the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 (number of rounds) when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “winning” or the like. A round indicator composed of five LEDs for displaying

  In this function display unit 1400, the number of symbols, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, and blinking the LEDs provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described with reference mainly to FIG. 110, FIG. 113, FIG. Peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of back box 3010 of back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 206) that controls the presentation presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. Box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the effect image.

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the presentation operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3, the presentation display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 112 and 113. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via a back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 with the game board 5 assembled. The effect display device 1600 is covered with a protective cover body 1601 formed of a transparent resin having non-conductivity except for the display area of the effect display device 1600. A plurality of L-shaped wiring processing pieces 1601a for locking various wirings along the vertical direction of the protective cover body 1601 are formed on the back surface side of the protective cover body 1601 and the ventilation length is long in the vertical direction. A plurality of holes are formed in a state where the holes are aligned vertically and horizontally.

  The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using white LEDs as a backlight, and has substantially the same width as the width of the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control unit 1500 and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

  The effect display device 1600 includes two upper fixing pieces 1601b protruding upward from the upper end surface and one lower fixing piece 1601c protruding downward from the lower end surface. This effect display device 1600 has a back box in two fixed grooves 3010c opened in an upper inner peripheral surface in a frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 to be described later with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two upper fixing pieces 1601b obliquely from the rear of 3010, the lower fixing piece 1601c side is moved forward, the lower fixing piece 1601c is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the back. Is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to the right.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The front unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 117A is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 117B is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the rear. The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a part of the rear end is an opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. And protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving a game ball B that has been driven into the game area 5a, and is always open (in this case, a plurality of general winning ports 2001) and the plurality of general winning ports 2001 are games. A first start port 2002 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in the area 5a, and a gate unit 2003 that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B; , To the second start port 2004 and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 that allow the game ball B to be received according to the normal lottery result that is drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003. The first grand prize opening 2005 that allows the game ball B to be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B is different from the first big prize opening 2005 position A game ball B that can be received in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is provided and received by the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. And two major prize winning openings 2006.

  A plurality (four here) of general winning awards 2001 are arranged on the left side with respect to the center in the left-right direction in the lower part in the game area 5a, and the remaining one is in the vertical direction in the right part in the game area 5a It is arranged above the center. The first start port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 2010 at the lowermost center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged at a height of about 3/4 from below in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the right end in front view in the game area 5a. The second start port 2004 is arranged at a height slightly higher than the general winning port 2001 at the left end in the lower right corner of the game area 5a. The first grand prize winning port 2005 is arranged between the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. The second big prize opening 2006 is arranged directly above the right general prize opening 2001 above the second start opening 2004.

  The first sub-out port 2011 is disposed below the second start-up port 2004, and the second sub-out port 2012 is disposed on the right side of the right general winning port 2001.

  In addition, the front unit 2000 is mounted at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and immediately above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a front face of the start port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has three general winning ports 2001, and a side upper left unit that is provided slightly on the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. 2300, provided in the front right of the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner when viewed from the front in the game area 5a, and has a second start port 2004, a first grand prize port 2005, and a first sub-out port 2011. The first attacker unit 2400, the front side in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 A frame-shaped center won game 2500 provided substantially at the center slightly above closer, and a.

  Furthermore, the front unit 2000 is provided on the right side of the center accessory 2500 and above the first attacker unit 2400, and has a second attacker unit 2600 having a second big prize opening 2006, and a second attacker unit 2600. A side right middle unit 2700 having one general winning port 2001 and a second sub-out port 2012, and a gate portion 2003 provided above the side right middle unit 2700. And a gate member 2800.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
The starting port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 118A is a perspective view of the front opening unit and the side unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 118B is a perspective view of the front opening unit and the side unit in the front unit as viewed from the rear. ) Is a left side view of the start port unit, and (d) is a left side view of the side unit. FIG. 119 is an explanatory diagram comparing the inclination of the front face of the general prize opening and the inclination of the door member of the variable prize opening in the open state. FIG. 120 is an enlarged front view showing parts of the start port unit and the side unit in the game board. The start unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is disposed immediately above the out port 2010 in the vicinity of the lower end at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The start port unit 2100 has a first start port 2002 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be received.

  The start port unit 2100 includes a front wall portion 2101 extending in parallel with the surface of the game area 5 a (game panel 1100), a peripheral wall portion 2102 extending rearward from the periphery of the front wall portion 2101, and the peripheral wall portion 2102. And a flat plate-like flange portion 2103 extending outward in the left-right direction from the middle in the front-rear direction, and the entirety is formed of a transparent member. The front wall portion 2101 is formed in such a shape that the shape of the front view is a combination of a rectangular portion that is long to the left and right and a semicircular portion having a lower side of the rectangular portion as a chord. The peripheral wall portion 2102 extends rearward from the peripheral edge excluding the upper side of the front wall portion 2101, and is formed in a bowl shape having an open top. The bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 is inclined so that the rear end side is lowered, and the game ball B can be guided rearward.

  The start port unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110 in a state where the flange portion 2103 extending in the left-right direction from the middle of the peripheral wall portion 2102 is brought into contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The start port unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110 and has a first start port 2002 that can receive the game ball B by the front wall portion 2101 and the peripheral wall portion 2102 protruding forward from the panel plate 1110. Forming.

  When the start port unit 2100 is attached to the game panel 1100, the first start port 2002 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 and is opened upward, and the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500. Located directly under the center of Accordingly, when the game ball B is released downward from the central discharge portion 2513a of the stage 2513, it is received in the first start port 2002 with a very high probability.

  The start port unit 2100 is attached to the game panel 1100 and guides the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 to the rear of the game panel 1100 due to the inclination of the bowl-shaped peripheral wall portion 2102. Can be delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guidance unit 3050. The game ball B delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guiding unit 3050 is detected by the first start port sensor 3052 and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200.

  Although illustration is omitted, a decorative seal is affixed to the front surface of the front wall 2101 so that it is more conspicuous than the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. Thereby, the player's interest can be directed to the first start opening 2002 rather than the general winning opening 2001, and the player is prompted to perform the operation of driving the game ball B aiming at the first start opening 2002. A lottery of a special lottery result (first special lottery result) in which an advantageous gaming state in which a player such as a “big hit” game is advantageous is performed by allowing the first starting port 2002 to accept the game ball B is performed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation for the special lottery result that is drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002, and to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player.

  In this start-up unit 2100, the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 that guides the game ball B rearward is inclined at an angle (closer to the horizontal) than the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200. Therefore, the moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B to the rear is relatively slow. Therefore, when the game ball B is received at the first starting port 2002, the received game ball B is seen for a longer time than the game ball B received at the general winning port 2001, so It is possible to surely recognize that the game ball B has been received at the first start port 2002, and to express the joy (superior feeling) that the game ball B has been received at the first start port 2002 as a general winning port 2001. It can be tasted for a longer time than when it was accepted.

  In addition, when the start opening unit 2100 is assembled to the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 120, the lower back middle production unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is located behind and is provided in the lower lower middle production unit 3300. The backside middle decorative body unit 3320 is illuminated and decorated with light from LEDs such as the backside middle first decorative board 3322 and the backside middle second decorative board 3329.

  Furthermore, although detailed illustration is omitted, in the start port unit 2100, a rib straddling the front wall portion 2101 and the bottom portion of the peripheral wall portion 2102 in the first start port 2002 may be provided. This rib is formed in a triangle (a part may be rounded) in a side view, and the upper surface is inclined at the first front wall 2203 of the two general winning ports 2001 from the right side of the side unit 2200. And the distance to the upper end of the first front wall 2203 is longer than the distance from the upper end of the first front wall 2203 of the side unit 2200 to the portion inclined from the upper end. (The rib is positioned below the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203). As a result, the timing at which the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 abuts on the rib and is guided backwards is determined so that the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 is in the first front wall portion 2203. It can be made later than the timing at which it abuts against the inclined portion and is guided backward, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

[5-8b. Side unit]
The side unit 2200 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the start port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes three general winning ports 2001 that are open so that the game ball B can be always received. Three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002. The two right general winning openings 2001 are opened upward, and the left general winning opening 2001 is opened upward.

  The side unit 2200 has a flat base plate and a second base plate that extends in a bowl shape from the base plate to the front and rear and is inclined so that the front end moves rearward as it goes downward and is separated from the left and right. One guide rod, a first front wall portion closing the front end side of each of the two first guide rods, and extending from the base plate to the front and rear in a bowl shape on the left side of the two first guide rods And a second front wall portion closing the front end side of the second guide rod. The side unit 2200 is formed of a transparent member as a whole.

  The first guide rod 2202 and the second guide rod 2204 are U-shaped in cross section. The first guide rod 2202 has a U-shaped open portion directed upward, and the second guide rod 2204 has a U-shaped open portion directed leftward. The front end of the first guide rod 2202 extends from the bottom about 3/4 of the height from the bottom, and the upper side extends vertically. It extends diagonally. Accordingly, the first front wall portion 2203 that closes the front end side of the first guide rod 2202 has a shape in which the lower side is bent rearward at a height of about 3/4 from below.

  The second guide rod 2204 has a vertical front end. Accordingly, the second front wall portion 2205 closing the front end side of the second guide rod 2204 extends vertically in parallel with the base plate 2201.

  The side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110 with the base plate 2201 in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. And the game ball B can be received by the site | part which protrudes ahead rather than the panel board 1110 in the 1st guide rod 2202 and the 2nd guide rod 2204, and the 1st front wall part 2203 and the 2nd front wall part 2205. A general winning opening 2001 is formed. In addition, when the side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110, portions of the first guide rod 2202 and the second guide rod 2204 that protrude rearward from the base plate 2201 penetrate the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. And it protrudes back rather than the rear surface of the panel board 1110. FIG. The first guide rod 2202 and the second guide rod 2204 are inclined so that the bottom faces are lowered toward the rear, and can guide the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 backward.

  In the state in which the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, three general winning ports 2001 protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The side unit 2200 guides the game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100, and the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and It can be delivered to any of the fourth delivery ports 3064. The game ball B delivered to any one of the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the fourth delivery port 3064 of the back guidance unit 3050 is detected by the general prize port sensor 3051, It is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200.

  Unlike the start port unit 2100, the side unit 2200 has no decorative sticker attached to the first front wall portion 2203 and the second front wall portion 2205 that form the front surface of the general winning port 2001, It is less conspicuous than the first start port 2002. In addition, since the front ends of the two general winning ports 2001 in the side unit 2200 are inclined, it is possible to emphasize the three-dimensional effect of the general winning ports 2001, and a decorative sticker is not attached to the front surface. , It won't look bad.

  When the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 120, the back lower left effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is located behind, and the back lower left decoration in the back lower left effect unit 3200. Light emission from the LED of the substrate 3203 can be decorated, and the back lower left rotating decorative body 3201 can be visually recognized in a good state. Further, since the side unit 2200 has a portion inclined to the first front wall portion 2203 that respectively forms the front ends of the two general winning ports 2001, the back bottom left side of the back unit 3000 is affected by the portion. The light irradiated forward from the back bottom left decorative board 3203 of the effect unit 3200 can be reflected (or refracted) near the head of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. The appearance can be improved.

  In the side unit 2200, the bent and obliquely extending portion of the first front wall portion 2203 is inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the start port unit 2100. The moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B is increased. The bottom surfaces of the first guide rod 2202 and the second guide rod 2204 are inclined at substantially the same angle as the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 in the start port unit 2100. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, the received game ball B becomes invisible in a shorter time than the game ball B received in the first start port 2002. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being attracted to the general winning opening 2001 unnecessarily for a long time while allowing the player to reliably recognize the acceptance of the game ball B into the general winning opening 2001. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to direct the player's interest to the next game ball B, the first start opening 2002, the first grand prize opening 2005, the second big prize opening 2006, etc. It is possible to entertain the game in the game area 5a and suppress the decrease in interest.

  In other words, the bent portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200 that is bent and obliquely inclined is inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the start port unit 2100. The rolling speed of the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 can be made slower than the rolling speed of the game ball B received in. Therefore, when the game ball B is received at the first starting port 2002, the received game ball B is seen for a longer time than the game ball B received at the general winning port 2001, so It is possible to surely recognize that the game ball B has been received at the first start port 2002, and to express the joy (superior feeling) that the game ball B has been received at the first start port 2002 as a general winning port 2001. It can be tasted for a longer time than when it was accepted.

  By the way, in the side unit 2200, since the 1st front wall part 2203 which each forms the front end of the two general winning a prize port 2001 is inclined, from the side of the 1st guide rod 2202 the 1st front wall part 2203 It becomes possible for the game ball B to pass in front of the inclined part. When the game ball B passes through the front of the first front wall portion 2203, the game ball B appears to overlap the general winning opening 2001 when viewed from the front, and therefore, depending on the player, the gaming ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001. If the game ball B is not paid out, the player may feel distrust toward the pachinko machine 1 or the game hall, which may reduce the interest in the game. On the other hand, in the side unit 2200 of this embodiment, as described above, the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 and the first guide rod 2202 are received in the general winning opening 2001 and moved backward. Since the player can visually recognize the guided game ball B in a short time, the player can recognize that the game ball B has been received in the general winning opening 2001. Therefore, even if the illusion that the game ball B that has passed through the front of the first front wall portion 2203 is received in the general winning opening 2001, it can be immediately recognized as an illusion.

  Further, in this side unit 2200, since a part of the game ball B can pass through the front of the first front wall 2203, the game ball passes through the front of the first front wall 2203 of the general winning opening 2001. When B passes, when the majority of the game balls B (at least half or more of the game balls B) overlap with the general winning opening 2001 when viewed from the front, depending on the player, the gaming balls B may enter the general winning opening 2001. An illusion can be made as if it was accepted, and the player can be entertained. At this time, since a part of the game ball B does not overlap with the general winning opening 2001, it is not strongly recognized that the game ball B has been received in the general winning opening 2001, and it may be thought that it was an illusion. Therefore, even if a privilege (payout of the game ball B or lottery of the first special lottery result) is not given thereafter, it is possible to avoid having distrust in the pachinko machine 1 or the game hall side. It is possible to continue to entertain the game to the player and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  The side unit 2200 has a front end of the leftmost (leftmost) general winning port 2001 among the three general winning ports 2001 extending in parallel with the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) by the second front wall 2205. And has the same shape as the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. As a result, when the game ball B is received in the general winning port 2001 at the left end, an illusion that the player has received the game ball B at the start port can be given. And even if the game ball B is received in the general winning port 2001 that is illusioned to be the starting port, the lottery of the special lottery result will not be performed, so the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side will feel distrust. There is a fear. However, the general winning opening 2001 is provided at the left end (a position that cannot be received by “right-handed”) of the side unit 2200 leftward from the first starting opening 2002 at the center in the left-right direction, and the second Since a decorative sticker indicating the start opening is not attached to the front surface of the front wall portion 2205, it can be reconfirmed that it is not the start opening, and the player has an interest in the game by feeling distrust. It is possible to avoid the reduction.

  In addition, since the side unit 2200 has the front ends of the two general winning ports 2001 inclined, the amount of material required for the side unit 2200 is compared to the case where the front ends are parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100. Since the decorative sticker is not affixed to the front face of the general winning opening 2001, the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  The horizontal inclination angle of the first front wall 2203 of the side unit 2200 (general winning opening 2001) is not shown, but the variable winning opening such as the big winning opening and the bonus winning opening can be opened and closed. The winning opening door is larger than the inclination angle from the horizontal when the upper side is pivoted about the lower side so that the upper side moves forward so as to guide the game ball B to the winning side. It is an angle. More specifically, depending on the player, when the number of game balls B paid out by receiving the game balls B into the variable prize opening is larger than the general prize opening 2001, many of the game balls B to the variable prize opening are large. Wish to win. Alternatively, even in the case of a variable winning opening (large winning opening) for which the prescribed number of winnings is determined, the player wishes to win more than the prescribed number. Therefore, since the inclination of the winning opening door of the variable winning opening is made slower than the general winning opening 2001 (first front wall portion 2203), the speed of the game ball B rolling on the winning opening door is slow. Thus, as described above, when the game ball B is received in the variable winning opening, the received game ball B can be seen for a longer time than the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001. It is possible to reliably recognize that the game ball B has been received in the variable winning opening and to the general winning opening 2001 for the pleasure (superior feeling) that the game ball B has been received in the variable winning opening. It can be tasted for a longer time than when it was accepted. In addition, since the angle of the winning opening door is loose in the open state, it takes a long time until the opening of the winning opening door is closed, so that the game ball B wins more than the prescribed number for the player. Can make you think.

  Further, in the two general winning award ports 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200, a portion extending obliquely downward from the lower end of the portion, rather than the distance of the portion extending vertically downward from the upper end of the first front wall portion 2203. The distance is longer. As a result, since the winning hole is the general winning hole 2001, the game ball B is paid out, but the lottery such as the normal lottery or the special lottery is not performed. Can be made invisible from the player's view at an early stage.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the side unit 2200 is shown in which the front face of the specific general winning opening 2001 is inclined among the plurality of general winning openings 2001, but is not limited to this, and all the general winning openings 2001 The front face of the winning opening 2001 may be inclined. Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball B launched at the launch position (so-called “left-handed”) in the normal game state through the general winning opening 2001 whose front is not inclined can be entered. Although the one provided at the position is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the general winning opening 2001 without tilting the front face is in an advantageous gaming state (during “short time”, “probability change” or “hit”). The game ball B launched at the launch position (so-called “right-handed”) may be provided at a position where it can enter or may be provided at both.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 119, the inclination angle of the general prize opening 2001 having an inclination on the front surface is larger than the opening angle when the variable prize opening (for example, the big prize opening) is opened from the closed time. Narrow angle. When the number of game balls B to be paid out when winning a big winning opening is larger than the general winning opening 2001, the player wins more than the specified number even if the predetermined winning number is a large winning opening. I hope. Therefore, the speed at which the game ball B that has won the grand prize opening rolls to the back side is considered to be slower than the speed at which the game ball B that has won the general prize opening 2001 with the front face tilted rolls to the back side. Yes. In other words, when winning a prize to the general prize opening 2001 that is smaller than the number of payouts when winning the big prize opening, it is considered to be faster than the speed at which the game ball B that won the big prize opening rolls to the back side. ing. In other words, it can be said that the winning opening with more payouts takes longer to disappear from the player's view. As a result, a winning opening with more payouts can provide a longer joyful time when winning.

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
The side upper left unit 2300 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 117 and the like. The upper left side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to contact the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The side upper left unit 2300 has a shelf 2301 that is inclined so as to be lowered to the right. The entire upper left side unit 2300 is formed to be transparent.

  In the state in which the upper left side unit 2300 is assembled to the game board 5, the shelf 2301 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The upper left side unit 2300 can guide the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 to the right side below the center accessory 2500 by the shelf 2301.

[5-8d. First attacker unit]
The first attacker unit 2400 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 to 125 and the like. FIG. 121 (a) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 121 (b) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 124 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the first big prize opening door in the first attacker unit from the left side. FIG. 125 is an explanatory view showing the path of a game ball in the first attacker unit in cross section.

  The first attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a on the right side of the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner when viewed from the front, from the front to the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Installed. The first attacker unit 2400 includes a second start port 2004, a first big prize port 2005, and a first sub-out port 2011 (see FIG. 130 and the like). In the first attacker unit 2400, when viewed from the front, the second starting port 2004 is provided on the upper right side from the center in the left-right direction, and the first big winning port 2005 is on the left side from the center in the left-right direction and is more than the second starting port 2004. The first sub-out port 2011 is provided below the second starting port 2004 and at a position lower than the first big winning port 2005.

  Further, the first attacker unit 2400 detects a game ball B received in the second start port 2004, a second start port sensor 2401 and a first ball detecting the game ball B received in the first grand prize winning port 2005. A big prize opening sensor 2402, a first sub out opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the first sub out opening 2011, and a magnetic sensor 2404 for detecting illegal magnetism are provided. Two first prize winning opening sensors 2402 and two magnetic sensors 2404 are provided.

  The first attacker unit 2400 has a unit base 2411 attached to the panel plate 1110, a front cover 2412 attached to the front side of the unit base 2411 and forming a flow path for the game ball B, and attached to the rear side of the unit base 2411. The rear cover 2413, the second start port door 2414 which is attached to the unit base 2411 and can close the second start port 2004, and the second start port door 2414 is movable to open and close the second start port 2004. A starting opening solenoid 2415 for closing the opening, a solenoid cover 2416 covering the starting opening solenoid 2415, a first winning opening door 2417 attached to the unit base 2411 and capable of closing the first winning opening 2005, For opening and closing the first grand prize opening 2005 by moving the big prize opening door 2417 Includes as one attacker solenoid 2418, the transmission member 2419 to the movable first winning opening the door 2417 by transmitting the advance and retreat of the first attacker solenoid 2418, the.

  The first attacker unit 2400 is attached to the rear cover 2413, and is attached to the rear face of the rear cover 2413, the first big prize opening decoration board 2420 for decorating the first big prize opening 2005 with light emission, Second start port sensor 2401, first grand prize port sensor 2402, first sub-out port sensor 2403, magnetic sensor 2404, start port solenoid 2415, first attacker solenoid 2418, first big prize port decoration board 2420 and panel relay board And a first attacker relay board 2421 for relaying the connection with 1710.

  The unit base 2411 is formed of a transparent member. The unit base 2411 includes a first opening 2411a penetrating back and forth in the vicinity of the upper right side from the center in the left-right direction, a first guide hole 2411b penetrating front and rear under the first opening 2411a, A second opening 2411c penetrating back and forth long in the left and right in the upper left part from the center, two second guide holes 2411d penetrating in the front and rear side by side in the left and right below the second opening 2411c, And a first sub-out port 2011 penetrating back and forth below the one guide hole 2411b.

  The first opening 2411a of the unit base 2411 is formed such that the left and right widths are slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B, and the door portion 2414a of the second starter door 2414 is inserted therethrough. The first guide hole 2411b is provided at a position below the center in the vertical direction. The first guide hole 2411b protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape, and is inclined so that the rear end side is lowered. The second opening 2411c is four to six times as long as the diameter of the game ball B and extends to the left and right, and the door 2417a of the first big prize opening door 2417 is inserted therethrough. Each of the second guide holes 2411d protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape, and is inclined so that the rear end side is lowered.

  Further, the unit base 2411 is arranged side by side along the upper side of the second opening 2411c, and has two abutting portions 2411e protruding forward in a triangular shape. These abutting portions 2411e allow the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a of the first grand prize opening door 2417 to be in contact with the abutting portion of the front cover 2412 when the first grand prize opening 2005 is closed. In cooperation, they are distributed in a large zigzag shape in the front-rear direction.

  A second start port sensor 2401 is attached to the unit base 2411 with the detection hole protruding forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411 immediately above the first guide hole 2411b. In addition, the first big prize opening sensor 2402 is attached directly above the two second guide holes 2411d with the detection hole protruding forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. Furthermore, at the rear end of the first sub-out port 2011, a first sub-out port sensor 2403 is attached to the unit base 2411 so that the detection holes coincide. In addition, magnetic sensors 2404 are attached to a portion on the left side of the first guide hole 2411b on the rear surface of the unit base 2411 and a portion on the right side of the two second guide holes 2411d.

  The front cover 2412 is formed in a box shape opened to the rear, and is formed in a transparent member. The front cover 2412 is for forming a path for the game ball B on the front surface of the unit base 2411. As shown in FIG. 125, the front cover 2412 has a first shelf portion 2412a extending from the vicinity of the upper right corner so as to be lowered to the left in the front view, and a game ball from the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a to the left. It extends slightly shorter than the first shelf 2412a so as to be lowered to the left from a position lower than the left end of the first shelf 2412a and spaced slightly longer than the diameter of B, and between the first shelf 2412a And the second shelf 2412b forming the second start port 2004, and the second shelf so as to be lowered to the left from the position lower than the diameter of the game ball B on the left side of the left end of the second shelf 2412b. A third shelf 2412c that extends shorter than the portion 2412b, and a third shelf 2412c that is spaced from the left end of the third shelf 2412c to the left by 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B. Lower from the lower position to the left It extends so that has a fourth ledge 2412d forming the first special winning opening 2005 between the third ledge 2412c, a.

  The right end of the first shelf 2412a is farther leftward from the right side of the front cover 2412 slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B. The first shelf 2412a, the second shelf 2412b, and the third shelf 2412c are each inclined at the same angle, and the fourth shelf 2412d is inclined at a steeper angle than the first shelf 2412a and the like. ing.

  Also, the front cover 2412 is the same as the first standing wall 2412e extending vertically downward from the right end of the first shelf 2412a and the lower end of the first standing wall 2412e vertically downward from the left end of the first shelf 2412a. A second standing wall portion 2412f extending to a height, a third standing wall portion 2412g extending vertically downward from the right end of the second shelf portion 2412b to the same height as the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2412e, and a third shelf portion 2412c. A fourth standing wall portion 2412h extending vertically downward from the right end of the front cover 2412, a fifth standing wall portion 2412i extending downward from the left end of the third shelf portion 2412c, and a right end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d. And a seventh standing wall portion 2412k extending downward from the left end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d.

  The fifth standing wall portion 2412i extends from the left end of the third shelf portion 2412c downward to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2412d and then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to be lowered leftward. Further, it extends downward to the lower side of the front cover 2412. Further, the sixth standing wall portion 2412j extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to be lowered to the right after extending downward from the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2412d. Above, it extends further downward to the lower side of the front cover 2412. The space between the lower portions of the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j is longer than twice the diameter of the game ball B.

  Further, the front cover 2412 includes a first horizontal wall portion 2412l that connects lower ends of the first standing wall portion 2412e, the second standing wall portion 2412f, and the third standing wall portion 2412g, and a first standing wall portion on the right side of the front cover 2412. From the position lower than the lower end of 2412e, after inclining so as to be lowered to the left with an interval that allows the game ball B to circulate between the first horizontal wall portion 2412l, and to the middle of the left fourth standing wall portion 2412h And a second lateral wall portion 2412m that is inclined so as to become higher. The first horizontal wall portion 2412l is provided at the same height as the lower end of the first guide hole 2411b in the unit base 2411. The second horizontal wall portion 2412m is formed so that the portion of the first sub-out port 2011 below the second start port 2004 is the lowest.

  Further, the front cover 2412 extends from the vicinity of the lower portions of the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j to the vicinity of the center between the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j, respectively. It has a third lateral wall portion 2412n that extends and a partition portion 2412o that connects the opposing ends of the two third lateral wall portions 2412n and extends upward. The third horizontal wall portion 2412n is provided at the same height as the lower end of the second guide hole 2411d in the unit base 2411.

  Further, the front cover 2412 extends in a stepped manner so as to be lowered to the left along the upper side of the front cover, and an interval at which the game ball B can circulate between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c. It is provided with a gap. It has an upper shelf 2412p. The upper shelf 2412p has a right end located immediately above the left end of the first shelf 2412a, and a left end located slightly to the right of the right end of the fourth shelf 2412d. The upper shelf 2412p is inclined so that the vicinity of the right end is lowered to the right.

  Although not shown, the front cover 2412 is located in front of the abutting portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 and is triangularly formed in a portion that is staggered in the left-right direction with respect to the two abutting portions 2411e of the unit base 2411. It has two abutting portions protruding rearward in shape. These abutting portions are arranged so that the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a of the first grand prize opening door 2417 and the abutting portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 when the first grand prize opening 2005 is closed. By collaborating, they are distributed in a large zigzag shape in the front-rear direction.

  The rear cover 2413 is formed in a box shape opened forward. The rear cover 2413 cooperates with the unit base 2411 to hold a second start port door 2414, a solenoid cover 2416, a first big prize port door 2417, a first attacker solenoid 2418, and the like. In addition, the rear cover 2413 holds the second start port sensor 2401, the first big prize port sensor 2402, and the first sub-out port sensor 2403 so as to sandwich the front cover 2412 in cooperation with the front cover 2412.

  The second start-up door 2414 extends in the left-right direction from the flat door 2424a, the arm 2414b extending downward from the door 2414a, and the lower end of the arm 2414b. A rotating shaft 2414c that is rotatably mounted, and a connecting portion 2414d that is provided at a portion of the lower portion of the arm portion 2414b away from the rotating shaft 2414c and is connected to the tip of the plunger of the start port solenoid 2415. .

  The door portion 2414a of the second starter door 2414 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The arm portion 2414b of the second starter door 2414 extends downward from the rear end of the door portion 2414a and then bends forward to substantially the same position as the front end of the door portion 2414a. The connecting portion 2414d is provided closer to the door portion 2414a than the rotation shaft 2414c in the arm portion 2414b.

  The second start port 2414 can close the second start port 2004 by the door portion 2414a. The second start port door 2414 rotates (turns) about the rotation shaft 2414c by the advance / retreat of the plunger of the start port solenoid 2415 in the front / rear direction, whereby the door portion 2414a moves in the front / rear direction, The start port 2004 can be opened and closed.

  The start-up solenoid 2415 is attached with the direction in which the plunger protrudes forward. In the start port solenoid 2415, the plunger protrudes forward by a biasing force of a spring (not shown) when not energized, and the plunger retracts when energized.

  The first grand prize opening door 2417 includes a flat plate-like door portion 2417a that is long to the left and right, a pair of arm portions 2417b that extend downward from both left and right ends of the door portion 2417a, and a pair of arm portions 2417b. It has a rotating shaft 2417c coaxially extending from the lower end in the left-right direction and a columnar link pin 2417d protruding rightward from the lower portion of the right arm portion 2417b.

  The door portion 2417a of the first grand prize winning door 2417 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The pair of arm portions 2417b extends downward from the rear end of the door portion 2417a and then bends forward to substantially the same position as the front end of the door portion 2417a. The link pin 2417d is provided closer to the door portion 2417a than the rotation shaft 2417c in the lower portion of the arm portion 2417b. The link pin 2417d is slidably inserted into a slit 2419c extending up and down of a transmission member 2419 described later.

  The first big prize opening door 2417 can close the first big prize opening 2005 by the door portion 2417a. The first grand prize opening door 2417 is rotated (rotated) about the rotation shaft 2417c by the forward / backward movement of the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418, so that the door portion 2417a moves in the front / rear direction. The first big prize opening 2005 can be opened and closed.

  The first attacker solenoid 2418 is attached with the plunger protruding forward. When the first attacker solenoid 2418 is not energized, the plunger protrudes forward by a biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the plunger retracts when energized.

  The transmission member 2419 has a base 2419a attached to the tip of the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418, an extension 2419b extending forward from the base 2419a, and penetrates in the left-right direction near the front end of the extension 2419b. And a slit 2419c extending vertically. In the slit 2419c of the transmission member 2419, the link pin 2417d of the first big prize opening door 2417 is slidably inserted.

  A plurality of LEDs that can irradiate light forward are mounted on the front surface of the first grand prize opening decoration board 2420. The plurality of LEDs on the first grand prize opening decoration board 2420 are full-color LEDs. The first big prize opening decoration board 2420 can make the first big prize opening 2005 emit light decoration by causing a plurality of LEDs to emit light.

  In the normal state of the first attacker unit 2400, the start port solenoid 2415 and the first attacker solenoid 2418 are each in a non-energized (OFF) state. In this normal state, the plunger of the start port solenoid 2415 protrudes forward by a biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the door portion 2414a of the second start port door 2414 passes through the first opening portion 2411a of the unit base 2411. Projecting forward. In this state, the door portion 2414a of the second starter door 2414 is positioned above the second starter port 2004, and the door 2414a cannot accept the game ball B into the second starter port 2004. It has become. That is, the second start port 2004 is closed by the second start port door 2414 (door portion 2414a) (see FIG. 125).

  In a normal state, the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418 protrudes forward by the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the door portion 2417a of the first big prize opening door 2417 is the second opening portion of the unit base 2411. Projecting forward through 2411c. In this state, the door part 2417a of the first grand prize opening door 2417 is positioned above the first big prize opening 2005, and the game part B cannot be received into the first big prize opening 2005 by the door part 2417a. It is in a state. That is, the first grand prize opening 2005 is closed by the first big prize opening door 2417 (door portion 2417a) (see FIGS. 124 and 125).

  In this normal state, when the game ball B flows down on the first shelf 2412a, the game ball B rolls to the left due to the inclination of the first shelf 2412a, and the door 2424a of the second start door 2414a After rolling on the upper surface and the second shelf 2412b, it is discharged leftward from the left end of the second shelf 2412b. The game ball B released to the left from the second shelf portion 2412b falls on the third shelf portion 2412c or the door portion 2417a of the first grand prize opening door 2417 according to the momentum, and left by the inclination thereof. Roll toward you. If the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2412b abuts on the lower surface of the upper shelf 2412p and bounces to the right, the gap between the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412c May enter.

  At this time, the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a closing the first grand prize opening 2005 is in contact with the contact portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 and the contact portion of the front cover 2412. It will contact alternately, and will roll to the left while zigzagging in the front-rear direction. The game ball B that has rolled leftward on the door portion 2417a is discharged outside the first attacker unit 2400 from the left end after rolling on the fourth shelf portion 2412d.

  In the first attacker unit 2400, when the game ball B flows to the right of the first shelf 2412a, it passes through the right side of the first standing wall 2412e and falls near the right end of the second horizontal wall 2412m. It rolls to the left by the inclination of the part 2412m and enters the first sub-out port 2011. Further, when the game ball B enters the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c, it passes between the third standing wall portion 2412g and the fourth standing wall portion 2412h, and the second lateral wall portion 2412m It falls to the vicinity of the left end, rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second lateral wall portion 2412m, and enters the first sub-out port 2011.

  The game ball B that has entered the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403 and then returned to the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 without being returned into the game area 5a. It is delivered and discharged from the back guide unit 3050 onto the lower substrate holder 1200. In the first attacker unit 2400, the game balls B that circulate on the right side of the first shelf 2412a and the game balls B that pass through the gap between the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412c are both first It is formed so as to enter one sub-out port 2011, and substantially two first sub-out ports 2011 are provided.

  In this normal state, when the start port solenoid 2415 is energized (ON) in accordance with the normal lottery result lottered by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, the plunger is resisted against the biasing force of the spring. The connecting portion 2414d on the upper side (the door portion 2414a side) of the arm portion 2414b of the second start-up door 2424b is pulled rearward by the tip of the plunger. As a result, the second starter door 2414 rotates about the rotation shaft 2414c in the direction in which the door 2414a moves rearward. Then, the door portion 2414a rotates so as to retreat from the front surface of the unit base 2411, so that the upper side of the second start port 2004 is opened, and the game ball B can be received in the second start port 2004. It becomes. That is, the second start port 2004 is opened.

  When the game ball B is received in the second start port 2004 when the second start port 2004 is in the open state, it flows down between the second standing wall portion 2412f and the third standing wall portion 2412g, and is sent to the second start port sensor 2401. After being detected, it falls onto the first lateral wall portion 2412l. A portion between the second standing wall portion 2412f and the third standing wall portion 2412g in the first horizontal wall portion 2412l is inclined so as to be lowered rearward, and the game ball B rolls backward due to the inclination, and the unit It enters the first guide hole 2411b of the base 2411 and is discharged backward from its rear end. The game ball B released backward from the rear end of the first guide hole 2411b is delivered to the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is transferred from the back guide unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below. Discharged.

  On the other hand, in a normal state, according to the special lottery result (the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result) lottery by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, When the first attacker solenoid 2418 is energized (ON), the plunger moves backward together with the transmission member 2419 attached to the tip thereof against the biasing force of the spring. When the transmission member 2419 is retracted, the link pin 2417d of the first big prize opening door 2417 inserted into the slit 2419c of the transmission member 2419 is pushed backward by the inner wall of the slit 2419c while sliding in the slit 2419c. It will be.

  As a result, the first grand prize opening door 2417 rotates so that the door portion 2417a moves rearward about the rotation shaft 2417c, and the front end of the door portion 2417a is rearward of the front surface of the unit base 2411. Will move. When the door portion 2417a of the first grand prize opening door 2417 moves rearward from the front surface of the unit base 2411, the first big prize opening 2005 is opened upward, and the first big prize opening 2005 is entered. The game ball B can be received (see FIG. 124). That is, the first big prize opening 2005 is in an open state.

  When the game ball B is received in the first grand prize opening 2005 when the first grand prize opening 2005 is open, the fifth standing wall is passed between the fifth standing wall part 2412i and the sixth standing wall part 2412j. After being detected by one of the two first big prize opening sensors 2402 between the part 2412i and the partition part 2412o or between the sixth standing wall part 2412j and the partition part 2412o, It falls on the three horizontal walls 2412n. The third horizontal wall portion 2412n is inclined so as to be lowered rearward from the upper surface, and the game ball B dropped on the third horizontal wall portion 2412n rolls backward due to the inclination, and the unit base 2411 It is discharged backward through the second guide hole 2411d. The game ball B released backward from the second guide hole 2411d is transferred to the sixth transfer port 3066 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and discharged from the back guide unit 3050 onto the lower substrate holder 1200. .

  Thus, according to the first attacker unit 2400 of the present embodiment, in the first big prize opening door 2417 that opens and closes the first big prize opening 2005, the vicinity of the front end of the door portion 2417a that closes the first big prize opening 2005. Since the door portion 2417a is rotated around a rotation shaft 2417c extending in the left and right directions at the same position in the front-rear direction, the first big prize opening 2005 is opened and closed. The depth in the front-rear direction applied to the attacker unit 2400) can be shortened as much as possible. This effect is the same in the second start port 2004 that is opened and closed by the second start port door 2414. Thereby, the space behind the first attacker unit 2400 can be relatively widened.

  Further, in the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B received from the first big prize opening 2005 is divided into two by the partition part 2412o, and each is detected by a different first big prize mouth sensor 2402, and the unit base 2411 is used. Since the game ball B can be prevented from staying between the first big prize opening 2005 and the first big prize opening sensor 2402, a large number of game balls can be obtained in a short time. B can be accepted.

[5-8e. Center character]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 126 and 127. FIG. 126 (a) is a perspective view of the center role of the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 126 (b) is a perspective view of the center role of the front unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 127 is a front view of the center accessory. The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100 and slightly above the center in front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a transparent frame shape, and various effect units provided in the effect display device 1600 and the rear unit 3000 provided behind the game panel 1100 can be visually recognized from the front. .

  The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has a portion that protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference, and the game ball B that is driven into the game area 5a is within the frame. It cannot be invaded.

  The center accessory 2500 has a frame-like peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as a center frame) extending in the front-rear direction and a flat plate shape that protrudes from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and abuts against the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. A flange portion 2502 and a flat plate-like support portion 2503 projecting from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 are provided. The peripheral wall portion 2501 extends rearward to a position where the rear end coincides with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in a state assembled to the game board 5. The peripheral wall 2501 is formed in a shape along the inner periphery of the opening 1112 in which the center accessory 2500 in the panel plate 1110 is inserted. The peripheral wall portion 2501 can prevent the game ball B from entering the inside of the frame from the outside of the center accessory 2500 in the assembled state on the game board 5.

  The thickness of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 is formed to be thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1/4 to 1/5 the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 protrude from the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the same position in the front-rear direction. Accordingly, the distance from the rear surface of the support portion 2503 (flange portion 2502) to the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110.

  A plurality of support portions 2503 are partially provided on the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501. Further, the support portion 2503 is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 does not protrude, and reinforces the peripheral wall portion 2501. In addition, the support part 2503 has an end side protruding from the peripheral wall part 2501 formed in a shape following the front shape of the peripheral wall part 2501 or a straight line so that the support part 2503 is not conspicuous. The support portion 2503 has a protruding amount from the peripheral wall portion 2501 within the range of the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm). It is difficult to stand out from.

  More specifically, a plurality of support portions 2503 of the center accessory 2500 are provided. For example, in the support part 2503 provided above the warp inlet 2511 described later and the peripheral wall part 2501 projecting to the left most, the shape of the peripheral wall part 2501 at the part is the middle of the part extending vertically. Has a shape that bulges to the left. And the front end side of the support part 2503 is formed in a shape along the peripheral wall part 2501 on both the upper and lower sides of the part bulging to the left of the peripheral wall part 2501, and in the part bulging to the left of the peripheral wall part 2501, The shape is different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is formed in a straight line so as to connect the upper and lower side portions (see FIG. 135). The support part 2503 of this part is in the state assembled to the game board 5, and the part extending linearly up and down at the front end side of the support part 2503 is the back front left decorative body in the back unit 3000 provided at the rear. It is substantially along a part of the right side of 3030. Accordingly, since the front end side of the support portion 2503 matches the edge of the back left decorative body 3030, it becomes difficult for the support portion 2503 to discriminate, and the back front left decoration provided relatively behind is relatively difficult. The decoration of the body 3030 can be made conspicuous.

  Of the plurality of support portions 2503, the lower support portion 2503 of the warp inlet 2511 extends to the right in a quadrilateral shape while the peripheral wall portion 2501 extends obliquely. The support portion 2503 of this part is positioned in front of the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C in the back front left rendering unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 in a state assembled to the game board 5 (see FIG. 107 and the like). ). The tip side extending to the left and right of the support portion 2503 extends in parallel with the plurality of shutters 3732 of the shutter unit 3730 in the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C. It is difficult to discriminate the support unit 2503 (see FIG. 111).

  The center accessory 2500 is a warp entrance in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is open so that it can enter the front wall of the peripheral wall 2501 on the left side of the front view of the front panel of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). 2511, a warp outlet 2512 that can be released from the game ball B that has entered the warp inlet 2511 and opened in the frame on the rear side of the front of the game panel 1100, and a game ball B released from the warp outlet 2512 A stage 2513 that can be released into the game area 5a after rolling in the left-right direction and a stage cover 2515 provided so as to cover the top of the stage 2513 are provided (see FIG. 127 and the like). The stage cover 2515 is for preventing the game ball B from entering the inside of the frame from the outside of the center accessory 2500 by rebounding the game ball B bounced on the stage 2513 to the stage 2513 side.

  The stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is depressed, and corresponds to the position directly above the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is the panel plate of the game panel 1100. In a state of being attached to 1110, a substantially central position in the left-right direction is formed in a wave shape (W-shape) so as to be slightly higher than the left and right sides. In the stage 2513, a portion (central discharge portion 2513a) that is slightly higher than the left and right sides at the center in the left-right direction and a lowest portion (side discharge portion 2513b) on both the left and right sides are directed forward. It inclines so that it may become low, and the game ball | bowl B can be discharge | released into the game area | region 5a from those parts.

  In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the heightened portion (central discharge portion 2513 a) at the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2513 is located immediately above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. ing. Thus, when the game ball B is released from the central release portion 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, it is received in the first start port 2002 with a very high probability.

  The center accessory 2500 includes a guide passage group 2520 that is provided in the upper right corner and includes two passages through which the game balls B can flow. In a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the right end of the guide passage group 2520 (the end of the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500) is the inner periphery of the game area 5a (the stop of the front component member 1000). The game ball B, which is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005) near the portion 1006) and is driven to the right above the center accessory 2500, is formed so as to always pass through the guide passage group 2520.

  The guide passage group 2520 has a length in the vertical direction of about 1/7 of the total height of the game area 5a. Each of the guide passage groups 2520 is formed in a groove shape opened to the front, so that the game balls B circulating inside can be visually recognized from the front in a good state.

  The guide passage group 2520 is provided on the outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500, and is along the peripheral wall portion 2501 on the right side of the first guide passage 2521 and the first guide passage 2521 that are separated from the peripheral wall portion 2501. And a second guide passage 2522 extending. The entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 are separated from each other on the left and right. Further, the outlet of the first guide passage 2521 and the outlet of the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent to the left and right, and open obliquely downward to the right along the arc of the upper portion of the right rail 1005.

  The guide passage group 2520 is located above the gate portion 2003 in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5. Further, the right end of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 is located directly below the lower end of the stop portion 1006 of the front component member 1000, and most of the game balls B that are in contact with the stop portion 1006 are the first guide. It is formed so as to enter the passage 2521.

  The center accessory 2500 protrudes rightward from the lower right corner of the peripheral wall 2501 and includes a lower right guide passage 2530 that guides the game ball B from above and discharges it downward. The lower right guide passage 2530 has an entrance that opens upward across the front width in the left-right direction, and an exit that opens obliquely to the lower left with a width corresponding to one game ball B.

  The lower right guide passage 2530 is assembled to the game board 5, and the right end thereof is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005, and is located between the first attacker unit 2400 and the second attacker unit 2600. Therefore, the second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are arranged between the guide passage group 2520 and the lower right guide passage 2530.

  According to the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, since the support portion 2503 protruding inward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is provided at the portion where the support portion 2503 is provided. Since it becomes an outer edge, the inside of the peripheral wall portion 2501 (inside the frame of the center accessory 2500) can be made relatively wide, and the effect image of the effect display device 1600 on the back and the back unit through the frame of the center accessory 2500 It is possible to make 3000 decorations and the like more visible.

  Moreover, since the support part 2503 which protruded inward is provided in the site | part in which the flange part 2502 in the surrounding wall part 2501 is not provided, the intensity | strength of the surrounding wall part 2501 can be reinforced. Thereby, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be prevented from being deformed or damaged. Moreover, since the strength of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by the support portion 2503, the center accessory 2500 can be removed from the injection mold without being deformed.

  In addition, since the transparent support portion 2503 protrudes short from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is provided partially with respect to the entire periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the back side where the support portion 2503 is provided on the rear side It is possible to reduce the obstruction of the visibility of the decorative body of the unit 3000 and the effect image of the effect display device 1600. The center role 2500 such as the support portion 2503 is transparent, and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left rendering unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 are located as close as possible to the rear surface of the center role 2500. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decoration of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left effect unit 3700 from being blurred due to the lens effect of the transparent center accessory 2500. For this reason, according to the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, the visibility of a decorative body or the like provided on the rear side can be improved, and the decorative effect by them can be surely exhibited.

  Furthermore, since the support portion 2503 and the like are made transparent and the support portion 2503 is provided in front of a decorative body that can be decorated with light emission and the effect display device 1600, it can be decorated with light emission from them and the appearance is good. can do. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 and the like, a back front left effect unit 3700, an effect display device 1600 and the like in the back unit 3000 are provided behind the support portion 2503 (cross hatched portion in FIG. 135). The light emitted forward from the LED on the front left decorative board 3714 in the back front rendering unit 3700, the rendering display device 1600, etc. is transmitted, reflected, refracted or diffused to give a brilliant light emitting decoration. Can be shown to the player. Note that a step, a notch, or the like may be provided in the support portion 2503, and light from the back can be diffused by the step or the like, so that it can be seen more gorgeously.

  In addition, by providing the support portion 2503, the support portion 2503 in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) is provided in a portion where the flange portion 2502 protruding outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided. In the vicinity, the obstacle nail N can be implanted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall 2501. Thereby, the area of the game by the plurality of obstacle nails N can be enlarged as much as possible in the game area 5a, and the pachinko machine 1 in which the original game can be enjoyed can be obtained.

  Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in the same shape as the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is flush with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, and the support portion 2503. Is provided on substantially the same plane as the front surface of the panel board 1110, so that the support portion 2503 can be made inconspicuous to the player, and the center accessory 2500 appears to be integrated with the panel board 1110. be able to.

  Furthermore, since the support portion 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the center accessory 2500, compared with the case where the support portion 2503 is provided on the entire periphery, the inside of the center accessory 2500 is more The display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided in the rear can be made easier to see. In other words, when the non-circulation region (inside the frame) partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center frame) of the center accessory 2500 is desired to be enlarged, the support portion 2503 is provided on a part of the entire periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501. Anyway. Alternatively, it is preferable that the support portion 2503 has an extension amount that does not overlap with the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided in the rear in the front view.

  Note that the edge of the support portion 2503 may have a shape similar to the shape of the front cover 3711 (the shape of the decorative body) of the back front left rendering unit 3700 provided at the rear. Thereby, it can suppress that the support part 2503 differs from the decoration of the back and the support part 2503 conspicuously deteriorates the decoration of the back decoration body. Can be increased.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the support portion 2503 is provided at a position near the back front left decorative body 3030 or the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear, and the decoration is made by the lens effect. Although it has been shown that it is suppressed from being blurred, it is not limited to this, and the support portion 2503 is provided in the vicinity of the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 away from the rear back unit 3000. Intentionally, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left rendering unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 provided on the rear side may be blurred.

  In the above-described embodiment, the opening 1112 penetrating the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 is provided, and the rear side of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is inserted into the opening 1112. However, the peripheral portion 2501 may not have a rear portion inserted into the opening portion 1112. In this case, the peripheral wall portion 2501 may be attached to the game panel 1100 that does not have the opening portion 1112. . Further, when the center accessory 2500 is attached to the gaming panel 1100 that does not have the opening portion 1112, the support portion 2503 may be attached to the gaming panel 1100, and in this case, the flange portion 2502 is not provided in the center accessory 2500. You may do it.

[5-8f. Second attacker unit]
Next, the second attacker unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129. FIG. 128 (a) is a perspective view of the second attacker unit, side right middle unit, and gate member in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 128 (b) is the second attacker unit, side right middle unit in the front unit, and It is the perspective view which looked at the gate member from back. FIG. 129 is an explanatory diagram showing in cross section the path of the game ball in the second attacker unit and the side right middle unit.

  The second attacker unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is disposed on the right side of the right side of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500, and is disposed between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the center of the game area 5a in the vertical direction. The panel 1100 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110. The 2nd attacker unit 2600 is provided with the 2nd big prize opening 2006 opened so that opening and closing was possible toward the left (refer to Drawing 129).

  The second attacker unit 2600 includes a second major prize opening sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B received in the second major prize opening 2006, and a magnetic sensor that detects an improper time acting near the second major prize opening 2006. 2602. Further, the second attacker unit 2600 moves the second grand prize opening door 2611 for closing the second big prize opening 2006 so that it can be opened and closed, and the second big prize opening door 2611 to move the second big prize opening 2006. A second attacker solenoid 2612 for opening and closing, a transmission member (not shown) for transmitting the advance and retreat of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2612 to move the second big prize opening door 2611, and the second big prize opening 2006 A guide passage 2613 that guides the received game ball B and discharges it to the rear.

  In the second attacker unit 2600, the second large winning opening 2006 is opened leftward at a position on the right side from the center in the left-right direction, and the second large winning opening 2006 is closed from the left. A prize opening door 2611 is provided.

  The second grand prize opening door 2611 has a semicircular lower side that bulges downward, a right side that touches the right end of the lower side and extends linearly upward, and bulges leftward from the upper end of the right side. It is formed in a so-called blade shape composed of an arcuate left side in contact with the left side of the lower side. The second grand prize opening door 2611 has a columnar rotating shaft 2611a extending in the front-rear direction with the center of the lower side of the semicircular shape as an axis, and a link protruding in a columnar shape rearward from a position away from the rotating shaft And a pin (not shown). The second big prize opening door 2611 is rotatably attached to the lower rotary shaft so that the upper end moves to the left.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the second attacker solenoid 2612 is attached so that the plunger protrudes downward. A transmission member (not shown) has a base portion attached to the tip of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2612, and penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction so that the link pin of the second grand prize opening door 2611 can slide. A slit to be inserted, and is slidably attached in the vertical direction.

  The second attacker unit 2600 is positioned so that the right side is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component member 1000 in the assembled state on the game board 5, and the peripheral wall portion of the second big prize opening 2006 and the center accessory 2500 Between the right side in 2501, the space which can distribute | circulate the game ball B is formed. Further, in the state where the second attacker unit 2600 is assembled in the game board 5, the rear surface including the rear end of the guide passage 2613 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100.

  In the normal state, the second attacker unit 2600 is in a state where the second attacker solenoid 2612 is not energized (OFF), and the plunger protrudes downward due to its own weight and the weight of the transmission member. In this state, the second grand prize opening door 2611 stands upright, and the second big prize winning opening 2006 is closed by the second big prize opening door 2611. That is, in a normal state, the game ball B cannot be received with respect to the second big prize opening 2006.

  In this normal state, according to the special lottery result (the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result) lottery by accepting the game ball B in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, When the two-attacker solenoid 2612 is energized (ON), the transmission member moves upward together with the plunger, and the link pin of the second big prize opening door 2611 inserted in the slit of the transmission member is pulled upward. At the same time, by sliding in the slit, the second grand prize opening door 2611 rotates in the counterclockwise direction around the rotation shaft 2611a.

  As a result, the upper end of the second grand prize opening door 2611 moves to the left, the second big prize opening 2006 is opened leftward, and the right end side of the second big prize opening door 2611 is lowered. It will be in the state which inclined like this. That is, the second grand prize winning opening 2006 is opened. In this state, when the game ball B that has flowed down comes into contact with the second grand prize opening door 2611, it rolls to the right due to its inclination and is received in the second big prize opening 2006. The game ball B received in the second big prize opening 2006 is detected by the second big prize opening sensor 2601 and then guided by the guide passage 2613 and released backward. The game ball B released backward from the guide passage 2613 is delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 and is discharged from the back guide unit 3050 onto the lower substrate holder 1200.

[5-8 g. Side right middle unit]
Next, the side right middle unit 2700 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129. The middle right side unit 2700 of the front unit 2000 is disposed immediately above the second attacker unit 2600 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. The side right middle unit 2700 includes one general winning port 2001 and a second sub-out port 2012.

  The side right middle unit 2700 has a width corresponding to one game ball B in the left-right direction, and the general winning opening 2001 is always open upward, adjacent to the right side of the general winning opening 2001, and in the left-right direction. The second sub-out port 2012 is always open upward with a width corresponding to two balls B.

  Further, the side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 backward to the first guide passage 2701 and the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 backward. And two guide passages 2702. The first guide passage 2701 is formed in a crank shape that extends rearward from the general winning opening 2001 and then bends to the right and further to the rear. The second guide passage 2702 extends downward from the second sub-out port 2012 below the first guide passage 2701 and then bends backward. The outlet of the first guide passage 2701 and the outlet of the second guide passage 2702 are arranged vertically.

  When the side right middle unit 2700 is assembled to the game board 5, the rear ends of the first guide passage 2701 and the second guide passage 2702 protrude rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. Yes.

  Further, the side right middle unit 2700 is assembled to the game board 5, and the right end is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component member 1000, and the lower end is substantially in contact with the upper end of the second attacker unit 2600. A space in which the game ball B can circulate is formed between the left end and the right side of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500. In the side right middle unit 2700, the general winning opening 2001 is opened upward at a position slightly left of the second large winning opening 2006, and the second sub-out opening 2012 is formed between the general winning opening 2001 and the right rail 1005. It is opened upward over substantially the entire area (see FIG. 130 and the like).

  The side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 by the first guide passage 2701 and then the rear side provided on the rear side. It can be delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the unit 3000. The game ball B delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 is detected by the general winning port sensor 3051 and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200. In addition, the side right middle unit 2700 is a rear unit provided at the rear after guiding the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 to the rear side of the panel board 1110 by the second guide passage 2702. It can be delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 of the back guidance unit 3050 at 3000. The game ball B delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 is detected by the second sub-out port sensor 3054 and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200.

[5-8h. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2800 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 and 128. The gate member 2800 of the front unit 2000 is disposed between the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the side right middle unit 2700 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. It has been. The gate member 2800 includes a gate part 2003 where a lottery of a normal lottery result for opening and closing the second start port 2004 by the passage of the game ball B is performed, and a gate sensor for detecting that the game cow B has passed through the gate part 2003 2801. A detection hole for detecting the game ball B in the gate sensor 2801 is a gate portion 2003.

  The gate member 2800 has a guide piece 2802 that protrudes obliquely downward from the right end of the lower surface. The guide piece 2802 is for guiding the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 to the lower left. When the guide piece 2802 is assembled to the game board 5, the extended line is inclined so as to pass near the left end of the general winning opening 2001 in the side right middle unit 2700.

  The gate member 2800 is located in the approximate center between the right rail 1005 of the front component member 1000 and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 in the assembled state on the game board 5, A gap in which the sphere B can flow is formed. This gate member 2800 is located slightly to the left of the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 just below the first guide passage 2521 and to the right of just above the general winning port 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700. positioned.

[5-8i. The flow of game balls in the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the game area 5a will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 115 and FIG. FIG. 130 is an explanatory diagram in which the right part in the game area in FIG. 115 is enlarged. In the state assembled to the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided at substantially the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at the left and right outer side portions and the lower side portion of the center accessory 2500. In addition, a windmill W that rotates by the contact of the game ball B is provided on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and above the upper left side unit 2300.

  The plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the center character 2500 mainly enter the game ball B driven on the left side of the center character 2500 into a portion on the right side of the center of the windmill W. It is adjusted so that it may approach to the portion on the left side of the center of the windmill W with a lower probability than those. Thereby, the game ball B can be made to enter the warp inlet 2511 of the center accessory 2500 with a certain probability by driving the game ball B so as to flow down the left side of the center accessory 2500.

  The plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the gate member 2800 is more than the game ball B that circulates through the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the guide passage group 2520. The game ball B that has circulated through the second guide passage 2522 on the left side of the guide passage group 2520 is adjusted to pass through the gate portion 2003 with a high probability. Further, the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 are mainly adjusted so that the game ball B flows on the left side of the right side portion of the gate member 2800. ing.

  The plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700 are mainly adjusted so that the game ball B flows on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700.

  In the game area 5a, the game ball B is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and is driven from the left side to the upper part along the periphery of the game area 5a. When the game ball B is driven so as to circulate on the left side of the center role 2500 into the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. 115, a plurality of obstacle nails planted on the left side of the center role 2500 N is guided to enter either the warp inlet 2511 of the center object 2500 or the part on the right side of the center of the windmill W, and the part on the left side of the center of the windmill W with a lower probability than them. You are guided to enter.

  The game ball B guided to the left side of the center of the windmill W is guided rightward by the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200. Then, there is a possibility that the three general winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 may be accepted. After the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the fourth delivery port of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. 3064, and is detected by the general prize opening sensor 3051 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the general prize opening sensor 3051, a privilege for paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given. The game ball B guided to the left side of the center of the windmill W is hardly received in the first start port 2002. Then, the game balls B that are not received in the general winning award port 2001 are discharged from the out port 2010 to the outside of the game area 5a.

  The game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W is centered in the left-right direction (first start port 2002) by a plurality of obstacle nails N arranged obliquely along the lower side of the center accessory 2500. There is a possibility that the first start opening 2002 is received. In addition, the game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W may flow down onto the side unit 2200 through a plurality of obstacle nails N arranged in an oblique manner. There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the general prize opening 2001.

  The game ball B that has entered (received) the warp inlet 2511 of the center accessory 2500 is supplied from the warp outlet 2512 to the stage 2513. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513, moves back and forth, and is discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the central release portion 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, the central release portion 2513a is located immediately above the first start port 2002, and therefore the first is high. It is received in the start port 2002. When the game ball B is released from the left and right side discharge portions 2513b of the central discharge portion 2513a, it is accepted into the first start port 2002 with a certain probability.

  The game ball B received in the first start port 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then transferred to the first transfer port 3061 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and the first start port sensor. After being detected by 3052, it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the first start port sensor 3052, the first special lottery result is drawn and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B is paid out. The game ball B that has been released from the stage 2513 and not received in the first start port 2002 is discharged from the out port 2010 to the outside of the game area 5a.

  Note that the game ball B that has circulated on the left side of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a passes through the gate portion 2003 or is received in the second start opening 2004, the first grand prize opening 2005, and the second big prize opening 2006. There is no possibility of being.

  In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B driven to the left side of the center accessory 2500 is compared with the probability that the game ball B driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 is received by the second starting port 2004. The probability of being accepted by the first start port 2002 is set higher. Thereby, when the first grand prize winning opening 2005 and the second big winning prize opening 2006 are not in the open state, it is possible to prompt the player to place the game ball B on the left side of the center accessory 2500 (“left strike”).

  In the game board 5 according to the present embodiment, the game ball B is placed at a strength with which the game ball B enters above a portion that decreases from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction on the upper side of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500 toward the right. When driven, the game ball B flows through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520.

  More specifically, the game ball B is hit with a strength that abuts against a stop portion 1006 projecting inward from the outer rail 1001 constituting a part of the periphery of the game area 5a (so-called right hitting). ), The game ball B that has come into contact with the stopper 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521. The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 is discharged downward at a position slightly to the right of the gate 2003 directly above.

  The game ball B released downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is placed on the left side of the gate member 2800, the gate portion by a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800. 2003 and the right side of the gate member 2800 are guided in order of decreasing probability, and flow down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B that has been driven into the right side of the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and circulates through the second guide passage 2522, the left side of the exit of the first guide passage 2521 Is released downward from The game ball B released downward from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 is guided so that the gate part 2003 and the left side of the gate member 2800 have substantially the same probability, and the right side of the gate member 2800 has a lower probability than them. Then, it flows down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

  The game ball B passing through the right side of the gate member 2800 is received in the second sub-out port 2012. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and transferred to the ninth transfer port 3069 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and then the second sub-out port sensor. After being detected by 3054, it is discharged out of the game area 5a. Further, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is detected by the gate sensor 2801 and then released to the side right middle unit 2700 side. When the game ball B is detected by the gate sensor 2801, a lottery of a normal lottery result in which the second start port 2004 is opened and closed is performed.

  The game ball B that has passed through the left side of the gate part 2003 and the gate member 2800 has a high probability that the side right middle unit 2700 has a plurality of obstacle nails N that are implanted between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700. The right side of the side right middle unit 2700 is occasionally received in the general winning opening 2001, or in rare cases is received in the second sub-out opening 2012. The game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then transferred to the eighth transfer port 3068 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. After being detected by the general prize opening sensor 3051, it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. At this time, a privilege for paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

  The game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and the second big prize opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600 is reached. Flow down to the left of.

  At this time, if the game ball B is received at the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 and “small hit” is selected as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, the second big prize is won. Since the mouth 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is accepted into the second grand prize winning port 2006 with a high probability.

  The game ball B received in the second big prize opening 2006 is detected by the second big prize opening sensor 2601 and guided to the back of the gaming panel 1100 outside the gaming area 5a, and then in the back unit 3000. It is delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 of the back guide unit 3050 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. By the detection of the game ball B by the second big prize opening sensor 2601, a privilege for paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

  The game ball B that has not been accepted into the second big prize opening 2006 and has flowed down to the left of the second big prize opening 2006 enters the lower right guide path 2530 of the center object 2500 and exits from the lower right guide path 2530. To the first attacker unit 2400 side.

  The game ball B released downward (obliquely left lower) from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 flows down onto the first shelf 2412a of the first attacker unit 2400. Since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B is directly connected to the first attacker unit 2400 from the lower right guide passage 2530. It does not flow down to the right side of the first standing wall portion 2412e.

  The game ball B that has flowed down to the first shelf 2412a of the first attacker unit 2400 rolls to the left due to its inclination, and the upper surface of the door portion 2414a of the second starter door 2414 and the second shelf 2412b. After rolling, it is discharged to the left from the left end of the second shelf 2412b. Then, the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2412b falls on the third shelf 2412c or the door portion 2417a of the first grand prize opening door 2417 according to the momentum, and the inclination thereof. , To the left, and after rolling the fourth shelf 2412d from the door portion 2417a, it is discharged from the fourth shelf 2412d to the left outside the first attacker unit 2400.

  In addition, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, it does not flow down to the first shelf portion 2412a but comes into contact with the upper shelf portion 2412p by contacting the obstacle nails N. May flow down. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper shelf 2412p rolls to the left due to its inclination and is released to the left from the left end of the upper shelf 2412p, and then to the obstacle nail N planted to the left. After coming into contact and changing the direction downward and flowing down to the vicinity of the left end of the upper surface of the door portion 2417a of the first grand prize opening door 2417, the door portion 2417a and the fourth shelf portion 2412d are rolled to the left to be first. It is discharged outside the attacker unit 2400. Therefore, even when the game ball B rolls on the upper shelf portion 2412p, the first large size depends on the timing at which the game ball B is released from the upper shelf portion 2412p and the timing at which the first grand prize winning opening 2005 is opened. The winning opening 2005 may be accepted.

  Further, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, the first shelf 2412a bounces back to the right due to contact with the right end of the obstacle nail N or the upper shelf 2412p. By flowing down, the first shelf 2412a may roll to the right against the inclination, and may be discharged to the right (downward) from the right end of the first shelf 2412a. The game ball B released to the right from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a flows between the first standing wall portion 2412e and the right rail 1005 of the front component member 1000, and flows down near the right end of the second lateral wall portion 2412m. Then, it rolls to the left by the inclination of the second lateral wall portion 2412m and is received in the first sub-out port 2011. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403 and is not returned to the game area 5a, but the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. And is discharged from the back guiding unit 3050 onto the lower substrate holder 1200.

  When the game ball B is released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, the second start is performed when “normal hit” is drawn as a result of the normal lottery due to the passage of the game ball B at the gate portion 2003. Since the mouth door 2414 is movable and the second start opening 2004 is opened in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B rolling leftward on the first shelf 2412a is received in the second start opening 2004. there is a possibility. When the game ball B is received in the second start port 2004, it is detected by the second start port sensor 2401 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by the second start port sensor 2401, the second special lottery result is drawn and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B is paid out.

  When the game ball B is released to the left from the second shelf 2412b, the game ball B is received at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery are received. As a result, when the “big hit” is drawn, the first big prize opening door 2417 is moved and the first big prize opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, so that it is discharged from the second shelf 2412b to the left. The game ball B will be accepted into the first grand prize opening 2005 with a high probability. The game ball B received in the first big prize opening 2005 is detected by the first big prize opening sensor 2402 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the gaming area 5a. By the detection of the game ball B by the first big prize opening sensor 2402, a privilege for paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

  Note that, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2412b, the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412b may flow downward to the lower right by contacting the step on the lower surface of the upper shelf 2412p. The game ball B may enter the gap between the shelf 2412c. The game ball B that has entered the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c passes between the third standing wall portion 2412g and the fourth standing wall portion 2412h and near the left end of the second lateral wall portion 2412m. It falls, rolls to the right by the inclination of the second lateral wall portion 2412m, and is received in the first sub-out port 2011.

  A game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 to the first attacker unit 2400 side is received in any of the second start port 2004, the first grand prize port 2005, and the first sub-out port 2011. If not, the outlet 2010 at the lower end of the game area 5a is discharged to the lower rear of the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a.

  For this reason, in order to open and close the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006, the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, and “small hit” is made. Or the first special lottery result such as “big hit” or the second special lottery result needs to be drawn. While the first start port 2002 is always open, the second start port 2004 needs to let the gate portion 2003 pass the game ball B and draw (assign) the “normal hit” as the normal lottery result. Therefore, the opportunity to accept the game ball B at the second start opening 2004 is lower than that of the first start opening 2002.

  Therefore, in a normal state, the player inserts the game ball B so that the game ball B flows down on the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B is received at the first start port 2002. The operation of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N can be shown, the original game by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed, and the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 can be enjoyed. Can raise the expectation for the acceptance of.

  Then, when the game ball B is received at the first start opening 2002, when “small hit” or “big hit” is drawn as the first special lottery result, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 Since the game ball B is opened and closed, the game ball B is changed to “right-handed” so that the game ball B can be received in the first grand prize port 2005 or the second grand prize port 2006. A sense of expectation for accepting the game ball B to the 2005 or second grand prize opening 2006 can be increased.

  At this time, a guide passage group 2520 including a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 is provided in the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500, and the gate portion 2003 can be easily passed by the guide passage to be distributed. Since it is easy to be received in the second sub-out port 2012, the driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted so that the game ball B circulates through a desired guide passage, and the player can play the game ball B's driving operation can be enjoyed.

  In addition, by performing “right-handed”, there is a possibility that “normal hit” in which the second starting port 2004 is opened by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003 may be drawn in lots. Since the game ball B is received at the second starting port 2004 and there is a possibility that “small hit” or “big hit” may be drawn, it is possible to increase the expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in interest Can do.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134 and the like. FIG. 131 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as seen from the back. FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit as viewed from the front after being disassembled for each main configuration, and FIG. 134 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit as viewed from the back after being disassembled for each main configuration. The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a on the rear wall and a box shape with the front open. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600.

  Also, the back unit 3000 is provided at the front left end decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 provided near the left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010, and at the lower part of the front end in the back box 3010. The rear guidance unit 3050 is provided, the rear rear production unit 3100 provided at the rear end of the back box 3010, and the rear guidance unit 3050 in the lower part of the back box 3010. The back bottom left production unit 3200 and the back bottom right production unit 3250, and the back bottom middle production unit 3300 provided behind the back bottom left production unit 3200 and the back bottom right production unit 3250 in the back box 3010. I have.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is provided behind the back front effect unit 3400 provided in front of the back back effect unit 3100 in the upper part of the back box 3010 and the back front left decorative body 3030 in the back box 3010. The rear back left rendering unit 3500, the back rear right rendering unit 3600 provided behind the back front right decorative body 3040 in the back box 3010, and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back rear left in the back box 3010. The front right effect unit 3700 provided between the effect unit 3500 and the front right effect unit 3700 provided between the front right decorative body 3040 and the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back box 3010. 3800.

[5-9a. Back box]
The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 131 to 134. The back box 3010 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. Inside the back box 3010, the back front left decorative body 3030, the back front right decorative body 3040, and various effect units are attached, and an effect display device 1600 and a drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side. The back box 3010 is formed of a synthetic resin in a transparent manner.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape in which the front is open and has an opening 3010a that penetrates the rear wall squarely, and a flat frame shape that protrudes backward from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and into which the upper fixing piece 1601b of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b A notch 3010d to which a lock mechanism 3020 is attached by being notched from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the lower side.

  Opening 3010a of back box 3010 is formed to have approximately the same size as the display screen of effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the effect display device 1600 to be fitted in the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the rear left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface so as to be slidable left and right.

  The back box 3010 includes a flat plate-like fixed piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes and the like at appropriate positions for mounting decorative bodies, effect units, and the like.

  The back box 3010 has a strip-shaped reinforcing plate 3011 made of a metal plate attached along the lower side and the left and right sides of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b is reinforced by the reinforcing plate 3011.

[5-9b. Front left decorative body and front right decorative body]
Next, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 135 and the like. FIG. 135 is a front view of the pachinko machine showing the enlarged upper left corner of the game board with the door frame made transparent. The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 of the back unit 3000 are attached to the front end of the back box 3010 separately from each other on the left and right.

  The left front decorative body 3030 includes a flat base 3031 extending vertically and a decorative seal 3032 attached to the front surface of the base 3031. The base 3031 extends vertically at the same height as the opening 3010 a of the back box 3010, and the left end side is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. Although not shown in the drawings, the decoration seal 3032 is decorated in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). The front left decorative body 3030 is opaque and can make the rear member invisible from the front.

  The front right decorative body 3040 includes a flat base 3041 extending vertically and a decorative seal 3042 attached to the front surface of the base 3041. The base 3041 extends from the upper end of the back box 3010 to the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction, and the right end side is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. Although not shown, the decorative seal 3042 is decorated in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). This back front right decorative body 3040 is formed to be opaque, and the rear member can be made invisible from the front.

  The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 extend in a flat plate shape so that the outer peripheral edge on the outside is located outside the game area 5a in a front view when assembled on the game board 5. (See FIGS. 111 and 135). Further, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are formed in a flat plate shape so that the outer peripheral edge on the outside is located outside the door window 101a in the door frame 3 when assembled in the pachinko machine 1. It extends to.

  More specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 135, when viewed from the front, the back front left decorative body 3030 is half from the bottom of the back back left lifting drive motor 3554 provided at the upper left corner of the back back left rendering unit 3500. It is extended to the position. In other words, the back front left decorative body 3030 is extended outward from the function display unit 1400 attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 when viewed from the front. Furthermore, in other words, the back left decorative body 3030 is extended outward from the door window 101 a in the door frame 3.

  As a result, in the assembled state on the game board 5, the lower half of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 can be covered with the back front left decorative body 3030 (the shaded portion in FIG. 135). The elevating drive motor 3554 can be made difficult to see. Moreover, in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the back front left decorative body 3030 covering the lower half of the back back left lifting drive motor 3554 is outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 (hatched portion in FIG. 135). Therefore, the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 can be made invisible (not visible) from the player side by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the door frame 3. Therefore, functional parts such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided behind the back front left decorative body 3030 can be made invisible from the player side, and the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) is improved. can do.

  Further, the back front left decorative body 3030 extends so as to cover a part (lower half) of the back back left raising / lowering drive motor 3554, and the back back left raising / lowering drive motor 3554 is assembled in the game board 5. A part (upper half) can be seen from the front, but the upper half of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 can be covered and hidden by the door frame 3 by assembling the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, it is not necessary to extend the back front left decorative body 3030 so as to cover the entire back back left raising / lowering drive motor 3554, and it is possible to suppress the back front left decorative body 3030 from becoming unnecessarily large. The cost for the machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, since the back front left decorative body 3030 extends outward from the function display unit 1400, even if the function display unit 1400 is not attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 when viewed from the front, the function display unit. Instead of 1400, the back front left decorative body 3030 can hide the back back left elevating drive motor 3554 (functional component) and the like provided behind.

  On the other hand, the back right decorative body 3040 extends to the upper right corner of the back box 3010 so as to cover the entire back back right elevating drive motor 3654 in the back back right rendering unit 3600 when viewed from the front. Even through the component member 1000 and the transparent game panel 1100, the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 is not visible from the front (player side). Accordingly, by making functional components such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided behind the front right decorative body 3040 invisible from the player side, the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) is improved. And the same effect as the front left decorative body 3030 can be exhibited.

  As described above, according to the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 of the present embodiment, at least a part of functional components such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided at the back is covered. Therefore, it is difficult to see the functional parts from the player side, and the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) can be improved.

  Further, as described above, the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent because the front left functional body 3030 and the front front right decorative body 3040 can cover the front of the functional parts provided behind. However, it is possible to make the functional component invisible from the player side. That is, the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent. Therefore, the transparent front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 can reduce the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a, can give the player a sense of openness, and can also provide an actual game area 5a. However, the game area 5a can be shown larger (wider) to the player. At this time, portions of the decorative seal 3032 of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the decorative seal 3042 of the back front right decorative body 3040 to which a predetermined decoration is applied are located on the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100. Can be visually recognized from the front through the game area 5a, so that the outside of the game area 5a can be decorated, and the game area 5a can be made larger than the actual game, thereby attracting the player's attention strongly. It can be set as the board 5 (pachinko machine 1).

  Further, as described above, the front structural member 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040, so that the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, and the back unit 3000, etc., can be reflected or refracted forward (player side) by the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 so that the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 emit light. As a result, the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

  It should be noted that functional parts such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided on the rear side are provided from the player side by a portion of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 that extends outward from the game area 5a. Since it cannot be visually recognized, all functional components may be provided outside the game area 5a in front view. At this time, since the size of the game board 5 is limited, when it is attempted to secure a space for providing all the functional components outside the game area 5a, the size of the game area 5a is relatively reduced. Since there is a risk that a problem that must be generated may occur, a part of the functional components is out of the game area 5a in such a balance that the game area 5a can be made larger than the size of the game board 5 as in this embodiment It is desirable to provide it.

  In addition, it is desirable that the decoration of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 be a decoration related to the decoration (design) in the game area 5a in front view. Accordingly, the design in the game area 5a can be extended to the outside of the game area 5a by the front left decorative body 3030 and the front right decorative body 3040 extending from the game area 5a to the game area 5a. The pachinko machine 1 that can make 5a appear larger than the actual size and can attract the player's interest can be obtained.

[5-9c. Back guidance unit]
Next, the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 136 (a) is a perspective view of the back guide unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 136 (b) is a perspective view of the back guide unit in the back unit as seen from the back. The back guide unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the lower part of the front end in the back box 3010, and is formed in a shape in which both ends extending left and right are bent upward. The entire back guiding unit 3050 is formed to be transparent.

  The back guidance unit 3050 includes a general winning port sensor 3051 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001, a first start port sensor 3052 that detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002, and Out-port sensor 3053 for detecting game ball B received in out-port 2010, second sub-out port sensor 3054 for detecting game ball B received in second sub-out port 2012, and warp inlet 2511 of center accessory 2500 And a magnetic sensor 3055 for detecting illegal magnetism.

  Further, the back guiding unit 3050 is received in the first delivery port 3061 through which the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100 is delivered, and the general winning port 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200. A second delivery port 3062 through which the game ball B is delivered, a third delivery port 3063 through which the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 inside the side unit 2200 is delivered, and a general on the left side of the side unit 2200 The fourth delivery port 3064 through which the game ball B received at the winning port 2001 is delivered, and the game ball B received through the second start port 2004 and the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attacker unit 2400 are delivered. The game balls B received at the five delivery ports 3065 and the first grand prize port 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 are delivered. The sixth delivery port 3066, the seventh delivery port 3067 through which the game ball B received in the second big prize port 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 is delivered, and the general prize port 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 An eighth delivery port 3068 through which the received game ball B is delivered, and a ninth delivery port 3069 through which the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700 is delivered.

  Furthermore, although detailed illustration is omitted, the back guiding unit 3050 guides the game ball B delivered to the first delivery port 3061 to the right and then ejects it downward, and a second receiving path. The game ball B delivered to the delivery port 3062 and the game ball B delivered to the third delivery port 3063 are merged and then discharged downward, and delivered to the fourth delivery port 3064 The third discharge path that guides the game ball B downward and discharges it obliquely to the lower right, and the position where the game ball B delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 is below the sixth delivery port 3066 And a fourth discharge path that discharges diagonally to the lower left after being guided leftward to a position on the left side of the sixth delivery port 3066. A fifth delivery port 3065, a sixth delivery port 3066, a seventh delivery port 3067, and a ninth delivery port 3069 communicate with the fourth discharge path.

  The game ball B received by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100 and transferred to the first transfer port 3061 is detected by the first start port sensor 3052 in the middle of the first discharge path and then discharged downward. Is done. A game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200 and transferred to the second transfer opening 3062 and a game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 on the middle side and transferred to the third transfer opening 3063 The ball B joins in the second discharge path and is discharged downward after being detected by the general winning opening 2001. The game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 on the left side of the side unit 2200 and transferred to the fourth transfer port 3064 is detected by the general winning port 2001 in the middle of the third discharge path and then discharged downward. .

  It is received at the second start port 2004 or the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attacker unit 2400 and transferred to the fifth transfer port 3065 and received at the game ball B and the first big prize port 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400. The game ball B delivered to the sixth delivery port 3066 and the game ball B received to the second big prize port 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 and delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 are the fourth It is discharged through the discharge path.

  The game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 and transferred to the eighth delivery port 3068 is upstream of the portion communicating with the ninth delivery port 3069 in the fourth discharge path. It is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051 and discharged through the fourth discharge path. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700 and transferred to the ninth transfer port 3069 is detected by the second sub-out port sensor 3054 and then merges with the fourth discharge path. It is discharged through the four discharge paths.

  The back guiding unit 3050 includes an out ball detecting member 3080 that detects the game ball B received in the out port 2010. The out-ball detecting member 3080 is driven into the game area 5a and is received in the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the first major winning port 2005, and the second major winning port 2006. In order to detect the gaming ball B received in the out-port 2010 opened at the lower end of the gaming area 5a among the gaming balls B that have not been received (the gaming ball B to which no privilege is given, also referred to as “out-ball”). belongs to.

  The out ball detection member 3080 is inserted into the out recess 1123 of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 from the rear, and a cylindrical portion 3081 extending in the front-rear direction so that the game ball B can circulate, and the cylindrical portion 3081 A partition part 3082 that divides the inside into left and right parts, a flange part 3083 that protrudes in a flat plate shape from the outer periphery of the rear end of the cylindrical part 3081, and a rear end of the cylindrical part 3081 are continued down the game ball B And a rear cover 3084 that can be guided and discharged (see FIG. 114). The out ball detection member 3080 is provided with an out port sensor 3053 between the cylindrical portion 3081 and the rear cover 3084.

  The cylindrical portion 3081 is substantially the same size as the out-port 2010, and the width in the left-right direction is a width in which two game balls B are sufficiently arranged (a width in which three game balls B are not arranged), and the lower inner surface is It inclines so that it may become low toward the back side. The partition portion 3082 is provided in the vicinity of the rear end of the cylindrical portion 3081 and partitions the size so that one game ball B can pass through on both the left and right sides. The partition portion 3082 is curved so that the front end side protrudes forward as it goes downward, and protrudes forward shorter than the diameter of the game ball B.

  In the out ball detection member 3080, two out port sensors 3053 are provided side by side. The left-side outlet sensor 3053 detects the game ball B that has circulated on the left side of the partition portion 3082 in the cylindrical portion 3081, and the right-side outlet sensor 3053 detects the right side of the partition portion 3082 in the cylindrical portion 3081. The game balls B that have been distributed are detected. The out port sensor 3053 is a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch.

  The two out-port sensors 3053 are provided so that the detection direction of the game ball B (the axial direction of the detection hole through which the game ball B passes) is parallel to the lower inner surface of the cylindrical portion 3081. As a result, the distribution direction of the game ball B flowing through the cylindrical portion 3081 does not change even at the site of the out-port sensor 3053, so that the out-game sensor B can be detected smoothly by the out-port sensor 3053. Can be quickly discharged and stagnation at the front side of the outlet sensor 3053 can be suppressed.

  In the state where the out-ball detecting member 3080 is assembled to the game board 5, the cylindrical portion 3081 is inserted into the out recess 1123 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 114).

  In the state where the out ball detection member 3080 is assembled to the game board 5, the upper portion of the front end of the cylindrical portion 3081 protrudes forward from the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component member 1000 (see FIG. 114). That is, the rear end of the out guiding part 1003 is inserted into the cylindrical part 3081. Further, the lower end of the rear cover 3084 protrudes below the lower surface of the substrate holder 1200 through the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200.

  The out-ball detecting member 3080 flows down to the downstream end of the inner rail 1002 or the lower right rail 1004 of the front component member 1000 in the game area 5a, and is then guided rearward by the out-guiding unit 1003 and received in the out-port 2010. The detected game ball B is detected by one of the two out-port sensors 3053 through the inside of the cylindrical portion 3081, and then guided downward by the rear cover 3084 to be discharged. The out ball detection member 3080 discharges the game ball B to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the main body frame 4 without contacting the game ball B on the substrate holder 1200.

  According to the out-ball detecting member 3080 of the present embodiment, since the two out-port sensors 3053 provided on the left and right are partitioned by the partitioning portion 3082, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 is In addition to being able to guide to the left outlet sensor 3053 side, the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be guided to the right outlet sensor 3053 side. Therefore, in each of the left and right out-port sensors 3053, it is determined whether the player tends to “left-handed” or “right-handed” based on the number of game balls B detected per hour. Based on the determination, it is possible to enter the game that is intended by encouraging the optimal driving operation for the gaming situation.

  Further, in the out-ball detecting member 3080, the forward projection of the partition portion 3082 is shortened so that the game ball B can easily get over, so when many game balls B enter the out-port 2010 per hour, The game ball B can be released to the left or right side where the circulation amount of the game ball B in the portion 3082 is relatively small, and the game ball B can be discharged at the out port 2010 without stagnation.

  In addition, since the lower end of the rear cover 3084 protrudes downward from the discharge part 1201 of the substrate holder 1200, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, The game ball B received in the second grand prize winning port 2006, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 flows backward by the out-ball detection member 3080 and is output by the out-port sensor 3053. It can prevent being detected, and only the “out ball” received in the out port 2010 can be accurately detected.

  In the present embodiment, the out ball detection member 3080 is provided in the back unit 3000, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the out ball detection member 3080 may be attached to the game panel 1100. At this time, if the game panel 1100 has the out recess 1123, the out ball detection member 3080 can be attached, so that it can correspond to the existing game panel 1100 having the out recess 1123. And can be retrofitted to the existing game board 5.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, the game area 5a is driven and the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the first major winning port 2005, and the second major winning port 2006 are set. The game ball B (“out ball”) that has not been accepted by any of the above can be detected by the out port sensor 3053, the first sub out port sensor 2403, and the second sub out port sensor 3054. If the “out ball” is not detected even though the acceptance of the game ball B into the mouth is continuously detected, it means that a fraudulent act has been performed on a specific winning mouth, It can be notified that fraudulent acts are being carried out.

  Further, since the number can be counted by detecting the “out ball”, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second large winning opening. The number of “winning balls”, the number of “out balls” counted by the detection of the game ball B received in 2006, the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the first large From the number of “safe balls” paid out by receiving the game balls B into the winning opening 2005 and the second major winning opening 2006, it is possible to know the “running rate” in the pachinko machine 1. Although not shown in the figure, a display unit for displaying the “delay rate” is provided on the rear side of the game board 5.

  Further, in the game board 5, all game balls B ("all balls") thrown into the game area 5a are detected, or all game balls B ("all balls") discharged from the game area 5a are detected. ) Is detected by the out port sensor 3053, the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and the second sub-out port sensor 3054, so that only the “out ball” and the “winning ball” are detected. ”And“ whole ball ”can be compared to detect the occurrence of ball clogging in the game board 5.

[5-9d. Backward production unit]
Next, the back rear effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 141 and the like. FIG. 137 (a) is a perspective view of the back rear effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back rear effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective view of the rear rear effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 139 is an exploded perspective view of the rear rear effect unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 140 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable configuration of the rear rear effect unit from the front. FIG. 141 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back behind effect unit.

  The back and rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the rearmost (the front surface of the rear wall) in the back box 3010. The rear rear effect unit 3100 has a U shape whose front view is opened downward, and is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner shape of the back box 3010. The back rear effect unit 3100 includes a back rear movable decorative body 3110 extending in the left-right direction, and a back rear movable mechanism 3120 for moving the back rear movable decorative body 3110 in the vertical direction.

  The back rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided behind the decorative body 3111 and has a translucent decorative body 3111 that extends in the left-right direction and has a relief-like decoration on the front surface. A back rear decorative substrate 3114 on which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are mounted, and a decorative body base 3115 attached to the decorative body 3111 so as to cover the rear side of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 are provided. Each of the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b mounted on the back decorative board 3114 is a full color LED. The decoration body 3111 (back-back movable decoration body 3110) can be illuminated and decorated by the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b on the back-side decoration board 3114.

  The back movable decorative body 3110 includes a left slider 3116 extending up and down on the left side of the decorative body 3111 and a right slider 3117 extending up and down on the right side of the decorative body 3111. The left slider 3116 includes a movable projection 3116a projecting leftward from the vicinity of the lower end, a locking projection 3116b projecting triangularly from the vicinity of the upper end to the left, and a detection piece 3116c provided at the upper end. Have.

  The back rear movable mechanism 3120 is formed in a U shape whose front view is opened downward, and extends vertically in a columnar shape on the left side of the unit base 3121 and a unit base 3121 mounted in the back box 3010. A slide shaft 3122 that supports the left slider 3116 of the movable decorative body 3110 behind the back so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and extends vertically in parallel to the slide shaft 3122 on the left side of the slide shaft 3122 and spirals around the outer periphery. And a spiral shaft 3123 in which a groove is formed.

  The rear rear movable mechanism 3120 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3124 attached to the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123, a spur gear-shaped motor gear 3125 meshing with the transmission gear 3124, and the motor gear 3125 as a rotation shaft. The rear back drive motor 3126 is attached, the motor base 3127 is attached to the lower end of the left side of the unit base 3121, and the upper end of the spiral shaft 3123 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3121. A bearing member 3128 and a lower bearing member 3129 that is rotatably attached to the unit base 3121 in the vicinity of the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123 are provided.

  Further, the back rear movable mechanism 3120 is screwed to the spiral shaft 3123 and can be brought into contact with the movable protrusion 3116a of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 from below, and on the left side of the spiral shaft 3123. A transmission slider 3131 that extends vertically and can be moved up and down, and whose lower end side can come into contact with the slide guide 3130 from above, a spring 3132 that urges the transmission slider 3131 upward, and a transmission slider 3131 A link member 3133 that rotates about an axis in the front-rear direction by raising and lowering, a lock member 3134 that slides in the left-right direction by rotation of the link member 3133 and can come into contact with the locking protrusion 3116b of the back movable decorative body 3110, It has.

  Further, the back rear movable mechanism 3120 includes a back rear top detection sensor 3135 for detecting the detection piece 3116c of the back back movable decorative body 3110, a back back lower detection sensor 3136 for detecting the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130, and the back back. A front left cover 3137 attached to the left side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the left end side of the movable decorative body 3110 from the front, and a right side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the right end side of the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 from the front side. The front right cover 3138 and the rear rear drive motor 3126, the rear rear upper detection sensor 3135, and the rear rear lower detection sensor 3136, which are attached to the lower front part of the front left cover 3137, are connected to the effect drive board 1720. Between the back-rear left relay board 3139 and the unit base 3121 and the front right cover 3138. A back right rear relay board 3140 relaying the connection is assigned a back after decoration board 3114 of the back after the movable decorative body 3110 and effect driving substrate 1720, and a.

  The unit base 3121 has an impact absorbing member 3121a that abuts against the lower surface of the left slider 3116 and the lower surface of the right slider 3117 of the back movable ornament 3110 that has moved downward to absorb the impact. The slide shaft 3122 has an upper end and a lower end sandwiched between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137.

  The slide guide 3130 protrudes to the right from the vicinity of the lower end, and has a detection piece 3130a detected by a back rear lower detection sensor 3136. The slide guide 3130 is provided so as to be slidable in the vertical direction between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137, and is unable to rotate about the axis of the spiral shaft 3123 by contacting them. In the slide guide 3130, the lower surface of the movable projection 3116 a of the back movable decorative body 3110 can be brought into contact with the upper end surface. The slide guide 3130 is configured such that the upper end surface of the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 can come into contact with the lower surface.

  The transmission slider 3131 is attached between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137 so as to be movable in the vertical direction. The transmission slider 3131 can be moved up and down only within a predetermined range by the front left cover 3137. The transmission slider 3131 has a lower protrusion 3131a that protrudes to the right on the lower end side, an upper protrusion 3131b that protrudes to the right on the upper end side, and a columnar protrusion protruding rearward from the vicinity of the upper end of the upper protrusion 3131b. And a protruding pin 3131c. The transmission slider 3131 is configured such that the lower surface of the slide guide 3130 can come into contact with the upper surface of the lower protrusion 3131a. In addition, the projecting pin 3131 c of the transmission slider 3131 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3133 a of the link member 3133.

  The spring 3132 has an upper end attached to the unit base 3121 and a lower end attached to the upper protrusion 3131b of the transmission slider 3131 to urge the transmission slider 3131 upward.

  The link member 3133 is formed in a triangular shape in which the shape of the front view is chamfered at each vertex. The link member 3133 is attached to the unit base 3121 so as to be rotatable around the axis in the front-rear direction near one vertex. The link member 3133 has a long hole-like first slit 3133a extending in the direction of the rotation axis in the vicinity of the left apex from the rotation axis, and a long hole shape extending in the direction of the rotation axis in the vicinity of the upper apex from the rotation axis. A second slit 3133b. In the link member 3133, the projection pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3133a, and the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b.

The lock member 3134 is attached between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction by the front left cover 3137.
The lock member 3134 protrudes rearward in a columnar shape, forms a transmission pin 3134a that is slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133, and a flat upper end surface, and in the left-right direction. Extending and tilting so as to move to the left as it goes downward from the right end of the contact surface 3134b, the contact surface 3134b with which the lower surface of the lock projection 3116b of the movable decorative body 3110 can contact, And a guide surface 3134c with which the locking projection 3116b can abut.

  The front right cover 3138 supports the right slider 3117 of the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction in cooperation with the unit base 3121.

  Next, the operation of the back rear effect unit 3100 will be described. As shown in FIG. 140 (FIG. 141 (a)), the back rear effect unit 3100 is in a retracted position in which the back back movable decorative body 3110 has moved upward, as shown in FIG. 140 (slide guide 3130). Is positioned near the upper end of the spiral shaft 3123, and the lock member 3134 is moved to the right and is positioned at the lock position. In this state, the lower surface of the movable protrusion 3116a of the left slider 3116 of the back movable ornament 3110 is in contact with the upper end surface of the slide guide 3130, and the back movable ornament is in contact with the contact surface 3134b of the lock member 3134. The lower surface of the locking projection 3116b of 3110 is in contact.

  In a normal state, the transmission slider 3131 is positioned at the upward movement end by the biasing force of the spring 3132. Since the protrusion pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted into the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133, and the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133, the spring The urging force of 3132 acts on the link member 3133 in the clockwise direction around the rotation axis, and is urged in the direction in which the lock member 3134 slides to the right. Therefore, the lock member 3134 is maintained in the locked position by the biasing force of the spring 3132.

  In this state, the back movable decorative body 3110 is restricted from moving downward by the slide guide 3130 and the lock member 3134. Therefore, even if any of the slide guide 3130 and the lock member 3134 moves from the position due to some reason (problem), the remaining rear decorative ornament 3110 can be prevented from moving downward (falling). it can.

  In a normal state, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 is positioned above the rotation axis of the link member 3133, and the second slit 3133b into which the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted rotates. It is located to the right of the axis. Further, the rear back upper detection sensor 3135 detects the detection piece 3116c of the back rear movable decorative body 3110, and the back rear lower detection sensor 3136 does not detect the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130.

  The rear rear effect unit 3100 is located behind the rear upper effect unit 3400 in the normal state of the retracted position, and is not visible from the front (player side).

  In this normal state, when the spiral shaft 3123 is rotated in a predetermined direction (here, a counterclockwise direction in plan view) by the back rear drive motor 3126, the slide guide 3130 screwed to the spiral shaft 3123 is moved downward. Move to. Even if the slide guide 3130 moves downward, the back protrusion movable decoration body 3110 is in contact with the lock member 3134, so that the back back movement decoration body 3110 does not move downward from the retracted position. Instead, only the slide guide 3130 moves downward away from the movable projection 3116a of the back movable decorative body 3110.

  When the slide guide 3130 is moved downward by the rotation of the spiral shaft 3123 and the detection piece 3130a is detected by the back and bottom detection sensor 3136, the lower surface of the slide guide 3130 is moved to the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131. It abuts on the upper end surface (see FIG. 141 (b)). When the rear back lower detection sensor 3136 detects the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130 and the slide guide 3130 further moves downward, the slide guide 3130 presses the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 downward, The transmission slider 3131 moves downward together with the slide guide 3130 against the urging force of the spring 3132.

  As the transmission slider 3131 moves downward, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 into which the projection pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted is pressed downward, and the link member 3133 is counterclockwise about its rotation axis. It will rotate in the direction of rotation. When the link member 3133 rotates counterclockwise, the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133 moves to the left, and the transmission pin 3134a inserted into the second slit 3133b is used. The lock member 3134 moves to the left (see FIG. 141 (c)).

  When the lock member 3134 moves to the left of the locking protrusion 3116b of the back movable ornament 3110, the lock (downward restriction) by the lock member 3134 is released, and the back movable ornament 3110 falls. At this time, the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130 moving downward is in a non-detection state with respect to the back back lower detection sensor 3136, and the rotation of the back back drive motor 3126 stops.

  The fallen back movable decorative body 3110 comes into contact with the impact absorbing member 3121a of the unit base 3121 to stop the fall and enter the appearance position (see FIG. 141 (c)). In this appearance position state, the slide guide 3130 is positioned below the lower end of the left slider 3116 of the back movable ornament 3110, and the back movable ornament 3110 does not come into contact therewith.

  In the state of the appearance where the back back movable decorative body 3110 has fallen, the back back movable decorative body 3110 can be visually recognized from the front (player side). In this state, by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back and back decorative board 3114, the back and back movable decorative body 3110 (decorative body 3111) can be illuminated and decorated. Players can be entertained with luminous decoration.

  When returning the back movable decorative body 3110 from the position where the lower moving end appears to the normal retracted position, the back shaft drive motor 3126 moves the spiral shaft 3123 in the reverse direction (here, clockwise in plan view). The slide guide 3130 is moved upward. When the slide guide 3130 moves upward, the transmission slider 3131 slides upward together with the slide guide 3130 by the urging force of the spring 3132. When the transmission slider 3131 moves upward, the link member 3133 rotates in the clockwise direction and the lock member 3134 moves to the right and stops at the lock position. Become.

  Further, when the slide guide 3130 moves upward, the upper end surface of the lower protrusion 3131a comes into contact with the lower surface of the movable projection 3116a of the back movable decorative body 3110, and the slide guide 3130 moves the movable projection 3116a upward. The back rear movable decorative body 3110 moves upward (see FIG. 141 (d)).

  When the back movable decorative body 3110 is moved upward to the vicinity of the retracted position by the slide guide 3130, the locking projection 3116b comes into contact with the guide surface 3134c of the lock member 3134 from below. When the locking projection 3116b comes into contact with the guide surface 3134c from below and the locking projection 3116b presses the guide surface 3134c upward, the inclination of the guide surface 3134c causes a force to move the lock member 3134 to the left. The locking member 3134 slides to the right against the urging force of the spring 3132 that is to be moved to the right via the transmission slider 3131 and the link member 3133.

  When the locking projection 3116b is positioned above the upper end of the guide surface 3134c of the lock member 3134 due to the upward movement of the back movable decorative body 3110, the upward pressing by the locking projection 3116b on the guide surface 3134c is eliminated. The lock member 3134 slides to the right by the urging force of the spring 3132 and enters the locked position. As a result, the right end side of the contact surface 3134b of the lock member 3134 is positioned below the locking protrusion 3116b of the back movable ornament 3110, and the back movable ornament 3110 is moved downward by the lock member 3134. Can be regulated.

  At this time, the detection piece 3116c of the back movable movable body 3110 is detected by the back top detection sensor 3135, and the rotation of the back back drive motor 3126 stops. In this manner, the back movable decorative body 3110 can be returned from the appearance position to the retracted position, which is a normal state.

  According to the back and rear effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment, the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 extending to the left and right is dropped from the retracted position invisible from the player side to the appearance position that is visible. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

  In addition, since the lock member 3134 that locks (regulates) the back movable decorative body 3110 in the retracted position is moved to the left, the lock is released. Compared with the case where the lock is released by moving, the rear back movable decorative body 3110 can be dropped without moving upward when the lock is released.

[5-9d-1. Backside movable decorative body]
Subsequently, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 in the back back effect unit 3100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 to 156. FIG. 142 is a front view showing the back and back movable decorative body together with the back and back decorative board. 143 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 142, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 142. FIG. 144A is a perspective view of the back rear movable decorative body as viewed from the front, and FIG. 144B is a perspective view of the back rear movable decorative body as viewed from the back. FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective view of the rear rear movable decorative body as seen from the front, and FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective view of the rear rear movable decorative body as seen from the rear. FIG. 147 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the back and back movable decorative body, and FIG. 148 is an explanatory view showing the light guide radiation plate and the back and back decoration board by broken lines in the front view of FIG. FIG. 149 (a) is a front view showing a part of a decorative body in the back movable decorative body, and FIG. 149 (b) is a front view showing a part of a decorative sheet in the same part as the decorative body in FIG. (C) is a front view which shows a part of light guide radiation plate and back back decoration board | substrate in the same site | part as the decoration body of (a).

  FIG. 150 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing the upper part of FIG. 143 (a) in an enlarged manner. 151 is an exploded view showing the sectional view of FIG. 150 in an exploded manner. FIG. 152 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a relationship between decoration by a decorative body and a decorative sheet, a light guide radiation plate, and a back rear decorative substrate by enlarging a part of the front surface of the back movable decorative body. FIG. 153 (a) is an explanatory view showing in cross section the relationship between the light guide radiation plate and the back decorative board in the first LED portion, and FIG. 153 (b) shows the position of the second LED on the optical axis of the first LED. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the light guide radiation plate in the site | part which is carrying out from the front, (c) is the LED accommodating part of the light guide radiation plate with respect to the 2nd decoration part in a decoration body and a decoration sheet, and the back of a back decoration board | substrate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of arrangement | positioning of 1 LED from the front. FIG. 154 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the back decorative board together with the copper foil of the circuit pattern. FIG. 155 (a) is a front view of the back and back decorative substrate, and FIG. 155 (b) is a back view of the back and back decorative substrate. FIG. 156 (a) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body in the back movable decorative body, and FIG. 156 (b) shows a part of the decorative body having a metal decoration part in a form different from FIG. It is an expanded sectional view, and (c) is an expanded sectional view showing a part of a decoration object which has a metal decoration part of a form still different from (a) and (b).

  As shown in FIG. 142 and the like, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 extends in the left-right direction, and is provided with a decorative portion 3150 made of a predetermined decoration when viewed from the front. More specifically, the decorative portion 3150 of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 has a left-right direction between two first decorative portions 3151 and two first decorative portions 3151 respectively provided in the vicinity of both left and right ends in a front view. And a plurality of second decorative portions 3152 arranged in a row. Each first decorative portion 3151 imitates a single cherry blossom. In addition, the second decorative portion 3152 is not shown in the figure, but each of them imitates a predetermined character and is arranged on the left and right to form a predetermined logo according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1. ing. As described above, the back movable movable body 3110 is decorated with a logo between two cherry blossoms.

  The back-back movable decorative body 3110 in the back-back effect unit 3100 extends in the left-right direction as shown in FIGS. A transparent flat decorative body 3111 having a light transmitting property and a translucent decorative sheet with a decoration (pattern) provided behind the decorative body 3111 and constituting the rest of the decorative portion 3150 3112, a transparent flat light guide radiation plate 3113 provided behind the decorative sheet 3112, and a plurality of first LEDs and second LEDs mounted on the front surface provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113. The back-side decorative board 3114, the flat-shaped decorative body base 3115 attached to the decorative body 3111 so as to cover the rear side of the back-back decorative board 3114, and the decorative body 3111 A left slider 3116 extending vertically at the side, and a, and the right slider 3117 extending vertically on the right side than the decorative body 3111.

[5-9d-2. Decorative body of movable decorative body behind back]
The decorative body 3111 is formed such that the front and rear general surfaces are flat. The decorative body 3111 includes a first decorative protrusion 3111a that protrudes forward from the general surface on the front side, a second decorative protrusion 3111b that protrudes forward shorter than the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and a second decorative protrusion. A third decorative protrusion 3111c that protrudes forward shorter than the portion 3111b. The first decorative protrusion 3111 a is provided at a site that is the outline of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152. The first decorative protrusion 3111a in the part of the first decorative part 3151 is formed on the outer periphery of the petal of the first decorative part 3151 that imitates cherry blossoms and on the part that imitates the central stamen and pistil, respectively. . The first decorative protrusion 3111a at the second decorative portion 3152 is formed so as to surround the outer periphery of each second decorative portion 3152 in a double (two-way) manner. The first decorative protrusion 3111a is curved so that the front surface bulges forward.

  The second decorative protrusion 3111b is provided outside the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152. The second decorative protrusion 3111b is formed in a shape simulating a cherry blossom or petal smaller than the first decorative portion 3151. The second decorative protrusion 3111b is curved so that the front surface bulges forward.

  The third decorative protrusion 3111c is provided within the frame of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. The front surface of the third decorative protrusion 3111c corresponding to the first decorative portion 3151 is curved. Moreover, the front surface of the third decorative protrusion 3111c corresponding to the second decorative portion 3152 is flat.

  The first decorative protrusion 3111a and the third decorative protrusion 3111c of the decorative body 3111 constitute a part of each of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 in the decorative portion 3150.

  In addition, the decorative body 3111 has a metallic luster in a portion (first foil pressing region (see FIG. 156 (a))) that protrudes forward from the second decorative protrusion 3111b in the first decorative protrusion 3111a. It has a metal decoration portion 3111d (in FIG. 147 to FIG. 149, dark and shaded shaded portions). The entire decoration body 3111 except the metal decoration portion 3111d is formed to be colorless and transparent. As shown in FIGS. 150 and 156 (a) and the like, the metal decoration portion 3111d of the present embodiment is provided at the curved front portion of the first decoration protrusion 3111a, and the first decoration protrusion 3111a. It is not provided in the side part. Thereby, compared with the case where the metal decoration part 3111d is also provided on the side surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a, the creeping distance EL from the metal decoration part 3111d of the decoration body 3111 to the back rear decoration board 3114 is made longer. It is possible to improve insulation against electrostatic discharge or short circuit.

  Since the decorative body 3111 is provided with the metal decorative portion 3111d along the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward, it is possible to give a high-class feeling due to the metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3111d. In addition, the three-dimensional effect of the first decorative protrusion 3111a can be further emphasized by the curvature of the metal decorative portion 3111d. As shown in FIG. 148 and the like, the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided at a position in front of the first LED 3114a of the back rear decoration substrate 3114 as shown in FIG. The first LED housing portion 3113c is difficult to see from the front.

  In addition, since the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided only on the front surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a, the light from the first LED 3114a and the like of the rear back decoration substrate 3114 is transmitted from the back surface (rear surface) of the metal decoration portion 3111d. Reflecting backward, the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 provided behind can be illuminated, and the decoration (first contour portion 3112a) of the decorative sheet 3112 can be more easily seen.

  This metal decoration part 3111d is formed by pressing a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment) by hot stamping. More specifically, first, an intermediate product before completion of the decorative body 3111 is formed by injection molding of a synthetic resin. The formed intermediate product of the decorative body 3111 is mounted at a predetermined position of the hot stamping device with the front side from which the first decorative projection 3111a and the like protrudes facing upward. At this time, a transfer sheet having a desired metal foil and a flat hot plate having elasticity on the lower surface side and heated to a predetermined temperature are arranged above the intermediate product of the decorative body 3111. . Then, the hot plate is lowered downward from the upper end of the first decorative projection 3111a in the intermediate product of the decorative body 3111 to a position of a predetermined distance (a position higher than the upper end of the second decorative projection 3111b), and the hot plate The metal foil of the transfer sheet is transferred (foil pressed) to the first decorative protrusion 3111a by heat. As a result, the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed in the portion of the first foil pressing area FS1 above (front) the second decorative protrusion 3111b in the decorative body 3111 (see FIG. 156 (a)). .

  The hot plate of the hot stamping apparatus used for forming the metal decoration portion 3111d of the present embodiment has elasticity at the portion that comes into contact with the decoration body 3111 that is the transfer destination of the metal foil of the transfer sheet. Even if the front surface of the first decorative projection 3111a is not flat but curved, it can be elastically deformed along the surface, and the metal foil is in a good state even in a three-dimensional shape such as a curved surface. Can be transferred (foil-pressed). Thereby, compared with the case where the metal decoration part 3111d is formed by plating or vapor deposition, a large-scale installation is not required and can be formed easily, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the decorative body 3111 is provided with the metal decorative portion 3111d only at the tip of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the metal decoration portion 3111d is formed by the hot stamp device, the first decoration protrusion is lowered by lowering the hot plate to a position lower than the second decoration protrusion 3111b and higher than the third decoration protrusion 3111c. A decorative body 3111 can be formed by providing a metal decorative portion 3111d at the tip of the portion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b.

  Alternatively, with the intermediate product before completion of the decorative body 3111 attached to the hot stamping device, first, a hot plate is used by using a transfer sheet having a metal foil of a predetermined color (first metal foil). Lower to the position (second foil pressing area FS2) lower than the second decorative protrusion 3111b and higher than the third decorative protrusion 3111c, the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b are first positioned at the tip portions. Transfer the metal foil. Subsequently, using a transfer sheet having a metal foil (second metal foil) of a color different from that of the first metal foil, the hot plate is lower than the first decorative protrusion 3111a and higher than the second decorative protrusion 3111b. The position is lowered to the position (first foil pressing area FS1), and the second metal foil is transferred to the tip portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a (see FIG. 156 (b)). Thereby, the decoration body 3111 provided with the metal decoration part 3111d of a different color is formed in the first decoration projection part 3111a and the second decoration projection part 3111b without performing a masking process on the intermediate product of the decoration body 3111. be able to.

  In the above embodiment, the metal decoration portion 3111d of the decoration body 3111 is formed by hot stamping (foil pressing). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after a metal film is formed by plating or vapor deposition on the surface of an intermediate product before completion of the decorative body 3111, the metal film in a portion excluding the first decorative protrusion 3111a is peeled off (laser peeling) with a laser beam. The decorative body 3111 having the metal decoration portion 3111d may be formed on the first decoration protrusion 3111a. At this time, as shown in FIG. 156 (c), the metal decoration portion 3111d may be provided on the side portion in addition to the tip portion of the first decoration protrusion 3111a.

  The decorative body 3111 of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 has a rear recess 3111e that is recessed forward from the general surface on the rear surface side. The rear recess 3111e is provided so as to correspond to the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. Thereafter, the concave portion 3111e equalizes the plate thickness of the decorative body 3111 so that deformation due to resin sink during injection molding can be suppressed.

  The rear recess 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is provided so as to be recessed forward at a portion corresponding to the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c on the flat rear surface. For this reason, the flat portion of the rear surface excluding the rear recess 3111e comes into contact with the front surface of a first contour portion 3112a described later in the decorative sheet 3112. Thereby, since the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 are in close contact, light is not irregularly reflected between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a. Through the transparent decorative body 3111, the pattern and the like of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be clearly seen.

  Further, since the rear concave portion 3111e is provided at a portion corresponding to the third decorative protrusion 3111c, the rear concave portion 3111e is located in front of a first light diffusing portion 3112c and a second light diffusing portion 3112d, which will be described later, in the decorative sheet 3112. It is provided at the site. As a result, a gap is formed between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 at the site of the rear recess 3111e, and therefore, the light irradiated from the front to the site of the rear recess 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is caused by the gap. Then, irregular reflection occurs between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the rear surface of the rear recess 3111e, and the portion of the rear recess 3111e is brightened by light from the front. Thereby, even if the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back decorative board 3114 are not caused to emit light, the first light diffusion part 3112c and the second light diffusion part 3112d in the decorative sheet 3112 by the light from the front, that is, The first decorative portion 3151 imitating cherry blossoms and the plurality of second decorative portions 3152 constituting the logo become brighter and can be easily seen from the front.

  Furthermore, the decorative body 3111 has a plurality of mounting bosses 3111f protruding in a columnar shape from the rear surface to the rear. The mounting boss 3111f is for mounting the decorative body base 3115 on the rear side of the decorative body 3111. The mounting boss 3111f is provided at a site directly behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c. Thereby, it is difficult to see the mounting boss 3111f from the front (player side) by the lens action of the third decorative protrusion 3111c. In other words, the third decorative protrusion 3111c is provided in a front portion of the mounting boss 3111f, and the mounting boss 3111f is difficult to visually recognize from the front due to the lens action of the third decorative protrusion 3111c.

[5-9d-3. Decorative sheet of movable decorative body behind the back]
The decorative sheet 3112 is a thin sheet and has an outer shape that is approximately the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111. The decorative sheet 3112 has a pattern on the rear surface of a transparent resin sheet. The decorative sheet 3112 is provided outside the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 and on the portion excluding the rear of the second decorative protrusion 3111b of the decorative body 3111 and the central portion of the first decorative portion 3151. A first contour portion 3112a, a second contour portion 3112b corresponding to the second decorative portion 3152 and a second contour portion 3112b provided in a portion between the first decorative protrusion 3111a formed in a double shape of the decorative body 3111; A first light diffusion portion 3112c provided in a portion corresponding to the first decorative portion 3151 and located inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 (a portion behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c); A second portion provided in a portion (the portion behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c) that is inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a that corresponds to the two decorative portions 3152 and that is provided double of the decorative body 3111. It has a diffusion section 3112D, a.

  In addition, the decorative sheet 3112 further includes a transparent transmissive portion 3112e provided at a portion behind the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c in the decorative body 3111. Have.

  As shown in FIG. 149 (b) and the like, the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 has a pattern part that imitates the cherry blossom smaller than the first decorative part 3151, and the remaining part is The light interference fringes are displayed by the hologram. The first contour portion 3112a is formed to be opaque. In the present embodiment, the portion of the hologram in the first contour portion 3112a has the same gold color as the metal decoration portion 3111d of the decoration body 3111. In addition, the part imitating the cherry blossom in the first contour part 3112a is colored using white or pink. Note that ink (paint) used for a pattern or the like may be one having glitter that glitters in the form of particles.

  The first contour portion 3112a is located on the rear side outside the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111 when the back movable ornament 3110 is viewed from the front. Since it has a part of the same color (golden in this embodiment) as the decorative part 3111d, it is possible to impart continuity to the decoration by the first contour part 3112a and the metal decorative part 3111d. Accordingly, it is possible to emphasize the perspective between the first contour portion 3112a and the metal decoration portion 3111d, and to make it difficult to feel the thinness of the back movable decoration body 3110.

  In addition, the first contour portion 3112a is formed in light gray or white on the rear surface side. As a result, the color of the picture and hologram on the front side is improved. Further, the light emitted from the light guide radiation plate 3113 to the front can be reflected backward and returned to the light guide radiation plate 3113 by the light gray or white rear surface of the first contour portion 3112a. Since the plate 3113 can emit light more brightly, the amount of light emitted forward from the translucent portion of the decorative sheet 3112 can be increased, and the back movable ornament 3110 can be brightly decorated. In addition, the decorative portion 3150 of the back movable decorative body 3110 can be illuminated more uniformly.

  Furthermore, since the first contour portion 3112a is provided outside the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b in the decorative body 3111, the first contour portion 3112a is flat except for the rear recess 3111e on the rear surface of the decorative body 3111. It is provided behind the part. As a result, the flat rear surface of the transparent decorative body 3111 comes into contact with and comes into close contact with the front surface of the first contour portion 3112a, so that light is transmitted between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a. There is no irregular reflection, and the pattern and hologram of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be clearly seen from the front through the transparent decorative body 3111.

  As illustrated, the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 is formed in a black line shape having a predetermined width. The second contour portion 3112b is located behind the portion between the first decorative protrusions 3111a (metal decorative portions 3111d) provided in the second decorative portion 3152 in the double of the decorative body 3111. In other words, since the black second contour portion 3112b is provided between the double-shaped gold metal decoration portion 3111d, the double metal decoration portion 3111d is emphasized by the black color of the second contour portion 3112b. And the decoration effect of the metal decoration portion 3111d can be further enhanced.

  The first light diffusion portion 3112c of the decorative sheet 3112 has translucency and is formed by a plurality of fine irregularities that can disturb light. More specifically, the first light diffusing portion 3112c is formed in a pear skin-like pattern by a plurality of ridges that extend linearly in a random direction. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 149 (b) and the like at one site of the first light diffusing unit 3112 c, in one petal of a cherry blossom culled by the first decorative unit 3151, from the center of the petal to the periphery. A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (in this embodiment, pink) are applied by printing so that the shade becomes darker (transparency becomes lower) as it goes. For this reason, when the first LED 3114a of the back and back decorative substrate 3114 for emitting light from behind is emitted to the first light diffusion portion 3112c, the pear skin pattern of the first light diffusion portion 3112c slightly increases. As a result, a three-dimensional effect can be imparted to the light emitting decoration of the first decorative portion 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom.

  The second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 has translucency and is formed by a plurality of fine irregularities that can disturb light. This second light diffusing portion 3112d is provided on the entire inside of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 in each second decorative portion 3152, as shown by the light and shaded shading in FIGS. 147 to 149. It has been. The second light diffusion portion 3112d has translucency and is formed by a plurality of fine irregularities that can disturb light. The plurality of fine irregularities forming the second light diffusion portion 3112d are formed in a halftone dot pattern at regular intervals in the vertical and horizontal directions. The second light diffusion portion 3112d of the present embodiment is formed to be translucent milky white. For this reason, when the first LED 3114a of the back and back decorative substrate 3114 for emitting light from the rear is caused to emit light to the second light diffusing portion 3112d, the second light diffusing portion 3112d has a predetermined dot pattern according to the halftone dot pattern. The second decorative portion 3152 made of the above characters can be illuminated and decorated with uniform brightness.

  The first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 are provided behind the portion on the inside of the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the decorative body 3111, and the rear surface of the portion of the decorative body 3111. Is provided with a recess 3111e that is recessed forward. Accordingly, when the decorative sheet 3112 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the decorative body 3111, a gap is formed on the front surface at the first light diffusion portion 3112c and the second light diffusion portion 3112d due to the presence of the rear recess 3111e of the decorative body 3111. It will be in the state. Due to the gap, the light irradiated from the front onto the rear recess 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is irregularly reflected between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the rear surface of the rear recess 3111e. The diffuser 3112c and the second light diffuser 3112d become brighter. Thereby, even if the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back decorative board 3114 are not caused to emit light, the first light diffusion part 3112c and the second light diffusion part 3112d in the decorative sheet 3112 by the light from the front, that is, The first decorative portion 3151 imitating cherry blossoms and the plurality of second decorative portions 3152 constituting the logo become brighter and can be easily seen from the front.

  The decorative sheet 3112 forms a predetermined pattern by the first contour portion 3112a, the second contour portion 3112b, the first light diffusion portion 3112c, and the second light diffusion portion 3112d. The remaining part excluding the decoration by the decorative body 3111 in the part 3150 is constituted. In the decorative sheet 3112 of the present embodiment, a first contour portion 3112a, a second contour portion 3112b, a first light diffusing portion 3112c, and a second light diffusing portion 3112d are provided on the rear surface side of a transparent sheet serving as a base. Yes. The first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 are formed by printing. Moreover, the 1st light-diffusion part 3112c and the 2nd light-diffusion part 3112d of the decoration sheet 3112 are formed by sticking a predetermined | prescribed light-diffusion film (diffuser film). The first light diffusion part 3112c and the second light diffusion part 3112d may be a lens film or a prism film.

  The transmission part 3112e of the decorative sheet 3112 is formed to be transparent. Since the transmitting portion 3112e is provided behind the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111, the light transmitting radiation plate 3113 emits light from the first LED 3114a of the back decorative substrate 3114. A part of the light emitted forward can be transmitted to irradiate the first decorative protrusion 3111a. At this time, in the first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward, the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided only on the front surface side and the side surface side remains transparent, so the first decorative protrusion 3111a from the rear through the transmission portion 3112e. The light irradiated to the outside leaks from the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. For this reason, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration in which the first decoration protrusion 3111a (metal decoration part 3111d) is lit by the light transmitted through the transmission part 3112e. Further, the first contour portion 3112a located outside the first decorative projection 3111a can be illuminated from the front by the light transmitted through the transmission portion 3112e and emitted from the side surface of the first decorative projection 3111a to the outside. Therefore, the pattern and hologram provided on the first contour portion 3112a can be more easily seen, and the decorative effect by the first contour portion 3112a can be more easily exhibited.

  Since the decorative sheet 3112 of the present embodiment is formed in substantially the same size as the decorative body 3111, the first contour portion 3112a having a pattern or a hologram can be decorated up to the outer periphery of the decorative body 3111. The decoration of the back movable ornament 3110 can be shown large. Further, since the decoration sheet 3112 is approximately the same size as the decoration body 3111, the decoration of the back movable decoration body 3110 is not trimmed, so that the back movable decoration body 3110 is moved to the appearance position. By displaying an effect image that is continuous with the decoration of the back movable ornament 3110 on the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear, it is possible to show the player a sense of unity, It is possible to give the player a visual impact and attract attention, and to enjoy a large decoration, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  In the decorative sheet 3112 of the above-described embodiment, the transparent transmissive portion 3112e is provided behind the metal decorative portion 3111d (first decorative protrusion 3111a) of the decorative body 3111. However, the present invention is not limited to this. is not. For example, you may make it provide the 1st outline part 3112a also in the site | part which becomes the back of the metal decoration part 3111d. As a result, when the back movable decorative body 3110 is viewed obliquely from the front, the rear can be seen through the transparent side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the decorative body 3111 and the transparent transmissive part 3112e in the decorative sheet 3112. The appearance of the decorative part 3150 of the back-back movable decorative body 3110 can be prevented from deteriorating. Further, by providing the first contour portion 3112a up to the rear portion of the metal decoration portion 3111d, the first decoration projection in the first contour portion 3112a is passed through the transparent side surface of the first decoration projection 3111a in the decoration body 3111. Since the part located behind the part 3111a can be seen, the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a can be decorated by the part of the first contour part 3112a, and the metal decorative part 3111d is used as the first decorative protrusion. Even if it is provided only on the front surface of the portion 3111a, the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 can be improved.

[5-9d-4. Light guide radiation plate with movable decorative body behind back]
As shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, the light guide radiation plate 3113 includes a transparent flat plate-shaped main body 3113a extending to the left and right, a flange 3113b extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 3113a, and a main body. A plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c that penetrate the portion 3113a in the front-rear direction and into which the first LEDs 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are inserted, and the main body portion 3113a penetrate in the front-rear direction and A plurality of second LED housing portions 3113d into which the second LEDs 3114b are inserted, a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e provided over substantially the entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, and a first LED housing portion on the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a. The leg portion 3113f protruding backward from the periphery of the 3113c and the first LED housing portion 3113c in the leg portion 3113f are opposite to each other. And a, an auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g that is provided along the rear edge of the side.

  The light guide radiation plate 3113 has a right slider front portion 3113h that extends downward from the right end of the main body portion 3113a when viewed from the front.

  The main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a flat front surface with which the rear surface of the decorative sheet 3112 abuts. The flange portion 3113b protrudes rearward by about 1.5 times the thickness of the main body portion 3113a. As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the flange portion 3113b has a rear end protruding rearward from the back and back decoration board 3114 in a state assembled to the back and back movable decoration body 3110.

  As for the 1st LED accommodating part 3113c, the inner peripheral shape is formed in the rectangle. As shown in FIG. 148, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c are provided behind a portion with low transparency in the decorative portion 3150 when the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed from the front. More specifically, in the part of the first decorative part 3151, a plurality of first LED housing parts 3113c are provided behind the part of the first light diffusing part 3112c of the decorative sheet 3112 where the pink shade is dark. ing. More specifically, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c provided at the site of the first decorative portion 3151 is closer to the center than the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 in each of the five petals with cherry blossoms. And the center of the long side whose inner periphery is a rectangle is provided so that it may be located on the centerline of a petal.

  On the other hand, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c provided at the site of the second decorative portion 3152 are provided so as to be located behind the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112. It has been. For this reason, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c (first LEDs 3114a) are difficult to visually recognize from the front.

  In addition, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113 c are provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the second decorative portion 3152 at the site of the second decorative portion 3152. When the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c are close to each other to some extent, as shown in FIGS. 149 (c) and 153 (c), the first LED housing portions 3113c are connected to each other. It is formed in the state. By connecting the approaching first LED housing portions 3113c to each other, it is possible to avoid the formation of a portion that is thinner than the thickness of the main body portion 3113a, and damage the light guide radiation plate 3113. It can be difficult.

  By the way, the 1st LED accommodating part 3113c has a rectangular inner periphery and has penetrated the main-body part 3113a. Thereby, when the light guided in the direction along the surface (front surface or rear surface) of the main body 3113a inside the main body 3113a (within the plate thickness) reaches the first LED housing 3113c, A part is reflected straight by the inner peripheral surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c toward the inner side of the main body portion 3113a, and the rest passes through the inner peripheral surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c. It will be emitted to the inside of 3113c. And when the light radiated | emitted from one of the four inner peripheral surfaces of the 1st LED accommodating part 3113c arrives at another surface of an inner peripheral surface, in the said surface, a part will be 1st LED accommodating part 3113c. The light is reflected inward, and the remainder enters the main body 3113a. In other words, light guided in the direction along the surface of the main body 3113a within the main body 3113a radiates to the inside of the first LED storage 3113c when attempting to pass through the first LED storage 3113c. The light that has passed through the first LED housing portion 3113c is reflected by a portion of the inner circumferential surface and a portion of the inner circumferential surface that enters the main body portion 3113a side of the first LED housing portion 3113c, respectively. The amount of light is greatly reduced as compared with that before passing.

  For this reason, the light guided in the direction along the surface of the main body 3113a inside the main body 3113a can be blocked by the first LED housing 3113c. Since the first LED 3114a of the back decorative substrate 3114 is accommodated inside the first LED accommodating portion 3113c, the light that attempts to pass through the first LED accommodating portion 3113c may be blocked by the first LED 3114a. In the region where the first LED 3114a is accommodated, light does not pass to the opposite side of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. Thereby, the light from the first LED 3114a accommodated in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c is obtained by providing the first LED accommodating portion 3113c at an optimal position with respect to the outer peripheral shape of the second decorative portion 3152. It is possible to prevent light from being guided to another second decorative portion 3152 and decorate with light, and it is possible to reliably decorate only the desired second decorative portion 3152 with a plurality of second decorative portions 3152. .

  The operation of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c as described above will be described in more detail. For example, as shown in FIG. 153 (c), a plurality of second decorative portions 3152 of “I”, “RO”, “HA”, “☆”. Are provided on the outer periphery of each second decorative portion 3152, and light is emitted toward the inside of the second decorative portion 3152 in each first LED accommodating portion 3113c. The first LED 3114a is provided as described above. In this embodiment, since the first LED housing portions 3113c provided between “I” and “RO” and between “RO” and “HA” are close to each other, they are connected to each other. It is a single hole. Thereby, in the main-body part 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, a thin part which is easy to break is not formed. In this embodiment, the first LED housing portion 3113c and the first LED 3114a for decorating the light emission of “☆” arranged below “I” are provided below “☆”. For this reason, if the first LED 3114a for decorating “☆” is illuminated, the “I” provided above “☆” may be illuminated, but it is provided at the upper left of “☆”. An extended portion 3113j extending so as to cover the upper side of “☆” is provided in the first LED housing portion 3113c in which the first LED 3114a for decorating a part of “I” is decorated. ing. By this extending part 3113j, it is possible to reduce (block) light from the first LED 3114a for decorating “☆” by being directed to the “I” side. Thus, even if “☆” is decorated with light emission, “I” is not illuminated with decoration. In addition, the extension part 3113j can reduce (block) the light for decorating “I” to be guided to the “☆” side. Only the desired second decorative portion 3152 such as “I” and “☆” can be surely decorated with light emission, and the desired effect can be sufficiently exhibited.

  As shown in FIG. 152 and the like, the second LED housing portion 3113d has a circular inner periphery. The plurality of second LED housing portions 3113d are provided behind five circular portions simulating stamens provided around the center in the first decorative portion 3151 simulating cherry blossoms. More specifically, the second LED housing portion 3113d is provided behind each of the five petals simulating cherry blossoms and a circular portion simulating a stamen that is located on the center line of the petals. Thus, in each of the five petals, one first LED housing portion 3113c and second LED housing portion 3113d are provided on the petal centerline.

  The second LED housing portion 3113d has a circular inner periphery and penetrates the main body portion 3113a. Accordingly, when the light guided in the direction along the surface (front surface or rear surface) of the main body 3113a inside the main body 3113a (within the plate thickness) reaches the second LED housing portion 3113d, A part is reflected by the inner peripheral surface of the second LED housing portion 3113d so as to diffuse in a fan shape toward the inside of the main body portion 3113a. In this embodiment, since the second LED housing portion 3113d is provided on the optical axis of the first LED 3114a in each of the five petals in the first decorative portion 3151 imitating cherry blossoms, FIG. 153 (b) shows. As shown, the light emitted from the first LED 3114a to the inside of the main body 3113a is reflected in a fan shape toward the first LED 3114a by the circular inner peripheral surface of the second LED housing 3113d. The petals can be brightly decorated with light.

  One of the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e is formed as a square pyramid, and is arranged in a row so as to be continuous vertically and horizontally. The plurality of reflecting portions 3113e except for the portion of the flange portion 3113b on the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, the portion around the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d, and the portion of the right slider front portion 3113h. It is formed on almost the entire surface. The plurality of reflecting portions 3113e can mainly radiate light emitted in the direction along the plate surface forward within the thickness of the main body portion 3113a and radiate it forward from the front surface of the main body portion 3113a. The light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment is formed so that the back is difficult to see when viewed from the front due to the presence of the plurality of reflection portions 3113e.

  In addition, since the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, light can be emitted forward from substantially the entire surface. Even if the design of the decorative portion 3150 by the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 is changed due to the change, it is not necessary to change the light guide radiation plate 3113, and it is possible to easily cope with the design change and the cost. Can be suppressed.

  The leg portion 3113f protrudes rearward from the rear end side of the portion facing the light emitting surface of the first LED 3114a to be inserted on the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c. As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the leg portion 3113f is provided on the same surface as the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c on the first LED housing portion 3113c side. Thereby, the area of the light receiving unit 3113i for receiving the light emitted from the first LED 3114a into the main body 3113a can be widened, and more light from the first LED 3114a is irradiated into the main body 3113a. Can do. Further, when the leg portion 3113f is assembled to the back rear movable decorative body 3110, the rear surface abuts on the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114, and a gap is formed between the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a and the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114. Can be formed.

  The auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g is provided in a C-chamfered shape along a side opposite to the first LED housing portion 3113c at the rear end of the leg portion 3113f. The auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g is for reflecting the light emitted from the first LED 3114a to the leg portion 3113f forward.

  The right slider front portion 3113h is for configuring the right slider 3117 in cooperation with a later-described right slider rear portion 3115d of the decorative body base 3115.

  Since the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment covers the outer periphery of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 with the flange portion 3113b when assembled to the back rear movable decorative body 3110, the outer periphery of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is covered with the flange portion 3113b. It is possible to make the surface difficult to see and to prevent the appearance from deteriorating. Further, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a flange portion 3113b protruding rearward from the back rear decorative substrate 3114, the back decorative substrate 3111d is provided from the metal decorative portion 3111d provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111. Creepage distance EL to 3114 (copper foil 3114d and electronic component 3114e) can be made longer, and static electricity accumulated in metal decoration portion 3111d flows to back back decoration board 3114, and back back decoration board 3114 is damaged. Can be prevented.

  In the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment, since the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d are holes penetrating the main body portion 3113a, the first LED housing portion 3113c is housed in the first LED housing portion 3113c. Heat from the second LED 3114b accommodated in the LED 3114a or the second LED accommodating portion 3113d can be released to the front of the main body portion 3113a, and the thermal influence on the back and back decorative substrate 3114 can be reduced.

  Moreover, since the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d are formed as through holes, the front side of the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d is blocked by the decorative sheet 3112, the decorative body 3111, and the like. 1st LED accommodating part 3113c and 2nd LED accommodating part compared with the case where it forms in the bottomed concave shape (groove shape) which does not penetrate 1st LED accommodating part 3113c and 2nd LED accommodating part 3113d The volume (heat capacity) of 3113d can be increased. Thereby, the rapid temperature rise by the heat | fever from the accommodated 1st LED 3114a and 2nd LED 3114b can be relieved, and the thermal influence with respect to back back decoration board | substrate 3114 etc. can be suppressed. In addition, in the first LED housing portion 3113c having the first LED housing portion 3113c and the extending portion 3113j that are connected to each other in close proximity, the volume of the first LED housing portion 3113c is increased. For the same reason as described above, it is possible to dissipate more heat from the first LED 3114a or to alleviate the rapid temperature rise.

  The light guide radiation plate 3113 includes a first LED housing portion 3113c and a second LED housing portion 3113d into which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the front surface of the back decorative substrate 3114 are inserted from the rear. Therefore, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d, the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a is as close as possible to the front surface of the back and back decorative substrate 3114. The thickness of the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be further reduced.

  Furthermore, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a leg portion 3113f protruding rearward from the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, the rear end of the leg portion 3113f is brought into contact with the front surface of the back and back decorative substrate 3114. A gap can be formed between the rear surface of the main body 3113a and the front surface of the back decorative substrate 3114. Thereby, the heat from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the front surface of the back decorative board 3114 can be released through the gap, and the temperature rise in the back decorative board 3114 is suppressed and the influence of heat. Can be reduced. Note that the gap between the main body 3113a and the substrate main body 3114c of the back decorative substrate 3114 is defined as “half the distance from the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c to the light emitting portion of the first LED 3114a” to “first from the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c”. It is desirable to be within the range of “distance to the front surface of one LED 3114a”. This is because if the gap is smaller than this, heat may not be sufficiently discharged through the gap between the main body 3113a and the back decorative substrate 3114. Further, if the gap is larger than this, the amount of light incident on the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 from the first LED 3114a decreases, so that the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 emit light with sufficient brightness. This is because there is a possibility that it cannot be decorated.

  The light guide radiation plate 3113 guides light from the first LEDs 3114a mounted at a plurality of predetermined positions on the back decorative substrate 3114, and the front part of the rear surface of the main body part 3113a is fronted by the reflecting part 3113e. Therefore, the light from the first LED 3114a can be radiated forward even at a portion where the back and back decorative substrate 3114 is not provided behind the main body portion 3113a. In other words, even if the back decorative substrate 3114 is made smaller than the size of the main body 3113a, light can be emitted forward from substantially the entire surface of the main body 3113a. Therefore, since the back rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made smaller than the main body portion 3113a, the distance between the outer periphery of the main body portion 3113a and the outer periphery of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 can be further increased. The creeping distance EL from the front metal decorative part 3111d can be made longer to facilitate the above-described effects.

[5-9d-5. Back-side decorative board of back-back movable decorative body]
A plurality of side view type first LEDs 3114 a and a plurality of top view type second LEDs 3114 b are mounted on the front surface of the back decorative board 3114. Further, the back decorative substrate 3114 includes a flat substrate body 3114c, a copper foil 3114d (see FIG. 154 and the like) that is provided on the front surface and the rear surface of the substrate body 3114c, respectively, and forms a predetermined circuit pattern. And an electronic component 3114e (see FIG. 155 (b)) such as an LED driver IC and a resistor mounted on the rear surface of the main body 3114c.

  The back decorative substrate 3114 has a coating film (not shown) made of a white solder resist on the surface excluding the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, the electronic component 3114e, and the like. Further, the back decorative board 3114 is not shown in the figure, but a notation portion in which the mounted component is written in the vicinity of the mounted components such as the mounted first LED 3114a, second LED 3114b, and electronic component 3114e. have. The notation part is provided by silk printing in a predetermined color (for example, yellow) that is not easily noticeable from above the coating film.

  The back decorative substrate 3114 has an outer peripheral shape substantially along the inner periphery of the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and a gap slightly larger than the thickness of the flange portion 3113b between the flange portion 3113b, The size is formed to be substantially constant. Further, the back decorative substrate 3114 has an outer peripheral shape that is substantially along the inner periphery of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115 described later, and there is a slight gap between the inner periphery of the flange portion 3115b. It is formed in a size that is formed uniformly. That is, the back decorative substrate 3114 is formed in a size that can be accommodated inside the flange portion 3115 b of the decorative body base 3115.

  As shown in FIG. 152 and the like, at the site of the first decorative portion 3151 in the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 is placed on the center line of each of the five petals imitating cherry blossoms. It is provided so that light is irradiated toward the center of the flower in the vicinity of the tip on the inner side of the (metallic decoration portion 3111d). Thereby, each of the five petals imitating cherry blossoms can be illuminated and decorated by the first LED 3114a at the site of the first decorative portion 3151.

  Moreover, in the site | part of the 2nd decoration part 3152 in several 1st LED3114a, in each of each 2nd decoration part 3152 arranged in the left and right, the 1st decoration protrusion provided in double of the decoration body 3111 In the vicinity of the rear of 3111a, light is emitted toward the inside of the second decorative portion 3152. Thereby, the plurality of second decoration portions 3152 arranged on the left and right sides can be illuminated and decorated one by one by the first LED 3114a at the site of the second decoration portion 3152.

  As shown in FIG. 152 and the like, the plurality of second LEDs 3114b is a central portion imitating a cherry blossom in the first decorative portion 3151 and is a circular portion imitating a stamen located on the center line of five petals. It is provided in the rear. That is, the second LED 3114b is provided on the optical axis of the first LED 3114a corresponding to one petal simulating a cherry blossom in the first decorative portion 3151. Thereby, the 5 LED which imitated the stamen of the center part in the 1st decoration part 3151 can be light-emitting decorated by 2nd LED3114b, respectively.

  Since the second LED 3114b is a top view type capable of irradiating light toward the front, when the second LED 3114b is caused to emit light, a portion simulating the stamen of the central portion of the first decorative portion 3151 is changed from other portions. Can also emit point light with high brightness, and can attract the player's interest strongly. Therefore, in the light emission decoration of the decoration part 3150, since the site | part light-emitted by 1st LED3114a and the site | part light-emitted by the 2nd LED 3114b can be provided, by combining those light emission suitably. A variety of lighting effects can be performed, making it difficult for the player to get bored.

  The substrate body 3114 c is a rigid substrate that is slightly thinner than the body portion 3113 a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. The substrate body 3114c of the present embodiment uses a glass composite base material.

  The copper foil 3114d is provided on substantially the entire front surface and rear surface of the substrate body 3114c. The copper foil 3114d is formed to a predetermined thickness (18 μm to 70 μm), and constitutes a circuit pattern by etching (shaded portion in FIG. 154). As shown in FIG. 154, the copper foil 3114d is provided at a position where the outer peripheral edge is separated from the outer peripheral edge of the substrate body 3114c to the inside by a predetermined distance SL (0.5 mm to 3 mm) (SL = 1 mm in this embodiment). ing. By this predetermined distance SL, the creeping distance EL and the spatial distance from the conductive member outside the back decorative substrate 3114 (for example, the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111) to the copper foil 3114d are earned, and discharge such as static electricity Insulation against short-circuiting can be improved, and damage to the back decorative board 3114 due to discharge or the like can be suppressed.

  Further, the outer periphery of the copper foil 3114d is provided from the outer periphery of the substrate body 3114c to a portion on the inner side by a predetermined distance regardless of the presence or absence of the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e. Is as wide as possible. As a result, a part of the heat generated in the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e can be transferred to the copper foil 3114d to be dissipated from the copper foil 3114d, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b. And the cooling effect with respect to the electronic component 3114e can be heightened, and the damage by heat can be prevented.

  Further, the back decorative board 3114 has a predetermined area for facilitating the reflection of light emitted from the first LED 3114a toward the board body 3114c to the light emitting surface side of the side view type first LED 3114a on the front side. The light reflection assisting region 3114f (region surrounded by a broken line in FIG. 154). As shown in FIGS. 151 and 153 (a), the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f of the present embodiment is not provided with the copper foil 3114d. As a result, the front surface of the light reflection assisting region 3114f is lower than the front surface of the copper foil 3114d on which the first LED 3114a is mounted. Therefore, as compared with the case where the copper foil 3114d is provided in the light reflection assisting region 3114f, The angle of the light emitted from the one LED 3114a into the light reflection assisting region 3114f becomes an angle that approaches the vertical line on the front surface of the substrate body 3114c, so that the light emitted to the substrate body 3114c side can be easily reflected forward. Can do.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 153 (a) and the like, the copper foil 3114d is not provided in the light reflection assisting region 3114f, and the rear end of the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is Since it is made to contact | abut, the leg part 3113f can be lengthened back by the thickness of the copper foil 3114d. Therefore, the light receiving part 3113i that receives the light from the first LED 3114a can be enlarged, and the light (light quantity) radiated forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113 is increased, so that the back movable decorative body 3110 (decorative body 3111). And the decorative sheet 3112) can be brightly decorated.

  Further, the rear end of the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is in contact with the auxiliary light reflection region 3114f (see FIG. 153 (a) and the like). As a result, even if the coating film (solder resist) applied to the surface due to the contact of the leg 3113f is worn or worn, only the front surface of the substrate body 3114c is exposed, and the copper foil 3114d is exposed. There is nothing. Accordingly, the insulation is lowered by the exposure of the copper foil 3114d, and damage due to a short circuit such as static electricity can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the back and back decorative board 3114 of this embodiment is assembled to the back and back movable decorative body 3110 so that a flange portion 3115b to be described later of the decorative body base 3115 and a flange portion of the light guide radiation plate 3113 are assembled. With 3113b, since the outer periphery is doubled, the outer peripheral surface becomes difficult to see from the outside, and the appearance is prevented from deteriorating. Further, in a state where the back back decorative substrate 3114 is assembled to the back back movable decorative body 3110, the outer periphery of the back back decorative substrate 3114 is surrounded by the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 with a certain gap. In addition, the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115 is inserted into the gap between the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the flange portion 3113b from behind, and is also surrounded by the flange portion 3115b. As a result, the shortest route along the surface from the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the back decorative substrate 3114 causes the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 to exist due to the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115. The creeping distance EL can be made longer because of meandering so as to wrap around, and static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d flows to the back and back decoration board 3114, and the back and back decoration board 3114 is damaged. This can be prevented. In this embodiment, the creeping distance EL is a distance that can correspond to a discharge voltage of 10 mm or more or 10 kV.

  In addition, since the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113, a member (in this embodiment, provided behind the back rear movable decorative body 3110 by the back rear decorative substrate 3114. The light from the effect display device 1600) can be blocked. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the decorative sheet 3112 and the decorative body 3111 from being irradiated with light from the effect display device 1600 and the like provided at the rear, so that the decorative portion 3150 is illuminated and decorated in an unintended state. It is possible to prevent the rear movable decorative body 3110 from reliably performing a desired light emission effect. Further, since the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113, it is possible to prevent the back rear decorative substrate 3114 from seeing the rear through the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the back rear movable decoration. Deterioration of the appearance of the body 3110 can be suppressed.

  Further, the back decorative substrate 3114 is provided with only the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b accommodated from the rear with respect to the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Therefore, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d, the front surface of the back decorative substrate 3114 is as close as possible to the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a. The thickness of the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be further reduced.

  Further, the back and back decorative substrate 3114 has electronic components 3114e such as LED driver ICs and resistors mounted on the back surface. Since the LED driver IC, the resistor, and the like as the electronic component 3114e are generally black components, the black electronic component 3114e cannot be seen from the front by providing the electronic component 3114e on the rear surface of the back decorative board 3114. It is possible to improve the appearance of the back-back movable decorative body 3110. In addition, since the black electronic component 3114e is provided on the rear surface of the back and back decorative substrate 3114 that cannot be seen from the front, there is no need to apply a paint of a color such as white to make the electronic component 3114e difficult to see, The cost for the back decorative substrate 3114 can be reduced.

[5-9d-6. Decorative body base of movable body behind the back]
The decorative body base 3115 is formed to be transparent as a whole. The decorative body base 3115 penetrates the flat plate-shaped covering plate portion 3115a covering the rear side of the back decorative substrate 3114, the flange portion 3115b protruding forward from the outer peripheral edge of the covering plate portion 3115a, and the covering plate portion 3115a. A plurality of openings 3115c, and a right slider rear portion 3115d extending downward from a right end in front view of the cover plate portion 3115a.

  The outer peripheral shape of the covering plate portion 3115a is a shape substantially along the inner periphery of the flange portion 3113b in the light guide radiation plate 3113, and a slight gap is formed substantially constant between the inner periphery of the flange portion 3113b. The size is formed. That is, the covering plate portion 3115a (decorative body base 3115) is formed in a size that can be accommodated inside the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since the rear side of the back and back decorative substrate 3114 is covered by the covering plate portion 3115a, it is possible to protect the back and back decorative substrate 3114 by preventing other members from coming into contact with the back and back decorative substrate 3114 from the rear. It is possible to prevent the back decorative substrate 3114 from being damaged.

  As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the flange portion 3115b enters the space between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the outer periphery of the back rear decorative substrate 3114, and the front end is more forward than the back rear decorative substrate 3114. Protrudes so that is located. The flange portion 3115b is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the back rear decorative substrate 3114, making it difficult to see the outer peripheral surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 from the outside and improving the appearance. In addition, since the flange portion 3115b is inserted into the space between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the outer periphery of the back back decorative substrate 3114 in the state assembled to the back back movable decorative body 3110, The shortest route from the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the back rear decorative substrate 3114 may meander around the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 due to the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115. Out. Accordingly, the creepage distance EL can be further increased, and static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d can be prevented from flowing into the back and back decoration board 3114 and damaging the back and back decoration board 3114.

  The plurality of openings 3115c have a slit-like portion that is long to the left and right, and a portion that opens larger than the slit-like portion. With the plurality of openings 3115c, heat from the electronic component 3114e mounted on the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 can be released to the outside of the back rear movable decorative body 3110. Can be reduced.

  The right slider rear portion 3115d is for configuring the right slider 3117 in cooperation with the right slider front portion 3113h of the light guide radiation plate 3113.

  In addition, the decorative body base 3115 has a plurality of protrusions 3115e that slightly protrude from the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a. The plurality of protrusions 3115e are disposed so as to abut on a portion where the copper foil 3114d in the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge on the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is not provided. The plurality of protrusions 3115e can form a gap between the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 and the front surface of the cover plate portion 3115a by bringing the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 into contact with the front surface thereof. . Accordingly, heat from the electronic component 3114e can be easily released through the gap between the rear surface of the back decorative substrate 3114 and the front surface of the cover plate portion 3115a.

[5-9d-7. Main effects of back and rear movable decorative body]
Next, main effects of the back movable ornament 3110 in the present embodiment will be described. The back rear movable decorative body 3110 of this embodiment has a decorative sheet 3112 sandwiched between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the front surface of the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the decoration body. The attachment boss 3111f of the decoration body 3111 is assembled by being attached to the decoration body base 3115 with the back and back decoration board 3114 sandwiched between the base 3115 (see FIG. 143 and the like). Thereby, the thickness of the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction is relatively thin.

  The back movable decorative body 3110 has a first decorative protrusion 3111a, a second decorative protrusion 3111b, and a third decorative protrusion 3111c protruding forward on a transparent flat decorative element 3111, Since the decorative sheet 3112 on the rear side of the decorative body 3111 has the first contour portion 3112a having a hologram on which a pattern and interference fringes of light are displayed, the decorative sheet 3112 of the back movable movable body 3110 has a The first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c can provide a stereoscopic effect, and the lens effect by the second decorative protrusion 3111b and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. A depth feeling can be imparted by the hologram. Thereby, even if the thickness of the back and back movable decorative body 3110 is thin, the player does not feel thinness, and the decoration effect by the decorative portion 3150 of the back and back movable decorative body 3110 is sufficiently obtained. Demonstrate and entertain the player.

  In addition, as described above, the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, the third decorative protrusion 3111c, the first contour part 3112a, and the like can provide a three-dimensional effect and a sense of depth. The thickness of the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be further reduced. Thereby, since the space concerning installation of the back movable ornament 3110 can be reduced, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the back movable ornament 3110 can be increased, and a more effective part inside the game board 5 can be achieved. The back movable ornament 3110 can be provided to facilitate the implementation of the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the player. Moreover, since the back movable movable body 3110 can be thinned, it is relatively easy to secure a space for arranging other decorative bodies, so that by providing other decorative bodies, Providing the pachinko machine 1 with good appearance and providing the pachinko machine 1 that can enjoy a variety of performances. Providing the pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to the player and can be differentiated more. can do.

  The back movable decorative body 3110 has a metal decorative portion 3111d made of metal foil on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 that forms the outer periphery of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152. Therefore, the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 can be made conspicuous by the metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3111d, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Moreover, since the metal decoration part 3111d is provided on the curved front surface of the first decoration projection 3111a, a stereoscopic effect can be imparted to the metal decoration part 3111d and a high-class feeling can be imparted. As a result, when the back movable decorative body 3110 moves from the retracted position that cannot be visually recognized by the player to the visually appearing position, the high-quality decorative portion 3150 can be seen, thereby giving the player a premium feeling. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the back movable decorative body 3110 has a flat rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 has substantially the same size as the outer periphery of the decorative body 3111, the first contour portion 3112a having a pattern or hologram is used. Therefore, the decoration up to the outer peripheral edge of the decoration body 3111 can be performed, and the decoration of the back movable decoration body 3110 can be shown large. Further, since the back movable movable body 3110 has the decorative sheet 3112 substantially the same size as the decorative body 3111, the decoration of the back back movable decorative body 3110 is not trimmed. When the body 3110 is moved to the appearance position, an effect image that is continuous with the decoration of the back movable ornament 3110 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear, thereby providing a sense of unity. Can be shown to the player, can give the player a visual impact and attract attention, can enjoy a large decoration, and can suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  Further, since the back movable movable body 3110 is provided with the first LED 3114a at the rear part of the metal decorative part 3111d of the decorative body 3111 and the second contour part 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112, the metal decorative part 3111d and the second It is possible to make the first LED 3114a difficult to see from the front by the two contour portions 3112b, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance of the decoration portion 3150 and to fully exhibit the decoration effect.

  Furthermore, since the back movable movable body 3110 is provided with a plurality of first LEDs 3114a so as to surround the outer periphery of each of the first decoration portion 3151 and the plurality of second decoration portions 3152, the first decoration portion 3151 is provided. And the second decorative portion 3152 can be individually decorated with light emission. As a result, the plurality of second decorative portions 3152 arranged in the left and right can be sequentially decorated with light emission, or only the specific first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 can be decorated with light emission. By appropriately decorating the first decorative portion 3151 and the plurality of second decorative portions 3152 with light emission, a variety of light emission effects can be shown to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decrease in interest. it can.

  The back movable decorative body 3110 is irradiated with light in the direction along the surface within the plate thickness of the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 by the side view type first LED 3114a. Since light is emitted forward by the reflecting portion 3113e to decorate the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, the light from the first LED is emitted forward from the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Can be made longer. Thereby, since the light from the first LED can be sufficiently diffused and radiated forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113, the decorative body 3111 can be obtained even if the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 is thin. Further, the decoration sheet 3112 can be uniformly lit and illuminated uniformly, and the player can be entertained by the luminescent decoration having a good appearance. In addition, the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the side view type first LED 3114a can uniformly decorate the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, so that the thickness of the back movable movable body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be further increased. The pachinko machine 1 that can be thinned and has the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  Further, since the back rear movable decorative body 3110 uses the first LED 3114a as a side view type for planar light emission and the second LED 3114b is a top view type, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 (decorative portion 3150). ) In the light emission decoration (light emission effect), it is possible to add a portion that emits light with a high brightness and a point shape by the second LED 3114b to a portion that is light-decorated in a planar shape by the first LED 3114a. As a result, the light emission effect can be sharpened by the light emission of the second LED 3114b, so that the optimum light emission effect according to the gaming state can be easily presented, and the player can be more entertained, and the game It is possible to increase the expectation for the player, and to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player.

  Further, the back movable decorative body 3110 is provided with a first LED housing portion 3113c into which the first LED 3114a of the side view type is inserted in the light guide radiation plate 3113, and receives light on the inner peripheral surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c. The part 3113i is irradiated with light from the first LED 3114a so that the light is incident on the inside of the main body part 3113a. Thus, by providing the first LED housing 3113c at a position where the first LED 3114a is desired to be decorated with light emission by the first LED 3114a, the desired site can be brightly decorated with more lighting effects. It is possible to entertain the player with high luminous decoration.

  Further, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 includes a first LED housing portion 3113c and a second LED into which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the back back decorative board 3114 are inserted from the rear side of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since the housing portion 3113d is provided, the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are inserted into the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d, so that the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a is placed on the front surface of the back decorative substrate 3114. The thickness of the rear back movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be further reduced.

  In addition, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 has a leg portion 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 in contact with the front surface of the back back decorative substrate 3114, and between the main body portion 3113a and the back rear decorative substrate 3114. Therefore, heat from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the front surface of the back decorative board 3114 can be released through the gap. The influence of heat can be reduced by suppressing the temperature rise. The gap between the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the substrate main body 3114c of the back decorative substrate 3114 is defined as “half the distance from the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c to the light emitting portion of the first LED 3114a” to “substrate It is desirable to be within the range of “the distance from the front surface of the main body 3114 c to the front surface of the first LED 3114 a”. This is because if the gap is smaller than this, heat may not be sufficiently discharged through the gap between the main body 3113a and the back decorative substrate 3114. Further, if the gap is larger than this, the amount of light incident on the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 from the first LED 3114a decreases, so that the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 emit light with sufficient brightness. This is because there is a possibility that it cannot be decorated.

  In addition, the back movable movable body 3110 can form a gap between the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the back back decorative board 3114 by the legs 3113f, and a plurality of openings in the decorative body base 3115. Since it has the part 3115c, the surface of the back back decoration board 3114 can be ventilated through the gap and the opening 3115c by raising and lowering the back back movable decoration body 3110, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b, In addition, heat from the electronic component 3114e and the like can be released, and the temperature increase of the back decorative substrate 3114 can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that a temperature sensor is provided in the back rear movable decorative body 3110 so that the back rear movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down when the back rear movable decorative body 3110 (back rear decorative substrate 3114) becomes higher than a predetermined temperature. The frequency (probability) that is executed may be increased. Thus, the back and back movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down, whereby the surface of the back and back decorative board 3114 can be ventilated, and the back and back decorative board 3114 can be cooled to suppress the occurrence of problems due to heat.

  Further, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 surrounds the outer periphery of the back rear decorative board 3114 from the rear side by the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115, and the outer periphery of the flange portion 3115b of the light guide radiation plate 3113. It is surrounded by a flange portion 3113b. As a result, the shortest route along the surface from the metal decorative portion 3111d of the metal foil provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the back decorative substrate 3114 is guided and emitted by the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115. Since the winding meanders around the flange portion 3113b of the plate 3113, a long creepage distance EL can be obtained, and static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d flows to the back decoration substrate 3114, and the back decoration substrate 3114d. It is possible to prevent 3114 from being damaged.

  Moreover, since the back back movable decorative body 3110 is configured to provide the copper foil 3114d constituting the circuit in the back back decorative board 3114 at a position away from the outer periphery of the board main body 3114c by a predetermined distance SL. The creepage distance EL and the spatial distance can also be increased by the predetermined distance SL, and the insulation against the discharge and short circuit such as static electricity can be enhanced, and the damage of the back decorative substrate 3114 due to the discharge or the like can be suppressed.

  In addition, the back movable movable body 3110 is provided with the metal decoration portion 3111d provided on the front surface of the decoration body 3111 only on the front surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a, and is provided on the side surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a. Not. As a result, the creepage distance EL to the back decorative substrate 3114 can be increased by the length of the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the same effect as described above can be achieved. Moreover, since the metal decoration part 3111d is not provided on the side surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a, the area of the metal decoration part 3111d is smaller than the case where the metal decoration part 3111d is provided on the side surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a. The amount of static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d can be reduced. Accordingly, since the discharge voltage can be lowered, even if a discharge occurs on the back decorative substrate 3114, the influence can be reduced.

  By the way, as described above, the back movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down (moves) between the retracted position moved upward and the appearance position moved downward by driving the back rear drive motor 3126. For this reason, friction occurs in the left slider 3116, the right slider 3117, and the like every time the elevator moves up and down, and static electricity generated by the friction is likely to be accumulated on the surface of the back movable decorative body 3110. Since the decorative body 3111 and the decorative body base 3115 constituting the surface of the movable movable body 3110 behind the back are formed of a synthetic resin having low conductivity, even if a large amount of static electricity is accumulated, the surfaces of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative body base 3115 are formed. Static electricity accumulated throughout is not easily discharged at once. On the other hand, since the metal decoration part 3111d made of the metal foil of the decoration body 3111 has high conductivity, static electricity accumulated on the entire surface of the metal decoration part 3111d is easily discharged at once. For this reason, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 of the present embodiment is likely to accumulate static electricity in the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface of the decorative body 3111. However, as described above, from the metal decorative portion 3111d. Since the creeping distance EL to the back back decorative substrate 3114 is sufficiently long, the back back decorative substrate 3114 is not damaged by electrostatic discharge, and a movable effect that the back back movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down, and the back back movable decorative body It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain both the light emitting effect in which the 3110 is decorated with light emission.

  In addition, when the area of the metal decoration part 3111d in which static electricity is accumulated is a predetermined value or more (for example, 100 cm 2 or more), it is desirable to connect the metal decoration part 3111d to GND (ground). Thereby, it is possible to reliably prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d from being discharged to the back decorative substrate 3114.

[5-9d-8. Another embodiment of back movable decorative body]
Next, the back-back movable decorative body 3160, the back-back movable decorative body 3170, the back-back movable decorative body 3180, etc. of the embodiment different from the back-back movable decorative body 3110 are mainly described with reference to FIG. This will be described in detail. FIG. 157 (a) is an explanatory view showing, in section, the configuration of the back-back movable decorative body of the second embodiment different from the back-back movable decorative body of FIG. 142, and (b) is the back-back movable body of the third embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a decoration body in a cross section, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a back back movable decoration body of 4th embodiment in a cross section.

  The rear back movable decorative body 3160 of the second embodiment is provided on the rear side of a decorative body 3161 having a predetermined decoration on the front surface and a decorative body 3161 as schematically shown in FIG. 157 (a). A sheet-like decorative sheet 3162 provided with a predetermined decoration, a light guide radiation plate 3163 provided on the rear side of the decoration sheet 3162 to radiate light in a direction along the front surface inside, and a light guide radiation plate A back-and-back decorative board 3164 on which a plurality of LEDs 3164a that irradiate light in a direction along the front surface with respect to the inside of the 3163 is mounted on the front surface.

  The decorative body 3161 of the back movable decorative body 3160 includes a transparent flat plate-shaped main body portion 3161a, a flange portion 3161b extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 3161a, and a metal provided on the front surface of the main body portion 3161a. And a decorative portion 3161c. The main body portion 3161a may be flat, or may be provided with a relief-like decoration having irregularities. The metal decoration portion 3161c is provided on a part of the front surface of the main body portion 3161a and constitutes a predetermined decoration. The metal decorative portion 3161c may be formed by foil pressing, may be formed by plating, or may be formed by vapor deposition.

  The decoration sheet 3162 is a sheet on which a predetermined decoration (pattern) is printed on a transparent sheet. In the decorative sheet 3162, a portion with low transparency in decoration is located in a portion in front of the LED 3164a of the back decorative substrate 3164 (not shown). As a result, the LED 3164a is hidden from view from the front. The decorative sheet 3162 is formed in a size smaller than the inner peripheral shape of the flange portion 3161b in the decorative body 3161.

  The light guide radiation plate 3163 is formed in a flat plate shape having the same size as that of the decorative sheet 3162. The LED housing 3163a into which the LED 3164a of the back decorative substrate 3164 is inserted from the rear and a plurality of rear surfaces are provided. And a reflecting portion 3163b. The LED housing portion 3163a is a hole penetrating the light guide radiation plate 3163 in the front-rear direction, and the inner periphery is formed in a quadrangle along the outer periphery of the LED 3164a. Each of the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b is recessed forward in a triangular shape in cross section, and is provided only at a predetermined portion. The plurality of reflecting portions 3163b are provided so as to reflect the light from the determined LED housing portion 3163a forward, and are arranged in a concentric fan shape centered on the determined LED housing portion 3163a. . That is, the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b are formed so as to strongly reflect light from a specific direction forward. The plurality of reflecting portions 3163b can reflect light from an unspecified direction forward in the same manner as the reflecting portion 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the back movable ornament 3110 described above. Alternatively, it may be provided on substantially the entire rear surface.

  The back decorative substrate 3164 is formed in the same size as the decorative sheet 3162 and the light guide radiation plate 3163. The back-side decorative board 3164 has a plurality of side-view type LEDs 3164a that are inserted into the LED housing portion 3163a of the light guide radiation plate 3163 from the back. Although not shown, the back and back decorative substrate 3164 has a predetermined circuit pattern formed of copper foil at a position on the front and back surfaces inside the predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery of the back and back decorative substrate 3164. Further, the back decorative substrate 3164 has a coating film made of a white solder resist on the surface (both sides).

  In the assembled state, the back movable movable body 3160 of the present embodiment is in contact with the rear surface of the main body 3161a of the decorative body 3161, and the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163 on the rear surface of the decorative sheet 3162. Further, the front surface of the back and back decorative substrate 3164 is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163. Thereby, the thickness in the front-rear direction of the back movable decorative body 3160 is thin. The flange portion 3161b of the decorative body 3161 extends rearward to the same position as the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3164. Thus, in the back movable decorative body 3160, the outer periphery of the decorative sheet 3162, the light guide radiation plate 3163, and the back rear decorative substrate 3164 is covered with the flange portion 3161b, and it is difficult to see the outer peripheral surfaces from the outside. It looks good.

  Since this back movable movable body 3160 has a flange portion 3161b extending rearward from the main body portion 3161a of the decorative body 3161 so as to cover the outer periphery of the back rear decorative substrate 3164, the metal decorative portion on the front surface of the main body portion 3161a. The creepage distance EL from 3161c to the back and back decoration board 3164 (the copper foil thereof) can be a sufficient distance, and static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3161c flows to the back and back decoration board 3164, and the back and back decoration. It is possible to prevent the substrate 3164 from being damaged.

  Thus, according to the back rear movable decorative body 3160 of the present embodiment, the same operational effects as the above back rear movable decorative body 3110 can be achieved. In addition, in the back rear movable decorative body 3160, a decorative body base that covers the rear side of the back rear decorative substrate 3164 may be provided.

  Subsequently, as shown schematically in FIG. 157 (b), the rear back movable decorative body 3170 of the third embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer decorative body 3171 and an inner side of the outer decorative body 3171 (frame A light-transmitting plate-shaped inner decorative body 3172 that closes the inner inner surface, and a light guide radiation plate 3173 that is provided behind the inner decorative body 3172 and that radiates light in the direction along the entire surface in the interior. A back and back decoration board 3174 on which a plurality of LEDs 3174a that irradiate light in the direction along the front surface with respect to the inside of the light guide radiation plate 3173 is mounted.

  An outer decorative body 3171 of the back rear movable decorative body 3170 is a frame-shaped main body 3171a extending forward and backward, a support 3171b projecting inward from the inner peripheral surface of the main body 3171a, and a main body 3171a. And a metal decoration portion 3171c provided on the front surface. The distance from the front end of the main body 3171a to the front surface of the support 3171b is the same as the thickness of the inner decorative body 3172 in the front-rear direction. The metal decoration portion 3171c is provided on a part of the front surface of the main body portion 3171a and constitutes a predetermined decoration. This metal decoration part 3171c may be formed by foil pressing, may be formed by plating, or may be formed by vapor deposition.

  Although not shown in the drawing, the inner decoration body 3172 has a relief-like decoration with irregularities. The inner decoration body 3172 is attached so as to close the opening on the front side of the frame-shaped outer decoration body 3171.

  The light guide radiation plate 3173 is formed in substantially the same size as the inner decoration 3172. The light guide radiation plate 3173 is inserted into the frame of the outer decorative body 3171, and the outer periphery of the front surface is in contact with the rear surface of the support portion 3171b. The light guide radiation plate 3173 includes an LED housing portion 3173a into which the LED 3174a of the back rear decorative substrate 3174 is inserted from the rear, and a plurality of reflecting portions 3173b provided on the rear surface. The LED accommodating portion 3173a is a hole penetrating the light guide radiation plate 3173 in the front-rear direction, and the inner periphery is formed in a quadrangle along the outer periphery of the LED 3174a. The reflecting portion 3173b extends in an arc shape around the determined LED housing portion 3173a, and a plurality of the reflecting portions 3173b are provided concentrically. The reflecting portion 3173b has a triangular cross section. The plurality of reflecting portions 3173b are provided so as to reflect the light from the LED housing portions 3173a, each of which is determined, to the front. That is, the plurality of reflecting portions 3173b are formed so as to strongly reflect light from a specific direction forward. The plurality of reflecting portions 3173b can reflect light from an unspecified direction forward, similarly to the reflecting portion 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the back movable ornament 3110 described above. Alternatively, it may be provided on substantially the entire rear surface.

  The back decorative board 3174 is formed in the same size as the light guide radiation plate 3173. The back-side decorative board 3174 has a plurality of side-view type LEDs 3174a that are inserted into the LED housing portion 3173a of the light guide radiation plate 3173 from the rear side. Although not shown, the back and back decorative board 3174 has a predetermined circuit pattern formed of copper foil at a position a predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery of the back and back decorative board 3174 on the front and rear surfaces. The back decorative substrate 3174 has a coating film made of a white solder resist on the surface (both sides).

  In the assembled state, the rear back movable decorative body 3170 of the present embodiment has an inner decorative body 3172 fitted into the frame of the outer decorative body 3171 from the front, and the front surface of the outer decorative body 3171 and the front surface of the inner decorative body 3172. Are substantially coincided with each other, and the vicinity of the outer periphery of the rear surface of the inner decoration body 3172 is in contact with the front surface of the support portion 3171b. Further, in the back rear movable decorative body 3170, a light guide radiation plate 3173 and a back rear decoration board 3174 are inserted from the rear in the frame of the outer decoration body 3171, and the light guide radiation plate 3173 is disposed on the rear surface of the support portion 3171b. The vicinity of the outer periphery of the front surface is in contact, and the front surface of the back decorative substrate 3174 is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3173. Thereby, the thickness of the back and rear movable decorative body 3170 in the front-rear direction is thin. In the back movable decorative body 3170, a gap having a thickness of the support portion 3171b is formed between the inner decorative body 3172 and the light guide radiation plate 3173.

  The main body 3171a of the outer decorative body 3171 extends rearward to the same position as the rear surface of the back rear decorative board 3174. In the back rear movable decorative body 3160, the outer periphery of the inner decorative body 3172, the light guide radiation plate 3173, and the back rear decorative substrate 3174 is covered by the main body portion 3171a of the outer decorative body 3171. It is hard to see and improves the appearance.

  Since the back rear movable decorative body 3170 covers the outer periphery of the back rear decorative substrate 3174 by the main body 3171a extending to the rear of the outer decorative body 3171, the back rear movable decorative body 3170 is separated from the metal decorative portion 3171c on the front surface of the main body 3171a. The creeping distance EL to the back rear decorative board 3174 (the copper foil thereof) can be set to a sufficient distance, and static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3171c flows to the back rear decorative board 3174, and the back rear decorative board 3174 Can be prevented from being damaged.

  Thus, according to the back rear movable decorative body 3170 of the present embodiment, the same operational effects as the above back rear movable decorative body 3110 can be obtained. Note that a metal decoration portion may also be provided on the front surface of the inner decoration body 3172. Further, in the back rear movable decorative body 3170, a decorative body base that covers the rear side of the back rear decorative substrate 3174 may be provided.

  Subsequently, as shown schematically in FIG. 157 (c), the back rear movable decorative body 3180 of the fourth embodiment includes an outer decorative body 3181 formed in a frame shape, and an inner side (frame) of the outer decorative body 3181. An inner decorative body 3182 having a light-transmitting property and a plurality of LEDs 3183a which are provided behind the inner decorative body 3182 and can irradiate light forward are mounted on the front surface. And.

  The outer decorative body 3181 of the rear movable decorative body 3180 includes a flat frame-shaped main body portion 3181a, a flange portion 3181b extending rearward from the outer periphery of the main body portion 3181a, and the entire surfaces of the main body portion 3181a and the flange portion 3181b. And a metal decoration portion 3181c that is covered. The metal decoration portion 3181 c is provided on the entire surface of the outer decoration body 3181. The metal decoration portion 3181c may be formed by plating, or may be formed by vapor deposition.

  The inner decoration body 3182 is formed of a transparent member. The inner decorative body 3182 has a plate-shaped main body portion 3182a whose outer shape is larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped main body portion 3181a of the outer decorative body 3181 and smaller than the inner periphery of the flange portion 3181b, and the rear from the outer periphery of the main body portion 3182a. And a flange portion 3182b extending to the bottom. Although not shown in the drawing, the main body 3182a has a relief-like decoration with irregularities formed on substantially the entire surface.

  The back decorative board 3183 has an outer shape that is smaller than the inner circumference of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182. That is, the back decorative substrate 3183 is formed in such a size that a gap of a predetermined distance or more is formed between the outer periphery and the inner periphery of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182. The back decorative board 3183 has a plurality of top view type LEDs 3183a mounted on the front surface. Although not shown, the back and back decorative substrate 3183 has a predetermined circuit pattern formed of copper foil on a portion of the front and back surfaces inside the predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery of the back and back decorative substrate 3183. The back decorative substrate 3183 has a coating film made of a white solder resist on the surface (both sides).

  In the assembled state, the back and back movable decorative body 3180 of the present embodiment has an inner decorative body 3182 and a back and back decorative substrate 3183 inserted into the frame of the frame-shaped outer decorative body 3181 from the rear. The back rear movable decorative body 3180 has a front surface in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the inner decorative body 3182 in contact with the rear surface of the main body 3181a of the outer decorative body 3181, and a flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182 is in contact with the outer decorative body 3181. It extends backward to the same position as the rear end of the flange portion 3181b. That is, the inner peripheral side of the flange portion 3181b of the outer decorative body 3181 is covered with the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182. In other words, the outer periphery of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182 is covered with the flange portion 3181b of the outer decorative body 3181. Therefore, the outer periphery of the inner decorative body 3182 and the back rear decorative substrate 3183 is not visible from the outside by the flange portion 3181b of the outer decorative body 3181.

  The back rear movable decorative body 3180 is provided with a flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182 on the inner side of the flange portion 3181b of the outer decorative body 3181 provided with the metal decorative portion 3181c. Since the outer periphery of the back and back decorative board 3183 provided on the rear side of the main body 3182a is separated from the inner periphery of the flange 3182b of the internal decorative body 3182, the back and back decorative board 3183 (copper of the back and back decorative board 3183c) is provided. The creeping distance EL up to the (foil) can be made a sufficient distance, and static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3181c is prevented from flowing into the back back decoration board 3183 and damaging the back back decoration board 3183. can do.

  Thus, according to the back rear movable decorative body 3180 of the present embodiment, the same operational effects as the above back rear movable decorative body 3110 can be obtained. In addition, you may make it provide a metal decoration part also in the front surface of the main-body part 3182a of the inner decoration body 3182. FIG. In addition, in the back rear movable decorative body 3180, a decorative body base that covers the rear side of the back back decorative substrate 3183 may be provided.

[5-9e. Back bottom left production unit and back bottom right production unit]
Next, the back lower left effect unit 3200 and the back lower right effect unit 3250 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 158 to 161 and the like. 158 (a) is a perspective view of the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 158 (b) is the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit in the back unit. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 159 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower left effect unit and the lower back right effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 160 is an exploded view of the lower back left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit as seen from behind. It is a disassembled perspective view. FIG. 161 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable configuration of the back bottom left effect unit and the back bottom right effect unit from the front.

  The back bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back bottom right effect unit 3250 of the back unit 3000 are attached to the lower end of the back back effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back bottom left production unit 3200 and the back bottom right production unit 3250 are located on the left and right sides of the back bottom middle decorative body unit 3320 of the back bottom middle production unit 3300 in the assembled state on the game board 5, from the front. Visible through the transparent gaming panel 1100, the front unit 2000, and the like.

  First, the back bottom left rendering unit 3200 will be described. The back bottom left rendering unit 3200 is provided behind the back bottom left rotating decorative body 3201 having a translucent shaft shaft 3201a projecting rearward and the back bottom left rotating decorative body 3201. A back lower left decorative body 3202, a rear lower left decorative board 3203 provided behind the back lower left decorative body 3202, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the rear lower left decorative board 3203 behind A back base left rotating decorative body 3201 is rotatably attached and a back bottom left decorative body 3202 is attached; and a unit base 3204 attached to the lower end of the left side of the back rear rendering unit 3100; It is equipped with.

  The lower back left rendering unit 3200 is attached to the lower back left drive motor 3205 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3204 so that the rotary shaft protrudes backward, and to the rotary shaft of the lower back left drive motor 3205. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3206, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3207 that meshes with the drive gear 3206 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3204, and a first transmission gear 3207. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3208 that is rotatably attached to the unit base 3204, and is engaged with the second transmission gear 3208 and attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3201a of the back rotating left rotating decorative body 3201. The third transmission gear 3209 having a spur gear shape is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3204 below the back lower left decorative body 3202. Is provided with a cover 3210, a.

  The back bottom left rotating decorative body 3201 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom. The shaft shaft 3201 a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back lower left rotating decorative body 3201 is formed to penetrate the back lower left decorative body 3202, the back lower left decorative substrate 3203, and the unit base 3204. . The back bottom left decorative body 3202 is rotated so that the two petals of the same size as the back bottom left rotating decorative body 3201 overlap each other and the rear petal is positioned between the front petals. It is formed in the shape that was made to.

  In the back lower left decorative substrate 3203, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The back bottom left decorative substrate 3203 is provided with a back bottom left detection sensor 3203a for detecting the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209 on the rear surface. The back bottom left detection sensor 3203a protrudes backward through the unit base 3204. The third transmission gear 3209 has a detection piece 3209a that protrudes forward and is detected by the back bottom left detection sensor 3203a of the back bottom left decorative substrate 3203. In a state where the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209 is detected by the back bottom left detection sensor 3203a, the back bottom left rotation decorative body 3201 is in a state where one petal is directed upward (see FIG. 161). ).

  When the drive gear 3206 is rotated by the back bottom left drive motor 3205, the back bottom left rendering unit 3200 of the present embodiment passes through the first transmission gear 3207, the second transmission gear 3208, and the third transmission gear 3209. The lower left rotating decorative body 3201 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction. In addition, the back lower left rendering unit 3200 can light up and decorate the back lower left rotating decorative body 3201 and the back lower left decorative body 3202 by causing a plurality of LEDs on the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 to emit light.

  Next, the back lower right effect unit 3250 will be described. The back lower right effect unit 3250 is provided behind the back lower right rotation decoration body 3251 having translucency with the shaft shaft 3251a projecting rearward, and the rear lower right rotation decoration body 3251. A back lower right decorative body 3252, a back lower right decorative board 3253 which is provided behind the back lower right decorative body 3252 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a rear lower right decorative board 3253 The back lower right decorative body 3251 is rotatably attached and the back lower right decorative body 3252 is attached. The unit base 3254 is attached to the lower end of the right side of the back rear rendering unit 3100. It is equipped with.

  The back lower right rendering unit 3250 is attached to the lower back right drive motor 3255, which is mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3254 so that the rotation shaft protrudes rearward, and the rotation shaft of the back lower right drive motor 3255. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3256, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3257 that meshes with the drive gear 3256 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3254, and a first transmission gear 3257. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3258 that is rotatably attached to the unit base 3254 and a rear transmission gear 3258 that is meshed with the second transmission gear 3258 and attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3251a of the lower right rotating decorative body 3251. And a third transmission gear 3259 having a spur gear shape and attached to the front surface of the unit base 3254 below the right lower decorative body 3252. Is provided with a cover 3260, a.

  The back lower right rotating decorative body 3251 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom. The shaft shaft 3251a that protrudes rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back lower right decorative body 3251 is formed to penetrate the back lower right decorative body 3252, the back lower right decorative board 3253, and the unit base 3254. . The back lower right decorative body 3252 rotates two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back lower right rotating decorative body 3251 so that the rear petal is positioned between the front petals after being overlapped on the front and rear. It is formed in the shape that was made to.

  In the back lower right decorative substrate 3253, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. The back bottom right decorative substrate 3253 is provided with a back bottom right detection sensor 3253a for detecting the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259 on the rear surface. The back bottom right detection sensor 3253a penetrates the unit base 3254 and protrudes backward. The third transmission gear 3259 has a detection piece 3259a that protrudes forward and is detected by the back bottom right detection sensor 3253a of the back bottom right decorative board 3253. In the state in which the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259 is detected by the back bottom right detection sensor 3253a, the back bottom right rotation decoration body 3251 is in a state where one petal is directed upward (see FIG. 161). ).

  When the drive gear 3256 is rotated by the back-bottom right drive motor 3255, the back-bottom right rendering unit 3250 according to the present embodiment is connected via the first transmission gear 3257, the second transmission gear 3258, and the third transmission gear 3259. The lower right rotating decorative body 3251 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction. Further, the back lower right effect unit 3250 can light-decorate the back lower right rotating decorative body 3251 and the back lower right decorative body 3252 by causing a plurality of LEDs on the back lower right decorative board 3253 to emit light.

[5-9f. Production unit under the back]
Next, the back-under-stage production unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 162 to 169 and the like. FIG. 162 (a) is a perspective view of the back-under-middle effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back-under-middle effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 163 is an exploded perspective view of the lower back middle lifting mechanism of the rear lower middle production unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 164 is an exploded perspective view of the lower lower middle lifting mechanism of the lower lower middle production unit viewed from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view. FIG. 165 is an exploded perspective view of the lower back middle decorative body unit of the back lower middle production unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 166 is an exploded perspective view of the lower lower middle decoration body unit of the back lower middle production unit from the rear. FIG. FIG. 167 is an explanatory diagram showing the raising / lowering of the lower back middle decorative body unit by the lower back middle raising / lowering mechanism in the lower back middle production unit. FIG. 168 (a) is an explanatory view showing a configuration related to the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body of the lower back middle decorative body unit in the back lower middle effect unit, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a stop position and each detection sensor with a table | surface. FIG. 169 is an explanatory diagram showing the arrangement of LEDs of the lower back middle decorative body unit in the lower back middle effect unit from the front.

  The back-under middle production unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is disposed below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The under back middle production unit 3300 is attached to the rear side of the back lower left production unit 3200 and the back lower right production unit 3250. The lower back middle production unit 3300 includes a lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 having a back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 that can rotate around an axis in the front-rear direction, and a lower back middle up / down lifting mechanism that moves the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 up and down. 3350.

  The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 of the lower back middle production unit 3300 has a front hexagonal shape. This underside middle rotating decorative body 3310 has six number decorations formed in a relief shape from “1” to “6” on the entire surface, and is circular at every 60 degrees in the clockwise direction centering on the center. It is arranged on the circumference. This under back middle rotating decorative body 3310 has translucency. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 has a concave portion 3311 that can accommodate a diffusion lens 3321, a lower back middle first decorative board 3322, and a front end side of the board fixing member 3323 in the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 described later. Have.

  As shown in FIGS. 165 and 166, the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 is provided behind the diffuser lens 3321 and the diffuser lens 3321 provided behind the lower back middle rotary decorative body 3310. A backside middle first decorative substrate 3322 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and attached to the diffusion lens 3321 so as to sandwich the back bottom middle first decorative substrate 3322 from the rear side, and protrudes in a columnar shape to the rear. The substrate fixing member 3323 having the shaft portion 3323a and the shaft portion 3323a of the substrate fixing member 3323 have a shaft hole 3324a into which the shaft portion 3323a is inserted so as to be relatively rotatable, and the rotation is attached to the rear side of the lower back middle rotary decoration body 3310 A base 3324.

  The lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 and extends in a semicircular arc coaxial with the shaft hole 3324a, and a circumference coaxial with the area detection piece 3325. A plurality of position detection pieces 3326 projecting from the rotation base 3324 and a spur gear-shaped rotation gear 3327 provided on the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 are provided.

  Further, the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is provided behind the rotation base 3324 and has an opening 3328a through which the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 can pass, and thus has translucency. A back bottom middle decorative body 3328, a back bottom middle second decorative board 3329 provided behind the back bottom middle decorative body 3328 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back bottom middle second decorative board 3329. A plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 that can detect the area detecting piece 3325 and a position specifying the position detecting piece 3326 that is attached to the front face of the second lower middle decorative board 3329. Sensor 3331.

  The back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 is provided behind the back lower middle second decorative board 3329, and the rear end of the shaft portion 3323a of the board fixing member 3323 is attached and the back lower middle decorative body 3328 is attached. The movable base 3332 is attached to the rear surface of the movable base 3332 so that the rotary shaft protrudes forward, and is attached to the rotary shaft of the lower back middle rotary drive motor 3333. A spur gear-like drive gear 3334 meshing with the rotation gear 3327, a rear cover 3335 attached to the rear side of the movable base 3332, and a back-under middle lifting mechanism 3350 attached to the rear side of the movable base 3332. And an elevating slider 3336 that is slidably guided in the vertical direction by the slide rail 3360.

  The front end side of the diffuser lens 3321, the lower back middle decorative board 3322, and the board fixing member 3323, in the assembled state, is positioned between the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the rotary base 3324, It is in a state of being accommodated in the recess 3311 of the rotating decorative body 3310, and is not in contact with any of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the rotating base 3324. By appropriately emitting light from the plurality of LEDs on the lower back first decorative board 3322, it is possible to light up and decorate the numeral decoration (relief) portion of the lower back middle rotary decorative body 3310. The LED of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back is a full color LED. In addition, the LED on the second lower decorative substrate 3329 is a full color LED.

  The region detection piece 3325 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 with a diameter larger than that of the rotation gear 3327. As shown in FIG. 168 (a), the area detection piece 3325 includes “3”, “4”, and “5” between the number decorations “2” and “3” in the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310. Through the numeral decoration, it is formed in an arc shape in a range of 180 degrees with the rotation axis as the center, between the numeral decorations “5” and “6”.

  Each of the plurality (six in this case) of position detection pieces 3326 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 on a circumference having a diameter larger than that of the region detection piece 3325. Each position detection piece 3326 is provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction at an angle of θ degrees (here, 60 degrees) so that each position detection piece 3326 is positioned at the center of the numerical decoration of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. . In the present embodiment, one position detection piece 3326 is formed in an arc shape in a range of a predetermined angle α degree (20 degrees to 25 degrees, here, 23.34 degrees) around the rotation axis. An interval of 2 × β degrees (θ degrees−α degrees (here, 36.66 degrees)) is provided between the position detection piece 3326 and the rotation axis (see FIG. 168 (a)). .

  A plurality (three in this case) of area specifying sensors 3330 are provided so as to be arranged at an angle interval of θ degrees (60 degrees) around the rotation axis of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310. The three area specifying sensors 3330 are provided in the order of the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c in the clockwise order. In the present embodiment, the three area specifying sensors 3330 are “3”, “4”, “5” in a state where the decoration of “1” of the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is positioned directly above the rotation center. It is provided at a position corresponding to the numeral decoration (see FIG. 168 (a)).

  The position specifying sensor 3331 is provided at a position of an angle of γ degrees (here, 30 degrees) from the first area specifying sensor 3330a in the counterclockwise direction around the rotation axis of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310. ing.

  The movable base 3332 has elevating pins 3332a protruding in a columnar shape from the lower part of the rear surface to the rear. The elevating pin 3332a is slidably inserted into the second slit 3357b of the elevating arm 3357 in the lower back middle elevating mechanism 3350. The lower back middle rotational drive motor 3333 is a stepping motor capable of detecting the rotational position.

  This back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 rotates the drive gear 3334 by the lower back middle rotational drive motor 3333, thereby rotating the lower back middle rotary decorative body 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction via the rotation gear 3327. Can do. Further, the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back lower middle first decorative board 3322 and the back lower middle second decorative board 3329, respectively, thereby causing the back lower middle rotary decorative body 3310 to emit light. In addition, the lower back inner decorative body 3328 can be illuminated.

  As shown in FIG. 163, FIG. 164, etc., the lower back middle elevating mechanism 3350 has a unit base 3351 that extends to the left and right and is attached to the lower back left effect unit 3200 and the lower back right effect unit 3250 at both ends, and a unit base 3351. The lower back middle up / down drive motor 3352 is mounted on the front surface of the rear base, and the back bottom middle up / down drive motor 3352 is mounted on the rotary shaft of the back lower middle up / down drive motor 3352 and a part of the flat is facing the front side of the unit base 3351. A gear-shaped drive gear 3353, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3354 that meshes with the drive gear 3353 and is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, and a first transmission gear 3354. Spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3355 rotatably attached to the front surface of unit base 3351, and second transmission gear A spur gear-shaped gear portion 3356a meshing with 355, and a drive pin 3356b projecting forward in a cylindrical shape from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the front surface of the gear portion 3356a. And an elevating cam gear 3356 that is rotatably mounted at the center upper portion.

  Further, the bottom back middle elevating mechanism 3350 has a base end side extending in the left-right direction rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, and a longitudinal direction in which the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 is slidably inserted. A first slit 3357a that extends in the longitudinal direction on the tip side of the first slit 3357a and a second slit 3357b in which the elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 in the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is slidably inserted. And an elevating arm 3357 having a detecting piece 3357c provided at the tip, and a back / under middle elevating detection sensor 3358a capable of detecting the detecting piece 3357c of the elevating arm 3357 are provided. And a lower back middle relay board 3358 attached to the front surface.

  Furthermore, the lower back middle lifting mechanism 3350 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, the lifting cam gear 3356, and the lifting arm 3357 from the front side. A front cover 3359 having a vertically extending lift slit 3359a through which the lift pins 3332a of the movable base 3332 of the decorative body unit 3320 are inserted, and a front cover 3359 are attached to the front surface of the front cover 3359. A slide rail 3360 that guides the slider 3336 in the vertical direction, a gear cover 3361 attached to the rear side of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the drive gear 3353 from the rear, and a tip side of the lifting arm 3357 move upward (front) (Clockwise direction with respect to view) Arm 3357 is provided with a spring 3362 that is urged to rotate.

  The lower back middle raising / lowering drive motor 3352 is attached to the lower part on the left side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction. The lifting arm 3357 is attached so that its proximal end is on the right side of the lifting cam gear 3356 and at the same height as the center of the lifting cam gear 3356. The lift arm 3357 has a distal end extending leftward from the lift cam gear 3356.

  The back bottom middle relay board 3358 includes a back bottom middle first decorative board 3322, a back bottom middle second decorative board 3329, a region specifying sensor 3330, a position specifying sensor 3331, a back bottom middle rotary drive motor 3333, and a back bottom middle lift drive motor. 3352, the connection between the back / under middle lifting detection sensor 3358a and the effect drive board 1720 is relayed.

  The front cover 3359 is attached to the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction, and the lifting slit 3359a is provided on the left side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction. The raising / lowering pins 3332a of the movable base 3332 in the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 are slidably inserted into the raising / lowering slits 3359a of the front cover 3359. The slide rail 3360 is provided to the right of the center of the unit base 3351 in the front cover 3359 in the left-right direction. By the elevating slit 3359a and the slide rail 3360, the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 can be supported so as to slide straight up and down.

  When the drive gear 3353 is rotated by the back / under middle lifting / lowering drive motor 3352, the back / under middle lifting / lowering mechanism 3350 passes through the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, and the gear portion 3356 a of the lifting / lowering cam gear 3356. 3356 can be rotated. The elevating arm 3357 can be rotated by the drive pin 3356b revolving by the rotation of the elevating cam gear 3356 via the first slit 3357a in which the drive pin 3356b is slidably inserted. The back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 can be lifted and lowered together with the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 through the lift pins 3332a of the movable base 3332 slidably inserted into the two slits 3357b.

  Next, the movement of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 in the lower back middle effect unit 3300 will be described in detail. In the normal state, the lower back middle effect unit 3300 is in the lowered position where the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 has moved most downward. In this normal state, the elevating arm 3357 in the lower back middle elevating mechanism 3350 has the distal end side positioned below the base end side, and the front end detection piece 3357c is moved under the back lower middle relay board 3358. It is detected by the detection sensor 3358a (see FIG. 167 (a)).

  In this normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 is located below the center of revolution, and is located in the vicinity of the proximal end in the first slit 3357a of the elevating arm 3357. . More specifically, a normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3356b with the first slit 3357a extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3356. Thus, even if an urging force is applied to rotate the elevating arm 3357 in the clockwise direction by the spring 3362, the force line of the urging force is in contact with the first slit 3357a. Therefore, the elevating cam gear 3356 does not rotate because it passes through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3356. Accordingly, since the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 does not revolve, the elevating arm 3357 does not rotate, and the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 does not move from the lowered position by the urging force of the spring 3362, and the spring The urging force of 3362 does not act on the back / under lift driving motor 3352 via the lifting / lowering arm 3357 or the like.

  In a normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 may be brought into contact with the proximal end of the first slit 3357a. Thus, when the lifting arm 3357 tries to rotate in the clockwise direction by the biasing force of the spring 3362, the lifting cam gear 3356 is moved in the counterclockwise direction by the force acting from the first slit 3357a via the drive pin 3356b. Try to rotate. At this time, the drive pin 3356b tries to revolve so as to move to the base end side of the lifting arm 3357, but the drive pin 3356b is in contact with the base end side end portion of the first slit 3357a. The drive pin 3356b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the elevating arm 3357 is locked, so that the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 can be prevented from moving upward.

  In the normal state, the back middle production unit 3300 has the number decoration located on the uppermost side among the plurality of number decorations in the middle back decoration 3310 inside the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is located and can be seen well from the front (player side) (see FIG. 111 etc.). In a normal state, the numeral decoration located on the lowermost side is located behind the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, and the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back and the second lower middle By causing the LED of the second decorative substrate 3329 to emit light, the first starter port 2002 formed of a transparent member can also be decorated with light emission in addition to the light emitting decoration of the back and middle rotating decorative body (see FIG. 120 and the like). ).

  In this normal state, when the drive gear 3353 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the back / upper middle lifting drive motor 3352, the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, and the gear portion 3356a are interposed. Thus, the elevating cam gear 3356 rotates in the clockwise direction, and the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 revolves in the clockwise direction. As the drive pin 3356b revolves, the inner surface of the first slit 3357a that is in contact with the drive pin 3356b is pressed upward, and the drive pin 3356b slides in the first slit 3357a toward the tip side, and the lifting arm It will rotate clockwise around the base end side so that the tip end side of 3357 moves upward.

  As the elevating arm 3357 rotates in the clockwise direction, the elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 inserted into the second slit 3357b on the distal end side of the elevating arm 3357 is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3357b. The back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 moves upward through the lifting pins 3332a. When the drive pin 3356b moves upward from the center of revolution, the drive pin 3356b slides toward the proximal end in the first slit 3357a. At this time, since the urging force in the clockwise direction is applied to the lifting arm 3357 by the spring 3362, the urging force assists the upward movement of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320, and the lower back middle The load applied to the lifting drive motor 3352 is reduced.

  When the drive pin 3356b further revolves in the clockwise direction and reaches the vicinity of the proximal end side of the first slit 3357a, the rotation of the drive gear 3353 by the lower back middle lifting drive motor 3352 is stopped simultaneously with the drive. The revolution of the pin 3356b stops. As a result, the movement of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 by the lifting arm 3357 is stopped, and the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 is moved to the uppermost position.

  In the state where the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is in the raised position, the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3356b with the first slit 3357a extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3356. As a result, even if a force for rotating the lifting arm 3357 in the counterclockwise direction is applied by the weight of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320, the line of force of the force is applied to the first slit 3357a. The elevating cam gear 3356 does not rotate because it passes through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3356 via the drive pin 3356b that is in contact. Accordingly, since the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 does not revolve, the elevating arm 3357 does not rotate, the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 does not move downward from the raised position, and the back lower middle decorative body. The weight of the unit 3320 does not act on the back / under lift driving motor 3352 via the lifting arm 3357 or the like.

  In the state where the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 is in the raised position, the elevating cam gear 3356 may be further revolved so that the drive pin 3356b is brought into contact with the proximal end of the first slit 3357a. As a result, when the lifting arm 3357 tries to rotate counterclockwise due to the weight of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320, the lifting cam gear 3356 is rotated by the force acting from the first slit 3357a via the drive pin 3356b. Try to rotate around. At this time, the drive pin 3356b tries to revolve so as to move to the base end side of the lifting arm 3357, but the drive pin 3356b is in contact with the base end side end portion of the first slit 3357a. The drive pin 3356b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the elevating arm 3357 is locked, so that the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 can be prevented from moving downward.

  In the state in which the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is moved to the raised position, most of the lower back middle rotary decorative body 3310 is positioned within the frame of the center accessory 2500 (in addition, a game ball that rolls in the game area 5a). B is located on the upper side of the rebound prevention member (stage cover 2515) provided on the center accessory 2500 that prevents rebound from the outside to the inside of the center frame (circumferential wall portion 2501), and forward (player) From the side), all of the numeral decorations can be visually recognized (see FIG. 201).

  In the case of returning the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 to the lowered position from the state where it is moved to the raised position, if the drive gear 3353 is rotated in the opposite direction to the above by the back lower middle lift drive motor 3352, the lift arm 3357 is moved. Rotates counterclockwise, and the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 moves downward from the raised position. Then, when the detection piece 3357c at the tip of the lifting arm 3357 is detected by the lower back middle lifting detection sensor 3358a of the lower back middle relay board 3358, the back lower middle lifting drive motor 3352 stops the rotation of the drive gear 3353. The lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is in the lowered position (in addition, the center for preventing the game ball B rolling in the game area 5a from bouncing from the outside to the inside of the center frame (peripheral wall portion 2501). The rebound preventing member (stage cover 2515) provided on the accessory 2500 can be returned to the overlapping position when viewed from the front in the pachinko machine 1.

  The under back middle production unit 3300 of the present embodiment rotates the drive gear 3334 by the under back middle rotation drive motor 3333 in the back under middle decoration body unit 3320, so that the under back middle rotation decoration body 3310 is provided via the rotation gear 3327. Can be rotated around an axis in the front-rear direction. By rotating the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, six number decorations provided on the front surface rotate like a roulette. The lower back middle rotary ornament 3310 can be rotated by the lower back middle rotary drive motor 3333 at any position such as the lowered position and the raised position of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320.

  In the normal state, the back-under-middle effect unit 3300 of the present embodiment is such that one of a plurality of (here, six) number decorations in the back-under-middle rotating decorative body 3310 is positioned immediately above the rotation center (stop position). is doing. For example, as shown in FIG. 168 (a), in the state where the number decoration of “1” in the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 is positioned above, the area detection piece 3325 of the rotation base 3324 is identified as the first area. While detecting by the three area specifying sensors 3330 of the sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c, a plurality of (here, six) position detecting pieces 3326 are detected by the position specifying sensor 3331. Is not detected.

  Here, first, the relationship between the three region specifying sensors 3330 and the six stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 will be described. In the state where the number decoration of “1” is set to the stop position, as described above, the first region specifying sensor 3330a, the second region specifying sensor 3330b, and the third region specifying sensor 3330c are the region detection piece 3325 of the rotation base 3324. Is detected. That is, as shown in FIG. 168 (b), when the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are detected, the numeral decoration “1” is centered on the stop position. It is located within the range of the range of ± 30 degrees.

  When the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b are detected and the third area specifying sensor 3330c is not detected, the numeral decoration “2” is an area of ± 30 degrees centered on the stop position. Located within range.

  When the first area specifying sensor 3330a is detected and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are not detected, the numeral decoration “3” is an area of ± 30 degrees centered on the stop position. Located within range.

  Furthermore, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are not detected, the numeral decoration “4” is a range of an area of ± 30 degrees centered on the stop position. Located in.

  When the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b are not detected and the third area specifying sensor 3330c is detecting, the numeral decoration “5” is an area of ± 30 degrees centered on the stop position. Located within range.

  When the first area specifying sensor 3330a is not detected and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are detecting, the numeral decoration “6” is an area of ± 30 degrees centered on the stop position. Located within range.

  As described above, any number decoration is determined by the combination of detection / non-detection of the three area specifying sensors 3330 of the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c. It can be known (detected) whether it is located in the stop area including.

  Since the backside middle rotation drive motor 3333 of this embodiment is a stepping motor, the backside middle rotation drive is performed when the region identification sensor 3330 rotates 30 degrees after the region detection piece 3325 is detected. By stopping the rotation of the motor 3333, it is possible to stop the desired numeral decoration of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 at the stop position. However, when performing such control, it is necessary to recognize the origin for stopping at the stop position while specifying the stop position area by the three area specifying sensors 3330. There is a problem that the control for stopping rotation of 3310 becomes complicated and the load becomes high. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of position detection pieces 3326 for specifying the stop position and a position specification sensor 3331 for detecting the position detection piece 3326 are provided, and the origin is recognized by the position specification sensor 3331. Thus, the complexity of the control for stopping the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is suppressed, and the load is reduced.

  More specifically, when it is desired to stop the desired number decoration at the stop position for the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates and the three region specifying sensors 3330 stop at the desired stop. In a combination that satisfies the position, the position specifying sensor 3331 detects the center of the position detection piece 3326 because the position specifying sensor 3331 is shifted from the first region specifying sensor 3330a in the rotation direction by an angle of 30 degrees. ing. In this state, the desired number is away from the stop position by a rotation angle of 30 degrees.

  In this state, when the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 further rotates by α / 2 degrees (here 11.67 degrees) which is the length of the position detection piece 3326, the position detection piece 3326 is separated from the position specifying sensor 3331. Thus, the position specifying sensor 3331 is not detected. The angle at which the position specifying sensor 3331 is not detected is set as the origin. Then, when rotating from there (from the origin) and β degrees (here, 18.33 degrees), the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 by the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 is stopped, so that a desired number can be obtained. The decoration can be accurately stopped at the stop position.

  In the above description, the rotation stop of the lower back middle rotary decorative body 3310 has been described by the angle, but the rotation stop may be performed by the rotation step of the lower back middle rotary drive motor 3333 formed of a stepping motor. For example, when one rotation is set to 396 steps, when the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 further rotates 13 steps in a combination in which the three region specifying sensors 3330 satisfy a desired stop position, the position detection piece 3326 is Apart from the position specifying sensor 3331, the position specifying sensor 3331 is not detected. When the position detection sensor 3331 is rotated 20 steps from the angle at which the position detection sensor 3331 has not been detected, the rotation of the lower back middle rotary decoration body 3310 by the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 is stopped, thereby stopping the desired numeral decoration. It can be stopped accurately at the position.

  Next, a description will be given of the light-emitting decoration in the back-under-stage effect unit 3300. As shown in FIG. 169, the back lower middle production unit 3300 includes a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 for emitting and decorating the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310. A decorative substrate 3322 and a lower back middle second decorative substrate 3329 are provided. The plurality of LEDs on the lower back middle first decorative board 3322 are positioned behind the six number decorations in the lower back middle rotary decoration body 3310, and each of the number decorations can be decorated with light emission independently.

  On the other hand, the plurality of LEDs on the back bottom middle second decorative board 3329 are located behind the plurality of numeral decorations on the back bottom middle rotary decoration body 3310 and are located outside the back bottom middle rotary decoration body 3310. The periphery can be decorated with light emission.

  As described above, the under-underground effect unit 3300 can detect the rotational position of the under-below under rotation decorative body 3310 to some extent by the three area specifying sensors 3330. Therefore, based on the detection of the area specifying sensor 3330. By rotating the plurality of LEDs on the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back as appropriate, it is rotated in a state where only specific numeral decorations are light-decorated or in a state where each numeral decoration is decorated with different colors. It is possible to show the player an effect that strongly attracts the player's interest.

  In addition, in the state where the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 is in the lowered position, the number decoration on the lower side of the back lower middle rotary decorative body 3310 is located behind the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. The first start port 2002 can be decorated with light emission by causing the LED in the corresponding portion of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back to emit light. Thereby, the player's interest can be directed to the first start port 2002. In addition, when the game ball B wins the first starting port 2002, the LED on the first decorative substrate 3322 in the back bottom is emitted (or one of the plurality of emission modes is determined to emit light). ).

  As described above, according to the lower back middle production unit 3300 of the present embodiment, this allows the rotating back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 having six stop positions to detect the region of the length over the three stop positions. A piece 3325, six position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, a three-region specifying sensor 3330 for detecting the region detection piece 3325, and one position specifying for detecting the position detection piece 3326 Since the sensor 3331 is provided, when the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates, the three area specifying sensors 3330 for detecting the area detecting piece 3325 decrease after sequentially increasing from one side in the rotation direction. All the area specifying sensors 3330 are once detected as non-detection even during the time until the back bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the next stop position. Not Rukoto, by a combination of area identification sensor 3330 that detects the area detection piece 3325 can roughly grasp the current rotational position of the subplantar rotating decorative body 3310.

  Since the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 includes six position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, the lower back middle rotation is detected by detection of the area detection pieces 3325 by the three area specifying sensors 3330. After roughly detecting the rotation of the decorative body 3310 to an arbitrary stop position, the stop position can be accurately detected by detecting the position detection piece 3326 by one position specifying sensor 3331, and the deviation of the stop position can be detected. It is possible to accurately grasp the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 having a plurality of stop positions with as few as possible.

  In addition, since the stop position of the lower back middle rotary decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, the lower back middle rotary decorative body 3310 can be accurately stopped at an arbitrary stop position, and the game can be performed by shifting the stop position. It is possible to prevent the person from feeling uncomfortable, and it is possible to entertain the effect (movable effect) by the rotating decoration body 3310 under the back and suppress the decrease in the interest.

  Furthermore, since the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, even if the rotational speed of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is increased, the deviation of the stop position can be suppressed. By rotating the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the moving speed (rotational speed) of the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be further increased as compared with the case where the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is reciprocated. Can be fast. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player by the fast rotating lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be rotated. It is possible to entertain and suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is rotated about an axis in the front-rear direction, and a plurality of number decorations are provided on the front surface. Such an effect can be shown to the player, so that the player can be thrilled and excited by whether or not the desired numeral decoration stops rotating at the stop position. You can entertain and suppress the decline of interest.

  Further, since the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is an even number, the number of stop positions that can be handled by the minimum number of area specifying sensors 3330 necessary for detecting movement to an arbitrary stop position The number of the stop decorations of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 becomes the same, and the ability (grasping of the stop positions) by the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 can be maximized, and there are more stop positions. Under the back and middle rotating decorative body 3310, the player can be entertained and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 are provided on the rotation base 3324 that rotates together with the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, the radius (diameter) of the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 can be set. It can be made as large as possible, and the positioning accuracy of the stop position can be further increased.

  In the above-described embodiment, the rotation base 3324 that rotates integrally with (under) the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is provided with the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326. The region detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 may be provided on a member that rotates with the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 such as the drive gear 3334.

[5-9g. Backward production unit]
Next, the back effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 170 to 177 and the like. 170 (a) is a perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 170 (b) is a perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 171 is an exploded perspective view of the main production member as seen from the front, and FIG. 172 is an exploded perspective view of the main production unit as seen from the rear. is there. FIG. 173 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up / down decoration body unit in the back-stage production unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 174 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up / down decoration body unit in the back unit as seen from the back. FIG.

  FIG. 175 is an explanatory diagram showing the rotation mechanism of the front front rotating decorative body in the back effect unit from the front. FIG. 176 (a) is an explanatory view showing the lifting mechanism of the back / up / down decorative body unit in the back / facing effect unit from the front, and FIG. 176 (b) is the back side with the back / up / down decorative body unit moved to the appearance position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the raising / lowering mechanism of a raising / lowering decoration body unit and the rotation mechanism of a back upper back rotation decoration body from a front. FIG. 177 is an explanatory diagram showing the decorative board from the front in a state where the back lifting / lowering decorative body unit is moved to the appearance position in the back effect stage unit.

  The back effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back back effect unit 3100 above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. As shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the back top production unit 3400 includes a back top front rotating decorative body 3410 having a shaft shaft 3410 a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface, and a back top front rotating decorative body 3410. A front upper decorative body 3421 extending in the left and right directions through which the shaft shaft 3410a penetrates in the center in the left and right direction, and a rear surface provided with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface provided behind the front upper decorative body 3421 The front decoration board 3422 and the back upper front decoration board 3422 are provided at the rear, and the front front decoration body 3421 is attached to the front surface, and the shaft shaft 3410a of the back front rotation decoration body 3410 is rotatably supported. A unit base 3423.

  Further, the rear effect unit 3400 is provided between the rear cover 3424 attached so as to form a space between the rear surface of the unit base 3423 and the unit base 3423 whose rotational axis is on the rear surface of the rear cover 3424. Meshing with the drive gear 3426, a spur gear-like drive gear 3426 attached to the rotating shaft of the back front rotation drive motor 3425, which is mounted so as to protrude into the space A rotating gear 3427 having a detection piece 3427a which is attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3410a of the front rotating front decorative body 3410 in a spur gear shape and projects forward, and a back front decorative board 3422 And a backside rotation detection sensor 3428 which is attached to the rear surface and can detect the detection piece 3427a of the rotation gear 3427.

  Further, the back top production unit 3400 includes a back top lift drive motor 3429 attached to the rear surface of the rear cover 3424 so that the rotation shaft projects into the space between the front unit base 3423 and the back top lift drive. A spur gear-shaped motor gear 3430 attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 3429, a gear portion 3431a meshing with the motor gear 3430, and a portion protruding outward from the circumference of the gear portion 3431a penetrates the rear cover 3424. And a lift cam gear 3431 which has a drive pin 3431b protruding rearward in a cylindrical shape and a detection piece 3431c protruding forward from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the gear portion 3431a and is rotatably attached to the rear cover 3424. The detection piece 3431c of the lift cam gear 3431 that is attached to the rear surface of the front front decorative substrate 3422 is detected. The rear end of the rear cover 3424 is moved back and forth so that the front end side on which the rear upper / lower lift detection sensor 3432 and the rear rear rotating decorative body 3440 are provided is moved up and down by the revolution of the drive pin 3431b of the lift cam gear 3431. A back-up / down decoration unit 3450 that is rotatably attached to the axis of the back, and a spring 3433 that urges the back-up / down decoration unit 3450 to rotate in the direction in which the tip side moves upward, And a rod-shaped regulating member 3434 which is attached to the rear side of the rear cover 3424 and regulates the upward movement of the back lifting / lowering decorative body unit 3450.

  As shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, the back up / down decorative body unit 3450 has a back top back decoration in which a shaft shaft 3440 a protruding rearward from the center of the back surface of the back back rotating decorative body 3440 penetrates in the center. A body 3451, a back rear decoration board 3452 which is provided behind the back upper decoration body 3451 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a rear upper decoration body 3451 from the rear of the back upper decoration board 3451. Is mounted on the front surface, and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3423, and includes an elevating unit base 3453 that rotatably supports the shaft shaft 3440 a of the back and rear rotating decorative body 3440.

  Further, the back upper and lower decorative body unit 3450 includes a rear rear rotation drive motor 3454 attached to the front surface of the lift unit base 3453 so that the rotation shaft projects rearward, and the rotation shaft of the rear upper rear rotation drive motor 3454. A spur gear-like drive gear 3455 attached to the first gear, a spur gear-like first transmission gear 3456 meshing with the drive gear 3455 and rotatably attached to the lifting unit base 3453, and a first transmission gear 3456. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3457 that is rotatably attached to the lifting unit base 3453, and a shaft shaft 3440a of the rear rear rotating decorative body 3440 that meshes with the second transmission gear 3457. And a spur gear-like rotation gear 3458 attached to the rear end.

  Further, the back up / down decoration unit 3450 is a gear cover attached to the rear surface of the up / down unit base 3453 so as to cover the drive gear 3455, the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotation gear 3458 from the rear. 3459 and a motor cover 3460 attached to the front surface of the elevating unit base 3453 so as to cover the rear rear rotation drive motor 3454 from the front.

  The front back rotating decorative body 3410 of the back top effect unit 3400 is formed in a shape simulating a cherry blossom and has translucency. The shaft shaft 3410a that protrudes rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back front rotating decorative body 3410 passes through the back front front decorative body 3421, the back front front decorative substrate 3422, and the unit base 3423, and the rear side of the unit base 3423. It extends to the space between the cover 3424. The front back decorative body 3421 has two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back front rotating decorative body 3410 in the center in the left-right direction, and the back petals are placed between the front petals. It has the decoration of the shape rotated so that it may be located in. The entire back upper decorative body 3421 has translucency.

  The front back decorative substrate 3422 extends to the left and right over substantially the entire length of the back front decorative body 3421 in the left-right direction. By causing the LED on the back front decorative substrate 3422 to emit light, the back front front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back front front decorative body 3421 can be illuminated. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front decorative substrate 3422 are full-color LEDs.

  The unit base 3423 has a through hole 3423a through which a back rotation detection sensor 3428 and a back lift detection sensor 3432 attached to the rear surface of the back front decorative substrate 3422 are inserted. The rear cover 3424 is coaxial with the shaft shaft 3410a of the front front rotating decorative body 3410, and has a circular arc shape through which the columnar support shaft 3424a protruding rearward from the rear surface and the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 are inserted. And an extended slit 3424b. The support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is for rotatably supporting the back lifting / lowering decorative body unit 3450, and is inserted into the shaft hole 3453a of the lifting / lowering unit base 3453.

  The detection piece 3427a of the rotation gear 3427 is detected by a backside rotation detection sensor 3428 that protrudes backward through the through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423. The elevating cam gear 3431 has a gear portion 3431a formed in a semicircular arc shape, and a drive pin 3431b projecting rearward is provided at a portion bulging outward from the opposite side of the gear portion 3431a. The drive pin 3431b of the lift cam gear 3431 passes through the slit 3424b of the rear cover 3424 and is slidably inserted into the slit 3453b of the lift unit base 3453 in the back lift decorative body unit 3450. In addition, the detection piece 3431c of the lift cam gear 3431 is detected by a back lift detection sensor 3432 that protrudes rearward through the through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423.

  The back and rear rotating decorative body 3440 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom and has translucency. The shaft shaft 3440a that protrudes rearward from the center of the rear surface of the rear rear rotating decorative body 3440 penetrates the rear upper rear decorative body 3451, the rear upper rear decorative substrate 3453, and the lifting unit base 3453, and is moved up and down. It extends to the rear side. The back upper decorative body 3451 rotates two cherry blossoms having the same size as the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440 so that the rear petal is positioned between the front petals after being overlapped on the front and rear. It has a decorative shape. The entire back upper decorative body 3451 has translucency.

  The back upper back decoration board 3452 can light up and decorate the back upper rear rotation decoration body 3440 and the back upper rear decoration body 3451 by causing a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface to emit light. The LED on the back-side back decorative substrate 3452 is a full-color LED.

  The elevating unit base 3453 is provided on the right side of the shaft hole 3453a and a shaft hole 3453a through which the support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is inserted so as to be rotatable relative to the base end side (right end side in front view). And an elongated slit 3453b extending along a line passing through the center of the shaft hole 3453a. A drive pin 3431b of the lift cam gear 3431 is slidably inserted into the slit 3453b of the lift unit base 3453. The motor cover 3460 has a decoration imitating cherry blossoms on the front.

  Next, the movements of the back front rotation decoration body 3410, the back top rear rotation decoration body 3440, and the back top lifting decoration body unit 3450 in the back top effect unit 3400 will be described. In the normal state, the back top production unit 3400 has a detection piece 3427a of the rotation gear 3427 attached to the shaft shaft 3410a of the front front rotation decorative body 3410 detected by the back top rotation detection sensor 3428. The upper front rotating decorative body 3410 has one petal facing upward (see FIG. 175). In this state, when the drive gear 3426 is rotated by the back front rotation drive motor 3425, the back front rotation decorative body 3410 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction via the rotation gear 3427.

  Further, in a normal state, the back up / down decorative body unit 3450 provided with the back top rear rotating decorative body 3440 on the front end side is in a state extending in the left-right direction, and the whole excluding the front end side, It is in a retracted position that is located behind the back upper front decorative body 3421 and cannot be seen from the front (see FIG. 176 (a)). In addition, the part which protrudes to the left rather than the back upper front ornament 3421 of the back up / down ornament body unit 3450 is located behind the back front left effect unit 3700 in the state assembled to the game board 5, Visible from the front.

  In this normal state, the detection piece 3431 c of the lift cam gear 3431 is detected by the back lift detection sensor 3432. Further, the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 is located below the center of revolution, and is located near the end portion far from the shaft hole 3453a in the slit 3453b of the elevating unit base 3453 of the back upper elevating decorative body unit 3450. positioned.

  Specifically, a normal line passing through a contact point with the slit 3453 b in the drive pin 3431 b of the elevating cam gear 3431 extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3431. Thus, even if a force is applied to rotate the lifting unit base 3453 in the counterclockwise direction so that the tip side moves downward by the weight of the back lifting / lowering decorative body unit 3450, The force line passes through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3431 via the drive pin 3431b that is in contact with the slit 3453b, and therefore the elevating cam gear 3431 does not rotate. Accordingly, since the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 does not revolve, the elevating unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the back elevating decorative body unit 3450 rotates from the retracted position so that the tip side moves downward. There is no. Therefore, the weight of the back lifting elevator unit 3450 does not act on the back lifting drive motor 3429 via the lifting unit base 3453 and the lifting cam gear 3431.

  In a normal state, the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 may be brought into contact with an end portion far from the shaft hole 3453a of the slit 3453b. Accordingly, when the lifting unit base 3453 tries to rotate counterclockwise due to its own weight, the lifting cam gear 3431 is counterclockwise due to the force acting from the slit 3453b via the drive pin 3431b. Try to rotate around. At this time, the drive pin 3431b tries to revolve so as to move away from the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453. However, the drive pin 3431b contacts the end portion of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b cannot revolve, the rotation of the lifting unit base 3453 is locked, and the back lifting / lowering decorative body unit 3450 can be prevented from rotating in the counterclockwise direction. .

  In this normal state, when the motor gear 3430 is rotated counterclockwise by the back elevation drive motor 3429, the lift cam gear 3431 is rotated clockwise by the gear portion 3431a meshing with the motor gear 3430. Thus, the drive pin 3431b of the lift cam gear 3431 revolves in the clockwise direction. When the drive pin 3431b revolves in the clockwise direction, the drive pin 3431b moves leftward and upward, and the drive pin 3431b slides in the slit 3453b toward the shaft hole 3453a. The lifting unit base 3453 rotates in the counterclockwise direction around the shaft hole 3453a so that the tip side thereof moves downward by the weight of the back lifting decoration unit 3450.

  When the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 revolves in the clockwise direction and moves above a straight line connecting the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3431 and the center of the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453, the drive pin 3431b is moved. It slides in the direction away from the shaft hole 3453a in the slit 3453b. When the drive pin 3431b further revolves in the clockwise direction and reaches the vicinity of the end portion far from the shaft hole 3453a in the slit 3453b, the rotation of the motor gear 3430 is stopped by the back lifting drive motor 3429 and at the same time, the drive pin 3431b. Revolution stops.

  Thereby, the counterclockwise rotation of the back lifting ornament body unit 3450 via the lifting unit base 3453 is stopped, and the front end side of the back lifting ornament body unit 3450 including the back rear back decoration body 3440 is moved. Then, the appearance position moves downward from the front upper decorative body 3421 (see FIG. 176 (b)). In this appearance position state, the front end side of the backside lifting decorative body unit 3450 is located below the center of the backside front decorative body 3421, so that the backside rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the like are visible from the front. It becomes possible.

  In the state where the back lifting / lowering decorative body unit 3450 is in the appearance position, the normal line passing through the contact point with the slit 3453b in the drive pin 3431b extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the lifting cam gear 3431. As a result, even if a force is applied to turn the lifting / lowering unit base 3453 further counterclockwise due to its own weight, the force line of the force hits the slit 3453b. The elevating cam gear 3431 does not rotate because it passes through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3431 via the drive pin 3431b in contact therewith. Accordingly, since the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 does not revolve, the elevating unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the rear elevating decorative body unit 3450 rotates counterclockwise so that the tip side further moves downward from the appearance position. , And the weight of the back lifting / lowering decorative body unit 3450 does not act on the back lifting drive motor 3429 via the lifting cam gear 3431.

  In addition, in the state where the back lifting elevating decorative body unit 3450 is in the appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3431 may be further revolved so that the drive pin 3431b is brought into contact with an end portion far from the shaft hole 3453a of the slit 3453b. Accordingly, when the lifting unit base 3453 further rotates counterclockwise due to its own weight, the lifting cam gear 3431 is moved by the force acting from the slit 3453b via the drive pin 3431b. Try to rotate around. At this time, the drive pin 3431b tries to revolve so as to move away from the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453. However, the drive pin 3431b contacts the end portion of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b cannot revolve, the rotation of the lifting / lowering unit base 3453 is locked, and the back lifting / lowering decorative body unit 3450 can be prevented from rotating in the counterclockwise direction. .

  In a state in which the back up / down decorative body unit 3450 is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position side, the back top rear rotating decorative body 3440 provided on the front end side can be viewed from the front. In the back up / down decoration unit 3450, when the drive gear 3455 is rotated by the back up / down rotation drive motor 3454, the back / upside back rotation decoration via the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotation gear 3458. The body 3440 can be rotated about an axis in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 176 (b)). Therefore, when the back upper back rotating decorative body 3440 is visible from the front and the drive gear 3455 is rotated by the back upper rear rotating driving motor 3454, the rotating back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440 can be viewed. .

  When the back lifting / lowering decorative body unit 3450 is returned from the appearance position to the retracted position, the motor pin 3431b of the lifting cam gear 3431 is lifted / lowered by rotating the motor gear 3430 in the direction opposite to the above by the back lifting driving motor 3429. The inner surface of the slit 3453b of the unit base 3453 is pressed downward, the elevating unit base 3453 rotates in the clockwise direction, and the front end side of the back elevating decorative body unit 3450 moves upward. And if the detection piece 3431c of the raising / lowering cam gear 3431 is detected by the back upper / lower raising / lowering detection sensor 3432, the back raising / lowering decorative body unit 3450 will be made into a retracted position by stopping rotation of the motor gear 3430 by the back upper / lower raising / lowering drive motor 3429. Can be restored.

  At this time, the spring 3433 urges the back up / down decorative body unit 3450 in the clockwise direction, assisting the rotation of the back up / down decorative body unit 3450 to the retracted position side, The load applied to the drive motor 3429 is reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 177, the back top rendering unit 3400 of this embodiment is provided with a back top front decorative board 3422 behind the back top front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back top front decorative body 3421. By appropriately emitting light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper front decorative board 3422, the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421 can be illuminated. In addition, since the back upper back decoration board 3452 is provided behind the back upper back decoration body 3440 and the back upper back decoration body 3451, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back upper back decoration board 3452 are appropriately illuminated. By doing so, the back upper back decorative body 3440 and the back upper back decorative body 3451 can be decorated with light emission.

  At this time, in the state in which the back lifting elevating decorative body unit 3450 is rotated from the retracted position to the appearance position side, the LED on the back back rear decoration board 3451 is caused to emit light, thereby the back top back rotating decoration that has been decorated with light emission. The player can show the body 3440 and the back upper decoration 3451 to the player.

[5-9h. Back left production unit]
Next, the back rear left effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to main FIGS. 178 to 184 and the like. FIG. 178 (a) is a perspective view of the back rear left rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 178 (b) is a perspective view of the back rear left rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 179 is an exploded perspective view of the rear rear left rendering unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. FIG. 180 is an exploded perspective view of the rear rear left rendering unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. FIG. 181 is an exploded perspective view of the rear back left decorative body unit of the back rear left rendering unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 182 is a rear perspective left decorative body unit of the back rear left performance unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. FIG. 183 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the rear back left rendering unit from the front. FIG. 184 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back back left decorative unit in the back back left effect unit.

  The back rear left rendering unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 is provided in front of the left side of the back rear rendering unit 3100 near the left end in the back box 3010. The back rear left effect unit 3500 has a translucent back back left rotating decorative body 3510 that can rotate around an axis in the front-rear direction and a back back left rotating decorative body 3510 that rotatably supports the lower back side. A rear left decorative unit 3520 and a rear rear left drive unit 3550 that is mounted in the back box 3010 by rotating the upper end side of the rear rear left decorative unit 3520 around an axis in the front-rear direction. .

  The back back left rotating decorative body 3510 of the back back left effect unit 3500 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom and has translucency. The back rear rotation decorative body 3510 has an axial shaft 3510a protruding in a columnar shape from the center of the rear surface to the rear (see FIG. 182).

  As shown in FIGS. 181 and 182, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 includes a back rear left decorative body 3521 in which the shaft shaft 3510 a of the back rear left rotational decorative body 3510 penetrates in the center, and a back rear left decorative body. The rear back left decorative board 3522 provided behind the 3521 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face is attached to the rear side of the back rear left decorative body 3521 from the back of the back rear left decorative board 3522. The front cover 3523 that rotatably supports the shaft shaft 3510a of the back left rotation decorative body 3510 and the rear cover 3523 are attached to the rear side, and the upper end side is rotatable to the back back left drive unit 3550. And a movable base 3524 to be attached.

  The back rear left decorative body unit 3520 includes a back back left rotation drive motor 3525 attached to the rear surface of the movable base 3524 so that the rotation shaft projects between the movable base 3524 and the front cover 3523, and the back rear. A spur gear-like drive gear 3526 attached to the rotation shaft of the left rotation drive motor 3525, and a flat gear meshed with the drive gear 3526 and attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3510a of the back left rotation decoration body 3510. A gear-shaped rotating gear 3527.

  The back back left decorative body 3521 of the back back left decorative body unit 3520 has translucency, and two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back back left rotated decorative body 3510 are stacked on the front and back. The petals on the side are formed in a shape that is rotated so as to be positioned between the petals on the front side. The plurality of LEDs on the back rear left decorative substrate 3522 are full-color LEDs.

  The front cover 3523 is formed in a shape in which a part in the front view has the same shape as the outer shape of the back left decorative body 3521 and a part extending in a quadrilateral upward from the upper left of the part. . The front cover 3523 has a plurality of cherry blossom decorations formed on the front surface of a part extending upward in a square shape. The front cover 3523 is formed in a shallow container shape opened rearward.

  The movable base 3524 is formed to close the opened rear side of the front cover 3523, and the upper end side extends upward from the upper end of the front cover 3523. The movable base 3524 has a shaft hole 3524a penetrating in the front-rear direction on the upper end side, and an operation pin 3524b projecting in a cylindrical shape forward at a position away from the shaft hole 3524a. The shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 is inserted so that the support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 of the back rear left drive unit 3550 can be relatively rotated. Further, the operating pin 3524b protrudes forward at a position below and to the right of the shaft hole 3524a.

  When the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 rotates the drive gear 3526 by the back rear left rotational drive motor 3525, the back rear left rotational decorative body 3510 is moved back and forth via the rotational gear 3527 engaged with the drive gear 3526. It can be rotated around the direction axis.

  As shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, the back rear left drive unit 3550 has a support plate 3551 a that rotatably supports the back back left decorative body unit 3520 and a flat reinforcing plate 3551 that extends vertically. The unit base 3552 which is attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3551 and which is attached to the back box 3010 and extends vertically, the unit cover 3553 which is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3552, and the upper portion of the front surface of the unit cover 3553 The back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 attached so that the shaft projects between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553, and the spur gear-like motor gear attached to the rotating shaft of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 3555.

  The back left drive unit 3550 meshes with the motor gear 3555 and is rotatably attached to the unit cover 3553, and a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3557a meshed with the transmission gear 3556. A lifting cam gear 3557 having a drive pin 3557b protruding in a columnar shape from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the gear portion 3557a and a detection piece 3557c protruding forward from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the front surface of the gear portion 3557a; The drive pin 3557b of the 3557 is slidably inserted into the left and right first slits 3558a, and the operation pins 3524b of the movable base 3524 in the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 extending to the left and right below the first slit 3558a. Has a second slit 3558b to be slidably inserted. , A, a link member 3558 are slidably mounted in the vertical direction between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553.

  Further, the back rear left drive unit 3550 includes a spring 3559 for biasing the link member 3558 upward, a flat partition plate 3560 provided between the link member 3558 and the elevating cam gear 3557, and a unit cover. A rear back left relay board 3561 attached to the front face of 3553, a back rear left lift detection sensor 3562 attached to the rear face of the back rear left relay board 3561 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3557c of the lift cam gear 3557; It has.

  The reinforcing plate 3551 of the back left drive unit 3550 is a metal plate extending vertically, and a support shaft 3551a protrudes forward in the upper part. The support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is inserted into the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 in the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 so as to be relatively rotatable.

  The unit base 3552 extends longer in the vertical direction than the reinforcing plate 3551 so that the support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is positioned near the center in the vertical direction. The unit cover 3553 has a length substantially the same as that of the unit base 3552 and extends up and down, and is formed in a shallow container shape opened to the rear.

  The lift cam gear 3557 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3558 a of the link member 3558 through the drive pin 3557 b passing through the slit 3560 a of the partition plate 3560. The detection piece 3557c is detected by a rear back left raising / lowering detection sensor 3562 that protrudes rearward through the unit cover 3553. The link member 3558 extends vertically, and a first slit 3558a is provided near the upper end, and a second slit 3558b is provided at the lower end. The spring 3559 has a lower end attached to the link member 3558 and an upper end attached to the partition plate 3560.

  The partition plate 3560 has a slit 3560a extending in a semicircular arc shape through which the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 is inserted. The back back left relay board 3561 relays the connection between the back back left decorative board 3522, the back back left rotation drive motor 3525, the back back left lift drive motor 3554, the back back left lift detection sensor 3562, and the effect drive board 1720. Is to do.

  Next, the operation of the back rear left rendering unit 3500 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 183 and 184 (a), the back rear left rendering unit 3500 has a back back left decorative body 3510 provided on the lower end side (front end side) in a normal state. The unit 3520 is in the retracted position where it hangs down. In this normal state, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 (the back back left rotating decorative body 3510) is located behind the back front left rendering unit 3700 and is not visible from the front (player side). It has become.

  Further, in the normal state assembled in the game board 5, most of the back rear left rendering unit 3500 is located behind the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left rendering unit 3700, and the back rear left lifting drive motor. Only a part of 3554 faces forward (see FIG. 131 and the like). Note that the part facing the front of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 is in a state where the front is covered by the part outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 when assembled in the pachinko machine 1, and the player It becomes invisible from the side (see FIG. 135).

  In this normal state, the detection piece 3557c of the elevating cam gear 3557 is detected by the rear left / right elevating detection sensor 3562. In a normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 is located immediately below the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3557 and is located near the left end in the first slit 3558a of the link member 3558. Further, in a normal state, the link member 3558 is located at the lower moving end, and the operation pin 3524b located to the right of the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 in the back rear left decorative body unit 3520, The link member 3558 is positioned near the left end in the second slit 3558b.

  In this normal state, the link member 3558 is biased upward by the spring 3559, but the normal passing through the contact point in contact with the first slit 3558a in the drive pin 3557b of the lift cam gear 3557 is Since it passes through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3557 (the revolution center of the drive pin 3557b), even if an upward force acts on the drive pin 3557b via the first slit 3558a by the biasing force of the spring 3559, the drive pin 3557b Does not revolve in any direction, and the link member 3558 does not move upward. Accordingly, since the link member 3558 does not move upward, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 (back rear left rotated decorative body 3510) is centered on the shaft hole 3524a (support shaft 3551a) of the movable base 3524 from the retracted position. It does not rotate, and the urging force of the spring 3559 does not act on the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 via the link member 3558, the elevating cam gear 3557, and the like.

  In a normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the lifting cam gear 3557 may be brought into contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a. Accordingly, when the link member 3558 is moved upward by the urging force of the spring 3559, the lifting cam gear 3557 attempts to rotate in the clockwise direction by the force acting from the first slit 3558a via the drive pin 3557b. At this time, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 attempts to revolve in the direction of moving to the left, but the drive pin 3557b is in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a, so that the drive pin 3557b Cannot be revolved, and the upward movement of the link member 3558 is locked via the elevating cam gear 3557, and the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 can be prevented from rotating from the retracted position.

  In this normal state, when the motor gear 3555 is rotated counterclockwise by the rear left and right lifting drive motor 3554, the lifting cam gear 3557 is rotated counterclockwise via the transmission gear 3556 and the gear portion 3557a. Thus, the drive pin 3557b of the lifting cam gear 3557 is revolved in the counterclockwise direction. When the drive pin 3557b revolves in the counterclockwise direction, the inside of the first slit 3558a is slid rightward while pressing the inner surface of the first slit 3558a upward, and the link member 3558 moves upward. It will be.

  When the link member 3558 is moved upward, the operating pin 3524b of the movable base 3524 of the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 protruding below and to the right of the support shaft 3551a is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3558b of the link member 3558. The movable base 3524 rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 3551a while the operating pin 3524b slides rightward in the second slit 3558b, and the back left decorative unit 3520 is It will rotate counterclockwise from the retracted position (see FIGS. 184 (a) and (b)). At this time, the upward force of the link member 3558 is assisted by the urging force of the spring 3559, and the load applied to the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 is reduced.

  Thus, the back back left decorative body unit 3520 rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 3551a, so that the back back left rotational decoration body 3510 provided on the lower end side moves to the right. However, the back left rotation decorative body 3510 moves to the right from the back front left production unit 3700 and is visible from the front (player side).

  In the rear back left rendering unit 3500 of the present embodiment, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 rotates when the elevating cam gear 3557 rotates about 90 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state (retracted position state). The position is the first appearance position (see FIG. 184 (b)). In the state of the first appearance position, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated about 44 degrees counterclockwise from the state of the retracted position.

  When the elevating cam gear 3557 further rotates counterclockwise from the first appearance position, the drive pin 3557b slides leftward in the first slit 3558a. When the drive pin 3557b moves to a position just above the revolution center (revolves 180 degrees from the normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the back rear left raising / lowering drive motor 3554 stops, and at the same time, the revolution of the drive pin 3557b stops. .

  As a result, the upward movement of the link member 3558 is stopped, the counterclockwise left decorative body unit 3520 is stopped from rotating counterclockwise, and the second appearance position is reached (FIG. 184 (c)). )). In the state of the second appearance position, the back left decorative unit 3520 is rotated about 74 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

  In the state where the back left decorative unit 3520 is in the second appearance position, the drive pin 3557b is located immediately above the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3557. In this state, due to the weight of the back rear left decorative body unit 3520, a force is exerted to rotate the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 clockwise about the support shaft 3551a. The link member 3558 is going to move downward via the operation pin 3524b and the second slit 3558b of the 3524, but the drive pin 3557b inserted in the first slit 3558a is located immediately above the center of revolution. Therefore, the drive pin 3557b does not revolve in any direction.

  Accordingly, since the drive pin 3557b does not revolve, the elevating cam gear 3557 does not rotate, so the link member 3558 does not move downward, and the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 rotates from the second appearance position. In addition, the force due to the weight of the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 does not act on the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 via the link member 3558, the lifting cam gear 3557, and the like.

  When the back left decorative unit 3520 is in the second appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3557 is further rotated counterclockwise so that the drive pin 3557b contacts the left end of the first slit 3558a. Also good. As a result, when the back left decorative unit 3520 tries to rotate in the clockwise direction around the support shaft 3551a by its own weight, the link member 3558 attempts to move downward via the operating pin 3524b. Due to the force acting from one slit 3558a through the drive pin 3557b, the elevating cam gear 3557 attempts to rotate counterclockwise. At this time, the drive pin 3557b tries to revolve so as to move to the left, but since the drive pin 3557b is in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a, the drive pin 3557b can revolve. Accordingly, the downward movement of the link member 3558 is blocked, and the back left decorative body unit 3520 can be locked so as not to rotate in the second appearance position.

  In a state where the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the back rear left rotational decoration body 3510 provided on the lower end side is front (player side). It becomes visible from.

  In this back back left decorative body unit 3520, the back back left rotation decoration body 3510 is rotated via the rotation gear 3527 engaged with the drive gear 3526 by rotating the drive gear 3526 by the back back left rotation drive motor 3525. It can be rotated around a longitudinal axis (see FIG. 183). Accordingly, when the back rear left rotation decoration body 3510 is visible from the front (player side) and the drive gear 3526 is rotated by the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the rotating back rear rotation decoration body 3510 is rotated. It can be made visible to the player.

  When the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is returned from the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the normal retracted position, the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 causes the motor gear 3555 to be reversed. , The link member 3558 can be moved downward by the revolution of the drive pin 3557b of the lifting cam gear 3557. As the link member 3558 is moved downward, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is moved. It will rotate in the direction of the retracted position (clockwise direction). When the detection piece 3557c of the lift cam gear 3557 is detected by the back rear left lift detection sensor 3562, the back back left decorative body unit 3520 is retracted by stopping the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the back back left lift drive motor 3554. The position can be restored.

  As shown in FIG. 183, the back back left decorative unit 3500 of the present embodiment is provided with a back back left decorative board 3522 behind the back back left rotated decorative body 3510 and the back back left decorative body 3521. By appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back back left decorative board 3522, the back back left rotating decorative body 3510 and the back back left decorative body 3521 can be light-decorated. At this time, the LED on the back back left decorative board 3522 emits light in a state where the back back left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position. The back back left decorative body 3510 and the back back left decorative body 3521 can be shown to the player.

[5-9i. Right behind production unit]
Next, the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to main FIGS. 185 to 191 and the like. FIG. 185 (a) is a perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 185 (b) is a perspective view of the back back right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 186 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear right rendering unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. FIG. 187 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear right rendering unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. FIG. 188 is an exploded perspective view of the rear back right decoration body unit of the back rear right rendering unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 189 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear right decoration body unit of the back back right performance unit from the rear. FIG. FIG. 190 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the back rear right effect unit from the front. FIG. 191 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back back right decorative body unit in the back back right effect unit.

  The back rear right production unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 is provided in front of the right side of the back rear production unit 3100 near the right end in the back box 3010. The back rear right effect unit 3600 has a translucent back back right rotating decorative body 3610 that can rotate around an axis in the front-rear direction and a back back right rotating decorative body 3610 that rotatably supports the lower back side. A rear right decorative body unit 3620 and a back rear right drive unit 3650 which is mounted in the back box 3010 by rotating the upper end side of the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 around an axis in the front-rear direction. .

  The back right rotation decorative body 3610 of the back back right effect unit 3600 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom and has translucency. The back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 has a shaft shaft 3610a that protrudes in a columnar shape from the center of the rear surface to the rear (see FIG. 188).

  As shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, the back back right decorative body unit 3620 includes a back back right decorative body 3621 in which the shaft shaft 3610a of the back back right rotating decorative body 3610 penetrates in the center, and a back back right decorative body. The rear back right decoration board 3622 is provided behind the rear part 3621 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face. The rear rear right decoration board 3622 is attached to the rear side of the back rear right decoration body 3621 from the rear side. The front cover 3623 that rotatably supports the shaft shaft 3610a of the back right rotation decorative body 3610 and the rear cover 3623 are attached to the rear side, and the upper end side is rotatable to the back back right drive unit 3650. And a movable base 3624 to be attached.

  Also, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 includes a back back right rotation drive motor 3625 attached to the rear surface of the movable base 3624 so that the rotation shaft projects between the movable base 3624 and the front cover 3623, and the back rear. A spur gear-like drive gear 3626 attached to the rotation shaft of the right rotation drive motor 3625, and a flat gear meshed with the drive gear 3626 and attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3610a of the back right rotation decorative body 3610. A gear-shaped rotating gear 3627.

  The back back right decorative body 3621 of the back back right decorative body unit 3620 has translucency, and two cherry blossoms having the same size as the back back right rotating decorative body 3610 are stacked on the front and back. The petals on the side are formed in a shape that is rotated so as to be positioned between the petals on the front side. The plurality of LEDs on the back rear right decorative board 3622 are full-color LEDs.

  The front cover 3623 is formed in a shape in which a part in the front view has the same shape as the outer shape of the back rear right decorative body 3621 and a part extending in a square from the upper right to the upper part of the part. . The front cover 3623 has a plurality of cherry blossom decorations formed on the front surface of a part extending upward in a square shape. The front cover 3623 is formed in a shallow container shape opened rearward.

  The movable base 3624 is formed so as to close the open rear side of the front cover 3623, and the upper end side extends upward from the upper end of the front cover 3623. The movable base 3624 has a shaft hole 3624a penetrating in the front-rear direction on the upper end side, and an operating pin 3624b projecting in a cylindrical shape forward at a position away from the shaft hole 3624a. In the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624, the support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 of the back rear right drive unit 3650 is inserted so as to be relatively rotatable. The operation pin 3624b protrudes forward at a position below and to the left of the shaft hole 3624a.

  When the back rear right decoration body unit 3620 rotates the drive gear 3626 by the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the back rear right rotation decoration body 3610 is moved back and forth via the rotation gear 3627 engaged with the drive gear 3626. It can be rotated around the direction axis.

  As shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, the back rear right drive unit 3650 has a flat plate-like reinforcing plate 3651 that has a support shaft 3651 a that rotatably supports the back back right decorative body unit 3620 and extends vertically. A vertically extending unit base 3652 attached to the front face of the reinforcing plate 3651 and attached in the back box 3010; a vertically extending unit cover 3653 having an upper part attached to the front face of the unit base 3652; and a unit cover The rear rear right elevating drive motor 3654 is mounted on the upper surface of the 3653 so that the rotary shaft protrudes between the unit base 3652 and the unit cover 3653, and the rear rear right elevating drive motor 3654 is attached to the rotary shaft. And a spur gear-shaped motor gear 3655.

  The back right drive unit 3650 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3657a meshing with the motor gear 3655, a drive pin 3657b projecting in a columnar shape from the outer periphery of the gear portion 3657a, and a front surface of the gear portion 3657a. A lifting cam gear 3657 having a detection piece 3657c projecting forward from the vicinity of the outer periphery, a first slit 3658a extending left and right into which a drive pin 3657b of the lifting cam gear 3657 is slidably inserted, and a first slit It has a second slit 3658b that extends to the left and right below 3658a and into which the operating pin 3624b of the movable base 3624 in the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is slidably inserted, and has a unit base 3652 and a unit cover 3653. Link part that is slidable vertically It is provided with a 3658, a.

  Further, the rear right drive unit 3650 includes a spring 3659 for biasing the link member 3658 upward, a flat partition plate 3660 provided between the link member 3658 and the lift cam gear 3657, and a unit cover. A back rear right relay board 3661 attached to the front surface of 3653, a back rear right up / down detection sensor 3662 attached to the rear face of the back rear right relay board 3661 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3657c of the lift cam gear 3657; A lower base 3663 is provided below the unit base 3652 and attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3651, and the lower portion of the unit cover 3653 is attached to the front surface.

  The reinforcing plate 3651 of the back right drive unit 3650 is a metal plate extending vertically, and a support shaft 3651a projects forward in the upper part. The support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is inserted into the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 in the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 so as to be relatively rotatable.

  The unit base 3652 extends upward from the reinforcing plate 3651 so that the support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is positioned near the lower end. The unit cover 3653 extends vertically from the upper end of the unit base 3652 to the lower end of the reinforcing plate 3651 (lower base 3663), and is formed in a shallow container shape opened to the rear.

  The lift cam gear 3657 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3658 a of the link member 3658 through the drive pin 3657 b passing through the slit 3660 a of the partition plate 3660. The detection piece 3657c is detected by a rear back right elevation detection sensor 3662 that penetrates the unit cover 3653 and protrudes rearward. The link member 3658 extends vertically, and a first slit 3658a is provided near the upper end, and a second slit 3658b is provided at the lower end. The spring 3659 has a lower end attached to the link member 3658 and an upper end attached to the partition plate 3660.

  The partition plate 3660 has a slit 3660a extending in a semicircular arc shape through which the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is inserted. The back rear right relay board 3661 relays the connection of the back back right decorative board 3622, the back back right rotation drive motor 3625, the back back right up / down drive motor 3654, the back back right up / down detection sensor 3662, and the effect drive board 1720. Is to do.

  Next, the operation of the back rear right effect unit 3600 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 190 and 191 (a), the back back right effect unit 3600 is provided with a back back right decorative body 3610 on the lower end side (front end side) in a normal state. The unit 3620 is in the retracted position where it hangs down. In this normal state, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 (the back back right rotating decorative body 3610) is located behind the back front right rendering unit 3800 and is not visible from the front (player side). It has become.

  Further, in the normal state assembled to the game board 5, the back rear right effect unit 3600 is located behind the back front right decorative body 3040 and the back front right effect unit 3800, and the whole is front (player side). Is not visible.

  In this normal state, the detection piece 3657c of the raising / lowering cam gear 3657 is detected by the rear right / left raising / lowering detection sensor 3662. In a normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is located immediately below the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3657 and is located near the right end in the first slit 3658a of the link member 3658. In a normal state, the link member 3658 is positioned at the lower moving end, and the operating pin 3624b positioned to the left of the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 in the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is The link member 3658 is positioned near the right end in the second slit 3658b.

  In this normal state, the link member 3658 is biased upward by the spring 3659, but the normal passing through the contact point in contact with the first slit 3658a in the drive pin 3657b of the lift cam gear 3657 is Since it passes through the rotation center of the lift cam gear 3657 (the revolution center of the drive pin 3657b), even if an upward force acts on the drive pin 3657b via the first slit 3658a by the biasing force of the spring 3659, the drive pin 3657b Does not revolve in any direction, and the link member 3658 does not move upward. Therefore, since the link member 3658 does not move upward, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 (back rear right rotating decorative body 3610) is centered on the shaft hole 3624a (support shaft 3651a) of the movable base 3624 from the retracted position. It does not rotate, and the urging force of the spring 3659 does not act on the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 via the link member 3658, the elevating cam gear 3657, and the like.

  In a normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the lifting cam gear 3657 may be brought into contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a. Accordingly, when the link member 3658 attempts to move upward by the biasing force of the spring 3659, the lifting cam gear 3657 attempts to rotate counterclockwise due to the force acting from the first slit 3658a via the drive pin 3657b. . At this time, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 attempts to revolve in the direction of moving to the right, but the drive pin 3657b is in contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a, so that the drive pin 3657b Cannot be revolved, and the upward movement of the link member 3658 is locked via the elevating cam gear 3657, and the rotation of the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 from the retracted position can be prevented.

  In this normal state, when the motor gear 3655 is rotated counterclockwise by the back right-side lift drive motor 3654, the lift cam gear 3657 is rotated clockwise via the gear portion 3657a, and the lift cam gear 3657 is rotated. The drive pin 3657b revolves in the clockwise direction. When this drive pin 3657b revolves in the clockwise direction, the inside of the first slit 3658a slides to the left while pressing the inner surface of the first slit 3658a upward, and the link member 3658 moves upward. It becomes.

  When the link member 3658 moves upward, the operating pin 3624b of the movable base 3624 of the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 protruding below and to the left of the support shaft 3651a is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3658b of the link member 3658. The movable base 3624 rotates in the clockwise direction around the support shaft 3651a while the operating pin 3624b slides leftward in the second slit 3658b, and the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is retracted. It will rotate clockwise from the position (see FIGS. 191 (a) and (b)). At this time, the upward force of the link member 3658 is assisted by the urging force of the spring 3659, and the load applied to the rear rear right elevating drive motor 3654 is reduced.

  Thus, the back back right decorative body unit 3620 rotates in the clockwise direction around the support shaft 3651a, so that the back back right rotational decoration body 3610 provided on the lower end side moves to the left. It will move upward, and the back right rotation decorative body 3610 will move to the left of the back front right effect unit 3800 and will be visible from the front (player side).

  In the back rear right rendering unit 3600 of this embodiment, the back and right right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated when the elevating cam gear 3657 is rotated about 90 degrees clockwise from the normal state (retracted position). Is the first appearance position (see FIG. 191 (b)). In the state of the first appearance position, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated about 44 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

  When the elevating cam gear 3657 further rotates in the clockwise direction from the state of the first appearance position, the drive pin 3657b slides rightward in the first slit 3658a. When the drive pin 3657b moves to a position just above the center of revolution (180 degrees of revolution from the normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the back right up / down drive motor 3654 stops and at the same time, the revolution of the drive pin 3657b stops. .

  As a result, the upward movement of the link member 3658 is stopped, the rotation of the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 in the clockwise direction is stopped, and the second appearance position is reached (FIG. 191 (c)). See). In the state of the second appearance position, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated about 74 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

  In a state where the back right decorative body unit 3620 is in the second appearance position, the drive pin 3657b is located immediately above the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3657. In this state, due to the weight of the back rear right decorative body unit 3620, a force is exerted by the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 to rotate counterclockwise about the support shaft 3651a. The link member 3658 is going to move downward through the operation pin 3624b and the second slit 3658b of the base 3624, but the drive pin 3657b inserted in the first slit 3658a is located immediately above the center of revolution. Therefore, the drive pin 3657b does not revolve in any direction.

  Accordingly, since the drive pin 3657b does not revolve, the elevating cam gear 3657 does not rotate, so the link member 3658 does not move downward, and the back rear right decoration body unit 3620 rotates from the second appearance position. In addition, the force due to the weight of the back right decorative body unit 3620 does not act on the back back right elevating drive motor 3654 via the link member 3658, the elevating cam gear 3657, and the like.

  In the state where the back right decorative body unit 3620 is in the second appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3657 is further rotated in the clockwise direction so that the drive pin 3657b contacts the right end of the first slit 3658a. good. Accordingly, when the back right decorative body unit 3620 tries to rotate counterclockwise around the support shaft 3651a by its own weight, the link member 3658 attempts to move downward via the operating pin 3624b. The elevating cam gear 3657 attempts to rotate in the clockwise direction by the force acting from the first slit 3658a via the drive pin 3657b. At this time, the drive pin 3657b tries to revolve so as to move to the right. However, since the drive pin 3657b is in contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a, the drive pin 3657b can revolve. Therefore, the downward movement of the link member 3658 is prevented, and the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 can be locked so as not to rotate in the state of the second appearance position.

  In the state where the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the back rear right rotational decoration body 3610 provided on the lower end side is forward (player side). It becomes visible from.

  In this back rear right decorative body unit 3620, by rotating the drive gear 3626 by the back rear right rotational drive motor 3625, the back rear right rotational decorative body 3610 is connected via the rotation gear 3627 engaged with the drive gear 3626. It can be rotated around a longitudinal axis (see FIG. 190). Accordingly, when the back back right rotation decoration body 3610 is visible from the front (player side) and the drive gear 3626 is rotated by the back back right rotation drive motor 3625, the rotating back back right rotation decoration body 3610 is displayed. It can be made visible to the player.

  When the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is returned from the state of the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the retracted position which is the normal state, the motor gear 3655 is reversed by the back rear right lifting drive motor 3654. , The link member 3658 can be moved downward by the revolution of the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657. As the link member 3658 moves downward, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 It will rotate in the direction of the retracted position (counterclockwise direction). When the detection piece 3657c of the lift cam gear 3657 is detected by the back rear right lift detection sensor 3662, the back rear right decoration body unit 3620 is retracted by stopping the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the back rear right lift drive motor 3654. The position can be restored.

  Since the back back right effect unit 3600 of the present embodiment is provided with a back back right decoration board 3622 behind the back back right rotation decoration body 3610 and the back back right decoration body 3621 as shown in FIG. 190, By appropriately emitting light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back back right decorative board 3622, the back back right rotating decorative body 3610 and the back back right decorative body 3621 can be illuminated. At this time, the LED on the back back right decorative board 3622 is caused to emit light by rotating the back back right decorative body unit 3620 from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position. The back back right decorative body 3610 and the back back right decorative body 3621 can be shown to the player.

[5-9j. Left front production unit]
Next, the back front left effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 192 to 195 and the like. FIG. 192 (a) is a perspective view of the back front left production unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 192 (b) is a perspective view of the back front left production unit in the back unit as seen from behind. FIG. 193 is an exploded perspective view of one front front left decorative unit in the front front left rendering unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 194 is one front front left decorative body unit in the back front left rendering unit. And it is the disassembled perspective view seen from back. FIG. 195 (a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the closed state in the back front left effect unit, and (b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the open state in the back front left effect unit.

  The back front left effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back back left effect unit 3500 so that the vicinity of the left end is located behind the back front left decorative body 3030 in the back box 3010. The back front left rendering unit 3700 has three back front left decorations, a first back front left decorative body unit 3710A, a second back front left decorative body unit 3710B, and a third back front left decorative body unit 3710C in order from the top. The body unit 3710 is used.

  In the back front left rendering unit 3700, as shown in FIG. 195, the first back front left decorative body unit 3710A is compared with the second back front left decorative body unit 3710B and the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C. It is inclined diagonally so that the upper end side moves to the right. The first back front left decorative body unit 3710A is slightly different in shape of the rear cover 3715 from the second back front left decorative body unit 3710B and the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C.

  As shown in FIGS. 193 and 194, the back front left decorative body unit 3710 of the back front left rendering unit 3700 includes a frame-shaped front cover 3711 penetrating in the front-rear direction and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3711. The shutter support member 3712 and the front surface of the shutter support member 3712 are arranged in the vertical direction, and are supported so as to be rotatable around a horizontal axis so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 can be opened and closed. A shutter unit 3730.

  Further, the front left decorative body unit 3710 closes the inside of the frame of the shutter support member 3712 from the rear, and includes a flat plate-shaped front front left decorative body 3713 and a back front left decorative body 3713 having translucency. A back front left decorative board 3714 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front and a front back 3711 attached to the front cover 3711 so as to cover the back front left decorative board 3714 from the rear. And a rear cover 3715 attached to the front surface of the 3500.

  Further, the front left decorative unit 3710 includes a support plate 3716 made of a metal plate attached to the left side of the shutter support member 3712, a front left drive solenoid 3717 attached to the support plate 3716, and a front front. A transmission member 3718 attached to the tip of the plunger of the left drive solenoid 3717 and a support plate 3716 are attached to the support plate 3716 so as to be rotatable about a left-right axis. A link member 3719 that rotates, and an open / close slider 3720 that slides up and down by the rotation of the link member 3719 to open and close the shutter unit 3730 are provided.

  The front cover 3711 of the front left decorative unit 3710 has an outer shape that is a shape in which the “convex” character is tilted to the right and the corners are rounded (a shape in which “pine” is designed). The shutter support member 3712 is provided with a plurality of bearing portions 3712a on the front surface for rotatably supporting the shaft portion 3733 of each shutter member 3731 in the shutter unit 3730. The shutter support member 3712 has a boss portion 3712b that protrudes forward in a cylindrical shape from the vicinity of the left end of the front surface. The boss portion 3712b is slidably inserted into the slit 3720b of the open / close slider 3720, and a support plate 3716 is attached to the tip.

  The shutter unit 3730 includes a plurality (eight in this case) of shutter members 3731. The shutter member 3731 includes a flat shutter 3732 extending left and right, a shaft portion 3733 extending in a column shape from both left and right ends of the shutter 3732, and a left side after protruding from the tip of the left shaft portion 3733 in the direction perpendicular to the axis. And a crankshaft 3734 extending in a columnar direction.

  The shutter 3732 is formed to have a length and shape corresponding to the height at which the shutter member 3731 is disposed with respect to the shape in the frame of the front cover 3711. The shaft portion 3733 protrudes from the vicinity of the upper end of the shutter 3732 with the surface of the shutter 3732 facing forward. The crank shaft 3734 is located behind the shaft portion 3733.

  The shutter member 3731 can be rotated about a shaft in the left-right direction around the shaft portion 3733 because the shaft portion 3733 is rotatably supported by the bearing portion 3712 a of the shutter support member 3712. The crankshaft 3734 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3720 a of the opening / closing slider 3720.

  The back left decorative body 3713 is provided with a pattern such as a character, an item, a logo, or the like according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1, although illustration is omitted. The front left decorative body 3713 can diffuse light from the LEDs of the front left decorative substrate 3714. The plurality of LEDs on the front left decorative substrate 3714 are full-color LEDs.

  The support plate 3716 extends in the vertical direction with the plate surface facing in the left-right direction, and is formed in a shape in which the front end side is bent rightward. A portion of the support plate 3716 bent to the right on the front end side is attached to the front surface of the boss portion 3712b of the shutter support member 3712, and the remaining portion protrudes rearward through the left side of the shutter support member 3712. Yes. In addition, the support plate 3716 has a support pin 3716a that protrudes in a columnar shape from the vicinity of the lower end to the right. This support pin 3716a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3719.

  The front left drive solenoid 3717 is attached to the support plate 3716 in such a direction that the plunger advances and retreats downward. The front left drive solenoid 3717 is biased by a spring in a direction in which the plunger protrudes downward. The link member 3719 can be rotated about the left and right axis about the support pin 3716a by inserting the support pin 3716a of the support plate 3716. The link member 3719 is provided with a first connecting portion 3719a connected to the transmission member 3718 on the rear side with a portion where the support pin 3716a is inserted therebetween, and a second connected to the opening / closing slider 3720. A connection portion 3719b is provided on the front side.

  The open / close slider 3720 extends vertically with a length substantially the same as the height of the shutter unit 3730 including a plurality of shutter members 3731, and a transmission groove into which each crankshaft 3734 of the shutter unit 3730 is slidably inserted in the front-rear direction. 3720a and a slit 3720b into which the boss portion 3712b of the shutter support member 3712 is slidably inserted in the vertical direction.

  Next, the operation of the back front left rendering unit 3700 will be described. In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 195 (a), the back front left rendering unit 3700 has the shutter 3732 of the shutter member 3731 of the shutter unit 3730 with its plate surface facing forward. The shutter 3732 is in a closed state in which the frame of the front cover 3711 is closed. In this normal state, the front left decorative body 3713 provided behind the shutter unit 3730 is not visible from the front (player side). Although illustration is omitted, when the shutter unit 3730 is in a closed state, a pattern different from the pattern applied to the rear back left decorative body 3713 is applied to the front surface of the shutter unit 3730 (the plurality of shutters 3732). Has been.

  In a normal state, the back front left drive solenoid 3717 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger protrudes downward by the biasing force of the spring. In a normal state, the open / close slider 3720 is positioned at the upper moving end, and the crankshaft 3734 of each shutter member 3731 is positioned above the shaft portion 3733.

  In this normal state, when the back left drive solenoid 3717 is energized (ON), the plunger moves upward against the biasing force of the spring, and at the same time, the transmission member 3718 attached to the tip of the plunger moves upward. Move to. When the transmission member 3718 moves upward, the first connection portion 3719a of the link member 3719 connected to the transmission member 3718 moves upward, and the link member 3719 rotates around the support pin 3716a. As a result, the second connection portion 3719b opposite to the first connection portion 3719a moves downward. Then, by the downward movement of the second connection portion 3719b of the link member 3719, the opening / closing slider 3720 connected to the second connection portion 3719b moves downward.

  When the opening / closing slider 3720 moves downward, the crankshaft 3734 of the shutter member 3731 inserted in the transmission groove 3720a is pressed downward, and the shutter is moved so that the crankshaft 3734 is positioned below the shaft portion 3733. The member 3731 rotates about the shaft portion 3733. Accordingly, the plate surface of the shutter 3732 is in a state of being directed upward and downward, so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3732, and the front side provided behind the shutter unit 3730. The left decorative body 3713 becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 195 (b)).

  Thereafter, the back left drive solenoid 3717 is de-energized (OFF), so that the plunger that has been moved upward is moved downward by the biasing force of the spring, and the movement opposite to the above is performed. The shutter unit 3730 in the open state can be returned to the closed state, which is a normal state.

  As described above, according to the back front left rendering unit 3700 of the present embodiment, the back front left decorative body 3713 is changed from the decoration (pattern) of the shutter unit 3730 by opening and closing the shutter unit 3730 by the back front left drive solenoid 3717. It is possible to switch to the decoration (pattern) of the player, and to entertain the player with a change in the decoration.

  Further, since the back front left decorative board 3714 is provided behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front left decorative body 3713, when the shutter unit 3730 is in the closed state, a plurality of LEDs on the back front left decorative board 3714 are caused to emit light. Thus, the light-decorated shutter unit 3730 can be shown to the player, and when the shutter unit 3730 is in the open state, a plurality of LEDs on the back-front left decorative substrate 3714 are caused to emit light, so that the light-decorated back-front left The decorative body 3713 can be shown to the player.

  Further, the back front left rendering unit 3700 has three back front left decorative body units: a first back front left decorative body unit 3710A, a second back front left decorative body unit 3710B, and a third back front left decorative body unit 3710C. 3710 can independently open and close the shutter unit 3730 and can be decorated with light emission, so that various effects can be provided to the player by appropriately combining the effects of the three front left decorative body units 3710. Can show.

[5-9k. Right front production unit]
Next, the back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 196 to 199 and the like. FIG. 196 (a) is a perspective view of the front right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 196 (b) is a perspective view of the back right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 197 is an exploded perspective view of one front front right decorative body unit in the back front right rendering unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 198 is one exploded front right decorative body unit in the back front right rendering unit. And it is the disassembled perspective view seen from back. FIG. 199 (a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the closed state in the front right effect unit, and FIG. 199 (b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the open state in the front right effect unit.

  The back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back back right effect unit 3600 so that the upper part near the right end is located behind the back front right decorative body 3040 in the back box 3010. . The back front right rendering unit 3800 has three back front right decorations of a first back front right decorative body unit 3810A, a second back front right decorative body unit 3810B, and a third back front right decorative body unit 3810C in order from the top. The body unit 3810 is used.

  In the back front right rendering unit 3800, as shown in FIG. 199, the first back front right decorative body unit 3810A is compared with the second back front right decorative body unit 3810B and the third back front right decorative body unit 3810C. It is inclined obliquely so that the upper end side moves to the left. Further, the first back front right decorative body unit 3810A is slightly different in shape of the rear cover 3815 from those of the second back front right decorative body unit 3810B and the third back front right decorative body unit 3810C.

  As shown in FIGS. 197 and 198, the front right decorative body unit 3810 of the back front right production unit 3800 includes a frame-shaped front cover 3811 penetrating front and rear, and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3811. The shutter support member 3812 and the front surface of the shutter support member 3812 are arranged in the vertical direction, and are supported so as to be rotatable around a horizontal axis so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 can be opened and closed. A shutter unit 3830.

  Further, the front right decorative body unit 3810 closes the inside of the frame of the shutter support member 3812 from the rear, and includes a flat plate-shaped front front right decorative body 3813 having translucency and a back front right decorative body 3813. A back front right decorative board 3814 provided with a plurality of LEDs on the front and a front back 3811 attached to the front cover 3811 so as to cover the back front right decorative board 3814 from the rear. And a rear cover 3815 attached to the front surface of 3600.

  Further, the front right decorative body unit 3810 includes a support plate 3816 made of a metal plate attached to the right side of the shutter support member 3812, a front right drive solenoid 3817 attached to the support plate 3816, and a front front. A transmission member 3818 attached to the distal end of the plunger in the right drive solenoid 3817 and a support plate 3816 are attached to the support plate 3816 so as to be rotatable about a left and right axis. A link member 3819 that rotates, and an open / close slider 3820 that slides up and down by the rotation of the link member 3819 to open and close the shutter unit 3830 are provided.

  The front cover 3811 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810 has an outer shape that has a “convex” character turned to the left and rounded corners (a shape in which “pine” is designed). The shutter support member 3812 is provided with a plurality of bearing portions 3812a on the front surface for rotatably supporting the shaft portion 3833 of each shutter member 3831 in the shutter unit 3830. The shutter support member 3812 has a boss portion 3812b that protrudes forward in a cylindrical shape from the vicinity of the right end of the front surface. The boss portion 3812b is slidably inserted into the slit 3820b of the open / close slider 3820, and a support plate 3816 is attached to the tip.

  The shutter unit 3830 is configured by a plurality (here, eight) of shutter members 3831. The shutter member 3831 includes a flat shutter 3832 extending left and right, a shaft portion 3833 extending in a column shape from both left and right ends of the shutter 3832, and a right side after protruding from the tip of the right shaft portion 3833 in the direction perpendicular to the axis. And a crankshaft 3834 extending in a columnar direction.

  The shutter 3832 is formed in a length and shape corresponding to the height at which the shutter member 3831 is disposed with respect to the shape in the frame of the front cover 3811. The shaft portion 3833 projects from the vicinity of the upper end of the shutter 3832 with the surface of the shutter 3832 facing forward. The crank shaft 3834 is located behind the shaft portion 3833.

  The shutter member 3831 can rotate around the shaft in the left-right direction around the shaft portion 3833 as the shaft portion 3833 is rotatably supported by the bearing portion 3812 a of the shutter support member 3812. The crankshaft 3834 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3820 a of the open / close slider 3820.

  Although not shown, the back right decorative body 3813 is provided with a pattern such as a character, an item, a logo, or the like according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1. The back front right decorative body 3813 can diffuse light from the LEDs of the back front right decorative substrate 3814. The plurality of LEDs on the front right decorative board 3814 are full-color LEDs.

  The support plate 3816 extends in the vertical direction with the plate surface directed in the left-right direction, and is formed in a shape in which the front end side is bent leftward. A portion of the support plate 3816 bent to the left on the front end side is attached to the front surface of the boss portion 3812b of the shutter support member 3812, and the remaining portion protrudes rearward through the right side of the shutter support member 3812. Yes. In addition, the support plate 3816 has a support pin 3816a protruding in a columnar shape from the vicinity of the lower end to the left. The support pin 3816a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3819.

  The front right drive solenoid 3817 is attached to the support plate 3816 in such a direction that the plunger advances and retreats downward. The front right drive solenoid 3817 is biased by a spring in a direction in which the plunger protrudes downward. The link member 3819 can be rotated about the left and right axis about the support pin 3816a by inserting the support pin 3816a of the support plate 3816. The link member 3819 is provided with a first connection portion 3819a connected to the transmission member 3818 on the rear side with a portion where the support pin 3816a is inserted therebetween, and a second connection connected to the open / close slider 3820. A connecting portion 3819b is provided on the front side.

  The open / close slider 3820 extends vertically with a length substantially the same as the height of the shutter unit 3830 including a plurality of shutter members 3831, and a transmission groove into which each crankshaft 3834 of the shutter unit 3830 is slidably inserted in the front-rear direction. 3820a and a slit 3820b into which the boss portion 3812b of the shutter support member 3812 is slidably inserted in the vertical direction.

  Next, the operation of the back front right rendering unit 3800 will be described. In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 199 (a), the back front right rendering unit 3800 has the shutter 3832 of the shutter member 3831 of the shutter unit 3830 with its plate surface facing forward. The shutter 3832 closes the frame of the front cover 3811. In this normal state, the front right decorative body 3813 provided behind the shutter unit 3830 is not visible from the front (player side). Although illustration is omitted, when the shutter unit 3830 is in the closed state, a pattern different from the pattern applied to the rear front right decorative body 3813 is applied to the front surface of the shutter unit 3830 (the plurality of shutters 3832). Has been.

  In a normal state, the front right drive solenoid 3817 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger protrudes downward by the biasing force of the spring. In a normal state, the open / close slider 3820 is positioned at the upper moving end, and the crankshaft 3834 of each shutter member 3831 is positioned above the shaft portion 3833.

  In this normal state, when the front right drive solenoid 3817 is energized (ON), the plunger moves upward against the biasing force of the spring, and at the same time, the transmission member 3818 attached to the tip of the plunger moves upward. Move to. When the transmission member 3818 moves upward, the first connection portion 3819a of the link member 3819 connected to the transmission member 3818 moves upward, and the link member 3819 rotates about the support pin 3816a. Thus, the second connection portion 3819b opposite to the first connection portion 3819a moves downward. Then, by the downward movement of the second connecting portion 3819b of the link member 3819, the opening / closing slider 3820 connected to the second connecting portion 3819b moves downward.

  When the opening / closing slider 3820 moves downward, the crankshaft 3835 of the shutter member 3831 inserted in the transmission groove 3820a is pressed downward, and the shutter is moved so that the crankshaft 3835 is positioned below the shaft portion 3833. The member 3831 rotates around the shaft portion 3833. As a result, the plate surface of the shutter 3832 faces in the up-and-down direction, so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3832, and the rear front provided at the rear of the shutter unit 3830. The right decorative body 3813 becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 199 (b)).

  After that, by deenergizing (OFF) the front right drive solenoid 3817, the plunger that was moving upward is moved downward by the urging force of the spring, and by moving in the opposite direction, The shutter unit 3830 in the open state can be returned to the closed state, which is a normal state.

  As described above, according to the front right rendering unit 3800 of this embodiment, the front front right decorative body 3813 is changed from the decoration (pattern) of the shutter unit 3830 by opening and closing the shutter unit 3830 by the front right driving solenoid 3817. It is possible to switch to the decoration (pattern) of the player, and to entertain the player with a change in the decoration.

  In addition, since the back front right decorative board 3814 is provided behind the shutter unit 3830 and the back front right decorative body 3813, when the shutter unit 3830 is in a closed state, a plurality of LEDs on the back front right decorative board 3814 are caused to emit light. Thus, the player can show the shutter unit 3830 decorated with light emission to the player, and when the shutter unit 3830 is in the open state, the plurality of LEDs on the right front decorative substrate 3814 are caused to emit light, so The decorative body 3813 can be shown to the player.

  Further, the back front right rendering unit 3800 has three back front right decorative body units: a first back front right decorative body unit 3810A, a second back front right decorative body unit 3810B, and a third back front right decorative body unit 3810C. 3810 can independently open and close the shutter unit 3830 and can be decorated with light emission, so that various effects can be provided to the player by appropriately combining the effects of the three front right decorative body units 3810. Can show.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, main effects (movable effects) on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 200 is a front view of the game board shown with the back and back movable decorative body of the back and back effect unit moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. FIG. 201 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the lower back middle rotary decorative body of the lower back middle production unit is moved from the lowered position to the raised position. FIG. 202 shows the back rear rotating decorative body of the back rear rendering unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back rear left rotating decorative body of the back rear left rendering unit from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and the back rear right. FIG. 48 is a front view of the game board showing the back right rotation decorative body of the effect unit moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position. FIG. 203 shows the back rear left rotating decorative body of the back rear left rendering unit from the retracted position to the second appearance position, and the back rear right rotating decorative body of the back rear right rendering unit from the retracted position to the second appearance position, respectively. It is a front view of the game board shown in the moved state. FIG. 204 is a front view of the gaming board showing the shutter unit of the back front left effect unit and the shutter unit of the back front right effect unit from the closed state to the open state, respectively.

  FIG. 205 shows the back and rear movable decorative body of the back rear effect unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, the rear upper and rear rotating decorative body of the rear back effect unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, and the back of the back rear left effect unit. The left rotating decorative body is moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position, the back rear right rotating decorative body of the back rear right effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the first appearing position, and the lower back middle rotating decorative body of the back lower middle effect unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state moved from the descent position to the up position, respectively.

  The game board 5 of the present embodiment includes a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a game panel 1100 that defines the rear end side of the game area 5a, a start port unit 2100, a side unit 2200, and a side In the normal state, the upper left unit 2300, the first attacker unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, the second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are formed substantially transparent. 111, the back front left decorative body 3030, the back front right decorative body 3040, and the back bottom left effect unit 3200 are rotated to the left and back in the back unit 3000 disposed behind the gaming panel 1100, as shown in FIG. Decoration body 3201, back bottom right rotation decoration body 3251 of back bottom right production unit 3250, back bottom middle production unit Rotation decoration body 3310 under the back of the base 3300, front rotation decoration body 3410 and back front decoration body 3421 of the back top production unit 3400, front cover 3711 and shutter unit 3730 of the back front left production unit 3700, front back The front cover 3811 and the shutter unit 3830 of the right effect unit 3800 can be viewed well, and the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be viewed well through the frame of the center accessory 2500. be able to.

  More specifically, the back front left decorative body 3030 is located on the left side of the center accessory 2500, and the back front right decorative body 3040 extends from the stop portion 1006 of the front component member 1000 to the right rail 1005. Along the side right middle unit 2700. Further, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 of the back back effect unit 3100 is located behind the back upper effect unit 3400 and is not visible from the player side.

  The back lower left rotating decorative body 3201 is located below the center of the center accessory 2500 and behind the general winning opening 2001 at the center and the left side of the side unit 2200, and the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251. Is positioned behind the first big prize opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 below the frame of the center accessory 2500. The back bottom left rotating decorative body 3201 and the back bottom right rotating decorative body 3251 are visible from the player side through the transparent gaming panel 1100 and the front unit 2000.

  In addition, the lower back middle rotary decorative body 3310 is in the lowered position, and is positioned behind the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100 so that the upper portion protrudes into the frame of the center accessory 2500. ing. This lower back middle rotary ornament 3310 is a perspective from the upper side of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and therefore, the numerical ornament above the center of rotation is passed through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It can be visually recognized well.

  Further, the front upper decoration body 3421 of the back upper effect unit 3400 extends to the left and right at the upper part of the game area 5a in the front view, and the upper part on the left side from the center in the left and right direction is a transparent game panel 1100 and center accessory. While being visible through 2500, the rest can be seen well through the frame of the center accessory 2500. The back front rotating decorative body 3410 is in a state where one petal is directed upward at the center in the left-right direction in front of the back top front decorative body 3421, and is good from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2500. Can be visually recognized. The back up / down decoration unit 3450 having the back back rotation decoration 3440 of the back effect unit 3400 is in a retracted position behind the back front decoration 3421 in a normal state. Visible from the side.

  Further, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 having the back back left rotation decorative body 3510 of the back back left rendering unit 3500 is in a retracted position that is behind the back front left rendering unit 3700 in a normal state. , It is not visible from the player side. Further, the back rear right decoration body unit 3620 having the back back right rotation decoration body 3610 of the back back right rendering unit 3600 is in a retracted position at the rear of the back front right rendering unit 3800 in a normal state. , It is not visible from the player side.

  In addition, the three back front left decorative body units 3710 of the back front left effect unit 3700 are arranged vertically along the left side of the game panel 1100, and are located in the game area 5a in a front view and are transparent games. It is visible from the player side through the panel 1100, the center accessory 2500, and the frame of the center accessory 2500. Of the three back left decorative body units 3710, the first back front left decorative body unit 3710A on the upper side is mostly located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 in a front view. The lower part is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. The second back front left decorative body unit 3710B on the middle side is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500 in a front view. The lower third front left decorative unit 3710C on the lower side is mostly located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 in the front view, and the right part is within the frame of the center accessory 2500. positioned.

  In the normal state, the back front left rendering unit 3700 has a shutter unit 3730 in a closed state in each of the three back front left decorative body units 3710, and the back front left decorative body 3713 is invisible. At the same time, the decoration of the shutter unit 3730 is visible.

  Further, the three back front right decorative body units 3810 of the back front right effect unit 3800 are arranged vertically along the right side of the game panel 1100, and are located in the game area 5a in the front view and are transparent games. It is visible from the player side through the panel 1100, the center accessory 2500, and the frame of the center accessory 2500. Of the three back right decorative body units 3810, the first back front right decorative body unit 3810A is located on the right side behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 in front view, The left side is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. The middle second back front right decorative body unit 3810B and the lower third back front right decorative body unit 3810C have a gaming panel 1100 and a center that are transparent from the left side to the right side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. It is located behind the accessory 2500, and the remaining left side is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500.

  In the normal state, the back front right rendering unit 3800 has the shutter unit 3830 closed in each of the three back front right decorative body units 3810, and the back front right decorative body 3813 is invisible. At the same time, the decoration of the shutter unit 3830 is visible.

  The game board 5 provides a rear effect of the back unit 3000 in accordance with the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn when the game ball B is received at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. Unit 3100, back bottom left production unit 3200, back bottom right production unit 3250, back bottom middle production unit 3300, back top production unit 3400, back rear left production unit 3500, back back right production unit 3600, back front left production unit 3700 The front right effect unit 3800 performs a predetermined effect (movable effect or light emission effect).

  Specifically, as an effect using the back rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 200, the slide guide 3130 is moved downward by the back rear drive motor 3126, so that the lock member 3134 is moved. Then, the back movable decorative body 3110 is dropped from the retracted position to the appearance position. Thereby, the large back and rear movable decorative body 3110 straddling the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction can show the player an effect (movable effect) that falls freely while blocking the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, entertain the player, and generate an advantageous gaming state (for example, a “hit” game) in which the player has an advantage over the player. It can be thought that it is, and the expectation with respect to a game can be raised.

  In the back rear effect unit 3100, although not shown, after the back back movable decorative body 3110 is dropped to the appearance position, the slide guide 3130 is moved upward by the back rear drive motor 3126, and the back back movable decorative body is displayed. When the 3110 is returned to the retracted position, the forward / backward drive motor 3126 is appropriately changed in the normal rotation / reverse rotation so that the back movable movable body 3110 is moved up and down the display screen of the effect display device 1600 via the slide guide 3130. You may make it reciprocate up and down near the center of the direction. Accordingly, the back and back movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down while blocking the vertical center of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, so that the player's interest is strongly attracted to the back and back movable decorative body 3110 and the back The movable decorative body 3110 can be noted, and the movement of the back movable movable body 3110 can be enjoyed.

  As an effect using the back lower middle production unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 201, the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 is rotated by rotating the lifting arm 3357 by the back lower middle lifting drive motor 3352. Is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, and the lower back middle rotary decorative body 3310 is rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction by the lower back middle rotary drive motor 3333. As a result, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 moves upward so as to block a part of the effect image of the effect display device 1600 and is positioned within the frame of the center accessory 2500, which is favorable from the player side. Since it can be visually recognized and rotated with a round, it can give a strong impact to the player and entertain the player.

  Since the under-bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310 is provided with six number decorations, by rotating the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the player feels that the roulette is rotating. Can be given. Therefore, when rotating the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, the effect display device 1600 displays an effect image such as “Susoku”, and the numbers of the number decoration of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 stopped. Depending on, "piece" may be advanced. As a result, depending on whether or not the rotating back / bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310 stops rotating at the position of the desired number decoration so that the “piece” proceeds to the desired “升”, It can be thrilled and entertained by the player. In addition, as the “piece” advances for the player, the player can feel as if the expected value is increasing, and the sense of expectation for the game can be enhanced.

  For example, FIG. 202 shows an effect using the back bottom left effect unit 3200, the back bottom right effect unit 3250, the back top effect unit 3400, the back back left effect unit 3500, and the back back right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000. As shown, the back bottom left rotation motor 3205 rotates the back bottom left rotation decoration 3201 in the back bottom left rendering unit 3200, and the back bottom right rotation motor 3255 rotates the back bottom right rotation decoration in the back bottom right rendering unit 3250. 3251 is rotated. Further, in the back effect unit 3400, the back front rotation decorative body 3410 is rotated by the back front rotation drive motor 3425 and the back lift elevating decoration unit 3450 is moved downward from the retracted position by the back lift drive motor 3429. At the same time as rotating to the appearance position, the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440 is rotated by the rear upper rear rotation driving motor 3454. Further, in the back back left rendering unit 3500, the back back left decorative body unit 3520 is moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position slightly upper right by the back back left lifting drive motor 3554, and back back by the back back left rotation drive motor 3525. The left rotation decorative body 3510 is rotated. Further, in the back back right effect unit 3600, the back back right decorative body unit 3620 is moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position slightly upper left by the back back right up / down drive motor 3654, and back back by the back back right rotation drive motor 3625. The right rotating decorative body 3610 is rotated.

  As a result, the back rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 can be moved to the front of the effect display device 1600 and can be visually recognized. Since the body 3201, the back bottom right rotation decoration body 3251, the back top front rotation decoration body 3410, the back top back rotation decoration body 3440, the back back left rotation decoration body 3510, and the back back right rotation decoration body 3610 rotate, By rotating the six decorative bodies, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and raise the sense of expectation for the game by thinking that something good will happen.

  At this time, the back up / down raising / lowering drive motor 3429, the back rear left / right up / down driving motor 3554, and the back back / right up / down driving motor 3654 are repeatedly forward / reversed as appropriate, so that the back / up / down decoration body unit 3450 / back / left back decoration The body unit 3520 and the back right decorative body unit 3620 may be swung, respectively. As a result, the back upper back rotating decorative body 3440, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 rotate while swinging, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted. The player can be entertained.

  Moreover, you may make it rotate the back lower middle rotation decorative body 3310 in this case. As a result, since the seven decorative bodies rotate in a rounded manner, it is possible to make the player feel strongly that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a “hit” game) in which the player has an advantage will occur. The expectation for a game can be raised.

  As an effect using the back rear left effect unit 3500 and the back back right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. The left decorative body unit 3520 is moved from the retracted position to the upper right second appearance position, and the back and back left rotation decoration body 3510 is rotated by the back and back left rotation drive motor 3525. Further, in the back back right production unit 3600, the back back right decorative body unit 3620 is moved from the retracted position to the second upper left appearance position by the back back right raising / lowering drive motor 3654 and back back right rotation drive motor 3625 is used. The rotating decorative body 3610 is rotated. As a result, the player's eyes seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and the two ornaments rotate at the approximate height, so there is something that can surprise the player and do something good. It can be thought that it is, and it can raise the expectation for the game.

  At this time, in the effect display device 1600, the positions of the back rear left rotated decorative body 3510 and the back rear right rotated decorative body 3610 at the second appearance position are the eyes of a predetermined character according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1. You may make it display the effect image which becomes a position. Thereby, it is possible to show the player the effect that the eyes of the character are turning around, and to entertain the player.

  As an effect using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 204, in the back front left effect unit 3700, the shutter unit 3730 is moved by the back front left drive solenoid 3717. The shutter unit 3830 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the back front right drive solenoid 3817 in the back front right rendering unit 3800. Accordingly, the back front left decorative body 3713 behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front right decorative body 3813 behind the shutter unit 3830 are visible from the player side, so the back front left decorative body 3713 and the back front right The decoration of the decoration body 3813 can be shown to the player, and the player can enjoy the change of the decoration.

  The production using the back front left production unit 3700 and the back front right production unit 3800 includes three back front left decorative body units 3710 and three back front right decorative body units 3810, respectively. The shutter unit 3730 of the front left decorative body unit 3710 and the shutter unit 3830 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810 may be individually opened and closed, and the combination of the shutter unit 3730 and the shutter unit 3830 to be opened and closed. Thus, a variety of effects can be shown to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored.

Rear back production unit 3100, back lower left production unit 3200, back lower right production unit 3250, back lower middle production unit 3300, back upper production unit 3400, back rear left production unit 3500, back rear right production unit 3600 As an effect using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800, for example, as shown in FIG. 205, all decorative bodies and the like may be moved. This
By moving all the decorative bodies, it is possible to be sure that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a “hit” gaming state) occurs for the player, and it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the advantageous gaming state. In this case, in the back rear left effect unit 3500 and the back back right effect unit 3600, the back back left decorative body unit 3520 and the back back right decorative body unit 3620 are moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position. By doing so, contact with the back movable ornament 3110 is avoided.

  In addition, although the movement of each decoration body was demonstrated above, when moving each decoration body, the light emission effect of a decoration body was made to a player by light-emitting the LED of the decoration board provided in the back suitably. Can be shown, and can attract the player's interest even more.

  Further, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the movable effect and the light emission effect as described above can be combined as appropriate, and also combined with an effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. As a result, various combinations of lighting effects, movable effects, display effects, etc. can be presented to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and various effects. It is possible to entertain the player, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

[5-11. Main effects of game board]
Next, main effects of the game board 5 of the present embodiment having the above-described configuration will be described. The game board 5 of the present embodiment has a game panel 1100 provided with a game area 5a on the front side and has an opening 1112 penetrating the game panel 5100. The front end of the frame-shaped peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500 that is partitioned into a non-distributable region that is impossible and formed in a shape along the inner periphery of the opening 1112 is projected forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. Since the rear side is inserted into the opening portion 1112 in the state, the outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 becomes the flow region and the inner side becomes the non-flow region. A flat support portion 2503 that is thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is extended from the same position in the front and rear direction of the game panel 1100 in the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the non-circulation region side (inner side). At the same time, since the flange portion 2502 that contacts the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is provided from the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is not provided to the distribution region side (outside), the peripheral wall portion 2501 is provided. Since nothing is extended to the flow area side of the portion where the support portion 2503 is provided, the obstacle nail N can be implanted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall portion 2501. Thus, the substantial distribution area can be up to a position in contact with the peripheral wall portion 2501, which is substantially more than that of a conventional pachinko machine. It can be increased Do distribution area. That is, even if the non-distribution area (within the frame of the center accessory 2500) defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is increased, the substantial distribution area is not reduced as in the conventional pachinko machine. . Therefore, by increasing the non-circulation area defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 while suppressing the distribution area in which the game ball B circulates in the game area 5a from being substantially reduced, The effect image of the effect display device 1600 provided as the effect device provided at the rear of the area, the movable body of the effect unit, the decorative body, and the like can be made easier to see. Thus, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain both the production and the production.

  Further, in the center accessory 2500, the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced from the non-circulation region side (inner side) by the support portion 2503, and the peripheral wall is provided by the flange portion 2502 provided at a portion where the support portion 2503 is not provided. The portion 2501 can be reinforced from the distribution region side (outside), and the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is improved by attaching the center accessory 2500 to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 via the flange portion 2502. Even if the game ball B in the game area 5a contacts (contacts) a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be maintained by the support portion 2503 and the like. Deformation and breakage of the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center accessory 2500) can be prevented.

  Further, since the strength and rigidity of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by attaching to the support portion 2503, the flange portion 2502, and the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall portion 2501 when the game ball B comes into contact. Can be prevented from being elastically deformed and playing the game ball B like an elastic body (rubber or spring). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a from making a strange movement different from the conventional one by contacting the peripheral wall portion 2501, which gives the player an unpleasant feeling. Can be prevented and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the center accessory 2500 including the support portion 2503 is made transparent, the support portion 2503 extending from the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the non-circulation region side can be hardly seen, and the support portion 2503 (center Since the effect image of the effect display device 1600 as the effect device provided behind through the accessory 2500) and the movable body or decorative body of the effect unit provided in the back unit 3000 can be seen, It is possible to increase the range in which the effect image, movable body, decorative body, etc. that are provided behind can be seen, and to make the effect of the effect produced by the effect device easier, and to be provided behind the non-distribution area The pachinko machine 1 can be displayed by the large viewing range of the effect image, the movable body, the decorative body, etc. It can stand, can be pachinko machine 1 high appeal against the player.

  Further, since the center accessory 2500 including the support portion 2503 is made transparent, it is provided in the pachinko machine 1 by the light of illumination in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, due to the transparent part. Since light from the light emitting means (LED, production display device 1600, etc.) can be reflected, refracted, diffused, or transmitted, transparent parts such as the support part 2503 and the peripheral wall part 2501 You can show it gorgeously, improve its appearance, and increase your appeal to players. At this time, a step, a notch, or the like may be provided in the transparent support portion 2503 to further enhance the diffusion effect.

  Further, since the center object 2500 including the support portion 2503 is transparent, it is provided in a movable body (for example, the back front left rendering unit 3700 or the back rear left rendering unit 3500) provided behind the support portion 2503. By the light emission by the light emitting means (LED), the above effects can be obtained, and the player can recognize the presence of the movable body by the transparent support portion 2503.

  Further, since the transparent support portion 2503 is extended in a flat plate shape that is thinner than the thickness of the game panel 1100 at the same position as the front surface of the game panel 1100 in the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is attached to the game panel. The lens effect by the support part 2503 can be reduced as compared with the case where the support part 2503 is extended with the same thickness as 1100, and the support part 2503 has a rear back left decorative body 3030 and an effect device (effect display device 1600). Etc.), the lens effect due to the transparent support portion 2503 is further reduced, and the portion (design) behind the support portion 2503 in the front left decorative body 3030, the effect image of the stage device, the movable body, the decorative body, etc. ) Can be improved, and the front left decorative body 3030 and the effect image can be more easily seen.

  Further, since at least a part of the front end side of the support portion 2503 is formed in a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is provided at a portion of the front end side of the support portion 2503 having a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501. Since the tip side of the surface can show a line different from the peripheral wall portion 2501, it becomes difficult to see a single design compared to the shape along the peripheral wall portion 2501, and it seems to be concerned with details. The pachinko machine 1 having a deep design can be provided.

  Further, since at least a part of the front end side of the support portion 2503 has a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the extension amount from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not constant and is different at the corresponding portion of the support portion 2503. Therefore, by setting the extension amount according to the shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the reinforcing effect of the peripheral wall portion 2501 by the support portion 2503 can be improved.

  Furthermore, since the support portion 2503 extends from the same position in the front and rear direction of the game panel 1100 in the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is a part of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It is possible to make an illusion as if it is difficult to notice the presence of the support portion 2503.

  In addition, since the support portion 2503 is provided at the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and extends from the middle in the front-rear direction of the peripheral wall portion 2501, Compared with the case where the support part 2503 is extended from the end side, since the reduction in the reinforcing effect by the support part 2503 with respect to the tip side of the peripheral wall part 2501 can be reduced, the strength of the peripheral wall part 2501 can be sufficiently increased. The peripheral wall portion 2501 (center accessory 2500) can be prevented from being deformed or damaged even when the game medium comes into contact.

  Further, since the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 has a shape along the inner periphery of the opening portion 1112 of the gaming panel 1100 and the rear side is inserted into the opening portion 1112, the opening portion 1112 of the gaming panel 1100 The inner peripheral surface can be concealed or decorated by the peripheral wall portion 2501 and can be made difficult to see.

  In addition, since the outer shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is a shape along the inner periphery of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is in a state where the center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100. It looks like it protrudes forward from the periphery of the opening part 1112, can give a sense of unity to the peripheral wall part 2501 (center accessory 2500) and the game panel 1100, and has a good-looking pachinko in the game area 5 a A machine 1 can be provided.

  Further, since the center accessory 2500 is attached to the opening 1112 of the gaming panel 1100, the peripheral wall 2501 in the opening 1112 of the gaming panel 1100 is partitioned regardless of whether the gaming panel 1100 is transparent or opaque. The effect image of the effect display device 1600 provided behind the non-distributed area to be played, the movable body and decoration of the effect unit, etc. can be seen well from the front (player side), and the effect display device 1600 The pachinko machine 1 which can fully exhibit the production effect by etc. can be provided.

  Further, since the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, when the game area 5a is viewed obliquely, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the presence of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and can easily recognize the circulation region and the non-circulation region partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501.

  Further, a flange portion 2502 extending to the flow area side (outside) is provided at a portion where the support portion 2503 of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 does not extend, and at a portion where the flange portion 2502 is provided. Is not provided with a support portion 2503 extending to the non-distribution area side (inside), the support portion 2503 obstructs the visibility of the effect device (the effect display device 1600 and the effect unit of the back unit 3000). In addition, the area where the effect image of the effect display device 1600 and the movable body of the effect unit can be seen can be increased, and the effect of the effect device can be more easily exhibited, and the effect device can be provided to the player. It is possible to entertain the production by and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, in the center accessory 2500, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be kept equal to that of the conventional product by the support portion 2503 and the flange portion 2502. Therefore, the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the support portion 2503 are integrally molded with resin. When removing from the mold, deformation of the molded product can be prevented.

  In addition, since the support portion 2503 is extended in a flat plate shape that is thinner than the thickness of the game panel 1100, when the center accessory 2500 is integrally formed of synthetic resin, only the portion of the support portion 2503 is different from other portions. An increase in the difference in shrinkage amount can be avoided, and deformation of the center accessory 2500 during molding can be prevented.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the frame-shaped front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, and the flat game panel 1100 that closes the frame of the front component member 1000 from the rear side. The back rear left up / down drive motor 3554 and the back back right up / down drive of the back back right effect unit 3600 as functional parts of the back back left effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100 are made transparent. The motor 3654 is disposed so that at least a part of the motor 3654 is out of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and between the game panel 1100 and the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lifting drive motor 3654. A game is played from inside the game area 5a so as to cover at least a part of the game area 5a in the up / down drive motor 3554 and the back right up / down drive motor 3654. Since the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 extending to the outside of the area 5a are provided, the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are provided. It is possible to cover and hide at least a part of the rear right up / down drive motor 3654, and through the transparent front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 and the game area 5a from the player side, the rear back left up / down drive motor 3554 and the back rear The right elevating drive motor 3654 can be made difficult to see, and the appearance of the entire pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being deteriorated. The front left decorative body 3030 and the front right decorative body 3040 can be seen, so that the appearance of the entire pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Can be pachinko machine 1 is enhanced appeal against skill person.

  In addition, since the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, the boundary of the game area 5a defined by the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 becomes difficult to understand, so the outer periphery of the game area 5a is not defined. The game area 5a can be shown larger even if the game area 5a is the same size as a conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, since the game area 5a appears larger than the conventional pachinko machine, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, to increase the expectation for the game with the pachinko machine 1, and to play the game. This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can increase appeal to the player.

  Further, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 cover at least a part in the game area 5a in front of functional parts such as the back back left lift drive motor 3554 and the back back right lift drive motor 3654. Therefore, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 can prevent the functional parts from being seen in the game area 5a, so that the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved. In addition to the same operational effects as described above, it is possible to make the functional component difficult to see even when viewed obliquely from the center side of the game area 5a.

  Further, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 have a continuous decoration over the entire surface, and extend from the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a in front view. Since the decorations of the left decorative body 3030 and the front right decorative body 3040 are continuous over the entire surface, the boundary of the outer periphery of the game area 5a can be made difficult to understand by the continuous decoration, and the game is given with a feeling of opening. The size of the area 5a can be made larger than the actual size, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by the decoration of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040. You can make it stand out and increase your appeal to the player.

  Since the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are opaque, the back back left effect unit 3500 provided on the rear side through the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 and It is possible to prevent the back rear right effect unit 3600 and the like from being seen, and the player can see the back rear left effect unit 3500 and the back rear right effect unit 3600 through the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100. Can be prevented, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, at least a part of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 as functional components is arranged outside the game area 5a in front view (in the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554). Since the rear rear left raising / lowering drive motor 3554 and the rear rear right raising / lowering driving motor 3654 are arranged completely (entirely) outside the game area 5a, the front structural member 1000 and the outer periphery of the game area 5a The back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 can be arranged without increasing the space between them, and the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 can be arranged. It can suppress that the space of the game area | region 5a becomes small by taking a balance. In other words, a part of the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 is disposed in the game area 5a in a front view, so that the space between the front component member 1000 and the outer periphery of the game area 5a is reduced. Thus, the space of the game area 5a can be relatively increased, and the pachinko machine 1 capable of further exerting the above-described effects can be obtained. In addition, by providing a part of the driving source (motor, solenoid, etc.) of the accessory movable in the game area 5a outside the game area 5a, the space in the game area 5a can be increased. The range of effects performed in the game area 5a is expanded. You may make it arrange | position all the drive sources (a motor, a solenoid, etc.) of the accessory movable within the game area | region 5a out of the game area | region 5a.

  Further, since the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, the illumination light in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1, an effect display device 1600, etc. Can be transmitted, reflected, refracted, or diffused, and it can be seen as if the front component member 1000 or the game panel 1100 is emitting light. Can improve the appearance. The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are provided with an opaque decorative seal 3032 and a decorative seal 3042, but the respective bases 3031 of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are provided. Since the base 3041 (which may include the decorative seal 3032 and the decorative seal 3042) is formed of a transparent member, the light from various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 can be seen from the back left decorative body 3030 or the back It can reach the front right decorative body 3040 and give an impression that the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 emit light. It can be said that the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are arranged at positions where light from various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 can reach.

  Further, since at least a part of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 as a functional component is covered with the back front left decorative body 3030, it can be seen that it is a functional component by covering it to some extent without covering all. It becomes painful and can look like a part of the decoration. Accordingly, since the back front left decorative body 3030 does not have a size that covers the entire back rear left elevating drive motor 3554, it is possible to achieve the same effect as described above. The game area 5a can be shown larger while reducing the cost of 3030. It should be noted that the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 cover and conceal at least a part of the back back left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back back right elevating drive motor 3654. It is desirable to make the portion closer to the center of 1 (the portion closer to the boundary line dividing the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a). In addition, a predetermined portion where there is no drive source outside the game area 5a (such as a lower left position in FIG. 131, that is, a lower left corner position on the game board 5) extends from the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a. By providing a decorative body, the game area 5a can be shown larger.

  Further, the frame of the front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a is closed from behind by a transparent game panel 1100, and the game area 5a is located on the front side of the game panel 1100. Therefore, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are provided on the rear side of the game area 5a. Therefore, in front view, the inside and outside of the game area 5a can be decorated from the back by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 extending from the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a. The same function and effect can be achieved, and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 do not interfere with the game ball B in the game area 5a, and the game in the game area 5a is smooth. You can entertain and suppress the decline of interest.

  Moreover, since the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are extended to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a front view, the back front left decorative body is formed in the door window 101a. The rear back left rendering unit 3500 and the back rear right rendering unit 3600 and the like behind the 3030 and the front right decorative body 3040 can be made invisible, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Further, the back left decorative body 3030 is extended to such an extent that the inner part of the door window 101a in the back back left lifting drive motor 3554 as a functional part is hidden. Even if the entire drive motor 3554 is not covered, the uncovered portion can be covered by the frame-like door frame 3, so that the front left decorative body 3030 can be prevented from becoming unnecessarily long. The cost concerning the back left decorative body 3030 (pachinko machine 1) can be reduced.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front face is inclined toward the game panel 1100 from the right of the side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 5 at the two general winning openings 2001. In contrast, in the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, the front wall 2101 forming the front surface is parallel to the game panel 1100, and the front surface is decorated with translucency. Since the front face of the first start opening 2002 is directed forward (player side), the first start opening 2002 can be made more conspicuous than the general winning opening 2001. Accordingly, since the player's consciousness can be more easily directed to the first start opening 2002 than the general winning opening 2001, the number of game balls B received in the first start opening 2002 is reduced (or the first start opening). The player's consciousness concentrates on the general prize opening 2001 rather than the mouth 2002), and the lottery of the first special lottery result performed by accepting the game ball B to the first start opening 2002 Can be expected to increase the sense of expectation of the game, and can prevent the player from recognizing the interest, and can surely recognize the position of the first start port 2002 that the player should aim for. You can entertain the game.

  Then, depending on whether or not the game ball B in the game area 5a is received in the first start port 2002, the player can be harassed, and when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002, The player can be thrilled and excited by whether or not the winning (for example, “big hit”) in which the advantageous gaming state is generated by the lottery of the first special lottery result is drawn, and the expectation for the game is increased. A decrease in interest can be suppressed. After that, when the winning is drawn by the lottery of the first special lottery result, an advantageous gaming state in which the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are opened and closed in a predetermined pattern is generated, so that the player is greatly enjoyed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in games. At this time, when the game ball B aiming at the first starting port 2002 is received in the general winning port 2001, the game ball B is paid out as a privilege although the lottery of the first special lottery result is not performed. The player is not discouraged, and the game can be continued to be enjoyed to prevent a decrease in interest.

  Further, the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined with respect to the surface of the game panel 1100, and the front wall portion 2101 of the first start port 2002 is made parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100. Since the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are greatly different in form (appearance), a sticker is attached to the front of the first starting opening 2002, and a seal is attached to the front of the general winning opening 2001. Even if it is not attached, it does not give the player a sense of incongruity and can prevent the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 from deteriorating, making the player enjoy the game with the pachinko machine 1 and reducing the interest Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are formed of transparent members, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2002 is visually recognized through the transparent member. Therefore, the player can be surely recognized that the game ball B has been received in the general winning opening 2001 or the first start opening 2002, and can fully enjoy the joy of being received. This can suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, since the general winning opening 2001 and the first start opening 2002 are formed of transparent members, the illumination light in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the light emission provided in the pachinko machine 1 are provided. Since the light from the means (LED of the decorative board) can be reflected, refracted, or diffused, the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 can be shown gorgeously, and the appearance is good. As a result, the appeal to the player can be enhanced.

  Further, in the general winning opening 2001, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface is inclined toward the game panel 1100, and the received game ball B is transferred to the general winning opening in the first starting opening 2002. Since the game ball B is guided later than the game ball B received in 2001, the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 where the lottery of the first special lottery result is performed is made into the general winning port 2001. Since the game ball B can be guided backward at a later timing than the received game ball B, the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 can be shown to the player for a relatively long time. Therefore, when the game ball B is received at the first start opening 2002 where the lottery of the first special lottery result is performed, the joy (superior feeling) due to the reception of the game ball B at the first start opening 2002 is received as a general prize. The player can be allowed to taste the game ball B for a longer time than when the game ball B is received in the mouth 2001, and the player can be entertained to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front face of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined toward the gaming panel 1100, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is immediately rearward ( Since the game ball 1 can be discharged faster than the game ball B received at the first start port 2002, it is unnecessary for the game ball B to be received at the general winning port 2001. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling for a long time, and the player's interest can be directed to the next game ball B, and the game can be progressed crisply and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, in the general winning opening 2001, the first front wall 2203 forming the front surface is inclined with respect to the game panel 1100, and a part of the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall 2203. Therefore, when the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001, the majority of the gaming ball B overlaps with the general winning opening 2001 in a front view. Depending on the player, an illusion can be given as if the game ball B was received in the general winning opening 2001, and the player can be entertained. At this time, since a part of the game ball B does not overlap with the general winning opening 2001, it is not strongly recognized that the game ball B has been received in the general winning opening 2001, and it may be thought that it was an illusion. Therefore, even if a privilege (the lottery of the first special lottery result) is not given thereafter, it is possible to avoid having distrust in the pachinko machine 1 or the game hall side, It is possible to continue to entertain the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined toward the game panel 1100, the amount of material applied to the general winning opening 2001 (side unit 2200) can be reduced, and the general winning prize can be reduced. Decoration such as a seal on the front surface of the mouth 2001 can be omitted. Accordingly, since the cost for the general winning a prize opening 2001 can be reduced, the pachinko machine 1 that can be more enjoyed by the player can be obtained by turning that amount to a production device or the like.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the back bottom middle decoration unit 3320 of the back bottom middle production unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, the rotating back under the middle with a plurality of (in this case, six) stop positions. The decorative body 3310 is provided with a region detection piece 3325 having a length corresponding to half of the stop positions, and a plurality (six in this case) of position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to each stop position, and a region detection piece 3325. A plurality (here, four) of area identification sensors 3330 consisting of half of the stop positions for detecting the position detection and a single position identification sensor 3331 detecting the position detection piece 3326 Therefore, when the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates, a plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 that detect the area detecting piece 3325 are rotated in the rotation direction. It will repeatedly decrease after increasing in order from the side, and the current rotational position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is roughly grasped by the combination of the area specifying sensor 3330 detecting the area detecting piece 3325. be able to.

  More specifically, in the case of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 having six stop positions from the first stop position to the sixth stop position in the rotation direction, the three stop positions in which the region detection piece 3325 becomes half The minimum number of area specifying sensors 3330 necessary for detecting movement to an arbitrary stop position is three-half of the number of stop positions. Then, the three area specifying sensors 3330 are set as a first area specifying sensor 3330a, a second area specifying sensor 3330b, and a third area specifying sensor 3330c in the rotation direction, and the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the first stop position. It is assumed that only the first area specifying sensor 3330a is detecting the area detecting piece 3325 at the position of the decorative numeral “3”. When the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates from this state to the second stop position (the position of the decorative numeral “2”), the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b detect the area detecting piece 3325. To do. Furthermore, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the third stop position (the position of the decorative numeral “1”), the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c The area detection piece 3325 is detected.

  Furthermore, when the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the fourth stop position (the position of the decorative numeral “6”), the first area specifying sensor 3330a becomes non-detected, and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying The sensor 3330c detects the area detection piece 3325. Furthermore, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the fifth stop position (the position of the decorative numeral “5”), the second area specifying sensor 3330b is not detected, and only the third area specifying sensor 3330c is the area detecting piece. 3325 is detected. When the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the sixth stop position (the position of the decorative numeral “4”), the third area specifying sensor 3330c is also not detected, and all the area specifying sensors 3330 are not detected by the area detecting piece 3325. Is not detected. Thereafter, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 further rotates, it rotates to the first stop position (the position of the decorative numeral “3”), and only the first area specifying sensor 3330a detects the area detecting piece 3325. Thus, the detection / non-detection of the region specifying sensor 3330 as described above is repeated with the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310.

  As described above, since the area detection piece 3325 having a length extending over half of the stop positions is provided, a combination of detection of the area detection pieces 3325 by the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 can be used to rotate the back and middle. Since the rotation of the body 3310 can be detected, and all the area specifying sensors 3330 are not detected until the middle rotating decoration body 3310 is rotated to the next stop position. The current position of the middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be roughly grasped.

  And since the back bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310 is provided with a plurality (six in this case) of position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, the region detection pieces 3325 of the plurality of region specifying sensors 3330 are provided. The detection of the position detection piece 3326 by one position specifying sensor 3331 can be detected accurately after the detection of the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 to an arbitrary stop position by the detection. The stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 having a plurality of stop positions can be accurately grasped by reducing the shift of the stop position as much as possible.

  In addition, since the stop position of the lower back middle rotary decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, the lower back middle rotary decorative body 3310 can be accurately stopped at an arbitrary stop position, and the game can be performed by shifting the stop position. It is possible to prevent the person from feeling uncomfortable (uncomfortable feeling), to enjoy the effect (movable effect) by the rotating decoration body 3310 in the lower back, and to suppress the decrease in interest, The pachinko machine 1 can realize the operation of the movable body (backside middle rotating decorative body 3310) that does not give the player unpleasant feeling.

  Furthermore, since the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, even if the rotational speed of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is increased, the deviation of the stop position can be suppressed. By rotating the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the moving speed (rotational speed) of the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be further increased as compared with the case where the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is reciprocated. Can be fast. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player by the fast rotating lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be rotated. It is possible to entertain and suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, by rotating the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction, the rotation surface of the lower lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 faces the front player side, and after the crotch rotation, it is optional. Since the player can show a roulette-like effect that stops rotating at the stop position, the player can be thrilled and excited by whether or not the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 stops rotating at the desired stop position. It is possible to entertain a movable effect by the rotating decorative body 3310 under the back, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is an even number, a stop position that can be handled by the minimum number of sensors (region specifying sensor 3330) necessary for detecting movement to an arbitrary stop position. And the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 are the same, and the ability (a grasp of the stop position) by a plurality of sensors (region specifying sensor 3330 and position specifying sensor 3331) is maximized. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 having more stop positions can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In the above embodiment, the back bottom middle rotary decoration body 3310 in the back bottom middle stage production unit 3300 is shown as having six stop positions, but is not limited thereto. It is good also as what has 4 to 10 stop positions.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the movable body having a plurality of stop positions (rear bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310) is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body having a plurality of stop positions. As such, “circulate”, “linearly move”, “circularly move”, “curve move”, and the like.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 206 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and displays the effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the commands from the peripheral control section 1511. An effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the display. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game ball B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by the rotation operation of the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is not shown in detail, but the main control board is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. MPU, main control I / O port as input / output device (I / O device), main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids A circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in a RAM built in the main control MPU are provided. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU incorporates a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes a first start port sensor 3052 that detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002, a gate sensor 2801 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003, and a second. The second starting port sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B received in the starting port 2004, the general winning port sensor 3051 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001, and the first big winning port 2005. A first grand prize port sensor 2402 for detecting the game ball B, a second big prize port sensor 2601 for detecting the game ball B received in the second grand prize port 2006, and a game ball B received in the out port 2010 are detected. Out-out sensor 3053, first sub-out port sensor 2403 for detecting game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2011, second sub-out port The detection signals from the second sub-out sensor 3054 for detecting the game ball B received in 012 and the magnetic sensors 2404, 2602, 3055 for detecting illegal magnetism in the game area 5a are the main control I / O. Input through port.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, so that the start opening solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2612, etc., or a status display of the function display unit 1400 from the main control I / O port, a normal symbol display, a normal hold indicator, a first special symbol display, a first special hold number display A drive signal is output to a display device, a second special symbol display device, a second special reserved number display device, a round display device, or the like.

  In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 3052, the second start port sensor 2401, the gate sensor 2801, the first big prize port sensor 2402, the second big prize port sensor 2601, and the out port sensor 3053 are non- Whereas the contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used, the general prize opening sensor 3051, the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and the second sub-out port sensor 3054 include a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical. A switch is used. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, and the gate portion 2003, so the first start port sensor 3052, the second start port sensor 2401, and The detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2801 also frequently occurs. Therefore, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first start port sensor 3052, the second start port sensor 2401, and the gate sensor 2801.

  In addition, when an advantageous gaming state ("big hit" game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are opened, and the game balls B frequently enter. The detection of the game ball B by the first grand prize opening sensor 2402 and the second big prize opening sensor 2601 also frequently occurs. For this reason, proximity switches having high durability and long life are also used for the first grand prize opening sensor 2402 and the second big prize opening sensor 2601. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensor 3051 does not occur frequently in the general winning opening 2001 where the game ball B does not enter frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used for the general winning a prize opening sensor 3051.

  Further, since the game ball B frequently enters the out port 2010, the out port sensor 3053 uses a proximity switch with high durability and long life. On the other hand, since the game balls B do not frequently enter the first sub-out port 2011 and the second sub-out port 2012, the first sub-out port sensor 2403 and the second sub-out port sensor 3054 have mechanical switches that have a shorter life than the proximity switch. Is used.

  Further, the main control MPU transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. The main control MPU, which will be described in detail later, when receiving various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

  The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 630 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. It is described.) With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various types of information in the RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The RAM clear switch operation signal (detection signal) is also output to the payout control board 633.

  The main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port, the power failure notice signal is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Dispensing control board]
The payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game ball B and the like controls the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls relating to payout, and performs the launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and the launch that performs the ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. A control unit 633b, an error LED display for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, a ball tank 552, a tank rail during maintenance 553, a ball guidance unit 570, and a ball removal switch for discharging the game ball B in the payout device 580 to the outside (upper plate 201) of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball removal operation. .

[6-2a. Dispensing control unit]
The payout control unit 633a that performs various controls relating to payout on the payout control board 633 is not illustrated in detail, but a micro that incorporates a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, and payout A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the apparatus 580 and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU has a function and the like for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port, or the main control board 1310. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, the ball-cut detection sensor 574, the payout Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

  Detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit, and the payout control is performed via the payout control I / O port. Input to MPU.

  Further, detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I / O, and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. A command for outputting to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port or a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Or the number of game balls B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I / O port. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display are as follows. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is informed that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it is indicated that “connection is abnormal” (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notification that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the numeral “1” is displayed, it indicates that the ball is out (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, a notification is made that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580, and when the number “2” is displayed, it means that “the ball is a ball” (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and it is difficult to rotate the payout blade 589). When the number “3” is displayed, "Specifically, the payout detection sensor 591 is in trouble based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591", and when the number "5" is displayed, “Retry error” (specifically, the fact that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value) is notified, and when the number “6” is displayed, it is “full”. (Specifically, the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154), and the number “7” is displayed. Sometimes it is informed that “CR is not connected” (that the electrical connection has been cut off anywhere from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), and when the number “9” is displayed, Tsu that is being click "(specifically, yet that the ball number of payout non game ball B has reached a predetermined number spheres) are informed.

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls B to be lent in accordance with the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port to the payout control MPU. Entered. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining level of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining level to the ball lending operation unit 220. It is input and displayed on the ball lending display section of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b includes a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, and a clock signal. A firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing reference pulse, a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and firing A ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 gaming balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. Then, a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

  In relation to the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether a palm or a finger is touching the handle 182 and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will are detected. The detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the launch control input circuit and input to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the launch solenoid drive circuit generates a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 182. In response to the input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid driving circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 triggered by the input of the ball feeding reference pulse, whereby the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the tray unit 200 are stored. When one ball is received in the ball feeding unit 140 and the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the game ball B received by stopping the output of the constant current is sent to the ball launcher 540 side. send. Thus, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

  The power supply board 630 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 633 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various types of information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated at power-on.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 206, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and an effect display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. An effect display control unit 1512 for performing the drawing control.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
A peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, but includes a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality sound performance. And a sound ROM in which sound information such as music, sound, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

  The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each peripheral board of the game board 5 is received based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board to each decoration board of the gaming board 5 The game board side drive data for outputting a drive signal to a drive motor for operating various effect units provided on the game board 5 is supplied from the serial I / O port for the game board decoration drive board or the drive motor of the game board 5 For transmitting to the drive solenoid, or for outputting a drive signal to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button lifting drive motor 367, etc. Door-side drive light emission composed of side drive data and door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 Control data (display command) indicating a screen to be transmitted from the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3 side or displayed on the effect display device 1600 is produced from the serial I / O port for display control unit. In addition to transmitting to the display control unit 1512, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

  In addition, detection signals from the press detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the effect display control unit 1512, and based on this operation signal, the effect display control unit 1512 The operation is monitored.

  The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side provided in the door frame 3, the main body frame 4 and the like. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects flow from the speaker 464, the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4, and the like. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding backward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is accommodated. In the present embodiment, acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo) as sound information are sent to the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for low sound of the main body frame 4. By sending a signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or a 4.1ch surround signal, etc., it is possible to present an acoustic effect (sound effect) that has a more realistic feeling than before.

  In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built in the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown). In combination with WDT, it is diagnosed whether its own system is running away.

  A display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by a serial input / output port. In this embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km ( k) BPS (seconds per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, the initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, movable body drive command, etc. output from the peripheral control MPU to the gaming board 5 side are transmitted by a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the display command. In this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

[6-3b. Production display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 performs drawing control of the effect display device 1600. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the effect display control unit 1512 displays a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that controls display of the effect display device 1600. (Abbreviation of Video Display Processor), an image ROM for storing various screen data displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have.

  This display control MPU includes a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, and controls the VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. Control is being performed. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives an execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The display control ROM, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511, its control data (display command), and A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when transferring various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in time series. In the non-resident area transfer data, the order in which various data is transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in advance for the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data.

  The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then displays the screen data following the first screen data. Extract from display control ROM and output to VDP. As described above, the display control MPU extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the top screen data one by one from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP.

  When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an in-execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. The VDP employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer method”, drawing data for one line for drawing the left-right direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in this line buffer is stored in the effect display device 1600. It is a method to output to.

  The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and the speed at which the effect display device 1600 is drawn is affected. Therefore, in this embodiment, sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to an image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

  Here, “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a unit. For example, when various characters (characters) are displayed on the effect display device 1600, data for drawing each character is referred to as “sprite”. As a result, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 by setting the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap (hereinafter, referred to as “sprite superposition sequence”).

  Note that the sprite is configured by pasting a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “sprite character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed by using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in horizontal 2 × vertical 3 etc. are used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of sprite characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The effect display device 1600 sequentially repeats main scanning in the direction intersecting with the main scanning for setting the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels, sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front. Driven by the sub-scan to be performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input, the effect display device 1600 sequentially receives one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. Output to each of the pixels. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as the sub-scan. Similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, the pixels are sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game contents]
The game content by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated with reference to FIG.115, FIG.130 etc. FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is obtained when the player rotates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 disposed in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. However, the game ball 5 is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. Note that the driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and the game ball B can be driven harder as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. B, that is, the game ball B can be shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game ball B abuts against the obstacle nail N, so that the game ball The flow velocity of B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. In addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B abuts is provided in the game area 5a above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500.

  When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view of the outermost surface of the center accessory 2500 from the highest part, The area on the left side of the center actor 2500 will flow down. When the game ball B flowing down the left region of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2511 opened in the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, the game ball B is supplied from the warp outlet 2512 to the stage 2513.

  The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513, moves back and forth, and is discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the central release portion 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, the central release portion 2513a is located immediately above the first start port 2002, and therefore the first is high. It is received in the start port 2002. When the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. In addition, in the main control board 1310, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, “big hit”, “medium hit”, “small hit”, “per probability change (probability change)”, “time reduction (short time)” The lottery of the special lottery result (first special lottery result) that generates “winning” is performed.

  The game ball B released from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100.

  By the way, when the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp inlet 2511, the game ball B is moved toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 or the obstacle nail N, and the side unit 2200. May be received in the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. When the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, the guidance of the center accessory 2500 A plurality of the first guide passages 2521 and the second guide passages 2522 of the passage group 2520 that are discharged above the gate portion 2003 and are implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003. After contacting the obstacle nail N, it passes through the gate part 2003 with a certain probability.

  The guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 has a first guide passage 2521 having an entrance opened in the vicinity of the stop portion 1006, and an entrance opened at a left interval from the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. And a second guide passage 2522. Accordingly, when the game ball B is hit with a strength that comes into contact with the stopper 1006 (so-called right hit), the ball enters the first guide passage 2521 and does not come into contact with the stop 1006 (right hit). When the game ball B is hit with a somewhat weaker strength), the second guide passage 2522 is entered with a high probability. That is, the game ball B that has been shot into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 circulates through either the first guide path 2521 or the second guide path 2522 in accordance with the hit strength.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball B is configured to pass through the gate portion 2003 with higher probability when the second guide passage 2522 is distributed than the first guide passage 2521. Further, the second guide passage 2522 is configured to pass through the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate portion 2003 with higher probability than the first guide passage 2521 is circulated.

  When the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2801, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310. When the selected lottery result is “normal hit”, the first attacker unit The closed second start port 2004 in 2400 is in an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second start port 2004.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal lottery performed when the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the suggestion of the normal lottery result (for example, 0 .01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 is opened after the normal variation time has elapsed.

  In addition, since the game ball B passes the gate part 2003 after the game ball B passes the gate part 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is put on hold until the suggestion of the previous normal lottery result ends. In addition, the number of holdings of the normal lottery result is up to 4 and the upper limit is discarded without being held even if the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  The game ball B passing through the gate part 2003 and the left side of the gate part 2003 has a high probability of the side right middle unit 2700 due to a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the gate part 2003 and the side right middle unit 2700. The left side of the right side of the side right middle unit 2700 is received in the general winning opening 2001, and in rare cases it is received in the second sub-out opening 2012. When the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, a predetermined number of gaming balls B are paid out in the same manner as the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. On the other hand, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-out port 2012, the game ball B is discharged out of the game area 5a without the opportunity to be received in the second grand prize port 2006, the second start port 2004, and the first grand prize port 2005. .

  In addition, the game ball B passing through the right side of the gate part 2003 is received in the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700, and the general winning port 2001, second big winning port 2006, second of the side right middle unit 2700 are received. There is no opportunity to be accepted at the start opening 2004 or the first grand prize winning opening 2005, and the game area 5a is discharged.

  As described above, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-out port 2012 on the downstream side of the guide passage group 2520, the game ball B is discharged out of the game area 5a. It is possible to prompt a driving operation so that the game ball B cannot be received in the mouth 2012. In the present embodiment, in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, the second guide passage 2522 has a lower probability of receiving the game ball B at the second sub-out port 2012 than the first guide passage 2521. The game ball B can be urged to be driven toward the second guide passage 2522. In other words, rather than “right-handed” in which the game ball B comes into contact with the stop portion 1006, it is possible to prompt a drive operation that requires fine adjustment for the rotation operation of the handle 182. The main game of pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed.

  The game ball B passing through the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and the second big prize opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600 is reached. Is then discharged to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500.

  At this time, if the game ball B is received at the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 and “small hit” is selected as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, the second big prize is won. Since the mouth 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is accepted into the second grand prize winning port 2006 with a high probability. When the game ball B is received in the second big prize opening 2006 when the second big prize opening 2006 is in the open state, a predetermined number (for example, ten pieces, or from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633). , 13) game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201.

  The game ball B released to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the left side of the second big prize opening 2006 is left on the first shelf 2412a, the second start door 2414, and the second shelf 2412b. After rolling to the left, it is discharged to the left, and further, the third shelf 2412c, the first grand prize opening door 2417, and the fourth shelf 2412d are rolled leftward into the game area 5a. Released.

  When the game ball B rolls on the second start door 2414, the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B at the gate 2003 is “normal hit”, and the second start door When 2414 moves backward, the game ball B is received in the second start port 2004. When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. In addition, in the main control board 1310, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, “big hit”, “medium hit”, “small hit”, “per probability change (probability change)”, “time reduction (short time)” The lottery of the special lottery result (first special lottery result) that generates “winning” is performed.

  In addition, when the game ball B rolls on the first grand prize opening door 2417, a special lottery result (the first lottery) drawn by receiving the game ball B at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 If the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) are special lottery results that generate an advantageous gaming state (for example, “big hit”), the first big prize opening 2005 has a predetermined opening / closing pattern after the elapse of the special variation time. Thus, the game ball B can be received. When the game ball B is received in the first big prize opening 2005 when the first big prize opening 2005 is in the open state, a predetermined number (for example, ten pieces, or the like) from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. , 13) game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the first grand prize opening 2005 is capable of accepting the game balls B, by allowing the first big prize opening 2005 to accept the game balls B, a large number of game balls B can be paid out. Can entertain.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous game state (for example, “hit”, The lottery of the special lottery result that generates “medium hit”, “small hit”, “per probability fluctuation (probability change)”, “per time reduction (shorter time)” is performed. It is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special variation time) In addition, the game ball B is received at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and is drawn by lottery. Special lottery results include “Lost”, “Small Bonus”, “2R Big Bonus”, “5R Big Bonus”, “15R Big Bonus”, “Per Probability (Probability Change)”, “Short Time (Time Reduction)”, “ "Short-term accuracy change", "No short-term accuracy change" Per "," the second big hit ", and the like.

  When the special lottery result is “small hit”, the second big prize opening 2006 is in an open state in which the game ball B can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern that is closed after the turn is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the first big prize opening 2005 becomes open to accept the game ball B, or When any of the conditions for accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B to the winning opening 2005 is satisfied, an open / close pattern for making the game balls B unacceptable (one open / close pattern is 1). (Referred to as round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated by repeating two rounds for “2R jackpot”, five rounds for “5R jackpot”, and 15 rounds for “15R jackpot”.

  In “Big Bonus”, after the big hit game ends, the probability that a special lottery result such as “Big Bonus” will be drawn is changed (“probable hit”), or the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result is changed. ("Short-time hit") or "hit".

  When the special lottery result (for example, the second special lottery result) is “second big hit”, after the first big winning opening 2005 can accept the game ball B in a predetermined pattern, the advantageous game state is ST (special・ Time is generated. This ST is to maintain a certain change or short time state for a predetermined number of fluctuations.

  In this embodiment, the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 are received from the start of the special lottery by the reception of the game ball B to the second start opening 2004 until the special lottery result is suggested. When the game ball B is received at the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, and therefore the suggestion of the special lottery result is started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. Deferred. The number of reserved special lottery results to be held is up to four for each of the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and for more than that, the first start port 2002 and the second start port Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not put on hold and discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result based on the combination of the LEDs that are lit, after a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on / off and blinked for a predetermined time.

  On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and suggests a special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 is a state in which each image sequence is changed in a state where three image sequences composed of a plurality of images are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and the image sequences are displayed in a variable manner. Are stopped and displayed in order, and the respective picture sequences are stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three picture sequences to be stopped and displayed have a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “losing”, after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is selected. An advantageous gaming state (for example, “small hit” game, “big hit” game, etc.) according to the special lottery result occurs.

  It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (fluctuation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image is changed). The time until display is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the lottery special lottery result. It is possible to perform a player participation type effect that operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the unit 301. In the player participation type effect, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate or vibrate the rotation operation unit 302, assist the rotation operation, or inhibit the rotation operation. The press operation unit 303 can be raised and made conspicuous by 367, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the effect operation unit 301.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, each decorative board provided in the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, the back rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back Lower left effect unit 3200, back lower right effect unit 3250, back lower middle effect unit 3300, back upper effect unit 3400, back rear left effect unit 3500, back rear right effect unit 3600, back front left effect unit 3700, and front back It is possible to perform a light emission effect, a display effect, and the like by using the right effect unit 3800 as appropriate, the player can be entertained by various effects, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type effect that operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, when the operation to be operated by the player is wrong or not performed, the correct operation is performed. Inform the player to that effect. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a is requested, when the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates. That effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

[8. Self-supporting auxiliary member]
Next, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 207 is a right side view of the pachinko machine shown with the self-supporting auxiliary member. The self-supporting auxiliary member 7 of the pachinko machine 1 is mounted between the bottom surface of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 and the island board 8 in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. When installing (attaching) to the pachinko machine 1, the pachinko machine 1 is assisted to prevent it from falling over. This self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is formed in a block shape. The self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is formed using at least one of hard foam resin, plastic, corrugated paper, wood, pulp mold, and the like.

  The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a mounting portion for attaching the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 to the lower surface of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3, although detailed illustration is omitted. On the other hand, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is provided with a mounted portion that is mounted on the mounting portion of the dish unit 200. In the present embodiment, the plate unit 200 is provided with a groove extending in the front-rear direction as a mounting portion, and the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is provided with a protrusion inserted into the groove of the plate unit 200 as a mounted portion. ing. Accordingly, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is slid in the front-rear direction with respect to the dish unit 200, and the mounted part of the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is inserted into the mounting part of the dish unit 200, so 7 can be attached (mounted). Thereby, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility with the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 attached to the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 can be easily removed by sliding forward. . Further, when the pachinko machine 1 attached to the island facility is removed, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily attached by sliding it in the direction opposite to that when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is removed.

  The mounting (mounting) of the mounting portion of the dish unit 200 and the mounted portion of the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is not limited to the above-mentioned ones, It is possible to use, for example, “by locking”, “by magnetic attachment by magnet”, “by hook-and-loop fastener”, “by suction plate”, “by peelable adhesive”, and the like. Further, the position of the mounting unit in the dish unit 200 is not limited to the lower surface of the dish unit 200 as described above, but may be “inside”, “at least one of the left and right side surfaces”, “front surface”, and the like. .

  After the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is removed from the mounting portion of the dish unit 200 and stored on the game hall side. Used by attaching to the unit 200. The self-supporting auxiliary member 7 may be attached to the tray unit 200 in advance when shipping the pachinko machine 1 from the manufacturer side to the game hall side, or may be attached at the time of installation work.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 has the dish unit 200, the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame top unit 450 that protrude greatly forward, and thus forward. Although it is easy to fall down, by attaching the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 to the mounting portion on the lower side of the dish unit 200, it is possible to assist the self-supporting of the pachinko machine 1 and prevent it from falling forward. Thus, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is attached to the mounting portion of the dish unit 200, so that the space between the dish unit 200 and the island board 8 is set. Since the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from tipping forward by the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 located at the position, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility, the pachinko machine 1 is prevented from tipping over. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 is easy to install and troublesome.

  In addition, by attaching the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 to the mounting portion of the dish unit 200, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from toppling over, so that damage to the pachinko machine 1 due to the overturning can be avoided, and a game hall or manufacturer It is a pachinko machine 1 that can reduce the burden on the side.

  Furthermore, since the mounting part for attaching the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 to the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 is provided, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is attached to the mounting part of the tray unit 200 to assist the self-supporting of the pachinko machine 1. Thus, it is possible to prevent the device from falling forward, so that it is possible to make the production device or the decorative member provided on the door frame 3 larger or to protrude further forward. A pachinko machine having a greatly different appearance from that of the machine can be easily configured, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player can be provided. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the plate unit 200 and the like are greatly protruded forward in the door frame 3, so that the pachinko machine 1 has a high appealing power.

  In the above-described embodiment, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is detachable from the mounting portion of the dish unit 200 by sliding the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 in the front-rear direction. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The plate unit 200 of the frame 3 may be detachable by sliding in the left-right direction.

  In addition, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 can be attached to and detached from the mounting portion of the door frame 3 (dish unit 200), and the functional member (for example, the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202 is provided detachably on the door frame 3). , The door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410, the door frame top unit 450, etc.). Thereby, when attaching the pachinko machine 1 to the island facility or removing it from the island facility, the functional member removed from the door frame 3 is attached to the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 as the self-supporting auxiliary member 7, and the pachinko machine Allow 1 to stand in a stable state. On the other hand, in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 is attached to the door frame 3 as a functional member, so that a part of the pachinko machine 1 is It can function as a functional member to be configured. Specifically, for example, when the door frame left side unit 400 bulges forward from the left side of the door window 101a in the door frame 3 as a functional member also serving as the self-supporting auxiliary member 7, the door removed from the door frame 3 The frame left side unit 400 can be made to function as the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 by being attached to the lower side of the dish unit 200, and can be made to function as a functional member by being removed from the lower side of the dish unit 200 and attached to the left side of the door window 101a. be able to. For this reason, when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is made detachable, it is not necessary to store the removed self-supporting auxiliary member 7 separately, and it is necessary to manage the removed self-supporting auxiliary member 7 so that it is not lost. And the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

  Alternatively, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 can be attached to and detached from the door frame 3 (dish unit 200), and the functional members (for example, “substrate cover that covers the substrate”, “wiring” provided to the main body frame 4 in a removable manner). Wiring holding member for holding ”,“ Protective cover for protecting the rear of the effect display device and movable decorative body ”,“ Storage tank for storing game media ”,“ Guiding member for distributing game media ”, etc.) You may make it also use. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or removed from the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the main body frame 4 is attached to the door frame 3 (dish unit 200), so that the pachinko machine 1 is stable. Be able to stand on their own. On the other hand, in a state in which the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility, a function of constituting a part of the pachinko machine 1 by attaching the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the door frame 3 to a predetermined part of the main body frame 4. It can function as a member. For this reason, when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is made detachable, it is not necessary to store the removed self-supporting auxiliary member 7 separately, and it is necessary to manage the removed self-supporting auxiliary member 7 so that it is not lost. And the burden on the game hall side can be reduced. When the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is also used as a functional member provided on the main body frame 4, the player touches the removable functional member when the functional member is attached to the main body frame 4. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the functional member from being detached due to the player, and the pachinko machine 1 that does not give the player unpleasant feeling can be obtained.

  Further, when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is also used as a functional member provided in the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, the pachinko machine 1 is compared with a case where the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is not used as a functional member. It is possible to reduce the number of parts required and to suppress an increase in cost.

  Furthermore, you may make it provide the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 so that accommodation in the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 is possible. Thereby, when it is not necessary to attach the pachinko machine 1 to the island facility and make it independent, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is accommodated in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, so that the pachinko machine 1 looks good due to the presence of the self-supporting auxiliary member 7. It is possible to prevent the situation from becoming worse or the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 from interfering with the game. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or detached from the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 accommodated in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 is taken out so that the pachinko machine 1 can stand on its own. Therefore, the installation work and removal work of the pachinko machine 1 can be facilitated. Further, in this case, it is not necessary to store the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 as compared with the case where the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is removed and stored separately, and it is troublesome to manage the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 so that it is not lost. Can be eliminated and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

  In addition, in said embodiment, although the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 which had the to-be-mounted part attached to the mounting part of the plate unit 200 was shown, it is not limited to this and it is not having a to-be-mounted part Also good.

  Moreover, although the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 that can be attached to and detached from the mounting portion of the dish unit 200 is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is built in the dish unit 200 (door frame 3). When installing in the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 may be protruded downward and brought into contact with the roof plate 8. Thereby, after the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility, it is not necessary to remove the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 and store it separately, so that it is possible to reduce the labor involved in managing the game hall.

[9. Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The decorative body 3111, the decorative sheet 3112, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 in the back and rear effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment are the decorative members of the present invention, the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 of the present embodiment. Is the decorative plate body of the present invention, the light guide radiation plate 3113 in the present embodiment is the radiation plate of the present invention, the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 in the present embodiment is the peripheral wall portion of the present invention, and the present embodiment. The back and back decorative substrate 3114 corresponds to the decorative substrate of the present invention, the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b in the present embodiment correspond to the LED of the present invention, and the first LED 3114a in the present embodiment corresponds to the specific LED of the present invention. ing.

[10. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the back and back movable decorative body 3110 of the back and back effect unit 3100, on the front side of the back and back decoration board 3114 on which the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LEDs 3114b are mounted. The decorative body 3111 constituting the decorative member and the light guide radiation plate 3113 are arranged, and the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the front side of the decorative body 3111. Since the portion of the decorative body 3111 excluding the metal decorative portion 3111d, the decorative sheet 3112, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 are positioned between the portion 3111d, the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d is It is possible to prevent the linear discharge from the portion 3111d to the back decorative substrate 3114. In addition, even if the static electricity of the metal decoration portion 3111d tries to discharge the back decorative substrate 3114, the static electricity cannot pass through the interior of the decoration body 3111, the light guide radiation plate 3113, etc. Must flow along the front surface of the flange portion 312b by passing through the outer periphery and bypassing the rear end of the flange portion 3113b projecting rearward from the light guide radiation plate 3113 to the inside of the flange portion 3113b (back side decorative substrate 3114 side). First, the creeping distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d to the back decorative substrate 3114 can be sufficiently taken by the decorative body 3111, the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the like.

  At this time, the outer periphery of the back decorative substrate 3114 is formed smaller than the outer periphery of the decorative body 3111 and the like so as to be surrounded by the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Static electricity detoured to the inside needs to flow along the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 as much as the back decorative substrate 3114 is small, and the creeping distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d to the back decorative substrate 3114 is further increased. It is possible to suppress discharge to the back decorative substrate 3114. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d from being discharged to the back back decoration board 3114. Therefore, the first LED 3114a mounted on the back back decoration board 3114 by discharge (spark). And the second LED 3114b and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the decoration body 3111 having the metal decoration portion 3111d is surely decorated with light emission by the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back decoration board 3114. It is possible to make the player enjoy the light-emitting decoration (light-emitting effect) of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 and suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the copper foil 3114d constituting the circuit in the back decorative substrate 3114 is provided in a predetermined distance SL from the outer peripheral edge of the substrate body 3114c, static electricity is applied from the outer peripheral side of the back decorative substrate 3114 to the copper. Even if the discharge to the foil 3114d is attempted, the creepage distance EL can be further increased by the predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery of the substrate body 3114c to the copper foil 3114d, and the discharge is performed to the back decorative substrate 3114 (copper foil 3114d). It can be suppressed. Accordingly, since it is possible to prevent static electricity from being discharged from the metal decoration portion 3111d to the back decoration board 3114, a plurality of first LEDs 3114a mounted on the back decoration board 3114 by the discharge (spark) and the first LEDs 3114a. The two LEDs 3114b can be prevented from being damaged, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  Further, since the flange portion 3113b surrounding the outer periphery of the back decorative substrate 3114 is provided on the light guide radiation plate 3113, the flange portion 3113b protrudes outside the decorative body 3111 when the decorative body 3111 is viewed from the front. The appearance of the decorative body 3111 can be improved.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the decorative body 3111, the decorative sheet 3112, the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the decoration on both sides of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 in the back rear movable decorative body 3110 of the back rear rendering unit 3100. Since it is covered with the body base 3115, static electricity can be prevented from being discharged from the direction perpendicular to the surface of the back decorative substrate 3114. Further, in the back decorative board 3114, a plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b as electronic components are mounted on the front surface of the board body 3114c, and a copper foil 3114d constituting a circuit on both sides of the board body 3114c is provided. The front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided with a decorative body 3111, a decorative sheet 3112, and a light guide radiation plate 3113 (light guide radiation plate 3113). 3113 a main body portion 3113 a), the rear surface of the back decorative substrate 3114 is covered with a cover plate portion 3115 a of the decorative body base 3115, and the back light decorative substrate 3114 is further covered from the main body portion 3113 a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. The flange portion 3113b surrounding the outer periphery of the decorative body base 3115 from the cover plate portion 3115a to the back side Since the flange portion 3115b surrounding the outer periphery of the 3114 is extended to the front side, the back and back decoration board 3114 extends from the metal decoration portion 3111d provided on the surface of the decoration body 3111 opposite to the back and back decoration board 3114. The surface of the creeping distance EL where static electricity is discharged up to the copper foil 3114d advances to the rear side outside the flange portion 3113b, and turns back to the inside of the flange portion 3113b at the tip (rear end) of the flange portion 3113b. The copper foil of the back decoration board 3114 is formed from the metal decoration part 3111d to the front side between the 3113b and the flange part 3115b, and a meandering route that turns back to the inside of the flange part 3115b at the tip (front end) of the flange part 3115b. The creepage distance EL up to 3114d can be made sufficiently long, That would be discharged to the substrate 3114 can be suppressed. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d from being discharged to the back back decoration board 3114. Therefore, a plurality of second electrodes mounted on the back back decoration board 3114 by discharge (spark). It is possible to prevent the one LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, the electronic component 3114e, and the like from being damaged, and the decorative body 3111 having the metal decoration portion 3111d is connected to the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the first LED 3114a on the back rear decoration board 3114. The two LEDs 3114b can be surely decorated with light emission, and the player can enjoy the light decoration (light emission effect) of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 (back movable decorative body 3110) to suppress a decrease in interest. .

  In addition, since a coating film (not shown) is provided on the surface of the back body decorative substrate 3114 on which the copper foil 3114d is provided, static electricity is also discharged to the copper foil 3114d by the coating film. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 that reliably exhibits the above-described effects can be provided.

  Further, the leg portion 3113f of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the protrusion 3115e of the decorative body base 3115 are brought into contact with a portion of the back decorative substrate 3114 where the copper foil 3114d is not provided. In other words, the copper foil 3114d is not provided at the portion where the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the decorative body base 3115 are in contact with each other on the back decorative substrate 3114. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d from being discharged to the copper foil 3114d through the portion where the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the decoration body base 3115 abut on the back decorative substrate 3114. It is possible to achieve the same effects as described above.

  Further, since the copper foil 3114d is not provided in the portion where the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the decorative body base 3115 are in contact with the back decorative board 3114, the vibration in the pachinko machine 1 and the back movable decorative body 3110 Even if friction is generated between the light guide radiation plate 3113 or the decorative body base 3115 and the back decorative substrate 3114 due to vibration due to movement, the copper foil 3114d is not worn or peeled off by the friction. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems such as a circuit that connects the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, the second LED 3114b, the electronic component 3114e, etc., or a short circuit caused by the peeled copper foil 3114d. In addition, the electronic component 3114e and the like can function reliably, and the same effects as described above can be obtained.

  Further, as described above, by covering both sides of the back and back decorative substrate 3114 with the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the decorative body base 3115, electrostatic discharge from a direction perpendicular to the surface of the back and back decorative substrate 3114 is prevented. Therefore, the discharge resistance performance of the coating film can be lowered, the coating film can be made as thin as possible, and the cost for the coating film can be reduced.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the plurality of first LEDs 3114a mounted on the back and back decorative board 3114 in the back and back movable decorative body 3110 of the back and back effect unit 3100 are caused to emit light, the back from the first LED 3114a. The light irradiated in the direction along the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 faces the light emitting surface of the first LED 3114a on the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c in which the first LED 3114a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is housed. Is incident on the main body portion 3113a from the portion, and is reflected forward by the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e provided on the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, and is emitted from the front surface of the main body portion 3113a. The light-transmitting decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 provided on the front side emit light And thus to be decorated. At this time, since the decorative body 3111 and the light guide radiation plate 3113 have a flat plate shape, the thickness in the front-rear direction from the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 can be reduced. The thickness of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be reduced. Further, the leg portion 3113f protrudes backward from the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 so as to be continuous with the portion irradiated with light from the first LED 3114a on the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c. Since the light receiving portion 3113i that receives the light from the first LED 3114a in the light guide radiation plate 3113 can be widened, more light from the first LED 3114a can be incident into the main body portion 3113a and emitted forward. The decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can be brightened and decorated with more light. In the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, the light in the direction along the front surface of the back decorative substrate 3114 is reflected forward by the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e, so that the first LED 3114a is forward. Compared with the case where light is emitted toward the front, the distance from the light emitting surface of the first LED 3114a to the front portion where the light in the light guide radiation plate 3113 is emitted forward is increased, and the distance from the first LED 3114a is increased. Light can be widely diffused and emitted forward. Accordingly, the entire decoration body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 can be brightly decorated with no unevenness, and the appearance of the light emission decoration in the decoration body 3111 or the like is not impaired, and the effect of the decoration body 3111 or the like is sufficiently exhibited. be able to. As described above, since the dimension (thickness) in the front-rear direction of the back movable ornament 3110 can be reduced, the degree of freedom in arrangement of the back movable ornament 3110 in the pachinko machine 1 can be increased. It is possible to place the back and back movable decorative body 3110 in a part that is not placed in the pachinko machine, and the back and back movable decorative body 3110 is placed in an unexpected part, thereby attracting the player's attention strongly. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected by the player as a pachinko machine to be played, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player can be provided.

  Further, since the plurality of first LEDs 3114a on the front surface of the back decorative substrate 3114 are accommodated in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c penetrating the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, the first LED 3114a The heat can be diffused into the first LED housing portion 3113c, and the temperature rise of the first LED 3114a can be suppressed. Further, the leg portion 3113f protruding backward from the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 forms a gap between the main body portion 3113a and the back decorative substrate 3114. Heat from one LED 3114a can be discharged, and accumulation of heat from the first LED 3114a can be suppressed. Therefore, the heat accumulated between the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the back decorative board 3114 can reduce the light emission of the first LED 3114a from becoming unstable or damaged, and the first LED 3114a can be reduced. The first LED 3114a can surely emit light as intended, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 (back-back movable decoration body 3110) can be surely light-decorated, and the back-side movable decoration body 3110 emits light. It is possible to entertain the player with a decoration (light-emitting effect) and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the auxiliary reflection portion 3113g capable of reflecting the light from the first LED 3114a forward is provided on the opposite side of the leg portion 3113f of the light guide radiation plate 3113 from the first LED housing portion 3113c. The light incident from the inner surface side of the first LED housing portion 3113c in the leg portion 3113f is emitted from the opposite surface to the outside of the leg portion 3113f (main body portion 3113a) by the portion 3113g, and the light from the first LED 3114a is emitted. Since passing through the leg portion 3113f can be reduced, more light from the first LED 3114a can be incident into the main body portion 3113a, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  Moreover, the copper foil 3114d which comprises the circuit for light-emitting several 1st LED 3114a (and 2nd LED 3114b) is provided in the substantially whole front surface and back surface of the back back decoration board | substrate 3114, The said copper foil 3114d Is excellent in thermal conductivity, the heat from the first LED 3114a can be widely diffused through the copper foil 3114d and can be dissipated from the copper foil 3114d, so that the heat from the first LED 3114a is hardly accumulated. Thus, the above-described operational effects can be reliably exhibited.

  Further, on the front surface of the back decorative substrate 3114, the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f that is recessed backward on the light emitting surface side of the first LED 3114a is provided by not providing the copper foil 3114d, and then the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f is provided. Since the leg portion 3113f that constitutes a part of the light receiving portion 3113i that receives the light from the first LED 3114a mounted on the front surface of the substrate body 3114c in the light guide radiation plate 3113 is brought into contact, the light guide radiation Without widening the gap between the main body 3113a of the plate 3113 and the back decorative board 3114, it is possible to increase the protruding amount of the leg 3113f to the rear, and more light from the first LED 3114a is obtained. 3113a can be made incident, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 (back movable decorative body 3110) become brighter. It is possible to light decoration.

  Further, since the light reflection assisting region 3114f that is recessed backward from the front surface of the back decorative substrate 3114 is provided, the angle of irradiation from the first LED 3114a to the bottom surface of the light reflecting assisting region 3114f is set to Since the angle can be made perpendicular to the front surface, light from the first LED 3114a can be easily reflected forward by the bottom surface of the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 become brighter. It is possible to achieve the same effects as described above by decorating with light emission.

  Further, since a part of the light from the first LED 3114a is reflected forward by the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f recessed backward on the back back decorative board 3114, the first LED 3114a on the front surface of the back back decorative board 3114 is reflected. Compared with the case where the reflection projection is projected forward on the light emitting surface side, the shadow of the projection due to the light from the first LED 3114a falls on the front surface of the back decorative substrate 3114, and the shadow portion becomes darker. Rather, the entire back movable decorative body 3110 can be illuminated and decorated with uniform brightness.

  In addition, since the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f of the back decorative substrate 3114 is formed by not providing the copper foil 3114d, when forming a circuit for causing the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b to emit light, Since the light reflection assisting region 3114f can be formed together, the light reflection assisting region 3114f can be easily formed as compared with the case where the substrate body 3114c is physically recessed by cutting or pressing. The increase in the cost concerning the machine 1 can be suppressed.

  Further, the leg portion 3113f of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is brought into contact with the light reflection assisting region 3114f formed by not providing the copper foil 3114d, and the leg portion 3113f is made of the copper of the back decorative board 3114. Since there is no contact with the foil 3114d, even if friction occurs between the leg 3113f and the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f due to vibration in the pachinko machine 1, the copper foil 3114d (and the coating film) is worn by the friction. It does not peel off or peel off. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems such as disconnection of the circuit for causing the first LED 3114a to emit light, or short circuit due to the peeled copper foil 3114d, and the first LED 3114a to emit light reliably. Thus, it is possible to show the player a desired light emission effect.

  Further, since the white coating film is provided on the front and rear surfaces of the back and back decorative substrate 3114, the light irradiated on the front side of the back and back decorative substrate 3114 is reflected forward by the white color of the coating film. It is possible to brighten the front surface of the back and back decorative substrate 3114 to brighten and decorate the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 (back and back movable decorative body 3110).

  Further, the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b, the circuit pattern, and the like provided on the front surface of the back decorative substrate 3114 are moved forward through the decorative body 3111, the decorative sheet 3112, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 by the white coating film. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be provided which can improve the appearance of the decoration of the movable decorative body 3110 behind the back and can sufficiently exhibit the decoration effect.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a flat plate provided between the decorative body 3111 (decorative sheet 3112) of the back and back movable decorative body 3110 of the back and rear effect unit 3100 and the back and back decorative substrate 3114. Since the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d, through which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the front surface of the back decorative substrate 3114 are inserted, are provided on the light guide radiation plate 3113. The first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are compared with the case where the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are formed in a concave shape with a bottom that does not penetrate the first LED housing 3113c and the second LED housing 3113d. The volume (heat volume) of the space into which the LED is inserted can be increased, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED It is possible to diffuse the heat from the 114b. At this time, since the adjacent (approaching) first LED accommodating portions 3113c are connected, the volume (heat capacity) of the space into which the first LED 3114a is inserted can be further increased. Heat from the LED 3114a can be easily diffused. Accordingly, heat from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can be made difficult to be accumulated, so that the emitted light of the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b becomes unstable due to the accumulated heat, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b The first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can be surely emitted as intended, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can be used to decorate the decorative body 3111 (back-back movable decorative body). 3110) can be surely decorated with light emission, and the player can enjoy the light emission decoration (light emission effect) by the movable movable decoration body 3110 behind, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest.

  Further, the light guide radiation plate 3113 is continuous with the inner surface irradiated with light from the first LED 3114a in the first LED housing portion 3113c in which the first LED 3114a that emits light in the direction along the front surface is inserted. The leg portion 3113f protruding backward from the main body portion 3113a is brought into contact with the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c of the back rear decorative substrate 3114, so that the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the substrate main body 3114c of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 are obtained. Since a gap is formed between the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b, heat can be discharged through the gap. Thereby, it is possible to prevent heat from being accumulated from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b and to reduce light emission from becoming unstable or damaged, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are intended. As described above, the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can surely make the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 emit light, and the back-side movable decorative body 3110 can emit light (light effect). Can be made to be enjoyed by the player and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the back rear decorative substrate 3114, the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the decorative body 3111 are provided in the back rear movable decorative body 3110, by moving the back rear movable decorative body 3110, the generation of wind The front and rear sides of the back and back decoration board 3114 can be ventilated to release heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e. It is possible to reduce the instability of the light emission of the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b and the damage of the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b due to the accumulated heat. An effect can be produced.

  Furthermore, since the electronic component 3114e for causing the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b to emit light is mounted on the rear surface of the board body 3114c, the heat from the electronic component 3114e affects the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of the problem, and it is possible to prevent the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b from being defective due to heat from the electronic component 3114e, and to achieve the same effects as described above.

  In addition, since the adjacent (approaching) first LED housing portions 3113c are connected to each other, a thin portion is formed between the first LED housing portions 3113c in the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Can be avoided, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 can be hardly damaged.

  In addition, since the electronic component 3114e is mounted on the rear surface of the board body 3114c, the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b mounted on the front surface of the board body 3114c correspond to the light guide radiation plate 3113, respectively. By inserting the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d, the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 (main body portion 3113a) and the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c can be made as close as possible. The dimension (thickness) in the front-rear direction from the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 (back movable movable body 3110) can be reduced.

  Further, since the electronic component 3114e is mounted on the rear surface of the board body 3114c, the electronic component 3114e can be seen from the front through the decorative body 3111 and the light guide radiation plate 3113 even when a dark color such as black is used. In other words, the appearance of the decorative body 3111 (back movable movable body 3110) can be prevented from being deteriorated, and the appearance of the back movable movable body 3110 can be improved and the decorative effect can be sufficiently exhibited. .

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first decorative protrusions 3111a (metals) respectively surrounding the plurality of third decorative protrusions 3111c in the decorative body 3111 of the back movable movable decorative body 3110 of the back rear effect unit 3100. The first LED 3114a is mounted on the back and back decorative substrate 3114 on the back side of the decorative portion 3111d) with the first LED housing portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 in between, and the metal decorative portion 3111d is visible from the front to the rear. The first LED 3114a and the first LED housing portion 3113c can be hardly seen from the front by the metal decoration portion 3111d, and the first LED 3114a and the first LED housing from the front (player side). By seeing the portion 3113c, the decorativeness of the decorative body 3111 (back movable decorative body 3110) is impaired, and the appearance is poor. It is possible to avoid Ukoto, decorative effect of the decorative body 3111 can be reliably exhibited, the reduction of interest to delight decoration decorative body 3111 the player can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the first LED accommodating portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a shape along the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111, even if the first LED accommodating portion 3113c is seen through the decorative body 3111, Since the first LED accommodating portion 3113c is along the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c appears to be part of the decoration by the first decorative protrusion 3111a. The presence of the first LED housing portion 3113c can be made difficult to notice, and it is possible to avoid the appearance of the decorative body 3111 from being deteriorated and deteriorating the appearance, and the decorative effect by the decorative body 3111 is ensured. The pachinko machine 1 which can be made to exhibit and produces the effect similar to the above can be provided.

  Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the third decorative protrusion 3111c is surrounded by the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative part 3111d), the metal decorative part 3111d acts as a frame to make the third decorative protrusion 3111c stand out. be able to. Then, a plurality of first LEDs 3114a are mounted so as to irradiate light to a portion behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c in the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is mounted. Since light is irradiated into the main body 3113a in the direction along the front surface, and light in the direction along the front surface irradiated by the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e of the main body portion 3113a is radiated forward. The light from the first LED 3114a can be radiated forward after being diffused to the widest possible range in the rear part of the third decorative protrusion 3111c in the main body 3113a. A wide range of the decorative protrusion 3111c can be illuminated and decorated with uniform brightness, and the metal decorative portion 31 in the decorative body 3111 is provided. By making the third decorative protrusion 3111c surrounded by 1d more conspicuous, the decorative effect of the decorative body 3111 can be further exerted, and the player can enjoy decoration of the decorative body 3111 (back movable decorative body 3110). It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. At this time, since light is emitted from the first LED 3114a in the direction along the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113, the point light source of the first LED 3114a can be seen from the front through the decorative body 3111. Can be reduced. For this reason, since the plurality of third decorative protrusions 3111c of the decorative body 3111 can be light-decorated uniformly, it is possible to entertain the player with the light-emitting decoration of the decorative body 3111 and to enhance the game. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, when the third decorative protrusion 3111c of the decorative body 3111 is decorated with light emission by the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, the first back of the back decorative substrate 3114 on the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is displayed. Since the leg 3113f protruding backward is provided at the site irradiated with the light from the LED 3114a, the area of the site (light receiving unit 3113i) irradiated with the light from the first LED 3114a by the leg 3113f is widened. Therefore, more light from the first LED 3114a can be made incident into the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Accordingly, since the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 can radiate more light from the first LED 3114a forward, the third decorative protrusion 3111c of the decorative body 3111 can be brightly decorated. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by showing the player a light-emitting decoration with a higher production effect.

  In addition, the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is provided with a plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c penetrating in the front-rear direction in a shape along the metal decoration portion 3111d on the rear side of the metal decoration portion 3111d. The brightness of the light emitting decoration can be varied with the plurality of first LED housing parts 3113c (metal decoration part 3111d) as boundaries. More specifically, when the light traveling in the direction along the front surface reaches the portion (inner peripheral surface) of the first LED housing portion 3113c penetrating back and forth inside the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, A part of the inner peripheral surface is reflected to the inside of the main body 3113a, and the rest is radiated to the inside of the first LED housing 3113c. And when the light radiated | emitted to the inner side of the 1st LED accommodating part 3113c reaches | attains the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side of the 1st LED accommodating part 3113c, a part will be inside the 1st LED accommodating part 3113c by the inner peripheral surface. The remaining light is incident on the inside of the main body 3113a. Thereby, when the light in the main body part 3113a tries to pass through the first LED housing part 3113c, the light amount is greatly reduced and guided to the opposite side, and the opposite side of the first LED housing part 3113c becomes dark. . For this reason, when the first LED 3114a is provided on both sides of the first LED housing portion 3113c, if only the first LED 3114a on one side is caused to emit light, one side becomes brighter than the first LED housing portion 3113c. When the other side becomes dark and only the first LED 3114a on the other side emits light, the other side becomes brighter and the other side becomes darker than the first LED housing portion 3113c, and when both the first LEDs 3114a emit light, the first LED housing portion 3113c. Both sides of the screen become brighter. And since the some 1st LED accommodating part 3113c is provided in the back side of the metal decoration part 3111d, as above-mentioned, by making the 1st LED 3114a light-emit appropriately, on the boundary of the metal decoration part 3111d, It is possible to brighten only the side, brighten only the other side, or brighten both sides, and can show the player a variety of lighting effects, making it difficult for the player to get bored and less interesting Can be suppressed.

  Since each of the plurality of third decorative protrusions 3111c is surrounded by the metal decorative part 3111d (first decorative protrusion 3111a), the first decorative protrusion 3111a is formed between the third decorative protrusions 3111c. Light from the first LED 3114a for illuminating and decorating another third decorative projection 3111c is received by the first LED accommodating portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 provided behind the portion. Since it can be made difficult, only the predetermined third decorative protrusion 3111c (the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d in the decorative sheet 3112) can be decorated with light emission in a good state. Accordingly, the plurality of third decorative protrusions 3111c can be decorated with light emission in a predetermined order, or the special third decorative protrusions 3111c can be light-decorated to give a player a predetermined message. Therefore, a variety of light emission effects can be shown to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, when the second LED 3114b of the back rear decorative board 3114 is caused to emit light, the light passes directly through the second LED housing portion 3113d through which the light guide radiation plate 3113 passes and directly on the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 (decorative sheet 3112). The part irradiated with light from the second LED 3114b in the decorative body 3111 can be illuminated and decorated in a spot shape brighter than the part illuminated by the first LED 3114a. Therefore, since the player can show the portion that is decorated with light emission in a planar shape by the first LED 3114a and the portion that is decorated with light emission in a spot shape by the second LED 3114b, the luminous decoration of the decorative body 3111 can be sharpened. In addition to attracting the player's interest strongly, it is possible to further enhance the effect of the light-emitting decoration, and to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, as described above, the metal decoration portion 3111d can make the first LED 3114a and the first LED housing portion 3113c difficult to see from the front. Even if the dimension (thickness) is reduced, the decorativeness of the decorative body 3111 (and the decorative sheet 3112) is not impaired, and the decorative effect of the decorative body 3111 can be sufficiently exhibited. Therefore, since the size (thickness) in the front-rear direction from the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 in the back movable movable body 3110 can be reduced, the back rear movable decorative body in the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. The degree of freedom of arrangement of 3110 can be increased.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the transparent decorative body 3111 in the back rear movable decorative body 3110 of the back rear effect unit 3100, the first decorative protrusion 3111a that protrudes most forward and the first decoration Three decorative protrusions whose front surfaces of the second decorative protrusion 3111b protruding smaller than the protrusion 3111a and the third decorative protrusion 3111c protruding smaller than the second decorative protrusion 3111b are curved. Since the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a by pressing the foil, the portion where the metal decorative portion 3111d is not provided remains transparent. That is, since the single decorative body 3111 having the metal decoration portion 3111d and the transparent portion (translucent decoration portion) is used, the structure is such that the metal decoration portion and the translucent decoration portion are assembled as in the conventional case. Since there is no necessity and there is no assembly structure, it can suppress that the dimension of the front-back direction becomes large, and the thickness of the front-back direction can be made small as a result. Therefore, since the degree of freedom of arrangement of the decorative body 3111 (back-back movable decorative body 3110) in the pachinko machine 1 can be increased, the decorative body 3111 can be arranged at a location that is not arranged in the conventional pachinko machine. In addition, by placing the decorative body 3111 in an unexpected part, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and it can be easily selected by the player as a pachinko machine to play, and appeals to the player A powerful pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

  In addition, a metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the three decorative protrusions of the decorative body 3111, and the metal decorative portion is imitated along the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Since 3111d is curved, the light in the pachinko machine 1 and the light in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reflected in various directions, and the metal decoration portion 3111d can be shimmered. The three-dimensional effect of the metal decoration part 3111d (first decoration protrusion 3111a) can be enhanced, and the player can give a high-class feeling (premium feeling) by the three-dimensional metal decoration part 3111d. Can attract a lot of interest.

  In addition, when the metal decoration part 3111d is provided in both the 1st decoration protrusion 3111a and the 2nd decoration protrusion 3111b, the site | part which has the metallic luster from which the front-back direction differs in the decoration of the decoration body 3111 will be seen. Therefore, the depth feeling can be further increased with respect to the decoration, and the player's interest can be more easily attracted by the three-dimensional decoration.

  In addition, the transparent decorative body 3111 has a first decorative protrusion 3111a, a second decorative protrusion 3111b, and a third decorative protrusion 3111c with different forward protrusion amounts, and the front of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Since the metal decoration part 3111d is provided, a three-dimensional effect can be imparted to the decoration of the decoration body 3111 by three decoration protrusions having different protrusion amounts. Thus, a three-dimensional decoration with a sense of depth can be shown to the player. Therefore, even if the thickness (dimension in the front-rear direction) of the decorative body 3111 is reduced, the decorative effect does not decrease, and the decorative body 3111 The size in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the decorative body 3111 can be increased, and the decorative effect by the decorative body 3111 can be sufficiently exerted, thereby attracting the player's attention strongly. Can be made a highly appealing pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the metal decoration part 3111d is provided in the first decoration protrusion 3111a that protrudes most forward in the decoration protrusion of the decoration body 3111, and the metal decoration part 3111d protrudes most forward. The part 3111d can be made more conspicuous, and the apparent drop between the metal decoration part 3111d and the part other than the metal decoration part 3111d can be made large, and a three-dimensional effect can be given to the decoration of the decoration body 3111. Can do. Accordingly, since the three-dimensional decoration can be shown even if the size of the decorative body 3111 is reduced, the size of the decorative body 3111 can be reduced, and the above-described effects can be ensured. The pachinko machine 1 that can be played can be easily realized.

  Further, as described above, the size of the decorative body 3111 in the front-rear direction can be reduced (thinner thickness can be reduced) to increase the degree of freedom in arrangement. Since it can be provided, a variety of effects can be presented to the player by providing a large number of effect members, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Moreover, since the metal decoration part 3111d is provided in the first decoration protrusion 3111a, the second decoration protrusion 3111b and the third decoration protrusion 3111c not provided with the metal decoration part 3111d protrude forward. Due to this lens effect, a sense of depth is added to the decorative pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 provided at the rear, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 show the player a more three-dimensional decoration. be able to. Further, since the decorative sheet 3112 has a sheet shape, an increase in thickness (dimension) in the front-rear direction can be suppressed even if the decorative sheet 3112 is provided on the rear side of the decorative body 3111. For this reason, it is possible to provide an effect member (back-back movable decorative body 3110) composed of a decorative body 3111 and a decorative sheet 3112 having a small thickness in the front-rear direction, and a pachinko machine having the same operational effects as described above. It can be 1.

  In addition, since the decorative sheet 3112 having the auxiliary decorative portions (the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b) is provided on the rear side of the decorative body 3111, the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b can It is possible to reduce the appearance of the rear side of the decorative body 3111 through the transparent side surface of the one decorative protrusion 3111a. Accordingly, even when the decorative body 3111 is viewed obliquely from the front, the rear side of the decorative body 3111 can be made difficult to see by the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b. This can be avoided, and the decorative effect by the decoration of the decorative body 3111 can be sufficiently exhibited.

  In addition, since the decorative sheet 3112 provided on the rear side of the decorative body 3111 has the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b, the first contour projection portion is formed by the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b. It is possible to make the player have an illusion that the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided on the side surface of the 3111a. Further, the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b of the decoration sheet 3112 are provided outside the metal decoration portion 3111d in a front view, so that the metal decoration portion is formed by the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b. 3111d can be shown widely. For this reason, the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can show the player a decoration with a higher decorative effect, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power that can attract the player's attention strongly. Can be provided.

  Furthermore, since the metal decoration part 3111d in the decorative body 3111 is formed by foil stamping, the metal decoration part 3111d can be easily formed as compared with the case where the metal decoration part 3111d is immersed in a plating tank or vaporized metal is deposited. The increase of the cost concerning the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the hot stamping device for foil-pressing the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided with a flat plate-like hot plate having elasticity, the hot plate hits the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111. When contacted, the surface of the hot plate is elastically deformed so that it follows the front surface of the curved first decorative projection 3111a, and the metal foil of the transfer sheet is formed on the curved front surface of the first decorative projection 3111a. Can be transferred (foil-pressed) in a good state so as to be in close contact with each other. In addition, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed by foil stamping using a hot stamp device, the transfer sheet having the metal foil first contacts the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, whereby the transfer sheet is pulled. As a result, it becomes difficult to generate wrinkles, and the metal foil can be transferred beautifully without wrinkles, so that the metal decoration portion 3111d having good appearance can be obtained.

  In addition, since the surface of the hot plate facing the decorative body 3111 is a flat surface having elasticity, the transfer sheet can be used without replacing the hot plate even if the shape of the first decorative protrusion 3111a is different. The metal foil can be transferred. Therefore, it is possible to easily cope with a model change or a design change, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost.

  Furthermore, since the surface of the hot plate that faces the decorative body 3111 has elasticity, the hot plate is moved according to the distance by which the hot plate is moved to the decorative body 3111, that is, the hot plate is moved to the first decorative protrusion. The amount (depth) of immersion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a with respect to the hot plate can be varied according to the strength pressed against the 3111a, and the hot plate in the first decorative protrusion 3111a (decorative body 3111) can be varied. It is possible to widen or narrow the range of the portion where the abuts. That is, it is possible to freely change the range in which the foil is pressed against the decorative body 3111 (the decorative protrusion protruding forward). Thus, when it is desired to change the range in which the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided due to a model change or design change, the range of the metal decoration portion 3111d can be easily changed by changing the relative movement amount of the hot plate. it can.

  In addition, as described above, the range of foil pressing with respect to the decorative body 3111 (the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the like) can be freely changed by the elastic surface of the hot plate. When the metal decorative portion 3111d is also provided in the decorative protrusion 3111b, the color of the metal decorative portion 3111d can be made different between the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b. More specifically, in the conventional technology, when a metal decorative portion having a different color is formed on one member (decorative body), for example, after forming a metal layer of the first color on the whole, a masking process is performed. By forming a second color metal layer on the entire surface and removing the masking, it is possible to make the color different from the unmasked portion. Alternatively, after the first color metal layer is formed on the whole, a second color metal layer is formed thereon, and a part of the second color metal layer is peeled off by laser peeling or the like. The color can be different between the peeled site and the non-peeled site. However, even if any of the above-described techniques is used, there is a problem that it takes time to manufacture the decorative body and the cost increases. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the hot-plate elastic surface can freely change the range in which the foil is pressed against the first decorative projection 3111a of the decorative body 3111, etc. Using the transfer sheet having the metal foil of the first color, the hot plate is moved so as to be immersed up to the front surface of the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the first color metal foil is moved to the second decorative protrusion 3111b and the first decorative protrusion 3111b. Transfer to the decorative protrusion 3111a, and then, using the transfer sheet having the second color metal foil, only the first decorative protrusion 3111a is immersed without contacting the front surface of the second decorative protrusion 3111b. Then, the hot plate is moved so that the second color metal foil is transferred to the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Thereby, the metal decoration part 3111d of a different color can be easily formed by the 1st decoration protrusion 3111a and the 2nd decoration protrusion 3111b, and while being able to suppress the increase in cost, it is more excellent in decorativeness The pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player can be provided.

  Furthermore, since the metal decoration part 3111d is formed by foil stamping, compared to the case where the metal decoration part 3111d is left using laser peeling, a metal foil peeling residue is generated in a portion other than the metal decoration part 3111d. This is not done, and deterioration of the appearance of the decorative body 3111 can be reduced. More specifically, when laser peeling is used, if the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to be peeled has irregularities such as the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the focal length of the laser depends on the position of the decorative body 3111. Therefore, the metal layer is not sufficiently peeled off at a site that is more than a predetermined distance (or close) with respect to the focal length, and there is a possibility that a peeling residue may occur and the appearance may deteriorate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided only at a necessary portion by foil pressing, and it is not necessary to peel off the metal foil after the foil pressing to form a transparent portion, which is good-looking. A decorative body 3111 can be formed.

  In addition, as described above, since the thickness in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the degree of freedom in arrangement can be increased. Therefore, the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 are not visible from the player side (retracted position). Position) and the appearance position visible from the player side, the back movable movable body 3110 is moved. Therefore, the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided by moving the back back movable decoration body 3110 to the appearance position. The appearance of the movable decorative body 3110 (decorative body 3111), which is highly decorative, can make the player think that there is something good and expect the game. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 of the back and rear effect unit 3100, the flat light guide radiation plate is arranged on the flat decorative body 3111 having the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface. 3113 and the back and back decorative board 3114 are provided, and the flange portion 3113b surrounding the back and back decorative board 3114 is extended rearward from the outer periphery of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the back side of the back and back decorative board 3114 is Since the flange portion 3115b extends forward from the covering decorative body base 3115 between the flange portion 3113b and the outer periphery of the back back decorative substrate 3114, the metal decorative portion 3111d to the back back decorative substrate 3114 The route of the creeping distance EL proceeds rearward outside the flange portion 3113b, and the flange at the rear end of the flange portion 3113b. It turns back to the inside of 3113b, advances forward between the flange portion 3113b and the flange portion 3115b, and forms a meandering route that turns back to the inside of the flange portion 3115b at the front end of the flange portion 3115b. The creeping distance EL to the decorative substrate 3114 can be sufficiently long (10 mm or more, or a distance that can prevent discharge voltage of at least 10 kV). At this time, a decorative body 3111 having a metal decoration portion 3111d on the front surface, a back and back decoration board 3114 on which a plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b for decorating the decorative body 3111 are mounted, Since the decorative base 3115 covering the rear side of the back and back decorative substrate 3114 is provided in the back and back movable decorative body 3110 which is likely to generate static electricity by moving in the vertical direction, When static electricity is easily accumulated and accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d, the accumulated static electricity is discharged at a stroke because of its high conductivity, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are increased by increasing the discharge voltage. However, as described above, the back and back decoration board 311 is formed from the metal decoration portion 3111d. The creeping distance EL up to can be made sufficiently long, so that the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d can be reliably prevented from being discharged to the back decorative substrate 3114. By preventing damage to the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the like mounted on the decorative substrate 3114, the decorative body 3111 having the metal decorative portion 3111d and the decorative sheet 3112 can be surely illuminated and decorated. It is possible to entertain the light emitting decoration (light emission effect) of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 (back movable decorative body 3110) to a person, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, in the decorative body 3111 of the back movable movable body 3110, a metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward so as to constitute a predetermined decoration, and the first decorative protrusion 3111 is provided. Since the metal decoration portion 3111d is not provided on the side surface of the portion 3111a, the creeping distance EL from the metal decoration portion 3111d to the back and back decoration substrate 3114 is increased by the length in the front-rear direction of the side surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a. The pachinko machine 1 that can be made longer and can reliably exhibit the above-described effects can be provided.

  In addition, since the back side of the back and back decorative substrate 3114 is covered by the decorative body base 3115, it is possible to prevent static electricity from being discharged from the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 to the back surface of the back and back decorative substrate 3114. It is possible to prevent static electricity accumulated in other members (for example, the effect display device 1600) provided behind the decorative body base 3115 from being discharged to the back decorative substrate 3114. It is possible to more reliably prevent damage to the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the like of the back decorative board 3114 due to electrostatic discharge.

  Further, since the copper foil 3114d constituting the circuit pattern in the back decorative substrate 3114 is prevented from coming into contact with the light guide radiation plate 3113 (the leg portion 3113f) by the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f, the metal decorative portion The creepage distance EL from 3111d to the copper foil 3114d of the back decorative board 3114 can be increased as much as possible, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

  Further, since the copper foil 3114d of the back decorative board 3114 is provided so as not to contact the leg portion 3113f of the light guide radiation plate 3113 by the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f, vibration from inside and outside of the pachinko machine 1 acts. However, no friction is generated between the leg 3113f and the copper foil 3114d, and the copper foil 3114d is not worn by the friction and the circuit is disconnected. Generation | occurrence | production of the malfunction which LED3114a and 2nd LED3114b cannot light-emit can be prevented, and the desired presentation effect can be exhibited reliably by making the decoration body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 emit light decoration.

  Further, the decorative body 3111 includes a metal decorative portion 3111d and a second decorative protrusion 3111b and a third decorative protrusion 3111c that transmit light from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back decorative substrate 3114. Therefore, a high-class feeling can be given by the brightness of the metal of the metal decoration portion 3111d, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved, and the light from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can be used to improve the appearance. Provided is a pachinko machine 1 in which a decorative body 3111 (back movable movable body 3110) can be made conspicuous by light-decorating the portion 3111b and the third decorative protrusion 3111c, and the player's attention is strongly attracted. Can do.

  Further, since the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided on the front surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a protruding forward in a predetermined decoration shape, a three-dimensional effect is imparted to the metal decoration portion 3111d. The pachinko machine 1 that can make the decoration part 3111d more conspicuous, can further enhance the high-class feeling of the metal decoration part 3111d, and can attract the player's interest strongly can be provided.

  Further, since the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115 doubly surround the outer periphery of the back rear decorative substrate 3114, the outer periphery of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is flanged. It can be hidden by 3113b and the flange part 3115b, and can be made invisible from the player side, and the appearance of the back movable ornament 3110 can be improved.

  Further, since the back movable decorative body 3110 is provided with the light guide radiation plate 3113 for diffusing light, the light from the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LEDs 3114b on the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is diffused to the rear. Can irradiate the metal decoration portion 3111d, the second decoration protrusion 3111b, and the third decoration protrusion 3111c of the decoration body 3111 from the light, so that the entire decoration body 3111 (decoration sheet 3112) is illuminated and decorated with uniform brightness. It is possible to improve the appearance of the light-emitting decoration, to further enhance the effect of the light-emitting effect of the back movable decoration body 3110, and to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest. .

  Further, the flange portion 3113b surrounding the outer periphery of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is extended rearward from the light guide radiation plate 3113 that diffuses the light from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b and emits the light forward. A part of the light incident on the inside of the light emitting plate 3113 is emitted from the flange portion 3113b to the outside so that the flange portion 3113b can also be decorated with light emission. It can be made more difficult to see from the player side, and the flange portion 3113b is also decorated with light emission, so that the appearance of the light emission decoration of the back movable decoration body 3110 can be improved, and the player can be entertained and interesting. The decrease can be suppressed.

  Note that the back and rear movable decorative body 3160, the back rear movable decorative body 3170, and the back rear movable decorative body 3180 can also exhibit the same effects as described above.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the back rear movable decorative body 3110 in the back rear rendering unit 3100, transparent light guide radiation is provided behind the decorative member composed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112. A plate 3113 and a back and back decorative substrate 3114 are provided, and are mounted on the front surface of the back and back decorative substrate 3114 in each of the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c formed on the back surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113. The side view type first LED 3114a is inserted so as to be accommodated. When the plurality of first LEDs 3114a mounted on the back decorative substrate 3114 are caused to emit light, the light from the first LED 3114a is within the plate thickness of the light guide radiation plate 3113 from the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c. , Is reflected forward by a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e formed on substantially the entire rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and is emitted forward from the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Become. Then, the light emitted forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113 is irradiated forward through the decorative sheet 3112 and the decorative body 3111 constituting the decorative member, whereby the decorative portion 3150 is provided. The decorative members (decorative body 3111 and decorative sheet 3112) having light properties are decorated with light emission.

  At this time, the light irradiated in the direction along the plate surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 from the first LED 3114a is reflected forward by the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e within the plate thickness of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the decorative body Since the 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 are decorated to emit light, the light of the first LED 3114a is emitted from the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 as compared with the case where the first LED 3114a is directed forward. The distance until the light is emitted forward can be increased, and the light from the first LED 3114a can be widely diffused and emitted forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113. Accordingly, when the first LED 3114a is caused to emit light, the light from the first LED 3114a can be diffused widely, and it can be prevented from appearing to emit light in a dot shape. The sheet 3112 can be lightly decorated without unevenness and can be displayed beautifully, and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, in the back-back movable decorative body 3110, since the back-side decorative board 3114 is provided behind the flat decorative member (the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112) and the light guide radiation plate 3113, the dimension in the front-rear direction is reduced. It is possible to make it easy to secure a space for arranging the back movable ornament 3110, and to arrange other effect members (back top front rotating decorative body 3410, back top rear rotating decorative body 3440, etc.) It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can make it easy to secure a space to be played and that can make the player more entertaining by providing various production members.

  Furthermore, the decorative member (back movable movable body 3110) provided with the decorative portion 3150 has a relief portion such as a first decorative protrusion 3111a, a second decorative protrusion 3111b, and a third decorative protrusion 3111c. Since the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 having a pattern such as the first contour portion 3112a are configured, the embossed portion can give the decorative portion 3150 a three-dimensional effect, and the embossed portion can be embossed. A feeling of depth can be imparted to the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 provided on the rear side by the lens effect. Therefore, the depth of the three-dimensional decoration (decoration part 3150) can be shown to the player by the embossed part of the decoration body 3111 and the pattern of the decoration sheet 3112. Therefore, the thickness ( Even if the dimension in the front-rear direction is reduced, the decorative effect is not reduced, and the player's interest can be attracted and entertained, and the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 can be made thinner. The above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  In addition, a decorative sheet having a pattern such as the first contour portion 3112a behind the decorative body 3111 having relief parts such as the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. Since 3112 is provided, even if the transparent decorative body 3111 is not colored, the decorative body 3111 can appear to be colored by the color of the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112, and the cost of the decorative body 3111 is reduced. Can be made. In addition, the decoration (decoration part 3150) of the decorative body 3111 (back movable decorative body 3110) can be easily changed by changing the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily handled.

  Further, the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 has a hologram portion on which a part of the pattern as the decorative portion 3150 is displayed by light interference fringes, and the first LED 3114a of the back decorative substrate 3114 is provided. Light from the other LED provided in the pachinko machine 1, light from the production display device 1600, light in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc. Since the predetermined hologram can be shown by the light interference fringes, the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 can be improved by the hologram, and the player's attention can be strongly attracted, and the hologram By this, a stereoscopic effect can be imparted to a part of the decorative part 3150 of the back movable ornament 3110, and the back movable ornament 3110 is made thin. And it is possible to ensure that does not feel as thin player also.

  Furthermore, since a part of the pattern in the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 is configured by a hologram, the hologram has a first decorative protrusion 3111a, a second decorative protrusion 3111b, and a third decorative protrusion. Since it can be seen through the transparent decorative body 3111 having a relief part such as 3111c, it is possible to give a sense of depth to a pattern such as a hologram by the lens effect by the relief part, and attract the player's interest strongly. A possible decoration 3150 can be shown to the player. In addition, since the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 has a hologram part, a printing technique can be used to form the hologram part, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  Further, in the decorative member composed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 is flattened, and the outer shape of the decorative sheet 3112 is the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111. Since the outer peripheral edge of 3111 can be decorated with the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 and there is no frame on the outer periphery of the decoration (decoration portion 3150), a sense of openness is imparted to the decoration of the back movable ornament 3110 And can make the decoration look great. Therefore, the decoration of the back movable movable body 3110 (the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112, etc.) can be made more conspicuous, the decorative effect of the back movable movable body 3110 can be sufficiently exhibited, and the back movable movable decoration body. The pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the player's interest by the decoration of 3110 and can entertain the player can be provided.

  In addition, since the rear surface of the transparent decorative body 3111 is flattened, the decorative sheet 3112 is in contact (contact) with the rear surface of the decorative body 3111, so that light is transmitted between the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112. Therefore, the pattern of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be more easily seen through the transparent decorative body 3111, and the decorative effect by the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 can be sufficiently exhibited. In addition, since the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 is flattened, it is possible to reduce the dimension in the front-rear direction of the decorative member made up of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 as much as possible. The thickness of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 capable of realizing the above-described effects can be provided.

  Further, the decorative sheet 3112 is formed to have the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111, and the back of the movable decorative body 3110 (decorative body 3111) can be decorated with the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112. Therefore, by making the decoration mode of the member adjacent to the back rear movable decorative body 3110 continuous with the decoration of the back rear movable decorative body 3110, a large decoration with a sense of unity can be given to the player. It can be shown, can give the player a visual impact and attract attention, can enjoy a large decoration, and can suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  In addition, since the first LED 3114a of the back decorative board 3114 has a plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c accommodated from behind in the light guide radiation plate 3113, the first LED accommodation of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is performed. By accommodating the first LED 3114a from the rear in the portion 3113c, it becomes possible to make the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 as close as possible. The thickness in the direction can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  Further, the first LED 3114a of the back decorative substrate 3114 is accommodated in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and light from the first LED 3114a is irradiated from the inner surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c into the plate thickness. Therefore, compared to the case where light is emitted from the outer peripheral surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113, the portion of the light guide radiation plate 3113 (for example, the central portion) where light from the outer peripheral surface is difficult to reach. However, by providing the first LED accommodating portion 3113c at the part and irradiating light from the inner surface, the part can be brightly illuminated, and the back movable movable body 3110 (the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet). 3112) can be decorated with light emission without unevenness.

  Further, since the first LED 3114a of the back decorative board 3114 is of a side view type, the first LED 3114a can be accommodated only by accommodating the first LED 3114a in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 to emit light. The pachinko machine 1 that can irradiate light from the inner surface (the light receiving portion 3113i) of the portion 3113c in the direction along the plate surface within the thickness of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and achieves the above-described effects is reliably realized. be able to.

  In addition, a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and light can be emitted to substantially the entire decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112. Even if the decoration (decoration part 3150) provided on the sheet 3112 is changed, it is not necessary to change the reflection part 3113e, and it is possible to easily cope with a change in decoration of the decoration body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can easily cope with a model change or a design change.

  Note that the back-side movable decorative body 3160 and the back-back movable decorative body 3170 can also exhibit the same effects as described above.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a game machine (parrot machine) obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, Even in this case, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

  In the above embodiment, the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, the third decorative protrusion 3111c, and the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 are used as the decorative portion 3150 of the back movable decorative body 3110. Although the decoration composed of the decoration by the first contour portion 3112a, the second contour portion 3112b, the first light diffusion portion 3112c, and the second light diffusion portion 3112d of the decoration sheet 3112 is shown, the present invention is not limited to this. Not what you want. For example, the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 may be used as one decorative member, and the decorative portion 3150 may be applied to the decorative member.

  In addition, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a reception area (general winning opening, starting opening, variable winning opening (variable starting opening, large receiving opening, large receiving opening) capable of receiving a gaming medium in a gaming area where a gaming medium is driven by a player's operation. A prize opening, a prize winning opening), a V prize opening, etc., and when a game medium is received at the entrance, the player can receive benefits (payout of the game medium, opening / closing operation of the variable prize opening, etc.) The occurrence of an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player, etc.) is provided, so that the player can enter the game medium so that the player can receive the game medium at a desired receiving port. ing. As this type of gaming machine, a decorative member in which a metal plating is applied to the surface and a notch portion penetrating front and rear is closed by a transparent lens portion, and a decorative member provided on the rear side of the decorative member is forward through the lens portion. A board provided with a decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light is mounted has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2015-223485). According to the technique of this document, the appearance of the decorative member can be improved due to the brightness of the metal plating on the decorative member, and the decorative member (lens portion) is illuminated and decorated by the light emission of the LED. Can attract and entertain. By the way, as in the technique of this document, in a decorative member whose surface is provided with a metal decoration portion by metal plating, when static electricity is accumulated on the surface of the decoration member, the metal decoration portion has high conductivity. Therefore, the static electricity accumulated on the entire surface is discharged at once, and the discharge (spark) voltage (discharge voltage) becomes high. In the technique of this document, since the decorative substrate is provided on the rear side of the decorative member on which the metal plating is applied, the metal plating and the decorative substrate are as close as possible. Between the metal plating) and the decorative substrate, the static electricity accumulated in the metal plating may be discharged to generate sparks. Therefore, when a spark (discharge) is generated between the metal plating and the decorative substrate, the LED mounted on the decorative substrate is damaged, and it becomes impossible to perform the light emitting decoration (light emission effect) of the decorative member. As a result, the player could not be entertained, and there was a risk that the interest of the player would be reduced.

[Electrical connection method between main frame and game board 5]
Next, an electrical connection method between the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 208 is a front perspective view (a) and a rear perspective view (b) of the drawer connector mounted on the relay board provided on the main body frame. The drawer connector is a connector that can automatically connect the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 simply by mounting the game board 5 on the main body frame 4, and is arranged at a predetermined position on the rear surface of the game board 5. A game board side drawer connector (convex type) is provided on the game board side relay board, and a body frame side drawer connector (concave type) is provided on the body frame side relay board disposed at a predetermined position on the front surface of the body frame 4. Is provided.

  When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, a game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 (not shown) is guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 to play the game on the game board 5. Each terminal of the panel side drawer connector (convex type) is electrically connected to each terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4.

  For example, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 will be described. The main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is formed of non-conductive resin, and the front side is opened in a rectangular shape. In addition, it has a box-shaped main body DCNa that is long in the left-right direction, and a plate-like base body DCNb that is long in the left-right direction is integrally formed on the rear surface side of the box-shaped main body DCNa to form a letter T as a whole. Yes.

  Around the opening DCNaa of the box-shaped main body DCNa, there is a game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 over a predetermined distance from the front surface of the opening DCNaa to the bottom surface of the box-shaped main body DCNa. Inclined portions DCNaaa for guiding toward the bottom surface of the box-shaped main body DCNa are formed. The game board side drawer connector of the game board 5 has a central part (one place) on the inner upper surface of the opening DCNaa of the box-shaped body DCNa and left and right parts (one place on the left part and one place on the right part). While preventing the (convex type) from being flipped upside down and being inserted into the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is Position of the game board 5 drawer connector (convex type) and the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN in the left-right direction when inserted into the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN in a normal orientation A groove DCNaab that prevents misalignment and enhances the fitting between the game board side drawer connector (convex type) and the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the game board 5 is an opening D of the box-shaped main body DCNa. It is formed toward the front near the Naa to the bottom surface of the box-like body DCNA.

  On the bottom surface of the box-shaped main body DCNa, pin-type terminals PN arranged in two rows in the left-right direction in a direction perpendicular to the bottom surface (six pin-type terminals PN are arranged in one row in the left-right direction. .) Penetrates the box-shaped main body DCNa and the base body DCNb.

  Mounting through holes DCNba and DCNba are respectively formed on the left and right sides of the base body DCNb. When mounting the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209), the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is attached to the mounting through holes DCNba and DCNba. A rivet (not shown) is inserted from the front of the main body frame, and the end portion is crimped and plastically deformed on the back surface (solder surface) of the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209). Thereby, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is fixed to the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209).

  Further, on the back surface of the base body DCNb, when the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is mounted on the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209), the main body frame side drawer is mounted on the main body frame side relay board. A cylindrical protrusion DCNbb is formed so as to be mounted in the normal direction of the connector (concave type) DCN.

  In addition to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209) is connected to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN (Dual (Dual)). An inline package type small connector is mounted, and is electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via a wiring (harness) (not shown). When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is guided to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4, and the game board side drawer connector (convex) Type) terminals and main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN terminals PN are electrically connected to each other through a DIP type small connector and a wiring (harness) (not shown). 5, control signal lines for transmitting various control signals by the main control board 1310 provided in 5 and the payout control board 633 provided in the main body frame 4 are formed.

  The main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN electrically connects the main control board 1310 provided in the game board 5 and the payout control board 633 provided in the main body frame 4 and also supplies various power sources from the power supply board 630. It is electrically connected to various power supply lines (including ground (GND)) that are supplied to various boards provided in the game board 5 and is shown separately from the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. The body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN ′ is provided on a body frame side relay board KB ′ (not shown) different from the body frame side relay board KB. In addition to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN ′, the main body frame side relay board KB ′ is also connected to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN ′, as well as a DIP (Dual Inline Package). A small type connector is mounted and electrically connected to each decorative board, various sensors, and the like included in the door frame 3 via a wiring (harness) (not shown). When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, another game board side different from the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 electrically connected to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. The drawer connector (convex type) is guided by a main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN '(not shown) of the main body frame 4, each terminal of the other game board side drawer connector (convex type) and the main body frame side drawer connector (not shown). (Concave type) By connecting each terminal PN of DCN 'electrically, a peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 and a door via a DIP type small connector and a wiring (harness) not shown Control signal lines for transmitting various control signals and detection signals by the decorative boards, various sensors, various speakers, and the like provided in the frame 3 are formed. The structure of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN ′ not shown is the same as that of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, and the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN ′ not shown. The fixing method of the main body frame side relay board KB ′ (not shown) is the same as the fixing method of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN to the main body frame side relay board KB (fixing method using rivets). Yes.

  Further, a method of fixing the game board 5 drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 to a game board side relay board (not shown), Other game board side relay boards (not shown) of other game board side drawer connectors (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN ′ (This is different from a game board side relay board (not shown) on which the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 is mounted.) The fixing method to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is the same as the fixing method to the main body frame side relay board KB (fixing method using rivets).

  The rivet is used when the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is fixed to the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209). Although the electrical connection between the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 can be automatically performed only by being attached to the frame 4, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the game board side drawer of the game board 5 Since a large force may be applied from the connector (convex type) to the box-shaped main body DCNa of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, this large force causes the pin type in the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. This is to prevent the soldered surface from peeling off on the back surface (solder surface) of the main body frame side relay substrate KB (see FIG. 209). In addition, the case where the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is fixed to the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209) or the game board side drawer connector (convex type) is illustrated using bolts and nuts. In the case of fixing to the game board-side relay board, there is a disadvantage that the nut may be loosened by attaching or removing the game board 5 to or from the main body frame 4.

  In this embodiment, pin-type ones are used as the terminals PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. However, if a bellows type using terminals and contacts is used, there are the following problems. For example, when each terminal of the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is a terminal and each terminal of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is a contact, the pachinko machine 1 When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4 with the power on, the contact between the terminal and the contact (specifically, a large current (inrush current) flows at the contact for various power supply lines) is welded. It becomes. If the game board 5 is forcibly pushed into the main body frame 4 with this welded state, the contact of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is bent or broken, or the game board 5 may be broken. When the contact is removed from the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN cannot be used.

  In addition, if the terminals and contacts are welded, various control boards may malfunction due to connector damage, and electronic components mounted on the various control boards may be damaged. The problem that it is necessary to provide.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described problem does not occur at all by using pin type terminals as the terminals PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. That is, even if an operator accidentally puts the game board 5 on the main body frame 4 with the power applied to the pachinko machine 1, each terminal of the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 and the main body The main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the frame 4 is not welded to each terminal PN, and there is no need to provide a dedicated circuit for preventing welding.

[Solder short circuit prevention]
Next, prevention of solder short circuit will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 209 is a diagram (a) to (c) for preventing the solder bridge of each terminal of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type), and DIP type electrically connected to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type). It is a figure (d)-(f) which prevents solder bridge of each terminal of a small connector of. Note that in FIG. 209, various wiring patterns and substrate ground (GND) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “solid ground”) are omitted for the sake of clarity. In FIG. 209, an arrow indicated by a solid line indicates a direction in which the solder flows when the substrate is flowed into the solder bath, and an arrow indicated by an alternate long and short dash line indicates a direction in which the substrate flows in the solder bath.

  As described above, the main body frame side relay board KB disposed at a predetermined position on the front surface of the main body frame 4 is not only the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 but also the main body frame side drawer connector ( Concave type) A small DIP type connector electrically connected to the DCN is mounted. The terminals of this DIP type small connector are of the pin type arranged in two rows. The body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is mounted through holes DCNba and DCNba formed in the base body DCNb of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the same straight line in the left-right direction on the body frame side relay board KB. And the cylindrical protrusion DCNbb are disposed (predetermined position for the drawer connector), the DIP type small connector is arranged in the vertical direction of the main body frame side relay board KB, that is, the DIP type The terminals arranged in two rows of the small connector are arranged so as to be rotated by 90 degrees with the terminals PN arranged in the two rows of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN (predetermined position for the small connector). .

  When the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is placed on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB at a predetermined position for the drawer connector, The terminal PN is inserted into a through hole KTH1 having a land (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “land KTH1”), and the columnar protrusion DCNbb of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is a positioning hole. Inserted through KBb, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN mounting through holes DCNba, DCNba and the mounting through holes DCNba, DCNba formed at positions corresponding to the mounting holes KBa, KBa communicate with the main body. A rivet (not shown) from the front of the frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN to the mounting through holes DCNba, DCNba End is fixed is caulked on the rear surface (the solder surface) KBy of inserted in the body frame side relay board KB Re respectively. When the DIP type small connector is placed on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB at a predetermined position for the small connector, each terminal of the DIP type small connector has a through hole KTH2 having a land. (Hereinafter simply referred to as “land KTH2”).

  When the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is placed at a predetermined position for the drawer connector on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB, the second level is the first level from the bottom. The six terminals PN in one row and the six terminals PN in the second row in the second row from the bottom are arranged in parallel. On the other hand, when a DIP type small connector is placed on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB at a predetermined position for a small connector, there are six levels in the vertical direction and the first level from the bottom. Two terminals PN in one row, two terminals PN in the second row that is the second row from the bottom, two terminals PN in the third row that is the third row from the bottom, and the fourth row from the bottom Two terminals PN in the fourth row, two terminals PN in the fifth row, which is the fifth row from the bottom, and two terminals PN in the sixth row, which is the sixth row from the bottom, are arranged in parallel. It becomes.

  On the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is placed at the predetermined position for the drawer connector, and the DIP type small connector is at the predetermined position for the small connector. When placed, the terminals PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN and the terminals of the DIP type small connector protrude from the back surface (solder surface) KBy. In such a state, the main body frame side relay board KB is flowed through its back surface (solder surface) KBy to the solder bath, so that each terminal PN and each land KTH1 of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN are relayed to the main body frame side. It can be soldered to the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the substrate KB, and each terminal of the DIP type small connector and each land KTH2 are soldered to the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB. Can do.

  The direction in which the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB flows into the solder tank is from the bottom of the six terminals PN in the second row, which is the second stage from the bottom of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. It is in the direction toward the first row of six terminals PN, which is the first row, and is the first row from the bottom from the two terminals of the sixth row, which is the sixth row from the bottom of the DIP type small connector. The direction is toward the two terminals in the first row. That is, in the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, the six terminals PN in the first row, which are the first stage from the bottom, are the terminals in the last stage, and in the DIP type small connector, the first stage from the bottom. The two terminals in the first row are the final stage terminals.

  When flowing the back side (solder side) of the board into the solder bath, the solder bath with pin-type ones aligned like the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN and each terminal of the DIP type small connector When flowing to the end, there is a risk that a solder bridge will occur along the flowing direction, and in particular, a solder bridge will be generated between the terminal at the final stage and the terminal at the previous stage. Therefore, a solder escape pattern is formed on the terminal at the final stage.

  In the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as described above, the first row of six terminals PN in the first row from the bottom is the last row of terminals. Each land KTH1 is connected to a solder relief pattern KNP1 having a rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction and has a width equal to the outer diameter of the land KTH1 (that is, each of the six terminals PN in the first row). The lands KTH1 and the solder escape patterns KNP1 are electrically connected to each other, and are formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB.

  In the DIP type small connector, as described above, since the two terminals in the first row from the bottom are the terminals in the last row, each land KTH2 of the two terminals PN in the first row is Solder relief patterns KNP2 having a rectangular shape that is long in the direction and whose width is the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH2 are connected to each other (that is, each land KTH2 and each solder relief pattern of the two terminals in the first row) KNP2 is formed on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB so that each of them is electrically connected to the KNP2.

  In this way, by forming a solder escape pattern on the terminal at the final stage, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of solder bridges at the terminal at the final stage and contribute to the prevention of solder shorts. May occur. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as a method for suppressing the occurrence of solder bridges, a method of printing horizontal lines on the boundary of each step by silk printing on the resist (measure 1 by silk printing), on the resist A method of printing horizontal lines on the boundaries of each step by silk printing and printing vertical lines on the lands of each terminal adjacent to the left and right and the boundary of the solder escape pattern (measure 2 by silk printing), silk on the resist A method of enclosing the land of each terminal and the solder escape pattern with a predetermined figure by printing and printing the area (measure 3 by silk printing) can be mentioned.

[Measures by silk printing 1]
First, as a method that can suppress the occurrence of solder bridges, a method of printing horizontal lines on the boundary of each step by silk printing on a resist (measure 1 by silk printing) will be described.

  In the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. 209 (a), there are six terminals PN in the first row from the bottom and the second row in the second row from the bottom. The horizontal line KSH1 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB by silk printing at the boundary between the six terminals PN. That is, since the horizontal line KSH1 is printed by silk printing on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB, the horizontal line KSH1 is a vertical wall like a mountain range when viewed from the resist surface. Are connected. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB is flowed to the solder bath, the solder must flow over the resist and flow over the vertical wall such as the mountain range of the horizontal line KSH1. The second row of six terminals PN and land KTH1 in the second row from the bottom, and the six terminals PN and land KTH1 in the first row from the bottom, and a vertical line like a mountain range of the horizontal line KSH1 at the boundary Since the force that separates the solder works as the solder tries to stay on the resist by the wall, solder bridges can be suppressed at the terminals PN and the land KTH1 adjacent in the vertical direction.

  In each terminal of the DIP type small connector, as shown in FIG. 209 (d), two terminals in the sixth row, which is the sixth row from the bottom, and two terminals in the fifth row, which is the fifth row from the bottom. The horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the boundary between the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB by silk printing, two terminals in the fifth row which are the fifth row from the bottom, and the four rows from the bottom A horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB by silk printing at the boundary between the two terminals in the fourth row, and the fourth row from the bottom. The horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB by silk printing at the boundary between the two terminals of the third row and the two terminals in the third row from the bottom, Two terminals in the third row from the bottom and the second row from the bottom The horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB by silk printing at the boundary between the two terminals in the two rows, and the two terminals in the second row from the bottom. The horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the boundary between the two terminals in the first row in the first row from the bottom by silk printing on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB. That is, since the horizontal line KSH2 is printed by silk printing on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB, the horizontal line KSH2 is a vertical wall like a mountain range when viewed from the resist surface. Are connected. Thereby, for example, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB is flowed to the solder bath, the solder needs to flow over the resist and flow over the vertical wall such as the mountain line of the horizontal line KSH2. A vertical line like a mountain line of a horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the two terminals and land KTH2 in the sixth row from the bottom, and the two terminals and land KTH2 in the fifth row from the bottom. Since the force that separates the solder works as the solder tries to stay on the resist by the wall, solder bridges can be suppressed at the terminals adjacent in the vertical direction. The horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the two terminals and land KTH2 in the fifth row from the bottom, and the two terminals and land KTH2 in the fourth row from the bottom, the fourth row from the bottom, The horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the two terminals and land KTH2 in the fourth row and the second terminal and land KTH2 in the third row from the bottom, and the second row in the third row from the bottom. The horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the two terminals and land KTH2 and the second terminal and land KTH2 in the second row from the bottom, and the two terminals and land KTH2 in the second row from the bottom And the horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the two terminals and land KTH2 in the first row from the bottom, and the second terminal and land KTH2 in the sixth row from the bottom, 5 steps Similar to the horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the two terminals in the fifth row and the land KTH2, the force by which the solder is separated by the solder standing on the resist by the vertical wall like the mountain range of the horizontal line KSH2 By working, solder bridges can be suppressed at each terminal and land KTH2 adjacent in the vertical direction.

[Countermeasures 2 by silk printing]
Next, as a method of suppressing the occurrence of solder bridges, horizontal lines are printed on the borders of the respective stages by silk printing on the resist, and the lands and solder escape patterns of the terminals adjacent to the vertical lines in the left-right direction. A method of printing on each boundary (measure 2 by silk printing) will be described. The countermeasure 2 by the silk printing is further applied to the above-described countermeasure 1 by the silk printing, and the vertical lines are printed by silk printing on the lands of the terminals adjacent in the left-right direction and the boundary of the solder escape pattern adjacent in the left-right direction. Therefore, the explanation for the countermeasure 1 by silk printing is omitted.

  In the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, in addition to the horizontal line KSH1 printed by silk printing shown in FIG. 209 (a), as shown in FIG. Among the six terminals PN and lands KTH1 in the first row and the six terminals PN and lands KTH1 in the second row from the bottom, the terminals PN and lands KTH1 adjacent in the left-right direction, A vertical line KSV1 is printed on the boundary between the solder escape pattern KNP1 adjacent in the left-right direction on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB by silk printing. That is, since the vertical lines KSV1 are respectively printed by silk printing on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay substrate KB, the vertical line KSV1 looks like a mountain range when viewed from the resist surface. It becomes the state where a long vertical wall is connected. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB is flowed to the solder bath, the solder can flow over the resist and flow along a vertical wall such as a vertical line KSV1. Solder that flows on a vertical wall like a mountain range called vertical line KSV1 tries to stay in the resist by flowing to the left of the vertical wall or the right side of the vertical wall with the vertical wall like a mountain range called vertical line KSV1 as a boundary. As a result, the solder bridge can be suppressed at the terminals PN and lands KTH1 adjacent in the left-right direction and the solder escape pattern KNP1 adjacent in the left-right direction.

  In each terminal of the DIP type small connector, in addition to the horizontal line KSH2 printed by silk printing shown in FIG. 209 (d), as shown in FIG. 209 (e), the first step from the bottom is shown. Solder adjacent to each terminal and land KTH2 adjacent in the left-right direction from the two terminals and land KTH2 in the first row to the two terminals and land KTH2 in the sixth row from the bottom to the sixth row. A vertical line KSV2 is printed on the boundary between the escape pattern KNP2 and the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB by silk printing. That is, since the vertical line KSV2 is printed by silk printing on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB, the vertical line KSV2 is like a mountain range when viewed from the resist surface. The vertical walls are in a continuous state. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB is flowed to the solder bath, the solder can flow over the resist and flow along a vertical wall such as a vertical line KSV2, Solder flowing on a vertical wall such as a vertical line KSV2 like a mountain range tries to stay in the resist by flowing to the left of the vertical wall or the right side of the vertical wall with the vertical wall like the vertical line KSV2 as a boundary. As a result, a solder bridge can be suppressed at each terminal and land KTH2 adjacent in the left-right direction and solder escape pattern KNP2 adjacent in the left-right direction.

[Measure 3 by silk printing]
Next, as a method that can suppress the occurrence of solder bridges, a method of encircling the land of each terminal and the solder relief pattern with a predetermined figure by silk printing on the resist (measure 3 by silk printing) explain.

  In the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. 209 (c), the land KTH1 through which each terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted, and each solder relief pattern KNP1 Are surrounded by a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction by silk printing on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB, and each land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1 in the region KSA1 surrounded by the rectangular shape Print to fill the area except. That is, each land KTH1 and each of the lands KTH1 and each of the lands KSA1 in which the lands KTH1 and the solder relief patterns KNP1 are surrounded by a rectangular shape on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB. Since the area excluding the solder escape pattern KNP1 is printed so as to be filled, when each land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1 are viewed from the surface of the silk-printed area KSA1, each land KTH2 and each solder The relief pattern KNP1 is a depressed area, and when viewed from the resist surface, the silk-printed area KSA1 is a slightly high plateau area. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB is flowed to the solder bath, the solder needs to flow over the resist and flow over the small high plateau called the silk-printed region KSA1. The amount of solder flowing on the printed area KSA1 can be suppressed, and solder is formed on each land KTH1 and each solder relief pattern KNP1 which are recessed areas formed on a small high plateau called the silk printed area KSA1. When flowing, the force that separates the solder works by trying to stay over the small plateau of the silk-printed area KSA1 from each land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1 that become the recessed area. The terminals PN and lands KTH1 adjacent in the vertical and horizontal directions and the solder relief adjacent in the horizontal direction A turn KNP1, solder bridges in can be suppressed, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 209 (f), each terminal of the DIP type small connector includes a land KTH2 through which each terminal of the DIP type small connector is inserted, and each solder relief pattern KNP2 as a main body frame side relay board KB. The back surface (solder surface) of KBy is surrounded by a rectangular shape which is long in the vertical direction by silk printing, and the area excluding each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2 is filled out of the area KSA2 surrounded by this rectangular shape. Print. In other words, each of the lands KTH2 and each of the lands KTH2 and each of the lands KSA2 in which the lands KTH2 and the solder relief patterns KNP2 are enclosed in a rectangular shape by silk printing on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB. Since the area excluding the solder escape pattern KNP2 is printed so as to be filled, when each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2 are viewed from the surface of the silk-printed area KSA2, each land KTH2 and each solder The relief pattern KNP2 is a recessed area, and when viewed from the resist surface, the silk-printed area KSA2 is a slightly high plateau area. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB is flowed to the solder bath, the solder must flow over the resist and flow over the small high plateau called the silk-printed region KSA2. The amount of solder flowing on the printed area KSA2 can be suppressed, and the solder is placed on each land KTH2 and each solder relief pattern KNP2 which are recessed areas formed on a small high plateau called the silk printed area KSA2. When flowing, a force that separates the solder from the lands KTH2 and the solder relief patterns KNP2 that become the recessed areas by separating the solder on the small high plateau called the silk-printed area KSA2 works up and down, left and right. Each terminal and land KTH2 adjacent in the direction, and the solder escape pattern KNP2 adjacent in the left-right direction, It is possible to suppress the Oite solder bridge respectively.

  The connector with measures 1 to 3 by silk printing described above is more noticeable than the connector without measures 1 to 3 by silk printing. When an operation for visually confirming whether or not this has occurred is a mark on the substrate where the operator should pay attention, and thus the line of sight can be quickly directed.

[Modification]
In this embodiment, when the substrate is flowed into the solder bath, the above-described measures 1 to 3 by silk printing are performed to prevent the occurrence of solder bridges and prevent solder shorts. Measure 1 to Measure 3 can also be used as a mark indicating which connector is the connector that the worker directly solders to the board.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the substrate is flowed into the solder bath, the above-described countermeasure 3 by silk printing is applied, and the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN has the rectangular shape shown in FIG. 209 (c). In each of the terminals of the enclosed area KSA1 and DIP type small connector, the solder bridge is prevented by the area KSA2 surrounded by the rectangular shape shown in FIG. Instead of the rectangular shape, solder short-circuit prevention may be performed by preventing the generation of a solder bridge by a region surrounded by another shape. FIG. 210 is a diagram (a) showing a modification of FIG. 209 (c) and a diagram (b) showing a modification of FIG. 209 (f). Note that the same reference numerals in FIG. 210 denote the same components as those in FIG. 209. In FIG. 210, an arrow indicated by a solid line indicates a direction in which the solder flows when the substrate is flowed into the solder bath, and an arrow indicated by an alternate long and short dash line indicates a direction in which the substrate is flowed into the solder bath.

  In the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. 210 (a), the land KTH1 through which each terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted, and each solder relief pattern KNP1 Each of the lands KTH1 and each solder in the region KSA1 ′ surrounded by this shape is surrounded by silk printing on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB in a shape that is approximately three times larger than the respective shapes of Printing is performed so that the area excluding the escape pattern KNP1 is filled. Further, when viewed from the resist surface, the silk-printed area KSA1 'is a small plateau area. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB is flowed to the solder bath, the solder needs to flow over the resist and flow over a small high plateau called the silk-printed region KSA1 ′. The amount of solder flowing on the silk-printed area KSA1 ′ can be suppressed, and the lands KTH1 and the solder escape patterns KNP1 that become recessed areas formed on a small high plateau called the silk-printed area KSA1 ′ When the solder flows, the solder is separated from the land KTH1 and the solder escape pattern KNP1 which are the recessed areas by trying to stay on the small plateau of the silk-printed area KSA1 ′ without being able to get over. Due to the force, it is adjacent to each terminal PN and land KTH1 adjacent in the vertical and horizontal directions in the horizontal direction. A field relief pattern KNP1, solder bridges in can be suppressed, respectively.

  Further, in each terminal of the DIP type small connector, as shown in FIG. 210 (b), from the respective shapes of the land KTH2 through which each terminal of the DIP type small connector is inserted and each solder relief pattern KNP2. The back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB is surrounded by silk printing in a shape that is approximately three times larger. Print to fill the area. Further, when viewed from the resist surface, the silk-printed area KSA2 'is a small and high plateau area. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB is flowed to the solder bath, the solder must flow over the resist and flow over a small high plateau called the silk-printed region KSA2 ′. The amount of solder flowing on the silk-printed area KSA2 ′ can be suppressed, and the lands KTH2 and the solder relief patterns KNP2 that are recessed areas formed on a small high plateau called the silk-printed area KSA2 ′ When solder flows in the solder, a force that separates the solder works by trying to stay on a small high plateau called a silk-printed area KSA2 'from each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2 that become recessed areas. Thus, the terminals and lands KTH2 adjacent in the vertical and horizontal directions and the solder relief pattern KN adjacent in the horizontal direction 2, solder bridges in can be suppressed, respectively.

  In the above-described embodiment, the terminal of the final stage and the solder escape pattern are connected and formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB. May be formed. FIG. 211 is a diagram illustrating a modification in which the terminal of the final stage and the solder escape pattern are formed apart from each other by a predetermined distance.

  As shown in FIG. 211 (a), the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is long in the vertical direction with the land KTH1 through which the terminal PN of the final stage of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted. A solder relief pattern KNP1 ′ having a rectangular shape whose width is the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH1 (may have a rectangular shape whose one side is the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH1) is a predetermined distance ( For example, it is formed so as to be formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB, separated by a length of one third to one half of the outer diameter of the land KTH1. Also good. This solder escape pattern KNP1 'is in an insulated state without being electrically connected to various wiring patterns or a solid ground.

  In the DIP type small connector, as shown in FIG. 211 (a), the land KTH2 into which the terminal of the final stage of the DIP type small connector is inserted and the width of the land KTH2 which is long in the left-right direction are the same as the outer diameter of the land KTH2. The solder escape pattern KNP2 ′ having a rectangular shape (which may have a rectangular shape with one side being the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH2) and a predetermined distance (for example, 3 minutes of the outer diameter of the land KTH2) They may be formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB, separated from each other by a length of one-half from the length of one. The solder escape pattern KNP2 'is in an insulated state without being electrically connected to various wiring patterns or a solid ground.

  Further, in the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. 211 (b), the land KTH1 through which the terminal PN of the final stage of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted, and the vertical direction The solder escape pattern KNP1 ″ having a long and wide rectangular shape with the outer diameter of the land KTH1 and a semicircular shape opposite to the land KTH1 (a rectangular shape with one side being the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH1) And may have a semicircular shape opposite to the land KTH1), and a predetermined distance (for example, a length of one third to one half of the outer diameter of the land KTH1). ) May be formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB. The solder escape pattern KNP1 ″ is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns or a solid ground and is in an insulated state.

  In the DIP type small connector, as shown in FIG. 211 (b), the land KTH2 into which the terminal of the final stage of the DIP type small connector is inserted and the width of the land KTH2 which is long in the left-right direction are the size of the outer diameter. Solder relief pattern KNP2 ″ having a rectangular shape and a semicircular shape on the opposite side to the land KTH2 (having a square shape with one side being the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH2, and a semicircle on the opposite side to the land KTH2 And the back surface of the main body frame side relay board KB separated by a predetermined distance (for example, a length of one third to one half of the outer diameter of the land KTH2). (Solder surface) You may make it form in the copper foil surface of KBy, respectively. The solder escape pattern KNP2 ″ is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns or a solid ground and is in an insulated state.

  Further, in the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. 211 (c), the land KTH1 through which the terminal PN of the final stage of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted, and the vertical direction The solder escape pattern KNP1 ′ ″ (one side of which is the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH1) is a rectangular shape having a long and wide width corresponding to the outer diameter of the land KTH1 and having a triangular shape on the opposite side of the land KTH1. And may have a triangular shape on the opposite side of the land KTH1), and a predetermined distance (for example, a length of one third to one half of the outer diameter of the land KTH1). Alternatively, they may be formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB. The solder escape pattern KNP1 "" is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns or a solid ground and is in an insulated state.

  In the DIP type small connector, as shown in FIG. 211 (c), the land KTH2 into which the terminal of the final stage of the DIP type small connector is inserted and the width of the land KTH2 which is long in the left-right direction are the size of the outer diameter. Solder relief pattern KNP2 '' 'having a rectangular shape and a triangular shape on the opposite side to the land KTH2 (having a rectangular shape in which one side is the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH2, and a triangular shape on the opposite side to the land KTH2 Are separated by a predetermined distance (for example, a length of one third to one half of the outer diameter of the land KTH2) and the back surface of the main body frame side relay substrate KB ( (Solder surface) It may be formed on the copper foil surface of KBy. The solder escape pattern KNP2 "" is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns or a solid ground and is in an insulated state.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the solder relief pattern KNP1 (KNP2) having a rectangular shape is connected to the land KTH1 (KTH2) through which the terminal of the final stage is inserted, but is connected to the terminal of the final stage. The shape of the solder escape pattern on the opposite side may be a semicircular shape (see the semicircular shape in FIG. 211 (b)) or a triangular shape (see the triangular shape in FIG. 211 (c)).

  In the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 209, the direction in which the substrate flows into the solder bath (that is, the direction of the dashed-dotted arrow in FIGS. 209 (a) to (c)) is determined in advance. When the substrate can be flowed in the opposite direction in addition to the direction (that is, when the substrate can be flowed from both directions to the solder bath), the above-described measures 1 to 3 by silk printing are applied. Thus, solder bridges may be prevented to prevent solder shorts. In this case, a solder relief pattern having a rectangular shape is connected to the land through which the terminal of the final stage is inserted depending on the direction of flow. The shape of the solder escape pattern on the opposite side that is not connected to the terminal at the final stage is semicircular (see the semicircular shape in FIG. 211 (b)) or triangular (see the triangular shape in FIG. 211 (c)). See also). Further, the terminal at the final stage and the solder relief pattern may be formed separated by a predetermined distance. The solder escape pattern described above only needs to be formed at both ends of the connector with respect to the direction in which the substrate flows into the solder bath. In addition, when it is not clear from which direction the substrate flows when designing the substrate, the above-described solder relief pattern is formed in both directions so that the substrate may flow from either direction.

  By the way, various types such as a main control board that performs control related to game progress and game profit, a sub-control board that performs control related to effects executed as the game progresses, and an image control board that performs display control of an image display device, etc. A gaming machine in which a board is arranged on the back side has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2)). By the way, like the gaming machine described in this document, although various terminals are poured into the solder bath and the terminals of the components are soldered, a solder bridge is formed at the adjacent terminals, and a short circuit due to solder occurs. was there.

[Peeling prevention by over resist]
Next, prevention of peeling by over resist will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, the over resist applied to each terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN will be described first, and the over resist applied to the housing fixing land of the surface mount type connector will be described. FIG. 212 is a schematic diagram (a) of an over resist applied to each terminal of a main body frame side drawer connector (concave type), and is a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section taken along line XX in (a). FIG. 213 is a schematic diagram (a) of the copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) side of the substrate on which the surface mount type connector is mounted, and is a schematic diagram (b) of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate. 214 is a continuation of FIG. 213, and is an enlarged view of part A of FIG. 213 (b), and is a schematic diagram (c) of an over resist applied to a housing fixing land of a surface mount type connector. It is the schematic (d) of the cross section of the YY line in c). In FIG. 212 to FIG. 214, various wiring patterns and substrate ground (GND) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “solid ground”) may be omitted from the viewability of the drawings.

[Over resist applied to each terminal of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type)]
The over resist applied to each terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN will be described. As shown in FIGS. 212 (a) and 212 (b), a through hole KTH1 having a land (hereinafter simply referred to as “land”). KTH1 ”may be described)), through-holes are formed in the base material KBo of the main body frame side relay substrate KB, the surface (mounting surface) of the main body frame side relay substrate KB, the copper foil surface of KBx, A land having an outer diameter KTHD1 is formed by removing the copper foil from the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB and the copper foil surface of KBy. In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay substrate KB and the outer diameter of the land formed on the rear surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB. The outer diameter is KTHD1 and has the same size.

  The surface (mounting surface) side of the main body frame side relay substrate KB is coated with a resist solution on the copper foil surface of the KBx to form a surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KBxr. In a region corresponding to the land KTH1 in the resist layer KBxr, a surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 is formed. In addition, a resist solution is applied on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KByr, but the back surface (solder surface). In the region corresponding to the land KTH1 in the side resist layer KByr, a back surface (solder surface) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 is formed.

  In this embodiment, the opening diameter KBxrD1 of the front surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra and the opening diameter KByrD1 of the back surface (solder surface) side resist opening KByra have the same size. A substrate ground (GND) (that is, a solid ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay substrate KB and a substrate ground formed on the rear surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB. (GND) (that is, a solid ground) is electrically connected through a through hole (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

  As described above, in the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay substrate KBx, the region corresponding to the land KTH1 in the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KBxr has an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1. Since the surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra having a surface is formed, an over resist in which the outer peripheral portion of the land KTH1 is covered with the resist from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 toward the center of the land KTH1. Is given. As a result, since the resist can be applied to the entire outer peripheral portion of the land KTH1 on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB, a high peeling strength is applied to the load on the land KTH1 from multiple directions. On the other hand, it can be made uniform.

  Further, in the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB, an area corresponding to the land KTH1 in the back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KByr has an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1. Since the back surface (solder surface) side resist opening KByra is formed, over resist is applied so that the outer peripheral portion of the land KTH1 is covered with the resist from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 toward the center of the land KTH1. Has been. As a result, since the entire outer peripheral portion of the land KTH1 can be covered with the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB, a high peeling strength is applied to the load on the land KTH1 from multiple directions. On the other hand, it can be made uniform.

  Although the front and back surfaces of the base material KBo of the main body frame side relay substrate KB are formed by bonding the copper foil surface, the land KTH1 formed on the copper foil surface as compared with the bonding between the base material KBo and the copper foil surface. Bonding with solder is stronger.

  By the way, when fixing the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN to the main body frame side relay board KB, as described above, rivets have been used. This is because, by using the drawer connector, it is possible to automatically connect the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 simply by attaching the game board 5 to the main body frame 4, but the game board 5 is used as the main body. Since a large force may be applied to the box-shaped main body DCNa of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN from the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 when mounting on the frame 4, This is to prevent the pinned terminals PN in the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN from peeling off the soldered surface on the back surface (solder surface) of the main body frame side relay board KB due to a large force.

  However, since an external force is applied to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN by using the drawer connector, the surface (mounting surface) of the main body frame side relay board KB (mounting surface) KBx copper foil surface and the main body Land KTH1 formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBx of the frame side relay substrate KB is peeled off from the base material KBo, and various wiring patterns formed on the copper foil surface are peeled off from the base material KBo together with the land KTH1. There is a case to do.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the land KTH1 is further over-resisted on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay substrate KB and the rear surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB. By increasing the peel strength so that the copper foil formed on the foil surface does not peel from the base material KBo, the drawer connector is used to make the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN by attaching or removing the game board 5 Even if an external force is applied, the land KTH1 formed on the copper foil surface of the body frame side relay substrate KB (mounting surface) KBx and the back surface (solder surface) KBx of the body frame side relay substrate KB is the base material. It is possible to reliably prevent peeling from the KBo and various wiring patterns formed on the copper foil surface from the base material KBo together with the land KTH1. There.

  In addition, the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 to which the over resist is applied is added with a region where each terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted into the land KTH1 and soldered. It is larger than the outer diameter of the land that is not over-resisted. This is because the bonding area when the terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is soldered to the land KTH1 to which over resist is applied is the terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. This is because the bonding area is equal to or larger than the bonding area when soldered to a land not over-resisted. Thereby, the bonding strength to the land KTH1 to which the over resist is applied can be set to be equal to or higher than the bonding strength to the land to which the over resist is not applied.

  Also, even if the outer diameter of the land through which the terminal is inserted is the same depending on the presence or absence of the over resist, if the over resist is not applied, the land having a normal size outer diameter and the over resist are applied. It is necessary to prepare a land having an outer diameter larger than the outer diameter of the normal size at the board design stage. There is a problem that bonding between the lands and the lands may be insufficient and solder defects may occur.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, regardless of the presence or absence of overresist, a substrate (for example, main body frame side relay substrate KB) on which at least one land is subjected to overresist is applied to all lands. The same land as the land to which the over resist is applied is arranged as a land to which the over resist is not applied. As a result, the bonding between the terminal and the land is sufficient, and the occurrence of solder failure can be reliably prevented.

  It should be noted that the game board side relay board (not shown) on which the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 is also mounted. In contrast, the above-described over resist is applied. In addition to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, another main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN ′ is not shown separately from the main body frame side relay board KB. The above-described over resist is applied to the land also on the unillustrated main body frame side relay board KB ′ (not shown). Also, another game board side drawer connector (convex type) guided by a main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN ′ (not shown) of the main body frame 4 (the other game board drawer connector (convex type) A side board connector (concave type) other game board side relay board (not shown) on which a game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 electrically connected to the DCN is mounted (this is not shown) The other game board side relay board is a game board side relay (not shown) on which the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is mounted. Also, the above-described over resist is applied to the land.

  In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay substrate KB and the outer diameter of the land formed on the rear surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB. The outer diameter KTHD1 is the same size, but compared with the outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface of the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay substrate KB, the main body frame side relay substrate KB. The outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy may be increased or decreased. In this embodiment, the opening diameter KBxrD1 of the front surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra and the opening diameter KByrD1 of the back surface (solder surface) side resist opening KByra have the same size. The opening diameter KByrD1 of the back surface (solder surface) side resist opening KByra may be made larger or smaller than the opening diameter KBxrD1 of the surface) side resist opening KBxra.

[Modification]
In the above-described embodiment, regardless of the presence or absence of the over resist, a substrate (for example, the main body frame side relay substrate KB) on which at least one land to which over resist is present is applied to all lands. The land that is the same as the land to which the over resist is applied is disposed as a land that is not over resist. However, when the over resist is not applied, a land having an outer diameter of a normal size (that is, the over resist is applied). The land having a normal outer diameter smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 may be disposed. That is, a land to which over resist is applied may be mixed with a land having an outside diameter of a normal size when over resist is not applied. In this case, even if the outer diameter of the land through which the terminal is inserted is the same depending on the presence or absence of the over resist, if the over resist is not applied, the land having the normal outer diameter and the over resist are applied. Requires a land having an outer diameter larger than the outer diameter of the normal size at the substrate design stage.

[Over-registration applied to the housing fixing land of the surface mount type connector]
The over-resist applied to the case fixing pad KSPF of the surface mount type connector KCN mounted on the substrate KC will be described with reference to FIGS. 213 (a) and 213 (b) and FIGS. 214 (c) and 214 (d). As described above, each terminal (for example, having six terminals) of the surface mount type connector KCN is soldered to a pad KSP having an elongated rectangular shape in the vertical direction, various wiring patterns connected to each pad KSP, A rectangle that is long in the vertical direction and fixed by soldering and fixing both sides (metal housing fixing portions provided on the left and right sides) of the surface mount type connector KCN to the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate KC. The housing fixing pad KSPF having the shape is formed by removing the copper foil on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, and thereby each pad KSP, Various wiring pattern connected with the de KSP, each casing fastener pad KSPF are formed. The housing of the surface mount type connector KCN is formed of a non-conductive resin. Metal casing fixing portions are provided on both sides (left side and right side) of the casing of the surface mount type connector KCN.

  The surrounding KCxa of each wiring pattern connected to each pad KSP and each pad KSP is formed by removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC (that is, a solid ground). ) Is insulated without being electrically connected. In contrast, the four corners of each case fixing pad KSPF out of the periphery of each case fixing pad KSPF are fixed to each case by removing the copper foil on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. A thermal pattern KCxb is provided in which the pad KSPF is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) (that is, a solid ground) via a cross-shaped pattern. With this thermal pattern KCxb, both sides of the case of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal case fixing portions provided on the left side and the right side) are connected to the case fixing pads on the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. It is possible to prevent heat that melts the solder when soldering to the KSPF from being taken away from the outer periphery of each housing fixing pad KSPF. It should be noted that both sides (metal housing fixing portions provided on the left and right sides) of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN are connected to the housing fixing pads KSPF on the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. As a result, the surface mount type connector KCN can be more firmly fixed to the substrate KC than when the terminals of the surface mount type connector KCN are simply soldered to the substrate KC. Both sides of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal housing fixing portions provided on the left side and the right side) are electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) of the substrate KC for surface mounting. It is also possible to enhance the shielding effect for signals connected to the terminals of the type connector KCN.

  Although a resist solution is applied on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC to form a surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr, the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr Of these, in the region corresponding to each pad KSP, a pad surface (mounting surface side) side resist opening having the same shape as each pad KSP is formed, and the region corresponding to each housing fixing pad KSPF The housing fixing pad front surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KCxra having an opening rectangular shape smaller than the rectangular shape of each housing fixing pad KSPF is formed. Further, a resist solution is applied on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KCyr.

  A substrate ground (GND) (that is, a solid ground) formed on the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC and a substrate ground (GND) (that is, a solid ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC. ) Are electrically connected by a through hole (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

  As described above, in the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, in the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr, the region corresponding to the housing fixing pad KSPF has an opening rectangle smaller than the rectangular shape of the housing fixing pad KSPF. Since the front surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KCxra for the housing fixing pad having a shape is formed, the housing fixing pad is directed from the outer periphery of the rectangular shape of the housing fixing pad KSPF toward the inside of the housing fixing pad KSPF. An over resist is applied so that the outer peripheral portion of the KSPF is covered with the resist. As a result, the entire outer peripheral portion of each housing fixing pad KSPF is covered with the resist on the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, so that a high peel strength can be obtained in multiple directions with respect to each housing fixing pad KSPF. Can be uniform with respect to the load.

  Although the front surface and the back surface of the base material KCo of the substrate KC are formed by bonding the copper foil surface, each pad KSP or each housing formed on the copper foil surface is compared with the bonding between the base material KCo and the copper foil surface. Bonding of body fixing pad KSPF and solder is stronger.

  By the way, examples of the substrate KC on which the surface mount type connector KCN is mounted include substrates such as the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 633 in this embodiment. Various wirings and harnesses connected to various connectors provided on the boards such as the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are used when removing dust and cigarette dust accumulated in the pachinko machine 1 and when performing various inspections. After being removed by an attendant such as a game hall clerk, they are reconnected after work. However, the clerk of a game hall or the like who performs such work is often unfamiliar with the handling of the board, when removing various wirings and harnesses from the connector, and when connecting various wirings and harnesses to the connector , It may be done with power (ie, with excessive force).

  Then, among the plurality of connectors provided on the board KC such as the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, there are DIP type connectors and surface mount type connectors. For example, the surface mount type connector KCN described above. When a staff member such as a game hall clerk performs the above-described work, the force accompanying the insertion / extraction of the harness to / from the surface mount type connector KCN is applied to the surface mount type connector KCN. Because of this large force, both sides of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal housing fixing portions provided on the left and right sides) are the copper foil of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. Each case fixing pad KSPF formed on the surface KCxp is peeled off from the base material KCo, and accordingly, the surface (mounting surface) KC of the substrate KC. Peeled off the pad KSP from substrate KCo formed of a copper foil surface KCxp, there are cases where various wiring patterns formed on copper foil surface KCxp is peeled off from the substrate KCo with each pad KSP.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, the copper foil formed on the copper foil surface KCxp by applying an over resist to the housing fixing pad KSPF does not peel from the base material KCo. By increasing the peel strength, even when force is applied to the surface mount type connector KCN when the harness is inserted into or removed from the surface mount type connector KCN, it is formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC The housing fixing pad KSPF to be formed does not peel from the base material KCo, and accordingly, each pad KSP formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC peels from the base material KCo, Various wiring patterns formed on the copper foil surface KCxp can be reliably prevented from being peeled off from the base material KCo together with the pads KSP. Going on.

[Modification]
In the present embodiment, the over-resist described above is applied to the housing fixing pad KSPF of the substrate KC on which the surface mount type connector KCN to which an external force is applied is mounted. When a surface mount type connector into which various wirings and harnesses are inserted and removed is mounted in addition to the control board 633 and the like, the peripheral control board 1510, the power supply board 630, the interface board 635, various decorative boards, and various relays The above-described over-resist may be applied to the case fixing pad of the substrate such as the substrate or various drive substrates, or the substrate is provided on a movable body that is operated by driving of an electric drive source. When a load is applied to the movable substrate by wiring or harness that is electrically connected to the movable substrate as the body operates The above-described over-resist may be applied to the housing fixing pad of the movable substrate on which the connector of the mounting type is mounted, and various switches having a pressing operation unit, the surface of the substrate (mounting surface) In the case of a surface-mount type mounted on the board, the above-described over-resist may be applied to the board fixing pad of the board for fixing various switches, or some external force is applied to the board. The over-resist described above may be applied to the pads of the board on which various terminals of lead-type and surface-mount type electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, transistors, and ICs are soldered. .

  In the above-described embodiment, in the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, a region corresponding to the case fixing pad KSPF in the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr has a rectangular shape of the case fixing pad KSPF. Since the housing fixing pad surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KCxra having a smaller opening rectangular shape is formed, from the outer periphery of the rectangular shape of the housing fixing pad KSPF toward the inside of the housing fixing pad KSPF. The over-resist is applied so that the outer peripheral portion of the case fixing pad KSPF is covered with the resist. However, the over-resist is not applied to the case fixing pad KSPF, and a through hole having a land around the case fixing pad KSPF. May be formed, and each land may be over-resisted. FIG. 215 is a schematic diagram (a) of the copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) side of the substrate on which the surface mount type connector in the modification is mounted, and is a schematic diagram (b) of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate. is there. FIG. 216 is a continuation of FIG. 215, and is an enlarged view of part B of FIG. 215 (b), and is a schematic view (c) of an over resist applied to a housing fixing land of a surface mount type connector. It is the schematic (d) of the cross section of the ZZ line in c). Note that in FIG. 215 and FIG. 216, various wiring patterns and substrate ground (GND) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “solid ground”) are omitted from the viewability of the drawings.

  A description will be given of a modification in which a plurality of through holes having lands are formed around the casing fixing pad KSPF without over-resisting the casing fixing pad KSPF, and the over-resist is applied to each land. As shown in (b) and FIGS. 216 (c) and 216 (d), each terminal (for example, having six terminals) of the surface mount type connector KCN has a rectangular shape elongated in the vertical direction. The pads KSP, the various wiring patterns connected to the pads KSP, and both sides of the case of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal case fixing portions provided on the left side and the right side) are arranged on the surface of the substrate KC ( Housing fixing pad KSPF having a rectangular shape elongated in the vertical direction and fixed by soldering to the mounting surface), a plurality of through holes having lands A solid ground connection wiring pattern for connecting CTH (hereinafter simply referred to as “land KCTH”), the case fixing pad KSPF, the land KCTH, and the solid ground is the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. By removing the copper foil on the copper foil surface KCxp, each pad KSP, various wiring patterns connected to each pad KSP, each housing fixing pad KSPF, each land KCTH, each solid ground connection wiring pattern are formed. . Each land KCTH is formed by removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC. In this modification, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC and the outer diameter of the land formed on the rear surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC are the same size. The solid ground connection wiring pattern that connects the housing fixing pad KSPF, the land KCTH, and the solid ground also has a function as a thermal pattern of the housing fixing pad KSPF.

  For the right case fixing pad KSPF, three lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals along the vertical direction, and two rows are arranged adjacent to the right side of the case fixing pad KSPF. For the left case fixing pad KSPF, three lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals along the vertical direction, and two rows are arranged adjacent to the right side of the case fixing pad KSPF.

  On the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, a resist solution is applied to form a surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr, but the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr In the region corresponding to the land KCTH, a surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KCxra having an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH is formed. Further, although a resist solution is applied on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KCyr, the back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KCyr. In the region corresponding to the land KCTH, a back surface (solder surface) side resist opening KCyra having an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH is formed. In this modification, the opening diameter of the front surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KCxra and the opening diameter of the back surface (solder surface) side resist opening KCyra are the same. A substrate ground (GND) (that is, a solid ground) formed on the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC and a substrate ground (GND) (that is, a solid ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC. ) Are electrically connected by a through hole (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

  As described above, in the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, the surface (mounting surface) having an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH in the region corresponding to the land KCTH in the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr. Since the side resist opening KBxra is formed, an over resist is applied in which the outer peripheral portion of the land KCTH is covered with the resist from the outer periphery of the outer diameter of the land KCTH toward the center of the land KCTH. Further, in the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC, the back surface (solder surface) side of the back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KCyr corresponding to the land KCTH has an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH. Since the resist opening KCyra is formed, an over resist is applied so that the outer peripheral portion of the land KCTH is covered with the resist from the outer periphery of the outer diameter of the land KCTH toward the center of the land KCTH. Thereby, it is possible to increase the peel strength so that the copper foil formed on the copper foil surface KCxp is not peeled from the base material KCo by applying an over resist to each land KCTH.

  As described above, the right case fixing pad KSPF has two rows in which three lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals along the vertical direction, and is adjacent to the right side of the right case fixing pad KSPF. As described above, the left housing fixing pad KSPF has two rows in which three lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals along the vertical direction, and the left housing fixing pad KSPF. It is arranged so as to be adjacent to the left side of. As a result, even if the over-registration is not applied to the case fixing pad KSPF, the over-registration is applied to each land KCTH. By being connected, even if the force applied to the surface mount type connector KCN is applied to the surface mount type connector KCN, it is formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC When the case fixing pad KSPF to be peeled is to be peeled off from the base material KCo, the peel strength by each land KCTH formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC is increased accordingly Thus, it is possible to make it difficult for the housing fixing pad KSPF to be peeled off from the base material KCo.

  In this modification, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC and the outer diameter of the land formed on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC are the same size. However, the outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC as compared to the outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. May be increased or decreased. In this modification, the opening diameter of the front surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra and the opening diameter of the back surface (solder surface) side resist opening KByra are the same, but the front surface (mounting surface). Compared to the opening diameter of the side resist opening KBxra, the opening diameter of the back surface (solder surface) side resist opening KByra may be increased or decreased.

  In the present modification, as described above, the right housing fixing pad KSPF has two rows in which three lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals along the vertical direction, and the right housing fixing pad KSPF. As shown above, the left housing fixing pad KSPF has two rows in which three lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals in the vertical direction. The left housing fixing pad KSPF is arranged so as to be adjacent to the left side of the left housing fixing pad KSPF. Instead of or along with this, the right housing fixing pad KSPF has two lands at equal intervals in the vertical direction. Two rows of KCTHs may be arranged adjacent to the upper and / or lower side of the right housing fixing pad KSPF, or the left housing fixing pad KSPF may be arranged along the vertical direction. Two at equal intervals Column 2 rows command KCTH is arranged, it may be arranged so as to be adjacent to the upper or / and lower left casing fastener pad KSPF.

  By the way, various types such as a main control board that performs control related to game progress and game profit, a sub control board that performs control related to effects executed as the game progresses, and an image control board that performs display control of an image display device, etc. A gaming machine in which the board is disposed on the back side has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2). The connector provided on the board is subjected to a load due to the insertion and removal of the wiring. For example, when a person unaccustomed to handling the board removes the wiring from the connector or connects the wiring to the connector with an excessive force There was a problem that the copper foil of a board | substrate peeled by the load to a connector.

[Configuration of peripheral control unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 disposed on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 provided in the gaming board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 217 to 219. FIG. 217 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 218 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, and FIG. 219 is a front view of the peripheral control unit. Here, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described as the front side of the peripheral control unit 1500. In FIG. 218, the terminals of various connectors are inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y, and the terminals of the various connectors are connected to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. Although omitted from the figure, it was omitted from the viewability of the drawing.

  As shown in FIGS. 217 and 218, the peripheral control unit 1500 includes a cover body 1501 that is open at the rear and has a box shape that is longer in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction, and a main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game. Peripheral control board 1510 capable of controlling the progress of presentation based on a command from main control board 1310, peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to peripheral control board 1510, and peripheral control board 1510 A liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and a base body 1502 that closes the opening of the cover body 1501. Various substrates such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached at predetermined positions in the internal space of the cover body 1501, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502. Thus, a peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed board box) is configured by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

[Cover body]
Peripheral data that can store various control information (peripheral data) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the peripheral control board 1510, in various boards attached in the internal space of the cover body 1501. There is a ROM substrate 1520 and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 that can output drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600. The peripheral control board 1510 has a horizontally long rectangular shape having an area of about two-thirds when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back, and is arranged on the left side of the cover body 1501. Peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 have a square shape of peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 out of the remaining one third of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the back. On the other hand, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 has a square shape that is twice as large as the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and is disposed on the lower right side of the cover body 1501.

  The board between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected by a board-to-board connector described later, and the board between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected by a board-to-board connector described later. Connected. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected, and the same ground. (GND). The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Yes.

  The cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, is molded into an opaque black color, and viewed from the front side, the upper side and the left side of a horizontally long rectangular cover flat plate 1501a (plate thickness: 2 mm) The cover side walls 1501b to 1501e are respectively provided on the lower side and the right side so as to protrude rearward (front side of the pachinko machine 1), thereby forming a box shape having an opening.

  The cover flat plate 1501a is attached to the air cooling fan FAN at a position corresponding to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, which is slightly in the center and right upper side when viewed from the front. A FAN mounting recess 1501aa having a square shape is formed so as to protrude toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. On the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa are formed along a plurality of concentric circles centered on the center of the bottom surface in the vertical and horizontal directions. In addition, the four corners of the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa have predetermined cylindrical shapes inserted into the through holes th1 to th4 at positions corresponding to the through holes th1 to th4 formed at the four corners of the air-cooled fan FAN having a square shape. Guide protrusions 1501aa1 to 1501aab4 having a height (a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the air-cooling fan FAN) are formed to protrude toward the opposite side of the opening side of the cover body 1501. In addition, by forming the arc-shaped slit hole 1501aaa, it is possible to prevent an illegal act of illegally taking out various electronic components included in the peripheral control board 1510 from the peripheral control board 1510.

  The cover flat plate 1501a is formed with a pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 diagonally in the vicinity of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. When the air cooling fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and attached, the front surface of the air cooling fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, a metal seat-mounted pan head screw (screw having a shape in which a pan head and a flat washer are integrated) is screwed into the pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the flat washer, which is the seat portion of the pan head screw with a seat, comes into contact with the front surface of the air cooling fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, so that the air cooling fan FAN jumps out of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. Can be prevented.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a gap having a predetermined distance dimension between the front surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa ( In the present embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

  The cover flat plate 1501a communicates with the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and is higher than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa (a distance dimension shorter than the distance from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa). The wiring lead-out recess 1501ab is formed so as to protrude toward the opening of the cover body 1501. When the air-cooling fan FAN is attached and fixed to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of wires from the air-cooling fan FAN can be drawn out from the wiring lead-out recess 1501ab.

  The cover flat plate 1501a is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a along the lower side when viewed from the front, and the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d and a position corresponding to 1510d as a closed rectangular region (more precisely, a convex region with the volume adjustment switch 1510d and the connector CN1 at the top and the connectors CN2 to CN7 at the bottom) The position 1501ac is lower than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (the position having a longer distance than the distance from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa) toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. Are formed to protrude. On the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and a volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 are provided at positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. Is formed. The bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac substantially occupies the lower right region when the cover flat plate 1501a is viewed from the front. For this reason, as a countermeasure against insufficient strength and warping of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) caused by an increase in the area of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac has connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and volume control. Two reinforcing ribs 1510aci1 and 1510aci2 elongated in the vertical direction at positions that do not interfere with the hole 1501ac8 are formed to protrude forward at a predetermined interval.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. The connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 are exposed.

  The cover flat plate 1501a has a position corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a along the lower side when viewed from the front. The connector recess 1501ad is lower than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa as one closed horizontally long rectangular area (a position having a distance distance longer than the distance from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). The bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac are arranged on the same plane. Connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad at positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

  When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad. Each will be exposed.

  The cover flat plate 1501a has a wiring lead-out opening 1501ae at a position corresponding to the CN 10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 along the left side when viewed from the front. The mounting recess 1501af for mounting the wiring cover body 1503 having a horizontally long rectangular shape that communicates with the wiring lead opening 1501ae and can block the wiring lead opening 1501ae is compared with the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa described above. It is formed to project toward the opening of the cover body 1501 at a high position (a position having a short distance compared to the distance from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). The mounting recess 1501af is provided at a position corresponding to the through hole 1503a formed in the wiring cover body 1503 at a predetermined height of a cylindrical shape inserted through the through hole 1503a (a distance shorter than the distance dimension of the wiring cover body 1503 in the depth direction). And a mounting hole 1501afb1 at a position corresponding to the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503. , 1501afb2 are formed.

  When the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af, the front surface of the wiring cover body 1503 and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, by inserting metal pan screws (not shown) into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwing them into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. The wiring cover body 1503 can be fixed to the mounting recess 1501af.

  When the wiring cover body 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af, the flexible flat cable (FFC (Flexible Flat) is connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 while closing the wiring drawing opening 1501ae. An abbreviation for “Cable.” In the flexible flat cable, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting drawing data to the effect display device 1600 are arranged in parallel, and the plurality of flat conductors are covered with an insulator. The wiring cover body 1503 can function as a cover for protecting it from being touched. The wiring cover body 1503 is made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in opaque black.

  When the cover body 1501 is viewed from the front, plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb are formed which protrude in the upper and lower sides at predetermined intervals in the center near the opening side of the cover body 1501 on the left cover side wall 1501c. At the same time, a hinge hook 1501cc arranged above the guide 1501ca and protruding outward, and a hinge hook 1501cd arranged below the guide 1501cb and protruding outward are formed. A chamfer is formed on the rear surface side of the left end of the guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb. On the other hand, L-shaped flanges 1501cca and 1501cda projecting forward are formed on the front side of the left end of the hinge hooks 1501cc and 1501cd. Further, a cover side sealing portion 1501ea protruding outward is formed at the center of the cover body 1501 of the right cover side wall 1501e.

  The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 when viewed from the back so that the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged close to the left side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. At the position, four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are formed to protrude from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. The periphery of the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 is a soldering copper foil (so-called “land”) 1510rf1 having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 and copper foils for soldering (so-called “lands”) 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 having circular shapes on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are formed, and these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 are formed. , 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 have wiring patterns formed on the peripheral control board 1510 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510. Further, these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are respectively soldered so that the copper foil as the surface thereof is not exposed.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1501 is directed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510. Are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and metal pan screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. The peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing. In this state, lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510, and mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, Are in contact with each other, and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the metal pan screw are in contact with each other. Become. Furthermore, the shaft (screw part) of the metal pan-screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan screw. Lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are electrically connected. As a result, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Since the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan screw, the cover data 1501 is connected to the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The ground (GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected, and the same ground (GND) is obtained.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan screws inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwed are the openings of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end face on the side (that is, so as not to protrude outward from the end face on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e).

  The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 when viewed from the back so that the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. A pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 are diagonally projected from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. Has been. The periphery of the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is a copper foil for soldering (so-called “land”) having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and soldering copper foil (so-called “land”) 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 having a circular shape on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are formed, and these lands are formed. 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 have wiring patterns formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, respectively. Further, these lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are respectively soldered so that the copper foil as the surface thereof is not exposed.

  When the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is directed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the through hole formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is formed. 1520r1 and 1520r3 are inserted into mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and metal pan screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. Then, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the mounting boss protrusions 1501i1 and 1501i2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. ) And the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2, respectively, and lands 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, The bearing surface of the metal pan-screw is in contact with each other. Furthermore, the shaft (screw part) of the metal pan-screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 via a metal pan screw. The lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are electrically connected. As a result, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Therefore, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 through a metal pan screw, thereby the peripheral control substrate 1510 The ground (GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected, and the same ground (GND) is obtained.

  When the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan screws inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 and screwed into the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end surface on the opening side (that is, so as not to protrude outward from the end surfaces on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the cover flat plate The back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back surface side of 1501a is arranged on the same plane.

  The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 when viewed from the back so that the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is disposed on the lower right side of the back of the cover body 1501. A pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 are formed at positions so as to protrude diagonally from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. ing. Around the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, a soldering copper foil (so-called “land”) 1530rf1 having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 1530rf4 and soldering copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 having a circular shape on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed, and the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 are formed. , 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 have wiring patterns formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, respectively. Further, these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4, 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are respectively soldered so that the copper foil as the surface thereof is not exposed.

  When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1530 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is directed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Are inserted into mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and metal pan screws (not shown) are inserted into through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the 1501a. In this state, lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501n1 and 1501n2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 are in contact with each other, and the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the metal It will be in the state which each contacted with the bearing surface of the made pan-screw. Furthermore, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan-screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via a metal pan screw. Lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are electrically connected. As a result, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. Therefore, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via a metal pan-screw, so that the ground of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is obtained. (GND) and the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are electrically connected, and the same ground (GND) is obtained.

  When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan screws inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 and screwed into the openings of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. Of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged on the inner side of the side end face (that is, not to protrude outward from the end face on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e). The back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control substrate 1510 fixed to the back surface side and the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged on the same plane. It has come to be.

  As described above, when various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the surfaces of the various substrates (cover flat plate 1501a). A space having a distance of a predetermined height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, a gap (2.3 mm in the present embodiment) having the above-described predetermined distance dimension is formed between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. Will be formed.

  A plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 on the right side, the lower right side, the lower left side, and the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. When the wing portion of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled toward the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the wing portion. By taking in air from the outside of the unit 1500 through these ventilation holes 1501az, the inner space of the cover body 1501 (particularly, the peripheral control IC 1510a) can be air-cooled. These ventilation holes 1501az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width in the left-right direction of 6.5 mm, and a pitch width in the up-down direction of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, there are gaps between the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the volume control switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501. Further, when the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501 A gap is formed. For this reason, when the wing portion of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotates, the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 is expelled toward the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing portion by this rotation. In addition to taking in air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the described ventilation holes 1501az, the above-described gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and seven formed on the cover body 1501) Gaps formed in connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7, volume adjustment switch 1510d provided in peripheral control board 1510, volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in cover body 1501, and gap formed in liquid crystal output board 1530 Two connectors CN8 with And CN9, via the two connector hole 1501ac9,1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501, a gap) formed, so that the capturing.

  Each of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aa formed in the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa plus the area (total area) is the area in the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501; The above-described gaps (the volume control switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the gaps formed in the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501) And a volume adjusting hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, a gap formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac1 formed in the cover body 1501. If is smaller than that the area of the gap) to be formed, it was added to the. For this reason, when the wing portion of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotates, the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 is expelled toward the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing portion by this rotation. When taking in air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The flow velocity of the air flowing into each can be kept small.

  When the wing portion of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotates, the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 is expelled toward the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing portion by this rotation. Each of the air holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 when air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the air holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. However, when the wing part of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotates, the air is sucked in through the wing part to surround the air. To send air toward the control IC 1510a It may be. In other words, the main purpose of the air cooling fan FAN may be to simply cool the peripheral control IC 1510a without air exchange in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

[Base body]
A base body 1502 that closes the opening of the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded into an opaque black color. When viewed from the front, the upper side of a horizontally long rectangular base plate 1502a, Base side walls 1502b to 1502e are respectively provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side so as to project forward (back side of the pachinko machine 1), thereby forming a box shape having an opening. The size of the opening formed by the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 is larger than the size of the opening formed by the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. Thus, in a state where the cover body 1501 is covered with the base body 1502 to close the opening of the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502, the cover side walls 1501 b to 1501 e of the cover body 1501 are placed inside the base side walls 1502 b to 1502 e of the base body 1502. Will be in a state of being inscribed (surface contact).

  The base flat plate 1502a is located at a predetermined distance along the lower side when viewed from the front thereof, and does not interfere with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (that is, the peripheral control board) Each terminal of the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of 1510 is inserted from the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y, and the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 The peripheral control board 1510 is warped by the force when inserting the connectors for connecting the wirings to these connectors CN2 to CN7 at positions that do not interfere with the respective protruding terminals) because they protrude from 1510y. Disconnection elongated in the vertical direction to prevent disconnection of the electrical wiring pattern formed on the control board 1510 Stop rib portion 1502aa1~1502aa3 are formed.

  When the base body 1502 is viewed from the front, an engagement portion 1502ca projecting outward is formed in the vicinity of the opening side of the base body 1502 on the left base side wall 1502c. The engaging portion 1502ca includes guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab at positions corresponding to the plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501, and hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. Hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed at corresponding positions, respectively. The hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed with U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf.

  The plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab, and the U-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are inserted into the above-described portions. L-shaped flange portions 1501 cca and 1501 cda of hinged portions 1501 cc and 1501 cd formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted. The hinge-shaped bag portions 1502 cae and 1502 caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502 cac and 1502 cad are in contact with the L-shaped flange portions 1501 cca and 1501 cda of the hinge hook portions 1501 cc and 1501 cd formed on the cover body 1501. By wrapping around, the L-shaped flange portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are hooked on the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. It can be engaged.

  In addition, a base side sealing portion 1502ea protruding outward is formed at a position corresponding to the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 at the center of the right base side wall 1502e. Further, through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 for attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5 are formed on the upper side and the lower side of the right base side wall 1502e, respectively.

[Various connectors]
On the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 attached in the internal space of the cover body 1501, the peripheral control unit 1511 (excluding functions of various ROMs) and the effect display control unit 1512 (functions of various ROMs). 1) CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller (Advanced Technology Attachment, hereinafter referred to as “SATA controller”), and various I / O interfaces, etc. Peripheral control IC 1510a integrated on one semiconductor chip, various programs that can control the progress and demonstration of a game effect (a demonstration effect performed while waiting for a player), and various schedule data that define the progress of the effect Control to store in advance OM 1510b (including the function of the peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control unit 1511 described above and the function of the display control ROM of the presentation display control unit 1512 described above) and the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are stored. SDRAM 1510c composed of SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic Access Memory) 1510c1 and 1510c2 capable of transferring and storing various control information (peripheral data), a slide-type volume control switch 1510d capable of adjusting the volume, and A backup power supply 1510e that can supply power to a real-time clock IC (not shown) even when the power is cut off, a power generation circuit (not shown) that generates various power supply voltages, and various connectors Is provided with a N1~CN7, the. The backup power source 1510e is accommodated in a holder (not shown).

  The control ROM 1510b provided in the peripheral control board 1510 has a storage capacity of 128 Mbits, and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 each have a storage capacity of 2 Gbits. The peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 has a storage capacity of 62 Gbits.

  Various I / O interfaces of the peripheral control board 1510 include various serial I / O, various parallel I / O, and the like. The various serial I / Os include SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication, UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) communication, and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication.

  In the present embodiment, UART communication is adopted as a communication method for receiving a command from the main control board 1310 (communication is performed via the connector CN5), and various boards provided on the game board 5 side and various boards provided on the door frame side. As a communication method for transmitting control data, SPI communication or I2C communication is employed (communication is performed via a corresponding connector among the connector CN3, the connector CN6, and the connector CN7).

  In the present embodiment, using SPI communication or I2C communication, an electric drive source provided on the game board 5 side (for example, various motors and various solenoids communicate with each other via the connector CN6), and a door frame. The drive data is transmitted to the drive control IC that drives the electrical drive source (for example, various motors and various solenoids, which communicate via the connector CN3) provided on the 3 side, Emission data for the LED control IC with respect to the plurality of LEDs (communication via the connector CN7) and the plurality of LEDs (communication via the connector CN3) provided on the door frame 3 side , Receiving signals from various sensors provided on the game board 5 side (communication via the connector CN6) as detection data, and various sensors provided on the door frame 3 side (connectors) Communicating via the N3. The signals from) and receives as the detection data. In this embodiment, the transfer rate by SPI communication is set to 250 kbps, and the transfer rate by I2C communication is set to 1 kbps.

  As various parallel I / Os, there is GPIO (General Purpose Input / Output, general purpose IO). In the present embodiment, a signal from the air cooling fan FAN that conveys the rotation state of the air cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to the GPIO (via the connector CN1), or provided on the game board 5 side. Signals from various sensors for confirming the operation of the control target and the origin position are input to GPIO (via connector CN6), or control signals for the control target (not shown) provided on the game board 5 side are output from GPIO (connector CN6 And a signal is output from the GPIO to the LEDML4 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying that the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

  In the present embodiment, for example, GPIO is assigned to the connector CN1, and SPI communication and I2C communication are assigned to the connector CN3 (that is, the connector CN3 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and I2C communication coexist). , UART communication is assigned to connector CN5, SPI communication and GPIO are assigned to connector CN6 (that is, connector CN6 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and GPIO coexist), and SPI communication is assigned to connector CN7. Is assigned.

  The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a can establish communication conforming to the SATA standard with the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and realizes a high transfer rate of 2 Gbps (corresponding to 3 Gbps). The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a transfers various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a included in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a at high speed according to instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The data can be transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 at high speed.

  The SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are DDR3 SDRAMs (Double Data Rate 3 Synchronous Random Access Memory) and can realize a high data communication speed. In the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is transferred at high speed by the SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  On the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, a special connector SCN1 for connecting between the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the board and a special connector SCN2 for connecting between the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the board are further provided. I have. A surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 includes a special connector SCN3 for connecting the peripheral control substrate 1510 to the substrate. The surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 includes a special connector SCN4 for connecting the peripheral control substrate 1510 to the substrate.

  Peripheral control board 1510 outputs drawing data of an image drawn on a display device such as an effect display device from special connector SCN2 using a plurality of types of video signals. As the plurality of types of video signal systems, for example, there are a plurality of types such as an RGB system, an LVDS system, a MIPI (Mobile Industry Processor Interface) system, an eDP (Embedded Display Port) system, and a clockless system. In this system, four systems (four systems in total) are employed: one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system and second LVDS system), and MIPI system. Further, in the present embodiment, one of the two LVDS systems (for example, the first LVDS system) is adopted as the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. ing. For example, an eDP system is used instead of the MIPI system, and the peripheral control board has one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and one eDP system. 1510 can also be created.

  Further, the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 further includes LEDML1 near the control ROM 1510b, LEDML2 near the SDRAM 1510c, LEDML3 near the special connector SCN1, and LEDML4 near the special connector SCN2. It is equipped with. The peripheral control board 1510 is directly supplied with various voltages (DC +37 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. LEDML1 is for confirming (monitoring) the state in which DC + 5V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which DC + 5V is being supplied. LEDML2 is for confirming (monitoring) the state in which DC + 12V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which DC + 12V is supplied. LEDML3 is for confirming (monitoring) the state in which DC + 37V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which DC + 37V is being supplied. LEDML4 is for confirming (monitoring) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the lighting state is maintained while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

  When various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached and fixed at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the surfaces (covers) of the various substrates are covered. A space having a distance of a predetermined height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the back surface of the flat plate 1501a and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 are turned on so that the space thus formed can be illuminated brightly.

  Special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, special connectors SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 The special connector SCN4 provided includes connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and connectors CN8 to CN8 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 in that a floating mechanism is provided. The structure is completely different from CN10. Each of these connectors CN1 to CN10 is a socket, and the socket and the plug are fitted by inserting and pushing the plug of the corresponding connector in the vertical direction with respect to the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The sockets of the connectors CN1 to CN10 have a structure in which there is no amount of movement in the vertical direction when the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are viewed from the front.

  Special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are plugs, respectively. (Mounting surface) Each of the special connectors SCN4 provided in the 1530x is a socket.

  By inserting and pushing the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510, the socket and the plug Will fit. When the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fitted, the socket is viewed in the front-rear direction (pachinko) when the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 (peripheral control substrate 1510) is viewed from the front. It has a structure in which a floating mechanism is provided that can absorb an error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing in by moving a predetermined distance range toward the back of the machine 1 (in the direction of the back and front). Note that the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is a state in which the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 is the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501 even if the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 (peripheral control substrate 1510) is moved to the maximum within the above-mentioned predetermined distance range. A gap is formed between the front surface (top surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 so as not to contact the back surface of the 1501a.

  By inserting and pushing the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510, the socket and the plug are connected. Mating. When the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fitted, the socket is viewed in the front-rear direction (pachinko machine 1) when the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front. It is a structure provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb an error in the front-rear direction that occurs when it is pushed in by moving a predetermined distance range in the direction of the back surface and the front surface. The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is in a state where the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even when the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) is moved as much as possible within the above-mentioned predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, the front (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 is the back of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 so as not to contact the connector.

  Here, the reason why the special connector SCN3 is adopted as the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the special connector SCN4 is adopted as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 will be briefly described. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 can store various control information (peripheral data) that is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral data ROM 1520a (the function of the image ROM of the effect display control unit 1512 described above, etc.) Including). As various types of control information (peripheral data), image data such as background images, character images, and design images for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, various decorative boards provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5 Light emission data for defining light emission modes (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the door, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, door frame 3 and game board 5 The drive data etc. for drive-controlling the various movable production bodies with which it is provided can be mentioned.

  The peripheral data ROM 1520a is a NAND flash (nonvolatile) memory, is cheaper than a NOR flash (nonvolatile) memory, has a large capacity, and can write various data at high speed. The peripheral data ROM 1520a has a low operating voltage, can suppress power consumption, and can realize a high transfer rate by communication conforming to the SATA standard.

  As described above, by adopting the NAND flash (nonvolatile) memory as the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the cost can be reduced and the power consumption can be suppressed, and various stored data can be read out at a high transfer rate. it can. However, although the peripheral data ROM 1520a can suppress power consumption due to its low operating voltage, it is susceptible to noise due to its low operating voltage. In addition, various data stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a need to be accurately and reliably transmitted from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the configuration in which the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are electrically connected via wiring (harness) is not adopted, and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are not connected. By adopting a configuration in which the control board 1510 is electrically connected by an inter-board connector, the influence of noise entering the inter-board transmission path is reduced.

  Although the procedure for attaching various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is connected to the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on its surface (mounting face) 1520x on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 ( Since it is necessary to fix the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 together with the peripheral control substrate 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a after being inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the mounting surface) 1510x and pushed in, By adopting the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the floating mechanism described above, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are absorbed in the front-rear direction error that occurs when the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a is fixed. So, plug and socket To prevent damage to the connection terminals formed in a plurality of numbers in a preparative, can a transmission path between the substrate and the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be reliably formed.

  Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may be warped after molding, although it is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. is there. Even in such a case, by using the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-described floating mechanism, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 together with the peripheral control substrate 1510 is fixed to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs during the operation, the connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket are prevented from being damaged, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is established. It can be reliably formed.

  The liquid crystal output board 1530 outputs the drawing data of the image drawn on the effect display device 1600 transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 from the connector CN10, so that the game display progresses to the effect display device 1600 (for example, for the player). An image that tells you that an advantageous big hit gaming state will occur compared to the normal state, an image that tells you that no big hit gaming state will occur, and a state where a big hit gaming state will occur compared to the normal state, although no big hit gaming state will occur This is an important board for drawing images (such as images indicating that the player is approaching) and demonstrations (demonstrations performed while waiting for the player) as images. Therefore, it is necessary to accurately and reliably transmit drawing data of an image drawn on the effect display device 1600 from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board are not used without adopting a configuration in which the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected via wiring (harness). By adopting a configuration in which the 1510 is electrically connected to the inter-board connector, the influence of noise entering the inter-board transmission path is reduced.

  Although the procedure for attaching various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, the liquid crystal output board 1530 has a socket for the special connector SCN4 provided on its surface (mounting surface) 1530x and the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 (mounting). Since the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 must be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control substrate 1510 after being inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface 1515x By adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above floating mechanism, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be absorbed in the front-rear direction when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. With plug and socket To prevent breakage of the connection terminals the number formed can a transmission path between the substrate and the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal driving substrate 1530 can be reliably formed.

  Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may be warped after molding, although it is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. is there. Even in such a case, by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above-described floating mechanism, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 together with the peripheral control substrate 1510 is fixed to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs at the time, a plurality of connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket are prevented from being damaged, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is surely established. Can be formed.

  When the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the back side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 Since the back surface and the back surface of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the same plane, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the peripheral control substrate 1510 with respect to the front surface. Compared to the case where the three-dimensional arrangement is performed, the distance dimension in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) of the peripheral control unit 1500 can be reduced. Electric drive source and drive mechanism that can be used, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and operating position) It can contribute to ensuring the order in the depth direction of the distance dimension.

[Assembly method of peripheral control unit]
Here, a method for assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510.

  Subsequently, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the surface of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 ( (Mounting surface) 1520x and the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are directed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are provided on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Inserted into the formed mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2, and inserted through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. That. Accordingly, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are formed. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. This is an arrangement corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

  Subsequently, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to form on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

  Subsequently, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a steel pan screw and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. Thus, of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral control substrate 1510 is finally fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is inserted into mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, thereby restraining movement in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is connected to the cover flat plate 1501a. While the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions is constrained by being inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side, the peripheral control board 1510 has a mounting boss for constraining the vertical and horizontal directions. The protrusion is not formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. This is because the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a to restrict the vertical and horizontal directions, and the dimensional error due to such restriction is applied to the peripheral control substrate 1510. Dimensional dimensions provided to the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a when fixed to the back side of the 1501a. This is because it can be absorbed with a sufficient margin.

  Subsequently, in a state where the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are The base body 1502 is inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped flange portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are attached to the base body. Inserted into U-shaped bag-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of 1502.

  Subsequently, the L-shaped flange portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped bag-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. Then, the base body 1502 is wrapped around so as to cover the opening side of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 is directly covered on the cover body 1501. The cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 is made of a metal (not shown). A metal one-way screw with an anchor rivet inserted is inserted and screwed toward a base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet spreads outward at the base-side sealing portion 1502ea, thereby forming the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. The base side sealing portion 1502ea to be sealed is in a sealed state.

  In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted and inscribed (surface contact) inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502, and the base body 1502 is in contact. The front surfaces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed in the contact state are in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, since the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 become conductive. In order to release such a sealed state, the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 has to be destroyed with a tool. Therefore, by observing the opening and closing traces, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 constituted by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and deterring power against illegal actions on the peripheral control board box 1505 Has been increased.

  Subsequently, the air cooling fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wires from the air cooling fan FAN are connected to the wiring lead recess 1501ab formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal seated pan-head screw (not shown) having a shape in which a pan head and a flat washer are integrated is screwed into the drawer and mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Subsequently, in order to connect a plurality of wirings (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via the wiring lead-out openings 1501ae formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The connector is inserted and attached, and the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. By inserting metal pan screws (not shown) into through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwing them into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the plurality of wirings are covered with the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

  When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this way is attached to the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5, the peripheral control unit 1500 is viewed from the front, and the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500). The engagement part 1502ca side) is inserted into a mounting groove (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is formed in the through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. Is fixed by screwing it into a mounting hole (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100.

  In the assembly method described above, in the procedure for attaching various substrates in the internal space of the cover body 1501, for example, first, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is placed at the predetermined position described above on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control substrate 1510. (The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is disposed on the upper right side of the cover body 1501 when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back.) And the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510. The surface of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 after being fixed at the above-mentioned predetermined position on the side (the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is arranged on the lower right side of the cover body 1501 when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back). (Mounting surface) The socket of special connector SCN3 provided for 1520x The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is inserted into and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the substrate 1510. Mounting surface) Inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on 1510x and pushed in, and the peripheral control board 1510 is packed on the left side of the cover body 1501 when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back. It can also be fixed. Even in such a procedure for attaching various boards, by adopting the sockets of the special connectors SCN3 and SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, it is possible to absorb the error in the front-and-rear direction caused by the pushing-in, so that the plug and socket It is possible to prevent breakage of a plurality of connection terminals formed on the substrate, and to reliably form transmission paths between the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the peripheral control substrate 1510, and to connect the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to the peripheral A transmission path between the control board 1510 and the board can be reliably formed.

  By the way, there are a plurality of types of game boards attached to the pachinko machines having different game specifications. In this embodiment, various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be divided into three parts and attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The peripheral control board 1510 is a board that can be used in common without depending on the game specifications of the game board mounted on the pachinko machine, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a according to the game specifications of the game board. The peripheral data corresponding to is stored as a board that depends on the game specifications of the game board, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a board that depends on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600.

  Thus, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that does not depend on the game specifications of the game board and that does not depend on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and is a common board. Therefore, it can be reused (recycled). Further, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 including a peripheral data ROM 1520a in which peripheral data corresponding to each game specification of the game board is stored and a peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the above-described board-to-board connector. Therefore, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be easily exchanged according to the game specifications of the game board.

  As described above, there are a plurality of types of video signal systems that are input to a display device such as an effect display device, such as an RGB system, an LVDS system, a MIPI system, an eDP system, and a clockless system. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 corresponding to these plural types of systems are electrically connected by the above-described inter-board connector. In other words, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be easily replaced in accordance with the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. In the present embodiment, as described above, one of the two LVDS systems (for example, the first LVDS system) is used as the video signal system input to the effect display device 1600. Therefore, the liquid crystal output board 1530 matched to the video signal system (LVDS system) input to the effect display device 1600 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by the inter-board connector described above.

  In this embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the back surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed to each side by metal pan-head screws, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) and are identical. Since it is configured to be a ground (GND), noise that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 flows to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) to remove the noise. (Hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control board board made of conductive resin”). There is a case to be described as anti-noise effect "by box 1505). Thereby, it is not necessary to provide each substrate with a dedicated filter for removing such noise, which can contribute to cost reduction of the various substrates.

  Here, the arrangement of the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 will be described. As described above, the air holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes can cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 and also have a function of confirming whether or not there is fraud.

  Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are formed on the peripheral control board 1510 as shown in FIG. The product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x and the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b can be visually recognized, that is, the angles in multiple directions. From the above, the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins can be confirmed so as to be larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510b. Thereby, the modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed via the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. Further, the LEDML1 arranged in the vicinity of the control ROM 1510b is maintained in a lighting state in a state where the direct current + 5V from the power supply substrate 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied, so that the direct current + 5V is supplied. Although it has a function of confirming (monitoring) the state that is being performed, it also has a function as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the control ROM 1510b, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins Can be contributed to.

  The plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connectors between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Larger area than the shape of the board-to-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520) Further, the product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the state of the IC pin of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, Can be seen, that is, multi-directional They are arranged distributed and so that the large area almost can check the condition of the surface and the IC pin of the peripheral data ROM1520a from time. As a result, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is changed into a plurality of circular shapes. It can confirm through the ventilation hole 1501az which has. Further, the LEDML3 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN1 is maintained in a lighting state in a state where the direct current + 37V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied. Although it has a function of checking (monitoring) the supplied state, it is provided on the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. By further having a spotlight function of brightly illuminating the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN3, the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 ) Special connector for 1520x And it is capable to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the substrate between the connector according to the SCN 3.

  Further, the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connectors between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. An area larger than the shape of the board-to-board connector (a shape constituted by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530) In such a manner, they are arranged in a distributed manner. Thereby, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be performed in a plurality of circular shapes. It can confirm through the ventilation hole 1501az which has. Further, since the LEDML4 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN2 is maintained in the lighting state when the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a is originally confirmed (monitored). Although it has a function, the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is brightly illuminated. By having a function as a spotlight, visual recognition of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 Contribute to improvement of performance It has to be able to bet.

  A plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are part numbers printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. The SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2, and the state of the IC pins of the SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2, so that the surface of the SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2 and the state of the IC pins can be confirmed from multi-directional angles. These are distributed and arranged so as to be larger than the shape of 1510c2. Thereby, the modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. Further, the LEDML2 arranged in the vicinity of the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in the lighting state in a state where the direct current + 12V is supplied from the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620. The surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, the SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2) is originally provided with a function of confirming (monitoring) a state in which DC + 12V is supplied, but also having a function as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the SDRAM 1510c. And the state of the IC pin can be improved.

  Further, among a plurality of blades constituting the blades of the air cooling fan FAN, the gap between the blades (specifically, the gap between the blades and the blades when the inspector rotates the blades of the air cooling fan FAN). The product number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed. Thereby, it can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes whether or not an unauthorized substrate is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  In the present embodiment, the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are surface-mounted and have a wide angle of about 120 degrees, and have a low directivity. Is suitable for lighting applications. When various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached and fixed at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the surfaces (covers) of the various substrates are covered. A space having a distance of a predetermined height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the back surface of the flat plate 1501a and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. When the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which is also suitable for illumination, are turned on, the space thus formed can be illuminated brightly.

  In addition, LEDML1 to LEDML4 are emitted from the area of the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the periphery thereof, which face the light emitting surfaces of the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Reflecting portions (not shown) that reflect the reflected light and travel again toward the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are formed. As these reflecting portions (not shown), in addition to a bright colored paint such as white, a colored paint having gloss may be used, or a glossy metal sheet may be attached.

  Further, in the vicinity of the game board 5, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5, and a payout unit 560 is arranged on the side of the game board 5. The game balls rub against each other and are charged and electrostatically discharged to become a noise source. For this reason, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment that is affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. In addition, since the pachinko machines 1 are lined up opposite the island facilities in the game hall, other pachinko machines may be affected by noise as noise sources. Thus, the surroundings of the game board 5 are in an environment that is extremely susceptible to noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data A configuration in which the ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected to the same ground (GND) is employed. As a result, noise that enters through the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 is converted into the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and The noise can be removed by flowing to a substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

[Partial foil removal of solid ground]
By the way, the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 has a wiring pattern for transmitting a control signal, a wiring pattern for supplying power, and a region other than a region where various land patterns are formed as a ground (GND). Are formed as a so-called solid ground (substrate ground) (also referred to as “solid ground”), and the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control substrate 1510 also has a wiring pattern for transmitting control signals and a wiring pattern for supplying power. In addition, a region other than a region where various land patterns are formed is formed as a so-called solid ground (substrate ground) (also referred to as “solid ground”), which is a ground (GND). The solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 are the peripheral control board Holes (copper) penetrating through a plurality of through holes (both surfaces (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of peripheral control board 1510 formed on both surfaces (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of 1510 The same ground (GND) is obtained by being electrically connected by the plated holes)).

  Further, as described above, the base flat plate 1502a does not interfere with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined interval along the lower side when viewed from the front. Position (that is, each terminal of the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y. Since it protrudes from the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of 1510, the peripheral force is generated by inserting a connector for connecting the wiring to these connectors CN2 to CN7 at positions that do not interfere with the protruding terminals. The control board 1510 is warped to prevent the electric wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510 from being disconnected. Elongated disconnection preventing rib portion 1502aa1~1502aa3 in the vertical direction are formed respectively.

  Further, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled and the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502 are sealed, as described above. The cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside and inscribed (surface contact) inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502, and the disconnection prevention rib portion 1502aa1 formed in the base body 1502 The front surface of ˜1502aa3 is in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510.

  Further, as described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the back surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed to each side by metal pan-head screws, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) and are identical. Since it is configured to be a ground (GND), noise that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 flows to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) to remove the noise. Be able to.

  By the way, the front surfaces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 are in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. A solid ground was formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 at the contacted portion and the solid ground was covered with a resist. In the noise resistance test, the peripheral control at the contacted portion was performed. A solid ground is formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the substrate 1510 and covered with a resist, and a solid ground is not formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control substrate 1510 at this contacted portion and is covered with a resist. As a result, it was found that noise resistance was higher when a solid ground was not formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control substrate 1510 at this contacted portion and covered with a resist. .

  When electromagnetic wave noise enters through the base body 1502, a high voltage is applied to the portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 contacts the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, electromagnetic noise passes through the resist and enters the solid brand. The electromagnetic wave noise enters through such an unexpected route, so that an electronic component that is easily affected by the electromagnetic noise and a wiring pattern electrically connected to the electronic component are formed on the base body 1502. If the front surfaces of the portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are adjacent to the portion in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, it may cause malfunction or damage.

  Further, among the front surfaces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502, electromagnetic wave noise passes through the resist on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y portion of the peripheral control board 1510 that contacts with the disconnection prevention rib portion. Since it cannot be predicted whether it will intrude or not, it is difficult to dispose an electronic component that is easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise or a wiring pattern that is electrically connected to the electronic component with respect to a specific disconnection prevention rib portion.

  It should be noted that electromagnetic noise passes through the resist and becomes solid because a high voltage is applied to a portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 contacts the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. In order to penetrate into the brand, when the disconnection preventing ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 and the betagrant are in contact via the resist, a high voltage due to electromagnetic noise entering the base body 1502 is applied to the contacted portion. Thus, it is considered that an unnecessary loop wiring in which electromagnetic wave noise enters from the disconnection prevention rib portion to the betagran is formed.

  Here, the solid surface of the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 at the portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 contacts the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. The shape of the ground will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 220 is a diagram showing the shape of a solid ground in a portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portion formed on the base body is in contact with the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board. It is the schematic (a) of the copper foil surface, and is the schematic (b) of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board.

  As described above, the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed in the base body 1502 have an elongated shape in the vertical direction. As shown in FIG. 220 (a), the corresponding positions and their surroundings are formed by a copper foil surface having a rectangular foil removal region 1510ya having a vertically long distance dimension dgw and a vertically spaced distance dimension dgh, which is long in the vertical direction. Each is formed at 1510 yp. That is, a region where a part of the beta taglan is removed (removed) is formed on the lower side of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board.

  These foil drawing regions 1510ya have a distance dimension dg0 between the left side thereof and the left side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 having a length greater than or equal to the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Each is formed. The length of the distance dimension dg0 between the left side of the foil drawing region 1510ya and the left side surface of the disconnection prevention rib parts 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is 1.0 as the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction of the disconnection prevention rib parts 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. In the present embodiment, the distance dimension dg0 between the left side of the foil drawing region 1510ya and the left side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Is 1.5 times as long as the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the horizontal direction.

  Further, these foil drawing regions 1510ya have a distance dimension dg1 between the right side thereof and the right side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 being longer than the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Each is formed. The distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is the length of the distance dimension dg1 between the right side of the foil drawing region 1510ya and the right side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. In the present embodiment, the distance dimension dg1 between the right side of the foil drawing region 1510ya and the right side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is the disconnection prevention rib portion 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Is 1.5 times as long as the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction.

  In addition, the distance dimension dg2 between the upper side and the upper side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is longer than the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Each is formed. The distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 as the length of the distance dimension dg2 between the upper side of these foil drawing regions 1510ya and the upper side surfaces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is 1.0. In the present embodiment, the distance dimension dg2 between the upper side of the foil drawing region 1510ya and the upper side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is the disconnection prevention rib portion 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Is 1.5 times as long as the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction.

  That is, the foil removal region 1510ya is not electrically connected to the solid ground by forming the foil removal region 1510ya on the copper foil surface 1510yp on which the solid ground is formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board, It is an insulated area.

  When a resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface 1510yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control substrate, as shown in FIG. 220 (b), the resist solution is also applied to the foil removal region 1510ya and the resist layer 1510yr. Is formed. The disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 come into contact with the resist layer 1510yr on the foil removal region 1510ya on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control substrate. Note that a solid ground is formed on the copper foil surface on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510x corresponding to the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510y. No foil removal region of the same shape is formed at all.

  As described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and on the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed by metal pan-head screws, these grounds (GND) are electrically connected to the same ground (GND). GND). For this reason, in this embodiment, the peripheral control is performed from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed in the base body 1502 by the noise that has entered the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 via the foil removal region 1510ya. A “noise-free route” that cannot enter the solid ground on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the substrate is formed, and the noise that has entered the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is described above. By forming a “route through which noise flows” that flows to a substrate ground (grounds (GND) of various substrates) via a metal pan-head screw, noise can be removed.

[Reuse of peripheral control boards]
As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that does not depend on the game specifications of the game board and that does not depend on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and is a common board. Therefore, it can be reused (recycled).

  As described above, the periphery of the four through-holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 is a soldering copper foil (so-called “so-called” “circular shape” on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. Land ”) 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and soldering copper foil (so-called“ land ”) 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 having a circular shape on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. When attaching the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1501 is directed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and is formed on the peripheral control board 1510. The through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing toward 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. Therefore, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are in contact with the seat surface (the seat surface of the head) of the pan portion of the metal pan screw.

  Thus, since the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (head seat surface) of the pan portion of the metal pan screw are in contact, By reusing the peripheral control board 1510, lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 are formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by repeated screwing and removal with a metal pan head screw. The mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 to be rubbed and peeled off from the base material of the peripheral control substrate 1510, or the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control substrate 1510 are made of metal. Peripheral control board 151 rubbing against the seating surface (head seating surface) of the screw pan The copper foil of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4y on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 is exposed. If so, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to reuse the peripheral control board 1510 due to oxidation and poor electrical connectivity.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are the surfaces. Each copper foil is soldered so that it is not exposed. This solder electrically connects mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a (boss surface) and lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. In addition to being covered so as to be connectable, the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the side and the seat surface (head seat surface) of the pan portion of the metal pan screw are electrically connected It is covered so that it can be connected. This prevents the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 from rubbing against the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. And the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are seat surfaces (heads) of the metal pan screw. The surface of the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented from being peeled off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting face) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510, Land 1 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 The copper foil portions of 10rb1 to 1510rb4 are not exposed and can be prevented from being oxidized, and are formed on the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is possible to improve electrical connectivity in a state where the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces), and the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 due to the viscosity of the solder. It is possible to improve electrical connectivity in a state where the side lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 and the seat surface (head seat surface) of the pan portion of the metal pan screw are in contact with each other.

  As a result, even if the peripheral control board 1510 is reused, noise that has entered the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 passes through the metal pan screw (the ground (GND) of various boards). The above-described “route through which noise is removed” is surely formed, so that the noise countermeasure effect by the peripheral control board box 1505 made of conductive resin can be stably maintained.

  In the present embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are as described above. The copper foil on the surface is soldered so as not to be exposed. The lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are soldered to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 because the bearing surface of the metal pan-screw is abutted as described above. If the thickness is not uniform (that is, if there is a portion where the solder is raised), the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 of the peripheral control board 1510 and the metal pan-screw bearing surface There is a problem that the area of contact decreases and the electrical connectivity deteriorates. Further, as described above, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. If the thickness soldered to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 is not uniform (that is, if there is a portion where the solder is raised), the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 The area of contact between the side lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a is reduced, resulting in poor electrical connectivity. There's a problem. In addition, if the thickness soldered to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 is not uniform (that is, if there is a portion where the solder is raised), the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal pan screw into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, The control board 1510 is distorted, and various wiring patterns are disconnected.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is applied to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 with which the bearing surface of the metal pan screw abuts. A metal mask is placed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the substrate, and a solder paste is spread on the metal mask using a squeegee (like a spatula) to apply from a hole formed in the metal mask, and the peripheral control board 1510 By placing the back surface (solder surface) 1510y in a reflow furnace and drying the solder paste with heat, the thickness soldered to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 is made uniform as the thickness of the metal mask. Can do. Further, copper which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 that comes into contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The foil is formed on the metal mask by placing a metal mask on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and spreading the solder paste on the metal mask using a squeegee (like a spatula). Applying from the holes, putting the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 into a reflow oven and drying the solder paste by heat, the thickness soldered to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 The plate thickness of the metal mask can be made uniform.

[Modification]
In the embodiment described above, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 Each of the copper foils was soldered so as not to be exposed, but the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 that abuts the seat surface (head seat surface) of the pan portion of the metal pan screw. Surface of the peripheral control board 1510 which is soldered to the copper foils which are the surfaces of the side lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 and contacts the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a (Mounting surface) Lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf on the 1510x side The copper foil is a surface of the may be covered by applying a resist solution. The copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510, is applied together when the entire surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is applied with a resist solution. The Even with this configuration, metal pan-head screws are inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the cover body 1501 are electrically connected via a metal pan screw. State. Further, copper which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By coating the foil with a resist solution and covering it, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 can be made uniform. As a result, the resist layers in the portions corresponding to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 have the same thickness, and thus the through holes 1510r1 formed in the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal pan-head screw into ~ 1510r4 and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Further, distortion of the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented.

  In the above-described embodiment, the land 1510rf1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 that abuts the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. For copper foil, which is the surface of 1510rf4, a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and a solder paste is spread on the metal mask using a squeegee (like a spatula). It was applied from the hole formed in the metal mask, and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 was placed in a reflow furnace so that the solder paste was dried by heat. ) May be poured into a solder bath and soldered. In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 abut the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In order not to reduce the area and the electrical connectivity, the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is not partly raised. It needs to be uniform. FIG. 221 is a diagram showing the shape of the resist with respect to the land when the peripheral control board is poured into the solder bath.

  For example, a copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is formed with a resist layer 1510xr that is partially coated with a resist solution and formed into a predetermined shape, The surface of the peripheral control board 1510 (mounting surface) is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4. Specifically, as a “predetermined shape”, resist is predetermined as shown in FIG. 221 (a) with respect to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. A shape in which a plurality of circles having a width are formed concentrically (a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is formed concentrically), as shown in FIG. 221 (b), the resist has a predetermined width And a rectangular shape having a predetermined length and formed in a chrysanthemum shape in which a plurality of circular shapes are arranged in the center of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, as shown in FIG. 221 (c), a vertical line in which the resist has a predetermined width. And a shape formed in a lattice shape composed of lines in the horizontal direction (the resist may be formed in a shape in which a plurality of lines in the vertical direction having a predetermined width are separated by a predetermined distance dimension, or a resist ) May have a shape in which a plurality of lines having a predetermined width are formed apart by a predetermined distance.) As shown in FIG. 221 (d), lines having a predetermined width are separated by a predetermined distance. A shape in which a plurality of right-upward lines are formed in a slanted line shape (a line in which the resist has a predetermined width may be separated by a predetermined distance and a plurality of right-downward lines are formed in a slanted line shape) is not shown. For example, small circular shapes can be cited.

  In this way, a resist layer 1510xr is formed in which a part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is applied with a resist solution and formed into a predetermined shape. Since the surface of the control board 1510 (mounting surface) is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 (mounting surface) The amount of solder to be soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 can be suppressed (in other words, the surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510 (mounting surface) is applied as a predetermined shape by applying a resist solution. The amount of solder to be soldered to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 Effect as long as the can demonstrate that it is possible to win). Accordingly, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into the solder bath and soldered, the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is not soldered. The attachment can be made uniform so that it does not rise partially. The solder thus soldered includes the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the lands 1510rf1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 is covered so as to be electrically connectable.

  It should be noted that a predetermined figure formed by such a resist is a land on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 that abuts the seat surface (head seat surface) of the pan portion of the metal pan screw. You may perform also with respect to the copper foil which is the surface of 1510rb1-1510rb4. The solder thus soldered electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (the seat surface of the head) of the pan portion of the metal pan screw. It is covered so that it can be connected. Further, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder bath and soldered, the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is applied with a resist solution. Thus, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may be made uniform.

  In the above-described embodiment, the metal pan head screw is used when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. However, the metal pan head screw has a plain washer, a spring washer, and a tooth The peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a through a metal washer such as a washer (also referred to as a “chest washer”).

  In the embodiment described above, when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the conductive resin cover 1501, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the cover flat plate 1501a. The mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of each of the contact surfaces are in contact with each other, and the land 1510rb1 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510. ˜1510rb4 and the bearing surface of the metal pan screw are in contact with each other, so that the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via the metal pan screw. Land 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 In this state, the cover body 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected. However, instead of the conductive resin cover 1501, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND). The cover 1501 ′ may be used. In this case, the base body 1502 that closes the opening of the cover body 1501 may be made of conductive resin, may be made of metal instead of the conductive resin, The wiring cover body 1503 that closes the wiring lead-out opening 1501ae may be made of conductive resin or metal.

  Note that an amplifier board having a circuit for amplifying various sounds consumes a large amount of power and generates heat. Therefore, the amplifier board is housed in a metal board box composed of a metal cover body and a metal base body or attached to a metal partial case. When the amplifier board is housed in a metal board box, the air heated by the heat generated by the amplifier board and the heat of the amplifier board itself are efficiently radiated to the outside air by the metal board box. When the amplifier board is attached to the metal partial case, the heat of the amplifier board itself can be efficiently radiated to the outside air by the metal partial case.

  The amplifier board is housed in a metal board box composed of a metal cover body and a metal base body, or is attached to a metal partial case. Noise may enter the partial case. Therefore, as in the peripheral control board 1510 described above (that is, the cover body 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected), a plurality of amplifier boards are formed. The land and the mounting surface (boss surface) of a plurality of mounting boss holes formed on the back surface side of the metal cover body or metal partial case of the metal board box are in contact with each other. A plurality of lands formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the amplifier substrate and the metal pan screw's seating surface are in contact with each other, so that the metal is interposed via the metal pan screw. The metal cover body or metal of the metal board box is made in a state where the metal cover body or metal partial case is electrically connected to the plurality of lands formed on the amplifier board. Part case and amplifier board ground and (GND) can be a state of being electrically connected. Further, the heat of the amplifier board itself is transmitted from the ground (GND) of the amplifier board to the metal cover body or the metal partial case of the metal board box through the metal pan screw, and efficiently radiated to the outside air. You can also.

  In the above-described embodiment, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via the metal pan-screw. Thus, the cover body 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 are in a state of being electrically connected. However, the cover body 1501 can also be used in a two-story board (so-called “turtle turtle board”). it can. For example, the plurality of lands on the parent board are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the parent board, the plurality of lands on the daughter board are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the daughter board, and the plurality of lands on the parent board are connected. And the plurality of lands of the sub board are screwed at both ends of the metal support (spacer), respectively, so that electricity is supplied via the plurality of lands of the main board, the plurality of lands of the sub board and the metal support (spacer). Can be connected to each other. Thereby, the ground (GND) of the parent board and the ground (GND) of the child board can be made the same ground (GND) via the metal support (spacer).

  In the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is housed in the peripheral control board box 1505 made of conductive resin. However, the main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633 are housed. When configured to be made of conductive resin with respect to the payout control board box 632, the main control board box 1320 and the payout control board box 632 need to be transparent in order, and those made of conductive resin are used. Although not possible, the substrate box for housing the power supply board and the various relay board boxes for housing various relay boards are configured as those made of conductive resin, and the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the peripheral control board box. You may make it fix by the same method. In this way, the same effect as the noise countermeasure effect of the peripheral control board box 1505 made of the conductive resin described above can be exerted on the board box containing the power supply board and the various relay board boxes containing the various relay boards. it can.

  In the embodiment described above, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5 near the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached, as shown in FIG. In the state where the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the fifth gaming panel 1100 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), the peripheral control board 1510 is provided. A ball tank includes an inter-board connector using a special connector SCN1 and a special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, a special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and an inter-board connector using a special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. By placing it closer to the center of 552, tank rail 553 So that the can be placed apart al. As described above, the tank rail 553 is externally connected to the metal powder of the game ball B through the notch portions 553aa formed on the lower side (lower side of the rear surface of the tank rail 553 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front). Since the board-to-board connector described above is arranged away from the tank rail 553, an electrical trouble caused by the metal powder of the game ball B occurs in the board-to-board connector described above. Can be prevented.

  In the above-described embodiment, the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are provided. The board-to-board connector with the special connector SCN4 provided is a peripheral control unit on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). As shown in FIG. 217 with the 1500 attached, the upper area of the board-to-board connector can be reduced by arranging it vertically so that dust, some metallic powder, etc. The area to adhere can be minimized. In addition, when the above-mentioned board-to-board connector is arranged long in the left-right direction, the area on the upper side of the board-to-board connector increases, so the area to which dust, some metallic powder, etc. adheres increases extremely. Become. On the other hand, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are long in the left-right direction as shown in FIG. However, as described above, when viewed from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the upper side of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac is the upper surface of the connector recess 1501ac. The cover flat plate 1501a protrudes from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a even when plugs corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN9 are inserted, so that the plug cannot be protruded from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. Dust or some kind of gold adhering to the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the flat plate 1501a Even powder or the like having a sex may fall from the cover side wall 1501b, thereby making it possible to prevent from adhering to the connector CN1～CN9. In this way, the direction in which the above-described inter-board connector is disposed, and the direction in which the connectors CN1 to CN9 are disposed so that dust, powder having some metallicity, etc. can be prevented from adhering to each electrical terminal, Is selected.

  In the embodiment described above, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with the plugs of the special connectors SCN1 and SCN2, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with the socket of the special connector SCN3, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided with the socket of the special connector SCN4. However, you may arrange | position so that the direction through which information and a signal flow can be visually recognized. In such a case, the side that transmits information and signals can be a plug (or socket), and the side that receives information and signals can be a socket (or plug). For example, in the embodiment described above, various control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a included in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510. The ROM board 1520 is the transmitting side, and the peripheral control board 1510 is the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector that serves as a socket), and correspondingly, when the socket is provided on the peripheral control board 1510, a special connector (or plug and plug) is provided. A special connector). In the above-described embodiment, since a plurality of types of video signal systems are output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530, the peripheral control board 1510 is the transmission side and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the reception side. In such a case, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector that serves as a socket), and correspondingly, when the socket is provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530, it becomes a special connector (or plug). A special connector).

  In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501, but the cover side walls 1501b to 1501b provided on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501, respectively. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed by combining one or a combination of them except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of 1501e. For example, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501c provided on the left side, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501d provided on the lower side, or a cover side wall provided on the right side. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in 1501e, or a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed by combining a plurality of cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the cover flat plate 1510a, the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively. . Even if configured in this way, the foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B) falls toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation holes 1501az. Intrusion can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles due to foreign matter falling on the various substrates of the peripheral control board box 1505. Therefore, an electrical trouble due to a foreign matter falling from the tank rail 553 can be prevented. The reason why the ventilation hole 1501az is not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that if the ventilation hole 1501az is formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the peripheral control board box 1505 is passed through the ventilation hole 1501az. The foreign matter generated by the game ball B toward the inside (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) drops and enters, so that the electrical due to the fallen foreign matter on the various boards of the peripheral control board box 1505 This is because the probability of occurrence of trouble increases.

  In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501, but the cover side walls 1501b to 1501b provided on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501 A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively, except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side. By doing so, it is possible to contribute to suppressing the temperature rise of the peripheral control board box 1505 by forming a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively. The reason why the ventilation hole 1501az is not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that, as described above, if the ventilation hole 1501az is formed in the cover side wall 1501az provided on the upper side, the ventilation hole 1501az is interposed via the ventilation hole 1501az. When foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B) falls and enters the peripheral control board box 1505, the peripheral control board box 1505 drops onto various boards. This is because there is a high probability that an electrical trouble due to a foreign object will occur.

[Other noise countermeasures by peripheral control unit]
In addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 constituting the peripheral control board box 1505 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the wiring cover body 1503 is configured as a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above. At the same time, when various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) by metal pan-head screws, Since it is configured to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates to be the same ground (GND), noise that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is detected by various substrates. To the ground (GND) to remove noise It has become so that (hereinafter, referred to as "configuration of the noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment"). Other configurations of the present invention in which noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box that can remove noise that has entered the peripheral control board box 1505 can be taken (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control board box according to second to fifth embodiments”). Will be described with reference to FIGS. 222 to 241. In FIGS. 222 to 241, the same reference numerals as those of the various members attached in the configuration of the noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment shown in FIGS. The description is omitted except for a part of the noise countermeasure configuration by the peripheral control board box according to the second to fifth embodiments.

  In the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is made of a conductive material containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above. In contrast to the configuration made of resin, in the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board boxes according to the second to fifth embodiments, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is transparent. The non-conductive resin is configured, and in the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the second to fourth embodiments, a metal shield plate is accommodated in the peripheral control board box. In the configuration of noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, a metal shield plate is provided in the peripheral control board box. Not content.

  FIGS. 222 to 226 show noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment. The surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the like is covered with a metal shield plate, and this metal A part of the shield plate is in contact with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 via a conductive elastic member, and FIG. 222 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the second embodiment. 223 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the second embodiment, FIG. 224 is a front view of the peripheral control unit according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 225 is an X of FIG. 224 according to the second embodiment. FIG. 226 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line X-ray, and FIG. 226 is a view taken along arrow A in FIG. 224 according to the second embodiment.

  FIG. 227 to FIG. 230 show the countermeasures against noise by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, which further enhances the noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment. An area where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) such as 1510 is exposed and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are further in contact with each other through a conductive elastic member. FIG. FIG. 228 is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit according to the third embodiment, FIG. 228 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 229 is an arrow A in FIG. 224 according to the third embodiment. FIG. 230 is a view of the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board that makes good contact between the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board and the conductive elastic member. FIG. 2 is a view showing a method for taking out the solder (GND), and is a schematic diagram of the copper foil surface (exposed example (a)) of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control substrate, Stripped example (b)), schematic diagram of copper foil surface on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board (example (c) in which a plurality of through holes having lands are arranged), outline of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board It is a figure (example (d) in which a plurality of through holes having lands are arranged).

  FIGS. 231 to 235 are noise countermeasure configurations by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, and the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the like is covered with a first shield plate made of metal, The back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the like is covered with a metal second shield plate, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the like are sandwiched between the metal first shield plate and the metal second shield plate, A part of the first shield plate made of metal and a part of the second shield plate made of metal are electrically connected to the ground (GND) such as the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. FIG. 232 is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit according to the fourth embodiment, FIG. 232 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 233 is a peripheral control board according to the fourth embodiment. Diagram showing the installation procedure FIG. 234 is a diagram (a) showing lands formed around a through hole on the surface (mounting surface) side of a peripheral control board or the like according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 235 is a diagram showing lands formed around the through hole on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board or the like according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 235 is a diagram showing lands and screwing designation symbols (b). FIG. 4C is a diagram (c) showing a foil drawing region. In FIG. 227, the conductive elastic member for substrate 1507 that can come into contact with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is omitted from the viewability of the drawing. In FIG. 228, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 The conductive elastic member for substrate 1507 that can be contacted is indicated by a two-dot chain line for the sake of easy viewing.

  FIG. 236 to FIG. 241 are configurations for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment. The front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the like are made of metal shield plates. Of the various substrates accommodated in the peripheral control substrate box that are not covered at all, the region where a part of the ground (GND) of a specific substrate is exposed and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are interposed via the conductive elastic member. 236 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fifth embodiment, FIG. 237 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 7A is a rear perspective view of a peripheral control unit according to the fifth embodiment, and shows a part of a base body constituting the peripheral control unit so that the state where a conductive elastic member is inserted can be seen. (A) is a view (b) showing a part of a rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit cut along the CL line in FIG. (A), FIG. 239 is a continuation of FIG. 238, and the conductive elastic member is made of metal of the effect display device 1600. FIG. 240 is a diagram (c) showing a part of the rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit, in which a part of the peripheral control unit is cut out so as to understand the state of being deformed by being pressed against the back cover, and FIG. 240 is a front end portion of the contact probe. FIG. 241 is a front partial enlarged view of a cover body that constitutes a peripheral control unit having an opening that can be inserted and brought into contact, and FIG. 241 is a ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) side of a specific substrate and conductivity. It is a figure which shows the taking-out method of the ground | ground (GND) by the side of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific board | substrate which makes favorable contact with an elastic member, and is the schematic of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder side) of a specific board | substrate ( Peeling Example (a)), schematic view of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate (exposed example (b)), schematic diagram of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate (through holes having lands) It is an example (c)) in which a plurality are arranged, and a schematic diagram of a back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate (an example in which a plurality of through holes having lands are arranged (d)).

[Contrast between Noise Countermeasure Configuration by Peripheral Control Board Box According to First Embodiment and Noise Countermeasure Configuration by Peripheral Control Board Box According to Second Embodiment]
In the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, as described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is all made of polycarbonate with carbon as described above. It is configured as a conductive resin contained, and various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed on a metal plate on the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When fixed by screws, they are configured to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) of these various substrates to be the same ground (GND).

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the countermeasure against noise by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Peripheral control capable of controlling the progress of the production based on commands from the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game and the cover body 1501 that is made of a transparent non-conductive resin. A substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, And metal that can reduce (suppress) noise (electromagnetic wave noise) entering the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 Shield plate 1540, conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to a predetermined location of metal shield plate 1540, and a base body molded by a transparent non-conductive resin that closes the opening of cover body 1501 1502. Various substrates such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are mounted in a predetermined position together with a metal shield plate 1540 in the internal space of the cover body 1501, thereby making a metal shield. The plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and various substrates, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502, thereby forming a peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed board box) by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. ing.

[Cover Body of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Second Embodiment]
When the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540c1a formed in an L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of a metal shield plate 1540 described later is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. A through hole 1540c2a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of a metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later, is aligned with a mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Arrange as follows. Of the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 are replaced with the through holes 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540, and the metal shield. The plate 1540 is arranged so as to match the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and is formed in the peripheral control board 1510. The through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting metal pan screws (not shown) into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing them into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are held between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510. In this state, of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface side of the peripheral control board 1510, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are respectively contacted. In addition to being in contact, the lands 1510rf2 and 1510rf3 are in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Further, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the metal pan-screw are in contact with each other. Furthermore, the shaft (screw part) of the metal pan-screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Thus, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510, respectively, so that the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board are connected. 1530 is connected to the ground (GND). Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. Thus, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510.

  When the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b1a formed in an L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of a metal shield plate 1540 described later is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It arrange | positions so that it may match with the attachment boss hole 1501ah2. Then, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, by inserting metal pan screws (not shown) into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and screwing them into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. In this state, of the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the front surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the land 1520rf4 and the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. In addition, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf3 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 are respectively abutted. At the same time, the lands 1530 rb 1 to 1530 rb 4 formed on the back side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are in contact with the bearing surface of the metal pan-screw. Furthermore, the shaft (screw part) of the metal pan-screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1520rf4 formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, so that the metal shield plate 1540 becomes the peripheral data. It is connected to the ground (GND) of the ROM substrate 1520. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is connected to the ground (GND). Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630.

  When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b2a formed in an L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of a metal shield plate 1540 described later is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It arrange | positions so that it may match | combine with the boss hole 1501am1. Then, the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The output board 1530 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In this state, of the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the land 1530rf1 and the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. In addition, the lands 1530rf2 to 1530rf4 are in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501am2. At the same time, the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the back surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the seat surface of the metal pan screw are in contact with each other. Furthermore, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan-screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, so that the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the liquid crystal output substrate. It will be connected to the ground (GND) of 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate are connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510. 1520 is connected to the ground (GND). Further, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Accordingly, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

  Various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, so that the metal shield plate 1540 is formed. In the state of being sandwiched and fixed between the cover body 1501 and various substrates, the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa have the predetermined distance dimension described above. It will be in the state where the clearance gap (2.3 mm) which has is formed.

  As described above, the total of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aa formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (total area) is a plurality of ventilation holes formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. 1501az and the above-described gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501; The volume adjustment switch 1510d provided, the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, the gap formed in the cover body 1501, the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the two formed in the cover body 1501 Connector hole 1501ac9 And 1501Ac10, is smaller than that the area of the gap) to be formed, was added to the. For this reason, when the wing portion of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotates, the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 is expelled toward the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing portion by this rotation. The air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 is supplied to the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the metal shield plate 1540 accommodated in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When taking in through the plurality of ventilation holes 1540az, the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be reduced.

[Base Body of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Second Embodiment]
The base flat plate 1502a is on the right side when viewed from the front side, and at a position corresponding to an L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d formed by bending a metal shield plate 1540 described later. A rectangular through-hole 1502ab that is longer than the back surface shape of 1540d and is long in the vertical direction is formed.

  Note that, on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, the region corresponding to the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed in the base body 1502 is one area compared to the outer shape of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. The foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 having large shapes are formed, and the front surfaces (contact surfaces) of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are in contact with the foil removal regions NR1, NR, and NR3, respectively. These foil drawing regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 are designed to prevent the intrusion of noise (electromagnetic wave noise) from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed in the base body 1502. Isolated from GND). In other words, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) cannot enter the solid ground of the peripheral control board 1510 from the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed in the base body 1502 via the foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3. A route where noise cannot escape is formed.

[Metal Shield Plate of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Second Embodiment]
A metal shield plate 1540 capable of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic wave noise) entering the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a horizontally long rectangle as viewed from the front. L-shape bent backward by a predetermined distance dimension (12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a in the second embodiment) on the center upper left side and the center lower left side of the left shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) Attachment pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 are formed, respectively.

  The metal shield plate 1540 has a predetermined distance dimension (this second embodiment) on the upper right side and the lower right side of the horizontally long rectangular shield plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) when viewed from the front. Then, L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 bent backward by 12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are formed, respectively, and at the center of the horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm). An L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d bent backward by a predetermined distance (21 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a in the second embodiment) is formed between the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2. A conductive elastic member 1545 is attached (adhered) from the upper end to the lower end of the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d.

  The shield flat plate 1540a has notches formed around it so as not to interfere with the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e, and is substantially at a position corresponding to the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa and the wiring lead-out concave portion 1501ab of the cover flat plate 1501a. A square opening 1540aa is formed. As a result, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, whereby the shield plate 1540 is formed. In a state of being sandwiched and fixed between the cover body 1501 and various substrates, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 do not interfere with the outer periphery of the shield flat plate 1540a, respectively, and the FAN mounting recess 1501aa of the cover flat plate 1501a, and The wiring lead-out recess 1501ab is inserted without coming into contact with the opening 1540aa of the shield flat plate 1540a.

  The metal shield plate 1540 is formed by bending so that the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 are arranged in the same plane, The back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, and 1540c2 and the surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are formed to be parallel surfaces. In the second embodiment, the distance dimension from the surface of the shield flat plate 1540a to the back surfaces of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, and 1540c2 is 13.2 mm.

  In the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2, through holes 1540b1a and 1540b2a are respectively formed at positions corresponding to the attachment boss holes 1501ah2 and 1501am1 formed on the back surface of the cover body 1501 described above. As described above, the mounting boss hole 1501ah2 protrudes from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at a position corresponding to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. It is one attachment boss hole of a pair of attachment boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed in this manner. As described above, the mounting boss hole 1501am1 protrudes from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at a position corresponding to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. It is one mounting boss hole of the formed pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

  In the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2, through holes 1540c1a and 1540c2a are respectively formed at positions corresponding to the attachment boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover body 1501 described above. As described above, these mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 extend from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510. These are two mounting boss holes out of the four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed to protrude.

  Various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield board 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat board 1501a, whereby the shield board 1540 is covered with the cover body 1501. In a state of being sandwiched and fixed by the various substrates, the distance dimension (this first dimension) between the surfaces of the various substrates (the surface opposite to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In the second embodiment, a space having 14.8 mm) is formed, and two spaces are formed by disposing a metal shield plate 1540 in this space.

  These two spaces have a distance of a first predetermined height between the front surfaces of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later. (In the second embodiment, 12 mm) between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 225) and the surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. And a second space 1505b (see FIG. 225) having a distance dimension of a second predetermined height (1.6 mm in the second embodiment).

  In the first space 1505a, various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a, control ROM 1510b, SDRAM 1510c, real time clock IC (not shown), backup power supply 1510e, power supply generation circuit (not shown), resistor (not shown), not shown) Capacitors, LEDML1 to LEDML4, special connectors SCN1, SCN2, etc.), various electronic components provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral data ROM 1520a, resistors not shown, capacitors not shown, special connector SCN3 etc.), and liquid crystal output board 1530 Various electronic components and the like (resistors not shown, capacitors not shown, special connectors SCN4, etc.) are accommodated, whereas the second space 1505b contains various electronic components at all. No. This is because it is possible to take countermeasures against noise (electromagnetic wave noise) by accommodating various electronic components and the like that are easily affected by noise (electromagnetic wave noise) in the first space 1505a, and in the second space 1505b. This is because heat generated from various electronic components in the first space 1505a is efficiently transferred to the second space 1505b via the metal shield plate 1540 by not accommodating various electronic components that generate heat. . That is, the metal shield plate 1540 has a function as a heat sink in addition to a function of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic wave noise).

  The shield flat plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540 is provided with vent holes 1540az having the same shape at positions corresponding to the plurality of circular vent holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. That is, these ventilation holes 1540az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a horizontal pitch width of 6.5 mm, and a vertical pitch width of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm, similar to the ventilation holes 1501az. Yes. When the wing portion of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa of the cover body 1501 rotates, the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 is expelled toward the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing portion by this rotation. By taking in air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540. The first space 1505a (in particular, the peripheral control IC 1510a) in the inner space of the body 1501 can be air-cooled, and the metal shield plate 1540 can be air-cooled.

[Conductive Elastic Member of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Second Embodiment]
A conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 is a conductive member having cushioning properties (elasticity), and a conductive covering portion 1545a, It is comprised from the foam 1545b which has a rectangular shape as a core material coat | covered with the electroconductive coating | coated part 1545a, and the electroconductive adhesive tape 1545c stuck on the electroconductive coating | coated part 1545a. Examples of the covering portion 1545a include those in which a metal film of copper and nickel is formed on a polyester woven fabric, and those in which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed on a polyimide film. Examples of the foam 1545b include a polyurethane foam having heat resistance. As the conductive adhesive tape 1545c, for example, a conductive double-sided adhesive tape using an acrylic adhesive can be used. The surface of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c is protected by peel paper until it is used, and the peel paper is peeled off when the conductive cover 1545a is attached (adhered) to another member.

  The cross-sectional shape (circular shape) of the conductive elastic member 1545 has a rectangular shape (see FIG. 226) having a width of about 5 mm and a height of about 3 mm, and the conductive adhesive tape 1545c. Has a rectangular shape (see FIG. 226) having a width of about 2 mm and a height of about 0.035 mm.

[Assembly Method of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Second Embodiment]
A method for assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510.

  Subsequently, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through-hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540. Is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The mounting boss is formed so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the side, and the through hole 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Placed to match the hole 1501ah2, made of metal A through hole 1540b2a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the shield plate 1540 are arranged to fit the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Subsequently, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed. The holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 are inserted into mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Accordingly, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are formed. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. This is an arrangement corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

  Subsequently, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to form on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2. Thus, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is The cover body 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are sandwiched.

  Subsequently, since the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, they are adjusted as they are or as a fine adjustment. If necessary, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 are arranged. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal pan screw (not shown) into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510. That is, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield board 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, thereby covering the shield board 1540. The body 1501 and the various substrates are sandwiched and fixed.

  Thus, of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral control substrate 1510 is finally fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is inserted into mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, thereby restraining movement in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is connected to the cover flat plate 1501a. While the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions is constrained by being inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side, the peripheral control board 1510 has a mounting boss for constraining the vertical and horizontal directions. The protrusion is not formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. This is because the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a to restrain the vertical and horizontal directions, and the dimensional error due to such restraint causes the peripheral control substrate 1510 to be covered with the cover flat plate. Dimensional dimensions provided to the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a when fixed to the back side of the 1501a. It can be absorbed by a small margin.

  Subsequently, in a state where the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are The base body 1502 is inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped flange portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are attached to the base body. Inserted into U-shaped bag-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of 1502.

  Subsequently, the L-shaped flange portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped bag-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. Then, the base body 1502 is wrapped around so as to cover the opening side of the cover body 1501, and the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540 d of the metal shield plate 1540 passes through the through-hole 1502 ab of the base body 1502 and covers the base body 1502 as it is. In the state of covering the body 1501, the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d protrudes from the back surface of the base body 1502, and a metal anchor rivet (not shown) is inserted into the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. Insert a metal one-way screw Screwed toward the base side sealing section 1502ea formed on the base member 1502 Te. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet spreads outward at the base-side sealing portion 1502ea, thereby forming the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. The base side sealing portion 1502ea to be sealed is in a sealed state.

  In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and inscribed (surface contact). In the sealed state, the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 protrudes from the back surface of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d from the back surface of the base body 1502. The distance dimension (protrusion length) extending to the back surface is 2.7 mm.

  In order to release such a sealed state, the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 has to be destroyed with a tool. Therefore, by observing the opening and closing traces, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 constituted by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and deterring power against illegal actions on the peripheral control board box 1505 Has been increased.

  Subsequently, the air cooling fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wires from the air cooling fan FAN are connected to the wiring lead recess 1501ab formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal seated pan-head screw (not shown) having a shape in which a pan head and a flat washer are integrated is screwed into the drawer and mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Subsequently, in order to connect a plurality of wirings (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via the wiring lead-out openings 1501ae formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The connector is inserted and attached, and the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. By inserting metal pan screws (not shown) into through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwing them into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the plurality of wirings are covered with the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

  Subsequently, the peel paper of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c of the conductive elastic member 1545 is peeled off, and the conductive elastic member is formed on the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. Attach (adhere) 1545 adhesive tape 1545c.

  When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this way is attached to an attachment portion formed on the back side of a transparent synthetic resin box that houses the effect display device 1600 on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is viewed from the front, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the engaging portion 1502ca formed on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) is the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box. A transparent synthetic resin box that is inserted into a mounting groove that constitutes a mounting portion formed in the outer peripheral control unit 1500 and a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. It fixes by screwing toward the attachment hole which comprises the attachment part formed in the back surface side.

  The effect display device 1600 includes a frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover that covers the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. A frame-shaped metal frame accommodates a liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit, and the like. The entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame and the metal back cover are electrically connected, It is housed in a transparent synthetic resin box (protective cover body 1601 described above) having non-conductivity. Further, the effect display device 1600 is controlled by a peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 and is electrically connected to a ground (GND) line such as a peripheral control board 1510 accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500. Thus, the same ground (GND) is obtained. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the attachment portion formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, the L-shaped circuit connection piece of the metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back side of the base body 1502 1540d passes through a through-hole (not shown) formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box, and contacts the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 via the conductive elastic member 1545 as shown in FIG. It will be in contact. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed in and crushed in the height direction (in the second embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm), thereby causing a dimensional tolerance or an assembly error. The dimensional deviation can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1545. As a result, the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are in an electrically and reliably connected state, and the peripheral control board accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 Since the same ground (GND) can be obtained by being electrically connected to a ground (GND) line such as 1510, the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, Peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and various substrates such as liquid crystal output substrate 1530) and peripheral of control unit 1500 (peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and various substrates such as liquid crystal output substrate 1530) can do. Therefore, the influence by electromagnetic wave noise can be reduced.

  The cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 in the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment are formed by molding as a transparent non-conductive resin, and in the internal space of the cover body 1501 Various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached to the predetermined positions together with the metal shield plate 1540, so that the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the various substrates. When fixed, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates. Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. Connected. For this reason, the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 and the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered the effect display device 1600 are transferred to the substrate via the metal shield plate 1540. It is possible to form a “route through which noise is eliminated” that is guided to the ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) and removed. Thereby, it is not necessary to provide each type of substrate (including the power supply substrate 630) with a dedicated filter for removing such noise (electromagnetic wave noise), thereby reducing the cost of the various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630). Can contribute.

  Here, the arrangement of the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. Will be described. As described above, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes can air-cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 and also have a function of confirming whether or not there is an illegality.

  Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. 224, the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are the peripheral control board. The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b included in the 1510, the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, IC orientation, part number) In other words, the surface of the control ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pin, and the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510 are confirmed from multi-directional angles. So that the area is larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510b. It is. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence relationship between the control ROM 1510b and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. . Further, the LEDML1 arranged in the vicinity of the control ROM 1510b is maintained in a lighting state in a state where the direct current + 5V from the power supply substrate 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied, so that the direct current + 5V is supplied. Although it has a function of confirming (monitoring) the state that is being performed, it also has a function as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the control ROM 1510b, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pin It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility and the improvement of the visibility of the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510.

  The plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Furthermore, the area is larger than the shape of the board-to-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520), and further provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (for example, , Connector pin count, IC Direction, part number, pin number, etc.), that is, the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pin, the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are silk-printed on each. Are arranged in a distributed manner so as to be a large area in which the contents can be substantially confirmed from angles in multiple directions. Accordingly, the correspondence between the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 In addition, the modification of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, This can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. Further, the LEDML3 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN1 is maintained in a lighting state in a state where the direct current + 35V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied. Although it has a function of checking (monitoring) the supplied state, it is a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special data SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Furthermore, the surface data of the peripheral data ROM 1520a is improved, the visibility of the IC pin state is improved, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are respectively silk-printed. Visibility and peripheral control board 1510 And it is capable to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the substrate between the connector according to a special connector SCN3 provided in special connectors SCN1 and peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 provided.

  The plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. And an area larger than the shape of the board-to-board connector (the shape constituted by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530), and further the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board. The contents (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) silk-printed on the 1530 are respectively distributed and arranged. Thereby, the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the contents silk-printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 In addition to the correspondence relationship, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. can do. Further, since the LEDML4 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN2 is maintained in the lighting state when the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a is originally confirmed (monitored). Although it has a function, it has a function as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN4 on the special connector SCN2 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. Improved visibility of the contents silk-printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and improved visibility of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 Can contribute to It has become the jar.

  The plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are part numbers and models printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c1, respectively. The state of the IC pins 1510c2 and the contents (for example, IC orientation, part number, pin number, etc.) silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be visually recognized, that is, the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. And the state of the IC pins and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 are distributed so as to be larger than the shapes of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 so that they can be confirmed from multi-directional angles. Has been placed. As a result, in addition to the correspondence between the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the air holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. Can do. Further, the LEDML2 arranged in the vicinity of the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in the lighting state in a state where the direct current + 12V is supplied from the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620. The surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2) is originally provided with a function of confirming (monitoring) a state in which DC + 12V is supplied, but also having a function as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the SDRAM 1510c. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility, the improvement of the visibility of the state of the IC pins, and the improvement of the visibility of the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510.

  Further, among the plurality of blades constituting the blades of the air cooling fan FAN, the gap between the blades (specifically, the gap between the blades and the blades when the inspector rotates the blades of the air cooling fan FAN). The product number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed. Thereby, it can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes whether or not an unauthorized substrate is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  In addition, as LEDML1-LEDML4 with which the periphery control board 1510 is equipped, since it is a surface mount type and a thing with a wide angle | corner of about 120 degree | times and a weak directivity type is employ | adopted, it is used as an illumination. Is also suitable. Various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to the predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the metal shield plate 1540, whereby the shield plate 1540 is covered with the cover body 1501. In the state of being sandwiched and fixed by the various substrates, as described above, a predetermined height is provided between the front surfaces of the various substrates (the surface opposite to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in the second embodiment) is formed, and a metal shield plate 1540 is disposed in this space, so that two spaces are formed. . As described above, the two spaces have a first predetermined height between the surface of each substrate (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. Between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 224) having a distance dimension (12 mm in the second embodiment) and the surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. And a second space 1505b (see FIG. 224) having a distance dimension of a second predetermined height (1.6 mm in the second embodiment). As described above, the first space 1505a accommodates various electronic components provided in the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic parts provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and various electronic parts provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530. ing. The inside of the first space 1505a formed in this way can be illuminated brightly by turning on the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 that is also suitable for use as illumination.

  Further, since the shield plate 1540 is made of metal, it has gloss, and the area on the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 that faces the light emitting surfaces of the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. In addition, with respect to the periphery thereof, it also has a function as a reflection part that can reflect the light emitted from the LEDML1 to LEDML4 and direct it to the peripheral control board 1510 again. You may comprise so that the coloring paint which has glossiness may be further apply | coated to these reflection parts.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5 near the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached, and paid out to the side of the game board 5. Since the unit 560 is arranged, the game balls are rubbed against each other in the ball path constituted by these units, and are charged and electrostatically discharged to become a noise source. For this reason, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment that is affected by noise (electromagnetic wave noise) due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. Pachinko machines 1 are lined up opposite the island facilities in the game hall. Thus, the surroundings of the game board 5 are in an environment that is extremely susceptible to noise (electromagnetic wave noise). Therefore, in the second embodiment, as described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are formed by being transparently molded as a non-conductive resin, and the inside of the cover body 1501 In the space, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions, and the shield plate 1540 is formed by the cover body 1501 and the various substrates. A configuration was adopted in which the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates by sandwiching and fixing. In the second embodiment, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected to the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. The same ground (GND) is adopted by electrically connecting to the other ground (GND) line.

  Accordingly, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), and the base Noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered from the body 1502 is guided to the ground (GND) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 through the metal shield plate 1540. Can be removed. In other words, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), and the base Noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered from the body 1502 can be guided to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) via the metal shield plate 1540 and removed.

  In the second embodiment, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached to predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the metal shield plate 1540. In the state where the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched and fixed between the cover body 1501 and the various substrates, the space between the surface of the various substrates (the surface opposite to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension of a predetermined height (14.8 mm in the second embodiment) is formed, and two spaces are formed by arranging a metal shield plate 1540 in this space. These two spaces are the surface of various substrates (the surface opposite to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the metal sheet. A first space 1505a having a first predetermined height distance (12 mm in the second embodiment) between the shield plate 1540a and the back surface of the shield plate 1540a, and a shield plate of the metal shield plate 1540 The second space 1505b has a second predetermined height distance dimension (1.6 mm in the second embodiment) between the front surface of 1540a and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In other words, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height is formed larger than the distance dimension of the second predetermined height. This is a case where a large-scale production unit (an electrical drive source or drive mechanism capable of operating a movable production body and various sensors for detecting an origin position or an operation position) is arranged on the game board 5 in the depth direction. If there is a margin in the distance dimension, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height and the distance dimension of the second predetermined height may be configured as a distance dimension of the same predetermined height, The distance dimension of the predetermined height may be configured to be larger than the distance dimension of the first predetermined height. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to take countermeasures against electromagnetic wave noise by accommodating various electronic components and the like that are easily affected by noise (electromagnetic wave noise) in the first space 1505a, and the second space 1505b. By not accommodating various electronic components that generate heat in the interior, heat generated from various electronic components in the first space 1505a can be efficiently transmitted to the second space 1505b through the metal shield plate 1540. Can do.

  In the second embodiment, the metal shield plate 1540 is printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided in the peripheral control board 1510 by forming a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az. Visually confirming the product number and model (or management number), the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents (for example, the direction of the IC, the part number, and the pin number) silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 In addition, the product number and model printed on the surface of the SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the state of the IC pins of the SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the IC Orientation, part number, pin number, etc.) and peripheral data RO The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the substrate 1520, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the peripheral control substrate 1510, and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are respectively silk-printed. However, the control ROM 1510b, SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2, peripheral data ROM 1520a, and peripheral data ROM 1520a are made of metal. It is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the shield plate 1540. In addition to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a, a rectangular opening may be provided at the position of the metal shield plate 1540 so that the periphery can be visually recognized. . Also, the shape of the board-to-board connector (the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be checked so that the connection state of the board-to-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be confirmed. It is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the metal shield plate 1540 corresponding to a larger area, or the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board. From the shape of the board-to-board connector (a shape constituted by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530) so that the connection state of the board-to-board connector with 1530 can be confirmed. At the position of the metal shield plate 1540 corresponding to the large area It may be configured to provide an opening in the shape.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when the wing portion of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotates, the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 is moved by the rotation of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the wing portion. By ejecting outward, the air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 is accommodated in the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When taking in through a plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the metal shield plate 1540, the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be kept small. Can be, but FAN mounting recess 1501a When the vane portion of the attachment is cooling fan FAN is rotated through the blade portion by the rotation may inhale air toward the peripheral control IC1510a to feed the air. In other words, the main purpose of the air cooling fan FAN may be to simply cool the peripheral control IC 1510a without air exchange in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

  Note that, in the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 that contacts the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. For the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side, a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and a squeegee (like a spatula) The surface of the peripheral control board 1510 (mounting surface) 1510x is placed in a reflow oven and the solder paste is dried by heat. However, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 may be poured into a solder bath and soldered. . In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 abut the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In order not to reduce the area and the electrical connectivity, the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is not partly raised. It needs to be uniform.

  For example, a copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is formed with a resist layer 1510xr that is partially coated with a resist solution and formed into a predetermined shape, The surface of the peripheral control board 1510 (mounting surface) is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 221 (a), the resist is applied to the copper foils that are the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 as the “predetermined shape”. A shape in which a plurality of circles having a predetermined width are formed concentrically (a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is formed concentrically), as shown in FIG. 221 (b), As shown in FIG. 221 (c), a rectangular shape having a predetermined width and a predetermined length is formed in the shape of a chrysanthemum arranged in a ring shape around the center of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4. A shape formed in a lattice shape composed of directional lines and lateral lines (a shape in which a plurality of lines in the vertical direction in which the resist has a predetermined width is separated by a predetermined distance may be formed, Only a lateral direction in which the dies have a predetermined width may have a shape in which a plurality of lines are formed with a predetermined distance dimension apart from each other.) As shown in FIG. 221 (d), a line in which the resist has a predetermined width has a predetermined distance. A shape in which a plurality of upward-sloping lines are formed in a slanted line apart from each other (a line in which a resist having a predetermined width is separated by a predetermined distance and a plurality of downward-sloping lines are formed in a slanted line) may be illustrated. However, it is possible to list small circular shapes.

  In this way, a resist layer 1510xr is formed in which a part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is applied with a resist solution and formed into a predetermined shape. Since the surface of the control board 1510 (mounting surface) is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 (mounting surface) The amount of solder to be soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 can be suppressed (in other words, the surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510 (mounting surface) is applied as a predetermined shape by applying a resist solution. The amount of solder to be soldered to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 Effect as long as the can demonstrate that it is possible to win). Accordingly, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into the solder bath and soldered, the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is not soldered. The attachment can be made uniform so that it does not rise partially. The solder thus soldered includes the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the lands 1510rf1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 is covered so as to be electrically connectable.

  It should be noted that a predetermined figure formed by such a resist is a land on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 that abuts the seat surface (head seat surface) of the pan portion of the metal pan screw. You may perform also with respect to the copper foil which is the surface of 1510rb1-1510rb4. The solder thus soldered electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (the seat surface of the head) of the pan portion of the metal pan screw. It is covered so that it can be connected. Further, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder bath and soldered, the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is applied with a resist solution. Thus, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may be made uniform.

  In addition, in the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a metal pan screw is used. The peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a through a metal washer such as a flat washer, a spring washer, and a toothed washer (also referred to as “chrysal washer”).

  In addition, in the configuration of the noise countermeasure by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, thereby fixing the frame-shaped metal frame. And the metal back cover are electrically connected and accommodated in a transparent synthetic resin box, and the transparent synthetic resin box and the base body 1502 are molded separately. However, the base body 1502 may be integrally molded in this transparent synthetic resin box.

[Contrast between Noise Countermeasure Configuration by Peripheral Control Board Box According to First Embodiment and Noise Countermeasure Configuration by Peripheral Control Board Box According to Third Embodiment]
In the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, as described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is all made of polycarbonate with carbon as described above. It is configured as a conductive resin contained, and various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed on a metal plate on the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When fixed by screws, they are configured to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) of these various substrates to be the same ground (GND).

  On the other hand, the noise countermeasure configuration by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment further enhances the noise countermeasure configuration by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment. A configuration is adopted in which a region where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) is exposed and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are further in contact with each other through a conductive elastic member.

[Metal Shield Plate of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Third Embodiment]
Specifically, the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is similar to the shape of the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, and FIG. As shown in FIG. 228, each side of the shield flat plate 1540a is moved backward as a countermeasure against noise (electromagnetic wave noise) entering from cover side walls 1501b to 1501e provided on the upper side, left side, lower side, and right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501, respectively. Side walls 1540ae are formed by bending (toward the surface (mounting surface) side of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530). These side walls 1540ae are not formed with ventilation holes 1540az. These side walls 1540ae have predetermined end surfaces from the surfaces (mounting surfaces) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled. Since it has a distance dimension (for example, 3.9 mm) and is separated, it is not in contact with each other and is not in contact with various electronic components mounted on various substrates. The metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is similar to the shape of the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment described above. Detailed description is omitted.

[Base Body of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Third Embodiment]
The base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is similar to the shape of the base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output. Substrate conductivity that can come into contact with the metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600 at a position corresponding to a region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) of the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the substrate 1530 is exposed. A plurality of insertion openings 1502az having a square (a shape in which the vertical distance dimension and the horizontal distance dimension are both about 8 mm) into which the elastic member 1507 is inserted are formed in the base flat plate 1502a. Although these insertion openings 1502az are formed to protrude to the front side and the rear side of the base flat plate 1502a, the front end surfaces of the insertion openings 1502az are the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the like. The back surface (solder surface) of each of the substrates has a predetermined distance dimension (for example, 1.5 mm) and is formed so as not to be spaced apart from each other, and the rear end surface of each insertion port 1502az is a metal shield plate It is formed so as to be arranged on the same plane as the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connecting piece 1540d of 1540.

  There are seven regions ROP in which a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is exposed, and seven insertion openings 1502az are formed in the base flat plate 1502a at the corresponding positions, and the peripheral data ROM There is one region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the substrate 1520 is exposed, and one insertion port 1502az is formed in the base flat plate 1502a at a position corresponding to this region ROP. There are two regions ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) is exposed, and two insertion openings 1502az are formed in the base flat plate 1502a at positions corresponding thereto. In other words, a total of eleven regions ROP where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed are provided on the back surfaces (solder surfaces) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The base flat plate 1502a is provided with a total of eleven insertion ports 1502az at positions corresponding to the respective regions ROP. Further, serial numbers 1 to 11 are formed on the back surface side of the base flat plate 1502a and in the vicinity of each insertion port 1502az. This serial number indicates the order (work procedure) in which the worker of the manufacturer inserts the board conductive elastic member 1507. Since the base body 1502 is molded as a transparent non-conductive resin as described above, the serial numbers 1 to 11 can be visually recognized from the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a. The base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is similar to the shape of the base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment described above, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. .

[Conductive elastic member for substrate of peripheral control substrate box according to third embodiment]
In the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, in addition to the conductive elastic member 1545 that can electrically connect the metal shield plate 1540 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600, the peripheral control board box A region ROP in which a part of the ground (GND) of the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are provided. A conductive elastic member for substrate 1507 that can be electrically connected is provided. The substrate conductive elastic member 1507 is a conductive member having cushioning properties (elasticity), and includes a conductive covering portion 1507a and a foam 1507b having a rectangular shape as a core material covered with the conductive covering portion 1507a. , Is composed of. Examples of the conductive covering portion 1507a include those in which a copper and nickel metal coating is formed on a polyester woven fabric, and those in which a copper and nickel conductive layer is formed on a polyimide film. Examples of the foam 1507b include a polyurethane foam having heat resistance.

  The conductive elastic member for substrate 1507 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the front-rear direction (when the conductive elastic member for substrate 1507 in FIG. 228 is viewed from the right side, the width is about 11 mm, the depth is about 8 mm, and the height is about 8 mm). have. When the board conductive elastic member 1507 is inserted into the insertion port 1502az of the base body 1502, the board conductive elastic member 1507 has cushioning properties (elasticity) while being guided by the inner wall of the insertion port 1502az. By pushing the inner wall of the insertion port 1502az, the board conductive elastic member 1507 is difficult to be removed from the insertion port 1502az.

[Exposed Region of Part of Ground of Various Substrates of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Third Embodiment]
Here, the region ROP in which a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed will be described. The region ROP formed in part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 has the same structure. A region ROP formed in a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) will be described. A region ROP formed in a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 as shown in FIGS. The peripheral control board 1510 is formed such that a part of the substrate ground (GND) (that is, the solid ground) formed on the copper foil surface 1510 yp of 1510 y is exposed in a shape larger than the front shape of the conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate. A resist solution is applied on the copper foil surface 1510yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1510y to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer 1510yr.

  It is also possible to employ a method using a through hole without exposing the solid ground as the region ROP. For example, as shown in FIGS. 230 (c) and 230 (d), the region ROP on the back surface (solder surface) 1510 y of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the solid ground on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. A plurality of through-holes to be connected are arranged in each of the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, and this copper is formed so that lands are formed around each through-hole on the copper foil surface 1510yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. A resist solution can be applied onto the foil surface 1510yp to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer 1510yr.

[Assembly Method of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Third Embodiment]
Since the assembly method of the peripheral control unit 1500 is basically the same as the assembly method of the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, the procedure for inserting the conductive elastic member for substrate 1507 described above will be described. The manufacturer operator attaches the peripheral control unit 1500 to a mounting portion formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box that houses the effect display device 1600 behind the gaming panel 1100 provided in the gaming board 5. Then, through the serial numbers 1 to 11, the board conductive elastic member 1507 is inserted into the insertion port 1502az of the base body 1502 from the longitudinal direction and pushed in, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and An operation of bringing the ground (GND) part of the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 into contact with the exposed region ROP is performed.

  As described above, the effect display device 1600 includes a frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover that covers the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. A frame-shaped metal frame accommodates a liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit, and the like. The entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame and the metal back cover are electrically connected, Housed in a transparent plastic box. Further, as described above, the effect display device 1600 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of itself, and is electrically connected to a ground (GND) line such as the peripheral control board 1510 accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500. Are connected to the same ground (GND).

  When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the attachment portion formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, the L-shaped circuit connection piece of the metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back side of the base body 1502 1540d passes through a through-hole (not shown) formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box, and contacts the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 through the conductive elastic member 1545 as shown in FIG. It will be in contact. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed in and crushed in the height direction (in the third embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm), thereby causing dimensional tolerance and assembly error. The dimensional deviation can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1545. As a result, the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are in an electrically and reliably connected state, and the peripheral control board accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 The same ground (GND) can be obtained by being electrically connected to a ground (GND) line such as 1510.

  In addition, the conductive for each substrate, one of which is in contact with the region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) of the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed. The other of the elastic elastic members 1507 passes through a not-shown through-hole formed on the back side of the corresponding transparent synthetic resin box, and contacts the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 as shown in FIG. It will be in contact. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate is pushed and crushed in the height direction (in the third embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm), thereby causing a dimensional tolerance. Further, the dimensional deviation due to the assembly error can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate. As a result, the state in which the external force is applied in the longitudinal direction of the conductive elastic member for substrate 1507 is maintained, and as a repulsive force, the conductive elastic member for substrate 1507 has the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. , And a contact surface of the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 with a region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed, and a contact surface with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600; In other words, the electrical connection is maintained, and the ground (on the solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is ground ( GND) and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are in a state of being securely connected to each other, and the peripheral control unit 1500 accommodates in the peripheral control unit 1500. Ground, such as a substrate 1510 (GND) line and is electrically connected, can be the same ground (GND). For this reason, in addition to the metal shield plate 1540, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 and noise that has entered the effect display device 1600 are further reduced. Through the conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate, a “route through which noise is eliminated” can be formed in which it is guided to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) and removed. Thereby, it is not necessary to provide each type of substrate (including the power supply substrate 630) with a dedicated filter for removing such noise (electromagnetic wave noise), thereby reducing the cost of the various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630). Can contribute.

  Even in the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510. Each of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 is soldered so that the copper foil as the surface thereof is not exposed, but abuts against the seat surface (the seat surface of the head) of the pan portion of the metal pan screw. Mounting surfaces (bosses) of mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, which are respectively soldered to copper foils that are the surfaces of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (soldering surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 Surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 in contact with the surface) The copper foil is a surface 510x side of the land 1510rf1~1510rf4 may be covered by applying a resist solution. The copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is applied together with the entire surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510 being applied with a resist solution. The Even with this configuration, metal pan-head screws are inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the cover body 1501 are electrically connected via a metal pan screw. State. Further, copper which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By coating the foil with a resist solution and covering it, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 can be made uniform. As a result, the resist layers in the portions corresponding to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 have the same thickness, and thus the through holes 1510r1 formed in the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal pan-head screw into ~ 1510r4 and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Further, distortion of the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented.

  Further, in the third embodiment, when the wing portion of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotates, the rotation causes air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to pass through the wing portion of the peripheral control unit 1500. By ejecting outward, the air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 is accommodated in a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When taking in through a plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the metal shield plate 1540, the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be kept small. Can be, but FAN mounting recess 1501a When the vane portion of the attachment is cooling fan FAN is rotated through the blade portion by the rotation may inhale air toward the peripheral control IC1510a to feed the air. In other words, the main purpose of the air cooling fan FAN may be to simply cool the peripheral control IC 1510a without air exchange in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

  Also in the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 that contacts the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. For the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side, a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and a squeegee (like a spatula) The surface of the peripheral control board 1510 (mounting surface) 1510x is placed in a reflow oven and the solder paste is dried by heat. However, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 may be poured into a solder bath and soldered. . In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 abut the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In order not to reduce the area and the electrical connectivity, the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is not partly raised. It needs to be uniform.

  For example, a copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is formed with a resist layer 1510xr that is partially coated with a resist solution and formed into a predetermined shape, The surface of the peripheral control board 1510 (mounting surface) is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 221 (a), the resist is applied to the copper foils that are the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 as the “predetermined shape”. A shape in which a plurality of circles having a predetermined width are formed concentrically (a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is formed concentrically), as shown in FIG. 221 (b), As shown in FIG. 221 (c), a rectangular shape having a predetermined width and a predetermined length is formed in the shape of a chrysanthemum arranged in a ring shape around the center of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4. A shape formed in a lattice shape composed of directional lines and lateral lines (a shape in which a plurality of lines in the vertical direction in which the resist has a predetermined width is separated by a predetermined distance may be formed, Only a lateral direction in which the dies have a predetermined width may have a shape in which a plurality of lines are formed with a predetermined distance dimension apart from each other.) As shown in FIG. 221 (d), a line in which the resist has a predetermined width has a predetermined distance. A shape in which a plurality of upward-sloping lines are formed in a slanted line apart from each other (a line in which a resist having a predetermined width is separated by a predetermined distance and a plurality of downward-sloping lines are formed in a slanted line) may be illustrated. However, it is possible to list small circular shapes.

  In this way, a resist layer 1510xr is formed in which a part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is applied with a resist solution and formed into a predetermined shape. Since the surface of the control board 1510 (mounting surface) is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 (mounting surface) The amount of solder to be soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 can be suppressed (in other words, the surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510 (mounting surface) is applied as a predetermined shape by applying a resist solution. The amount of solder to be soldered to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 Effect as long as the can demonstrate that it is possible to win). Accordingly, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into the solder bath and soldered, the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is not soldered. The attachment can be made uniform so that it does not rise partially. The solder thus soldered includes the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the lands 1510rf1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 is covered so as to be electrically connectable.

  It should be noted that a predetermined figure formed by such a resist is a land on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 that abuts the seat surface (head seat surface) of the pan portion of the metal pan screw. You may perform also with respect to the copper foil which is the surface of 1510rb1-1510rb4. The solder thus soldered electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (the seat surface of the head) of the pan portion of the metal pan screw. It is covered so that it can be connected. Further, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder bath and soldered, the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is applied with a resist solution. Thus, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may be made uniform.

  Also, in the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a metal pan screw is used. The peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a through a metal washer such as a flat washer, a spring washer, and a toothed washer (also referred to as “chrysal washer”).

  In addition, in the configuration of the noise countermeasure by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, thereby fixing the frame-shaped metal frame. And the metal back cover are electrically connected and accommodated in a transparent synthetic resin box, and the transparent synthetic resin box and the base body 1502 are molded separately. However, the base body 1502 may be integrally molded in this transparent synthetic resin box.

[Contrast between Noise Countermeasure Configuration by Peripheral Control Board Box According to First Embodiment and Noise Countermeasure Configuration by Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fourth Embodiment]
In the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, as described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is all made of polycarbonate with carbon as described above. It is configured as a conductive resin contained, and various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed on a metal plate on the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When fixed by screws, they are configured to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) of these various substrates to be the same ground (GND).

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the countermeasure against noise by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 231 and 232, the box shape is opened in the rear and is longer in the left and right direction than in the up and down direction. Peripheral control capable of controlling the progress of the production based on commands from the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game and the cover body 1501 that is made of a transparent non-conductive resin. A substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, And noise (electromagnetic wave noise) invading various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be reduced (suppressed). The metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 disposed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the various substrates that can be attached (adhesion) Of the conductive elastic member 1545 and various substrates that can reduce (suppress) noise (electromagnetic wave noise) entering the various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. A metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 disposed on the back surface (solder surface) side, and a base body 1502 molded by a transparent non-conductive resin that closes the opening of the cover body 1501. I have. In the internal space of the cover body 1501, various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are made of a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and a metal substrate back surface. (Solder surface) The peripheral control board box formed by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 by being sandwiched by the shield plate 1555 and attached to a predetermined position of the cover body 1501 and closing the opening of the cover body 1501 by the base body 1502. 1505 (sealed substrate box) is configured.

[Cover Body of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fourth Embodiment]
First, in the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment. Are formed as mounting boss holes 1501ah3 and 1501ah4 on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, respectively, and on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment. The mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 to be formed are different in that they are respectively formed as mounting boss holes 1501am3 and 1501am4 on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Further, in the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the backup power supply 1510e that can supply power to the real time clock IC (not shown) provided in the peripheral control board 1510 even when the power is cut off is provided from the holder (not shown). A pop-out prevention portion 1501aw having a cylindrical shape is formed so as to protrude from the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1502 toward the front side of the backup power supply 1510e so that the power supply to the real-time clock IC (not shown) is not cut off. This is different from the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment. Note that the end face of the pop-out prevention unit 1501aw is arranged at a predetermined distance (for example, 1 mm) away from the backup power source 1510e.

  When attaching various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to the back side of the cover 1502 of the peripheral control substrate box according to the first embodiment, the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral Insert a metal pan screw (not shown) directly into the through-holes (excluding those into which the mounting boss protrusions are inserted) of various substrates such as the data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board are fixed on the back side of the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment. When attaching various boards such as 1530, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1 20, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is directly inserted into a specific through hole among a plurality of through holes in various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and screwed into a mounting boss hole formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. After performing the first fixing method, the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side so as to cover the back surface (solder surface) side of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Other than the specific through holes in various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530, the through holes formed in the L-shaped mounting piece of the solder side) shield plate 1555 The base plate 1502a is arranged so as to match the corresponding through hole of the through holes, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502. A metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through hole of the mounting boss formed on the front surface side, and each through hole formed in the L-shaped mounting piece of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555, The peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed by being screwed into the mounting boss holes formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a through the other through holes in the various substrates. 2. Perform the fixing method.

  In the first fixing method, when the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 described later. Is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through-hole formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 described later. The holes 1540c2a are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Of the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 are formed through the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. The hole 1540c1a, the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540, and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a The through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the control board 1510 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  In the first fixing method, when the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 described later. 1540b1a is disposed so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, the through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 to 1501ah4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  In the first fixing method, when the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through hole 1540b2a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 described later. Is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, the through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501an1 to 1501an4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Then, peripheral control is performed by inserting metal pan screws (not shown) into the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 as specific through holes among the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510 and screwing them toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. The substrate 1510 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, the lands 1510rb2 and 1510rb3 and the seat surface of the metal pan screw are in contact with each other.

  Then, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 as specific through holes among the through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah3 and 1501ah2. As a result, of the lands 1520rb1, 1520rb2, and 1520rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the lands 1520rb1 and 1520rb4 are in contact with the bearing surface of the metal pan screw. It becomes. Further, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1520rf4 formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, so that it is made of metal. The board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the same ground (GND). Therefore, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, so that the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the liquid crystal The output board 1530 is connected to the ground (GND). The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Therefore, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, thereby being connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630. Become.

  Then, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 as specific through holes among the through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the attachment is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing toward the boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am4. As a result, of the lands 1530rb1, 1530rb3, and 1530rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4 and the metal pan-screw seating surfaces are in contact with each other. Become. Further, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, so that the metal shield The plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the same ground (GND). Therefore, the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530, so that the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data The ROM substrate 1520 is connected to the ground (GND). The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Therefore, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. .

  After this first fixing method, in the second fixing method, a metal plate, which will be described later, is covered so as to cover the back surface (solder surface) side of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The through holes 1555b1a to 1555b4a formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 to 1555b4 of the substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are replaced with various types such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Among the other through holes excluding a specific through hole in the substrate, through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 in the peripheral control board 1510, a through hole 1520r2 in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a through hole 1530r3 in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are used. Of the cover body 1501 A metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag6 of mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6, which will be described later, which are formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a by closing the mouth with the base body 1502a. Surface) side shield plate 1555 on the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 to 1555b4, through holes 1555b1a to 1555b4a respectively, and specific substrates on various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. Among the other through holes excluding the through holes, the corresponding through holes are through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 in the peripheral control board 1510, through holes 1520r2 and 1520r3 in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and through holes 1530r2 and 15 in the liquid crystal output board 1530. Fixed by screwing respectively 0r3 to mounting boss hole 1501ag1,1501ag4,1501ah1,1501ah4,1501am3,1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a through respectively.

  By performing the first fixing method and the second fixing method in order, the peripheral control board 1510 is made of a metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 with the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 and the metal board. The state is sandwiched between the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555 b 1 and 1555 b 2 of the board back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. In this state, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 , And lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, and an L-shaped attachment of the metal board back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. The surfaces of the pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 are in contact with each other. Accordingly, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. As a result, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface). The L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 of the side shield plate 1555 are made of metal by being electrically connected to lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. The substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510. The be continued. The ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the same ground (GND). Therefore, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510. Thus, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is connected to the ground (GND) and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is connected to the ground (GND). The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Therefore, the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510, thereby providing power. It is connected to the ground (GND) line of the substrate 630.

  Further, by sequentially performing the first fixing method and the second fixing method, the land 1520rb2 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield The surface of the L-shaped attachment piece 1555b3 of the plate 1555 is in contact with the surface. Thus, the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b3 of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is electrically connected to the land 1520rb2 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. In this state, the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Since the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is formed. Are connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Therefore, the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, thereby being connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630. Become.

  Further, by sequentially performing the first fixing method and the second fixing method, the land 1530rb3 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate The surface of the 1555 L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 is in contact with the surface. Thereby, the L-shaped attachment piece 1555b4 of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is electrically connected to the land 1530rb3 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Thus, the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the same ground (GND). Therefore, the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, so that the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data The ROM substrate 1520 is connected to the ground (GND). The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Therefore, the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, thereby being connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630. .

  Further, by conducting the first fixing method and the second fixing method in order, the conductive elastic member 1545 attached to (bonded to) a predetermined portion of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is made of metal. The substrate is pressed against and brought into contact with the front surface side of the substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. As a result, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are electrically connected.

  Various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached to predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. The gap (2.3 mm) having the predetermined distance dimension described above is formed between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa.

  As described above, the total of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aa formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (total area) is a plurality of ventilation holes formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. 1501az and the above-described gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501; The volume adjustment switch 1510d provided, the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, the gap formed in the cover body 1501, the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the two formed in the cover body 1501 Connector hole 1501ac9 And 1501Ac10, is smaller than that the area of the gap) to be formed, was added to the. For this reason, when the wing portion of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotates, the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 is expelled toward the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing portion by this rotation. Further, air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 is made of a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a metal substrate surface (mounting mounted) in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 When the air is taken in through the plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the front surface side shield plate 1540, the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be reduced. It can be done.

[Base Body of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fourth Embodiment]
On the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a of the base body 1502, through holes 1502ag1 are provided at positions corresponding to mounting boss holes 1501ag1, 1501ag4, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, 1501am3, 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 having ˜1502ag6 are respectively formed. Metal pan screws (not shown) are inserted and screwed into the through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag6 of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6, and the base 1502 is fixed to the cover body 1501.

  Note that, on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, the region corresponding to the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed in the base body 1502 is one area compared to the outer shape of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. The foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 having large shapes are formed, and the front surfaces (contact surfaces) of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are in contact with the foil removal regions NR1, NR, and NR3, respectively. These foil drawing regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 are designed to prevent the intrusion of noise (electromagnetic wave noise) from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed in the base body 1502. Isolated from GND). In other words, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) cannot enter the solid ground of the peripheral control board 1510 from the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed in the base body 1502 via the foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3. A route where noise cannot escape is formed.

[Metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate of peripheral control board box according to fourth embodiment]
Arranged on the surface (mounting surface) side of various substrates that can reduce (suppress) noise (electromagnetic wave noise) entering the various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 has a predetermined distance dimension on the upper left side center and lower left side center lower side of the horizontally long rectangular shield plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) when viewed from the front. In the fourth embodiment, L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 bent backward are formed by 12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a.

  The metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 has a predetermined distance on the upper right side and lower right side of the horizontally long rectangular shield plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) when viewed from the front. L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 bent rearward by dimensions (12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a in the fourth embodiment) are formed, respectively, and a horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: L-shaped circuit that is bent rearward by a predetermined distance (in the fourth embodiment, 9.9 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a) above the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1. A connection piece 1540d is formed. A conductive elastic member 1545 is attached (adhered) from the upper end to the lower end of the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d.

  The shield flat plate 1540a has notches formed around it so as not to interfere with the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e, and is substantially at a position corresponding to the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa and the wiring lead-out concave portion 1501ab of the cover flat plate 1501a. A square opening 1540aa is formed. Thus, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached to predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. In such a state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 do not interfere with the outer periphery of the shield flat plate 1540a. It will be in the state inserted without contacting.

  Metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is bent so that the back surfaces of L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 and the back surfaces of L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 are arranged in the same plane. In addition, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, and 1540c2 are formed so that the back surface of the shield plate 1540a and the surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are parallel to each other. In the fourth embodiment, the distance dimension from the surface of the shield flat plate 1540a to the back surface of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, and 1540c2 is 13.2 mm.

  In the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2, through holes 1540b1a and 1540b2a are respectively formed at positions corresponding to the attachment boss holes 1501ah2 and 1501am1 formed on the back surface of the cover body 1501 described above.

  In the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2, through holes 1540c1a and 1540c2a are respectively formed at positions corresponding to the attachment boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover body 1501 described above.

  In a state where various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached to predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a together with the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. Is a space having a distance of a predetermined height (14.8 mm in the fourth embodiment) between the surface of each substrate (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this space, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is arranged in this space, so that two spaces are formed.

  These two spaces have a distance of a first predetermined height between the front surfaces of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later. A distance of a second predetermined height between the first space having (in this fourth embodiment, 12 mm) and the surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. And a second space having a dimension (1.6 mm in the fourth embodiment).

  In the first space, various electronic components and the like provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a, control ROM 1510b, SDRAM 1510c, real time clock IC not shown, backup power supply 1510e, power generation circuit not shown, resistor not shown, capacitor not shown) , LEDML1 to LEDML4, special connectors SCN1, SCN2, etc.), various electronic components provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral data ROM 1520a, resistor not shown, capacitor not shown, special connector SCN3 etc.), and liquid crystal output board 1530 While various electronic components (resistors not shown, capacitors not shown, special connectors SCN4, etc.) are accommodated, the second space does not accommodate various electronic components at all. This is because it is possible to take countermeasures against noise (electromagnetic wave noise) by accommodating various electronic components and the like that are easily affected by noise (electromagnetic wave noise) in the first space 1505a, and in the second space 1505b. The heat generated from the various electronic components in the first space by not accommodating the various electronic components that generate heat is transferred to the second space 1505b via the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. This is to communicate efficiently. That is, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 has a function as a heat sink in addition to a function of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic wave noise).

  The shield flat plate 1540a of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 has the same shape at positions corresponding to the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Ventilation holes 1540az are formed. That is, these ventilation holes 1540az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a horizontal pitch width of 6.5 mm, and a vertical pitch width of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm, similar to the ventilation holes 1501az. Yes. When the wing portion of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa of the cover body 1501 rotates, the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 is expelled toward the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing portion by this rotation. By taking in air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540. The first space 1505a (in particular, the peripheral control IC 1510a) in the inner space of the body 1501 can be air-cooled, and the metal shield plate 1540 can be air-cooled.

  Further, noise entering the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 from cover side walls 1501b to 1501e provided on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501, respectively. As a countermeasure against (electromagnetic wave noise), each side of the shield flat plate 1540a is bent backward (toward the surface (mounting surface) side of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530). Side walls 1540ae are formed respectively. These side walls 1540ae are not formed with ventilation holes 1540az. These side walls 1540ae have predetermined end surfaces from the surfaces (mounting surfaces) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled. Since it has a distance dimension (for example, 3.9 mm) and is separated, it is not in contact with each other and is not in contact with various electronic components mounted on various substrates.

  In addition, a circular shape that passes through the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 through the pop-out preventing portion 1501aw having a cylindrical shape that protrudes from the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1502 is passed. An opening 1540aw having the shape is formed.

[Metal Substrate Back Side (Solder Side) Side Shield Plate of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fourth Embodiment]
Arranged on the back surface (solder surface) side of various substrates that can reduce (suppress) noise (electromagnetic wave noise) entering the various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is viewed from the front side, the upper left side, the lower left side, the upper right side, and the lower right side of the horizontally long rectangular shield plate 1555a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm). On the side, L-shaped attachment pieces 1555b1 to 1555b4 that are bent backward by a predetermined distance dimension (2.3 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1555a in the fourth embodiment) are respectively formed. These L-shaped attachment pieces 1555b1 to 1555b4 are formed to be bent so that their surfaces are arranged on the same plane.

  Cutout portions 1555aa1 to 1555aa3 are formed on the shield flat plate 1555a so as not to interfere with the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502, respectively. The shield flat plate 1555a has a mounting boss 1502af4 that contacts the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 among the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a of the base body 1502. Cutout portions 1555aa5 are formed so as not to interfere with the mounting bosses 1502af5 that are in contact with the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Further, on the surface side of the shield flat plate 1555a, an electric power other than the ground (GND) in various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so as to correspond to the shape of the shield flat plate 1555a. A transparent insulating sheet (not shown) for preventing a short circuit due to a general connection is attached (adhered). Further, the shield flat plate 1555a is not formed with any side walls 1540ae and ventilation holes 1540az formed on the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540.

  Note that the lower region of the notch 1555aa5 on the front surface side of the shield flat plate 1555a is attached to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d formed on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. The conductive elastic member 1545 that is in contact (adhered) is pressed and brought into contact with the conductive elastic member 1545.

  In a state where the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is attached to cover the back surface (solder surface) side of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. By arranging a metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 in the vicinity of the back surface side (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, The various substrates absorb heat generated from various electronic components and the like, and the absorbed heat is taken from the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555, whereby the various substrates can be efficiently cooled. That is, the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 has a function as a heat sink in addition to a function of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic wave noise).

  When the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled, the back surface side of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is in contact with the surface of the base flat plate 1502a of the base body 1502.

[Conductive Elastic Member of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fourth Embodiment]
The conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is a conductive member having cushioning properties (elasticity). The conductive cover portion 1545a, a foam 1545b having a rectangular shape as a core material covered with the conductive cover portion 1545a, and a conductive adhesive tape 1545c attached to the conductive cover portion 1545a are configured. Examples of the conductive coating 1545a include a polyester woven fabric with a copper and nickel metal coating formed thereon, and a polyimide film with a copper and nickel conductive layer formed thereon. Examples of the foam 1545b include a polyurethane foam having heat resistance. As the conductive adhesive tape 1545c, for example, a conductive double-sided adhesive tape using an acrylic adhesive can be used. The surface of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c is protected by peel paper until it is used, and the peel paper is peeled off when the conductive cover 1545a is attached (adhered) to another member.

  The cross-sectional shape of the conductive elastic member 1545 (the shape cut into a ring) has a rectangular shape with a width of about 5 mm and a height of about 3 mm, and the conductive adhesive tape 1545c has a width of about 2 mm. , Having a rectangular shape whose height is about 0.035 mm.

[Assembly Method of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fourth Embodiment]
A method for assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510.

  Subsequently, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, an L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is provided. The through-hole 1540c1a formed in the cover plate 1501a is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 The through-hole 1540c2a formed in the cover plate 1501a is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 A through hole 1540b1a formed on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a is formed. The through hole 1540b2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It arrange | positions so that it may match with mounting boss hole 1501am1.

  Subsequently, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and are formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The through holes 1520r1, 1520r2, 1520r3, 1520r4 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ah3, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1, formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 1530r2, 1530r3, and 1530r4 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501am1, 1501am3, 1501am2, and 1501am4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 233, a metal plate (not shown) is directly connected from the back surface (solder surface) side of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 by the first fixing method. It is fixed by inserting a screw and screwing it into various mounting boss holes formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By this first fixing method, a screw fixing instruction mark and a serial number in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark are printed on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates as silk printing with respect to the through hole to be fixed. This serial number indicates the order (work procedure) in which a manufacturer operator inserts and fixes a metal pan screw (not shown). It should be noted that the screw fixing instruction mark and the serial number printed in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark are printed as silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The area indicating the position (including the designation of the orientation) where various electronic components to be mounted are placed and the component number thereof are the same color (in this case, white) as the color printed as silk printing.

  Specifically, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH1 surrounding the periphery of the land 1520rb1 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 with a solid white line is silk-printed in the through hole 1520r1 of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. In the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH1, white serial number 1 is surrounded by a rectangular white line and printed as silk printing. In addition, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH2 surrounding the periphery of the land 1520rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 with a solid white line is printed on the through hole 1520r4 of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 as silk printing. In the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH2, a white serial number 2 is printed as silk printing surrounded by a rectangular white line.

  Further, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH3 surrounding the periphery of the land 1530rb1 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 with a solid white line is printed as silk printing in the through hole 1530r1 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. White serial number 3 is surrounded by a rectangular white line and printed as silk printing in the vicinity of screw fixing instruction mark DTH3. In addition, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH4 surrounding the periphery of the land 1530rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 with a solid white line is printed in the through hole 1530r4 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 as silk printing. A white serial number 4 is surrounded by a rectangular white line and printed as silk printing in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH4.

  Further, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH5 surrounding the periphery of the land 1510rb2 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 with a solid white line is printed as silk printing in the through hole 1510r2 of the peripheral control board 1510. A white serial number 5 is surrounded by a rectangular white line and printed as silk printing in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH5. Further, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH6 surrounding the periphery of the land 1510rb3 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 with a solid white line is printed as silk printing in the through hole 1510r3 of the peripheral control board 1510. A white serial number 6 is surrounded by a rectangular white line in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH6 and printed as silk printing.

  The through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 by the worker of the manufacturer inserting the metal pan screws (not shown) in order from the serial numbers 1 to 4 and fixing them by screwing them in order. There may be a slight deviation from the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Even in such a case, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a to restrain the vertical and horizontal directions, and the dimensional error due to such restraint When fixing the control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a Since each can be absorbed by the dimensional allowance, the positions of the peripheral control board 1510 are finely adjusted, and the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are replaced with the cover plate 1501a. Mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side It can be matched.

  Formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 by the operator of the manufacturer performing serial number 1 and serial number 2 up to the serial number 1 by inserting metal pan screws (not shown) and screwing them in. Lands 1520rb1 and 1520rb4 to be brought into contact with the bearing surface of the metal pan-screw. In addition, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1520rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. As a result, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520.

  The manufacturer's operator inserts a metal pan screw (not shown) in order of serial numbers 3 and 4 in order to fix them by screwing them in, so that the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is formed on the back surface (solder surface) side. The lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4 and the bearing surface of the metal pan-screw are in contact with each other. Further, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, so that the metal shield The plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

  The manufacturer's operator inserts a metal pan screw (not shown) in order of serial numbers 5 and 6 in order to fix them by screwing them in, so that the peripheral control board 1510 is formed on the back surface (solder surface) side. The lands 1510rb2 and 1510rb3 are in contact with the bearing surface of the metal pan-screw.

  In addition, when the worker of the manufacturer performs the work of inserting and fixing the metal pan screws (not shown) in order of serial numbers 1 to 6 in order, the worker of the manufacturer sequentially performs serial numbers 1 to 6 If a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted and screwed and fixed at random without inserting a metal pan screw (not shown), any of serial numbers 1 to 6 There is a case where a mistake is made in which a metal pan-head screw (not shown) is inserted into the one indicated by the serial number and forgot to fix it. If such a mistake occurs, the peripheral control board box 1505 (peripheral control unit 1500) will be shipped with imperfect fixing with a metal pan screw (not shown).

  Further, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the through holes 1510r2 of the peripheral control board 1510 indicated by serial numbers 1 to 6 are indicated by the manufacturer's workers. Any one or more of through holes other than 1510r3, that is, through holes 1520r2 and 1520r3 in peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, through holes 1530r2 and 1530r3 in liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 in peripheral control substrate 1510 Even if the base body 1502 is put on the cover body 1501 after it is fixed by screwing in a mounting boss hole formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by mistakenly inserting a metal pan screw (not shown) directly into the through hole of the cover plate 1501a. , Base plate 1502 Of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the surface side of the metal screw, the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss corresponding to the incorrectly inserted metal pan screw and the head of the metal pan screw incorrectly inserted Therefore, the gap between the base body 1502 and the cover body 1501 is formed so that the cover body 1501 cannot be completely blocked by the base body 1502.

  Thus, of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral control substrate 1510 is finally fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Subsequently, L of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is covered so as to cover the back surface (solder surface) side of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The through holes 1555b1a and 1555b2a formed in the letter-shaped mounting piece 1555b1 are arranged so as to match the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the L-shaped mounting of the metal board rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 The through hole 1555b3a formed in the piece 1555b3 is arranged so as to be aligned with the through hole 1520r2 of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and is formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1555b4 of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. The through hole 1555b4a is aligned with the through hole 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. It is placed so that. Thus, the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is arranged to cover the back surface (solder surface) side of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Then, since no hole such as a vent is formed in the shield plate 1555a of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555, the above-described screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 and serial numbers 1 to Serial number 6 is also covered with a metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 and is difficult to visually recognize. In other words, the peripheral control board box 1505 formed as an assembled transparent non-conductive resin is viewed from various angles such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. However, the fact that various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed by the first fixing method described above is the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side. The shield plate 1555 is not obscured, and the security of the peripheral control board box 1505 can be improved.

  Subsequently, the peel paper of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c of the conductive elastic member 1545 is peeled off, and the conductive elastic member 1545 is formed on the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. The adhesive tape 1545c is attached (adhered).

  Subsequently, the plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502, and are formed on the cover body 1501. The L-shaped flange portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd are inserted into the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502. .

  Subsequently, the L-shaped flange portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped bag-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. The mounting boss formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a by the second fixing method in a state where the base body 1502 is wrapped around so as to cover the opening side of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 is directly covered on the cover body 1501. Metal pan-head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag6 of 1502af1 to 1502af6 and fixed by screwing.

  Specifically, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into a through hole 1502ag1 of a mounting boss 1502af1 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a, and an L-shape of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is formed. Through-hole 1555b1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b1, the through-hole 1510r1 in the peripheral control board 1510, and the through-hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 in the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 It is fixed by screwing into a mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Further, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into a through hole 1502ag2 of a mounting boss 1502af2 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a, and an L-shaped mounting piece of a metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is formed. Cover through the through hole 1555b2a formed in 1555b2, the through hole 1510r4 in the peripheral control board 1510, and the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. It fixes by screwing in the attachment boss hole 1501ag1 formed in the back surface side of the flat plate 1501a. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 has the L-shape of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the L-shape of the metal board back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. It will be in the state clamped by the surface of attachment piece 1555b1, 1555b2. In this state, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 , And lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, and an L-shaped attachment of the metal board back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. The surfaces of the pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 are in contact with each other. That is, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. By being connected, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side. The L-shaped attachment pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 of the shield plate 1555 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively, so that they are made of metal. Back side (solder side) shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of peripheral control board 1510 It is the thing.

  In addition, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into a through hole 1502ag3 of a mounting boss 1502af3 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a, and an L-shaped mounting piece of a metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is inserted. The through hole 1555b3a formed in 1555b3 and the through hole 1520r2 in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are respectively passed through the mounting boss hole 1501ah1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a to be fixed. As a result, the land 1520rb2 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b3 of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 contact each other. It will be in the state. That is, the L-shaped attachment piece 1555b3 of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is electrically connected to the land 1520rb2 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. As a result, the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520.

  Further, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through hole 1502ag4 of the mounting boss 1502af4 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a, and passes through the through hole 1520r3 of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It fixes by screwing in the mounting boss hole 1501ah4 to be formed. Further, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into a through hole 1502ag5 of a mounting boss 1502af5 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a, and formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a through the through hole 1530r2 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The mounting boss hole 1501am3 is fixed by screwing.

  Further, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into a through hole 1502ag6 of a mounting boss 1502af6 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a, and an L-shaped mounting piece of a metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is formed. The through hole 1555b4a formed in 1555b4 and the through hole 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are respectively passed through the mounting boss hole 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a to be fixed. Thereby, the land 1530rb3 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 contact each other. It becomes a state. That is, the L-shaped attachment piece 1555b4 of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is electrically connected to the land 1530rb3 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As a result, the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

  By this second fixing method, when a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into and fixed to the through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag6 of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a, the metal substrate surface is fixed. The conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to the (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is pressed against and brought into contact with the surface side of the metallic substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. As a result, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are electrically connected. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed and crushed in the height direction (in the fourth embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm), thereby causing a dimensional tolerance or an assembly error. The dimensional deviation can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1545. As a result, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) sandwiching various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The side shield plate 1555 is in a state of being electrically securely connected, and is sandwiched between the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 Since it is electrically connected to ground (GND) lines of various substrates such as the control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the same ground (GND) can be obtained, so that noise (electromagnetic wave) The peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and Can be constructed with various substrate) such as a liquid crystal output board 1530 peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, near the data ROM substrate 1520, and with respect to the periphery of the various substrates) such as a liquid crystal output board 1530. Therefore, the influence by electromagnetic wave noise can be reduced.

  Subsequently, a metal one-way screw in which a metal anchor rivet (not shown) is inserted is inserted into the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501, and toward the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502. Screw in. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet spreads outward at the base-side sealing portion 1502ea, thereby forming the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. The base side sealing portion 1502ea to be sealed is in a sealed state.

  In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and inscribed (surface contact).

  In order to release such a sealed state, the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 has to be destroyed with a tool. Therefore, by observing the opening and closing traces, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 constituted by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and deterring power against illegal actions on the peripheral control board box 1505 Has been increased.

  Subsequently, the air cooling fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wires from the air cooling fan FAN are connected to the wiring lead recess 1501ab formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal seated pan-head screw (not shown) having a shape in which a pan head and a flat washer are integrated is screwed into the drawer and mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Subsequently, in order to connect a plurality of wirings (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via the wiring lead-out openings 1501ae formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The connector is inserted and attached, and the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. By inserting metal pan screws (not shown) into through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwing them into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the plurality of wirings are covered with the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

  When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this way is attached to an attachment portion formed on the back side of a transparent synthetic resin box that houses the effect display device 1600 on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is viewed from the front, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the engaging portion 1502ca formed on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) is the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box. A transparent synthetic resin box that is inserted into a mounting groove that constitutes a mounting portion formed in the outer peripheral control unit 1500 and a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. It fixes by screwing toward the attachment hole which comprises the attachment part formed in the back surface side.

  The cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 in the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment are formed by molding as a transparent non-conductive resin, and in the internal space of the cover body 1501 The various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are made of a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and a metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. So that the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates. It is configured. Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. Connected. For this reason, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) intruding from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is converted into a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and a metal substrate back surface (solder surface). Via the side shield plate 1555, it can be guided to a substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) and removed. Thereby, it is not necessary to provide each type of substrate (including the power supply substrate 630) with a dedicated filter for removing such noise (electromagnetic wave noise), thereby reducing the cost of the various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630). Can contribute.

  Here, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and a plurality of shield flat plates 1540a of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are formed. The arrangement of the circular ventilation holes 1540az will be described. As described above, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes can air-cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 and also have a function of confirming whether or not there is an illegality.

  Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are formed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided in the peripheral control board 1510. The product number and model (or management number) printed on the IC, the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, IC orientation, part number, pin number, etc.) Control, so that the surface of the control ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pins, and the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed from multi-directional angles. They are distributed and arranged so as to be larger than the shape of the ROM 1510b. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence relationship between the control ROM 1510b and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. . Further, the LEDML1 arranged in the vicinity of the control ROM 1510b is maintained in a lighting state in a state where the direct current + 5V from the power supply substrate 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied, so that the direct current + 5V is supplied. Although it has a function of confirming (monitoring) the state that is being performed, it also has a function as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the control ROM 1510b, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pin It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility and the improvement of the visibility of the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510.

  The plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Furthermore, the area is larger than the shape of the board-to-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520), and further provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (for example, , Connector pin count, IC Direction, part number, pin number, etc.), that is, the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pin, the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are silk-printed on each. Are arranged in a distributed manner so as to be a large area in which the contents can be substantially confirmed from angles in multiple directions. Accordingly, the correspondence between the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 In addition, the modification of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, This can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. Further, the LEDML3 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN1 is maintained in a lighting state in a state where the direct current + 35V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied. Although it has a function of checking (monitoring) the supplied state, it is a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special data SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Furthermore, the surface data of the peripheral data ROM 1520a is improved, the visibility of the IC pin state is improved, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are respectively silk-printed. Visibility and peripheral control board 1510 And it is capable to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the substrate between the connector according to a special connector SCN3 provided in special connectors SCN1 and peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 provided.

  The plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. And an area larger than the shape of the board-to-board connector (the shape constituted by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530), and further the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board. The contents (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) silk-printed on the 1530 are respectively distributed and arranged. Thereby, the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the contents silk-printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 In addition to the correspondence relationship, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. can do. Further, since the LEDML4 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN2 is maintained in the lighting state when the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a is originally confirmed (monitored). Although it has a function, it has a function as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN4 on the special connector SCN2 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. Improved visibility of the contents silk-printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and improved visibility of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 Can contribute to It has become the jar.

  The plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are part numbers and models printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c1, respectively. The state of the IC pins 1510c2 and the contents (for example, IC orientation, part number, pin number, etc.) silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be visually recognized, that is, the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. And the state of the IC pins and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 are distributed so as to be larger than the shapes of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 so that they can be confirmed from multi-directional angles. Has been placed. As a result, in addition to the correspondence between the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the air holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. Can do. Further, the LEDML2 arranged in the vicinity of the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in the lighting state in a state where the direct current + 12V is supplied from the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620. The surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2) is originally provided with a function of confirming (monitoring) a state in which DC + 12V is supplied, but also having a function as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the SDRAM 1510c. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility, the improvement of the visibility of the state of the IC pins, and the improvement of the visibility of the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510.

  Further, among the plurality of blades constituting the blades of the air cooling fan FAN, the gap between the blades (specifically, the gap between the blades and the blades when the inspector rotates the blades of the air cooling fan FAN). The product number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed. Thereby, it can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes whether or not an unauthorized substrate is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  In addition, as LEDML1-LEDML4 with which the periphery control board 1510 is equipped, since it is a surface mount type and a thing with a wide angle | corner of about 120 degree | times and a weak directivity type is employ | adopted, it is used as an illumination. Is also suitable. Various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are made of a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and a metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. In a state of being sandwiched and attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, a predetermined height is provided between the surface of each substrate (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in the fourth embodiment) is formed, and a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is disposed in this space, thereby providing two A space is formed. As described above, these two spaces are between the surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. In addition, a first space having a distance dimension (12 mm in the fourth embodiment) of the first predetermined height, a surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, and a cover plate And a second space having a distance of a second predetermined height (1.6 mm in the fourth embodiment) between the back surface of 1501a. In the first space, as described above, various electronic components included in the peripheral control substrate 1510, various electronic components included in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and various electronic components included in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are accommodated. Yes. The first space formed in this way can be illuminated brightly by turning on the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 that is also suitable for use as illumination.

  Further, since the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is made of metal, it is glossy and is a metal substrate that faces the light emitting surfaces of the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510. As a reflection part that can reflect the light emitted from the LEDML1 to LEDML4 and direct it toward the peripheral control board 1510 to the area of the back surface of the shield plate 1540a of the front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and its periphery. It also has the function of You may comprise so that the coloring paint which has glossiness may be further apply | coated to these reflection parts.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5 near the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached, and paid out to the side of the game board 5. Since the unit 560 is arranged, the game balls are rubbed against each other in the ball path constituted by these units, and are charged and electrostatically discharged to become a noise source. For this reason, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment that is affected by noise (electromagnetic wave noise) due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. Pachinko machines 1 are lined up opposite the island facilities in the game hall. Thus, the surroundings of the game board 5 are in an environment that is extremely susceptible to noise (electromagnetic wave noise). Thus, in the fourth embodiment, as described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are formed by being transparently molded as a non-conductive resin, and the inside of the cover body 1501 In the space, various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are made of a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and a metal substrate rear surface (solder surface) side. By being attached while being sandwiched by the shield plate 1555, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are grounded (GND) of various substrates. The configuration of electrical connection with the was adopted. In the fourth embodiment, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected to the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. The same ground (GND) is adopted by electrically connecting to the other ground (GND) line.

  Accordingly, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), and the base Noise (electromagnetic wave noise) intruding from the body 1502 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data via the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal board back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. It can be removed by being guided to the ground (GND) of various substrates such as the ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In other words, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), and the base Noise (electromagnetic wave noise) intruding from the body 1502 is transferred to the substrate ground (ground of various substrates) via the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. (GND)) can be removed.

  In the fourth embodiment, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are made of a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, and a metal substrate. In a state of being sandwiched between the back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 and attached to a predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the surfaces of the various substrates (surfaces facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the cover flat plate 1501a A space having a distance of a predetermined height (14.8 mm in the fourth embodiment) is formed between the back surface and the back surface, and a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is formed in this space. Are arranged to form two spaces, and these two spaces are the surfaces of the various substrates (surfaces facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a). A first space having a distance of a first predetermined height (12 mm in the fourth embodiment) between the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a; A distance distance of a second predetermined height between the surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a (1.6 mm in the fourth embodiment). And a second space having In other words, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height is formed larger than the distance dimension of the second predetermined height. This is a case where a large-scale production unit (an electrical drive source or drive mechanism capable of operating a movable production body and various sensors for detecting an origin position or an operation position) is arranged on the game board 5 in the depth direction. If there is a margin in the distance dimension, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height and the distance dimension of the second predetermined height may be configured as a distance dimension of the same predetermined height, The distance dimension of the predetermined height may be configured to be larger than the distance dimension of the first predetermined height. Even with this configuration, it is possible to take countermeasures against electromagnetic wave noise by accommodating various electronic components that are easily affected by noise (electromagnetic wave noise) in the first space, and in the second space. By not accommodating various electronic components that generate heat, heat generated from various electronic components in the first space is efficiently transferred to the second space via the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. I can tell you well.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az are formed in the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, thereby providing control for the peripheral control substrate 1510. The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (eg, IC orientation, part number, pin number, etc.) ), And the part numbers and types printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the state of the IC pins of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the silk control printed on the peripheral control board 1510. Contents (for example, IC orientation, part number, pin number, etc.) Further, the product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the state of the IC pin of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 Each of the silk-printed contents (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) is configured to be visible, but the control ROM 1510b, SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2, peripheral data ROM 1520a A rectangular opening can be provided at the position of the corresponding metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. In addition to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a, a rectangular opening is provided at the position of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 so that the periphery can be seen. It can also be configured as follows. Also, the shape of the board-to-board connector (the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be checked so that the connection state of the board-to-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be confirmed. In addition, a rectangular opening can be provided at the position of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 corresponding to a larger area. In order to confirm the connection state of the board-to-board connector between the control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530, the shape of the board-to-board connector (special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and Metal substrate surface corresponding to a larger area It may be configured to provide a rectangular opening at the position of (the mounting surface) side shield plate 1540.

[Around the through holes of various substrates of the peripheral control substrate box according to the fourth embodiment]
Here, the periphery of the through holes formed in the various substrates of the peripheral control substrate box according to the fourth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 234 (a), the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510 around the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control substrate 1510 is on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side. Lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 that are in contact with and electrically connected to the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the shield plate 1540 are formed. Further, the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 around the through hole 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 has a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) as shown in FIG. ) A land 1520rf4 that is in contact with and electrically connected to the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the side shield plate 1540 is formed. Further, the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the through hole 1530r1 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side as shown in FIG. 234 (a). A land 1530rf1 that is in contact with and electrically connected to the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the shield plate 1540 is formed.

  These lands 1510rf1, 1510rf4, 1520rf4, and 1530rf1 are in contact with and electrically connected to the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, and 1540b2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. Therefore, a “noise elimination route” is formed in which noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 flows to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates). The surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, and 1540b2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are mounting boss holes 1501ag1, 1501ag4, and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. , 1501am1 contact surfaces (boss surfaces) respectively. For this reason, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 from the mounting boss holes 1501ag1, 1501ag4, 1501ah2, 1501am1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. , 1540c2, 1540b1, 1540b2, and the land 1510rf1, 1510rf4, 1520rf4, 1530rf1, the intruding noise (electromagnetic wave noise) flows to the substrate ground (grounds (GND) of various substrates).

  Further, the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 around the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a as shown in FIG. 234 (b). Foil removal regions NR5 and NR6 having a circular shape that is slightly larger than the outer circle of the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed are formed, and the attachment surfaces (boss surfaces) of the attachment boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 are the foil removal region NR5. , NR6 respectively. Further, the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 around the through holes 1520r1, 1520r2 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 has a cover flat plate 1501a as shown in FIG. 234 (b). Foil removal regions NR7, NR8, NR9 having a circular shape slightly larger than the outer circle of the mounting boss holes 1501ah3, 1501ah1, 1501ah4 formed on the back side are formed, and mounting of the mounting boss holes 1501ah3, 1501ah1, 1501ah4 The surfaces (boss surfaces) are in contact with the foil removal regions NR7, NR8, and NR9, respectively. Further, the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the through holes 1530r2, 1530r3, 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a as shown in FIG. 234 (b). Foil removal regions NR10, NR11, and NR12 having a circular shape that is slightly larger than the outer circle of the mounting boss holes 1501am3, 1501am2, and 1501am4 are formed in the mounting boss holes 1501am3, 1501am2, and 1501am4. The boss surface is in contact with the foil removal regions NR10, NR11, NR12, respectively.

  These foil removal regions NR5 to NR12 prevent intrusion of noise (electromagnetic noise) from the mounting boss holes 1501ag2, 1501ag3, 1501ah3, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, 1501am3, 1501am2, 1501am4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the ground (GND) of various boards such as the liquid crystal output board 1530 are isolated. In other words, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is controlled from the mounting boss holes 1501ag2, 1501ag3, 1501ah3, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, 1501am3, 1501am2, and 1501am4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a through the foil removal regions NR5 to NR12. A “noise-free route” that cannot enter the solid ground of various substrates such as the substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is formed.

  On the other hand, the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 around the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 has a metal substrate back surface as shown in FIG. (Solder surface) Lands 1510 rb 1 and 1510 rb 4 that are in contact with and electrically connected to the surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555 b 1 and 1555 b 2 of the side shield plate 1555 are formed. Further, the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 around the through-hole 1520r2 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 has a metal substrate back surface (solder surface) as shown in FIG. 235 (a). ) Land 1520rb2 that is in contact with and electrically connected to the surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b3 of the side shield plate 1555 is formed. Further, the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the through-hole 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 has a metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side as shown in FIG. 235 (a). A land 1530rb3 that is in contact with and electrically connected to the surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of the shield plate 1555 is formed.

  These lands 1510 rb 1, 1510 rb 4, 1520 rb 2, and 1530 rb 3 are in contact with and electrically connected to the surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555 b 1, 1555 b 2, 1555 b 3, and 1555 b 4 of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. Therefore, a “route through which noise is removed” is formed, in which noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 flows to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates). Note that the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1, 1555b2, 1555b3, and 1555b4 of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are mounting bosses 1502af1, 1502af2, 1502af3 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a. The mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) 1502af6 abut each other. For this reason, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) from the mounting bosses 1502af1, 1502af2, 1502af3, and 1502af6 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a leads to an L-shaped mounting piece 1555b1 of the metal substrate rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. Even if they enter 1555b2, 1555b3, 1555b4, and lands 1510rb1, 1510rb4, 1520rb2, 1530rb3, the intruding noise (electromagnetic wave noise) flows to the substrate ground (grounds (GND) of various substrates).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 235 (b), a metal pan screw (not shown) is provided on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 around the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510. Lands 1510rb2 and 1510rb3 that are directly inserted and screwed are formed, and screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6 that surround the lands 1510rb2 and 1510rb3 with solid white solid lines are printed as silk printing. Further, as shown in FIG. 235 (b), a metal pan (not shown) is provided on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 around the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. Lands 1520rb1 and 1520rb4 into which screws are directly inserted are formed, and screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 surrounding the lands 1520rb1 and 1520rb4 with white solid lines are printed as silk printing. Further, as shown in FIG. 235 (b), a metal pan screw (not shown) is provided on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4 that are directly inserted and screwed are formed, and screw fixing instruction marks DTH3 and DTH4 surrounding the lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4 with solid white solid lines are printed as silk printing.

  Note that even if a metal pan-head screw (not shown) is directly inserted into the through-holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and screwed in, the white solid line portions of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6 Although the region close to the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 overlaps with the head of the metal pan screw (not shown), the outer peripheral portion of the white solid line portion of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6 has a metal pan (not shown). By forming the screw head larger than the outline of the screw head, a solid white solid line of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6 makes a metal pan screw head (not shown) stand out. It is possible to contribute to the suppression of mistakes (inadvertent mistakes) in which you insert a pan-head screw and forget to fix it. It has become to so that. Further, even if a metal pan-head screw (not shown) is directly inserted and screwed into the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the white solid line area of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 Of these, although the region close to the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 overlaps the head of the metal pan screw (not shown), the outer peripheral portion of the white solid line region of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 is made of metal (not shown). Since it is formed larger than the outline of the head of the pan head screw, the head of the metal pan head screw (not shown) is conspicuous by the solid white solid line of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1, DTH2. This contributes to the suppression of mistakes (inadvertent mistakes) of inserting and fixing the pan-head screws. It has to be able to bet. Further, even if a metal pan-head screw (not shown) is directly inserted and screwed into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the screw fixing instruction marks DTH3 and DTH4 of the solid white line portion of the region Although the region close to the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 overlaps the head of a metal pan screw (not shown), the outer peripheral portion of the white solid line region of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 has a metal pan (not shown). By forming the screw head larger than the outline of the screw head, a solid white solid line of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH3 and DTH4 makes a metal pan screw head (not shown) stand out. It is possible to contribute to the suppression of mistakes (inadvertent mistakes) in which you insert a pan-head screw and forget to fix it. It has become to so that.

  Further, the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 around the through hole 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a as shown in FIG. 235 (c). A foil removal region NR13 having a shape that is slightly larger than the outer circle of the mounting boss 1502af4 is formed, and the attachment surface (boss surface) of the attachment boss 1502af4 is in contact with the foil removal region NR13. Further, a surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the through hole 1530r2 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a as shown in FIG. 235 (c). A foil removal region NR14 having a circular shape that is slightly larger than the outer circle of the attachment boss 1502af5 is formed, and the attachment surface (boss surface) of the attachment boss 1502af5 is in contact with the foil removal region NR14.

  These foil removal regions NR13 and NR14 are connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates so that noise (electromagnetic wave noise) can be prevented from entering from the mounting bosses 1502af4 and 1502af5 formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a. Isolated from In other words, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) passes from the mounting bosses 1502af4 and 1502af5 formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a to the solid ground of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via the foil removal regions NR13 and NR14. A “route through which noise cannot escape” is formed which cannot be invaded.

  As described above, the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 surrounded by the solid white solid line are respectively printed as silk printing, and the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the through holes formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed. The holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 and the through-holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are through-holes that are fixed to the cover body 1501 by directly inserting and screwing a metal pan screw (not shown). On the other hand, the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 in which the screw fixing instruction mark is not printed at all as silk printing, the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output The through holes 1530r2 and 1530r3 formed in the substrate 1530 are formed by inserting metal pan screws (not shown) into the through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a of the base body 1502. When the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are fixed by screwing, the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a of the base body 1501, and the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501 150 The mounting surface of the mounting boss hole 1501ag1,1501ag4,1501ah1,1501ah4,1501am3,1501am2 formed on the back side of a with (a boss surface), a through hole is fixed fastened together is sandwiched.

  That is, a metal pan-head screw is directly inserted into a plurality of through holes provided in various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and is fixed to the cover body 1501. When the through holes and the through holes that are clamped and fixed together when fixing the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are mixed, the operator of the manufacturer places silkscreen on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Screw fixing instruction marks DTH1, DTH2 printed as printing, screw fixing instruction marks DTH3, DTH4 printed as silk printing on the liquid crystal output board 1530, screw fixing instruction marks DTH5, DTH6 printed as silk printing on the peripheral control board 1510 The cover body 150 is inserted by directly inserting a metal pan-head screw and Through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 of the peripheral control board 1510 which are fixed to the through holes, through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 Through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510, which are the through holes that are clamped and fixed together, the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r3 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the through holes of the liquid crystal output board 1530 1530r2 and 1530r3 can be discriminated, so that through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 of the peripheral control board 1510, which are through holes that are directly inserted and screwed into the cover body 1501 are inserted, and peripheral data ROM Board 152 Through holes 1520r1,1520r4, (operation of fixing by screwing) screwing work into the through-hole 1530r1,1530r4 LCD output board 1530 can be performed smoothly. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of work efficiency.

  In the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal board back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are electrically connected. In addition to being connected, it is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield Either or both of the plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are in contact with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and are not electrically connected. In this case, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are in an electrically floating state. Since the electrically floating metal functions as an antenna that picks up noise and may become a noise source, the electrically floating metal may be used as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, a liquid crystal output board 1530, and the like. It is necessary not to make it for various substrates. Therefore, in the noise countermeasure configuration according to the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 are illustrated. In addition to the case where the wiring is not electrically connected by the wiring not to be connected, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 may be electrically connected to the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 by the wiring not shown. As described above, the metal main frame reinforcing frame 530 functions as a main frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the main frame base unit 300 to give rigidity, and a main frame metal (not shown). It is electrically connected to the above-mentioned frame ground substrate 559 through a ground wire. The frame ground substrate 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facility of the game hall via an unillustrated island facility ground wire.

  In the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 includes the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. As described above, the shield plate 1555a of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 has a hole such as a vent hole. Since it is not formed at all, the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 and the serial numbers 1 to 6 are also covered with the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 and are difficult to see. A plurality of holes may be formed in the shield flat plate 1555a of the substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. In this way, whether the manufacturer's operator fixes the various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 through the plurality of holes by the first fixing method described above (that is, It is possible to visually check whether or not a metal pan-head screw is inserted and fixed in a portion where the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 are present.

  Further, in the noise countermeasure configuration by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 around the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 is shown in FIG. Screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6 surrounding the lands 1510rb2 and 1510rb3 shown in 235 (b), which are directly inserted and screwed in, are surrounded by solid white lines, and are printed as silk printing. A metal pan screw (not shown) shown in FIG. 235 (b) is provided on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 around the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. Land 1520 that is directly inserted and screwed Screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 surrounding the periphery of b1 and 1520rb4 with solid white solid lines are printed as silk printing, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 Screw fixing instructions surrounding the lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4 with solid metal solid screws (not shown) shown in FIG. 235 (b) inserted into the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of FIG. The marks DTH3 and DTH4 are printed as silk printing, but may be a white thick chain line (one-dot chain line or two-dot chain line) instead of the white thick solid line.

  In addition, in the noise countermeasure configuration by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 and the serial numbers 1 to 6 are printed as silk prints by the peripheral control board 1510, The area indicating the position (including the designation of orientation) where various electronic components to be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged, and the component number is silk printed. Although it is the same color (white) as the color to be printed, the area indicating the position (including the designation of orientation) where various electronic components to be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of various boards are placed and its part number It is good also as a color different from the color printed as silk printing. For example, when the area where various electronic components to be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of various boards are arranged (including the designation of orientation) and the part number printed as silk printing are white The screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 and the serial numbers 1 to 6 may be yellow or black as colors to be printed as silk printing so as to be different from the white color.

  Further, in the noise countermeasure configuration by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, and the metal substrate surface (mounting surface). The back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the side shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other, the land 1520rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the surface of the metal substrate (Mounting surface) Land 1530rf1 formed on the front surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and a metal substrate, in contact with the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the side shield plate 1540 In a state where the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is in contact with However, instead of this, the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control substrate 1510. , 1510rf4 without contacting the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555, and L-shaped mounting of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 The back surface of the piece 1540b1 is not in contact with the land 1520rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, but is in contact with the front surface of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. And the rear surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is the surface of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 ( Without contact with the land 1530rf1 formed Sunda surface) may be configured so as to contact the metallic substrate rear (solder side) side surface of the shield plate 1555. This means that the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are electrically connected by the conductive elastic member 1545 described above. Because you can.

  In this configuration, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, and 1540b2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 include a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and It is configured not to come into contact with various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Further, the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 has through-holes formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, and 1540b2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, respectively. Through holes are formed at positions corresponding to the holes 1540c1a, 1540c2a, 1540b1a, and 1540b2a, respectively. The base body 1502 corresponds to the through holes 1540c1a, 1540c2a, 1540b1a, and 1540b2a formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, and 1540b2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, respectively. Through-holes are respectively formed at the positions to be performed. Further, on the back surface side of the cover body 1501, through holes 1540c1a, 1540c2a, 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, 1540b2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, respectively. Screw holes are respectively formed at positions corresponding to 1540b2a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, and 1540b2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are brought into contact with the surface of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. The cover body in a state (that is, a state in which the electrical connection between the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 can be made favorable) Screw holes formed on the back side of the cover body 1501 by inserting metal pan screws (not shown) into the through holes formed in the base body 1502 so as to be sandwiched and fixed between the 1501 and the base body 1502 It can be fixed by screwing it toward each.

  In the fourth embodiment, when the wing portion of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotates, the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 passes through the wing portion due to this rotation. By ejecting outward, the air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 is accommodated in a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. Air that flows into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 when taking in through the plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 The flow velocity of the can be kept small, but FA When the vane portion of the cooling fan FAN attached to the mounting recess 1501aa is rotated through the blade portion by the rotation may inhale air toward the peripheral control IC1510a to feed the air. In other words, the main purpose of the air cooling fan FAN may be to simply cool the peripheral control IC 1510a without air exchange in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

  Further, in the noise countermeasure configuration by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 comes into contact with the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 (FIG. 234). For the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control substrate 1510 shown in a), a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510. The solder paste is spread on the metal mask using a squeegee (like a spatula) to apply it from the hole formed in the metal mask, and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is placed in a reflow furnace and heated. The solder paste is dried by the above, but the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into the solder bath and It may be put da. In this case, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 The copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is not partially raised so that the contact area is not reduced and the electrical connectivity is not deteriorated. Need to be uniform.

  For example, a copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is formed with a resist layer 1510xr that is partially coated with a resist solution and formed into a predetermined shape, The surface of the peripheral control board 1510 (mounting surface) is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 221 (a), the resist is applied to the copper foils that are the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 as the “predetermined shape”. A shape in which a plurality of circles having a predetermined width are formed concentrically (a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is formed concentrically), as shown in FIG. 221 (b), As shown in FIG. 221 (c), a rectangular shape having a predetermined width and a predetermined length is formed in the shape of a chrysanthemum arranged in a ring shape around the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4. A shape formed in a lattice shape composed of a directional line and a horizontal line (a shape in which a plurality of lines in the vertical direction in which the resist has a predetermined width is formed by being separated by a predetermined distance dimension may be used, Only a lateral direction in which the dies have a predetermined width may have a shape in which a plurality of lines are formed with a predetermined distance dimension apart from each other.) As shown in FIG. 221 (d), a line in which the resist has a predetermined width has a predetermined distance. A shape in which a plurality of upward-sloping lines are formed in a slanted line apart from each other (a line in which a resist having a predetermined width is separated by a predetermined distance and a plurality of downward-sloping lines are formed in a slanted line) may be illustrated. However, it is possible to list small circular shapes.

  In this way, a resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape is formed by coating a part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, with the resist solution. Since the surface of the control board 1510 (mounting surface) is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4, the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 (mounting surface) The amount of solder to be soldered to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 can be suppressed (in other words, the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 (mounting surface) is applied as a predetermined shape by applying a resist solution. The amount of solder to be soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 Effect as long as the can demonstrate that it is possible to win). Thus, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into the solder bath and soldered, the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is not soldered. The attachment can be made uniform so that it does not rise partially. The solder thus soldered is the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the land 1510rf1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 so as to be electrically connectable.

  A predetermined figure formed by such a resist may also be applied to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510. Also, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder bath and soldered, the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is applied with a resist solution. Thus, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 may be made uniform.

  Also, in the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a metal pan screw is used. The peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a through a metal washer such as a flat washer, a spring washer, and a toothed washer (also referred to as “chrysal washer”).

  In addition, in the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, thereby fixing the frame-shaped metal frame. And the metal back cover are electrically connected and accommodated in a transparent synthetic resin box, and the transparent synthetic resin box and the base body 1502 are molded separately. However, the base body 1502 may be integrally molded in this transparent synthetic resin box.

[Contrast between Noise Countermeasure Configuration by Peripheral Control Board Box According to First Embodiment and Noise Countermeasure Configuration by Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fifth Embodiment]
In the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, as described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is all made of polycarbonate with carbon as described above. It is configured as a conductive resin contained, and various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed on a metal plate on the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When fixed by screws, they are configured to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) of these various substrates to be the same ground (GND).

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the noise countermeasure by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Peripheral control capable of controlling the progress of the production based on the command from the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game, and the cover body 1501 formed of a transparent non-conductive resin. A substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, and a transparent non-conductive material that closes the opening of the cover body 1501. And a base body 1502 that is molded from a compatible resin. Various substrates such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached at predetermined positions in the internal space of the cover body 1501, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502. Thus, a peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed board box) is configured by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

  In the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, in addition to the fact that the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a transparent non-conductive resin, T The substrate conductive elastic member 1508 is fitted into the back surface side of the base flat plate 1502a so that a part of the substrate conductive elastic member 1508 having a letter-shape protrudes from the back surface of the base body 1502; The region ROP in which a part of the ground (GND) is exposed is provided on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the ground (GND) test pad of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The probe is in contact with the test pad on the cover 1501 It constitutes a difference of the noise countermeasure in that the opening is formed by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment that.

[Base Body of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fifth Embodiment]
The base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment is largely similar to the shape of the base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, and is the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output board 1530. The conductive elastic member for substrate 1508 that can come into contact with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is fitted in a position corresponding to the region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed. The rib portion 1502aw is formed to protrude from the front surface of the base flat plate 1502a to the front with a predetermined distance dimension (a distance dimension that does not contact the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530). An insertion port 1502az having a square (one side is 8 mm) is formed in the base flat plate 1502a at the center in the vertical and horizontal directions of the rectangular rib portion 1502aw. The conductive elastic member for substrate 1508 having a T shape is a conductive member having cushioning properties (elasticity), and has a conductive covering portion 1508a and a T shape as a core material covered by the conductive covering portion 1508a. And a foam 1508b having the same. Examples of the conductive covering portion 1508a include those in which a metal film of copper and nickel is formed on a polyester woven fabric, and those in which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed on a polyimide film. Examples of the foam 1508b include a polyurethane foam having heat resistance. The T-shaped foam body 15808b has a base portion having a rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the vertical direction (when the T-shaped foam body 15808b in FIG. 237 is viewed from the right side, the width is about 3.5 mm and the depth is about A projecting portion having a rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the front-rear direction from the center of 8 mm and a height of about 16 mm (when the foamed body 15808 b having a T-shape in FIG. 237 is viewed from the right side, the width is about 11.3 mm. 5 mm, depth is about 8 mm, and height is about 8 mm). The conductive elastic member for substrate 1508 is assembled after the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled (the assembly method of the peripheral control unit 1500 is the same as the assembly method of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted. ), A base portion having a rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the vertical direction of the conductive elastic member for substrate 1508 having a T-shape is inserted into the insertion port 1502az formed in the base body 1502, and is pushed in and fitted in the vertical direction. As a result, as shown in FIG. 238 (a), the protruding portion having the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped that is long in the front-rear direction of the conductive elastic member for substrate 1508 having a T-shape protrudes rearward from the back surface side of the base flat plate 1502a. It will be in the state.

  When the base portion having a rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the vertical direction of the conductive elastic member for substrate 1508 having the T shape is inserted into the insertion port 1502az formed in the base body 1502 and pushed in, the shape shown in FIG. ), The front surface of the base portion having a rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the vertical direction is in contact with the surface ROP of the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed. The upper and lower back sides and the lower back side of the base portion having the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped that is long in the vertical direction (that is, the shape of the rectangular solid that is long in the vertical direction without the protruding portion having the shape of the rectangular parallelepiped long in the front-rear direction) The back surface of the base part having the base plate 1502a is engaged with the surface of the base flat plate 1502a.

  Thus, the conductive elastic member 1508 for the substrate has a T-shape, and the rib 1502aw and the insertion port 1502az are formed in the center of the rib 1502aw in the vertical and horizontal directions of the base flat plate 1502a. When the conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate is inserted into the insertion port 1502az and is inserted and fitted, the base conductive elastic member 1508 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the vertical direction as described above. Upper and lower back surfaces (that is, the back surfaces of base portions having a rectangular parallelepiped shape that is not connected to a protrusion having a rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the front-rear direction) are respectively locked to the surface of the base flat plate 1502a. Therefore, it is difficult for the substrate conductive elastic member 1508 to come off from the insertion port 1502az. Good sounding and hand treatment is to be able to.

  Note that, on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, the region corresponding to the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed in the base body 1502 is one area compared to the outer shape of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. The foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 having large shapes are formed, and the front surfaces (contact surfaces) of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are in contact with the foil removal regions NR1, NR, and NR3, respectively. These foil drawing regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 are designed to prevent the intrusion of noise (electromagnetic wave noise) from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed in the base body 1502. Isolated from GND). In other words, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) cannot enter the solid ground of the peripheral control board 1510 from the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed in the base body 1502 via the foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3. A route where noise cannot escape is formed.

  As described above, the effect display device 1600 includes a frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover that covers the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. A frame-shaped metal frame accommodates a liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit, and the like. The entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame and the metal back cover are electrically connected, Housed in a transparent plastic box. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to an attachment portion formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, a rectangular parallelepiped long in the front-rear direction of the conductive elastic member 1508 for the substrate protruding from the back side of the base body 1502 The projecting portion having the shape of is a state in which the projecting portion is pressed against the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 (in the fifth embodiment, the projecting shape having a rectangular parallelepiped shape long in the front-rear direction of the conductive elastic member 1508 for the substrate) When the conductive elastic member for substrate 1508 having a T shape is deformed into an H shape, the repulsive force is applied to the substrate. The conductive elastic member 1508 includes a contact surface between the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and a region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed, and an effect table. The device 1600 is in a state of being added to the contact surface with the metal back cover, maintaining a good electrical connection, and a ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600 is in an electrically and reliably connected state, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 (the ground of the liquid crystal output board 1530 ( GND) is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520), and can be the same ground (GND). Thereby, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via the conductive elastic member 1508 for the substrate (the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is the peripheral control substrate). 1510 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520). The ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the like housed in the peripheral control unit 1500. Since the same ground (GND) can be electrically connected to the line, the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and Various substrates such as a liquid crystal output substrate 1530) and a peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control substrate 1510, Can be constructed edge data ROM substrate 1520, and with respect to the periphery of the various substrates) such as a liquid crystal output board 1530. Therefore, the influence by electromagnetic wave noise can be reduced.

  The cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 in the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment are formed by molding as a transparent non-conductive resin, and the cover body 1501 has an internal space. After the various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached at predetermined positions, the conductive elastic member for substrate 1508 having a T-shape is elongated in the vertical direction. When the base portion having the shape is inserted into the insertion port 1502az formed in the base body 1502, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the attachment portion formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, The metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 outputs a liquid crystal via the conductive elastic member 1508 for the substrate. The plate 1530 is connected to the ground (GND) line (the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520). It is configured. Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. Connected. Therefore, the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered the effect display device 1600 is guided through the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) and removed. A route to exit can be formed. Thereby, it is not necessary to provide each type of substrate (including the power supply substrate 630) with a dedicated filter for removing such noise (electromagnetic wave noise), thereby reducing the cost of the various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630). Can contribute.

  Note that the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 () (the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 () is connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 on the surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. A test pad (not shown) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is provided on the surface (mounting surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As shown in FIG. 240, the cover 1501 has a contact probe tip (hereinafter simply referred to as “contact probe”) against a test pad (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. (It may be a “test lead” for conducting a continuity check of a so-called “tester”.) An opening 1501 at can be inserted and contacted. By bringing the contact probe into contact with the test pad, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected even when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall. An inspection company can easily perform an inspection operation as to whether or not the connection is established.

[Exposed Region of Part of Ground of Various Substrates of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fifth Embodiment]
Here, the region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed will be described. The region ROP formed in a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 as shown in FIGS. A part of the substrate ground (GND) (that is, a solid ground) formed on the copper foil surface 1530yp of 1530y has a rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the vertical direction of the conductive elastic member 1508 for the substrate. The resist solution is placed on the copper foil surface 1530yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so as to be exposed inside the rectangular rib portion 1502aw formed on the surface of the base flat plate 1502a. Is applied to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer 1530yr.

  It is also possible to employ a method using a through hole without exposing the solid ground as the region ROP. For example, as shown in FIGS. 241 (c) and (d), the region ROP on the back surface (solder surface) 1530 y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the solid ground on the surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. A plurality of through holes to be connected are arranged in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, and the copper is formed so that lands are formed around the through holes on the copper foil surface 1530yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. A resist solution can be applied onto the foil surface 1530yp to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer 1530yr.

  In the fifth embodiment, when the wing portion of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotates, the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 is rotated by the rotation of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the wing portion. When the air is blown out to the outside, a plurality of air is taken into the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 when taking in air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Although the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the formed ventilation holes 1501az can be suppressed to a small value, when the wing portion of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotates, the rotation causes the wing portion to move. Through the air to the peripheral control IC 1510a. It may be to send out air me. In other words, the main purpose of the air cooling fan FAN may be to simply cool the peripheral control IC 1510a without air exchange in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

  Even in the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 that contacts the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. For the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side, a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and a squeegee (like a spatula) The surface of the peripheral control board 1510 (mounting surface) 1510x is placed in a reflow oven and the solder paste is dried by heat. However, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 may be poured into a solder bath and soldered. . In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 abut the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In order not to reduce the area and the electrical connectivity, the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is not partly raised. It needs to be uniform.

  For example, a copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is formed with a resist layer 1510xr that is partially coated with a resist solution and formed into a predetermined shape, The surface of the peripheral control board 1510 (mounting surface) is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 221 (a), the resist is applied to the copper foils that are the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 as the “predetermined shape”. A shape in which a plurality of circles having a predetermined width are formed concentrically (a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is formed concentrically), as shown in FIG. 221 (b), As shown in FIG. 221 (c), a rectangular shape having a predetermined width and a predetermined length is formed in the shape of a chrysanthemum arranged in a ring shape around the center of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4. A shape formed in a lattice shape composed of directional lines and lateral lines (a shape in which a plurality of lines in the vertical direction in which the resist has a predetermined width is separated by a predetermined distance may be formed, Only a lateral direction in which the dies have a predetermined width may have a shape in which a plurality of lines are formed with a predetermined distance dimension apart from each other.) As shown in FIG. 221 (d), a line in which the resist has a predetermined width has a predetermined distance. A shape in which a plurality of upward-sloping lines are formed in a slanted line apart from each other (a line in which a resist having a predetermined width is separated by a predetermined distance and a plurality of downward-sloping lines are formed in a slanted line) may be illustrated. However, it is possible to list small circular shapes.

  In this way, a resist layer 1510xr is formed in which a part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is applied with a resist solution and formed into a predetermined shape. Since the surface of the control board 1510 (mounting surface) is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 (mounting surface) The amount of solder to be soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 can be suppressed (in other words, the surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510 (mounting surface) is applied as a predetermined shape by applying a resist solution. The amount of solder to be soldered to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 Effect as long as the can demonstrate that it is possible to win). Accordingly, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into the solder bath and soldered, the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is not soldered. The attachment can be made uniform so that it does not rise partially. The solder thus soldered includes the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the lands 1510rf1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 is covered so as to be electrically connectable.

  It should be noted that a predetermined figure formed by such a resist is a land on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 that abuts the seat surface (head seat surface) of the pan portion of the metal pan screw. You may perform also with respect to the copper foil which is the surface of 1510rb1-1510rb4. The solder thus soldered electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (the seat surface of the head) of the pan portion of the metal pan screw. It is covered so that it can be connected. Further, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder bath and soldered, the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is applied with a resist solution. Thus, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may be made uniform.

  Further, in the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, the metal pan-head screw is used when fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a through a metal washer such as a flat washer, a spring washer, and a toothed washer (also referred to as “chrysal washer”).

  In addition, in the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame is fixed. And the metal back cover are electrically connected and accommodated in a transparent synthetic resin box, and the transparent synthetic resin box and the base body 1502 are molded separately. However, the base body 1502 may be integrally formed in this transparent synthetic resin box.

  Incidentally, a board such as a main control board that performs control related to game progress and game profit, a sub-control board that performs control related to effects executed as the game progresses, and an image control board that performs display control of an image display device, etc. Has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2)). By the way, as the gaming machines described in this document, the gaming machines are provided in a plurality of rows facing the back of the hall, so that the board on which electronic components are mounted is affected by the noise generated from the gaming machines facing the back. There was a risk that the board would malfunction due to noise.

  Conventionally, there is a gaming machine provided with a ROM for storing image data such as symbols, various background images, characters, characters, etc., an effect control board on which a CPU for controlling a display device for displaying various images, etc. is mounted. It has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2006-116667 (FIG. 2)). By the way, the game balls supplied to the gaming machine from the island equipment of the gaming hall are charged with static electricity by the game balls rubbing each other when circulating between the island equipment and the gaming machine of the gaming hall. It is necessary to take countermeasures against electromagnetic wave noise caused by electrostatic discharge.

  Conventionally, there is a gaming machine provided with a board on which electronic components such as a ROM for storing image data such as symbols, various background images, characters, characters, etc., and a CPU for controlling a display device for displaying various images are mounted. It has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2006-116667 (FIG. 2)). By the way, some of the various boards provided in the gaming machine are housed in a board box, and therefore, it is necessary to perform an operation for housing the board in the board box, and improvement in work efficiency has been demanded.

[How to install the flexible flat cable]
Next, a flexible flat cable connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 242 is a front perspective view of the flexible flat cable, and FIG. 243 is a diagram (a) showing a state in which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to the connector on the back side of the effect display device. It is the figure (b) which shows the state electrically connected with the connector of an output board, It is a partial enlarged view of the B section shown in (a), and the C section shown in (b), Comprising: It is a figure (c) which shows the state electrically connected with each connector through a notch, and Drawing 244 shows the state where a flexible flat cable is not electrically connected normally with the connector on the back side of an effect display device. FIG. 4A is a diagram illustrating a state in which the flexible flat cable is not electrically connected to the connector of the liquid crystal output board normally. A. In FIG. 243 (c), the direction of the connector CN10 shown in FIG. 243 (b) is shown as being rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees.

[Shape of flexible flat cable]
The flexible flat cable LFC electrically connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting drawing data to the effect display device 1600. In addition, the plurality of flat conductors are covered with an insulator. Compared with a normal round electric wiring, the thickness (diameter) of the normal round electric wiring is one third to five. As shown in FIG. 242, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba are formed on the back side of the main body LFCa on the upper end side of the strip-shaped main body LFCa having a predetermined width and having a predetermined width. A rectangular shape having a length and being arranged to be exposed, having a predetermined thickness on the surface side of the main body LFCa, and longer than a predetermined length of the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba exposed. A reinforcing plate LFCca for reinforcing the electrode LFCba is formed, whereas a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb have a predetermined length on the back side of the main body LFCa at the lower end side of the main body LFCa. A reinforcing plate LFCcb for reinforcing the electrode LFCbb having a predetermined thickness on the surface side of the main body LFCa and having a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the exposed flat conductor electrode LFCbb is disposed on the surface LFCa. Is formed.

  A plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa are connectors 1600ca of a control board 1600c provided on a metal back cover 1600b covering the upper side of the back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 243). A plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa are connected to the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. It is electrically connected to the connector CN10 provided for.

  The flexible flat cable LFC is formed by being bent 90 degrees to the left at a portion having a predetermined distance in the vertical direction from the upper end of the main body LFCa so as to have a straight bent portion LFCd that rises to the right (the predetermined distance in the vertical direction is A distance dimension from the upper end of the main body LFCa to the center point of the straight line going up to the right), and a predetermined distance dimension in the left-right direction from the bent portion LFCd (the center point of the straight line going up to the right) In this case, a bent portion LFCe that is smoothly bent in the front direction and smoothly bent in the right direction is formed so as to be parallel in the front-rear direction (depth direction). ing.

[How to attach the flexible flat cable to the production display device]
A plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are, as shown in FIG. 243 (a), a control substrate 1600c that covers the upper back side of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. The connector 1600ca is electrically connected. The control board 1600c restores the drawing data transmitted from the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 and displays various images on the liquid crystal panel 1600a and the LEDs (which constitute the backlight of the liquid crystal panel 1600a). Alternatively, various electronic components for adjusting the brightness of the cold cathode fluorescent lamp are mounted.

  Since the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not normally inserted deep into the connector 1600ca, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba and the plurality of flat conductors In some cases, contact failure may occur between the electrode LFCba and the corresponding electrode of the connector 1600ca, and a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are connected to the connector 1600ca. Is inserted obliquely with respect to one electrode LFCba of the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba, the electrode of the connector 1600ca corresponding to this one electrode LFCba, and another electrode adjacent to this electrode, The control board 1600c. There is a case where various electronic components mounted on the control substrate 1600c is damaged.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally provided on the connector 1600ca on the back surface side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600. In the vicinity of the left side of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the left side of the vicinity of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) so as to be a mark for insertion. A long solid line guide line G1L extending linearly in the vertical direction and the right vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) (Right outside) straight up and down And Bill long solid guidelines G1R, are engraved. The guide lines G1L and G1R are stamped in a pressing process of the metal back cover 1600b with a press.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally provided on the connector 1600ca on the back side of the metal back lid 1600b in the effect display device 1600. After the insertion, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are disconnected from the connector 1600ca, or a plurality of electrodes formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are formed. In order to prevent short-circuiting between the flat conductor electrode LFCba and the electrode of the connector 1600ca corresponding to each electrode LFCba in contact with other adjacent electrodes, the flexible flat cable LFC is made of a metal back. Fix to the back side of the lid 1600b Bracket (“) -shaped guide lines G2 are engraved as areas where the fixed seal SFC having a long rectangular shape in the right direction is pasted at positions slightly away from the positions corresponding to the four corners of the fixed seal SFC. These four square bracket (") -shaped guidelines G2, G2, G2, and G2 are stamped in the press working process of the metal back cover 1600b with a press machine. The flexible flat cable LFC is fixedly sealed. The posture of the flexible flat cable LFC can be fixed by being fixed to the back side of the metal back lid 1600b by SFC.

[How to attach the flexible flat cable to the LCD output board]
A plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 as shown in FIG. Electrically connected. In addition to the connector CN10, the liquid crystal output board 1530 is mounted with the connectors CN8 and CN9 described above and a special connector SCN4 for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 to the board. The special connector SCN4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into and electrically connected to the special connector SCN2 of the peripheral control board 1510 described above, so that the display of the effect display device from the peripheral control board 1510 is performed as described above. Drawing data of an image to be drawn on the apparatus is input to the liquid crystal output board 1530 via the special connector SCN2 from the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the flexible flat cable from the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530. LFC is input to the control board 1600c via the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c that covers the upper surface of the back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600.

  A plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not normally inserted to the back of the connector CN10, so that a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb and a plurality of flat conductors In some cases, contact failure may occur between the electrode LFCbb and the corresponding electrode of the connector CN10, and a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are connected to the connector CN10. Is inserted obliquely with respect to one electrode LFCbb of the flat conductor electrode LFCbb, the electrode of the connector CN10 corresponding to this one electrode LFCbb, and another electrode adjacent to this electrode, Are short-circuited by contact with the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, respectively. There is a case where various electronic components mounted around the control board 1510 which is electrically connected may be damaged.

  Accordingly, in the present embodiment, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally inserted into the connector CN10 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Left and right in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the upper and outer sides in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). A long solid line guide line G3U extending in a straight line and the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the lower side of the vicinity corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ) Long solid line extending straight in the left-right direction And guidelines G3L, but it has been printed by the silk-screen printing.

  In the present embodiment, no through hole is formed in the region where the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC is disposed. This is because even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC is exposed by rubbing the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC with the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the flat surface of the exposed flexible flat cable LFC. This is to prevent the mold conductor from being short-circuited by the through hole.

[Relationship between flexible flat cable reinforcing plate and connector]
When inserting a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC into the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c covering the upper surface of the back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600, The electrode LFCba of the mold conductor faces the electrode of the connector 1600ca and is on the back side of the flexible flat cable LFC, whereas the reinforcing plate LFCca for reinforcing the electrode LFCba is on the surface side of the flexible flat cable LFC. Become. As a result, the electrodes LFCba of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC normally reach the back of the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c that covers the upper side of the back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. In the inserted state, as shown in FIG. 243 (c), the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca and the lower end side of the connector 1600ca are arranged so as to coincide with each other in the front-rear direction. Note that a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not inserted to the back of the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c that covers the upper side of the back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. That is, when the pushing amount is insufficient, the peripheral portion of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca for reinforcing the electrode LFCba is exposed from the connector 1600ca.

  In addition, when inserting the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the flat conductor The electrode LFCbb is in the direction facing the electrode of the connector CN10 and is on the back side of the flexible flat cable LFC, whereas the reinforcing plate LFCcb for reinforcing the electrode LFCbb is on the surface side of the flexible flat cable LFC. Thereby, the state in which the electrodes LFCbb of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally inserted to the back of the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 Then, as shown in FIG. 243 (c), the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb and the lower end side of the connector CN10 are arranged in a positional relationship that coincides with each other in the front-rear direction. It should be noted that a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not inserted to the back of the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, that is, the pushing amount Is insufficient, the peripheral portion of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb for reinforcing the electrode LFCbb is exposed from the connector CN10.

[The flexible flat cable is not properly connected]
A plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not normally inserted to the back of the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c that covers the upper back side of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. 244 (a), the left end side of the main body LFCa cannot be seen over the guideline G1L extending linearly in the vertical direction, and the right end side of the main body LFCa is not visible. In addition to being inclined with respect to the guide line G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction, the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca for reinforcing the electrode LFCba is inclined with respect to the lower end side of the connector 1600ba, and the electrode LFCba Part of the reinforcing plate LFCca to reinforce the connector In a state of being exposed from 600ba. As described above, the guide lines G1L and G1R and the reinforcing plate LFCca allow the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC to be connected to the upper back side of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. It can be easily determined visually whether or not the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c to be covered has been normally inserted. Thereby, in the assembly line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine, the operator can connect the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC to the upper back side of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. When the electrode is inserted into the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c that covers the connector 1600ca, it can be easily determined visually whether or not the electrode LFCba is normally inserted to the back of the connector 1600ca. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the efficiency of confirmation work.

  In addition, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not inserted normally to the back of the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and are obliquely inserted. As shown in FIG. 244 (b), the upper end side of the main body LFCa cannot be seen covering the guide line G3U extending linearly in the left-right direction, and the lower end side of the main body LFCa is left-right as shown in FIG. The left end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb for reinforcing the electrode LFCbb (the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb in FIG. 243 (c)) is inclined to the guide line G3L extending linearly at the left end of the connector CN10. The electrode LF is inclined with respect to the side (the lower end side of the connector CN10 in FIG. 243 (c)). Some of the reinforcing plate LFCcb for reinforcing the bb is in a state of being exposed from the connector CN10. As described above, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 by the guidelines G3U and G3L and the reinforcing plate LFCcb. It can be easily determined visually whether or not the connector CN10 provided is inserted normally. As a result, in the assembly line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine, the operator attaches a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC to the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. It is possible to easily determine visually whether or not the electrode LFCbb is normally inserted to the back of the connector CN10. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the efficiency of confirmation work.

[Modification]
In the above-described embodiment, the left and right directions in the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the upper and outer sides in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). A long solid line guide line G3U extending in a straight line and the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the lower outer side in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ), A long solid line guide line G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction was printed by silk printing, but the rectangular area with the guide line G3U as the upper side and the guide line G3L as the lower side was solid-printed by silk printing. It may be. Even in this configuration, the upper side of the solid rectangular region functions as the guide line G3U, and the lower side of the solid rectangular region functions as the guide line G3L. Further, even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC is exposed by rubbing the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC with the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed. The copper printing of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 covered with the resist is prevented by preventing the resist from being peeled off by removing the silk printing in the rectangular region 1530x solidly coated. In addition, it is possible to prevent the exposed flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC from being short-circuited.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the left and right directions in the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the upper and outer sides in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). A long solid line guide line G3U extending in a straight line and the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the lower side of the vicinity corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ), A long solid line guide line G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction is printed by silk printing, but the liquid crystal corresponding to the rectangular area with the guide line G3U on the upper side and the guide line G3L on the lower side and the area The surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the output substrate 1530 It may be formed foil vent region in foil surface. Even with this configuration, the upper side of the foil-extracted rectangular area can function as the guide line G3U, and the lower side of the foil-extracted rectangular area can function as the guide line G3L. Further, even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC is exposed by rubbing the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC with the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed. Even if the 1530x resist is peeled off, the copper foil surface does not exist in the first place, that is, only the non-conductive base material of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed, so that the exposed flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC is short-circuited. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the left and right directions in the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the upper and outer sides in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). A long solid line guide line G3U extending in a straight line and the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the lower side of the vicinity corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ) And a long solid line guide line G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction were printed by silk printing. Guidelines G3U and G3L may be formed by pulling out, or liquid crystal Power board 1530 of a surface (mounting surface) guidelines by not applying a partial region of a resist solution in the case of applying the resist solution on the copper foil surface of 1530x G3U, it may be G3L is formed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally inserted into the connector CN10 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. After that, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are disconnected from the connector CN10, or the plurality of flat conductor electrodes formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. In order to prevent short-circuiting between the electrode LFCbb of the type conductor and the electrode of the connector CN10 corresponding to each electrode LFCbb and other electrodes adjacent to each other, the flexible flat cable LFC is connected to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Fix to surface (mounting surface) 1530x It may be adhered to the fixed seal having a rectangular shape elongated in the downward direction. In this case, as a region where the fixed seal is applied to the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, for example, a bracket (“) is provided at a position slightly away from the position corresponding to the four corners of the fixed seal. The shape guidelines (which may be lines, symbols, etc.) may be printed by silk printing, respectively, or a part of the region on the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 By removing the copper foil, a guideline in brackets (") (may be a figure such as a line or a symbol) may be formed, or a resist may be formed on the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. When applying the liquid, a guideline in brackets (“) (may be a figure such as a line or a symbol) may be formed by not applying a part of the region with the resist liquid. By flat cable LFC is fixed to the surface (mounting surface) 1530x LCD output board 1530 by fixing the seal, it is possible to fix the orientation of the flexible flat cable LFC.

  In the above-described embodiment, the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c that covers the upper surface of the back side of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected using the flexible flat cable LFC. However, in the case where a substrate is provided on a movable body that operates by driving electric drive electricity, a flexible flat cable is used as an electrical wiring for electrically connecting the substrate and the drive substrate. Also good. Since a load is applied to the movable body due to the electrical wiring accompanying the operation of the movable body, this load may be so large that it cannot be ignored. Therefore, by using a flexible flat cable instead of a wiring or a harness as electrical wiring, the load on the movable body due to the operation of the movable body is suppressed, thereby overloading the electric drive source. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the left and right directions in the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the upper and outer sides in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). A long solid line guide line G3U extending in a straight line and a lower vicinity of a position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, a lower outer side in the vicinity of a position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ) And a long solid line guide line G3L extending in a straight line in the left-right direction is printed by silk printing, so that an operator can connect the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC to the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer. Multiple flat conductor electrodes formed When FCbb was inserted into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, it could be easily determined visually whether or not the electrode LFCbb was normally inserted deep into the connector CN10. However, for example, the standby position (original position) of the movable body is set on the substrate in the vicinity of the standby position (original position) of the movable body to indicate the standby position (original position) of the movable body that is operated by driving of the electric drive power. Graphics such as lines and symbols shown may be printed by silk printing. In this way, when an attendant such as a game hall clerk inspects the pachinko machine, the mark is used when the movable body is manually moved to the standby position (original position) without turning on the power of the pachinko machine. It can be. In addition, even when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on, it can be used to determine whether or not the movable body is deviated from the standby position (original position). You can also.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the vertical direction in the left vicinity of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, in the vicinity of the left outer side of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). A long solid line guide line G1L extending in a straight line and the right vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the right outer side of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ) And a long solid line guide line G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction are formed on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600 and correspond to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. Near the top (ie flexible A long solid line guide line G3U extending linearly in the left-right direction on the upper side of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the rat cable LFC and a lower side of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC In other words, the long solid line guide line G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 (in the vicinity of the lower side near the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). Instead of this, a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line may be used, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction may be used.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the vertical direction in the left vicinity of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, in the vicinity of the left outer side of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). A long solid line guide line G1L extending in a straight line and the right vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the right outer side of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ) And a long solid line guide line G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction are formed on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600, and correspond to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. Near the right of the position (ie flexible A long solid line guide line G1L extending linearly in the vertical direction on the right side of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the rat cable LFC, and the left vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC In other words, a long solid line guide line G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction on the left side in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC is the back surface of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600. It may be formed on the side. In this case, instead of a solid line, a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line may be used, or an arrow line indicating an insertion direction may be used. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the left and right directions in the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the upper and outer sides in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). A long solid line guide line G3U extending in a straight line and the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the lower outer side in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ) And a long solid line guide line G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction are formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, but below the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the flexible flat cable LFCa). Cable LFC body LFCa A long solid line guide line G3U extending linearly in the left-right direction on the lower side in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side and the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the flexible flat cable LFC) A long solid line guide line G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction may be formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 on the upper side in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa. In this case, instead of a solid line, a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line may be used, or an arrow line indicating an insertion direction may be used.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the left and right vicinity of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the left and right vicinity of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) A long solid line guide line G1L extending in a straight line and the right vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the right outer side of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ) And a long solid line guide line G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction are formed on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600, and correspond to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. Long, linearly extending in the vertical direction A line guide line G1L and a long solid line guide line G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction at a position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600. It may be formed. That is, the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the guide line G1L are aligned in the front-rear direction, and the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the guide line G1R are aligned in the front-rear direction. And overlapped with each other. In this case, instead of a solid line, a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line may be used, or an arrow line indicating an insertion direction may be used. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the left and right directions in the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the upper and outer vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). A long solid line guide line G3U extending in a straight line and the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the lower outer side in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ) And a long solid line guide line G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction are formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, but extend linearly in the left-right direction at a position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. Long solid line guideline G3U and flexi And long solid guidelines G3L extending linearly in the lateral direction at a position corresponding to Le flat cable LFC body LFCa the lower side, but may be formed on the liquid crystal driving substrate 1530. That is, the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the guide line G3U are aligned in the front-rear direction and overlapped, and the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the guide line G3L are aligned in the front-rear direction. And overlapped with each other. In this case, instead of a solid line, a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line may be used, or an arrow line indicating an insertion direction may be used.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c in which the electrodes LFCba of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC cover the upper back side of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. As shown in FIG. 243 (c), the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca and the lower end side of the connector 1600ca are arranged so as to overlap with each other in the front-rear direction. Accordingly, the distance dimension between the upper end side and the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca is the same as the length (insertion length) in which the electrode LFCba is normally inserted to the back of the connector 1600ca. In addition, in a state where a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally inserted to the back of the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 As shown in FIG. 243 (c), the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb and the lower end side of the connector CN10 are arranged so as to coincide with each other in the front-rear direction, thereby overlapping the upper end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb. The distance dimension between the lower end side and the electrode LFCbb was the same as the length (insertion length) in which the electrode LFCbb was normally inserted to the back of the connector CN10.

  Thus, in the above-described embodiment, the distance dimension between the upper end side and the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca is the same as the length (insertion length) in which the electrode LFCba is normally inserted to the back of the connector 1600ca. When the distance between the upper end and the lower end of the reinforcing plate LFCca is longer than the length (insertion length) in which the electrode LFCba is normally inserted to the back of the connector 1600ca, in other words, the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. In the state where the electrodes LFCba of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the LCD panel 1600 are normally inserted to the back of the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c that covers the upper back side of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600, the reinforcing plate LFCca The lower end side and the lower end side of the connector 1600ca do not match the front-rear direction and the reinforcing plate LF In the case where the lower end side of the ca is arranged in a positional relationship that is spaced apart in parallel from the lower end side of the connector 1600ca, the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca and the lower end side of the connector 1600ca are separated, so that the electrode LFCba is It becomes difficult to determine whether or not the connector 1600ca has been normally inserted to the back using the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca and the lower end side of the connector 1600ca. Similarly, the distance dimension between the upper end side and the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb is the same as the length (insertion length) in which the electrode LFCbb is normally inserted to the back of the connector CN10, but the upper end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb. When the electrode LFCbb is longer than the length (insertion length) in which the electrode LFCbb is normally inserted to the back of the connector CN10, in other words, it is formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. In a state where a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb are normally inserted to the back of the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb, the lower end side of the connector CN10, Is not aligned in the front-rear direction, and the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb is arranged in a positional relationship in which the lower end side of the connector CN10 is spaced in parallel. In this case, the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb and the lower end side of the connector CN10 are separated from each other to determine whether or not the electrode LFCbb has been normally inserted to the back of the connector CN10 with the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb. It becomes difficult to make a determination using the lower end side of the connector CN10.

  Therefore, in such a case, as a guideline indicating the position of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca in a state where the electrode LFCba is normally inserted to the back of the connector 1600ca, it is on the extension line of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca. A solid line extending linearly in the left direction to the left vicinity of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity of the left side of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) Instead of a solid line, a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line may be used, or an arrow line indicating the position of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca may be used. The guideline G1L ′ (this guideline G1L ′ is described above). It may intersect with the guideline G1L, or it may be an L-shape formed integrally with the above-mentioned guideline G1L. And a straight line in the right direction near the right side of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the right side of the vicinity of the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). Guideline G1R ′ (this guideline G1R) that extends in a solid line (instead of the solid line, it may be a one-dot chain line, a two-dot chain line, or an arrow line indicating the position of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca) 'May intersect with the above-mentioned guideline G1R, or may be L-shaped integrally formed with the above-described guideline G1R.) Is stamped on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600 It is preferable that

  Further, as a guideline indicating the position of the lower end side of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb in a state where the electrode LFCbb is normally inserted to the back of the connector CN10, the flexible flat cable is on the extension line of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb. A solid line (instead of the solid line) extending linearly upward in the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the LFC (that is, the vicinity of the upper side of the flexible flat cable LFC corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa). , May be a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line, or may be an arrow line indicating the position of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb.) Alternatively, it may be L-shaped integrally formed with the above-mentioned guideline G3U. A rectangular shape having a distance dimension in the vertical direction of the drain line G3U ′ and a distance dimension in the horizontal direction of the guideline G3U described above (the inside may be solid-printed by silk printing), and flexible. A solid line (indicated by a solid line) that extends downward linearly to a lower vicinity of a position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flat cable LFC (that is, a lower outer side near a position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). Instead, it may be a one-dot chain line, a two-dot chain line, or an arrow line indicating the position of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb.) Guideline G3L ′ (this guideline G3L ′ is the guideline G3L described above) Or the L-shape formed integrally with the above-described guideline G3L. A rectangular shape having a distance dimension in the vertical direction of the in-G3L ′ and a distance dimension in the left-right direction of the above-described guideline G3L (the inside may be solid-printed by silk printing) may be used. It is preferable that the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is printed by silk printing.

  In place of silk printing, the guide lines G3U ′ and G3L ′ are obtained by removing a part of the copper foil on the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 as in the modification described above. When the resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, guide lines G3U ′ and G3L ′ are formed by not applying a part of the region with the resist solution. May be. Further, as in the above-described modification, the copper foil in a part of the copper foil surface of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 (mounting surface) 1530x is removed, and the distance in the vertical direction of the guideline G3L ′ and the above-described guideline G3L. By forming a rectangular shape having a distance dimension in the horizontal direction (the copper foil inside the rectangular shape may be removed), the guide lines G3U and G3L and the guide lines G3U ′ and G3L ′ are formed. May be.

[Connector connection method]
Next, connection is made to a relay board that relays various wirings to the peripheral control board 1510, a relay board that relays various wirings to the main control board 1310, and a connector provided on the relay board that relays various wirings to the payout control board 633. Wiring and harness connectors will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 245 is a diagram (a) showing the arrangement of the connectors on the relay board, and is a diagram (b) showing a state in which the wiring and harness connectors are normally connected to the connectors on the relay board. It is a figure (c) which shows the state where the connector of wiring and a harness is not normally connected with respect to.

  By the way, if the wiring or harness connector is not properly inserted into the connector on the relay board, contact failure may occur between the electrodes of the connector, and the wiring or harness connector may be inclined with respect to the connector on the relay board. In some cases, adjacent electrodes of the connector come into contact with each other to cause a short circuit and damage various electronic components mounted on the relay board and various control boards electrically connected to the relay board.

  In the present embodiment, the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay substrate KD is provided with a socket-side connector SCK into which a plug PLG on the plug side of the wiring or harness KDCBL is inserted, as shown in FIG. Yes. The socket-side connector SCK is of a right angle type (also referred to as “side type”), and has a box shape in which an opening SCKb is formed with respect to the lower surface SCKaa of the main body SCKa having a long rectangular shape in the left-right direction. Is formed. Plug portion PLGa of connector PLG is inserted into opening SCKb. The lower side surface SCKaa in which the opening of the socket-side connector SCK is formed has a predetermined distance dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay substrate KD and is disposed on the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay substrate KD. The plug-side connector PLG has a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction and a size smaller than the opening SCKb with respect to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb having the same distance dimension as the distance dimension in the left-right direction of the main body SCKa. A plug portion PLGa having a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction is integrally formed. Note that the lower side surface SCKaa in which the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK is formed has a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay substrate KD, as described above, and the surface (mounting surface) of the relay substrate KD. In this embodiment, the distance dimension (thickness) dcw in the vertical direction of the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG is set as the predetermined distance dimension dw1.

  When the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is normally inserted to the back of the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, the entire upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa is the connector on the socket side. The surface is brought into contact with the lower surface SCKaa where the opening SCKb of the SCK is formed. In this state, as shown in FIG. 245 (b), the surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG (that is, the main body of the plug-side connector PLG). The lower side surface PLGbb) of PLGb and the lower end side KDeg of the relay substrate KD (that is, the substrate end of the relay substrate KD) are arranged in a positional relationship that overlaps in the front-rear direction.

  As described above, the socket-side connector SCK is arranged with the vertical distance dimension (thickness) dcw of the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG as the predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD. Therefore, when the plug part PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is normally inserted to the back of the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, the main body is formed integrally with the plug part PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG. The surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba of PLGb (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG) and the lower end side KDeg of the relay substrate KD (that is, the substrate end of the relay substrate KD) It will be arranged in a positional relationship that overlaps with. Thereby, in the assembly line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine, when the operator normally inserts the plug part PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG to the back of the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, The surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG) and the lower end side of the relay substrate KD The plug part PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is connected to the opening of the socket-side connector SCK by touching the KDeg (that is, the board end of the relay board KD) with the hand touching the KDeg. It can be easily determined whether or not it is normally inserted to the back of SCKb. When a pachinko machine is inspected by a pachinko machine, the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is opened to the socket-side connector SCK by touching the hand that the pachinko machine is arranged on the same plane as described above. It can be easily determined whether or not the part SCKb has been inserted normally. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the efficiency of confirmation work.

  In the state where the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is inserted obliquely without being normally inserted all the way into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, as shown in FIG. 245 (c), The surface opposite to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG (that is, the lower side surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG) is the lower end side KDeg of the relay substrate KD (that is, , And the protruding amount dSP from the substrate end of the relay substrate KD. As a result, an operator in the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer or a clerk of the game hall who performs inspection work of the pachinko machine, the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG is connected to the lower end of the relay board KD by the amount of protrusion dSP. By projecting from the side KDeg, the surface opposite to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG on the finger of an operator or a clerk of the game hall, etc. By the tactile sensation that there is a step by touching the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG and the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD (that is, the board end of the relay board KD). The plug part PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is normally inserted to the back of the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK. It is possible to easily determine that you are not.

[Modification]
In the embodiment described above, the socket-side connector SCK has a distance dimension (thickness) dcw in the vertical direction of the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG as a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD. The plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG in a state where the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is normally inserted to the back of the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK. The surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG) and the lower end side KDeg of the relay substrate KD (that is, the substrate end of the relay substrate KD) The components of the connector SCK on the socket side were arranged so as to coincide with each other and overlap. The component placement line indicating the position is printed by silk printing with a solid line larger than the outer shape of the socket-side connector SCK, and the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is normal to the back of the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK. In the state of being inserted into the plug-side connector PLG, the surface on the opposite side to the upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG) The lower side of the component arrangement line indicating the component position of the socket-side connector SCK may be arranged so as to match. FIG. 246 is a modified example of FIG. 245, and is a diagram (a) showing the arrangement of the connector on the relay board and the part arrangement line, and the wiring and the harness connector are normally connected to the connector on the relay board. It is a figure (b) which shows a state, and is a figure (c) which shows the state where the connector of wiring and a harness is not connected normally to the connector of a relay board.

  For example, on the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay substrate KD, as shown in FIG. 246 (a), a socket-side connector SCK into which a plug or connector PLG on the plug side of the wiring or harness KDCBL is inserted. The socket-side connector SCK is formed in a box shape in which an opening SCKb is formed with respect to the lower surface SCKaa of the main body SCKa having a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction. Plug portion PLGa of connector PLG is inserted into opening SCKb. The lower side surface SCKaa in which the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK is formed has a first distance dimension dw2 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD (for example, the socket-side connector SCK shown in FIG. The surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay substrate KD having a distance dimension of about twice as long as the predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of KD and at least 5 mm. Is arranged.

  The reason why the lower side surface SCKaa where the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed is separated from the lower end side KDeg of the relay substrate KD by the first distance dimension dw2 will be briefly described. When mounting components or flowing the board to the solder bath, it is necessary to form a so-called “throwing board (non-electronic component mountable range)”, and from 3 mm to 5 mm inward from each edge of the board. An electronic component cannot be mounted over the entire range (a range extending from each edge of the substrate to its periphery). When mounting electronic components without forming this waste plate (that is, when mounting electronic components in the range from each edge of the board to its periphery), gripping jigs for fixing the board and board warpage prevention Although it is necessary to use a jig, in this case as well, in the area of the substrate held by the gripping jig or the substrate warpage prevention jig, an electronic component cannot be arranged about 5 mm inward from the edge of the substrate. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the socket-side connector SCK shown in FIG. 245 (a) has a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD as the first distance dimension dw2 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD. Thus, the distance dimension is about twice as large as at least 5 mm. Thus, when the plug part PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is normally inserted to the back of the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug part PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG The surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG) is disposed above the lower end side KDeg of the relay substrate KD, so that it is disposed inside the relay substrate KD. Will be.

  Around the socket-side connector SCK, a rectangular component placement line DSLK indicating the position of the socket-side connector SCK, at least a lower surface SCKaa in which an opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK is formed, and the socket The lower side DSLKeg of the component placement line DSLK of the connector SCK on the side has the second distance dimension dw3 and is printed on the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay substrate KD by silk printing. The plug-side connector PLG has a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction and a size smaller than the opening SCKb with respect to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb having the same distance dimension as the distance dimension in the left-right direction of the main body SCKa. A plug portion PLGa having a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction is integrally formed. As described above, the rectangular component placement line DSLK indicating the component position of the socket-side connector SCK and at least the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK are formed around the socket-side connector SCK. The lower side SCKaa and the lower side DSLKeg of the component placement line DSLK of the socket-side connector SCK have a second distance dimension dw3 and are printed on the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay substrate KD by silk printing. In this embodiment, the second distance dimension dw3 is a distance dimension in which the socket-side connector SCK shown in FIG. 245 (a) is arranged with a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD. The same distance dimension (that is, the distance dimension (thickness) dc in the vertical direction of the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG) Has become).

  When the plug part PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is normally inserted to the back of the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, the entire upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug part PLGa is the connector on the socket side. The surface is brought into contact with the lower surface SCKaa of the opening SCKb of the SCK. In this state, as shown in FIG. 246 (b), the surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG (that is, the main body of the plug-side connector PLG). The lower side PLGbb) of PLGb and the lower side DSLKeg of the component placement line DSLK of the connector SCK on the socket side are arranged to coincide with each other. As a result, an operator in an assembly line of a pachinko machine manufacturer or a clerk of a game hall who performs inspection work of the pachinko machine, the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is inserted into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK. It can be easily determined visually whether or not it is normally inserted to the back. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the efficiency of confirmation work.

  In the state where the plug part PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is inserted obliquely without being normally inserted all the way into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, as shown in FIG. 246 (c), The surface on the opposite side of the upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG) is the component placement line of the connector SCK on the socket side The arrangement is such that it protrudes from the lower side of the DSLK with a protrusion amount dSP. As a result, an operator in the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer or a clerk of the game hall who performs inspection work of the pachinko machine, the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG of the part placement line DSLK is equivalent to the protrusion amount dSP. By projecting from the lower side DSLKeg, it can be easily determined visually that the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is not normally inserted to the back of the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK.

  By the way, various types such as a main control board that performs control related to game progress and game profit, a sub-control board that performs control related to effects executed as the game progresses, and an image control board that performs display control of an image display device, etc. A gaming machine in which the board is arranged on the back side has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2). There are connectors provided on the board, in which wires are inserted and removed, and connectors in which one end is electrically connected to the wires are inserted and removed. In this connection work, it was necessary to perform electrical confirmation of the connector, which took time.

[Wiring groove]
In this embodiment, when the game board 5 is viewed from the front side with the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4, the left side rear surface of the game board 5 is paid out with a predetermined distance as described above. A back plate left portion 551e in the payout base 551 of the base unit 550 is disposed. A ball guiding unit 570 attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e is disposed on the upper left side of the game board 5, and attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e on the center side of the left side of the game board 5. The payout device 580 is disposed, and an upper full ball path unit 600 attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e is disposed below the left rear surface of the game board 5.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the left side back portion 551e of the game board 5 is spaced apart from the rear side of the left side of the left side of the game board 5 by a predetermined distance, so A space is formed. In this space, as shown in FIG. 110 and FIG. 113, a plurality of protective cover bodies 1601 formed of a non-conductive transparent resin covering except for the display area of the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5 are provided. The formed L-shaped wiring processing piece 1601a is disposed along the vertical direction of the protective cover body 1601, and various wirings are locked by the L-shaped wiring processing piece 1601a.

  The game balls B are ground in the island facility of the game hall or rub against each other in the circulation between the island facility and the pachinko machine 1 and are charged and discharged electrostatically, thereby releasing electromagnetic noise. For this reason, static electricity tends to accumulate in and around the area where the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full ball path unit 600 can be retained. .

  That is, since the ball guidance unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full ball path unit 600 are attached to the back surface of the back plate left portion 551e, the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5 The formed space (hereinafter referred to as “wiring routing space”) is in an environment that is susceptible to electromagnetic noise from electrostatic discharge from the game ball B.

  Examples of the various electric wires routed in the wiring routing space include a wiring for transmitting a control signal and a wiring for supplying various power sources, and a plurality of various electric wires are mixed in the wiring routing space. The wiring that transmits the control signal is vulnerable to noise and is troubled by electromagnetic noise (for example, normal data changes to other data and becomes garbled, or is output even though it is not originally output) However, the wiring for supplying various power supplies is resistant to noise and hardly affected by electromagnetic noise.

  Then, among the various wirings routed in the wiring routing space, it is necessary to take countermeasures against electromagnetic noise that can avoid trouble due to electromagnetic noise for wiring that transmits control signals that are susceptible to electromagnetic noise. On the other hand, wiring for supplying various power sources that are not easily affected by electromagnetic noise does not need to take countermeasures against electromagnetic noise.

  Therefore, a configuration in which wiring grooves for routing various wirings are provided on the left back surface of the game board 5 (hereinafter referred to as “wiring grooves according to the first and second embodiments”) will be described with reference to FIGS. 247 to 252. To do. FIG. 247 is a partial perspective view of the gaming board for explaining the area where the wiring groove is attached as seen from the rear, and FIG. 247 shows the state where the wiring groove according to the first embodiment is mounted on the back side of the gaming board. FIG. 248 is a continuation of FIG. 247 and is a diagram (c) showing a state in which the wiring groove according to the second embodiment is mounted on the back side of the game board, and FIG. 249 according to the first embodiment. FIG. 250 is a perspective view showing various wiring states when the wiring groove is mounted on the back side of the game board and the game board is viewed from the back, and FIG. 250 is a diagram illustrating the wiring groove according to the first embodiment. FIG. 251 is a perspective view showing various wiring states when the game board is viewed from the front side when mounted on the back side of the game board, and FIG. 251 shows the wiring grooves according to the second embodiment mounted on the back side of the game board. State of various wiring when the game board is viewed from behind FIG. 252 is a perspective view showing a state of various wirings when the wiring board according to the second embodiment is mounted on the back side of the game board and the game board is viewed from the front. . In FIG. 247 (b) and FIG. 248 (c), only the flexible flat cable is shown as the wiring routed to the wiring grooves for the first and second electromagnetic wave noise countermeasures for ease of drawing, and other various wirings are omitted. . In FIGS. 249 to 252, the game board is omitted for the sake of easy viewing.

[Area to install wiring groove]
In the above-described embodiment, when the game board 5 is viewed from the front side with the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4, the left side of the back plate that is spaced apart from the rear left side of the game board 5 by a predetermined distance is left. A space is formed between the left rear surface of the game board 5 and the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e by the portion 551e. In this space, various wirings that are locked to an L-shaped wiring processing piece 1601a formed on the protective cover body 1601 that covers various wirings except for the display area of the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5 are protective cover bodies. It is arranged along the vertical direction of 1601. In the wiring groove according to the first and second embodiments, as shown in FIG. 247 (a), a mounting boss hole is formed in the protective cover body 1601 instead of the L-shaped wiring processing piece 1601a formed in the protective cover body 1601. Two 1601d are formed on the upper side and two on the lower side.

[Wiring groove according to the first embodiment]
As shown in FIGS. 247 (b), 249, and 250, the wiring groove according to the first embodiment is a metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity, and is a thin metal flat plate (plate thickness 2) that is long in the vertical direction. (0 mm to 2.6 mm), the left and right sides of the groove 1605 a having a U-shaped cross section are formed by bending by pressing, and the left and right walls of the groove 1605 a having the U-shaped cross section are L-shaped attachment pieces 1605b are formed by bending each of the upper side and the lower side by pressing. An L-shaped attachment piece 1605b is formed on the upper and lower sides of the left side wall of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section by press working, so that a notch 1605c is formed at a portion corresponding to the L-shaped attachment piece 1605b. Are formed, and L-shaped attachment pieces 1605b are respectively formed by pressing on the upper and lower sides of the right side wall of the groove 1605a having a U-shaped cross section. Cutout portions 1605c are formed in the corresponding portions. Note that a notch hole 1605bb is formed by pressing at the tip of the mounting surface 1605ba of the L-shaped mounting piece 1605b.

  The metal wiring groove 1605 is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) via a wiring (not shown), and is the same ground (GND) as the grounds (substrate ground (GND)) of various substrates included in the game board 5. ). This is so that the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 does not float electrically with respect to the various boards provided in the game board 5. In other words, the electrically floating metal functions as an antenna that picks up noise and may become a noise source, so that the electrically floating metal is not made on various boards included in the game board 5. .

  The notch holes 1605bb formed in the mounting surface 1605ba of the four L-shaped mounting pieces 1605b in the metal wiring groove 1605 are respectively arranged so as to correspond to the four mounting boss holes 1601d formed in the protective cover body 1601. After the mounting boss hole 1601d is inserted into the notch hole 1605bb (the height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) of the mounting boss hole 1601d is the same or smaller than the plate thickness dimension of the notch hole 1605bb). In a state where a metal pan screw (not shown) is screwed and fixed from the notch hole 1605bb toward the mounting boss hole 1601d, the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605 are formed. A space outside the groove is formed between the bottom surface 1605d and the bottom surface. When the game board 5 with the metal wiring groove 1605 fixed is mounted on the main body frame 4, the opening side of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section in the metal wiring groove 1605 is the payout of the payout base unit 550 described above. By being sealed by the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e in the base 551, an in-groove space is formed in the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section in the metal wiring groove 1605.

  In other words, the space between the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 is formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 and the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the metal wiring groove 1605. An outer groove space can be formed between the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section and a groove inner space in the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section in the metal wiring groove 1605. It has become. That is, the groove outside space formed between the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the front surface of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605 is a space that does not face the electromagnetic noise generation source side. On the other hand, in the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section in the metal wiring groove 1605, the groove inner space is a space facing the electromagnetic noise generation source side. Note that the height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) H1 of the space outside the groove is larger than the height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) H2 of the space in the groove.

  Since the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full ball path unit 600 are attached to the back surface of the back plate left portion 551e, the back plate left portion 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5 are formed. The space where the wiring is routed, that is, the wiring routing space is susceptible to electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, but the metal wiring groove 1605 has conductivity, so that the electromagnetic noise is transmitted from the space in the groove to the groove. The metal wiring groove 1605 can function as a shield member that can prevent entry into the outer space.

  As a result, it is possible to avoid troubles due to electromagnetic noise by routing the wiring that transmits the control signal that is easily affected by electromagnetic noise to the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605, and to reduce the influence of electromagnetic noise. Wiring for supplying various power sources that are difficult to receive can be routed to the space in the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605.

  For example, a sub-effect display device (not shown) capable of displaying a predetermined effect image is attached to the lower side of the game board 5 in addition to the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image. In this case, the flexible flat cable 1606 (FFC (Flexible Flat Cable). The flexible flat cable transmits drawing data (control signal) to a sub-effect display device (not shown) from the liquid crystal output board 1530 of the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. A plurality of flat conductors are arranged in parallel, and the plurality of flat conductors are covered with an insulator.)) Is three-dimensionally bent by repeating mountain folds and valley folds a plurality of times. The drawing data (control signal) is transmitted to a sub-effect display device (not shown). In order to prevent the trouble that the effect image displayed on the sub effect display device (not shown) is disturbed or becomes an image like a sandstorm when affected by electromagnetic noise, the metal wiring groove It is routed to the space outside the groove formed by 1605. In addition, various wirings for transmitting various control signals output from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 described above, twisted pair cables for transmitting control signals through the positive side wiring and the negative side wiring, and the peripheral control board of the peripheral control unit 1500 Various wirings through which detection signals from various sensors input to 1510 are transmitted are those in which the periphery of the conductor (single wire or stranded wire) is covered with an insulating material, and when affected by electromagnetic noise, The regular data output by the control board 1510 changes to other data and becomes garbled and is received (input) at the output destination, or output as a signal that is output even though it is not originally output. Received (input) first, or detection signals from various sensors were correctly received (input) by the peripheral control board 1510 Routed into the groove outside the space formed by the metallic wiring groove 1605 to prevent troubles. The twisted pair cable and various wirings routed in the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 are routed upward or downward along the space outside the groove.

  On the other hand, the wiring that supplies various power sources (including ground (GND)) such as + 24V, + 12V, and + 5V created by the power supply substrate 630 described above is a conductor (single wire material or stranded wire material). Is surrounded by an insulating material, and the voltages of various power sources (including ground (GND) may be included) are in a stabilized state. Even if it is affected by this, the fluctuation of the voltage due to this influence is extremely weak, and it is difficult to be affected by electromagnetic noise, so that it can be routed to the space in the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605.

  Various power supplies from the power supply board 630 are played by various power supply lines electrically connected from the above-described main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) via the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5. 5 to the metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity so that various wirings for supplying various power from the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the gaming board 5 are not arranged close to the flexible flat cable 1606. The metal wiring groove 1605 is formed by a metal wiring groove 1605 through a notch 1605c formed on the right side wall and the lower side of the left side wall of the groove part 1605a having a U-shaped cross section. The game board 5 is drawn from the upper end of the metal wiring groove 1605 by being routed upward along the space in the groove. It is routed to a variety of substrates provided.

  As described above, the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 allows the space through which the wiring passes (the space around which the wiring is routed), the space outside the groove around which the wiring for transmitting the control signal that is easily affected by the electromagnetic noise, and the electromagnetic noise to be transmitted. Since it can be configured as a two-story space divided into a groove space for routing wiring that supplies various power sources that are difficult to be affected, the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e and the game board 5 Noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B in a space (wiring routing space) formed on the left back surface can be improved.

  Here, the flexible flat cable 1606 will be described. In the flexible flat cable 1606, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting drawing data (control signals) to a sub-effect display device (not shown) are arranged in parallel, and the plurality of flat conductors are covered with an insulator. Compared with a normal round electric wiring, the liquid crystal of the peripheral control unit 1500 has a thickness that is about one third to one fifth of the thickness (diameter) of the normal round electric wiring. From the output board 1530 to a sub-effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5, a mountain fold and a valley fold are repeatedly bent a plurality of times to form a three-dimensional shape and have a predetermined width. A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1606ba having a predetermined length are arranged on the back side of the main body 1606a on the upper end side which is the left side of the strip-shaped main body 1606a which is long in the direction. The reinforcing plate 1606ca for reinforcing the electrode 1606ba having a predetermined thickness on the surface side of the 06a and having a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the exposed flat conductor electrodes 1606ba is formed. On the lower end side of the main body 1606a, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1606bb having a predetermined length are disposed on the back surface side of the main body 1606a, and a predetermined thickness is provided on the front surface side of the main body 1606a. A reinforcing plate 1606cb for reinforcing the electrode 1606bb having a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the exposed flat conductor electrodes 1606bb is formed.

  The plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1606ba formed on the upper end side of the main body 1606a are electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 described above. A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1606bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 1606a are metal backs (not shown) that cover the upper side of the liquid crystal panel (not shown) in the sub-effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5. It is electrically connected to the connector of the control board provided on the lid.

  A capacitor called a bypass capacitor such as a decoupling capacitor (not shown) or a bypass capacitor for power supply (not shown) is provided between a power supply line and a substrate ground (GND) in the liquid crystal output board 1530 to which the flexible flat cable 1606 is electrically connected. Is mounted, and the noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is improved by lowering the power supply impedance. In addition, a power line and a substrate ground (GND) on a control board provided on a metal back cover (not shown) that covers the upper side of the back surface of a liquid crystal panel (not shown) in a sub-effect display device (not shown) to which the flexible flat cable 1606 is electrically connected. A capacitor called a bypass capacitor such as a decoupling capacitor (not shown) or a power supply bypass capacitor (not shown) is mounted between them, and by reducing the power supply impedance, noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is reduced. Improved.

  A flexible flat cable 1606 electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 includes a base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and an effect display device 1600 of the game board 5 described above. The protective cover body 1601 that covers the display area except for the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 passes through the space outside the groove formed by the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 and is guided downward along the space outside the groove. Then, the control board is electrically connected to the connector of the control board provided on the metal back cover that covers the upper side of the back side of the liquid crystal panel in the sub-effect display device (not shown) by being drawn into the board holder 1200 attached to the back side of the game board 5 as it is. Is done.

  As described above, the flexible flat cable 1606 electrically connected to the connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the effect display of the game board 5. The protective cover body 1601 that covers the device 1600 except for the display area passes between the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and a space outside the groove formed by the conductive metal wiring groove 1605. In addition, as described above, in the effect display device 1600, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is covered with the metal back cover. Thereby, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is between the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 that covers the game board 5 except for the display area of the effect display device 1600. It can function as a shield member capable of preventing electromagnetic wave noise that enters the flexible flat cable 1606 in the passing area.

[Modification]
The metal wiring groove 1605 is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) via a wiring (not shown), and is the same ground as the grounds (substrate ground (GND)) of various substrates provided in the game board 5. (GND), but instead of or in addition to this, an L-shaped connecting piece presses the bottom of the groove 1605a of the metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity toward the protective cover body 1601. In addition, by providing a connection piece opening in the protective cover body 1601, the connection surface of the L-shaped connection piece passes through the connection piece opening provided in the protection cover body 1601 in the protection cover body 1601. It may be in a state of being in contact with and electrically connected to the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600. A conductive elastic member is attached to the connection surface of the L-shaped connection piece. Through the connection piece opening provided in the protective cover body 1601, the metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600 in the protective cover body 1601 and the surface of the conductive elastic member (attached to the connection surface of the L-shaped connection piece) The surface opposite to the surface) may be in contact with and electrically connected (in other words, the connection surface of the L-shaped connection piece passes through the connection piece opening provided in the protection cover body 1601). 1601 may be brought into electrical contact with the metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600 via the conductive elastic member). The conductive elastic member is a conductive member having cushioning properties (elasticity). The conductive elastic member is attached to the conductive covering portion, the foam having a rectangular shape as a core material covered with the conductive covering portion, and the conductive covering portion. A conductive adhesive tape. As a coating | coated part, the thing in which the metal film of copper and nickel is formed in the polyester woven fabric, the thing in which the conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed in a polyimide film, etc. can be mentioned, for example. Examples of the foam include a polyurethane foam having heat resistance. Examples of the conductive adhesive tape include a conductive double-sided adhesive tape using an acrylic adhesive. The surface of the conductive adhesive tape is protected by peel paper until it is used, and the peel paper is peeled off when the conductive coating portion is attached (adhered) to the connection surface of the L-shaped connection piece.

  Further, the wiring for transmitting the control signal output from the main control board 1310 described above to the function display unit 1400 attached to the upper left corner when the game board 5 is viewed from the front is provided outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605. It may be routed to the space and routed upward along the space outside the groove. In this way, it is possible to improve noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B with respect to the wiring to the function display unit 1400.

  In addition, the metal wiring groove 1605 is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) via a wiring (not shown), and is the same ground as the grounds (substrate ground (GND)) of various substrates included in the game board 5. Although it is (GND), even if the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 is in an electrically floating state with respect to various boards provided in the game board 5, it functions as an antenna for picking up noise and is a noise source. If the electromagnetic noise from the noise source is small enough to be ignored, the metal wiring groove 1605 is not electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) via a wiring (not shown). It may be in an electrically floating state.

  The conductive metal wiring groove 1605 is formed by pressing a thin metal flat plate that is long in the vertical direction, but has a non-conductive resin wiring groove 1605 having the same shape as the metal wiring groove 1605. It may be configured as'. In this case, conductive plating (for example, noble metal plating such as chrome plating or hard gold plating) is applied to the entire front and back of the resin wiring groove 1605 ′ having non-conductivity, and the conductive plating is applied. Is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) via a wiring (not shown), and is the same ground (GND) as the grounds (substrate ground (GND)) of various substrates provided in the game board 5. Even in this configuration, the non-conductive resin-made wiring groove 1605 ′ subjected to conductive plating has the same effect (that is, electromagnetic wave noise) as the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 described above. It can function as a shield member that can prevent intrusion from the space in the groove toward the space outside the groove. Even if the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1605 ′ provided with conductive plating is electrically floating with respect to various boards provided in the game board 5, it functions as an antenna for picking up noise. If there is no fear of becoming a noise source, or if electromagnetic noise from the noise source is small enough to be ignored, the conductive plating should be electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) via a wiring (not shown). Instead, it may be in an electrically floating state.

  The conductive metal wiring groove 1605 is formed by pressing a thin metal plate that is long in the vertical direction. However, the conductive resin wiring groove 1605 ′ having the same shape as the metal wiring groove 1605 is used. It may be configured as'. Even with this configuration, the conductive resin wiring groove 1605 ″ has the same effect as the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 described above (that is, electromagnetic wave noise is transferred from the groove inner space to the groove outer space. It can function as a shield member that can be prevented from entering inward.).

  The flexible flat cable 1606 has a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting control signals arranged in parallel, but the flat conductor electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) between the flat conductors. And a flat conductor that transmits a control signal and a flat conductor that is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) may be alternately arranged. If it carries out like this, the noise resistance with respect to the electromagnetic wave noise by the electrostatic discharge from the game ball B can be improved with respect to the some flat type conductor which transmits a control signal.

  Further, the flexible flat cable 1606 has a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting control signals arranged in parallel. However, the flexible flat cable 1606 is particularly sensitive to electromagnetic noise (that is, susceptible to electromagnetic noise). With respect to a flat conductor to be transmitted (hereinafter referred to as “a flat conductor that is weak against the influence of electromagnetic noise”), a substrate ground (GND) and an electric circuit are adjacent to the flat conductor that is weak against the influence of electromagnetic noise. A flat conductor that is electrically connected is arranged, and a flat conductor that is weak against the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise is arranged to be sandwiched between flat conductors that are electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND). May be. If it carries out like this, the noise resistance with respect to the electromagnetic wave noise by the electrostatic discharge from the game ball B can be improved with respect to the flat type conductor weak to the influence of electromagnetic wave noise.

  Further, the flexible flat cable 1606 has a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting the control signal arranged in parallel. In addition to the flat conductors for transmitting the control signal, the plurality of flat conductors are as follows. A configuration in which a flat conductor electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) and a flat conductor for supplying various power supplies are included, and the substrate ground (GND) and the power supply are arranged adjacent to each other. If this is the case, the power supply will rise when the temperature rises to a certain temperature. The overcurrent protection element such as a thermistor, etc. that suppresses current when the temperature rises abruptly. Overcurrent protection circuit that shuts off the circuit when the current is reached (for example, a circuit having a polyswitch as a resettable fuse. This polyswitch is based on the relationship between element resistance and element temperature. The resistance value suddenly increases from a specific temperature, and the main body generates heat. This heat lowers the conductivity and cuts off the current, and when the main body is cooled, the conductivity returns and returns.) Thus, it is preferable to give priority to what is supplied. As described above, the flexible flat cable 1606 has a thickness of about one third to one fifth of the thickness (diameter) of the normal round electric wiring as compared with the normal round electric wiring. Therefore, when an overcurrent flows through a flat conductor that supplies power, a short circuit of the flexible flat cable 1606 can be prevented by an overcurrent protection circuit or an overcurrent protection circuit to ensure safety and damage can be prevented. This is because it can be avoided.

[Wiring grooves according to the second embodiment]
As shown in FIGS. 248 (c), 251 and 252, the wiring groove according to the second embodiment is a non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608 and has a U-shaped section which is long in the vertical direction. A groove 1608a is formed, and attachment pieces 1608b projecting outward on the upper side and the lower side are formed on the left and right walls of the groove 1608a having a U-shaped cross section, and are integrally molded. The attachment surface 1608ba of the attachment piece 1608b is formed in the same plane as the bottom outer surface 1608c of the groove 1608a having a U-shaped cross section, and an attachment hole 1608bb is formed at the tip of the attachment piece 1608b. Has been. Further, when the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section is viewed from the opening side, a notch portion 1608d for wiring insertion is formed at a substantially central portion of the left side wall. The resin wiring groove 1608 may be molded from a transparent non-conductive resin, or may be molded from a colored non-conductive resin such as black. The thickness of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section of the resin wiring groove 1608 is 2.0 mm to 2.6 mm, and the height of the mounting piece 1608b of the resin wiring groove 1608 is 4.0 mm to 5.0 mm. is there.

  The mounting holes 1608bb formed in the mounting surfaces 1608ba of the four mounting pieces 1608b in the resin wiring groove 1608 are arranged so as to correspond to the four mounting boss holes 1601d formed in the protective cover body 1601, respectively, to the mounting holes 1608bb. The height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) of the mounting boss hole 1601d is smaller than the height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) of the mounting piece 1608b after each insertion through the mounting boss hole 1601d. In a state where a metal pan-head screw (not shown) is screwed and fixed from the mounting hole 1608bb toward the mounting boss hole 1601d, a groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section of the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the resin wiring groove 1608. The bottom outer surface 1608c of the protective cover body 1601 and the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 A mounting surface 1608ba of the mounting piece 1608b is state abuts. When the game board 5 with the resin wiring groove 1608 fixed is mounted on the main body frame 4, the opening side of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608 is the payout of the payout base unit 550 described above. By being sealed by the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e in the base 551, an in-groove space is formed in the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608.

  In addition, the height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) from the mounting surface 1608ba of the mounting piece 1608b in the resin wiring groove 1608 to the opening side surface of the left side wall and the right side wall of the groove part 1608a, and the L-shape in the metal wiring groove 1605 The height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) from the attachment surface 1605ba of the attachment piece 1605b to the opening side surface of the left side wall and the right side wall of the groove 1608a is the same dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction). It is the same height. The height (distance dimension in the depth direction) H3 of the space in the groove formed by the resin wiring groove 1608 is the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 in the wiring groove according to the first embodiment described above. Height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) H1, and height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) H2 of the groove inner space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 in the wiring groove according to the first embodiment described above. , Plus the length.

  Since the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full ball path unit 600 are attached to the back surface of the back plate left portion 551e, the back plate left portion 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5 are formed. The space where the wiring is routed, that is, the wiring routing space is easily affected by electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, and the resin wiring groove 1608 is non-conductive. The resin wiring groove 1608 cannot function as a shield member that can prevent entry into the space in the groove formed by the above.

  For example, in addition to the effect display device 1600 that is arranged in the center of the game area 5a and can display a predetermined effect image, a sub-effect display device (not shown) that can display a predetermined effect image is attached to the lower side of the game board 5. In this case, the flexible flat cable 1609 (FFC (Flexible Flat Cable). The flexible flat cable transmits drawing data (control signal) to a sub-effect display device (not shown) from the liquid crystal output board 1530 of the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. A plurality of flat conductors are arranged in parallel, and the plurality of flat conductors are covered with an insulator.)) Is three-dimensionally bent by repeating mountain folds and valley folds a plurality of times. The flexible flat case in the wiring groove according to the first embodiment described above. This is an important wiring for transmitting drawing data (control signal) to a sub-effect display device (not shown) that has the same shape as the bull 1606, and is displayed on a sub-effect display device (not shown) when affected by electromagnetic noise. Troubles that the effected image is disturbed or an image like a sandstorm occurs.

  Therefore, a special structure in which a shield wire 1610 braided in a net shape is provided on one entire surface of both flat flat surfaces of the flexible flat cable 1609 and the shield wire 1610 is covered with a transparent resin is employed. The shield wire 1610 is electrically connected to the ground of the substrate (substrate ground (GND)) to which the upper end side of the flexible flat cable 1609 is connected, and is also connected to the ground (substrate of the substrate) to which the lower end side of the flexible flat cable 1609 is connected. It is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

  When the flexible flat cable 1609 is formed in a three-dimensional manner by repeatedly bending and folding a mountain fold and a valley fold, a notch for wiring insertion formed in a groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608 is formed. From the portion bent toward the lower end side of the groove inner space through the portion 1608d to the groove inner space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608, the groove inner space extends from the lower end side by a predetermined distance. The portion extending to the portion is formed so that the surface on which the shield wire 1610 is provided faces the opening side of the groove portion 1608a. That is, of the groove inner space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608, the bottom inner surface 1608e of the groove 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608 and the surface on which the shield wire 1610 is provided on the flexible flat cable 1609 The space formed between them (that is, the small space where the flexible flat cable 1609 is disposed) is a space that does not face the electromagnetic noise generation source side, whereas the flexible flat cable 1609 has a shield wire 1610. The space formed from the surface provided with the groove 1608a to the opening side is a space that faces the electromagnetic noise generation source side.

  Since the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full ball path unit 600 are attached to the back surface of the back plate left portion 551e, the back plate left portion 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5 are formed. The space where the wiring is routed, that is, the wiring routing space is easily affected by electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, but the flexible flat cable 1609 has a direction in which electromagnetic noise enters the surface on which the shield wire 1610 is provided. It is formed so as to face.

  In addition, the wiring that supplies various power sources (including ground (GND)) such as + 24V, + 12V, and + 5V created by the power supply board 630 described above is around the conductor (single wire or stranded wire). Since it is covered with an insulating material and the voltage of various power sources (including ground (GND) may be included) is stabilized, the influence of electromagnetic noise is less than that of the control signal. Even if it is received, the voltage fluctuation due to this influence is very weak, and it is difficult to be affected by electromagnetic noise, so that it can be routed to the space in the groove formed by the resin wiring groove 1608.

  Since the flexible flat cable 1609 and various wirings for supplying various power sources coexist in the groove space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608, the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 where the shield wire 1610 is not provided is provided. A groove portion having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608 is directed to the bottom inner surface 1608e of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608 and the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 on which the shield wire 1610 is provided. Direct toward the opening side of 1608a. Various power supplies from the power supply board 630 are arranged along the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shield line 1610.

  The various power supplies from the power supply board 630 are game boards by various power supply lines electrically connected from the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) through the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5. 5, various wirings for supplying various power from the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 are arranged along the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shield wire 1610. In the groove formed by the resin wiring groove 1608 from below the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section of the resin wiring groove 1608. And is routed upward along the space in the groove and drawn from the upper end of the resin wiring groove 1608 to various boards provided in the game board 5. It is wound.

  In this way, the resin-made wiring groove 1608 having non-conductivity shields the space through which the wiring passes (the space around which the wiring is routed) from the flexible flat cable 1609 that is a wiring for transmitting a control signal that is easily affected by electromagnetic noise. The surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the wire 1610 and not provided with the shield wire 1610 is directed to the bottom inner surface 1608e of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608, and the shield wire 1610 is provided. A space formed between the front surface of the left back portion 551e of the back plate and the left rear surface of the game board 5 by directing the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 toward the opening side of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608. Electrostatic discharge from the game ball B in (wiring routing space) It is possible to improve noise resistance due for electromagnetic noise.

  In addition, by arranging various power sources from the power supply board 630 along the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shield wire 1610, the flexible flat is a wiring that transmits a control signal that is easily affected by electromagnetic noise. The cable 1609 and various wirings for supplying various power sources that are hardly affected by electromagnetic wave noise can be coexisted in the space in the groove formed by the resin wiring groove 1608.

  The non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608 that is the wiring groove according to the second embodiment differs from the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 that is the wiring groove according to the second embodiment described above, as described above. Various wirings for transmitting various control signals output from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, twisted pair cables for transmitting control signals through the positive side wiring and the negative side wiring, and the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500. Various wirings through which detection signals from various sensors are transmitted cannot be routed using the resin wiring grooves 1608 themselves.

  Here, the flexible flat cable 1609 will be described. In the flexible flat cable 1609, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting drawing data (control signals) to a sub-effect display device (not shown) are arranged in parallel, and the plurality of flat conductors are covered with an insulator. Compared with normal round electric wiring, it has a thickness of about 1/3 to 1/5 of the thickness (diameter) of normal round electric wiring. Of the flat both sides of the flat cable 1609, a shield wire 1610 braided in a net shape is provided on one entire surface, and the shield wire 1610 is covered with a transparent resin so as to cover the shield wire 1610. The flexible flat cable 1609 is bent three-dimensionally by repeating a mountain fold and a valley fold a plurality of times from a liquid crystal output board 1530 of the peripheral control unit 1500 toward a sub-effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5. A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1609ba having a predetermined length are exposed on the back side of the main body 1609a on the upper end side, which is formed on the left side of the band-shaped main body 1609a having a predetermined width and extending in the left-right direction. And a reinforcing plate 1609ca for reinforcing the electrode 1609ba having a predetermined thickness on the surface side of the main body 1609a and having a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the exposed flat electrode 1609ba. On the other hand, the lower end side of the main body 1609a has a plurality of flat conductors on the back side of the main body 1609a. The electrode 1609bb has a predetermined length and is arranged to be exposed. The electrode 1609bb has a predetermined thickness on the surface side of the main body 1609a and has a rectangular shape longer than the predetermined length of the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1609bb exposed. Reinforcing plate 1609cb for reinforcing the above is formed.

  A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1609ba formed on the upper end side of the main body 1609a are electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 described above, and this is not shown. The shield wire 1610 is electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via the connector, whereas a plurality of flat conductor electrodes formed on the lower end side of the main body 1609a. 1609bb is electrically connected to a connector of a control board provided on a metal back cover (not shown) that covers the upper side of the back side of a liquid crystal panel (not shown) in a sub-effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5, A shield wire 161 is connected via a connector of a control board provided on the metal back cover (not shown). There ground control board (substrate ground (GND)) to be electrically connected.

  A capacitor called a bypass capacitor such as a decoupling capacitor (not shown) or a bypass capacitor for power supply (not shown) is provided between a power supply line and a substrate ground (GND) in the liquid crystal output board 1530 to which the flexible flat cable 1609 is electrically connected. Is mounted, and the noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is improved by lowering the power supply impedance. In addition, a power line and a substrate ground (GND) in a control board provided on a metal back cover (not shown) that covers the upper side of the back surface of a liquid crystal panel (not shown) in a sub-effect display device (not shown) to which the flexible flat cable 1609 is electrically connected. A capacitor called a bypass capacitor such as a decoupling capacitor (not shown) or a power supply bypass capacitor (not shown) is mounted between them, and by reducing the power supply impedance, noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is reduced. Improved.

  A flexible flat cable 1609 electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is connected to the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5 described above. Through the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 that covers the display area except for the display area, through the wiring insertion notch 1608d formed in the groove 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin-made wiring groove 1608 having non-conductivity. The liquid crystal panel in the sub-effect display device (not shown) is drawn to the space in the groove and guided to the lower side along the space in the groove and is directly drawn into the substrate holder 1200 attached to the back surface of the game board 5. It is electrically connected to the connector of the control board provided on the metal back cover that covers the upper side.

  As described above, the flexible flat cable 1609 electrically connected to the connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the effect display of the game board 5 A notch portion for wiring insertion formed in a groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin-made wiring groove 1608 passing through between the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 that covers the display area of the device 1600 except the display area. It can be routed to the groove inner space formed in the resin wiring groove 1608 via 1608d. In addition, as described above, in the effect display device 1600, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is covered with the metal back cover. Thereby, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is between the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 that covers the game board 5 except for the display area of the effect display device 1600. It can function as a shield member capable of preventing electromagnetic wave noise entering the flexible flat cable 1609 in the passing area.

[Modification]
Note that a flexible flat cable 1609 provided with a shield wire 1610 braided in a net shape on one entire surface is three-dimensionally formed by bending a belt-shaped main body 1606a having a predetermined width in the left-right direction by mountain folding and trough folding a plurality of times. However, a shield wire 1610 braided in a net shape may be provided on one face of a short flexible flat cable 1609 ′ in which a band-shaped main body 1606a is fold-folded or valley-folded once. For example, when two substrates are arranged in an environment affected by electromagnetic noise, a short flexible flat cable 1609 ′ provided with a shield wire 1610 knitted in a net shape between the two substrates on one face body is used. By electrically connecting, noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B can be improved. The shielded wire 1610 has an upper end side of the flexible flat cable 1609 ′ electrically connected to a ground (substrate ground (GND)) of one of the two substrates, and a lower end side of the flexible flat cable 1609 ′. It is electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of the other substrate of the two substrates.

  Further, the metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600 passes between the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 that covers the game board 5 except for the display area of the effect display device 1600. It can function as a shield member that can prevent electromagnetic wave noise that enters the flexible flat cable 1609 in the region where it is located. In this region, the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shield wire 1610 is formed so as to face the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, the flexible flat cable 1609 before and after this region is combined with a mountain fold and a valley fold so that the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 on which the shield wire 1610 is not provided in this region is connected to the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600. While forming so that it may become the direction which opposes, you may form so that the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 in which the shield wire 1610 is provided may be made to face the base body 1502 of the periphery control unit 1500. In this way, in a region passing between the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 that covers the display area of the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5, the shield wire 1610 is provided. The surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 which is not provided can prevent electromagnetic wave noise entering the flexible flat cable 1609 by a shield called a metal back cover of the effect display device 1600, and a shield wire 1610 is provided. The surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 can prevent electromagnetic wave noise entering the flexible flat cable 1609 with a shield called a shield wire 1610.

  Also, the protective cover body 1601 that covers the display area 1600 of the game board 5 except for the display area and the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608 are configured separately, but the protective cover body 1601 As long as it is made of non-conductive resin, the protective cover body 1601 and the resin wiring groove 1608 may be integrally formed.

  A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1609ba formed on the upper end side of the main body 1609a of the flexible flat cable 1609 are electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 described above. In addition, the shield line 1610 is electrically connected to the ground of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 (substrate ground (GND)) via the connector (not shown), and a plurality of the wires formed on the lower end side of the main body 1609a of the flexible flat cable 1609 are formed. The flat conductor electrode 1609bb is electrically connected to a connector on a control board provided on a metal back cover (not shown) that covers the upper side of the back side of a liquid crystal panel (not shown) in a sub-effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5. This metal back cover (not shown) is connected Shielded line 1610 through the control board connector provided it has been electrically connected to the ground of the control substrate (board ground (GND)). In view of this, for example, the flat conductors arranged at both ends of the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1609ba arranged in parallel may be electrically connected to the shield wire 1610, respectively. Even in this configuration, the shield wire 1610 is electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The control board can be connected via a connector of the control board provided on a metal back cover (not shown) that covers the upper side of the back side of the liquid crystal panel (not shown) in the sub-effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5. It can be electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)).

  The flexible flat cable 1609 has a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting control signals arranged in parallel, but the flat conductors are electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) between the flat conductors. And a flat conductor that transmits a control signal and a flat conductor that is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) may be alternately arranged. If it carries out like this, the noise resistance with respect to the electromagnetic wave noise by the electrostatic discharge from the game ball B can be improved with respect to the some flat type conductor which transmits a control signal.

  The flexible flat cable 1609 has a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting a control signal arranged in parallel. However, the flexible flat cable 1609 receives a control signal that is particularly susceptible to electromagnetic noise (that is, susceptible to electromagnetic noise). With respect to a flat conductor to be transmitted (hereinafter referred to as “a flat conductor that is weak against the influence of electromagnetic noise”), a substrate ground (GND) and an electric circuit are adjacent to the flat conductor that is weak against the influence of electromagnetic noise. A flat conductor that is electrically connected is arranged, and a flat conductor that is weak against the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise is arranged so as to be sandwiched between flat conductors that are electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND). May be. If it carries out like this, the noise resistance with respect to the electromagnetic wave noise by the electrostatic discharge from the game ball B can be improved with respect to the flat type conductor weak to the influence of electromagnetic wave noise.

  The flexible flat cable 1609 has a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting a control signal arranged in parallel. In addition to the flat conductors for transmitting a control signal, the plurality of flat conductors are A configuration in which a flat conductor electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) and a flat conductor for supplying various power supplies are included, and the substrate ground (GND) and the power supply are arranged adjacent to each other. If this is the case, the power supply will rise when the temperature rises to a certain temperature. The overcurrent protection element such as a thermistor, etc. that suppresses current when the temperature rises abruptly. Overcurrent protection circuit that shuts off the circuit when the current is reached (for example, a circuit having a polyswitch as a resettable fuse. This polyswitch is based on the relationship between element resistance and element temperature. The resistance value suddenly increases from a specific temperature, and the main body generates heat. This heat lowers the conductivity and cuts off the current, and when the main body is cooled, the conductivity returns and returns.) Thus, it is preferable to give priority to what is supplied. As described above, the flexible flat cable 1609 has a thickness of about one third to one fifth of the thickness (diameter) of the normal round electric wiring as compared with the normal round electric wiring. Therefore, when an overcurrent flows through a flat conductor that supplies power, a short circuit of the flexible flat cable 1609 can be prevented by an overcurrent protection circuit or an overcurrent protection circuit to ensure safety and damage can be prevented. This is because it can be avoided.

[Other decoration devices]
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112, the back effect unit 3400 is provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5. Here, a case where a light emission effect unit 5000 is provided in place of the back effect unit 3400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 253 to 259. FIG. 253 is a perspective view of the light emitting effect unit as viewed from the front, FIG. 254 is a perspective view of the light emitting effect unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. 255 is an exploded perspective view of the light emitting effect unit as viewed from the front. FIG. 256 is an exploded perspective view of the light emitting effect unit as seen from behind, FIG. 257 is a front view showing the arrangement relationship between the LED bare chip and the light guide plate, and FIG. 258 is arranged on the surface of the light guide plate. FIG. 259 is a diagram (a) illustrating a state in which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to the connector of the LED substrate, and is an enlarged view of a Z portion illustrated in (a). It is the figure (b) which shows the state where the insertion of the flexible flat cable to the connector of the LED board is normal, is an enlarged view of the Z part shown in (a), A diagram (c) showing the state not normal for insertion is insufficient to ED board connectors. In FIGS. 253 to 256 and FIG. 259, only the lower end side of the flexible flat cable is shown and other portions are omitted for easy viewing of the drawings.

[Light emission effect unit]
As shown in FIGS. 253 to 258, the light emitting effect unit 5000 includes a light emitting effect main body 5010 having a circular shape, and a main body attachment portion 5020 having a T-shape for attaching the light emitting effect main body 5010 to the upper part in the back box 3010. A control signal output from the effect drive board 1720 is emitted in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 described above while being guided into the light emission effect main body 5010 along the back surface side of the main body mounting portion 5020. A flexible flat cable 5030 (an abbreviation of FFC (Flexible Flat Cable. The flexible flat cable is formed in a three-dimensional manner by bending a mountain fold and a valley fold a plurality of times). The conductor is covered with an insulator))). Here, first, the light emitting effect main body 5010 will be described, and the assembly method of the main body attaching portion 5020, the flexible flat cable 5030, and the light emitting effect unit 5000 will be described in order.

[Lighting effect body]
The light emitting effect production main body 5010 is processed from a decorative body 5040 molded from a circular transparent resin, and a thin circular transparent resin plate housed in the decorative body 5040 and having a notch in a part on the upper side. A diffusion sheet 5050 to be molded, and a guide formed by a transparent resin having a circular shape that is accommodated inside the decorative body 5040 while being disposed on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050 and has a notch in a part of the upper side. Light plate 5060, LED substrate 5070 having a circular shape that is housed in decorative body 5040 and disposed on the upper surface of light guide plate 5060 on the back surface 5060y side, and rear opening of decorative body 5040 And a lid 5080 formed of a transparent resin having a circular shape having a notch in a part on the upper side.

[Decorative body]
At the center of the surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040 molded with a circular transparent resin, a convex portion 5040a that matches the outer shape of the character protrudes forward, and the character is printed on the entire surface of the convex portion 5040a. Yes. Of the surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040, the outer peripheral portion of the convex portion 5040a excluding the entire surface on which the character of the convex portion 5040a is printed and the entire surface 5040x area of the decorative body 5040 excluding the convex portion 5040a include the world view of the character. A background pattern (not shown) with a design that represents is printed. Although the entire surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040 is printed with a character or a background pattern, the light emission mode of the entire surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040 is changed from the front of the light-emitting effect unit 5000 (that is, the pachinko machine 1) according to the light emission by the LED substrate 5070. (A player sitting in front of the player) can easily recognize the light, and a change in the light emission mode of the entire surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040 can be transmitted to the player.

  On the back surface 5040y side of the decorative body 5040, there is formed a member housing recess 5040b that has a circular shape with a notch in a part of the upper side, leaving the upper side, and that accommodates the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED substrate 5070. ing. A reverse arrangement prevention piece for preventing the front and back surfaces of the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED board 5070 from being turned upside down is disposed on the upper left side of the member housing recess 5040b when the decorative body 5040 is viewed from behind. 5040c is formed to protrude from the inner surface of the bottom of the member receiving recess 5040b toward the back surface 5040y side of the decorative body 5040 with a length of the first distance dimension. Further, the lid body that restricts the positions of the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED substrate 5070 and closes the member accommodation recess 5040 b on the upper left and right sides and the lower side of the member accommodation recess 5040 b when viewing the decorative body 5040 from behind. A mounting boss hole 5040d for fixing 5080 to the back surface 5040y side of the decorative body 5040 protrudes from the bottom inner surface of the member receiving recess 5040b toward the back surface 5040y side of the decorative body 5040 with a length of the first distance dimension. (A total of three mounting boss holes 5040d). In addition, on the upper left and right sides on the back surface 5040y side of the decorative body 5040 when the decorative body 5040 is viewed from behind, mounting boss holes 5040e for fixing the main body mounting portion 5020 are second distance dimensions from the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 toward the rear. And projecting with a total length (two mounting boss holes 5040e).

[LED substrate]
The LED substrate 5070 having a circular shape with a notch in the upper part thereof is formed with a notch 5070a at a position corresponding to the reverse arrangement preventing piece 5040c formed in the member housing recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040, and the decorative body 5040. Through holes 5070b are formed at positions corresponding to the three mounting boss holes 5040d formed in the member housing recess 5040b.

  A plurality of LED bare chips are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. This LED bare chip (also referred to as “LED element”) is an extremely small electronic component that is encapsulated in a package such as a surface-mount type, a chip-on-board type, and a bullet type. In this embodiment, the LED package in which the LED bare chip is encapsulated is not mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, but the LED bare chip encapsulated in the LED package is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. The configuration to be directly mounted on was adopted.

  Examples of a method for electrically connecting the electrode of the LED bare chip to a predetermined electrode on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 include wire bonding and flip chip bonding. In the present embodiment, flip chip bonding is used. It was adopted. In this flip chip bonding, the LED bare chip electrode is not electrically connected to the predetermined electrode on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 using a wire as in wire bonding, but is bumped to the LED bare chip electrode. Is formed and is electrically connected to a predetermined electrode on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. This connecting portion is reinforced with solder, resin, or the like.

  On the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, five LED rows are arranged in the vertical direction in which a predetermined number of LED bare chips 5075 are spaced apart by a predetermined distance, and the first step 5070c1 from the bottom. In addition, six LED bare chips 5075 are arranged in a line in the left-right direction in the fifth stage 5070c5 from the bottom, and LED bare chips 5075 are arranged in a line in the left-right direction in the second stage 5070c2 from the bottom and the fourth stage 5070c4 from the bottom. 7 are arranged in the third row 5070c3 from the bottom, and eight LED bare chips 5075 are arranged in a line in the left-right direction.

  On the center line in the left-right direction of the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, the LED row of the third stage 5070c3 is arranged. A fourth stage that passes through substantially the midpoint between the center line and the upper side of the LED board 5070 and is one above the LED row of the third stage 5070c3 on an intermediate line parallel to the center line and the upper side of the LED board 5070, respectively. 5070c4 LED rows are arranged. Then, on the intermediate line passing through the middle point of the center line and the straight line parallel to the center line and passing through the lowest point of the circumference of the LED substrate 5070 and parallel to the center line and the straight line described above, respectively. The second row 5070c2 LED row is arranged one down from the third row 5070c3 LED row. Among the LED rows of the third stage 5070c3, on the straight line in the vertical direction passing through the midpoint of the distance dimension between the first LED bare chip 5075 and the second LED bare chip 5075 from the left side, 1 of the LED rows of the fourth stage 5070c4 The second LED bare chip 5075 is arranged, the first LED bare chip 5075 is arranged in the LED row of the second stage 5070c2, and the eight LED bare chips 5075 and the fourth stage of the LED row of the third stage 5070c3 are arranged. The seven LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row 5070c4 are arranged so as not to be aligned in the vertical direction, and the eight LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row 5070c3 and the seven LED rows 7 of the second row 5070c2 are arranged. So that the two LED bare chips 5075 are not aligned in a line in the vertical direction. It is location. The seven LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the fourth stage 5070c4 and the seven LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the second stage 5070c2 are arranged in a line in the vertical direction.

  On the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070, the LED array of the fifth stage 5070c5 that is the upper side of the LED board 5070 and below the two through-holes 5070b is one above the LED array of the fourth stage 5070c4. Is arranged on the lowest point side of the circumference of the LED substrate 5070 and above one through hole 5070b, the LED row of the first step 5070c1 that is one lower than the LED row of the second step 5070c2 is arranged. Has been. The vertical line passing through the midpoint of the distance dimension between the first LED bare chip 5075 and the second LED bare chip 5075 from the left side of the LED row of the fourth stage 5070c4 and the left side of the LED row of the second stage 5070c2 The straight line in the vertical direction passing through the midpoint of the distance dimension between the second LED bare chip 5075 and the second LED bare chip 5075 coincides, and the first LED from the left in the LED row of the fifth stage 5070c5 is on this straight line. The bare chip 5075 is arranged, and the first LED bare chip 5075 from the left side of the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 is arranged, and the seven LED bare chips 5075 and the fifth stage 5070c5 of the LED row of the fourth stage 5070c3 are arranged. So that the six LED bare chips 5075 in the LED row are not aligned in the vertical direction. In addition, the seven LED bare chips 5075 in the LED row of the second stage 5070c2 and the six LED bare chips 5075 in the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 are arranged so as not to be aligned in the vertical direction. . The first LED bare chip 5075 from the left side of the LED row of the fifth stage 5070c5 and the first LED bare chip 5075 from the left side of the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 are arranged on the straight line described above. In addition, since the second LED bare chip 5075 from the left side of the LED row of the third stage 5070c3 is also arranged, the six LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the fifth stage 5070c5 and the LED row of the third stage 5070c3 are arranged. Among them, the second to seventh six LED bare chips 5075 and the six LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 are arranged in a line in the vertical direction.

  On the other hand, on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, a connector 5070d for transmitting a control signal for controlling a plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is mounted. The connector 5070d is electrically connected by inserting the lower end side of the flexible flat cable 5030. The upper end side of the flexible flat cable 5030 is inserted into a connector (not shown) of the effect drive board 1720 and is electrically connected. The control signal output from the effect drive board 1720 is transmitted to the LED board 5070 via the flexible flat cable 5030, and the light emission mode of the LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070 is controlled. Is done.

  The front surface (mounting surface) 5070x and the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 are coated with a green resist solution except for various lands and through holes. The surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is further printed by white silk printing except for various lands and through holes. That is, while the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is white, the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 is green, and the color of the front surface and the back surface is the same substrate. Is different. The reason why the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is white is that light emitted from the LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is refracted by other members. When returning to the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, the surface of the LED substrate 5070 (mounting surface) functions as a reflection sheet that can efficiently refract the returned light forward again. This is to give 5070x.

[Modification]
The LED board 5070 is configured to drive a plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070 when a control signal is input from the effect driving board 1720 via the flexible flat cable 5030. It was. That is, in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the effect drive board 1720 is controlled from an LED control electronic component (for example, an IC such as an LED driver or a gradation control driver) mounted on itself. The signal was output to the LED substrate 5070 via the flexible flat cable 5030. You may comprise so that the electronic component for LED control mounted in this production | presentation drive board | substrate 1720 may be mounted in the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070. Since the connector 5070d is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, any electronic component for LED control having a height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) comparable to the height of the connector 5070d. Even if this electronic component for LED control is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, it can be used as it is without changing the dimensions of the decorative body 5040 and the lid 5080. This can contribute to the downsizing of the effect drive board 1720. Further, with this configuration, a control signal is output from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 to the LED board 5070 via the flexible flat cable 5030 to drive the LED bare chip 5075. You can also.

  Further, although flip chip bonding is employed as a method of electrically connecting the LED bare chip electrode to a predetermined electrode on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, wire bonding may be employed instead of flip chip bonding. Good.

[Light guide plate]
A light guide plate 5060 formed of a transparent resin having a circular shape with a notch in the upper part thereof is formed with a notch 5060a at a position corresponding to the reverse arrangement preventing piece 5040c formed in the member housing recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040. In addition, through holes 5060b are respectively formed at positions corresponding to the three mounting boss holes 5040d formed in the member housing recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040.

  The back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060 is housed in the member housing recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040 in a state of being in contact with the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. On the back surface 5060y side of the light guide plate 5060, there is a notch in a part of the upper side so as to cover the LED bare chip 5075 at a position corresponding to the plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. In addition to having a cylindrical shape (hereinafter referred to as “semi-cylindrical shape”), the semi-cylindrical curved surface is inclined obliquely because the axis of the semi-cylindrical portion is slightly inclined with respect to the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060. An incident recess 5060c is formed. The bottom of the incident recess 5060 c does not penetrate the surface 5070 x of the light guide plate 5060 and remains in the light guide plate 5060. When the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060 is in contact with the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, the LED bare chip 5075 is disposed on the semi-cylindrical axis line when it is accommodated in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040. At the same time, the LED bare chip 5075 is sealed in the incident recess 5060c.

  On the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060, a flat surface 5060d having a cylindrical shape is formed from the opening side of the incident concave portion 5060c in a section from a center point through which the semi-cylindrical axis passes to a concentric circle position separated by a predetermined distance. A notch is formed in a part of the upper surface of the flat surface 5060d having the columnar shape, and the flat surface 5060d having the columnar shape is similar to the opening side of the incident concave portion 5060c.

  When the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060 crosses the section of the flat surface 5060d having a cylindrical shape from the center point through which the semi-cylindrical axis passes, a prism pattern having a substantially triangular cross section is formed concentrically. A prism portion 5060e is formed in which the interval between the prism patterns having a substantially triangular cross section increases as the distance from the center point through which the semicircular cylinder axis passes. The distance dimension in the left-right direction of the prism portion 5060e is a distance dimension of a straight line connecting the center points of adjacent LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 (hereinafter referred to as “block reference distance in the left-right direction”). It may be described as “dimension”). On the other hand, the vertical distance of the prism portion 5060e is one downward from the step of the LED bare chip 5075 enclosed in the main entrance recess 5060c from the notch portion formed in the upper part of the flat surface 5060d having a cylindrical shape. The distance dimension to the last-stage prism pattern passing through the nearest LED bare chip center point arranged in the corresponding stage (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “vertical block reference distance dimension”).

  On the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060, at a position corresponding to the LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, an incident concave portion 5060c, a flat surface 5060d having a cylindrical shape, and a prism portion 5060e. Each single prism block 5060f is formed as a prism surface. The distance dimension in the left-right direction of the single prism block 5060f is the block reference distance dimension in the left-right direction, and the distance dimension in the up-down direction of the single prism block 5060f is the block reference distance dimension in the up-down direction. Among LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x, the one closest to the left and right outer peripheral portions of the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 (the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 to the LED of the fifth stage 5070c5) The first LED bare chip 5075 from the left side of each row, the first stage 5070c1 and the LED row of the fifth section among the LED rows of the fifth section 5075 from the left side, the left side of the LED row of the second stage 5070c2 and the fourth stage 5070c4 7th LED bare chip 5075 from the third stage For the eighth bare LED chip 5075 from the left side of the ED row, the distance in the left-right direction of the single prism block 5060f is not the block reference distance in the left-right direction, and the last-stage prism pattern is the back surface of the light guide plate 5060. It is extended to the outer peripheral end of 5060y.

  On the other hand, a plurality of single prism blocks 5060f are formed on the front surface 5060x side of the light guide plate 5060 on the back surface 5060y side of the light guide plate 5060, whereas the surface is flat without any processing. ing.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the LED package in which the LED bare chip is encapsulated is not mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, but the LED bare chip encapsulated in the LED package is not in the surface of the LED substrate 5070. (Mounting surface) A configuration for directly mounting on 5070x was adopted. Thereby, as the plate thickness of the light guide plate, compared with the plate thickness of the light guide plate when the LED package is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, the surface mount type, the chip-on-board type, the shell type, etc. The depth distance dimension in the package can be reduced, and the depth distance dimension of the light emitting effect body 5010 of the light emitting effect unit 5000 is secured to contribute to the three-dimensional modeling of the light emitting effect body 5010. be able to. Since the LED bare chip is an extremely sensitive electronic component, even if an impact caused by a player hitting the door frame 3 or the like is directly transmitted to the door frame 3, the LED bare chip is exposed to the light emitting effect unit 5000 provided in the game board 5. Since the impact caused by the weakening is reduced, the probability that the LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 are damaged by the impact caused by such a sticking is low.

[Modification]
In this embodiment, instead of mounting the LED package in which the LED bare chip is encapsulated on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, the LED bare chip encapsulated in the LED package is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the LED substrate 5070. ) The structure directly mounted on 5070x is adopted. However, as the depth distance dimension of the light emitting effect main body 5010 of the light emitting effect main unit 5000, there is no problem in the three-dimensional modeling of the light emitting effect main body 5010. The LED package having the surface mounting type may be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. In this case, the dimensional distance of the single prism block 5060f composed of the incident concave portion 5060c, the flat surface 5060d having a columnar shape, and the prism portion 5060e is increased, and the plate thickness of the light guide plate is also increased. The light emitting surface of the LED package having the side surface mount type does not face the diffusion sheet 5050 but faces the lower side of the incident concave portion 5060c, and light emitted from the light emitting surface is transmitted from the prism portion 5060e via the prism portion 5060e. Proceed to the front diffusion sheet 5050.

[Diffusion sheet]
A diffusion sheet 5050 formed by processing from a thin circular transparent resin plate having a notch in the upper part thereof is formed at a position corresponding to the reverse arrangement preventing piece 5040c formed in the member housing recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040. A portion 5050a is formed, and through holes 5050b are formed at positions corresponding to the three mounting boss holes 5040d formed in the member housing recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040. The diffusion sheet 5050 is coated with a white paint on the back side and processed into a satin finish having fine irregularities, and light from the LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. Is incident through the light guide plate, the incident light can be diffused.

  The back surface 5050y of the diffusion sheet 5050 is housed in the member housing recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040 in a state of being in contact with the front surface 5060x of the light guide plate 5060 formed of a transparent resin. The back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060 is housed in the member housing recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040 in a state of being in contact with the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. On the back surface 5060y side of the light guide plate 5060, as described above, the incident concave portion is provided so as to cover the LED bare chips 5075 at positions corresponding to the plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. 5060c is formed.

  On the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, as described above, LED rows in which a predetermined number of LED bare chips 5075 are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance are provided in five stages in the vertical direction. The LED bare chips 5075 of the LED rows in the stage are respectively enclosed in incident concave portions 5060c formed on the back surface 5060y side of the corresponding light guide plate 5060. When the light emitting surface of the LED bare chip 5075 emits light, the space of the incident concave portion 5060c is brightly illuminated, so that the LED of each row of LED rows enclosed in each incident concave portion 5060c is compared with the region where the incident concave portion 5060c is not formed. Light from the bare chip 5075 is emitted from the surface 5060x of the light guide plate 5060 through the light guide plate 5060 formed of a transparent resin, and the luminance of the light emitted from the space of each incident recess 5060c is increased. If it does so, the area | region where the space of each entrance recessed part 5060c will be in the state arrange | positioned like a point light source, and it will be difficult to light the surface 5060x of the light-guide plate 5060 uniformly.

  Therefore, on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050, five white belt regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 having a long strip shape applied in the left-right direction applied with white paint are formed at positions corresponding to the LED bare chips 5075 of the LED rows in each stage. In addition, a diffusion region 5050d for diffusing light is formed by spraying white paint in the form of dots in regions excluding these five regions 5050c1 to 5050c5. A portion applied with the white paint becomes an opaque region in which the rear or front cannot be visually recognized through the diffusion sheet 5050. Note that no paint is applied to the surface 5050x side of the diffusion sheet 5050.

  Specifically, on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050, a white band region 5050c1 is formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 of the LED substrate 5070, and the LED row of the second stage 5070c2 of the LED substrate 5070. Is formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the third stage 5070c3 of the LED substrate 5070, and a white band region 5050c3 is formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the LED board 5070 corresponding to the LED row of the fourth stage 5070c4 of the LED substrate 5070. A white band region 5050c4 is formed at a position where the white band is formed, and a white band region 5050c5 is formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the fifth stage 5070c5 of the LED substrate 5070.

  The white belt areas 5050c1 to 5050c5 have the same vertical distance dimension. For example, the white belt area 5050c1 has a vertical distance dimension at a position corresponding to the LED row of the first stage 5070c1. Each of the above-described light guide plates 5060 has a distance dimension covering the entire flat surface 5060d having a cylindrical shape constituting the single prism block 5060f of the light guide plate 5060 described above. Of the distance dimensions in the left-right direction of the white band areas 5050c1 to 5050c5, the distance dimensions in the left-right direction of the white band areas 5050c1 and 5050c5 have the same distance dimension, for example, the left-right direction of the white band area 5050c1. Has a distance dimension that covers the entire flat surface 5060d having a columnar shape constituting the single prism block 5060f of the above-described light guide plate 5060 formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the first stage 5070c1. is doing. Among the distance dimensions in the left-right direction of the white band areas 5050c1 to 5050c5, the distance dimensions in the left-right direction of the white band areas 5050c2 and 5050c4 have the same distance dimension, for example, the left-right direction of the white band area 5050c2 Has a distance dimension that covers the entire flat surface 5060d having a cylindrical shape constituting the single prism block 5060f of the above-described light guide plate 5060 formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the second stage 5070c2. is doing. Of the distance dimensions in the left-right direction of the white belt regions 5050c1 to 5050c5, the distance dimension in the left-right direction of the white belt region 5050c3 is the light guide plate 5060 described above formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the third stage 5070c3. The single prism block 5060f has a distance dimension covering the entire flat surface 5060d having a cylindrical shape.

  In this way, on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050, five white belt regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 having a long strip shape applied in the left-right direction applied with white paint are formed at positions corresponding to the LED bare chips 5075 of the LED rows in each stage. By doing so, the light emitted from each incident concave portion 5060c can be refracted by the five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 and directed to the light guide plate 5060, so that the region where the space of each incident concave portion 5060c exists is a point light source. The state of light emission can be reduced.

  Further, since the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is white as described above, it is refracted in the five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 and passes through the light guide plate 5060 (the surface of the LED substrate 5070 ( Mounting surface) The light returned toward 5070x can be efficiently refracted forward again.

  The light emitted from the prism portion 5060e constituting the single prism block 5060f is diffused by the diffusion region 5050d. That is, the light emitted from each incident concave portion 5060c is refracted by the five white belt regions 5050c1 to 5050c5, and the state where the space of each incident concave portion 5060c exists toward the light guide plate 5060 is lightened like a point light source. At the same time, the light returning toward the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is refracted by the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the white LED substrate 5070 and is efficiently emitted forward again. Since the light can be diffused by the diffusion region 5050d through the portion 5060e, it is possible to contribute to a mode in which the surface 5060x of the light guide plate 5060 is uniformly illuminated. Accordingly, the surface of the light guide plate 5060 facing the diffusion sheet 5050 (surface 5060x) can be contributed to uniformly illuminating, so that it is difficult to give the player an uncomfortable feeling due to the light emission effect of the decorative body 5040. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in game entertainment due to the light emission effect.

[Lid]
The lid 5080 molded with a transparent resin having a circular shape with a notch in the upper part thereof is formed with a notch 5080a at a position corresponding to the reverse arrangement preventing piece 5040c formed in the member housing recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040. In addition, through holes 5080b are formed at positions corresponding to the three mounting boss holes 5040d formed in the member housing recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040, respectively.

  In addition, a plurality of lids 5080 are formed in a state in which long ventilation holes 5080c that are long in the left-right direction are aligned vertically and horizontally, and the flexible flat cable 5030 is located at a position corresponding to the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface 5070y of the LED board 5070. A wiring opening 5080d is formed to pass therethrough.

  In addition, mounting boss holes 5080e for fixing the main body mounting portion 5020 are provided at the third distance dimension from the rear surface 5080y of the lid body 5080 to the rear side at the center left and right sides of the lid body 5080 on the back surface 5080y side when the lid body 5080 is viewed from behind. And projecting with a total length (two mounting boss holes 5080e). Note that the outer diameters of the two mounting boss holes 5080e formed on the left and right sides of the back surface 5080y of the lid 5080 are the two mounting bosses formed on the upper left and right sides of the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 of the light emitting effect body 5010 described above. It is the same as the outer diameter of the hole 5040e.

[Body mounting part]
A main body attachment portion 5020 having a T-shape for attaching the light-emitting effect main body 5010 to the upper portion in the back box 3010 has T-shaped groove portions each having side walls formed rearward except for the upper left and right ends of the T-shaped flat plate. A base body 5020a having two metal L-shaped plates 5020b having a symmetrical shape that reinforces the base body 5020a along side walls excluding the upper side and the lower side of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a, 5020b and a metal plate 5020c that reinforces the base body 5020a along the upper side wall of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a.

  At the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a, a position corresponding to two mounting boss holes 5040e formed on the upper left and right sides of the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 of the light emitting effect main body 5010, and the light emitting effect main body 5010 Through holes 5020d are formed at positions corresponding to the two mounting boss holes 5080e formed on the left and right sides of the back surface 5080y of the lid 5080, respectively. In addition, when the base body 5020a is viewed from behind, a plurality of metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b and a plurality of metal plates 5020c are fixed to the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a. Mounting boss holes 5020e project from the inner surface of the bottom portion of the T-shaped groove portion formed in the base body 5020a to the rear and have a length of a fourth distance dimension (total of 11 mounting bosses). Hole 5020e). The outer diameter of the mounting boss hole 5020e is the outer diameter of the two mounting boss holes 5080e formed on the center left and right of the back surface 5080y of the lid 5080 described above (the upper left and right sides of the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 of the light emitting effect body 5010). The outer diameter of the two mounting boss holes 5040e formed in (2) is smaller by two turns.

  Two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b attached to the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a have two upper and lower left sides formed on the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 of the light emitting effect body 5010. Through holes 5020ba are respectively formed at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 5040e and positions corresponding to the two mounting boss holes 5080e formed at the center left and right of the back surface 5080y of the lid 5080 of the light emitting effect main body 5010. At the same time, through holes 5020bb are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting boss holes 5020e formed on the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a. Further, the metal plate 5020c attached to the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a penetrates to a position corresponding to the plurality of mounting boss holes 5020e formed on the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove. Each hole 5020ca is formed.

  Further, when the base body 5020a is viewed from the back, a flexible flat cable 5030 is provided on the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a and the lower side wall of the base body 5020a connected to the bottom. A wiring opening 5020f is formed to pass therethrough. Although not shown, a plurality of through holes for attaching the light emitting effect production main body 5010 to the upper part in the back box 3010 are formed at the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a.

  The two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b and the metal plate 5020c are electrically connected to a substrate ground (GND) via a wiring (not shown), and grounds of various substrates provided in the game board 5 are provided. It is the same ground (GND) as (substrate ground (GND)).

[Flexible flat cable]
In the flexible flat cable 5030, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting a control signal output from the effect drive board 1720 in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 are arranged in parallel. A plurality of flat conductors are covered with an insulator, which is about one-third to one-fifth of the thickness (diameter) of a normal round electric wire compared to a normal round electric wire. Although not shown in the figure, it is formed three-dimensionally by bending a mountain fold and a valley fold a plurality of times from the effect driving substrate 1720 to the light emitting effect main body 5010, and further, the main body mounting portion 5020. Two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b and a metal plate 5020c along the inner surface of the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a. Of the band-shaped main body 5030a having a predetermined width and having a predetermined width, and is bent three-dimensionally by repeating a mountain fold and a valley fold a plurality of times. Although not shown on the upper end side, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes having a predetermined length are arranged on the back side of the main body 5030a so as to be exposed, and a plurality of the electrodes having a predetermined thickness are exposed on the front side of the main body 5030a. A reinforcing plate for reinforcing an electrode having a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the flat conductor electrode is formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a. A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb having a predetermined thickness on the surface side of the main body 5030a and a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb having a predetermined length are disposed on the surface side of the main body 5030a. Reinforcing plate 5030cb for reinforcing the electrode 5030bb having a long rectangular shape than fixed length of is formed.

  A plurality of flat conductor electrodes (not shown) formed on the upper end side of the main body 5030a are electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the effect driving board 1720, whereas they are formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a. The plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb are electrically connected to a connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070 of the light emitting effect production main body 5010.

  A capacitor called a bypass capacitor such as a decoupling capacitor (not shown) or a bypass capacitor for power supply (not shown) is provided between the power supply line and the substrate ground (GND) in the effect drive board 1720 to which the flexible flat cable 5030 is electrically connected. Is mounted, and the noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is improved by lowering the power supply impedance. In addition, a decoupling capacitor (not shown), a power supply bypass capacitor (not shown), or the like is provided between the power supply line and the substrate ground (GND) of the LED board 5070 of the light emitting effect rendering main body 5010 to which the flexible flat cable 5030 is electrically connected. A capacitor called a bypass capacitor is mounted, and noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is improved by lowering the power supply impedance.

  As described above, since the flexible flat cable 5030 is routed inside the back unit 3000 that is three-dimensionally bent and attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5, the flexible flat cable 5030 is placed near the back surface of the game panel 1100. There is also a portion where the cable 5030 is routed. As described above, the game ball B is polished in the island facility of the game hall or rubbed with each other in the circulation between the island facility and the pachinko machine 1 to discharge the electromagnetic wave noise by being charged and electrostatically discharged. . For this reason, when the game ball B flows down the game area 5 a of the game board 5, the back surface of the game panel 1100 and the vicinity thereof are susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B. ing. The flexible flat cable 5030 that transmits the control signal to the light emitting effect production main body 5010 is a signal that is not susceptible to noise and is troubled by electromagnetic noise (for example, normal data changes to other data and becomes garbled or is not originally output). However, as described above, although it is susceptible to electromagnetic noise, it is close to the back surface of the gaming panel 1100 that is susceptible to electromagnetic noise. There is also a part that is routed around.

  Therefore, among the electrodes of the plurality of flat conductors of the flexible flat cable 5030, both ends of the flexible flat cable 5030 facing the electromagnetic noise generation source side in the width direction (hereinafter referred to as “endmost ends”) may be described. .)) Is used as a power supply line so that the power supply line is arranged together. As a result, among the electrodes of the plurality of flat conductors, the other electrodes excluding the flat conductor electrodes on both sides of the extreme end are separated from the game ball B by the ground (GND) line which is the electrode of the flat conductors on the extreme ends. The ground (GND) line is arranged between the generation source of electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge and other electrodes (electrodes including a control signal) excluding the electrodes of the flat conductors on both sides of the extreme end, Noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B can be improved with respect to other electrodes (electrodes including a line for transmitting a control signal) except for the flat conductor electrodes on both ends. .

  In addition, among the plurality of flat conductor electrodes of the flexible flat cable 5030, the flat conductor electrodes on both ends of the flexible flat cable 5030 are both grounded (GND) lines as power supply lines so that the power supply lines are arranged, A power supply line (for example, + 5V line) is disposed on the electrode adjacent to the electrodes of the flat conductors on both sides. Since the power supply line (for example, + 5V line) is strong against noise and hardly affected by electromagnetic noise, the power supply line (for example, the + 5V line) may be disposed on the electrodes near the electrodes on both ends of the plurality of flat conductors of the flexible flat cable 5030. preferable. Of the electrodes adjacent to the flat conductor electrodes on both ends, the electrode adjacent to the electrode on the one endmost flat conductor and the electrode adjacent to the electrode on the other end flat conductor, One or both of the electrodes adjacent to the electrode of the one endmost flat conductor and the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the other endmost flat conductor are provided with power lines.

  Further, among the plurality of flat conductor electrodes of the flexible flat cable 5030, the flat conductor electrodes on both ends of the flat conductor are both grounded (GND) lines, and the flat conductor electrodes on both ends of the flexible flat cable 5030 are used. However, two metal L-shaped plates are formed along the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove portion formed in the base body 5020a of the main body mounting portion 5020 of the light emitting effect main body 5010 in the portion drawn near the back surface of the game panel 1100. 5020b, 5020b and the metal plate 5020c are routed around. That is, the flexible flat cable 503 is shielded by the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b and the metal plate 5020c at the portion that is routed near the back surface of the game panel 1100 that is susceptible to electromagnetic noise. The noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B can be improved.

  As described above, the flexible flat cable 5030 has a plurality of flat conductors covered with an insulator. The color of this insulator is white, and the entire flexible flat cable 5030 is white. The reason why the white color is adopted is that the flexible flat cable 5030 is routed inside the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5, and thus is mounted on various decorative boards included in the back unit 3000. By functioning as a reflector plate that reflects the light emitted by the LED itself, the light leaking through the rear unit 3000 to the rear is suppressed as much as possible, and contributes to the reduction of the effect of the light emission effect by the light emitted by the LED. is there.

[Modification]
In order to improve noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, the power supply line is connected to the flat conductor electrodes on both ends of the plurality of flat conductor electrodes of the flexible flat cable 5030. Although the ground (GND) line is used as the power supply line so as to be arranged, the power supply line (for example, + 5V line) may be used as the power supply line so that the power supply line is arranged instead of the ground (GND) line. This is because the power supply line (for example, + 5V line) is resistant to noise and hardly affected by electromagnetic noise. In this case, of the electrodes adjacent to the electrodes of the flat conductors at both ends, the electrodes adjacent to the electrodes of the flat conductor on the one end and the electrodes adjacent to the electrodes of the other flat conductor on the other end A ground (GND) line is disposed on both of the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the flat conductor on the one endmost side and the electrode adjacent to the electrode on the other endmost flat conductor. ing.

  Further, among the plurality of flat conductor electrodes of the flexible flat cable 5030, the main body mounting portion of the light emitting effect main body 5010 is provided at a portion where the flat conductor electrodes on both ends of the flexible flat cable 5030 are routed near the back surface of the game panel 1100. Along the inner surface of the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of 5020, it is routed so as to pass between the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b and the metal plate 5020c. However, at least one of the flat conductor electrodes on both ends of the flexible flat cable 5030 is routed along one metal L-shaped plate 5020b of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b. You may be made to do. In this way, the flexible flat cable 503 has a metal L-shaped plate that is routed along the metal L-shaped plate 5020b at a portion that is routed near the back surface of the gaming panel 1100 that is susceptible to electromagnetic noise. It is shielded by 5020b and can contribute to improvement in noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B.

  The flexible flat cable 5030 has a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting control signals arranged in parallel, but the flat conductors electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) between the flat conductors. And a flat conductor that transmits a control signal and a flat conductor that is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) may be alternately arranged. If it carries out like this, the noise resistance with respect to the electromagnetic wave noise by the electrostatic discharge from the game ball B can be improved with respect to the some flat type conductor which transmits a control signal.

  The flexible flat cable 5030 has a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting a control signal arranged in parallel. However, the flexible flat cable 5030 is not particularly sensitive to electromagnetic noise (that is, susceptible to electromagnetic noise). With respect to a flat conductor to be transmitted (hereinafter referred to as “a flat conductor that is weak against the influence of electromagnetic noise”), a substrate ground (GND) and an electric circuit are adjacent to the flat conductor that is weak against the influence of electromagnetic noise. A flat conductor that is electrically connected is arranged, and a flat conductor that is weak against the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise is arranged so as to be sandwiched between flat conductors that are electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND). May be. If it carries out like this, the noise resistance with respect to the electromagnetic wave noise by the electrostatic discharge from the game ball B can be improved with respect to the flat type conductor weak to the influence of electromagnetic wave noise.

  Further, in the flexible flat cable 5030, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting a control signal are arranged in parallel. In addition to the flat conductors for transmitting a control signal, the plurality of flat conductors are as follows. A configuration in which a flat conductor electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) and a flat conductor for supplying various power supplies are included, and the substrate ground (GND) and the power supply are arranged adjacent to each other. If this is the case, the power supply will rise when the temperature rises to a certain temperature. The overcurrent protection element such as a thermistor, etc. that suppresses current when the temperature rises abruptly. Overcurrent protection circuit that shuts off the circuit when the current is reached (for example, a circuit having a polyswitch as a resettable fuse. This polyswitch is based on the relationship between element resistance and element temperature. The resistance value suddenly increases from a specific temperature, and the main body generates heat. This heat lowers the conductivity and cuts off the current, and when the main body is cooled, the conductivity returns and returns.) Thus, it is preferable to give priority to what is supplied. As described above, the flexible flat cable 5030 has a thickness of about one third to one fifth of the thickness (diameter) of the normal round electric wiring as compared with the normal round electric wiring. Therefore, when an overcurrent flows through a flat conductor that supplies power, a short circuit of the flexible flat cable 5030 can be prevented by an overcurrent protection circuit or an overcurrent protection circuit to ensure safety and damage can be prevented. This is because it can be avoided.

[Assembly method of light emitting effect unit]
Next, a method for assembling the light emitting effect unit 5000 will be briefly described. First, the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED substrate 5070 are arranged in order in accordance with the reverse arrangement preventing piece 5040c formed in the member housing recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040 and the mounting boss hole 5040d. A lid 5080 that closes the housing recess 5040b is disposed. In this state, the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 and the back surface 5080y of the lid body 5080 are arranged on the same plane and are flush with each other, and the end face of the reverse placement preventing piece 5040c and the end face of the mounting boss hole 5040d are covered. The first distance dimension described above is set in advance so as not to protrude from the back surface 5080y of the body 5080 and to fit between the front surface 5080x and the back surface 5080y of the lid 5080. Then, a metal pan-head screw (not shown) is screwed and fixed from a through hole 5080b formed on the back surface 5080y side of the lid 5080 toward the mounting boss hole 5040d. As a result, the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED substrate 5070 are arranged and accommodated in the member housing recess 5040b of the decoration body 5040 when the decoration body 5040 is viewed from the front.

  Subsequently, the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b and the metal plate 5020c are attached to a plurality of mounting boss holes 5020e formed on the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of the main body mounting portion 5020. And a metal pan-head screw (not shown) is screwed into the mounting boss hole 5020e from the through-hole 5020bb formed in the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b, and is fixed. A pan-head screw is screwed and fixed from a through hole 5020ca formed in the metal plate 5020c toward the mounting boss hole 5020e. The end surface of the mounting boss hole 5020e does not protrude from the back surfaces of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b and the metal plate 5020c, and the front and back surfaces of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b and the metal plate 5020c. The above-mentioned fourth distance dimension is set in advance so as to fall within the range.

  Subsequently, the lower end side of the flexible flat cable 5030 is inserted into the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 through the wiring opening 5080d formed in the lid 5080. Then, the upper end side of the flexible flat cable 5030 is passed through the wiring opening 5020f formed in the main body attachment portion 5020. A method for attaching the flexible flat cable 5030 to the LED substrate 5070 will be described later.

  Subsequently, the base body 5020a of the main body mounting portion 5020 is arranged in accordance with the mounting boss hole 5040e formed on the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 and the mounting boss hole 5080e formed on the back surface 5080y of the lid body 5080. Then, a metal pan-head screw (not shown) is screwed and fixed from the through hole 5020ba formed in the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b toward the mounting boss holes 5040e and 5080e. As described above, the end faces of the mounting boss holes 5040e and 5080e do not protrude from the back surfaces of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b, and are fitted between the front and back surfaces of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b. The second distance dimension and the third distance dimension are set in advance.

  Subsequently, the flexible flat cable 5030 is connected between the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b and the metal plate 5020c along the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of the main body mounting portion 5020. Assembling of the light emitting effect unit 5000 is completed.

  Incidentally, a board such as a main control board that performs control related to game progress and game profit, a sub-control board that performs control related to effects executed as the game progresses, and an image control board that performs display control of an image display device, etc. Has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2)). By the way, the game balls supplied to the gaming machine from the game hall island facility are charged with static electricity when they circulate between the game hall island facility and the gaming machine, so they can be routed to the gaming machine. It is necessary to take measures against electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball for various wirings.

[Attaching method of flexible flat cable to LED board]

  Here, a method of attaching the flexible flat cable 5030 to the LED substrate 5070 will be described with reference to FIG. A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are inserted into the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 and inserted to the back. Electrically connected.

  Since the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are not normally inserted deep into the connector 5070d, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb and the plurality of flat conductors In some cases, contact failure may occur between the electrode 5030bb and the corresponding electrode of the connector 5070d.

  Therefore, on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, as shown in FIG. 259 (a), a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are connected to the connector 5070d. The upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 so as to be a mark inserted and inserted normally) A long solid line guide line G4U extending linearly in the left-right direction on the upper and outer sides, and a lower vicinity of a position corresponding to the lower side of the lower end of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) Corresponding position A long solid line guide line G4L extending linearly in the left-right direction on the lower side of the vicinity and a reinforcing plate 5030cb for reinforcing a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 A solid line guide line G4V extending in a straight line matching the vertical line of the left end side 5030cba is printed by silk printing.

  Note that no through hole is formed in the region where the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 is disposed. Even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 is exposed by rubbing the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 with the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, the flat type of the exposed flexible flat cable 5030 is exposed. This is to prevent the conductor from being short-circuited by the through hole.

[Relationship between flexible flat cable reinforcing plate and connector]
When inserting and inserting a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 into the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, the flat type The conductor electrode 5030bb faces the electrode of the connector 5070d and faces the back surface of the flexible flat cable 5030, whereas the reinforcing plate 5030ca for reinforcing the electrode 5030bb is the surface side of the flexible flat cable 5030. . Accordingly, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are normally inserted to the back of the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070. In the inserted state, as shown in FIG. 259 (b), the left end side 5030cba of the reinforcing plate 5030cb and the guide line G4V are arranged so as to overlap each other in the vertical direction. It should be noted that the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are not inserted to the back of the connector 5070d provided on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, that is, the insertion amount ( When the amount of pressing) is insufficient, as shown in FIG. 259 (c), the left end side 5030cba of the reinforcing plate 5030cb for reinforcing the electrode 5030bb by the amount of insufficient insertion SRT is separated from the guide line G4V. As described above, in the assembly line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine, the operator attaches the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 to the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070. It is possible to easily determine visually whether or not the electrode 5030bb is normally inserted to the back of the connector 5070d. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the efficiency of confirmation work.

  The plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are not normally inserted to the back of the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070. In an obliquely inserted state, the upper side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a cannot be visually recognized covering the guide line G4U extending linearly in the left-right direction, and the lower side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a extends linearly in the left-right direction. It will be in the state which has inclination with respect to the guideline G4L. Thus, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 by the guide lines G4U and G4L and the reinforcing plate 5030cb. It can be easily determined visually whether or not the connector 5070d is inserted normally. Thereby, in the assembly line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine, the operator can attach the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 to the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070. When it is inserted into the connector 5070d to be mounted, it can be easily determined visually whether or not the electrode 5030bb is normally inserted to the back of the connector 5070d. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the efficiency of confirmation work.

[Modification]
The flexible flat cable 5030 extends linearly in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the upper side of the main body 5030a of the main body 5030a (that is, the upper and outer sides of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). Left and right in the vicinity of the lower solid line guide line G4U and the position corresponding to the lower side of the lower end of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the lower side near the position corresponding to the lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) The long solid line guide line G4L extending in a straight line is printed by silk printing, but the rectangular region having the guide line G4U as the upper side and the guide line G4L as the lower side may be solidly printed by silk printing. . Even with this configuration, the upper side of the solid rectangular region functions as the guide line G4U, and the lower side of the solid rectangular region functions as the guide line G4L. Furthermore, even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 is exposed by rubbing the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 with the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 is The copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 covered with the resist is exposed without being exposed by preventing the resist from being peeled off by peeling off the silk printing in the solid rectangular region. It is possible to prevent the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 from being short-circuited.

  Also, the flexible flat cable 5030 linearly extends in the left-right direction in the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a (that is, the vicinity of the upper side of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). Left and right in the vicinity of the lower solid line guide line G4U and the position corresponding to the lower side of the lower end of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the lower side of the vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) The long solid line guide line G4L extending in a straight line is printed by silk printing, but the back surface of the LED substrate 5070 corresponding to the rectangular area having the guide line G4U as the upper side and the guide line G4L as the lower side and the area. (Solder side) 5070y It may be formed foil vent region in copper foil surface. Even with this configuration, the upper side of the foil-extracted rectangular area can function as the guide line G4U, and the lower side of the foil-extracted rectangular area can function as the guide line G4L. Further, the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 rubs against the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, so that the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 is exposed and the resist on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 is formed. Even if it peels off, the copper foil surface does not exist in the first place, that is, only the non-conductive base material of the LED substrate 5070 is exposed, so that it is possible to prevent the exposed flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 from being short-circuited. it can.

  Also, the flexible flat cable 5030 linearly extends in the left-right direction near the upper side corresponding to the upper side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a (that is, the upper and outer sides near the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). Left and right in the vicinity of the lower solid line guide line G4U and the position corresponding to the lower side of the lower end of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the lower side near the position corresponding to the lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) The long solid line guide line G4L extending in a straight line is printed by silk printing, but the guide line G4U can be obtained by removing a part of the copper foil from the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070. , G4L may be formed, or L Guidelines by not applying a partial region of a resist solution in the case of applying the resist solution on the copper foil surface of the back (solder surface) 5070Y of D substrate 5070 G4U, may G4L is formed.

  Further, after a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower surface side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are normally inserted into the connector 5070d on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 50700, the flexible flat cable A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of 5030 are disconnected from the connector 5070d, or a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030; Each electrode 5030bb and the corresponding electrode of the connector 5070d are obliquely misaligned and come into contact with other adjacent electrodes to prevent a short circuit, so that the flexible flat cable 5030 is connected to the back surface (solder surface) 5070 of the LED substrate 50700. It may be adhered to the fixed seal having a rectangular shape elongated in the vertical direction to secure the. In this case, as a region where the fixed seal is pasted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 50700, for example, a bracket (") shape is provided at a position slightly away from the position corresponding to the four corners of the fixed seal. (The figure may be a line, a symbol, etc.) may be formed by printing by silk printing, or the copper foil in a partial region on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 50700. A guideline in square brackets (") (may be a figure such as a line, a symbol, etc.) may be formed by removing the, and a resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 50700. In this case, a guideline in square brackets (“) (may be a line, a symbol, etc.) may be formed by not applying a part of the region with a resist solution. Disability By flat cable 5030 is fixed to the rear surface (solder side) 5070Y of the LED substrate 50700 by static seal, it is possible to fix the orientation of the flexible flat cable 5030.

  Also, the flexible flat cable 5030 linearly extends in the left-right direction in the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a (that is, the vicinity of the upper side of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). Left and right in the vicinity of the lower solid line guide line G4U and the position corresponding to the lower side of the lower end of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the lower side of the vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) A long solid line guide line G4L extending in a straight line and a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 in the vertical direction of the left end side 5030cba of the reinforcing plate 5030cb Straight line The solid line guide line G4V extending in a straight line is formed on the LED substrate 5070, but instead of the solid line, it may be a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line, and the insertion direction for the guide lines G4U and G4L may be changed. The guide line G4V may be an arrow line indicating the position of the left end side 5030cba of the reinforcing plate 5030cb.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the light emitting effect unit 5000 of FIG. 255 is provided as a decorative member. The light-emitting effect unit 5000 includes an LED substrate 5070 in FIG. 255 as a substrate, a light guide plate 5060 in FIG. 255 as a light guide member, a diffusion sheet 5050 in FIG. 255 as a transparent member, and a decorative body 5040 in FIG. . The LED substrate 5070 is mounted with the LED bare chip 5075 of FIG. 255 as a light emitting means. The light guide plate 5060 is disposed in front of the LED substrate 5070 and can emit light emitted from the LED bare chip 5075 forward. The diffusion sheet 5050 is disposed in front of the light guide plate 5060. The decorative body 5040 is disposed in front of the diffusion sheet 5050. The diffusion sheet 5050 has five white belt regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 having long strips in the left-right direction applied to the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050 in FIG. 258 as a non-transparent region at a position corresponding to at least the LED bare chip 5075. Is formed.

  Thus, although the light emitted from the LED bare chip 5075 that is a light emitting means is emitted to the diffusion sheet 5050 that is a transparent member through the light guide plate 5060 that is the light guide member, the light is emitted to the diffusion sheet 5050 that is the transparent member. Is formed with five white belt regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 having a long strip shape applied in the left-right direction on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050 which is an opaque region at a position corresponding to the LED bare chip 5075 which is a light emitting means. Therefore, the position where the LED bare chip 5075 as the light emitting means is mounted is coated with white paint on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050 which is an opaque region without being brightly illuminated in the decorative body 5040 as a point light source. Five white belt regions 5050c1-50 having a long belt shape in the left-right direction It is adapted to be softened by 0c5. Thereby, since it can contribute to making the surface 5060x which is the surface of the light-guide plate 5060 which is a light guide member which faces the diffusion sheet 5050 which is a transparent member uniformly shine, by the light emission effect of the decoration body 5040 which is a decoration body It is difficult to give the player a sense of incongruity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in game entertainment due to the light emission effect.

[Back light emission of pachinko machine]
Conventionally, the back side of the pachinko machine has only a control board and the like, and is not a part to be recognized by the player. In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 of the present example employs a novel structure that has not been conventionally used so that various work efficiencies for the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and the like can be improved. Hereinafter, a description will be given with reference to FIGS. 260 to 265.

  260 is a side view schematically showing light from the light emitting decorative body in the standby position when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the side, and FIG. 261 is in the appearance position when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the side. FIG. 262 is a side view schematically showing light from the light emitting decorative body, FIG. 262 is a view showing a back decorative board provided with a plurality of holes, and FIG. 263 shows a light emitting area on the back side of the pachinko machine. FIG. 264 is a perspective view showing a light emitting area on the side surface when the game board is viewed from the left front, and FIG. 265 is a perspective view showing a light emitting area on the side surface when the game board is viewed from the left rear. It is.

(About the light from the luminous decoration)
The game board 5 of this example is provided with an effect display device 1600 having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image, and is visually recognized from the front side, around the display area of the effect display device 1600. Are provided with a plurality of light-emitting decorative bodies. Further, the back unit 3000 is provided with a back box 3010 attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and having a square opening 3030a on the rear wall. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, while the various units having the light emitting decorations are located in front of the effect display device 1600 inside the back box 3010. It is attached.

  As the light emitting decorative body of this example, a back front rotating decorative body 3410, a back upper front decorative body 3421, a back upper rear decorative body 3451, a back rear movable decorative body 3110, and the like are provided. As for the LED mounted on the board, there are a case where light is emitted as part of the effect when the symbol is variably displayed and a case where light is emitted as decoration of the game board 5 when the symbol is not variably displayed.

  First, the back upper front decorative body 3410 and the back front decorative body 3421 will be described with reference to FIGS. 260 and 261. As described above in detail, when viewed from the front side of the game board 5, the back front front decoration body 3421 of the back top effect unit 3400 is provided above the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the back top front decoration. A back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 is attached to a position on the center front side of the body 3421. More specifically, the back front rotating decorative body 3410 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom, and is composed of a non-translucent part and a translucent lens part. Further, the back front decorative body 3421 has two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back front rotating decorative body 3410 at the center in the left-right direction, and the back petals are arranged between the front petals. It is formed in such a shape that it is rotated so as to be positioned between them, and there is almost no non-translucent part, and almost the whole is a translucent lens part. Note that the “translucent lens portion” is a portion having a lens cut shape that bends light, and makes the light emitting decoration more visually pleasing when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 260, on the back side of the back front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back front front decorative body 3421, a back front decorative board 3422 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface is attached. The front back decorative substrate 3422 extends to the left and right over substantially the entire length of the back front decorative body 3421 in the left-right direction. And the back front front decoration board | substrate 3422 light-emits several LED mounted in the front, and the light which goes ahead from several LED is the lens of the back top front rotation decoration body 3410 and the back top front decoration body 3421. The lens part of the back upper front decorative body 3410 and the back front front decorative body 3421 can be illuminated and decorated.

  In addition, a top view type LED is mounted as a plurality of LEDs on the front surface of the back front front decorative board 3422 (a surface portion facing the front side facing the player). The top-view type LED can emit light toward the front (player side) of the back front front decorative board 3422. For this reason, it is possible to efficiently irradiate light to the lens portions of the back front front decorative body 3410 and the back front front decorative body 3421 positioned in the front, and the back top front rotational decorative body 3410 and the back top front decorative body. The lens portion 3421 can be brightly decorated.

  In addition, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on a surface portion of the front surface of the front front decorative substrate 3422 except for a plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounting components. A coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate light to the lens parts of the back front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back front decorative body 3421, and the lens parts of the back front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back front front decorative body 3421. Can be brightly decorated. The front front decorative board 3422 is such that the front of the front front decorative board 3422 passes through the lens portions of the front front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back front decorative body 3421, particularly when the LED is not emitting light. There is a possibility of being visible from the side. In this regard, by having the front surface of the back front decorative substrate 3422 having a coating film made of a white solder resist, the lens part of the back front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back front front decorative body 3421 can be used. From the player side, the lens part can be recognized only in white, and the lowering of interest due to the front surface of the front front decorative substrate 3422 being visible can be suppressed.

  In addition, a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the rear surface of the back front front decorative board 3422 (the rear surface facing the back of the gaming machine) in this example. As the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back front decorative board 3422, a top view type LED is mounted, and behind the back front decorative board 3422 (opposite the player side. In other words, pachinko. It is possible to irradiate light toward the back side of the machine 1.

  Further, the back front front decorative substrate 3422 has a coating film made of a white solder resist on the surface portion excluding a plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounting parts not only on the front surface but also on the rear surface. is doing. As described above, the coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with a high reflectance. For this reason, light can be efficiently irradiated toward the back of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422.

  As shown in FIG. 260, in the state where the back upper back decorative body 3440 and the back upper back decorative body 3451 are in the retracted position, the back upper rear rotational decoration is located behind the left side portion of the front front decorative substrate 3422 in the left-right direction. Since the body 3440 and the rear back decoration body 3451 are positioned, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back front decoration board 3422 is reflected by the back rear rotation decoration body 3440 and the back upper decoration body 3451. It will be irradiated towards. A part of such light is reflected by the back upper back decorative body 3440 and the back upper back decorative body 3451, and the back front front decorative board 3422 (the back front front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421). Then, the light is leaked from the gap between the back upper back decorative body 3440 and the back rear decorative body 3451, and such leaked light (light leakage) is visible to the player. Become. In this way, not only the back front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back front decorative body 3421 emit light but also light leaks from the back side of the back front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back front decorative body 3421. Therefore, it is possible to execute a light emission effect that makes the player feel a sense of depth.

  In addition, in the state in which the back upper back decorative body 3440 and the back upper back decorative body 3451 are in the retracted position, the back upper rear rotational decorative body 3440 and the rear upper back The rear decoration body 3451 is not located. Further, in the state where the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is in the retracted position, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is not positioned behind the upper portion in the vertical direction of the back front front decorative substrate 3422. In addition, the effect display device 1600 is not located behind the upper portion in the vertical direction of the back front decorative substrate 3422. From this, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back front decorative board 3422 includes a back rear rotating decorative body 3440, a back upper decorative body 3451, a back rear movable decorative body 3110, Without being blocked by the effect display device 1600, the direct irradiation is performed toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the back upper front decorative substrate 3422. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent part), and the transparent part can transmit light with high transmittance. For this reason, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back front decorative board 3422 passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010 and further transparent of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 near the site can be viewed brightly.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 261, in the state in which the back upper back decorative body 3440 and the back upper back decorative body 3451 are in the appearance positions, The rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the rear upper decorative body 3451 are not located. Further, in the state where the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is in the appearance position, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is not positioned behind the upper portion in the vertical direction of the back top front decorative substrate 3422. In addition, the effect display device 1600 is not located behind the upper portion in the vertical direction of the back front decorative substrate 3422. Therefore, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the front back decorative substrate 3422 is transmitted to the back rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back upper decorative body 3451, the back rear movable decorative body 3110, and the effect display device. Irradiation is performed toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 without being blocked by 1600. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent part), and the transparent part can transmit light with high transmittance. For this reason, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back front decorative board 3422 passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010 and further transparent of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 near the site can be viewed brightly.

  Next, the back upper back decorative body 3440 and the back rear decorative body 3451 will be described with reference to FIGS. 260 and 261. As described above in detail, the back upper back decorative body 3451 of the back up / down decorative body unit 3450 is provided behind the back front front decorative body 3421, and is located at the front side of the back top rear decorative body 3451. The back and rear rotating decorative body 3440 is attached. More specifically, the back and rear rotating decorative body 3440 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom, and is composed of a non-translucent part and a translucent lens part. In addition, the back upper decorative body 3451 is configured such that two petals of the same size as the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440 are overlapped on the front and rear, and the rear petal is positioned between the front petals. It is formed in such a shape that it is rotated so that there is almost no non-light-transmitting part and almost the whole is a light-transmitting lens part. Note that the “translucent lens portion” is a portion having a lens cut shape that bends light, and makes the light emitting decoration more visually pleasing when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 260, on the rear side of the back rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back top rear decorative body 3451, a back rear decorative board 3452 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface is attached. The back upper back decorative board 3452 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface so that light directed forward from the plurality of LEDs is directed to the lens portions of the back upper back decorative body 3440 and the back upper back decorative body 3451. At this time, the lens portions of the back upper back decorative body 3440 and the back upper back decorative body 3451 can be illuminated and decorated.

  In addition, the back-upper rear decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 can move from the retracted position to the appearance position when a predetermined production condition is satisfied. In a state where the back upper rear decorative body 3440 and the back upper rear decorative body 3451 are in the retracted position, they are located behind the back upper front decorative body 3421 and are not visible to the player. At this time, the tank rail 553 is located at the rear of the upper rear back decoration body 3440 and the upper back decoration body 3451, whereas the back rear rotation decoration body 3440 and the back upper decoration body 3451. An effect display device 1600 is located behind the lower part of the screen. In addition, in a state where the back-upside rear decorative body 3440 and the back-upper back decorative body 3451 have moved to the appearance position, they are positioned in front of the effect display device 1600 and are visible to the player.

  Also, a top view type LED is mounted as a plurality of LEDs on the front surface of the back-upside rear decorative board 3452 (the surface facing the front side facing the player). The top view type LED can irradiate light toward the front (player side) of the back / upper back decorative board 3452. For this reason, it is possible to efficiently irradiate light to the lens portions of the back rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back upper decorative body 3451 positioned in front, and the back rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back upper decorative body. The 3451 lens portion can be brightly decorated.

  In addition, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on a surface portion of the front surface of the back and back decorative substrate 3451 except for a plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounting components. A coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). For this reason, it is possible to efficiently irradiate light to the lens portions of the back rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back rear decorative body 3451, and the lens portions of the back rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back upper rear decorative body 3451. Can be brightly decorated. Further, the back-side back decoration board 3452 is such that the front side of the back-side back decoration board 3452 is a player through the lens portions of the back-side back rotation decoration body 3440 and the back-side back decoration body 3451, particularly when the LED is not emitting light. There is a possibility of being visible from the side. In this regard, by providing the front surface of the back upper decorative substrate 3451 with a coating film made of a white solder resist, even through the lens portions of the back rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back upper rear decorative body 3451, From the player side, the lens part can be recognized only in white, and the lowering of interest due to the fact that the front surface of the back and rear decoration board 3451 is visible can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 260, in the state where the back upper back decorative body 3440 and the back upper back decorative body 3451 are in the retracted position, the back upper front The rotating decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421 are located. Therefore, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-upper back decoration board 3352 is reflected by the back-up front front decoration body 3410 and the back-up front decoration body 3421, and the back-upper back decoration board 3452. It will be irradiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 which are located behind. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent part), and the transparent part can transmit light with high transmittance. For this reason, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the front back decorative board 3452 passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010, and further the transparent of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 near the site can be viewed brightly.

  In addition, a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the rear surface (the rear surface facing the back of the gaming machine) of the back upper back decorative board 3452 of this example. As the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back rear decorative board 3452, a top view type LED is mounted, and behind the back upper back decorative board 3452 (on the opposite side to the player side. In other words, pachinko. It is possible to irradiate light toward the back side of the machine 1.

  Further, the back upper back decorative substrate 3452 is not only the front surface but also the rear surface, and a coating film made of a white solder resist on the surface portion excluding a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface and other mounting components. have. As described above, the coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with a high reflectance. For this reason, it is possible to efficiently irradiate light toward the rear side of the back upper back decorative substrate 3451.

  As shown in FIG. 260, in the state where the back upper back decorative body 3440 and the back upper rear decorative body 3451 are in the retracted position, the back upper rear decorative body 3110 is back regardless of whether or not the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is in the retracted position. The back movable movable ornament 3110 is not located behind the upper portion of the decoration substrate 3452 in the vertical direction. In addition, the effect display device 1600 is not located behind the upper part in the vertical direction of the back / upper decorative board 3451. From this, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-upper back decoration board 3452 is not blocked by the back-back movable decoration body 3110 and the effect display device 1600, and the The light is directly irradiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located at the rear. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent part), and the transparent part can transmit light with high transmittance. For this reason, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper decorative board 3452 passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010 and further near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting area L1 can be viewed brightly.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 261, in the state where the back-upper rear decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 are in the appearance positions, they are positioned in front of the effect display device 1600. Light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface is not irradiated toward the back box 3010 or the tank rail 553. For this reason, in the state in which the back rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back rear decorative body 3451 are in the appearance position, control is performed so that the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper back decorative board 3452 do not emit light. .

  Next, the back movable ornament 3110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 260 and 261. As described above in detail, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 of the back rear rendering unit 3100 is provided behind the back top rear decorative body 3451. More specifically, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 extends in the left-right direction, and has a transparent flat-shaped decorative body 3111 having a decoration that forms a part of the decorative portion 3150 by a relief-shaped unevenness. And a translucent sheet-like decorative sheet 3112 provided with a decoration (pattern) that is provided behind the decorative body 3111 and forms the rest of the decorative portion 3150, and provided behind the decorative sheet 3112. A transparent flat plate-shaped light guide radiation plate 3113, and a back and back decoration board 3114 provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113 and having a plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b mounted on the front surface. Yes. The back decorative board 3114 emits the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the front surface, so that light directed forward from the plurality of LEDs reaches the decorative body 3111, and the decorative body 3111 (rear side) The movable decorative body 3110) can be illuminated.

  As shown in FIG. 261, the back movable decorative body 3110 can move from the retracted position to the appearance position when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. In a state where the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is in the retracted position, it is positioned behind the back top front decorative body 3421 and is not visible to the player. At this time, the tank rail 553 is located behind the upper back of the back movable decorative body 3110, whereas the effect display device 1600 is located behind the lower back of the back movable decorative body 3110. . Further, in a state where the back movable decorative body 3110 has moved to the appearance position, it is positioned in front of the effect display device 1600 and can be visually recognized by the player.

  In addition, on the front surface of the back decorative board 3114 (surface facing the front side facing the player), as a plurality of LEDs, a plurality of side view type first LEDs 3114a and a plurality of top view type second LEDs 3114b Has been implemented. The first LED 3114a of the side view type can irradiate light toward the front (player side) of the back rear decoration board 3114, whereas the second LED 3114b of the top view type has a back rear decoration board. Light can be emitted toward the side of 3114. The back movable decorative body 3110 is provided with a transparent flat light guide radiation plate 3113, and the first LED 3114 a and the second LED 3114 b of the back back decoration substrate 3114 emit light toward the light guide radiation plate 3113. By irradiating, the light guide radiation plate 3113 emits light toward the front, and the decorative body 3111 can be irradiated with light uniformly uniformly, and the decorative body 3111 (back movable movable decoration body 3110). ) Is easily visible and can be decorated with light emission.

  In addition, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on a surface portion of the front surface of the back decorative substrate 3114 except for a plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounting components. A coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). For this reason, light can be efficiently irradiated to the decorative body 3111, and the decorative body 3111 (back movable decorative body 3110) can be brightly decorated. Further, the back back decorative board 3114 may be visible from the player side through the decorative body 3111 of the back back movable decorative body 3110, particularly when the LED is not emitting light. is there. In this regard, by providing the front surface of the back-side decorative substrate 3114 with a coating film made of a white solder resist, the decorative body 3111 can be seen from the player side even through the decorative body 3111 of the back-back movable decorative body 3110. Can be recognized as white, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the front surface of the back decorative substrate 3114 being visible.

  As shown in FIG. 260, in the state where the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is in the retracted position, the back top front rotating decorative body 3410, the back top front decorative body 3421, and the back top back A decorative body 3451 is located. Therefore, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back and back decorative board 3114 is reflected by the back and front front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back and front decorative body 3421 and the back and back decorative body 3451. Irradiation is performed toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the back movable movable body 3110. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent part), and the transparent part can transmit light with high transmittance. For this reason, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back movable decorative body 3110 passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010 and further near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting area L1 can be viewed brightly.

  Further, light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decorative substrate 3114 is diffused in the light guide radiation plate 3113 and irradiated toward the front of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Irradiation also occurs from the top, bottom, left, and right ends of the radiation plate 3113 toward the side of the light guide radiation plate 3113. That is, light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is passed through the light guide radiation plate 3113 from the top, bottom, left, and right ends of the light guide radiation plate 3113. The light is irradiated toward the side surface of the back box 3010 located on the side of the light guide radiation plate 3113). The back box 3010 partially uses a transparent member (transparent portion), and the transparent portion can transmit light with high transmittance. For this reason, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decorative board 3114 emits light near the transparent portion on the side surface of the back box 3010 on the side of the pachinko machine 1 via the light guide radiation plate 3113. The region L2 and the light emitting region L3 can be viewed brightly.

  In addition, light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decorative substrate 3114 is emitted from the top, bottom, left, and right ends of the light guide radiation plate 3113. A part of the light emitted from the rear side is emitted toward the upper rear side of the back rear decorative substrate 3114. In the state where the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is in the retracted position, the effect display device 1600 is not positioned above and behind the back back decorative substrate 3114. That is, light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decorative board 3114 is blocked by the effect display device 1600 from the upper end portion of the light guide radiation plate 3113 via the light guide radiation plate 3113. Instead, the light is irradiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 that are located above and behind the back decorative board 3114 (light guide radiation plate 3113). The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent part), and the transparent part can transmit light with high transmittance. For this reason, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decorative board 3114 passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010 and further emits light near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The region L1 can be viewed brightly.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 260, in the state where the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is in the appearance position, it is located in front of the effect display device 1600. Light from the LED is not irradiated toward the back box 3010 or the tank rail 553.

  In this example, a transparent flat light guide radiation plate 3113 is provided in the back movable decorative body 3110, and light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back back decorative substrate 3114 is guided. Although it is diffused in the light radiation plate 3113, the light guide radiation plate 3113 may not be provided. In such a case, the front side of the back-side decorative substrate 3114 is irradiated with light toward the side of the back-back decorative substrate 3114 or toward the upper rear side of the back-back decorative substrate 3114. An LED 3114a is preferably provided. Also by this, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is irradiated toward the side surface of the back box 3010 located on the side of the back rear decorative substrate 3114, and the pachinko machine 1 The light emitting region L2 and the light emitting region L3 in the vicinity of the transparent portion on the side surface of the back box 3010 on the side can be viewed brightly. Further, light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is irradiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 that are positioned above and behind the back rear decorative substrate 3114, and the back box 3010. The light emitting region L1 in the vicinity of the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 can be seen brightly.

  Although the back box 3010 of this example is partially provided with a transparent portion, the back box 3010 may be provided with a penetrating portion instead of the transparent portion. Even in such a case, the light from the LED of the light emitting decorative body can pass through the penetrating portion of the back box 3010. For example, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the front back decorative board 3422 passes through the bright part of the back box 3010 and further passes through the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 in the vicinity of the transparent part can be viewed brightly.

  Further, the back box 3010 of this example is provided with a transparent portion that is a transparent portion and a non-translucent portion. The non-transparent portion is provided on the back side thereof (the back side of the pachinko machine 1). It is possible to reflect the light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.) with white printing or white coating on the side that will become) or mirror surface printing or mirror surface processing. I have to. Thereby, the light directed to the non-light-transmitting part can efficiently reflect the light to the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be viewed brightly.

  Moreover, about the above-mentioned light emission decoration body, the light from several LED mounted in the front surface of various decoration boards is not only irradiated toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1, but the back side of the pachinko machine 1 Irradiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 which are located on the front of the decorative board (such as a decorative board of a light-emitting decorative body other than the above-described light-emitting decorative body) which is to be specialized for production. About the light from several LED, it is comprised so that it may not irradiate toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 which are located in the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. Specifically, for a decorative board that should be specialized for production, the mounting surface is formed with a coating film made of a green or black solder resist or sealed in a box, thereby diffusing light from the LED. The point light emission is suppressed and the light from the LED is clearly visible.

  As another example, the back decorative substrate 3114 may be provided with a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction. Such another example will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 262, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is emitted toward the decorative body 3111 positioned in front of the back upper decorative substrate 3492. A part of the light emitted toward the decorative body 3111 is reflected and goes toward the back of the decorative body 3111. When a plurality of holes are provided in the back rear decorative substrate 3114, the reflected light of the light irradiated toward the decorative body 3111 passes through the plurality of holes and goes to the rear of the back rear decorative substrate 3114. It becomes possible. Note that a decorative body base 3115 is attached to the back side of the back back decorative substrate 3114 so as to cover the back side of the back back decorative substrate 3114, but in a plurality of holes provided in the back back decorative substrate 3114. A hole is provided at each corresponding position. As a result, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is reflected by the decorative body 3111 and passes through the plurality of holes provided in the back rear decorative substrate 3114. Thus, it is possible to efficiently irradiate light toward the back of the back decorative substrate 3114. That is, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is reflected by the decorative body 3111 and passes through the plurality of holes provided in the back rear decorative substrate 3114. Irradiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 that are located behind (upper and rear) the back decorative board 3114, passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010, and further the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 The light emitting region L1 in the vicinity of the transparent portion can be viewed brightly.

  In the above, the back decorative board 3114 is provided with a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction. The size of these holes is as small as possible. For example, the back decorative board 3114 is mounted on the front surface of the back decorative board 3114. It is preferable that the LED is formed smaller than the LED. For example, when the size of the hole provided in the back back decorative substrate 3114 is large, light from the back of the back back decorative substrate 3114 (for example, light emitted from the effect display device 1600) 3114 is easy to enter through the hole provided in 3114, and even if the LED mounted on the front surface of the back decorative board 3114 is turned off, it may appear as if it is turned on. Such adverse effects can be reduced by reducing the size of the holes provided in the post-decorative substrate 3114.

  Similarly, the back and back decorative substrate 3114 is provided with a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction. The number of holes is as small as possible, and is mounted on the front surface of the back and back decorative substrate 3114, for example. It is preferable to form fewer than the number of LEDs. For example, when the number of holes provided in the back and back decoration board 3114 is increased, light from the back of the back and back decoration board 3114 (for example, light emitted from the effect display device 1600) 3114 is easy to enter through the hole provided in 3114, and even when the LED mounted on the front surface of the back decorative board 3114 is turned off, it may appear as if it is turned on. Such adverse effects can be reduced by reducing the number of holes provided in the post-decorative substrate 3114.

  In the above description, a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided in the back and back decorative board 3114. Similarly, a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction are also applied to the back front decorative board 3422 and the back back decorative board 3452. Holes may be provided. Also by this, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back front decorative board 3422 is reflected on the back front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back front front decorative body 3421, Through a plurality of holes provided in the front decorative substrate 3422, light can be efficiently emitted toward the rear of the back front decorative substrate 3422. Further, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back upper back decoration board 3452 is reflected by the back rear back decoration body 3440 and the back rear back decoration body 3451, and the back top back decoration. Through a plurality of holes provided in the substrate 3452, it is possible to efficiently irradiate light toward the rear side of the back upper back decorative substrate 3452. That is, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back front decorative substrate 3422 or the back back decorative substrate 3451 becomes reflected light, and the back front decorative substrate 3422 or the back rear decorative substrate. It is irradiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the 3452, passes through the transparent part of the back box 3010, and further, the light emitting region L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 Bright and visible.

  Next, the back front left decorative body 3713 and the back front right decorative body 3813 are not shown in FIGS. 260 and 261, but will be described below. As described in detail above, when viewed from the front side of the game board 5, the back front left decorative body 3713 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 is provided on the left side of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the effect display is performed. On the right side of the display area of the apparatus 1600, a front right decorative body 3813 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810 is provided. More specifically, the back front left decorative body 3713 and the back front right decorative body 3813 are provided with patterns such as characters, items, logos, etc. in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1, and the non-translucent portion and the transparent portion. It consists of an optical lens part. Note that the “translucent lens portion” is a portion having a lens cut shape that bends light, and makes the light emitting decoration more visually pleasing when viewed from the front.

  A back front left decorative substrate 3714 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface is attached to the rear side of the back front left decorative body 3713. The front left decorative board 3714 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, so that light directed forward from the plurality of LEDs reaches the lens portion of the front left decorative body 3713, and the front front left The lens portion of the decorative body 3713 can be decorated with light emission. In addition, the front left decorative board 3714 may be visible from the player side through the lens portion of the front left decorative body 3713, particularly when the LED is not emitting light. There is. In this regard, by providing the front surface of the front left decorative substrate 3714 with a coating film made of a white solder resist, the lens portion is seen from the player side even through the lens portion of the front left decorative body 3713. It can be recognized only in white, and a decrease in interest due to the fact that the front surface of the front left decorative substrate 3714 is visible can be suppressed.

  In addition, a side view type LED is mounted as a plurality of LEDs on the front surface of the back front left decorative board 3714 (a surface portion facing the front side facing the player). The side view type LED is capable of irradiating light toward the front (player side) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 by reflecting light on the front surface of the back front left decorative substrate 3714. For this reason, light can be efficiently applied to the lens portion of the front left decorative body 3713 located in front, and the lens portion of the front left decorative body 3713 can be brightly decorated.

  In addition, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on a surface portion of the front surface of the back front decorative substrate 3714 except for a plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounting components. A coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). For this reason, light can be efficiently applied to the lens portion of the front left decorative body 3713, and the lens portion of the front left decorative body 3713 can be brightly decorated.

  In the above description, the side view type LED is directed to the left side so that light is emitted toward the left side of the front left decorative substrate 3714 on the front left decorative substrate 3714. In other words, on the left side of the back front decorative board 3714, the left side of the back box 3010 closer to the back decorative board 3114 is located on the left side of the back box 3010. The direction of the side view type LED Is provided facing the left side of the back box 3010. For this reason, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the front left decorative substrate 3714 is irradiated toward the left side surface of the back box 3010 located on the left side of the front front left decorative substrate 3714. It becomes. The back box 3010 partially uses a transparent member (transparent portion), and the transparent portion can transmit light with high transmittance. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 264, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the front left decorative board 3714 is a light emitting region near the transparent portion on the left side surface of the back box 3010 behind the pachinko machine 1. L2 can be visually recognized brightly.

  The back front right decorative body 3813 has the same configuration as that of the back front left decorative body 3713, and the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back front right decorative board 3814 receives the back front right decorative board 3814. It is comprised so that it may irradiate toward the right side surface of the back box 3010 located in the right side. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 265, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the front right decorative board 3814 is a transparent portion of the light emitting region L3 on the right side surface of the back box 3010 behind the pachinko machine 1. The vicinity can be seen brightly.

  Next, the back bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 260 and 261. As described above in detail, when viewed from the front side of the game board 5, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 of the lower back middle effect unit 3300 is provided in the lower center of the display area of the effect display device 1600. More specifically, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 has six number decorations formed in a relief shape from “1” to “6” on the entire surface, and is 60 degrees clockwise from the center. It arrange | positions on the periphery for every angle, and is comprised by the non-light-transmitting site | part and the translucent lens site | part. Note that the “translucent lens portion” is a portion having a lens cut shape that bends light, and makes the light emitting decoration more visually pleasing when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 260, a back lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface is attached to the rear side of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. The lower back middle rotary decorative body 3310 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, so that light traveling forward from the plurality of LEDs reaches the lens portion of the lower back middle rotary decorative body 3310, and the back surface. The lens part of the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be decorated with light emission.

  As shown in FIG. 261, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can move from the retracted position to the appearance position when a predetermined performance condition is satisfied. In the state where the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the retracted position, it is located behind the game panel 1100 forming the game area 5a and is visible to the player. At this time, the back box 3010 and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 are located behind the back lower middle rotary decorative body 3310. In addition, in the state where the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 has moved to the appearance position, it is located in front of the effect display device 1600 and can be visually recognized by the player.

  In addition, a top view type LED is mounted as a plurality of LEDs on the front surface (surface portion facing the front side facing the player) of the first bottom decorative substrate 3322. The top view type LED can emit light toward the front (player side) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back. For this reason, it is possible to efficiently irradiate light to the lens portion of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 located in front, and the lens portion of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be brightly decorated.

  In addition, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on a surface portion of the front surface of the first decorative substrate 3322 under the back surface except for a plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounting components. Yes. A coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). For this reason, it is possible to efficiently irradiate light to the lens part of the back lower middle rotary decorative body 3310, and it is possible to brightly decorate the lens part of the lower back middle rotary decorative body 3310. In addition, the front lower back first decorative board 3322 is visually recognized from the player side through the lens portion of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, particularly when the LED is not emitting light. There is a possibility of being able to do it. In this regard, by having the front surface of the first underside back decorative substrate 3322 having a coating film made of a white solder resist, even from the player side, even through the lens portion of the back underside rotating decorative body 3310. The lens part can be recognized only in white, and the lowering of interest due to the fact that the front surface of the first decorative substrate 3322 is visible in the lower back can be suppressed.

  In addition, a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the rear surface of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back of the present example (the rear surface facing the back of the gaming machine). As the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, a top view type LED is mounted, and behind the lower back middle first decorative board 3322 (on the opposite side to the player side). In other words, it is possible to irradiate light toward the back side of the pachinko machine 1).

  As shown in FIG. 260, in the state where the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the retracted position, the back box 3010 and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 are located behind the first lower back middle decorative board 3322. ing. The back box 3010 partially uses a transparent member (transparent portion), and the transparent portion can transmit light with high transmittance. However, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is located behind the back box 3010, and light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the first decorative board 3322 in the lower back is behind Although the irradiation is performed so as to brighten the vicinity of the light emitting region L4 in the vicinity of the transparent portion of the back box 3010, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 blocks the light.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 261, in the state where the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the appearance position, it is located in front of the effect display device 1600. For this reason, in the state where the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the appearance position, control is performed so that the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the first lower back middle decorative board 3322 do not emit light.

  From the above, as the light-emitting decorative body that brightens the back side or the side surface of the pachinko machine 1, the back top front rotating decorative body 3410, the back top front decorative body 3421, and the back top back decorative body are provided in the upper part of the game board 5. 3451, a back rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided, and on the left side of the game board 5, three back front left decorative body units 3710 are provided, and on the right side of the game board 5, three back front right decorative bodies are provided. A unit 3810 is provided. And as shown in FIG. 263, the light emitting decoration provided in the upper part of the game board 5 brightens the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIG. 264. The light emitting decorative body provided on the left side of the game board 5 visually recognizes the pachinko machine 1 from the rear, and brightens the light emitting region L2 near the transparent portion of the right side surface of the back box 3010 (the right side surface of the pachinko machine 1). 265, the light-emitting decorative body provided on the right side of the game board 5 visually recognizes the pachinko machine 1 from the rear and near the transparent portion of the left side surface of the back box 3010 (left side surface of the pachinko machine 1). The light emitting region L3 is brightened.

(Advantages of providing a light emitting area on the back side of the pachinko machine)
In general, the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility provided in a game hall. Specifically, a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed in a row on one side of the island facility, or a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row on both sides of the island facility. Or And in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility, the inside is blocked and darkened. By the way, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, control members such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, wiring for connecting the control members, a supply mechanism for a game ball B used for games, and the like are arranged. In some cases, maintenance is required for a predetermined portion on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. For example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed on both sides of the island facility in a line, the pachinko machine 1 on one side of the island facility is opened and the pachinko machine 1 on the other side is opened. Although it is possible to maintain the back surface, the interior of the island facility is dark, so the visibility of the location to be maintained is poor, and visual inspection on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 is difficult. Further, the pachinko machine 1 can open and close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 with one side as an axis. For the pachinko machine 1 that requires maintenance, the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 Can be opened and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be maintained. However, in a state where the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, light from outside (hole light) is applied to a portion of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 far from the open axis of the main body frame 4. While it is easy to reach and can be viewed brightly, it is difficult for light from outside (hole light) to reach the part near the open axis of the main body frame 4 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, Cannot see brightly. That is, when the location to be maintained is a portion near the open shaft of the main body frame 4, the visibility of the location to be maintained is poor, and the visual operation on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is difficult.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the plurality of light emitting decorations provided on the game board 5 brighten the front side of the pachinko machine 1 for decoration purposes, and the back side and the side are other than decorations. It is configured to brighten for the purpose of. Specifically, the light from the LED mounted on the light emitting decorative body is directed not only to the front side of the pachinko machine 1 but also to the back side and the side, and the light passes through the transparent part of the back box 3010. By being configured to pass, the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the light emitting region L2 and light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the side surface side of the pachinko machine 1 are brightened. be able to. For example, the light irradiating the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 can pass through the transparent parts of the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 and further brighten the back of the pachinko machine 1. That is, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility, the inside is blocked and darkened, but by brightening the back of the pachinko machine 1, the interior of the island facility can be brightened. Thereby, when maintaining the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, the visibility of the location which should be maintained becomes favorable, and the efficiency of the visual inspection of the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  In this example, the plurality of light-emitting decorative bodies provided on the game board 5 serve both to brighten the front side of the pachinko machine 1 and to brighten the back side and side of the pachinko machine 1. It is configured to do. For example, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to brighten the back of the pachinko machine 1 by providing an LED that can emit light toward the rear side. The number of parts increases and the cost increases. In this regard, the plurality of light emitting decorations that brighten the front side of the pachinko machine 1 also serves to brighten the back side and the side of the pachinko machine 1, thereby preventing an increase in cost. it can.

  In addition, in this example, although it has comprised so that the light from LED of the some light emission decoration provided in the game board 5 may lighten the back side and the side of the pachinko machine 1, Since it is not desirable that the LED light source is directly viewed during the maintenance on the back side or the side surface, the light source of the LED that makes the back side or side surface of the pachinko machine 1 brighter is the It is configured to be indirect light that is not directly viewed. For example, the back front decorative body 3421 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back front decorative board 3422, and can emit light toward the back (back side) of the pachinko machine 1. However, when viewed from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, when viewing the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553), a cover body is provided on the LED so that the LED light source is not directly viewed, The light from the LED is configured to be indirect light. Thereby, when maintaining the pachinko machine 1, it can prevent that the light from LED which made the back side of the pachinko machine 1 brighten obstructs work.

(About the characteristic structure of the light emitting decorative body of this example)
The light-emitting decorative body of this example is devised in various ways so that not only the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is brightened for the purpose of decoration but also the back side and the side surface are brightened for purposes other than decoration. As described above in detail, specific configurations include the following configurations.

  First, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back back decorative substrate 3114 and can emit light toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1. In the state where the back movable ornament 3110 is in the retracted position, the front back front rotating decorative body 3410, the back front front decorative body 3421, and the back rear back decorative body 3451 are located in front of the back rear movable decorative body 3110. Yes. Therefore, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back and back decorative board 3114 is reflected by the back and front front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back and front decorative body 3421 and the back and back decorative body 3451. Irradiation is indirectly directed toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the back decorative board 3114. Accordingly, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back back decorative board 3114 illuminates and decorates the back back movable decorative body 3110 and brightens the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Passing through 3010, the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened, and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened.

  The back rear movable decorative body 3110 of this example is decorated by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back rear decorative board 3114, but in front of the back rear movable decorative body 3110, The upper front rotating decorative body 3410, the back upper front decorative body 3421, and the back upper rear decorative body 3451 have a larger area than the back rear movable decorative body 3110. For this reason, when the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back rear decorative board 3114 is reflected on the back front front decorative body 3410, the back front front decorative body 3421, and the back top rear decorative body 3451. In addition, it is diffused to a wider area than the back movable decorative body 3110. Thereby, the light emission region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 can be widened, and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be efficiently brightened.

  In the above, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on the rear surface of the back upper front decorative body 3421 and the rear surface of the back upper rear decorative body 3451. A coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). For this reason, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back rear decorative board 3114 is reflected with high reflectance on the rear surface of the back upper front decorative body 3421 and the rear surface of the rear upper decorative body 3451. Thus, the light is efficiently irradiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 which are located behind the back back decorative substrate 3114. Thereby, the light emission area | region L1 near the transparent site | part of the tank rail 553 in the back of the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened, and the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened efficiently.

  Next, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back back decorative substrate 3114, and can emit light toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1. However, as described as another example, by providing a plurality of holes penetrating in the back-and-forth direction on the back back decorative substrate 3114, the reflected light of the light irradiated toward the decorative body 3111 of the back back movable decorative body 3110 is reflected. Through the plurality of holes, it is possible to go to the back of the back decorative substrate 3114. That is, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is reflected by the decorative body 3111 and passes through the plurality of holes provided in the back rear decorative substrate 3114. Irradiation is performed toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 that are located behind (upper and rear) the back decorative board 3114. As a result, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back back decorative board 3114 illuminates the back back movable decorative body 3110 and brightens the front side of the pachinko machine 1. By passing through the transparent portion 3010, the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened, and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened.

  Next, the back front decorative body 3421 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back front decorative board 3422, and can emit light toward the back (back side) of the pachinko machine 1. Yes. Behind the back upper front decorative body 3421, a portion where the back upper rear decorative body 3440 and the back upper rear decorative body 3451 and the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 are located at the retracted position, and the back upper rear rotational decorative body 3440, the back upper decorative body 3451, and the back rear movable decorative body 3110 are not located. Among these, the back rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back rear decorative body 3451, and the part where the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is located at the retracted position are mounted on the rear surface of the back front decorative board 3422. The light from the plurality of LEDs is reflected by the rear rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the rear upper decorative body 3451 and the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 located at the rear, and directed toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1. Will be irradiated. On the other hand, the back box 3010 and the tank rail that are located behind the back top front decorative board 3422 for the part where the back top back decorative body 3440, the back top back decorative body 3451, and the back back movable decorative body 3110 are not located. Irradiation directly toward 553 is performed. Thereby, in addition to the role which makes the front side of the pachinko machine 1 bright, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the front decorative board 3422 on the back passes through the back box 3010, and the pachinko machine 1 The light emitting region L1 in the vicinity of the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 on the rear side can be brightened, and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened.

  Next, as the light emitting decorative body, a back upper front rotating decorative body 3410, a back upper front decorative body 3421, a back upper rear decorative body 3451, and a rear rear movable decorative body 3110 are provided in the upper part of the game board 5. On the left side of the game board 5, three back front left decorative body units 3710 are provided, and on the right side of the game board 5, three back front right decorative body units 3810 are provided. It has been. The light-emitting decorative body provided on the upper side of the game board 5 brightens the light-emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1, and the light-emitting decorative body provided on the left side of the game board 5 is The pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the rear, the light emitting area L2 near the transparent portion of the right side of the back box 3010 (the right side of the pachinko machine 1) is brightened, and the light emitting decorative body provided on the right side of the game board 5 is The pachinko machine 1 is visually recognized from the rear, the light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion of the left side of the back box 3010 (left side of the pachinko machine 1) is brightened, and a plurality of areas on the back side and side of the pachinko machine 1 are It makes it possible to brighten.

  In addition, the light emitting decorative body includes an LED capable of emitting light toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1, an LED capable of emitting light toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1, Is provided. And about LED which can light-emit toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1, light reflects in the member located ahead rather than it, and toward the back (back side) of the pachinko machine 1 The indirect light can brighten the back side of the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, about the LED that can emit light toward the back (back side) of the pachinko machine 1, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened by the direct light. At this time, of the back side of the pachinko machine 1, an LED that can emit light toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1, and an area that can be brightened by the indirect light, and the pachinko machine 1 It is also possible to use an LED capable of emitting light toward the rear side (back side) of the light source and separate the region that can be brightened by the direct light.

  In the above description, the region that can be brightened by direct light from the LED may be a portion of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 where an operator such as a hall manager can perform work. Is suitable. As will be described in detail later, examples of a part where an operator such as a hall manager can perform an operation include the operation unit 640a and the detachable unit of the back cover 640. The operation unit 640a and the attachment / detachment unit of the back cover 640 are provided at a position where direct light from the LED can be received, so that the direct light from the LED is received so that it can be viewed brighter than receiving indirect light. it can. As a result, when working on various boards such as the main control board 1310 attached to the game board 5, it is necessary to open the back cover 640 with respect to the main body frame 4. By making the operation part 640a and the attachment / detachment part visible brightly, an object to be operated by the operator can be easily confirmed, and the back cover 640 can be easily attached to / detached from the main body frame 4, and the inspection work of the hall manager Can be facilitated.

  In addition, when direct light from the LED is irradiated to the above-described site where an operator such as a hall manager can work, the board on which such LED is mounted The mounting surface is preferably dark (for example, green or black). In the case of a dark mounting surface, light is not easily reflected on the dark mounting surface, so that direct light from the LED does not diffuse so much, and it is pinpointed with respect to the part irradiated with direct light from the LED. It becomes possible to irradiate light. Thereby, for example, when the operation unit 640a and the detachable part of the back cover 640 are provided at a position where the direct light from the LED can be received, the direct light from the LED is received at a pinpoint, The operation part 640a and the detachable part of the back cover 640 can be clearly seen by the difference in brightness with the peripheral part.

(Regarding the adjustment of the light intensity of the light emitting area provided on the back side of the pachinko machine)
There are various hall environments in which island facilities are provided. For example, it is conceivable that the island facilities are separately brightened regardless of the brightness of the back side of the pachinko machine 1. In this case, the pachinko machine 1 of the present example has a configuration that brightens the back side, but there is a possibility that such back side need not be brightened. In addition, when the number of pachinko machines 1 in which the back side is brightened as the gaming machine provided in the island facility is small, the back side is only brightened with normal brightness. Then, the island facilities may not be bright enough. An example in which the brightness on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be adjusted according to the hall environment will be described below.

  The light emitting decorative body of this example includes an LED that can emit light toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1, and an LED that can emit light toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1. However, for these LEDs, the light amount is adjusted stepwise by performing a light amount adjustment operation using the rotation operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300. It is possible to adjust. For example, it is possible to adjust the LED light intensity level from 1 (minimum light intensity) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 (maximum light intensity), and the LED intensity increases as the level increases. . In other words, the LED of the light emitting decorative body is configured such that light is directed toward the back (back side) of the pachinko machine 1 and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is brightened, but the light quantity of the LED can be adjusted. Thus, the brightness of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed. For example, when the island facility is in a bright hall environment, an operator such as a hall manager may make the back side of the pachinko machine 1 darker by adjusting the LED light amount to be small. When the island facility is in a dark hall environment, an operator such as a hall manager may make the back side of the pachinko machine 1 brighter by adjusting the light quantity of the LED. Thus, by enabling the adjustment of the brightness of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 according to the hall environment, when maintaining the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the visibility of the place to be maintained becomes good, The efficiency of visual inspection on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  In the above, the brightness of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed by making it possible to adjust the light quantity of the LED of the light emitting decorative body, and the degree of freedom of the visual aspect with respect to the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is increased. However, if the light quantity of the LEDs is collectively adjusted for all the light emitting decorations provided on the front side of the game board 5, for example, when the light quantity of the LEDs of all the light decoration bodies is reduced The front side of the pachinko machine 1 becomes too dark, and while the operator is working during the hall operation, the original effect (customer approach, etc.) using the light emitting decorative body may be lost. In addition, even when the operator reduces the light amount of the LED of the light emitting decorative body and fails to return the light amount of the LED after the work is finished, the original effect using the light emitting decorative body is reduced. There is a possibility. In this respect, in this example, among the decorative decorative light emitting decorations provided on the front side of the game board 5, the back top front rotating decoration body 3410 and the back top front decoration body 3421, the back top rear decoration body 3451, the back The rear movable decorative body 3110 and the like have a role to brighten the back side of the pachinko machine 1 as described above. Therefore, the rear movable decorative body 3110 is a target for adjusting the light amount of the LED by the light amount adjustment operation. Among the decorative decorations provided on the side, for the light-emitting decorative body having the first big prize opening decoration board 2420 for making the first big prize opening 2005 illuminated, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 The light emitting decoration body does not have a role to brighten the light but emphasizes the purpose of customer visit and is not subject to adjustment of the light quantity of the LED by the light quantity adjustment operation. In other words, among the decorative decorative luminescent decorations, at least the luminescent decorative element that plays a role of brightening the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is an adjustment target of the light quantity of the LED by the light intensity adjustment operation. Thereby, even if the light quantity of the LED of the light emitting decorative body is adjusted, for example, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is darkened, the brightness of the light emitting decorative body for visitor purpose provided on the front side of the game board 5 is reduced. Therefore, the customer purpose can be maintained well.

  It should be noted that the light quantity adjustment operation of the LED of the light emitting decorative body can be performed in any of a standby state where the symbol is not variably displayed and a variation display where the symbol is variably displayed. Further, in this example, the player can perform the light amount adjustment operation using the rotation operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300, but besides this, On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, an operation unit that allows the hall manager to perform a light amount adjustment operation may be provided separately. At this time, the adjustment target of the LED light amount by the light amount adjustment operation on the operation unit for the hall manager is the same as the adjustment target of the LED light amount by the light amount adjustment operation on the operation unit for the player. Note that the light quantity adjustment operation for the player's operation unit cannot be made zero even if the light quantity is adjusted to the minimum, and the LED cannot be completely turned off. Regarding the light amount adjustment operation, when the light amount is adjusted to the minimum light amount, the light amount may be set to zero and the LED may be completely turned off.

(Visibility of wiring provided on the side of the pachinko machine)
Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (the back side of the back box 3010), various substrates and wirings for connecting the various substrates are provided. Since the pachinko machine 1 of the present example has a configuration that uses the light from the light emitting decoration provided in the game board 5 and brightens the back side, the wiring exposed to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 Although it is easy to check the state from the outside, it is difficult to check the state of the wiring that is not exposed to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 from the outside. Therefore, an example in which it is possible to easily check the state of the wiring that is not exposed to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 will be described below.

  In this example, as the light emitting decorative body that brightens the back side and the side surface of the pachinko machine 1, three left front decorative body units 3710 are provided on the left side of the game board 5, and on the right side of the game board 5, Three back right decorative body units 3810 are provided. And as shown in FIG. 264, the light emitting decorative body provided on the left side of the game board 5 visually recognizes the pachinko machine 1 from the rear, and the transparent portion of the right side surface of the back box 3010 (the right side surface of the pachinko machine 1). As shown in FIG. 265, the light emitting decorative body provided on the right side of the game board 5 visually recognizes the pachinko machine 1 from the rear, and the left side surface of the back box 3010 (pachinko machine 1 The light emitting region L3 in the vicinity of the transparent portion on the left side surface is brightened.

  An effect drive board 1720 that drives a decorative board, a drive motor, a drive solenoid, and the like provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 according to a command from the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010. It has been. The effect drive board 1720 is electrically connected to the decorative board, the drive motor, the drive solenoid, and the like through a plurality of wires, and these wires are along the left side and the right side inside the back box 3010. I arranged so that. In this respect, the light emitting decorative body provided on the left side of the game board 5 visually recognizes the pachinko machine 1 from the rear, and displays a light emitting region L2 near the transparent portion on the right side surface of the back box 3010 (the right side surface of the pachinko machine 1). Since the light is irradiated so as to be bright, it is possible to satisfactorily visually recognize the state of the wiring along the right side in the back box 3010. Similarly, the light emitting decorative body provided on the right side of the game board 5 visually recognizes the pachinko machine 1 from the rear, and displays a light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the left side surface of the back box 3010 (left side surface of the pachinko machine 1). Since the light is irradiated so as to be bright, it is possible to satisfactorily recognize the state of the wiring along the left side in the back box 3010. For example, when a decorative board, a drive motor, a drive solenoid, or the like does not operate normally, the wiring along the left side and right side inside the back box 3010 is disconnected or disconnected from the connection terminal. However, by irradiating light so that the left side surface and right side surface are brightened, the visibility of the wiring from the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 is improved, and the wiring status confirmation work Efficiency can be improved.

  In the state where the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the pachinko machine 1, which is a part of the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 that is viewed from the rear and is far from the open shaft of the main body frame 4 The left side surface of the pachinko machine 1 is a portion close to the open axis of the body frame 4, while light from outside (hole light) can easily reach and can be viewed brightly. In contrast, light from outside (hole light) is difficult to reach and cannot be viewed brightly. For this reason, wiring is arranged in the vicinity of the right side of the pachinko machine 1 that is a portion near the open axis of the main body frame 4 when a configuration for brightening the back side and the side is not provided as in a conventional gaming machine. When it becomes necessary to check the state of the wiring, it has become particularly difficult. In this example, in this example, light is emitted so as to brighten the light emitting region L2 near the transparent portion on the right side of the back box 3010, and wiring that needs to be arranged near the right side of the pachinko machine 1 The inner side of the back box 3010 is arranged along the right side surface. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the state of the wiring along the right side in the back box 3010 from being visually recognized can be prevented.

  In this example, as the wiring along the side surface inside the back box 3010, wiring for connecting the effect drive board 1720 and the decorative board, the drive motor, the drive solenoid, and the like is mentioned. Alternatively, for example, a wiring connected to the main control board 1310 may be used. The main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game. For example, the game information is output to the outside (hall computer) via the external terminal board 558 connected to the main control board 1310 by wiring. It is said. At this time, if fraud is performed on the wiring connecting the main control board 1310 and the external terminal board 558, information regarding the game cannot be normally grasped outside (the hall computer), and the pachinko machine 1 The situation where fraud is likely to occur will occur. In other words, among the various wirings, the wirings connected to the main control board 1310 can be said to be highly important wirings in the game. In this regard, by irradiating light so as to brighten the side surface of the pachinko machine 1, the visibility of the wiring connected to the main control board 1310 is improved, and fraud is performed on such wiring. Can be prevented.

  Further, with respect to the wiring along the left side surface and the right side surface inside the back box 3010, a plurality of wirings are bundled by a hook part integrally formed with the back box 3010 and a bundled wire. These hook portions and bundled wires are formed of a light-transmitting member, and are provided at positions that can be seen through the transparent portions on the left side surface and the right side surface of the back box 3010. Thereby, light is emitted so as to brighten the light emitting region L2 near the transparent portion on the left side of the back box 3010 and the light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the left side of the back box 3010 (left side of the pachinko machine 1). At this time, it is possible to brighten the hook part and the bundled wire itself so that the state of the wiring can be seen well. Further, when irradiating light so as to brighten the light emitting region L2 near the transparent portion on the left side of the back box 3010 and the light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the left side of the back box 3010 (left side of the pachinko machine 1). In addition, it is possible to prevent the brightness of such a light emitting region from decreasing without hindering the progress of light.

  In addition, for the wirings along the left side and the right side in the back box 3010, a plurality of wirings are used so that the transparent parts of the left side and the right side of the back box 3010 are not blocked by the plurality of wirings. These wirings are provided so as to overlap or bundle in the vertical direction of the left side surface and the right side surface of the back box 3010. For example, if a plurality of wirings are provided so as to be parallel to the left side surface and the right side surface of the back box 3010, the transparent portion on the left side surface and the right side surface of the back box 3010 is blocked, and the left side of the back box 3010 Although it is difficult to maintain the brightness of the light emitting region L2 near the transparent portion of the surface and the light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion of the left side surface of the back box 3010 (left side surface of the pachinko machine 1), By providing a plurality of wirings so as not to block the transparent portions on the left side surface and the right side surface, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

(Regarding changes in the visual appearance of the light emitting area when the state changes)
In addition, in a state where a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed on the island facility, when the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and maintenance is underway, the other pachinko machines 1 on the back side of the island facility Even if an abnormality occurs, the front side of the pachinko machine 1 where the abnormality has occurred is not visible, making it difficult to notice the occurrence of the abnormality. Therefore, an example in which the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be recognized even from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described below.

  In this example, as the light emitting decorative body, a back top front rotating decorative body 3410, a back top front decorative body 3421, a back top rear decorative body 3451, and a back rear movable decorative body 3110 are provided in the upper part of the game board 5. Three back front left decorative body units 3710 are provided on the left side of the game board 5, and three back front right decorative body units 3810 are provided on the right side of the game board 5. In addition, for these luminescent decorations, if any abnormality occurs, such as detecting fraud due to magnets or vibrations, and if it becomes impossible to play a game, until the abnormality is resolved, The LED provided on the body is controlled to blink. On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, as a light emitting area that can be brightened by the light emitting decorative body, the light emitting area L 1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553, the right side of the back box 3010 (the right side of the pachinko machine 1 ) And a light emitting area L3 near the transparent part on the left side of the back box 3010 (left side of the pachinko machine 1), and the LED provided on the light emitting decorative body is controlled to blink. At this time, these light emitting areas blink. As a result, in the state where a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed on the island facility, even if the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and maintenance is in progress, the other pachinko machines 1 on the back side of the island facility are When an abnormality occurs, the light emitting area that can be brightened by the light emitting decorative body of the other pachinko machine 1 blinks, so that the occurrence of the abnormality can be recognized through the interior of the island facility Become. That is, even if the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and maintenance is in progress, an abnormality with respect to another pachinko machine 1 on the same island facility can be detected at an early stage through the inside of the island facility. It is possible to prevent cheating on other pachinko machines 1.

  In addition, for the LED of the light emitting decorative body, the light amount is adjusted stepwise by performing the light amount adjustment operation using the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300. It is possible. For example, it is possible to adjust the LED light intensity level from 1 (minimum light intensity) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 (maximum light intensity), and the LED intensity increases as the level increases. . And although it mentioned in detail above, about LED of a light emission decoration, the brightness of the back side of pachinko machine 1 can be changed by enabling adjustment of the light quantity of LED. However, if any abnormality such as detection of fraud due to magnets or vibration occurs, the LED of the light emitting decorative body that brightens the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is controlled to blink with the adjusted light amount. When the adjusted light intensity is darkened, the occurrence of an abnormality may not be noticed from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. Further, when the operator reduces the light amount of the LED of the light emitting decorative body and fails to return the light amount of the LED after the work is finished, the light amount of the LED is small, and the pachinko machine 1 from the back side. Then, it was not noticed that an abnormality occurred. In this point, in this example, in the period in which some abnormality occurs, such as detecting fraud due to magnets or vibrations, and the game cannot be performed, the light intensity of the LED of the light emitting decoration that brightens the back side of the pachinko machine 1 The adjustment is disabled, and the LED is controlled to blink with a predetermined light amount (for example, the upper limit light amount among the light amounts that can be adjusted in a normal state). Thereby, when abnormality occurs with respect to the pachinko machine 1, when the light emitting area that can be brightened by the light emitting decoration blinks, the light emitting area does not become too dark. In other words, even from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the occurrence of the abnormality is not noticed, and the abnormality can be detected with certainty, so that the other pachinko machine 1 is illegal. Can be prevented.

  Similarly, for the light-emitting decorative body, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 3, the LED provided on the light-emitting decorative body is controlled to blink until the main body frame 4 is closed. I have to. On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, as a light emitting area that can be brightened by the light emitting decorative body, the light emitting area L 1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553, the right side of the back box 3010 (the right side of the pachinko machine 1 ) And a light emitting area L3 near the transparent part on the left side of the back box 3010 (left side of the pachinko machine 1), and the LED provided on the light emitting decorative body is controlled to blink. At this time, these light emitting areas blink. For example, in a state where a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed on the island facility, when the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and maintenance is in progress, the main body of another pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island facility Even if a fraudulent person opens the frame 4 illegally, the front side of the pachinko machine 1 that has been illegally opened cannot be seen, making it difficult to notice the illegally opened action. However, in this example, when a fraudster illegally opens the main body frame 4 of the other pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island facility, it can be brightened by the light emitting decorative body of the other pachinko machine 1. By flashing the light emitting area, it is possible to recognize an illegally opened action through the interior of the island facility. In other words, even if the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and maintenance is in progress, an act of opening the pachinko machine 1 illegally to other pachinko machines 1 on the same island equipment is discovered early through the interior of the island equipment. As a result, it is possible to prevent the other pachinko machine 1 from being cheated.

  As for the light-emitting decorative body, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 3, not only until the main body frame 4 is closed but also a certain period of time after the main body frame 4 is closed. Until then, you may make it continue blink control of LED provided in the light emission decoration body. Thereby, when the fraudster opens the main body frame 4 of the other pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island facility illegally, even if the opening is short, the light emitting decoration of the other pachinko machine 1 The flashing of the light-emitting area that can be brightened by the body continues for a certain period of time, and it is possible to prevent as much as possible the situation of overlooking the act of opening illegally through the interior of the island facility.

  In addition, for the light-emitting decorative body, when a transition is made to a standby state in which no symbol variation is performed, the amount of light of the LEDs provided on the light-emitting decorative body is changed between the start of symbol variation and the end of the standby state. Decrease control. On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, as a light emitting area that can be brightened by the light emitting decorative body, the light emitting area L 1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553, the right side of the back box 3010 (the right side of the pachinko machine 1 ) In the vicinity of the transparent portion, and the light emitting region L3 in the vicinity of the transparent portion on the left side of the back box 3010 (the left side of the pachinko machine 1). It was decided that these light emitting areas would become dark when controlled. For example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed on an island facility and the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened for maintenance, the front of another pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island facility Since the side cannot be seen, it is difficult to know whether the pachinko machine 1 is playing. However, in this example, when the other pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island facility shifts to the standby state, the light emitting area that can be brightened by the light emitting decorative body of the other pachinko machine 1 is darkened. It becomes possible to know whether or not a game is in progress through the interior of the island facility. In other words, even if the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and maintenance is being performed, it is possible to know whether other pachinko machines 1 on the same island facility are playing through the interior of the island facility. It is possible to determine whether or not it is necessary to strengthen monitoring so that fraud is not performed during the standby state.

(Regarding changes in the visual appearance of the light emitting area during operation of the light emitting decorative body)
In addition, when the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and maintenance is being performed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the front side of the pachinko machine 1 cannot be seen. It is difficult to check whether the body works properly. Therefore, an example in which it is possible to confirm whether the movable body operates normally even from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described below.

  In this example, as a light-emitting decorative body that brightens the back side of the pachinko machine 1, in the upper part of the game board 5, a back top front rotating decorative body 3410, a back top front decorative body 3421, a back top rear rotating decorative body 3440 and a back top A rear decoration body 3451 and a rear rear movable decoration body 3110 are provided, and the light emission decoration body provided at the upper part of the game board 5 brightens the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. is doing. Among these, the back rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back rear decorative body 3451, and the back rear movable decorative body 3110 can move from the retreat position to the appearance position when a predetermined performance condition is satisfied. . Then, in a state where the back rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back rear decorative body 3451, and the back rear movable decorative body 3110 are moved to the appearance positions, the light from the LEDs of these light emitting decorative bodies is transparent to the tank rail 553. The light emission region L1 in the vicinity of the part was prevented from reaching. In particular, the light from the LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper decorative body 3451 is prevented from reaching the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553. On the other hand, for the light from the LED mounted on the rear surface of the front back decorative substrate 3422, the back rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back upper decorative body 3451, and the back rear movable decorative body 3110 move to the appearance position. As a result, the light is not blocked behind the front decorative substrate 3422 on the back side, and the light is not blocked, and reaches the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553. That is, during the operation of the light emitting decorative body that can be operated among the plurality of light emitting decorative bodies, the brightness in the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 changes and is visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The visual aspect of the light emitting region L1 can be changed. Thereby, even if it is from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, it can grasp | ascertain whether the light emission decoration body is operate | moving by the visual recognition aspect of the light emission area | region L1 changing.

  In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, an initial operation of a light emitting decorative body that can operate among the plurality of light emitting decorative bodies is performed. Specifically, an operation is performed in which the back rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back rear decorative body 3451, and the back rear movable decorative body 3110 move from the appearance position to the retreat position after moving from the retreat position to the appearance position. The operation of confirming that these light emitting decorations can be moved to the appearance position is repeated. When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, it is necessary to open the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and operate the power switch on the power supply board provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. Sometimes, from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, it cannot be directly visually confirmed whether the initial operation of the light emitting decorative body is normally performed, and it has been particularly difficult to confirm the operation. In this regard, in this example, the brightness of the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 is changed with the operation of the light emitting decorative body, and even from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the light emitting region L1 is changed. It was made possible to confirm that the initial operation of the light emitting decorative body was normally performed by visually recognizing the change in the visual recognition mode. Thereby, when the power switch is operated, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is visually recognized, but when the initial operation of the light emitting decorative body is performed, the visual appearance of the light emitting area L1 changes from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. What is necessary is just to confirm whether it is doing, and the efficiency of the visual work with respect to the initial operation | movement of the light emission decoration can be improved.

  In addition, at the time of the operation | movement of the light emission decoration which can operate | move among several light emission decorations, although it has comprised so that the brightness in the light emission area | region L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 may change, It is preferable that the brightness change be large between the state in which the light emitting decorative body is in the retracted position and the state in which the light emitting decorative body is in the appearance position. For example, an LED that is irradiated with light toward the light emitting region L1 is mounted on the rear surface of the back front decorative substrate 3422, but the back top rear rotating decorative body 3440 located behind the back front decorative substrate 3422. When the back rear back decorative body 3451 or the back rear movable decorative body 3110 moves to the appearance position, the LED mounted on the rear surface of the front back front decorative board 3422 may be controlled to be turned off. The LED itself may not be mounted on the rear surface of the upper front decorative board 3422. In such a configuration, when the back rear back decorative body 3440 and the back top rear decorative body 3451 located behind the back front front decorative board 3422 or the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved to the appearance position, the back top The light from the LED mounted on the rear surface of the front decorative board 3422 does not reach the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553, and the brightness of the light emitting area L1 can be reduced. Thereby, the brightness change in the light emitting region L1 increases between the state in which the light emitting decorative body is in the retracted position and the state in which the light emitting decorative body is in the appearance position, and whether the light emitting decorative body is operating from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp easily.

(Light from the back side of the production display device)
In addition, the pachinko machine 1 of this example has a configuration that uses the light from the light emitting decorative body provided on the game board 5 to brighten the back side. However, among the back side of the pachinko machine 1, an effect display is provided. About the area | region behind the apparatus 1600, the light from LED of a light emission decoration body is interrupted | blocked by the production | presentation display apparatus 1600, and the location to make it bright on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 cannot be brightened only by using a light emission decoration body. There is sex. For example, in a region behind the effect display device 1600, if a part that the hall manager needs to work on is dark, it becomes difficult to work on the part. Therefore, an example in which a predetermined portion can be brightened even in the region behind the effect display device 1600 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described below.

  First, the effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 266 is a diagram showing an opening provided on the back side of the effect display device. As shown in FIG. 266, the effect display device 1600 is provided so as to close a box-shaped box 1611 (metal frame) having openings on the front and rear sides and an opening on the front side of the box 1611, and displays a predetermined image. A liquid crystal panel 1612 that can be used, a transparent flat light guide plate 1613 that is provided behind the liquid crystal panel 1612 and can irradiate light toward the liquid crystal panel 1612, and a lower portion of the light guide plate 1613. A light emitting substrate 1615 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the light guide plate 1613 are mounted, and a rear opening of the box body 1611 behind the light guide plate 1613 so as to close the light guide plate 1613. A metal back panel 1614 (metal back cover) capable of blocking light from the light plate 1613 to the rear. Although not shown, the effect display device 1600 includes a panel drive substrate that drives the liquid crystal panel 1612.

  A plurality of LEDs are mounted side by side on the top surface of the light emitting substrate 1615. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting substrate 1615 can irradiate light toward the light guide plate 1613 located above the light emitting substrate 1615. In addition, the light guide plate 1613 can receive light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting substrate 1615 and can emit light from the front side of the light guide plate 1613 and is positioned in front of the light guide plate 1613. The liquid crystal panel 1612 can be irradiated with light. Therefore, the liquid crystal panel 1612 can be efficiently irradiated with light, and a predetermined image displayed on the liquid crystal panel 1612 can be viewed brightly.

  Further, the light emitting substrate 1615 has a coating film made of a white solder resist on the surface excluding a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface and other mounting components. A coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with high reflectivity. Therefore, the liquid crystal panel 1612 can be efficiently irradiated with light, and a predetermined image displayed on the liquid crystal panel 1612 can be viewed brightly.

  In addition, a connector 1615 a for electrically connecting to the effect drive board 1720 is mounted on the light emitting board 1615. The connector 1615a is an opaque member. The connector 1615a mounted on the upper surface of the light-emitting board 1615 has a terminal surface facing rearward, and is connected to the wiring-side connector in which the wiring from the effect driving board 1720 is bundled. The drive substrate 1720 can be electrically connected. As a result, the effect drive board 1720 can control whether or not the plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting board 1615 are turned on, brightness adjustment, and the like.

  The light guide plate 1613 is configured to receive light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting substrate 1615 so that the front side of the light guide plate 1613 emits light strongly, but only on the front side of the light guide plate 1613. In addition, the rear surface side and the side surface side of the light guide plate 1613 are also configured to emit light weakly. As described above, the light-emitting substrate 1615 has a coating film made of a white solder resist on the surface excluding a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface and other mounting components. Not only the front side of the light plate 1613 but also the rear surface side and the side surface side of the light guide plate 1613, the light emission becomes stronger.

  The back panel 1614 is configured to block the backward light from the light guide plate 1613 that receives light from the plurality of LEDs, and the back panel 1614 receives the light from the light guide plate 1613. A plurality of openings that can pass through are intentionally provided at predetermined positions. Thereby, the light from the rear surface side or the side surface side of the light guide plate 1613 that receives light from the plurality of LEDs and emits light is emitted from the plurality of openings toward the rear (the rear of the effect display device 1600). It is possible.

  Specifically, as viewed from the rear of the effect display device 1600, the opening A of the back panel 1614 is provided at the lower left portion of the back panel 1614, and two openings B are located slightly toward the right side of the back panel 1614. The opening C is provided on the right side along the right end of the back panel 1614, and the opening D is provided on the upper side along the upper end of the back panel 1614.

  First, the opening A of the back panel 1614 is provided at a position corresponding to the rear of the connector 1615 a mounted on the light emitting substrate 1615. The opening A is an opening that is slightly larger than the connector 1615a. Thereby, from the opening A, the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting substrate 1615 can be visually recognized. And since the light from the rear surface side or side surface side of the light guide plate 1613 emitting light from the plurality of LEDs is emitted from the opening A, the light emitting region L5 around the connector 1615a is brightened. It can be visually recognized. Accordingly, the connector 1615a mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting board 1615 needs to be connected to the wiring side connector 1615a in which the wiring from the effect driving board 1720 is bundled, but the light emitting region L5 around the connector 1615a. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not it is normally connected to the wiring-side connector, and to facilitate the inspection work of the hall manager.

  By the way, although a plurality of LEDs are provided on the light emitting substrate 1615, the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting substrate 1615 is visible from the opening A, whereas all of the plurality of LEDs are visible. It is configured to be impossible. In other words, among the plurality of LEDs mounted on the light emitting substrate 1615, even the LED closest to the opening A is configured not to be provided at a position where it can be viewed from the opening A. For example, when light from some of the LEDs is directly irradiated through the opening A, when working on the connector 1615a mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting substrate 1615, Direct light from the LED enters the eyes of the operator, making it difficult to perform the work. On the other hand, it is difficult to work on the connector 1615a mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting substrate 1615 because the light from the plurality of LEDs is indirectly irradiated through the opening A. This can be prevented. Similarly, the openings B to D of the back panel 1614 are configured such that none of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the light emitting substrate 1615 is visible from the openings B to D.

  Two openings B of the back panel 1614 are provided side by side vertically spaced at a position slightly closer to the center than the opening C on the right side of the back panel 1614 when viewed from behind the effect display device 1600. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 in the game board 5 so that the display area faces the front. However, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the rear side of the game board 5 is provided. A back cover 640 is provided so as to cover. The back cover 640 is visible from the back of the pachinko machine 1 and can be opened and closed with the left side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 as an axis. On the right side of the back cover 640, two operation units 640a are provided so as to be operated up and down so that an operator can operate them, while the main body frame 4 corresponds to each of the two operation units 640a. The two operation parts 640a can be attached to and detached from the position where the two operation parts 640a are attached, and the back cover 640 is attached to the main body frame 4 by detaching the operation part 640a from the attachment / detachment part. Can be opened and closed. The back cover 640 (the operation portion 640a thereof) and the detachable portion are both transparent or translucent members.

  In the state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the operation portion 640 a and the detachment portion of the back cover 640 are provided at a position corresponding to the rear of the opening B of the back panel 1614 (the rear of the effect display device 1600). ing. That is, since the light from the rear surface side and the side surface side of the light guide plate 1613 that receives and emits light from the plurality of LEDs is emitted from the opening B, the operation unit 640a and the attachment / detachment unit of the back cover 640 are provided. Is provided at a position capable of receiving such light. Thereby, the operation part 640a and the detachable part of the back cover 640 can receive the light from the opening B and make the light emitting region L6 near the operation part 640a and the detachable part of the back cover 640 brightly visible. When working on various boards such as the main control board 1310 attached to the game board 5, it is necessary to open the back cover 640 with respect to the main body frame 4, but the operation unit 640 a of the back cover 640. And by making the light emitting region L6 near the detachable portion brightly visible, the object to be operated by the operator can be easily confirmed, and the back cover 640 can be easily attached to and detached from the main body frame 4, and the hall manager The inspection work can be facilitated.

  The main body frame 4 can be opened and closed with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 as axes as viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 1 and positioned on the right side of the outer frame 2. That is, the operation part 640 a and the detachment part of the back cover 640 are provided at positions close to the opening axis of the main body frame 4. A plurality of pachinko machines 1 are provided side by side on the amusement island, and the inside of the amusement island is dark in a closed space. Then, in a state where the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, light (hole light) from the outside reaches a portion of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 that is far from the opening axis of the main body frame 4. While it is easy and can be viewed brightly, light from outside (hole light) is hard to reach the portion of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 that is close to the open axis of the main body frame 4 and is brightly visible Can not do it. In this regard, the operation unit 640a and the detachable part of the back cover 640 are located on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 near the opening axis of the main body frame 4, and the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. Even so, it is difficult for light from outside (hole light) to reach, but by receiving the light from the opening B, the operation portion 640a of the back cover 640 and the light emitting region L6 near the detachable portion can be viewed brightly. Can do.

  The opening C of the back panel 1614 is visually recognized from the rear of the effect display device 1600, and is provided on the right side along the right end of the back panel 1614. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the game board 5 so that the display area faces the front, but when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it is behind the opening C. A payout unit 560 is provided at the position. The payout unit 560 is based on instructions from the payout control board 633 for the ball guide unit 570 for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner downward and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570. The payout device 580 that pays out one by one, the upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B that pass through the payout device 580 downward, and the game balls B that pass through the upper full ball path unit 600 are on the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, the lower full tank path unit 610 for guiding to the substrate unit 620 side is provided, but behind the opening C, the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full ball path unit of the payout unit 560 are provided. 600 is located. Of the payout unit 560, at least the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full ball path unit 600 are transparent members.

  And since the light from the rear surface side or side surface side of the light guide plate 1613 that receives and emits light from the plurality of LEDs is irradiated from the opening C, the ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560, The light emitting region L7 in the vicinity of the payout device 580 and the upper full sphere path unit 600 can be viewed brightly. Thereby, in the payout unit 560, there is a possibility that a ball clogging may occur when the game ball B is guided downward from the tank rail 553. However, by making the light emitting area L7 near the payout unit 560 visible, It is possible to easily check whether or not there is a ball clogging in the passage that guides the ball B, and when the ball clogging occurs, the ball clogging can be easily removed. The work can be facilitated.

  The opening D of the back panel 1614 is provided on the upper side so as to be visible from the rear of the effect display device 1600 and along the upper end of the back panel 1614. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 in the game board 5 so that the display area faces the front. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, The tank rail 553 is provided at the position. Note that the tank rail 553 uses a transparent member and can transmit light with high transmittance. And since the light from the rear surface side or side surface side of the light guide plate 1613 that receives and emits light from the plurality of LEDs is irradiated from the opening D, the light emitting region near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 L1 can be viewed brightly.

  As described above in detail, the light-emitting decorative body provided on the game board 5 is abnormal when an abnormality occurs, such as detection of fraud due to a magnet or vibration, and the game cannot be played. Until LED is eliminated, the LED provided on the light emitting decorative body is controlled to blink. That is, among the back side of the pachinko machine 1, as the light emitting area that can be brightened by the light emitting decoration, the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553, the right side of the back box 3010 (the right side of the pachinko machine 1 ) And a light emitting area L3 near the transparent part on the left side of the back box 3010 (left side of the pachinko machine 1), and the LED provided on the light emitting decorative body is controlled to blink. Thus, these light emitting areas are supposed to blink.

  In addition, when some abnormality occurs, such as detecting fraud due to magnets or vibrations, and the game cannot be played, if an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, It may be necessary to perform maintenance on a member provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 by opening the main body frame 4. For example, in order to perform maintenance on various substrates arranged inside the back cover 640, it is necessary to open the back cover 640 with respect to the main body frame 4 by operating the operation unit 640 a of the back cover 640. In some cases, a ball clogging may occur in the dispensing unit 560, and the ball clogging needs to be removed. However, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, if the LED provided on the light emitting substrate 1615 of the effect display device 1600 is controlled to blink in the same manner as the LED provided on the light emitting decorative body, maintenance can be performed. Visual recognition with respect to the work target becomes difficult. In this respect, in this example, even if the abnormality is caused by any abnormality such as detection of fraud due to magnets or vibration in the effect display device 1600, the game cannot be played. The LED provided on the light emitting substrate 1615 is not controlled to blink, and is always controlled to be lit as in the normal case. In other words, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, as a light emitting area that can be brightened by receiving light from the opening of the back panel 1614 of the effect display device 1600, the area around the connector 1615 a mounted on the light emitting substrate 1615. A light emitting area L5, a light emitting area L6 near the operation unit 640a and the detaching part of the back cover 640, a light emitting area L7 near the payout unit 560, and a light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 are provided. The visibility of these light emitting areas is not changed by constantly controlling the lighting of the LEDs provided on the light emitting substrate 1615 of the ideographic device 1660 as in the normal state. As a result, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the LED provided on the light-emitting decorative body is controlled to blink. By providing the light emitting area, the visibility is good without changing, and the efficiency of maintenance work at the time of abnormality on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

(Regarding the visibility of the gap between the control boards provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1)
Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (the back side of the back box 3010), various substrates and wirings for connecting the various substrates are provided. The pachinko machine 1 of this example has a configuration in which the back side is brightened by using light from a light emitting decorative body provided in the game board 5 and light from the opening of the back panel 1614 in the effect display device 1600. If all areas on the back side of the machine 1 are brightened, the hall manager can easily perform maintenance work in the island facilities, while various boards provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 This makes it easier for fraudsters to cheat. Therefore, an example in which an unauthorized person does not easily cheat on various substrates provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 while the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is configured to be bright will be described below. .

  As shown in FIG. 263, as a light emitting decorative body that brightens the back side or the side surface of the pachinko machine 1, a back front front rotating decorative body 3410, a back top front decorative body 3421, and a back top rear are provided. A decorative body 3451 and a back-back movable decorative body 3110 are provided, and on the left side of the game board 5, three back-front left decorative body units 3710 are provided, and on the right side of the game board 5, three back-front right A decorative body unit 3810 is provided. The light-emitting decorative body provided at the top of the game board 5 brightens the light-emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1, and the light-emitting decorative body provided on the left side of the game board 5 is The pachinko machine 1 is viewed from behind, the light emitting area L2 near the transparent portion of the right side surface of the back box 3010 (the right side surface of the pachinko machine 1) is brightened, and the light emitting decoration provided on the right side of the game board 5 is The pachinko machine 1 is viewed from behind, and the light emitting region L3 in the vicinity of the transparent portion on the left side surface of the back box 3010 (left side surface of the pachinko machine 1) is brightened.

  Further, as a characteristic configuration for brightening the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there is an opening of the back panel 1614 in the effect display device 1600. Specifically, an opening A is provided on the lower left side of the back panel 1614, an opening B is provided slightly on the right side of the back panel 1614, and an opening C is provided on the right side of the back panel 1614. In addition, an opening D is provided on the upper side of the back panel 1614. Then, the light from the opening A of the back panel 1614 of the effect display device 1600 brightens the light emitting area L5 around the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting substrate 1615, and the light from the opening B is used to operate the back cover 640. The light emitting region L6 near the portion 640a and the detachable portion is brightened, the light from the opening C brightens the light emitting region L7 near the payout unit 560, and the light from the opening D is near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 The light emitting area L1 is brightened. The light from the opening A of the back panel 1614 of the effect display device 1600 brightens the light emitting region L6 around the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting substrate 1615, but the main control is behind the opening A. Since the main control board 1310 of the unit 1300 is located, the light from the opening A is blocked by the main control board 1310, and it is difficult to visually recognize the light emitting region L6 from the rear of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, of the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the panel relay board 1710 of the drive board unit 1700 attached to the rear face of the back box 3010. And the effect driving board 1720 are provided with pilot lamps at positions that can be seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The pilot lamp is a member for notifying whether or not each substrate is operating normally by the light emission mode of the LED. The light from the pilot lamp on the peripheral control board 1510 brightens the light emitting area L8 near the pilot lamp, and the light from the pilot lamp on the effect driving board 1720 brightens the light emitting area L9 near the pilot lamp. The light from the pilot lamp on the main control board 1310 brightens the light emitting area L10 in the vicinity of the pilot lamp. That is, these configurations can also be cited as a configuration that brightens the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The light emitting areas described above are the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the drive board unit 1700 attached to the rear face of the back box 3010 among the back side of the pachinko machine 1. It is provided around the control board group including the panel relay board 1710 and the effect drive board 1720. That is, except for the control board group attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the light emitting area is configured to be bright. Thereby, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility, the inside thereof is blocked and darkened. However, by brightening the back of the pachinko machine 1, the interior of the island facility can be brightened.

  On the other hand, of the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the panel relay board 1710 of the drive board unit 1700 attached to the rear face of the back box 3010. The light emitting area is not provided in the area where the control board group including the effect driving board 1720 is provided. That is, of the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the gap between the control boards constituting the control board group (the gap between the main control board 1310, the panel relay board 1710 and the effect drive board 1720, the peripheral control board 1510, and the panel The gap between the relay board 1710 and the effect drive board 1720 is configured to be dark. The panel relay board 1710 is a board that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and is connected to the main control board 1310 by wiring and is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by wiring. And about such wiring, it arrange | positions in the clearance gap between the control boards which comprise a control board group. Of these, the main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game, so that if a fraud is made to the wiring connected to the main control board 1310, the fraudster gains profits, etc. There is a problem that an unjust situation occurs. In this regard, while the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is brightened, the gaps between the control boards constituting the control board group are darkened, which makes it difficult to visually recognize the wiring arranged in the gaps. It is possible to prevent fraud with respect to the wiring connected to the control board 1310.

(Visibility to the configuration of metal powder countermeasures)
Next, an electrical trouble (short circuit) caused by the metal powder of the game ball B that has dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the bowl-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553. ) Will be described with reference to FIGS. 263 and 267. FIG. 267 is an enlarged schematic view showing a part of the cross section cut along the line CC in FIG. 99 (a), and shows an outline of the configuration of measures against metal powder.

  The game balls B flowing into the tank rail 553 from the ball tank 552 fall off due to the metal powder being peeled off from the game balls B due to wear such as the game balls B colliding with each other or rubbing against each other. For this reason, when the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B is attached to the main guiding portion 553a, the flow of the game ball B in the downstream direction is hindered, so that the game ball B is smoothly moved downstream. It becomes difficult to supply the game ball B, and the payout of the game ball B by the payout device 580 is stopped.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 263, in this example, a plurality of notch portions 553aa are formed in the main guiding portion 553a so that metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a. Has been. Thereby, for example, the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guide portion 553a by naturally falling from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch 553aa, The metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B attached to the main guide portion 553a due to the vibration of the game ball B rolling on the main guide portion 553a falls from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa. The metal powder can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a by the wear of the game ball B attached to the main guiding portion 553a by inserting a cotton swab into the cutout portion 553aa by a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall. The metal powder can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a by performing the operation of removing the metal powder.

  By the way, the metal powder (foreign matter) of the game ball B falling from the notch portions 553aa formed in a plurality of bowl-shaped main guiding portions 553a of the tank rail 553 adheres to the peripheral control unit 1500 disposed below the tank rail 553. As a result, an electrical trouble occurs, causing a malfunction in the peripheral control unit 1500 or causing a malfunction. For example, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided with an IC such as a peripheral control IC, ROM, and SDRAM described later, and the peripheral data ROM board described later is provided with an IC such as a peripheral data ROM. The pin spacing of these ICs is reduced, the pin spacing of the various connectors 1615a and special connectors 1615a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is narrowed, and the number of connectors 1615a on the peripheral control board 1510 increases, thereby increasing the number of connectors 1615a. Since the distance between the connector 1615a and the special connector 1615a is also narrowed, it is necessary to take measures against electrical troubles caused by foreign matter falling from the tank rail.

  First, as shown in FIG. 267, a plurality of notches 553aa formed in the bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 are arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). Compared to the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface, it is shifted backward (in this embodiment, about one half of the diameter of the game ball B). Are displaced by a distance dimension of.

  As described above, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 on which the tank rail 553 is disposed is from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). It is formed in a staircase shape that is bent multiple times downward. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 267, a first flange portion 551da extending rearward of the pachinko machine 1 is configured so that the lower end portion of the top plate portion is substantially flush with the rear surface of the tank rail 553. . When the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upper end portion of the back cover 640 is in contact with the rear surface of the first flange portion 551da.

  Thereby, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa can be received and adhered to the first flange portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a. Yes. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa by the first flange portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a is covered with the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. The metal powder of the game ball B that has dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa and entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is suppressed. The occurrence of electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the sphere B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510 can be suppressed.

  As described above in detail, as shown in FIG. 263, in this example, as a light emitting decorative body that brightens the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a back top front rotating decorative body 3410 and a back top front decoration are provided at the top of the game board 5. A body 3421, a back-upside rear rotating decoration body 3440, a back-upside rear decoration body 3451, and a back-back movable decoration body 3110 are provided, and a light-emitting decoration body provided at the upper part of the game board 5 The light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 is brightened. That is, since the light from the LEDs of these light-emitting decorative bodies is irradiated toward the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553, the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B is absorbed by the tank rail 553. When the tank rail 553 which is a transparent member is visually recognized from the rear of the pachinko machine 1, the metal powder rises like a black dot and the visibility to the metal powder is good. It has become a thing. Thereby, it can be easily confirmed whether or not the metal powder is attached to the main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553, and the work for removing the metal powder from the cutout portion 553aa of the main guide portion 553a is also efficient. It can be carried out.

  The light emitting region L1 also includes a first flange portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a located below the main guiding portion 553a. In addition, the 1st collar part 551da of the top-plate part 551a and the back cover 630 are transparent members. That is, since the light from the LED of the light emitting decorative body provided on the upper part of the game board 5 is irradiated toward the first flange portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a in the light emitting region L1, the cutout portion 553aa is provided. When the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a is attached to the first hook portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a located below, a transparent member is formed from the rear of the pachinko machine 1 When the first flange portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a is visually recognized, the metal powder emerges like a black spot, and the visibility with respect to the metal powder is good. Thereby, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the metal powder is attached to the first flange portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a, and for the work of removing the metal powder from the first flange portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a. Can be done efficiently.

  Regarding the above, even if the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1, the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the closed pachinko machine 1 is used. Since the body frame 4 of the other pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island facility is opened, the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B in the closed pachinko machine 1 becomes the tank rail 553. It is possible to easily check whether the main guide portion 553a and the first flange portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a are attached. The light from the LEDs of the back front front decorative body 3410 and the back front front decorative body 3421, the back top rear decorative body 3440 and the back top rear decorative body 3451, and the back back movable decorative body 3110 of the pachinko machine 1 Although it is irradiated toward the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the rail 553, it is not desirable that the LED light source is directly viewed during maintenance on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, so the back side of the pachinko machine 1 About the light from LED which made it lighten, it is comprised so that it may become indirect light by which the light source of LED is not directly looked at.

  Further, after confirming the adhesion of the metal powder, when removing the metal powder from the main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 and the first flange portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a, the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 is removed. Luminescent decorations that brighten the light emitting area L1 near the transparent part (back top front rotation decoration body 3410 and back top front decoration body 3421, back top rear rotation decoration body 3440 and back top rear decoration body 3451, back and back movable It is also conceivable that the light from the decorative body 3110) hinders the removal work. For this reason, after confirming the adhesion of the metal powder by opening the main body frame 4 of the other pachinko machine 1 and then opening the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 from which the metal powder is to be removed, the rear of the pachinko machine 1 Light-emitting decorative bodies (back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and back upper front decorative body 3421, back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440 and back upper rear decorative body 3451 that brighten the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 in FIG. The LED of the back movable decorative body 3110) may be turned off so that the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is not brightened. In addition, not only the light-emitting decorative body that brightens the light-emitting area L1, but also the LED light that may interfere with the work of removing the metal powder may be turned off. Thereby, it can prevent that the light from LED which made the back side of the pachinko machine 1 lighten obstructs the operation | work which removes metal powder.

  However, depending on the hall environment, the hall itself may be dark, and when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained such as removal of metal powder, it may be preferable that the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is bright. Therefore, in the state in which the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened, a light emitting decorative body (back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the backside front rotating decorative body 3410 that optionally brightens the light emitting region L1 in the vicinity of the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 You may make it provide the light emission start switch which enabled light emission of LED of back top front decoration body 3421, back top back rotation decoration body 3440, back top back decoration body 3451, back back movable decoration body 3110). Such a light emission start switch is provided at a position that can be operated only when the main body frame 4 is opened. Thereby, in a state where the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened, the hall manager can freely operate whether to start the light emission of the LED that brightens the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and matches the hall environment. be able to.

  The tank rail 553 is formed of a transparent material (polycarbonate resin or the like) so that the inside can be seen from the outside. As a result, even if a ball clog (ball clog) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so that the place where the ball is clogged can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's game can be enjoyed for the interruption of the game. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (the back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 through the tank rail 553 can be visually recognized from the rear. When a malfunction occurs in the movable effect unit or the like, the state of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gear, belt, etc. can be confirmed while the game board 5 is still attached to the main body frame 4. It is possible to achieve the same effects as the effects.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the contact portion with the first flange portion 551da so that the back cover 640 covers at least a part of the rear of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 in a state assembled to the main body frame 4. The metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa and adheres to the first flange portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a is removed from the top plate portion. When the metal powder falls from the first flange 551da of 551a, this metal powder is behind the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). Falling toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the base unit 1502, and from the first flange 551da of the top panel 551a. The metal powder of the game ball B is prevented from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the occurrence of electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510 is suppressed. It can be done.

  As described above, the top plate portion 551a and the back cover 640 of the payout base 551 are made of the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. Is prevented from falling toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as a bag or cover that can be used. Therefore, an electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 can be prevented.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since the first flange 551da is provided below the notch 553aa, not only when the back cover 640 is closed but also when the back cover 640 is opened, the main hook 551aa is interposed via the notch 553aa. The metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the guide portion 553a can be received and adhered to the first flange portion 551da, and the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa. When the metal powder falls toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and eventually the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guide portion 553a via the notch 553aa, the peripheral control unit The metal powder of the game ball B adheres to the peripheral control board 1510 while preventing entry into the 1500 cover body 1501. So that the generation of electrical trouble can be suppressed by.

  In the above-described example, the upper end portion of the back cover 640 is in contact with the rear surface of the first flange portion 551da when assembled to the main body frame 4, but the upper end portion of the back cover 640 and the first flange portion are in contact with each other. The portion 551da may be disposed apart from the portion 551da. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa through the cooperation of the back cover 640 and the first flange portion 551da enters the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. The arrangement form of the back cover 640 and the first brim portion 551da is not limited as long as the entry is suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of notches 553aa formed in the bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 and the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (on the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the attached effect display device 1600 is displaced in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1 (in this embodiment, about 2 minutes of the diameter of the game ball B). 1 (by shifting the distance dimension of 1) (that is, the peripheral control unit 1500 is not disposed directly below the notch 553aa), the game ball B from the tank rail 553 It is effective in measures against metal powder that can prevent electrical troubles caused by metal powder.

  The plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 are provided on the rear surface (cover flat plate described later) of the cover body 1501, whereas the upper side, the left side, and the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later) Since it is not provided on each cover side wall provided on the lower side and the right side, the metal powder of the game ball B adheres to the upper side wall of the cover body 1501 (the cover side wall formed on the upper side of the cover flat plate described later). However, it is possible to make it difficult to enter the cover body 1501.

  Of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e provided on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501, one or a combination of them except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side. A plurality of 1501az may be formed. For example, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501c provided on the left side, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501d provided on the lower side, or a cover side wall provided on the right side. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in 1501e, or a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed by combining a plurality of cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the cover flat plate 1510a, the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively. . Even if configured in this way, the foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B) falls toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation holes 1501az. Intrusion can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles due to foreign matter falling on the various substrates of the peripheral control board box 1505. Therefore, an electrical trouble due to a foreign matter falling from the tank rail 553 can be prevented. The reason why the ventilation hole 1501az is not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that if the ventilation hole 1501az is formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the peripheral control board box 1505 is passed through the ventilation hole 1501az. The foreign matter generated by the game ball B toward the inside (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) drops and enters, so that the electrical due to the fallen foreign matter on the various boards of the peripheral control board box 1505 This is because the probability of occurrence of trouble increases.

  Further, when the ventilation holes 1501 are not provided on the upper surface of the cover body 1501, the heat radiation function is compensated by increasing the number of ventilation holes 1501 provided on the other surface or increasing the area of the ventilation holes 1501. May be. Thereby, it can contribute to suppressing the temperature rise of the peripheral control board box 1505, and it can suppress that electrical troubles, such as thermal runaway, generate | occur | produce.

  Moreover, the upper surface of the cover body 1501 in the state attached to the pachinko machine 1 is in a substantially horizontal state. Therefore, when the metal powder of the game ball B falls from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch 553aa and adheres to the upper surface of the cover body 1501, the metal powder may be retained on the upper surface of the cover body 1501. it can. Thus, the metal powder of the game ball B can be prevented from entering the cover body 1501. Note that a part or all of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 may be inclined as long as the metal powder of the game ball B is not dropped toward the ventilation hole 1501az formed in the cover body 1501.

  Moreover, you may make it attach the 1st collar member 551a arrange | positioned under the tank rail 553 to the top-plate part 551a as another member (another structural component).

  Further, when the upper part and the rear part of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 are covered by the first flange part 551da of the top plate part 551a and / or the back cover 640, or in the bowl-shaped main guide part 553a of the tank rail 553. When the plurality of cutout portions 553aa and the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 are arranged so as to be shifted in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a are provided. If the probability that the metal powder of the game ball B that has dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is low is one of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 attached to the pachinko machine 1 Parts (for example, the corners of the cover body 1501 and most of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 May the ventilation holes 1501az provided at equal) the ventilating hole 1501az is formed.

  The technical idea is not limited to completely preventing the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa and entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. Compared to a conventional pachinko machine, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa is prevented from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. For example, a part of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 in a state of being attached to the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a corner portion of the cover body 1501 and most of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 are closed, but the ventilation holes 1501az are not provided. The one provided with the ventilation holes 1501az in the case of being formed corresponds to this technical idea.

  The cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 has a plurality of slit holes. Further, the cover body 1501 has seven connector holes at positions corresponding to the volume control switch and seven connectors described later provided on the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the inside of the cover body 1501 along the lower side. Volume adjustment holes are formed, and two connector holes are formed at positions corresponding to two connectors provided on a liquid crystal output substrate described later. In the state in which the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the inside of the cover body 1501, the gaps are formed by seven connectors provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501. The seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are exposed from the seven connector holes, and a gap is formed between the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment hole formed in the cover body 1501. The volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is exposed from the volume adjustment hole. In addition, in a state where a liquid crystal output board (to be described later) is attached to the inside of the cover body 1501, a gap is formed between two connectors provided in the liquid crystal output board and two connector holes formed in the cover body 1501. Two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board are exposed from these two connector holes.

  The cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 is a shield plate accommodated in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500. 1540 az is formed through a plurality of ventilation holes 1540 az, and the above-described gaps (the seven connectors provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501, the gaps formed, The volume control switch provided in the peripheral control board 1510, the volume control hole formed in the cover body 1501, the gap formed in the liquid crystal output board, and the two connectors formed in the cover body 1501. Through a hole and a gap formed in the hole)

  Incidentally, when the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 takes in air outside the peripheral control unit 1500, heavy powder called metal powder of the game ball B is affected by the air flow and moves toward the inner space of the cover body 1501. Various electronic components provided on various substrates such as the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 attached to the inside of the cover body 1501 due to an electrical trouble (short circuit) due to the sucked metal powder. A malfunction (failure) will occur.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, in order to prevent such an electrical trouble (short circuit), a first ball portion 551da is formed along the upper side of the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500, so that a game ball It can be configured to have a function as a bag for preventing heavy metal powder of B metal powder from being sucked into the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 from a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501. A detailed description of the configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 will be given later.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of notch portions 553aa are formed in the main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 so that metal powder generated due to wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guide portion 553a. However, the same cutout portion, hole, or groove as the cutout portion 553aa may be formed in the ball path on which the game ball B rolls. Specifically, in the ball guiding unit 570 having one guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, the metal powder of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a is extracted from the guide passage 570a. A notch, hole, or groove that can be removed to the outside can be formed on the rear surface of the guide unit base 571 of the guide unit 570. A payout device 580, a substrate unit 620, and the like are disposed below the ball guiding unit 570. The payout device 580 includes a substrate on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is mounted, and the substrate unit 620 includes the power supply substrate 630. , A payout control board 633, an interface board 635, etc., and various boards are arranged. Therefore, when a notch, hole, or groove is formed on the rear surface of the guidance unit base 571, a game ball that falls through the notch, hole, or groove formed on the rear surface of the guidance unit base 571. It is necessary to prevent the B metal powder from adhering to various substrates disposed below the induction unit 570. Accordingly, a hook-like member can be formed to protrude rearward along the upper side of the payout device rear cover 582 of the payout device 580, and a notch formed on the rear surface of the guide unit base 571. The positions of the holes or grooves and the positions of various substrates such as the substrate on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 in the dispensing device 580 is mounted can be shifted and configured by adopting both. You can also. Further, a hook-shaped member is formed to protrude rearward along the upper side of the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply board 630, the payout control board box 632 of the payout control board 633, the interface board cover 636 of the interface board 635, and the like. The positions of notches, holes, or grooves formed on the rear surface of the guidance unit base 571, and the positions of the power supply board cover 631, the payout control board box 632, and the interface board cover 636 can be configured. It can be configured by shifting, or both can be configured.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, a pachinko machine is illustrated as a gaming machine, but it can also be applied to other gaming machines such as a sparrow ball machine and an arrangement ball machine, and further, a plurality of drums ( The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine that rotates a rotating drum or a reel. Here, the slot machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 268 is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine.

  As shown in FIG. 268, the slot machine 6000 includes a front door (front frame) 6002 and a main body portion (box body) 6004. The front door (front frame) 6002 and the main body (box) 6004 are connected to each other via a hinge (not shown). With this hinge as the rotation center, the front door (front frame) 6002 is inserted into the main body by inserting a key into the key hole 6005 of the metal locking device provided at the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 and turning it clockwise. The portion (box) 6004 can be opened.

  The metal locking device is attached to a cylinder mounting frame of a metal door frame reinforcement unit (not shown) of the front door (front frame) 6002, and in cooperation with the locking unit (not shown) It is used for opening and closing locking with the front door (front frame) 6002. The metal locking device is attached to the rear side of the cylinder body, a metal cylindrical cylinder body (not shown) extending in the front-rear direction, a metal key hole 6005 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body. A rotation transmission member (not shown) that rotates together with a normal metal key that is inserted into the key hole 6005 and rotates. The cylinder body of the metal locking device has a rear end attached to the front piece portion through the front piece portion of the cylinder mounting frame of the door frame reinforcing unit from the rear. The rotation transmitting member is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear side (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear side), and from the rear end toward the front side at a position facing the central axis. It has a pair of notched parts. The rotation transmission member is formed such that when the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body portion (box body) 6004, a metal transmission cylinder of a metal locking unit (not shown) is inserted from the rear. Thus, by inserting the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder into the pair of notches, the rotation of the rotation transmission member (the key inserted into the key hole 6005) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder and rotated. When the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body portion (box) 6004 and the rotation transmission member of the metal locking device and the transmission cylinder of the locking unit are in contact with each other, the metal The locking device and the locking unit are electrically connected.

  The door frame reinforcing unit functions as a door frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the front door (front frame) 6002 to give rigidity, and via a door frame metal ground wire (not shown) (Box) 6004 is electrically connected to a grounding board provided in the interior. That is, the metal door frame reinforcement unit is a frame ground on the door frame side. This earth substrate (not shown) is capable of once collecting electromagnetic noise generated in various places and grounding (earthing) the island equipment of the game hall, and via the island equipment ground wire (not shown) It is electrically connected to the equipment ground.

  An opening switch (not shown) that can detect the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body portion (box body) 6004 is disposed on the main body portion (box body) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. Yes. This open switch detects the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body portion (box body) 6004 due to the input of an electrical signal by an opening / closing operation by a metal locking device. Instead, the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 is detected with respect to the main body portion (box body) 6004 independently of the opening / closing operation by the metal locking device. In addition, the release switch is not located in the vicinity of the metal locking device and is located below the metal locking device so that it is not affected by electromagnetic noise that has entered the metal locking device. An opening switch is arranged on the part (box body) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. In this way, even if electromagnetic wave noise enters the metal locking device, the signal transmission line from the open switch is not affected by the electromagnetic wave noise.

  The front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000 and includes various decoration portions. Some of these various decorative portions are not subjected to decorative plating at all, while others are subjected to decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces. This decorative plating is precious metal plating such as chrome plating or hard gold plating, and has conductivity, so electromagnetic wave noise may enter. Of the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit in the door frame base unit constituting the front door 6002 via wiring not shown. (There are some decorative parts that are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit through a wiring (not shown), and the conductive member is directly attached to the metal door frame reinforcement unit. Some are electrically connected). Thus, electromagnetic noise that has entered the various decorative portions is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcing unit, thereby preventing various decorative substrates provided in the various decorative portions from entering the substrate ground. In addition, electromagnetic noise that has entered the decorative parts of the various decorative parts that are decorated with plating on both the front and back surfaces is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via a wiring (not shown). Then, it is transmitted to the ground substrate provided inside the main body portion (box body) 6004, and is transmitted from the ground substrate to the ground of the island facility of the game hall via the island facility ground wire, and is removed from the slot machine 6000. That is, the metal door frame reinforcing unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side as described above.

  In addition, an electrostatic removal pad may be provided as a static eliminating portion at a predetermined position on the front surface of the front door (front frame) 6002, or when the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened from the main body portion (box body) 6004, You may provide an electrostatic removal pad as a static elimination part in the part which becomes the open | release side which is the opposite side to the side (closed side) where a hinge is arrange | positioned. The electrostatic removal pad is capable of removing noise (electromagnetic wave noise) generated by electrostatic discharge.

  Further, the front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000 and includes various decorative portions. Some of the various decorative portions are not subjected to decorative plating at all. Some of the decorative parts are decorated with plating on the entire front and back surfaces of the various decorative parts, and they are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring not shown. The ground substrate provided inside the main body (box) 6004 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facility of the game hall through the island facility ground wire. A metal door frame reinforcing unit, a power supply board, and a metal door frame reinforcement unit that are not electrically connected to the ground board and are electrically connected to terminals of a power supply board (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004 It may be electrically connected. The power supply board is supplied with 24V AC from the island facility in the game hall. The AC 24V has L (live) and N (neutral), and the L terminal of the power supply board to which L (live) is input is connected to the non-ground side, and N (neutral) is input. The N terminal of the power supply board is connected to the ground side. Therefore, a surge protection element (surge absorber) for transiently protecting from an excessive voltage is provided on the power supply board. Although this surge protection element (surge absorber) normally has a high resistance value and hardly flows current, when an excessive voltage (abnormal voltage) enters, the resistance value decreases instantaneously and current flows, and the excessive voltage disappears. In addition, it has a performance to return to the original normal resistance value (high resistance value). Thereby, electromagnetic wave noise transmitted from the metal door frame reinforcing unit is transmitted from the terminal of the power supply board to the ground side (earth) from the N terminal of the power supply board by the surge protection element (surge absorber) and removed from the slot machine 6000. .

  The upper half of the front door (front frame) 6002 is provided with a game panel 6006, and the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002 is formed with a protrusion protruding forward from the game panel 6006. In the protruding portion, a medal slot 6008, bet buttons 6010 and 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006. A storage and settlement button 6022 and a decorative plate 6024 are arranged in the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002, and a tray 6026 is provided below the decorative plate 6024. The bet buttons 6010 and 6012, the start lever 6014, the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, the storage settlement button 6022, and the like are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. Has been. The main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is fixed by being attached to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box body) 6004.

  The main control board box 1320 also accommodates a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 on which a setting key switch 1311a capable of changing the set value is mounted. That is, the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is fixed by being attached to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box body) 6004. 1311a is arranged inside the main body portion (box body) 6004. The setting change board 1311 may be fixed by being attached to a board holder (not shown) that is housed in a board box separate from the main control board box 1320 and provided inside the main body portion (box body) 6004. It may be fixed by being attached to a housing of a power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the portion (box) 6004. On the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311, in addition to the setting key switch 1311a, a setting switching button for selecting and switching a setting value, a 7-segment LED display unit with a decimal point (so-called dot) A setting indicator 1310g configured by the above-described setting change permission lamp 1310z and the like may be mounted.

  A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at a substantially central position of the game panel 6006. Three variable rotators (not shown) and an effect device (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000 through the display window are provided. You can see through. Three variable rotating bodies (not shown) are attached and fixed to a main body side mounting member (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box body) 6004. On the other hand, the rendering device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side attachment member (not shown) provided on the back side of the front door (front frame) 6002.

  On these variable rotators, translucent symbol bands on which a plurality of types of symbols (for example, bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) are printed as symbol information are affixed to the respective cylindrical frameworks. ing. Such a cylindrical variable rotating body is called a reel or a drum in a gaming machine such as a slot machine, and an output shaft of a stepping motor (not shown) and each variable rotating body are connected to each other. These stepping motors are driven and controlled by the main control board 1310, and by rotating the output shaft of the stepping motor, a plurality of types of symbols are continuously changed from top to bottom from the display window described above. It has become visible.

  The effect device includes a plurality of movable effect bodies (not shown), the effect display device 1600 described above, various decorative boards on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. Peripheral control unit 1500 is based on various commands from main control board 1310, such as operation control of a plurality of movable effects, drawing control of effect display device 1600, light emission control of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative boards, and the like. The progress of the production is controlled by performing various controls. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control board 1510 described above.

  The main control board 1310 inserts a predetermined number of medals as game media into the medal slot 6008, and starts to display symbol information variation based on the operation of the start lever 6014. The left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right The change display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the elapse of a predetermined time. The main control board 1310 generates a profit granting state (a big hit gaming state) on condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined display mode, and receives a large amount of medals as a gaming medium to the tray 6026.

  In the fusion game machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes the ball slot 6008 ′, and the main control board 1310 has a predetermined number of game balls as the game media thrown in the ball slot 6008 ′, and the start lever 6014 is operated. The symbol information variation display is started based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, or the variation display of the symbol information is stopped based on the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit granting state (big hit gaming state) on condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of game balls as gaming media to the tray 6026.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 3000 Back unit 3100 Back back direction production unit 3110 Back back movable decoration body 3111 Decoration body (decoration member, decoration board body)
3111a First decorative protrusion 3111d Metal decorative portion 3112 Decorative sheet (decorative member, decorative plate)
3113 Light guide radiation plate (decorative member, radiation plate)
3113a Body 3113b Flange (peripheral wall)
3113c 1st LED accommodating part 3113d 2nd LED accommodating part 3113e Reflecting part 3114 Back back decoration board (decoration board)
3114a First LED (LED, specific LED)
3114b Second LED (LED)
3114c Substrate body 3114d Copper foil 3114e Electronic component 3115 Decoration body base 3115a Cover plate 3115b Flange EL Creepage distance SL Predetermined distance

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that performs a variation display of a symbol based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and gives a profit to a player based on a result of the variation display of the symbol.
A game board on which a predetermined game area is formed;
A light-emitting unit that is provided on the game board and illuminates and decorates a predetermined decorative unit that is visible from the front side of the gaming machine;
A separate light emitting unit different from the light emitting unit;
A state detector for detecting the state of the gaming machine;
A light emission controller for controlling light emission mode and light emission mode of the another light emitting portion of the front Symbol emitting portion,
A light amount adjusting means capable of adjusting the light amount based on a predetermined light amount adjusting operation;
A translucent portion provided in a rear bulge portion that bulges behind the gaming machine,
The translucent part is provided so as to transmit light emitted from the light emitting part when the light emitting part emits light,
The light emitting unit is capable of changing the amount of light based on the light amount adjustment operation in a normal state, and in a period in which the state of the gaming machine is determined to be abnormal by the detection result of the state detecting unit, It is impossible to change the amount of light based on the light amount adjustment operation.
The separate light emitting unit cannot change the light amount based on the light amount adjustment operation regardless of whether or not the state of the gaming machine is determined to be an abnormal state based on the detection result of the state detecting unit,
The light emission control means changes the light emission mode of the light emitting unit when the state of the gaming machine is determined to be an abnormal state based on the detection result of the state detecting unit,
The gaming machine can determine whether the gaming machine is in a normal state or an abnormal state by transmitting light emitted from the light emitting part of the light emitting part and the separate light emitting part from the light transmitting part. A gaming machine characterized by being recognizable from the rear side .